[{"data":1,"prerenderedAt":34968},["ShallowReactive",2],{"author-guides-en":3,"author-posts-en":3679},[4,322,619,942,1985,2270,2448,2592,2983,3500],{"id":5,"title":6,"body":7,"category":301,"description":302,"extension":303,"guideId":304,"image":305,"locale":306,"meta":307,"navigation":308,"order":309,"path":310,"publishedAt":311,"readTime":312,"seo":313,"seoTitle":305,"slug":304,"stem":314,"tags":315,"updatedAt":320,"__hash__":321},"help\u002Fhelp\u002Fgetting-started.en.md","Getting started: from project to first export",{"type":8,"value":9,"toc":289},"minimark",[10,14,20,26,31,39,42,61,64,72,80,84,95,98,101,104,119,124,128,131,134,137,145,153,157,160,163,180,183,188,192,195,198,201,209,216,220,227,230,238,242,245,265,272,276,283],[11,12,13],"p",{},"PlanElec uses one project model for the floor plan, electrical topology, distribution board, and documents. A fixed order therefore works best: capture the spaces and devices first, review the electrical structure next, and export only after that.",[15,16,17],"blockquote",{},[11,18,19],{},"Using PlanElec as an owner or self-builder? Have all decisions and documents reviewed by a qualified electrician before installation and inspection.",[11,21,22],{},[23,24],"a",{"id":25},"project",[27,28,30],"h2",{"id":29},"_1-create-the-project","1. Create the project",[11,32,33,34,38],{},"Choose ",[35,36,37],"strong",{},"Create project"," in the project overview. You can start with the guided workflow, a localized project template, or an empty project.",[11,40,41],{},"Enter at least a recognizable project name. You can add these project details later:",[43,44,45,49,52,55,58],"ul",{},[46,47,48],"li",{},"customer and contact details;",[46,50,51],{},"installation address;",[46,53,54],{},"installer and optional logo;",[46,56,57],{},"EAN, installation type, and current type;",[46,59,60],{},"recognized inspection body and project notes.",[11,62,63],{},"PlanElec reuses these details in title blocks, the self-check report, and the working dossier. Missing details do not prevent you from trying the workflow or downloading drafts, but review them before sharing documents.",[11,65,66,69],{},[23,67],{"id":68},"floorplan",[23,70],{"id":71},"situation-plan",[73,74],"help-figure",{":height":75,":width":76,"alt":77,"caption":78,"src":79},"852","1440","Situation plan with the example floor plan and placed electrical devices.","The view shows the spatial plan; electrical assignments and cable routes still need a technical review.","\u002Fhelp\u002Fworkflows\u002Fen-situation-plan.png",[27,81,83],{"id":82},"_2-draw-the-floor-plan-and-build-the-situation-plan","2. Draw the floor plan and build the situation plan",[11,85,86,87,90,91,94],{},"Create a floor first. Then draw the exterior and interior walls with the polygon, rectangle, or line tool. Closed wall areas are detected as rooms; give each room a clear name, such as ",[35,88,89],{},"Kitchen"," or ",[35,92,93],{},"Bedroom 1",".",[11,96,97],{},"If you already have a plan image, use it as a reference. Calibrate it with a known measurement before placing things precisely. The image is an underlay: walls, openings, and electrical points remain separate project data.",[11,99,100],{},"Next, place doors, windows, stairs, and electrical symbols in their real locations. This floor plan becomes the basis for the situation plan PDF.",[11,102,103],{},"Practical check:",[105,106,107,110,113,116],"ol",{},[46,108,109],{},"Are all floors and rooms present and named?",[46,111,112],{},"Are sockets, switches, lighting points, and fixed appliances in the right room?",[46,114,115],{},"Is the distribution board positioned on the plan?",[46,117,118],{},"Are bathroom zones and special appliances recorded correctly where relevant?",[11,120,121],{},[23,122],{"id":123},"devices",[27,125,127],{"id":126},"_3-place-and-connect-electrical-devices","3. Place and connect electrical devices",[11,129,130],{},"Open the symbol palette and place the electrical points you need. Helpers can propose sockets, lighting, standard equipment, or a spotlight grid. Review and edit those proposals: they do not decide the required quantities or final positions for you.",[11,132,133],{},"Connect switches and lights in switch chains. PlanElec can propose a chain for unassigned switches and lights in the same room; you can still edit the sequence manually.",[11,135,136],{},"A floor-plan symbol and an electrical node belong together, but they are not the same object. Review the unconnected-components panel. Without valid topology, a device cannot reliably appear in a circuit, cable, or material list.",[11,138,139,140,144],{},"Read ",[23,141,143],{"href":142},"\u002Fen\u002Fhelp\u002Fautomatic-planning","Using automatic planning"," for details about proposals, cables, and circuits.",[11,146,147,150],{},[23,148],{"id":149},"automatic-planning",[23,151],{"id":152},"cabinet",[27,154,156],{"id":155},"_4-review-the-electrical-topology-and-distribution-board","4. Review the electrical topology and distribution board",[11,158,159],{},"Use automatic circuit assignment as a starting proposal. PlanElec groups standard devices, creates dedicated protection for special appliances where required, and can distribute loads across phases. Review the preview before applying the assignment.",[11,161,162],{},"Then open the distribution board editor. Auto-fill places existing main switches, RCDs, and circuit breakers on DIN rails while reserving spare capacity. Review:",[43,164,165,168,171,174,177],{},[46,166,167],{},"the protection chain and assigned devices;",[46,169,170],{},"cable type, cross-section, and route;",[46,172,173],{},"RCD groups and circuit counts;",[46,175,176],{},"phase allocation for a multiphase installation;",[46,178,179],{},"spare module positions and the actual board dimensions.",[11,181,182],{},"Every automatic result remains editable. A proposal is not an engineering decision or a material order.",[11,184,185],{},[23,186],{"id":187},"schema",[27,189,191],{"id":190},"_5-review-the-single-line-diagram-and-self-check","5. Review the single-line diagram and self-check",[11,193,194],{},"The single-line diagram is generated from the same electrical topology. Check circuit names, protection devices, cable data, connections, and symbols. Resolve the errors and warnings PlanElec can identify from the available project data.",[11,196,197],{},"The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check covers a documented subset of rules that software can evaluate from that data. A clean run only means that no error was found within those supported rules. Measurements, on-site conditions, and rules that are not modeled remain outside its scope.",[11,199,200],{},"PlanElec therefore does not issue a certificate of conformity and does not replace an official inspection by a recognized inspection body.",[11,202,203,206],{},[23,204],{"id":205},"export",[23,207],{"id":208},"exports",[73,210],{":height":211,":width":212,"alt":213,"caption":214,"src":215},"223","870","Export view with a single-line diagram document card, preview, draft and locked final-delivery states.","The card status describes the available working state; a locked final-delivery state is released only after export readiness is met.","\u002Fhelp\u002Fworkflows\u002Fen-document-selection.png",[27,217,219],{"id":218},"_6-export-and-review-the-documents","6. Export and review the documents",[11,221,222,223,226],{},"In ",[35,224,225],{},"Export",", you can generate the single-line diagram and situation plan as PDFs. The self-check report and circuit, cable, and material lists are also available centrally; the detailed lists are still part of the pilot workflow.",[11,228,229],{},"You can combine selected documents into a working dossier with a cover, document index, and continuous page numbering. Review every page and the project metadata before sharing it.",[11,231,232,233,237],{},"See ",[23,234,236],{"href":235},"\u002Fen\u002Fhelp\u002Fexport-documents","Exporting documents"," for the full list, statuses, and limitations.",[27,239,241],{"id":240},"a-useful-first-milestone","A useful first milestone",[11,243,244],{},"Your first project is well structured when:",[43,246,247,250,253,256,259,262],{},[46,248,249],{},"rooms and electrical points are shown on the situation plan;",[46,251,252],{},"all relevant points are linked to the electrical topology;",[46,254,255],{},"circuits, cables, and board layout have been reviewed;",[46,257,258],{},"the single-line diagram is readable;",[46,260,261],{},"the self-check has run and you understand the remaining findings;",[46,263,264],{},"exported documents have been checked visually and technically.",[11,266,267,268,94],{},"Ready to begin? ",[23,269,271],{"href":270},"\u002Fauth\u002Fregister","Create a free Early Access account",[27,273,275],{"id":274},"continue-planning-the-electrical-installation","Continue planning the electrical installation",[11,277,278,279,282],{},"You can also assign existing devices to circuits in ",[35,280,281],{},"Installation",", follow their protection paths and form distribution boards after a preview. Enclosures and module positions can remain open initially. The suggested sequence is guidance; existing projects and other valid starting points remain supported.",[11,284,285,94],{},[23,286,288],{"href":287},"\u002Fen\u002Fhelp\u002Fplan-installation-and-distribution-boards","Illustrated installation planning guide",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":292},"",2,[293,294,295,296,297,298,299,300],{"id":29,"depth":291,"text":30},{"id":82,"depth":291,"text":83},{"id":126,"depth":291,"text":127},{"id":155,"depth":291,"text":156},{"id":190,"depth":291,"text":191},{"id":218,"depth":291,"text":219},{"id":240,"depth":291,"text":241},{"id":274,"depth":291,"text":275},"getting_started","Build a PlanElec project step by step: project details, floor plan, rooms, electrical devices, distribution board, diagram, and export.","md","getting-started",null,"en",{},true,1,"\u002Fhelp\u002Fgetting-started.en","2026-07-20","8 min",{"title":6,"description":302},"help\u002Fgetting-started.en",[25,316,317,123,318,319,205],"floor plan","situation plan","distribution board","single-line diagram","2026-09-13","8moor_ukpXD4qf9lVbWHLczyVvHb763gqPTe6ToJ3yI",{"id":323,"title":324,"body":325,"category":606,"description":607,"extension":303,"guideId":149,"image":305,"locale":306,"meta":608,"navigation":308,"order":291,"path":609,"publishedAt":311,"readTime":610,"seo":611,"seoTitle":305,"slug":149,"stem":612,"tags":613,"updatedAt":320,"__hash__":618},"help\u002Fhelp\u002Fautomatic-planning.en.md","Using and reviewing automatic planning",{"type":8,"value":326,"toc":594},[327,330,336,340,347,354,358,361,364,381,384,389,392,395,400,404,407,410,417,420,434,437,442,446,449,469,472,477,481,484,487,493,497,501,504,507,521,524,531,535,538,576,579,584,586,590],[11,328,329],{},"PlanElec's automatic functions create editable proposals. They reduce repetitive work, but they cannot know which equipment will actually be installed, how a cable will run on site, or which product specifications your electrician will select.",[11,331,332,333,94],{},"Use the same pattern each time: ",[35,334,335],{},"create proposal → review preview → apply → check technically",[11,337,338],{},[23,339],{"id":149},[73,341],{":height":342,":width":343,"alt":344,"caption":345,"src":346},"594","720","Room actions sheet with suggestions for automatic planning.","The suggestions are an editable starting point and do not decide quantities or final positions.","\u002Fhelp\u002Fworkflows\u002Fen-room-automation.png",[11,348,349,352],{},[23,350],{"id":351},"consumers",[23,353],{"id":123},[27,355,357],{"id":356},"propose-devices-and-lighting-points","Propose devices and lighting points",[11,359,360],{},"The floor-plan editor includes helpers for automatic sockets, lighting, standard equipment, and spotlight grids. The proposals use the drawn rooms and geometry as their basis.",[11,362,363],{},"For a useful result:",[105,365,366,369,372,375,378],{},[46,367,368],{},"draw closed, correctly named rooms;",[46,370,371],{},"set the required count or pattern where applicable;",[46,373,374],{},"inspect the proposed positions;",[46,376,377],{},"move, add, or remove points to match the real design;",[46,379,380],{},"review special zones and fixed appliances separately.",[11,382,383],{},"PlanElec does not silently add every missing appliance. You remain responsible for the design brief and final placement.",[385,386,388],"h3",{"id":387},"build-switch-chains-automatically","Build switch chains automatically",[11,390,391],{},"PlanElec can propose a switch chain for unassigned switches and lighting points in the same room. It normally starts with the free switch closest to a door and then connects nearby free points.",[11,393,394],{},"Always verify which switch controls which light. Edit the sequence manually when the real control logic differs.",[11,396,397],{},[23,398],{"id":399},"cables",[27,401,403],{"id":402},"generate-cable-specifications-and-routes","Generate cable specifications and routes",[11,405,406],{},"Once the electrical topology exists, PlanElec can create a cable segment for each parent-to-child connection. A real connection or junction box splits the connection into separate segments. A box that is only nearby is not silently inserted into the electrical path.",[11,408,409],{},"Automatic routing searches for a short route along the drawn walls on each floor. If the start and end are not connected through the same wall component, the router uses a direct fallback.",[11,411,412,413,416],{},"In the situation plan, open ",[35,414,415],{},"Linking & cabling → Cable route"," in the top toolbar.",[11,418,419],{},"After routing:",[43,421,422,425,428,431],{},[46,423,424],{},"check whether the route matches the intended installation;",[46,426,427],{},"add or move waypoints where required;",[46,429,430],{},"review cable type, cross-section, and installation method;",[46,432,433],{},"enter a manual length when the calculated route does not represent reality closely enough.",[11,435,436],{},"The resulting length feeds the material list, voltage-drop calculation, and validation. It is a net length without an automatic waste or reserve factor.",[11,438,439],{},[23,440],{"id":441},"circuits",[27,443,445],{"id":444},"assign-devices-to-circuits-automatically","Assign devices to circuits automatically",[11,447,448],{},"Automatic circuit assignment creates a proposal from the recorded devices and product rules. It supports decisions such as:",[43,450,451,454,457,460,463,466],{},[46,452,453],{},"grouping standard lighting and socket points by room;",[46,455,456],{},"allowing no more than eight connection points on a standard circuit;",[46,458,459],{},"creating dedicated breakers for appliances including hobs, ovens, washing machines, tumble dryers, dishwashers, boilers, heat pumps, and saunas;",[46,461,462],{},"placing standard groups behind 30 mA RCDs;",[46,464,465],{},"assigning an EV charger a separate 30 mA RCD and three-phase breaker; with documented built-in 6 mA DC detection PlanElec proposes external Type A, otherwise Type B;",[46,467,468],{},"distributing assignments across boards in a multi-board project.",[11,470,471],{},"Review the preview before confirming it. Pay particular attention to mixed circuits, special appliances, existing manual assignments, and whether the defaults suit the actual project.",[11,473,474],{},[23,475],{"id":476},"phases",[27,478,480],{"id":479},"balance-loads-across-phases","Balance loads across phases",[11,482,483],{},"For a three-phase or delta supply, PlanElec can distribute loads across L1, L2, and L3. The phase overview shows the calculated load on each phase and warns about a clear imbalance.",[11,485,486],{},"This remains a model calculation based on the entered loads. Real simultaneity, measurements, and network conditions require assessment outside the software.",[73,488],{":height":489,":width":343,"alt":490,"caption":491,"src":492},"150","Cable-routing panel with automatic routing and manual waypoint tools.","The route is a planning aid; path, length and feasibility must be checked against the intended installation route.","\u002Fhelp\u002Fworkflows\u002Fen-cable-routing.png",[11,494,495],{},[23,496],{"id":152},[27,498,500],{"id":499},"fill-the-distribution-board-automatically","Fill the distribution board automatically",[11,502,503],{},"Auto-fill places existing main switches, RCDs, and MCBs in free DIN-rail slots. Its default sequence is main RCD, group RCDs, and then circuit breakers. By default, it reserves about twenty percent of the rail capacity.",[11,505,506],{},"The distinction from circuit assignment matters:",[43,508,509,515],{},[46,510,511,514],{},[35,512,513],{},"Circuit assignment"," creates and connects the electrical protection structure.",[46,516,517,520],{},[35,518,519],{},"Auto-fill"," arranges those existing modules physically in the board.",[11,522,523],{},"After auto-fill, review the board size, TE widths, spare capacity, protection chains, and connection paths. Explicit paths through connection boxes are preserved when the board is filled again.",[11,525,526,528],{},[23,527],{"id":187},[23,529],{"id":530},"review",[27,532,534],{"id":533},"final-review-of-an-automatic-proposal","Final review of an automatic proposal",[11,536,537],{},"After every automatic action, check:",[105,539,540,546,552,558,564,570],{},[46,541,542,545],{},[35,543,544],{},"Completeness:"," are all real devices, boxes, and boards modeled?",[46,547,548,551],{},[35,549,550],{},"Topology:"," is each parent-to-child connection correct, with nothing left unconnected?",[46,553,554,557],{},[35,555,556],{},"Protection:"," do the RCD, MCB, pole configuration, and cable suit the application?",[46,559,560,563],{},[35,561,562],{},"Space:"," are routes and positions practical on site?",[46,565,566,569],{},[35,567,568],{},"Phases:"," is the allocation plausible for the entered loads?",[46,571,572,575],{},[35,573,574],{},"Documents:"," do the situation plan and single-line diagram remain readable?",[11,577,578],{},"The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check helps with supported rules that can be evaluated from project data. It is not a declaration of conformity and does not replace an electrician's review or the official inspection.",[11,580,581,582,94],{},"Continue with ",[23,583,236],{"href":235},[27,585,275],{"id":274},[11,587,278,588,282],{},[35,589,281],{},[11,591,592,94],{},[23,593,288],{"href":287},{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":595},[596,600,601,602,603,604,605],{"id":356,"depth":291,"text":357,"children":597},[598],{"id":387,"depth":599,"text":388},3,{"id":402,"depth":291,"text":403},{"id":444,"depth":291,"text":445},{"id":479,"depth":291,"text":480},{"id":499,"depth":291,"text":500},{"id":533,"depth":291,"text":534},{"id":274,"depth":291,"text":275},"automation","Use PlanElec proposals for devices, switch chains, cable routes, circuits, phases, and the distribution board without skipping technical review.",{},"\u002Fhelp\u002Fautomatic-planning.en","9 min",{"title":324,"description":607},"help\u002Fautomatic-planning.en",[614,123,615,441,616,318,617],"automatic planning","cable routing","phase balancing","DIN rail","GCOfFd1qB5Z6XLJEoLNo1eJCiQdL4VO-xBMwZMjw0rk",{"id":620,"title":621,"body":622,"category":208,"description":928,"extension":303,"guideId":929,"image":305,"locale":306,"meta":930,"navigation":308,"order":599,"path":931,"publishedAt":311,"readTime":312,"seo":932,"seoTitle":305,"slug":933,"stem":934,"tags":935,"updatedAt":940,"__hash__":941},"help\u002Fhelp\u002Fdocument-exports.en.md","Exporting documents and assembling a working dossier",{"type":8,"value":623,"toc":917},[624,627,631,633,637,725,732,735,738,741,758,762,765,768,771,776,779,782,785,799,802,805,825,828,835,838,846,851,855,858,861,866,870,873,896,899,903,906],[11,625,626],{},"The export workspace brings together documents from the same project model. You can download documents separately or combine selected parts into one working dossier.",[11,628,629],{},[23,630],{"id":208},[73,632],{":height":211,":width":212,"alt":213,"caption":214,"src":215},[27,634,636],{"id":635},"status-at-a-glance","Status at a glance",[638,639,640,656],"table",{},[641,642,643],"thead",{},[644,645,646,650,653],"tr",{},[647,648,649],"th",{},"Document",[647,651,652],{},"Current status",[647,654,655],{},"What to know",[657,658,659,671,681,692,703,714],"tbody",{},[644,660,661,665,668],{},[662,663,664],"td",{},"Single-line diagram PDF",[662,666,667],{},"Available",[662,669,670],{},"Can span several pages; review scale, symbols, and title block.",[644,672,673,676,678],{},[662,674,675],{},"Situation plan PDF",[662,677,667],{},[662,679,680],{},"Based on the drawn floor plan and placed symbols.",[644,682,683,686,689],{},[662,684,685],{},"AREI\u002FRGIE self-check report",[662,687,688],{},"Available, advisory",[662,690,691],{},"Not a certificate of conformity or a replacement for the official inspection.",[644,693,694,697,700],{},[662,695,696],{},"Circuit, cable, and material lists",[662,698,699],{},"Pilot workflow",[662,701,702],{},"Model-based, manufacturer-neutral lists; not approved for ordering.",[644,704,705,708,711],{},[662,706,707],{},"Distribution board PDF",[662,709,710],{},"Feature flag",[662,712,713],{},"Shown only when enabled and board data is present.",[644,715,716,719,722],{},[662,717,718],{},"Combined installation dossier",[662,720,721],{},"Pilot\u002Fworking state",[662,723,724],{},"Selected documents with cover, index, and continuous page numbering; versioned server archiving is available once export readiness is met. The archive confirms origin and file integrity, not electrical acceptance.",[11,726,727,729],{},[23,728],{"id":187},[23,730],{"id":731},"single-line",[27,733,664],{"id":734},"single-line-diagram-pdf",[11,736,737],{},"The single-line diagram uses the electrical topology, protection devices, circuits, cable data, and consumers. Larger installations are divided across several pages.",[11,739,740],{},"Before downloading, check:",[43,742,743,746,749,752,755],{},[46,744,745],{},"that every consumer path reaches the correct breaker and RCD;",[46,747,748],{},"that cable type, cross-section, and labels are present;",[46,750,751],{},"that spare modules do not appear as active circuits;",[46,753,754],{},"that the project and installer details in the title block are correct;",[46,756,757],{},"that no content is clipped at a page edge.",[11,759,760],{},[23,761],{"id":71},[27,763,675],{"id":764},"situation-plan-pdf",[11,766,767],{},"The situation plan shows the drawn rooms, openings, and electrical symbols in their locations. Review every floor separately and check for overlapping labels, missing devices, and legibility at the selected A4 or A3 format.",[11,769,770],{},"The situation plan and single-line diagram share project notes and other title-block details. Correct those details in the project instead of editing an individual PDF.",[11,772,773],{},[23,774],{"id":775},"self-check",[27,777,685],{"id":778},"areirgie-self-check-report",[11,780,781],{},"The report summarizes findings that PlanElec can evaluate from the entered data and supported rules. It also states when a check has not started, is incomplete, or falls outside the current coverage.",[11,783,784],{},"A report with no detected error does not mean the installation complies with AREI\u002FRGIE. Measurements, evidence, on-site conditions, and rules that are not modeled remain outside a software check. Only a recognized inspection body performs the official inspection.",[11,786,787,790,793,796],{},[23,788],{"id":789},"lists",[23,791],{"id":792},"circuit-list",[23,794],{"id":795},"cable-list",[23,797],{"id":798},"material-list",[27,800,696],{"id":801},"circuit-cable-and-material-lists",[11,803,804],{},"These lists are available in the central pilot workflow:",[43,806,807,813,819],{},[46,808,809,812],{},[35,810,811],{},"Circuit list:"," overview of modeled circuits and protection devices.",[46,814,815,818],{},[35,816,817],{},"Cable list:"," cable segments with specifications and calculated or manual length.",[46,820,821,824],{},[35,822,823],{},"Material list:"," manufacturer-neutral quantities for wiring accessories, connections, protection, board, accessories, and net cable lengths.",[11,826,827],{},"The material list can be viewed by category or room and exposes its default assumptions. It includes no prices or specific manufacturer products. Net cable lengths have no automatic waste or reserve factor. Use it as a review and quotation starting point, not as a purchase order.",[11,829,830,832],{},[23,831],{"id":152},[23,833],{"id":834},"cabinet-pdf",[27,836,707],{"id":837},"distribution-board-pdf",[11,839,840,841,845],{},"The PDF view of the distribution board is only available when the ",[842,843,844],"code",{},"cabinet_export"," feature flag is active and the project contains board data. If the option is absent, that is not an export error: the feature has not been enabled for that environment.",[11,847,848],{},[23,849],{"id":850},"dossier",[27,852,854],{"id":853},"assemble-an-installation-dossier","Assemble an installation dossier",[11,856,857],{},"Select the required documents in the dossier builder. PlanElec creates a cover, document index, and continuous page numbering locally, then merges the selected PDFs in a fixed order.",[11,859,860],{},"The draft remains a working and review document. Once export readiness is satisfied, PlanElec can archive an immutable, versioned document on the server. Archiving confirms origin and file integrity; it is not an electrical inspection, a certificate of conformity or an electronic signature. Later project changes do not change an archived document. Check the saved project state again before creating a new export.",[11,862,863],{},[23,864],{"id":865},"metadata",[27,867,869],{"id":868},"review-project-metadata","Review project metadata",[11,871,872],{},"Open the project details from the export area and check at least:",[105,874,875,878,881,884,887,890,893],{},[46,876,877],{},"customer and installation address;",[46,879,880],{},"installer and contact details;",[46,882,883],{},"inspection body;",[46,885,886],{},"Belgian EAN;",[46,888,889],{},"residential or non-residential installation and AC\u002FDC designation;",[46,891,892],{},"plan format, revision, and project notes;",[46,894,895],{},"logo, if used.",[11,897,898],{},"An invalid EAN is not rendered as a valid number, but Early Access does not automatically block the download.",[27,900,902],{"id":901},"final-check-before-sharing","Final check before sharing",[11,904,905],{},"Open the downloaded file outside PlanElec and review every page. Check page order, legibility, metadata, warnings, and missing parts. Keep the project version used to create the document and have the result reviewed by the responsible electrician.",[11,907,908,909,913,914,94],{},"Need to review the project model first? Start with ",[23,910,912],{"href":911},"\u002Fen\u002Fhelp\u002Fgetting-started","Getting started"," or learn how to ",[23,915,916],{"href":142},"review automatic planning",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":918},[919,920,921,922,923,924,925,926,927],{"id":635,"depth":291,"text":636},{"id":734,"depth":291,"text":664},{"id":764,"depth":291,"text":675},{"id":778,"depth":291,"text":685},{"id":801,"depth":291,"text":696},{"id":837,"depth":291,"text":707},{"id":853,"depth":291,"text":854},{"id":868,"depth":291,"text":869},{"id":901,"depth":291,"text":902},"See which PDFs PlanElec creates, which outputs are available or in pilot, and what to review before sharing or inspection.","document-exports",{},"\u002Fhelp\u002Fdocument-exports.en",{"title":621,"description":928},"export-documents","help\u002Fdocument-exports.en",[936,319,317,775,441,937,938,939],"PDF export","cable list","material list","installation dossier","2026-09-14","l0VV-LMz2hApTXDaygvmZUFwiLr_-7EvpTYD1AQizH4",{"id":943,"title":944,"body":945,"category":1967,"description":1968,"extension":303,"guideId":1969,"image":305,"locale":306,"meta":1970,"navigation":308,"order":1971,"path":1972,"publishedAt":1973,"readTime":1974,"seo":1975,"seoTitle":305,"slug":1976,"stem":1977,"tags":1978,"updatedAt":940,"__hash__":1984},"help\u002Fhelp\u002Fself-check-coverage.en.md","What does PlanElec's AREI self-check verify?",{"type":8,"value":946,"toc":1951},[947,950,953,960,965,972,976,991,994,998,1211,1215,1269,1273,1341,1345,1411,1415,1495,1499,1539,1543,1596,1600,1858,1862,1865,1868,1871,1874,1877,1880,1884,1887,1893,1899,1905,1911,1915,1918,1941,1945,1948],[11,948,949],{},"PlanElec contains two things that are easily confused.",[11,951,952],{},"AREI\u002FRGIE references are linked publicly only after the documented source and subject-matter approvals. Practice rules and plausibility checks make no claim to quote the regulations.",[11,954,955,956,959],{},"The ",[35,957,958],{},"automatic self-check"," covers only part of it. This page states exactly which part. We list the rules that are checked and, just as plainly, the areas where the application makes no statement — because an incomplete check presenting itself as complete is more dangerous than no check at all.",[15,961,962],{},[11,963,964],{},"The self-check is preparation. Only an accredited inspection body issues the official assessment.",[73,966],{":height":967,":width":968,"alt":969,"caption":970,"src":971},"485","384","AREI self-check popover with an incomplete finding and open points.","The report shows supported checks and open points as preparation; a missing project value is never treated as passed.","\u002Fhelp\u002Fworkflows\u002Fen-self-check.png",[27,973,975],{"id":974},"what-is-checked-automatically","What is checked automatically",[11,977,978,979,982,983,986,987,990],{},"The application currently holds ",[35,980,981],{},"56 checks",". Of these, ",[35,984,985],{},"29"," point to a specific AREI article; the remaining ",[35,988,989],{},"27"," are practice rules or plausibility checks, marked as such, carrying no regulatory obligation.",[11,992,993],{},"A check only produces a result once the required project data has been entered. Where data is missing, the report marks the check as incomplete — never as passed.",[385,995,997],{"id":996},"protection","Protection",[638,999,1000,1016],{},[641,1001,1002],{},[644,1003,1004,1007,1010,1013],{},[647,1005,1006],{},"Check",[647,1008,1009],{},"What is verified",[647,1011,1012],{},"Basis",[647,1014,1015],{},"Severity",[657,1017,1018,1032,1045,1058,1071,1084,1096,1110,1123,1136,1148,1160,1173,1185,1198],{},[644,1019,1020,1023,1026,1029],{},[662,1021,1022],{},"Main RCD",[662,1024,1025],{},"A residual current device of at most 300 mA must be present at the head of the installation.",[662,1027,1028],{},"AREI 4.2.4.3",[662,1030,1031],{},"Error",[644,1033,1034,1037,1040,1043],{},[662,1035,1036],{},"Max. circuits per high-sensitivity RCD",[662,1038,1039],{},"At most 8 final circuits per high-sensitivity residual current device (≤ 30 mA).",[662,1041,1042],{},"AREI 4.2.4.3.b",[662,1044,1031],{},[644,1046,1047,1050,1053,1056],{},[662,1048,1049],{},"Shutter actuator ratings",[662,1051,1052],{},"DIN-rail shutter actuators require an upstream MCB or RCBO; protective-device and motor loads stay within the catalogued input and channel ratings.",[662,1054,1055],{},"Practice rule",[662,1057,1031],{},[644,1059,1060,1063,1066,1069],{},[662,1061,1062],{},"Charging-point protection (EV charging)",[662,1064,1065],{},"A charging point requires its own circuit, a dedicated residual current device and at least IP44 outdoors.",[662,1067,1068],{},"AREI 7.22.4",[662,1070,1031],{},[644,1072,1073,1076,1079,1081],{},[662,1074,1075],{},"RCD selectivity (practice recommendation)",[662,1077,1078],{},"Practice recommendation: grade sensitivity and time between upstream and downstream RCDs (IEC 60364-5-53).",[662,1080,1055],{},[662,1082,1083],{},"Warning",[644,1085,1086,1089,1092,1094],{},[662,1087,1088],{},"30 mA RCD for socket circuits",[662,1090,1091],{},"All socket circuits must be protected by a 30 mA residual current device.",[662,1093,1042],{},[662,1095,1031],{},[644,1097,1098,1101,1104,1107],{},[662,1099,1100],{},"Surge protection (SPD)",[662,1102,1103],{},"The presence of a surge protective device (SPD) is assessed; the AREI imposes no general obligation.",[662,1105,1106],{},"AREI 4.5.1",[662,1108,1109],{},"Information",[644,1111,1112,1115,1118,1121],{},[662,1113,1114],{},"Main switch min. 40 A",[662,1116,1117],{},"A main switch must be present and rated at least 40 A in domestic installations.",[662,1119,1120],{},"AREI 5.3.5.1.b",[662,1122,1031],{},[644,1124,1125,1128,1131,1134],{},[662,1126,1127],{},"Main RCD min. 40 A",[662,1129,1130],{},"The residual current device at the supply point must be rated at least 40 A.",[662,1132,1133],{},"AREI 5.3.5.3.a",[662,1135,1031],{},[644,1137,1138,1141,1144,1146],{},[662,1139,1140],{},"Distribution-board layout",[662,1142,1143],{},"Board: occupancy within the module count, one residual current device per row and roughly 20 % spare capacity.",[662,1145,1055],{},[662,1147,1083],{},[644,1149,1150,1153,1156,1158],{},[662,1151,1152],{},"Embedded wall heating: 100 mA RCD",[662,1154,1155],{},"Heating elements embedded in walls above 25 V AC require a separate 100 mA residual current device.",[662,1157,1042],{},[662,1159,1031],{},[644,1161,1162,1165,1168,1171],{},[662,1163,1164],{},"Pole configuration in residential installations",[662,1166,1167],{},"Single-pole breakers are not permitted in Belgian dwellings with a star configuration; use 1P+N.",[662,1169,1170],{},"AREI 4.4.4.2",[662,1172,1083],{},[644,1174,1175,1178,1181,1183],{},[662,1176,1177],{},"Trip characteristic versus load type",[662,1179,1180],{},"Practice recommendation: the breaker curve B, C or D must match the load type.",[662,1182,1055],{},[662,1184,1083],{},[644,1186,1187,1190,1193,1196],{},[662,1188,1189],{},"Feeder back-up protection between distribution boards",[662,1191,1192],{},"A feeder to a sub-board requires its own protective device in the supplying board and a consistent link.",[662,1194,1195],{},"AREI 4.4.1.4",[662,1197,1031],{},[644,1199,1200,1203,1206,1209],{},[662,1201,1202],{},"Breaking capacity versus prospective short-circuit current",[662,1204,1205],{},"The breaking capacity of each breaker must withstand the prospective short-circuit current; checked only when the value is recorded.",[662,1207,1208],{},"AREI 5.3.5.5",[662,1210,1031],{},[385,1212,1214],{"id":1213},"earthing","Earthing",[638,1216,1217,1229],{},[641,1218,1219],{},[644,1220,1221,1223,1225,1227],{},[647,1222,1006],{},[647,1224,1009],{},[647,1226,1012],{},[647,1228,1015],{},[657,1230,1231,1244,1257],{},[644,1232,1233,1236,1239,1242],{},[662,1234,1235],{},"Main equipotential bonding",[662,1237,1238],{},"A main equipotential bonding rail must be present.",[662,1240,1241],{},"AREI 4.2.3.2",[662,1243,1031],{},[644,1245,1246,1249,1252,1255],{},[662,1247,1248],{},"Earth electrode (ring earth\u002Fearth rod)",[662,1250,1251],{},"For a TT or IT system, an earth electrode must be documented.",[662,1253,1254],{},"AREI 4.2.3",[662,1256,1031],{},[644,1258,1259,1262,1265,1267],{},[662,1260,1261],{},"Earthing and supply plausibility",[662,1263,1264],{},"Plausibility check: a public domestic 3×230 V connection recorded as a TN system requires review.",[662,1266,1055],{},[662,1268,1083],{},[385,1270,1272],{"id":1271},"cables-and-sizing","Cables and sizing",[638,1274,1275,1287],{},[641,1276,1277],{},[644,1278,1279,1281,1283,1285],{},[647,1280,1006],{},[647,1282,1009],{},[647,1284,1012],{},[647,1286,1015],{},[657,1288,1289,1302,1315,1328],{},[644,1290,1291,1294,1297,1300],{},[662,1292,1293],{},"Cable cross-section",[662,1295,1296],{},"The cable cross-section must match the rating of the protective device.",[662,1298,1299],{},"AREI 5.2.2",[662,1301,1031],{},[644,1303,1304,1307,1310,1313],{},[662,1305,1306],{},"Voltage drop (ΔU)",[662,1308,1309],{},"Voltage drop computed from cable length: guide value 3 % for lighting and 5 % for other final circuits.",[662,1311,1312],{},"AREI 5.2.5",[662,1314,1031],{},[644,1316,1317,1320,1323,1326],{},[662,1318,1319],{},"CPR cable fire-performance class",[662,1321,1322],{},"Individually laid cables must have the F1 property or reach at least CPR class Eca; class Fca is not permitted.",[662,1324,1325],{},"AREI 5.2.7.2",[662,1327,1031],{},[644,1329,1330,1333,1336,1339],{},[662,1331,1332],{},"Cables in hollow walls: Cca\u002FPreflex",[662,1334,1335],{},"Cables in building cavities run in conduit (Preflex) or reach at least CPR class Cca.",[662,1337,1338],{},"AREI 4.3.3.5.b",[662,1340,1031],{},[385,1342,1344],{"id":1343},"circuit-loading","Circuit loading",[638,1346,1347,1359],{},[641,1348,1349],{},[644,1350,1351,1353,1355,1357],{},[647,1352,1006],{},[647,1354,1009],{},[647,1356,1012],{},[647,1358,1015],{},[657,1360,1361,1374,1386,1399],{},[644,1362,1363,1366,1369,1372],{},[662,1364,1365],{},"Automation: channel load",[662,1367,1368],{},"Compares current calculated from documented load powers with the entered channel rating. Missing power or rating is a data gap. Does not check inrush current, power factor or internal protection. (AREI 4.4.1.1)",[662,1370,1371],{},"AREI 4.4.1.1",[662,1373,1031],{},[644,1375,1376,1379,1382,1384],{},[662,1377,1378],{},"Automation: known bus current",[662,1380,1381],{},"Compares known device and catalog currents with the planned bus capacity. Planning warning based on the profile catalog, no numerical AREI limit; safety objective AREI 4.4.1.1.",[662,1383,1055],{},[662,1385,1083],{},[644,1387,1388,1391,1394,1397],{},[662,1389,1390],{},"Max. contact points per final circuit",[662,1392,1393],{},"At most 8 sockets and fixed appliances per final circuit; lighting-only points are not counted.",[662,1395,1396],{},"AREI 5.3.5.2b",[662,1398,1031],{},[644,1400,1401,1404,1407,1409],{},[662,1402,1403],{},"Phase imbalance",[662,1405,1406],{},"Practice recommendation: imbalance between phases should stay below 30 %.",[662,1408,1055],{},[662,1410,1083],{},[385,1412,1414],{"id":1413},"rooms-and-zones","Rooms and zones",[638,1416,1417,1429],{},[641,1418,1419],{},[644,1420,1421,1423,1425,1427],{},[647,1422,1006],{},[647,1424,1009],{},[647,1426,1012],{},[647,1428,1015],{},[657,1430,1431,1444,1457,1470,1483],{},[644,1432,1433,1436,1439,1442],{},[662,1434,1435],{},"30 mA protection for wet rooms",[662,1437,1438],{},"Sockets in damp rooms must be protected by a 30 mA residual current device.",[662,1440,1441],{},"AREI 4.2.4.4",[662,1443,1031],{},[644,1445,1446,1449,1452,1455],{},[662,1447,1448],{},"30 mA RCD for bathroom circuits",[662,1450,1451],{},"All circuits in bathrooms and damp rooms must be protected by a 30 mA residual current device.",[662,1453,1454],{},"AREI 7.1.4.3",[662,1456,1031],{},[644,1458,1459,1462,1465,1468],{},[662,1460,1461],{},"Bathroom zones 0\u002F1\u002F2: permitted equipment",[662,1463,1464],{},"In bathroom volumes 0, 1 and 2 only certain equipment is permitted; distribution boards are prohibited there.",[662,1466,1467],{},"AREI 7.1.5.2",[662,1469,1031],{},[644,1471,1472,1475,1478,1481],{},[662,1473,1474],{},"Pool zones 0\u002F1\u002F2: equipment within the inspection zones",[662,1476,1477],{},"Equipment located in swimming-pool zones 0, 1 and 2 is reported as an inspection notice; the requirements of AREI 7.2.3 ff. must be checked by a professional.",[662,1479,1480],{},"AREI 7.2.2",[662,1482,1109],{},[644,1484,1485,1488,1491,1493],{},[662,1486,1487],{},"Smoke-detector coverage (recommendation)",[662,1489,1490],{},"Non-binding advice based on regional housing rules; the AREI itself does not mandate smoke detectors in dwellings.",[662,1492,1055],{},[662,1494,1083],{},[385,1496,1498],{"id":1497},"topology-and-control","Topology and control",[638,1500,1501,1513],{},[641,1502,1503],{},[644,1504,1505,1507,1509,1511],{},[647,1506,1006],{},[647,1508,1009],{},[647,1510,1012],{},[647,1512,1015],{},[657,1514,1515,1527],{},[644,1516,1517,1520,1523,1525],{},[662,1518,1519],{},"Electric shutter control paths",[662,1521,1522],{},"Plausibility check: direct switches, actuator inputs, central controls and drive types together form a consistent control path.",[662,1524,1055],{},[662,1526,1031],{},[644,1528,1529,1532,1535,1537],{},[662,1530,1531],{},"Project integrity",[662,1533,1534],{},"References between diagram, situation plan and distribution board must point to existing objects.",[662,1536,1055],{},[662,1538,1031],{},[385,1540,1542],{"id":1541},"photovoltaic-installation","Photovoltaic installation",[638,1544,1545,1557],{},[641,1546,1547],{},[644,1548,1549,1551,1553,1555],{},[647,1550,1006],{},[647,1552,1009],{},[647,1554,1012],{},[647,1556,1015],{},[657,1558,1559,1572,1584],{},[644,1560,1561,1564,1567,1570],{},[662,1562,1563],{},"PV installation compliance",[662,1565,1566],{},"PV installation: anti-islanding, earthing of module frames, warning signs and identification of DC and AC conductors.",[662,1568,1569],{},"AREI 7.112.2",[662,1571,1031],{},[644,1573,1574,1577,1580,1582],{},[662,1575,1576],{},"PV string design",[662,1578,1579],{},"Checks strings against the documented manufacturer limits of the inverter and modules.",[662,1581,1055],{},[662,1583,1031],{},[644,1585,1586,1589,1592,1594],{},[662,1587,1588],{},"Combined current in distribution boards with multiple sources",[662,1590,1591],{},"In a board with local generation, grid and source currents add up per phase on jointly loaded sections.",[662,1593,1055],{},[662,1595,1031],{},[385,1597,1599],{"id":1598},"completeness-of-the-file","Completeness of the file",[638,1601,1602,1614],{},[641,1603,1604],{},[644,1605,1606,1608,1610,1612],{},[647,1607,1006],{},[647,1609,1009],{},[647,1611,1012],{},[647,1613,1015],{},[657,1615,1616,1629,1641,1652,1663,1674,1686,1698,1710,1722,1734,1746,1759,1771,1784,1797,1809,1822,1834,1846],{},[644,1617,1618,1621,1624,1627],{},[662,1619,1620],{},"Automation: controls in the diagram",[662,1622,1623],{},"For domestic installations, checks whether existing control points appear in the actual diagram input. Missing assignments can be completed in the channel matrix or through the module supply path. Not a complete symbol or extra-low-voltage check. (AREI 3.1.2.1.a)",[662,1625,1626],{},"AREI 3.1.2.1",[662,1628,1031],{},[644,1630,1631,1634,1637,1639],{},[662,1632,1633],{},"Automation supply protection",[662,1635,1636],{},"Planning check: supply protection, bus supply and unique, complete channel assignments must be documented. A finding blocks final export; this is no additional AREI requirement.",[662,1638,1055],{},[662,1640,1031],{},[644,1642,1643,1646,1648,1650],{},[662,1644,1645],{},"Unique load assignment",[662,1647,1636],{},[662,1649,1055],{},[662,1651,1031],{},[644,1653,1654,1657,1659,1661],{},[662,1655,1656],{},"Bus supply",[662,1658,1636],{},[662,1660,1055],{},[662,1662,1031],{},[644,1664,1665,1668,1670,1672],{},[662,1666,1667],{},"Actuator configuration",[662,1669,1636],{},[662,1671,1055],{},[662,1673,1031],{},[644,1675,1676,1679,1682,1684],{},[662,1677,1678],{},"Devices per line",[662,1680,1681],{},"Planning warning based on the profile catalog: Devices per line. Limits and assignments come from the profile catalog, not from AREI.",[662,1683,1055],{},[662,1685,1083],{},[644,1687,1688,1691,1694,1696],{},[662,1689,1690],{},"Lines per system",[662,1692,1693],{},"Planning warning based on the profile catalog: Lines per system. Limits and assignments come from the profile catalog, not from AREI.",[662,1695,1055],{},[662,1697,1083],{},[644,1699,1700,1703,1706,1708],{},[662,1701,1702],{},"Profile channel load",[662,1704,1705],{},"Planning warning based on the profile catalog: Profile channel load. Limits and assignments come from the profile catalog, not from AREI.",[662,1707,1055],{},[662,1709,1083],{},[644,1711,1712,1715,1718,1720],{},[662,1713,1714],{},"Channel kind and load",[662,1716,1717],{},"Planning warning based on the profile catalog: Channel kind and load. Limits and assignments come from the profile catalog, not from AREI.",[662,1719,1055],{},[662,1721,1083],{},[644,1723,1724,1727,1730,1732],{},[662,1725,1726],{},"Line assignment",[662,1728,1729],{},"Planning warning based on the profile catalog: Line assignment. Limits and assignments come from the profile catalog, not from AREI.",[662,1731,1055],{},[662,1733,1083],{},[644,1735,1736,1739,1742,1744],{},[662,1737,1738],{},"Line coupler",[662,1740,1741],{},"Planning warning based on the profile catalog: Line coupler. Limits and assignments come from the profile catalog, not from AREI.",[662,1743,1055],{},[662,1745,1083],{},[644,1747,1748,1751,1754,1757],{},[662,1749,1750],{},"Voltage classes per bus line",[662,1752,1753],{},"Checks SELV together with FELV or LV on the same bus line (AREI 4.2.5.5.c). Warns about a logical contradiction; does not establish physical connections or source quality.",[662,1755,1756],{},"AREI 4.2.5.5.c",[662,1758,1083],{},[644,1760,1761,1764,1767,1769],{},[662,1762,1763],{},"Complete connections",[662,1765,1766],{},"Every element in the diagram must be connected; orphan nodes indicate an incomplete model.",[662,1768,1055],{},[662,1770,1083],{},[644,1772,1773,1776,1779,1782],{},[662,1774,1775],{},"Minimum number of lighting circuits",[662,1777,1778],{},"Practice recommendation: at least two lighting circuits per dwelling unit.",[662,1780,1781],{},"AREI 5.3.5.2.b",[662,1783,1031],{},[644,1785,1786,1789,1792,1795],{},[662,1787,1788],{},"Dedicated circuits for large appliances",[662,1790,1791],{},"Large appliances such as washing machine, dryer, dishwasher, hob and oven each require a dedicated circuit.",[662,1793,1794],{},"AREI 4.3.3.3",[662,1796,1031],{},[644,1798,1799,1802,1805,1807],{},[662,1800,1801],{},"Installation dossier (AREI 9.1.2)",[662,1803,1804],{},"The installation file requires a single-line diagram, a situation plan and a complete title block; PV needs additional documents.",[662,1806,1055],{},[662,1808,1083],{},[644,1810,1811,1814,1817,1820],{},[662,1812,1813],{},"Placement of connection\u002Fjunction boxes",[662,1815,1816],{},"Structural junction boxes must appear exactly once and consistently in the diagram.",[662,1818,1819],{},"AREI 3.1.2.3",[662,1821,1083],{},[644,1823,1824,1827,1830,1832],{},[662,1825,1826],{},"Consumers placed on the situation plan",[662,1828,1829],{},"Consumers from the single-line diagram must be placed on the situation plan through their link.",[662,1831,1055],{},[662,1833,1083],{},[644,1835,1836,1839,1842,1844],{},[662,1837,1838],{},"Unlinked electrical floor-plan symbols",[662,1840,1841],{},"Floor-plan devices without a link to the electrical topology are reported for information.",[662,1843,1055],{},[662,1845,1109],{},[644,1847,1848,1851,1854,1856],{},[662,1849,1850],{},"Switch-control group plausibility",[662,1852,1853],{},"Plausibility check: a control group contains at least one switch and at least one switched load.",[662,1855,1055],{},[662,1857,1083],{},[27,1859,1861],{"id":1860},"domotica","Domotica",[11,1863,1864],{},"This section contains AREI checks, mandatory planning checks and profile warnings. It does not certify the entire extra-low-voltage installation, manufacturer conformity or physical bus routing. The bus supply source type cannot be recorded in the model (AREI 4.2.5.3.a).",[11,1866,1867],{},"Areas not checked automatically (not passed checks):",[11,1869,1870],{},"Disabled: not every internal extra-low-voltage component can be recorded and represented in the diagram. The claimed blanket June 2023 change is not established here. Only the documented control-point check is active.",[11,1872,1873],{},"Disabled: no evidence for a blanket requirement for a dedicated 30 mA bus circuit; type A is a general RCD requirement.",[11,1875,1876],{},"Disabled: cable adjacency, distance and insulation evidence cannot be recorded. The regulation permits several separation measures.",[11,1878,1879],{},"No automated symbol check: Table 2.23 J specifies the control-unit symbol (AREI 3.1.2.1.a). Users cannot correct missing catalog or renderer geometry.",[27,1881,1883],{"id":1882},"what-the-self-check-does-not-assess","What the self-check does not assess",[11,1885,1886],{},"These areas of Book 1 deliberately remain outside the automatic check:",[11,1888,1889,1892],{},[35,1890,1891],{},"Special installations and locations (Part 7)."," Of fourteen chapters, PlanElec touches three, each only in part: rooms containing a bath or shower (7.1), supply of electric road vehicles (7.22) and domestic photovoltaic installations (7.112). Not covered: swimming pools (7.2), saunas (7.3), construction sites and outdoor installations (7.4), conductive confined spaces (7.6), camping sites (7.8), marinas (7.9), fairground installations (7.11), fountains (7.100), stationary vehicles (7.101), explosive atmospheres (7.102) and industrial accumulator batteries (7.103).",[11,1894,1895,1898],{},[35,1896,1897],{},"The direct-current side."," The model has no separate roles for the L+, L-, M, PEM and PEL conductors. Conductor selection, colouring, combined protective conductors, DC residual current sensitivity, protection of the M conductor and permanent insulation monitoring in an IT system are therefore not verifiable. For photovoltaics this remains manual work.",[11,1900,1901,1904],{},[35,1902,1903],{},"The transitional provisions of articles 59 and 69."," Whether an exception applies to an existing installation depends on data that cannot be derived from a single-line diagram — among others the PEN cross-section, the actual start of work on site and the presence of a monitoring device. PlanElec does take the relaxations of Part 8 into account by presenting certain findings on existing parts as indications rather than errors, but does not decide the exception itself.",[11,1906,1907,1910],{},[35,1908,1909],{},"Inspections of installations (Part 6) and the rules of conduct (Part 9)"," fall outside the reach of a planning tool. Only the composition of the installation file is checked.",[27,1912,1914],{"id":1913},"what-software-cannot-establish-in-principle","What software cannot establish in principle",[11,1916,1917],{},"Even after further extension of the model, these points remain dependent on measurement, documentation or visual inspection on site:",[43,1919,1920,1923,1926,1929,1932,1935,1938],{},[46,1921,1922],{},"the actual wiring, continuity and polarity of the conductors;",[46,1924,1925],{},"the tripping characteristics and DC suitability of the devices actually installed;",[46,1927,1928],{},"insulation measurement and the operation of a permanent insulation monitoring device;",[46,1930,1931],{},"the mechanical and chemical resistance and corrosion state of the earthing;",[46,1933,1934],{},"the effectiveness of automatic disconnection and the real earth impedance;",[46,1936,1937],{},"the suitability and certification of inverters, batteries and PV components;",[46,1939,1940],{},"zoning, risk assessment and on-site conditions.",[27,1942,1944],{"id":1943},"what-this-means-for-your-inspection","What this means for your inspection",[11,1946,1947],{},"Use the self-check to catch avoidable mistakes early: a missing residual current device, a cross-section that does not match the protection, too many contact points on one circuit, an incomplete file. These are exactly the findings that otherwise surface only at inspection.",[11,1949,1950],{},"Do not rely on it for the cases listed above. There, your expertise and the judgement of the accredited body remain decisive.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":1952},[1953,1963,1964,1965,1966],{"id":974,"depth":291,"text":975,"children":1954},[1955,1956,1957,1958,1959,1960,1961,1962],{"id":996,"depth":599,"text":997},{"id":1213,"depth":599,"text":1214},{"id":1271,"depth":599,"text":1272},{"id":1343,"depth":599,"text":1344},{"id":1413,"depth":599,"text":1414},{"id":1497,"depth":599,"text":1498},{"id":1541,"depth":599,"text":1542},{"id":1598,"depth":599,"text":1599},{"id":1860,"depth":291,"text":1861},{"id":1882,"depth":291,"text":1883},{"id":1913,"depth":291,"text":1914},{"id":1943,"depth":291,"text":1944},"compliance","The complete list of rules PlanElec checks automatically — and an equally explicit list of what the self-check does not assess.","self-check-coverage",{},4,"\u002Fhelp\u002Fself-check-coverage.en","2026-08-17","7 min",{"title":944,"description":1968},"what-the-self-check-verifies","help\u002Fself-check-coverage.en",[1979,1980,775,1981,1982,1983],"AREI","RGIE","inspection","coverage","validation","o_Ls9H_voLW29egu3YenNFV2oIQx0h9XXdnNcL9gKRo",{"id":1986,"title":1987,"body":1988,"category":301,"description":2252,"extension":303,"guideId":2253,"image":305,"locale":306,"meta":2254,"navigation":308,"order":2255,"path":2256,"publishedAt":2257,"readTime":610,"seo":2258,"seoTitle":305,"slug":2259,"stem":2260,"tags":2261,"updatedAt":2268,"__hash__":2269},"help\u002Fhelp\u002Ffloorplan-import-calibration.en.md","Import and calibrate a floor plan",{"type":8,"value":1989,"toc":2244},[1990,1997,2002,2009,2013,2027,2060,2063,2066,2071,2075,2082,2108,2111,2116,2120,2127,2130,2135,2139,2171,2174,2200,2203,2207,2210,2213,2227,2230,2234,2237],[11,1991,1992,1993,1996],{},"An imported plan is a ",[35,1994,1995],{},"reference layer"," in PlanElec. You continue to draw walls, rooms and electrical symbols over it as editable PlanElec data. That keeps an export legible even if you later hide or replace the original plan.",[11,1998,1999],{},[23,2000],{"id":2001},"import",[73,2003],{":height":2004,":width":2005,"alt":2006,"caption":2007,"src":2008},"614","768","Add-floor-plans dialog with file selection and import queue.","Before uploading, check file type, floor assignment and, where applicable, the selected pages or crops.","\u002Fhelp\u002Fworkflows\u002Fen-import-plan.png",[27,2010,2012],{"id":2011},"import-a-plan-reference","Import a plan reference",[11,2014,222,2015,2018,2019,2022,2023,2026],{},[35,2016,2017],{},"Floor plan",", open the ",[35,2020,2021],{},"Floor plans"," palette and select ",[35,2024,2025],{},"Add floor plan",". This is the only entry point — for images, PDFs and DXF alike.",[105,2028,2029,2036,2039,2042,2053],{},[46,2030,2031,2032,2035],{},"Drag the files into the ",[35,2033,2034],{},"Add floor plans"," dialog or select them. PNG, JPEG, WebP, PDF and DXF can be chosen together.",[46,2037,2038],{},"For a PDF, select the required pages; for a DXF, confirm the drawing unit and deselect layers you do not need.",[46,2040,2041],{},"Mark the sections if needed (see below).",[46,2043,2044,2045,2048,2049,2052],{},"Check the floor assignment in the ",[35,2046,2047],{},"import queue"," and finish with ",[35,2050,2051],{},"Upload layers",". A file that failed can be retried on its own.",[46,2054,2055,2056,2059],{},"Select ",[35,2057,2058],{},"Set up"," for a layer to open the layer workbench.",[11,2061,2062],{},"Each run allows up to 20 layers and 100 MB, a PDF up to 25 MB and 50 pages, a DXF up to 30 MB.",[11,2064,2065],{},"DXF is processed in the browser as a reference image. Model Space and the selected layers are considered; DWG files are not imported.",[11,2067,2068],{},[23,2069],{"id":2070},"sections",[27,2072,2074],{"id":2073},"split-several-floor-plans-on-one-sheet","Split several floor plans on one sheet",[11,2076,2077,2078,2081],{},"Architects' drawings often carry ground floor, upper floor and attic on the same page. In the ",[35,2079,2080],{},"Mark sections"," step, drag a rectangle around each floor plan — every rectangle becomes its own floor plan that you can assign to its own storey.",[43,2083,2084,2090,2096,2102],{},[46,2085,2086,2089],{},[35,2087,2088],{},"Without a marking",", the page is used in full. Existing behaviour is therefore unchanged.",[46,2091,2092,2095],{},[35,2093,2094],{},"Name each section"," in the list below the preview. Every section of one sheet carries the same file name; only the name tells them apart in the queue and in the palette.",[46,2097,2098,2101],{},[35,2099,2100],{},"Sections, elevations and title blocks stay unmarked."," Only what carries a rectangle is imported.",[46,2103,2104,2107],{},[35,2105,2106],{},"The section is applied while rasterising."," It is therefore rendered sharper than the same area within a fully imported page.",[11,2109,2110],{},"A rectangle can be moved after being drawn and resized at its corners. The arrows above the preview page through the selected pages; markings apply per page.",[11,2112,2113],{},[23,2114],{"id":2115},"sources",[27,2117,2119],{"id":2118},"the-source-file-stays-in-the-project","The source file stays in the project",[11,2121,2122,2123,2126],{},"The uploaded file is kept and listed at the foot of the palette under ",[35,2124,2125],{},"Source files",". Several floor plans from one sheet reference the same file; it is stored only once.",[11,2128,2129],{},"This lets you cut another section later without hunting for the file again — for instance when a storey was missed during the first import. For a condition survey or inspection, the architect's drawing also stays with the project as the basis of the documentation.",[11,2131,2132],{},[23,2133],{"id":2134},"calibrate",[27,2136,2138],{"id":2137},"set-scale-rotation-and-position","Set scale, rotation and position",[11,2140,2141,2142,2145,2146,2145,2149,2152,2153,2156,2157,2159,2160,2162,2163,2166,2167,2170],{},"The layer workbench has the steps ",[35,2143,2144],{},"Crop",", ",[35,2147,2148],{},"Rotate",[35,2150,2151],{},"Scale"," and ",[35,2154,2155],{},"Position",". If the floor plan comes from a marked section, it starts at ",[35,2158,2148],{}," — the area was already determined during import. The ",[35,2161,2144],{}," step stays available for edge corrections. Pan and zoom remain available while it is open, but drawing tools are locked. Your changes remain a draft until you select ",[35,2164,2165],{},"Done","; ",[35,2168,2169],{},"Cancel"," discards them.",[11,2172,2173],{},"Calibrate an image or PDF layer with a known measurement:",[105,2175,2176,2186,2189,2192,2195],{},[46,2177,2178,2179,2181,2182,2185],{},"Open ",[35,2180,2151],{},", or select ",[35,2183,2184],{},"Calibrate"," in the toolbar.",[46,2187,2188],{},"Place two points on a distance whose real length you know.",[46,2190,2191],{},"Enter the length in metres and inspect the preview.",[46,2193,2194],{},"If necessary, align the reference edge horizontally or vertically.",[46,2196,2055,2197,2199],{},[35,2198,2165],{}," only after checking the result.",[11,2201,2202],{},"For a DXF, PlanElec initially uses the drawing unit or displays an estimate for you to select. The scale source remains visible. Recalibrate manually whenever a known dimension does not match.",[27,2204,2206],{"id":2205},"continue-drawing-on-the-reference","Continue drawing on the reference",[11,2208,2209],{},"Adjust opacity and crop if required. Then draw closed exterior and interior walls as a polygon or rectangle. PlanElec derives rooms from those walls; devices and cable routes use this editable wall graph, not pixels in the reference.",[11,2211,2212],{},"Check the following before planning the electrical installation:",[43,2214,2215,2218,2221,2224],{},[46,2216,2217],{},"Do one or more known dimensions match the configured scale?",[46,2219,2220],{},"Is the plan rotated and positioned correctly?",[46,2222,2223],{},"Are only relevant layers visible?",[46,2225,2226],{},"Have exterior and interior walls been traced as PlanElec walls?",[11,2228,2229],{},"For multiple floors, set up each floor separately. Aligning floors to each other is a separate task and does not replace calibration of an imported layer.",[27,2231,2233],{"id":2232},"what-importing-does-not-do","What importing does not do",[11,2235,2236],{},"Importing does not automatically recognise rooms or an electrical installation, and it does not produce an official survey. It is an accurate drawing aid. Check dimensions, wall layout and the real installation before placing symbols or exporting documents.",[11,2238,2239,2240,94],{},"Next: ",[23,2241,2243],{"href":2242},"\u002Fen\u002Fhelp\u002Fplace-and-connect-electrical-symbols","place and connect electrical symbols",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":2245},[2246,2247,2248,2249,2250,2251],{"id":2011,"depth":291,"text":2012},{"id":2073,"depth":291,"text":2074},{"id":2118,"depth":291,"text":2119},{"id":2137,"depth":291,"text":2138},{"id":2205,"depth":291,"text":2206},{"id":2232,"depth":291,"text":2233},"Use an image, PDF or DXF drawing as a scale-accurate reference, align the layer and draw the editable floor plan over it.","floorplan-import-calibration",{},5,"\u002Fhelp\u002Ffloorplan-import-calibration.en","2026-08-21",{"title":1987,"description":2252},"import-and-calibrate-a-floor-plan","help\u002Ffloorplan-import-calibration.en",[2262,2263,2264,2265,2266,2267],"floor plan import","PDF","DXF","calibration","scale","layer workbench","2026-08-27","SsJOU2yOsG7lNsDXMizQms9nLmygIasT_-ReRAgiAkI",{"id":2271,"title":2272,"body":2273,"category":301,"description":2433,"extension":303,"guideId":2434,"image":305,"locale":306,"meta":2435,"navigation":308,"order":2436,"path":2437,"publishedAt":2257,"readTime":312,"seo":2438,"seoTitle":305,"slug":2439,"stem":2440,"tags":2441,"updatedAt":320,"__hash__":2447},"help\u002Fhelp\u002Fplace-and-connect-symbols.en.md","Place and connect electrical symbols",{"type":8,"value":2274,"toc":2426},[2275,2282,2287,2294,2298,2303,2317,2320,2324,2334,2344,2347,2352,2356,2359,2362,2365,2389,2392,2396,2410,2416,2418,2422],[11,2276,2277,2278,2281],{},"A symbol on the floor plan first describes its ",[35,2279,2280],{},"physical location",". Linking it to the electrical topology turns it into an assigned consumer or item of equipment for a circuit, diagram and documents.",[11,2283,2284],{},[23,2285],{"id":2286},"place",[73,2288],{":height":2289,":width":2290,"alt":2291,"caption":2292,"src":2293},"51","926","Tool palette with the available electrical symbols for the selected room.","The palette is the starting point for placement; position, orientation and symbol variant still need review.","\u002Fhelp\u002Fworkflows\u002Fen-device-palette.png",[27,2295,2297],{"id":2296},"place-symbols-from-the-palette","Place symbols from the palette",[11,2299,222,2300,2302],{},[35,2301,2017],{},", open the tool palette and select a socket, switch, light, fixed appliance, box or distribution board. The tool icons are shown in the palette; pointing at one shows its name.",[105,2304,2305,2308,2311,2314],{},[46,2306,2307],{},"Select the symbol tool.",[46,2309,2310],{},"Place wall-mounted devices on the correct side of the wall. Sockets and switches snap to walls.",[46,2312,2313],{},"Place free lights or spots in the room.",[46,2315,2316],{},"Check the position, orientation and symbol variant after placing it.",[11,2318,2319],{},"A symbol can only be placed where the editor identifies a valid location. The preview shows the final geometry before you commit it. Correct the wall or room first if a symbol will not snap where you intend.",[27,2321,2323],{"id":2322},"create-shared-cover-frames","Create shared cover frames",[11,2325,2326,2327,2330,2331,2333],{},"An installation group is a physical combination with a shared two- to five-gang cover frame. It is ",[35,2328,2329],{},"not"," a switch chain and ",[35,2332,2329],{}," a circuit.",[11,2335,2336,2337,2340,2341,2343],{},"Drag suitable devices together on the same wall side, or start the cover-frame tool. In the ",[35,2338,2339],{},"Installation group"," panel, choose horizontal or vertical and complete it with ",[35,2342,2165],{},". Moving one member moves the combination.",[11,2345,2346],{},"Switches, standard sockets, Ethernet and coax outlets can be grouped. IP44 sockets remain excluded because they use a sealed frame. Passive data outlets do not become 230 V consumers as a result.",[11,2348,2349],{},[23,2350],{"id":2351},"topology",[27,2353,2355],{"id":2354},"link-the-device-to-electrical-topology","Link the device to electrical topology",[11,2357,2358],{},"Open the placed device's properties and link it to a type-compatible node in the electrical topology. Socket, switch and light variants are treated as matching families. Connection and junction boxes only become electrically effective when they are genuinely linked.",[11,2360,2361],{},"Then review the list of unconnected components. It shows symbols that are located on the floor plan but are not yet part of the electrical model.",[11,2363,2364],{},"Keep these concepts separate:",[43,2366,2367,2372,2377,2383],{},[46,2368,2369,2371],{},[35,2370,2155],{},": where is the device on the floor plan?",[46,2373,2374,2376],{},[35,2375,2339],{},": which inserts share one cover frame?",[46,2378,2379,2382],{},[35,2380,2381],{},"Topology",": which electrical node belongs to the device?",[46,2384,2385,2388],{},[35,2386,2387],{},"Circuit",": which protective device supplies that node?",[11,2390,2391],{},"Changing a cover frame changes neither a switching function nor a circuit assignment. Next, edit the switch chain for lighting control and assign devices to a circuit for electrical supply.",[27,2393,2395],{"id":2394},"check-before-continuing","Check before continuing",[43,2397,2398,2401,2404,2407],{},[46,2399,2400],{},"Every symbol is in its intended real-world location.",[46,2402,2403],{},"Wall-mounted devices are aligned to the right wall side.",[46,2405,2406],{},"Cover-frame combinations represent the intended mounting, not assumed wiring.",[46,2408,2409],{},"All electrical devices are linked to the appropriate topology node.",[11,2411,2239,2412,94],{},[23,2413,2415],{"href":2414},"\u002Fen\u002Fhelp\u002Fswitch-chains-circuits-and-cable-routes","edit switch chains, circuits and cable routes",[27,2417,275],{"id":274},[11,2419,278,2420,282],{},[35,2421,281],{},[11,2423,2424,94],{},[23,2425,288],{"href":287},{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":2427},[2428,2429,2430,2431,2432],{"id":2296,"depth":291,"text":2297},{"id":2322,"depth":291,"text":2323},{"id":2354,"depth":291,"text":2355},{"id":2394,"depth":291,"text":2395},{"id":274,"depth":291,"text":275},"Place devices at the right location, create shared cover frames and connect electrical symbols to the appropriate topology.","place-and-connect-symbols",{},6,"\u002Fhelp\u002Fplace-and-connect-symbols.en",{"title":2272,"description":2433},"place-and-connect-electrical-symbols","help\u002Fplace-and-connect-symbols.en",[2442,2443,2444,2445,2446,2351],"electrical symbols","sockets","switches","lights","cover frames","8Bl4B6IwdFFdk9onA51NaPLn-NbN7MMYzBRYxwSBbkY",{"id":2449,"title":2450,"body":2451,"category":606,"description":2575,"extension":303,"guideId":2576,"image":305,"locale":306,"meta":2577,"navigation":308,"order":2578,"path":2579,"publishedAt":2257,"readTime":610,"seo":2580,"seoTitle":305,"slug":2581,"stem":2582,"tags":2583,"updatedAt":2590,"__hash__":2591},"help\u002Fhelp\u002Fswitch-chains-circuits-cable-routes.en.md","Edit switch chains, circuits and cable routes",{"type":8,"value":2452,"toc":2569},[2453,2467,2472,2476,2482,2485,2488,2492,2499,2503,2512,2515,2518,2523,2525,2529,2542,2545,2548,2552,2566],[11,2454,2455,2456,2459,2460,2459,2463,2466],{},"These three tools answer different questions: ",[35,2457,2458],{},"which switch controls which light?"," ",[35,2461,2462],{},"Which circuit supplies which device?",[35,2464,2465],{},"Where does the cable physically run?"," Edit them in sequence so that the plan remains technically traceable.",[11,2468,2469],{},[23,2470],{"id":2471},"switch-chains",[27,2473,2475],{"id":2474},"link-switches-and-lights-as-a-chain","Link switches and lights as a chain",[11,2477,33,2478,2481],{},[35,2479,2480],{},"Switch chain"," in the floor plan. It links switches and the lights they control in a logical order. PlanElec can propose a chain for free switches and lights in one room; always check the proposal against the intended controls.",[11,2483,2484],{},"For a manual chain, deliberately select the participating devices. A valid chain includes at least one switch and one light. A device cannot belong to multiple switch chains at once. Across several floors, the chain remains project-wide; each floor shows only its local sections and continuation markers.",[11,2486,2487],{},"Switching function and pole count are separate settings. The application can derive a one-way, two-way or intermediate switching function from the chain; you choose the pole count explicitly. A double switch is one physical device with two separate channels: deliberately assign each light to channel A or B.",[11,2489,2490],{},[23,2491],{"id":441},[73,2493],{":height":2494,":width":2495,"alt":2496,"caption":2497,"src":2498},"149","576","Circuit-assignment panel with a selected target circuit.","The panel applies the selected devices together; electrical assignment does not define a real cable route.","\u002Fhelp\u002Fworkflows\u002Fen-circuit-assignment.png",[27,2500,2502],{"id":2501},"assign-devices-to-an-existing-circuit","Assign devices to an existing circuit",[11,2504,33,2505,2508,2509,2511],{},[35,2506,2507],{},"Assign circuit",". In the panel, first select the target circuit or its MCB, then select devices, including through the floor selector. ",[35,2510,2165],{}," applies the selection together.",[11,2513,2514],{},"Devices that are not yet linked are created as consumers under the selected MCB and linked to their floor-plan symbol. When a device already belongs to another MCB, the application asks for explicit confirmation before moving it. Cancelling changes no project data; you can undo the entire confirmation in one step.",[11,2516,2517],{},"Circuit assignment describes electrical membership. It does not yet define the physical path through walls, shafts or floors.",[11,2519,2520],{},[23,2521],{"id":2522},"cable-routes",[73,2524],{":height":489,":width":343,"alt":490,"caption":491,"src":492},[27,2526,2528],{"id":2527},"plan-and-refine-the-cable-route","Plan and refine the cable route",[11,2530,412,2531,2533,2534,2537,2538,2541],{},[35,2532,415],{},". When cables exist in the topology, use ",[35,2535,2536],{},"Auto-route all"," for the active floor or select a cable and choose ",[35,2539,2540],{},"Auto-route",". The automatic route follows drawn walls where possible; check it against the intended installation.",[11,2543,2544],{},"Select a cable line to edit it manually. Click a segment to add a waypoint and drag it immediately; double-click to remove a waypoint. Escape clears the selection or exits the mode. The displayed length is used by material lists, voltage-drop calculation and exports, so check every exceptional route.",[11,2546,2547],{},"For a cable between floors, explicitly select an existing stair, shaft or riser in the cable-route panel. PlanElec does not invent a vertical connection. If a required connector or reliable heights are missing, the route remains incomplete instead of showing a misleading length.",[27,2549,2551],{"id":2550},"final-check","Final check",[43,2553,2554,2557,2560,2563],{},[46,2555,2556],{},"Test the switch chain against the intended controls, not only spatial proximity.",[46,2558,2559],{},"Check each device's circuit, protective device and topology.",[46,2561,2562],{},"Check cable route and length against the planned installation path.",[46,2564,2565],{},"Treat automatic proposals as editable planning assistance, not approval for construction.",[11,2567,2568],{},"You can then continue checking the distribution board and single-line diagram, and run the supported self-check.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":2570},[2571,2572,2573,2574],{"id":2474,"depth":291,"text":2475},{"id":2501,"depth":291,"text":2502},{"id":2527,"depth":291,"text":2528},{"id":2550,"depth":291,"text":2551},"Keep lighting control, circuit assignment and the physical cable path separate, and use the appropriate tool for each step.","switch-chains-circuits-cable-routes",{},7,"\u002Fhelp\u002Fswitch-chains-circuits-cable-routes.en",{"title":2450,"description":2575},"switch-chains-circuits-and-cable-routes","help\u002Fswitch-chains-circuits-cable-routes.en",[2584,2585,2586,2587,2588,2589],"switch chain","two-way switching","circuit","MCB","cable route","cable length","2026-08-30","EpXcOfui26PEmPw0dpxC1ynPG0Xjj-A30iIZm3NwKaY",{"id":2593,"title":2594,"body":2595,"category":606,"description":2967,"extension":303,"guideId":2968,"image":2755,"locale":306,"meta":2969,"navigation":308,"order":2970,"path":2971,"publishedAt":2972,"readTime":610,"seo":2973,"seoTitle":305,"slug":2974,"stem":2975,"tags":2976,"updatedAt":940,"__hash__":2982},"help\u002Fhelp\u002Fknx-planning-documentation.en.md","Plan KNX: push buttons, channels and quantities",{"type":8,"value":2596,"toc":2955},[2597,2603,2608,2612,2615,2635,2641,2655,2661,2669,2675,2678,2683,2687,2693,2700,2707,2711,2730,2741,2749,2756,2760,2766,2772,2776,2780,2787,2793,2797,2803,2807,2817,2876,2879,2884,2888,2902,2905,2909,2915,2918,2923,2927,2930,2934],[11,2598,2599,2600,2602],{},"With ",[35,2601,1861],{}," planning enabled, PlanElec documents modules, channels, control points, keys, bus lines and terminals in one project. Exports include channel and terminal plans, functions by room, logical topology, quantities and a handover dossier with the self-check report. An active automation profile and access for your account are required. This planning does not replace ETS, device programming or an official certificate of conformity.",[11,2604,2605],{},[23,2606],{"id":2607},"practical-example",[27,2609,2611],{"id":2610},"practical-example-two-lights-controlled-from-two-locations","Practical example: two lights controlled from two locations",[11,2613,2614],{},"This fictional example documents a ceiling light and a wall light in a living room, operated from two push buttons. The screenshots show the French interface. Channel assignments, the missing-power warning and quantities were checked; the images do not show a fully validated installation dossier.",[105,2616,2617,2623,2629],{},[46,2618,2619,2622],{},[35,2620,2621],{},"Profile and devices:"," select KNX in the project metadata. Place the two lights and two push buttons from the control points and sensors category on the situation plan. Give them distinct names. Add the power supply and actuator to the cabinet.",[46,2624,2625,2628],{},[35,2626,2627],{},"Electrical connections:"," in Installation, check the circuit, the modules’ supply and their cabinet assignment. If a light is unavailable in the receiver list, check its electrical connection. A logical channel assignment does not replace the protection path.",[46,2630,2631,2634],{},[35,2632,2633],{},"Channel:"," assign both lights and both buttons to CH1. The example uses “Plafonnier salon”, “Applique salon”, “Poussoir entrée” and “Poussoir canapé”. The buttons use a Bus connection here. Add a clear note describing the intended function.",[73,2636],{":height":2637,":width":2638,"alt":2639,"caption":2639,"src":2640},"220","1790","CH1 links two lights with two buttons. The unassigned terminal remains visible. French interface, fictional data.","\u002Fhelp\u002Fknx-example\u002Ffr-04-matrice-affectations.jpg",[105,2642,2643,2649],{"start":1971},[46,2644,2645,2648],{},[35,2646,2647],{},"Missing data:"," if the matrix reports a missing light power rating, enter the actual device specifications. Entering the fictional values of 24 W and 12 W removed that warning. This does not constitute a complete electrical compatibility check.",[46,2650,2651,2654],{},[35,2652,2653],{},"Line and supply:"," assign devices under Lines and explicitly select the line’s power supply module. Then check the bus current: unknown contributions remain open data. A logical line is not a measured cable route.",[73,2656],{":height":2657,":width":2658,"alt":2659,"caption":2659,"src":2660},"1009","2073","The line has a 640 mA power supply, but three bus-current contributions are unknown. Consumption has therefore not been fully checked. French interface.","\u002Fhelp\u002Fknx-example\u002Ffr-05-ligne-alimentation.jpg",[105,2662,2663],{"start":2436},[46,2664,2665,2668],{},[35,2666,2667],{},"Quantities:"," open Export → Domotica and download the automation quantities as a draft. Compare the result with the intended devices. The checked export contains one power supply, one actuator and two push buttons. The two lights are not included in this automation list; add them from the rest of your material overview. This example provides neither cable lengths nor manufacturer order references.",[73,2670],{":height":2671,":width":2672,"alt":2673,"caption":2673,"src":2674},"1600","1132","Actual exported PDF: one power supply, one actuator and two push buttons. The BROUILLON watermark marks the document as a draft, not a certificate.","\u002Fhelp\u002Fknx-example\u002Ffr-06-quantites.png",[11,2676,2677],{},"For inspection documents, also check the situation plan, device references, complete single-line diagram and outstanding export findings. The quantities shown here do not confirm those steps. The following sections explain the available documents and their status.",[11,2679,2680],{},[23,2681],{"id":2682},"activate",[27,2684,2686],{"id":2685},"how-do-i-enable-domotica-planning","How do I enable Domotica planning?",[11,2688,2689,2690,2692],{},"Open the project metadata and select the appropriate building automation profile, such as KNX. Profiles determine which devices and connection types are offered. The ",[35,2691,1861],{}," area appears when access is enabled. If it is absent, this feature is unavailable for that project or account; selecting a profile does not grant access by itself.",[11,2694,2695,2696,2699],{},"Switching between active system profiles preserves existing assignments. Confirming ",[35,2697,2698],{},"No building automation",", however, removes the logical Domotica planning document and its automation assignments; placed floor-plan devices remain. Review the confirmation before removing the profile and check retained devices and connections after a change. Unknown manufacturer values remain unknown and must be checked against the actual product.",[11,2701,2702,2704],{},[23,2703],{"id":123},[23,2705],{"id":2706},"controls",[27,2708,2710],{"id":2709},"how-do-i-document-push-buttons-and-their-keys","How do I document push buttons and their keys?",[11,2712,2713,2714,2717,2718,2721,2722,2725,2726,2729],{},"Place devices from ",[35,2715,2716],{},"Control points & sensors"," on the floor plan. Select a device and use ",[35,2719,2720],{},"Configure control point",". Choose the actual ",[35,2723,2724],{},"Connection"," and check the ",[35,2727,2728],{},"Voltage class",". The voltage class is a planning input, not electrical evidence.",[11,2731,2732,2733,2736,2737,2740],{},"Use ",[35,2734,2735],{},"Key \u002F input assignments"," to associate documented keys with channels. One control point can operate several channels, and several control points can share a channel. A channel assignment without a key index remains valid but appears as ",[35,2738,2739],{},"Key not documented"," in the function list. RF\u002FIP is shown as a wireless control connection and does not create a physical cable route.",[11,2742,2743,2746],{},[23,2744],{"id":2745},"modules",[23,2747],{"id":2748},"channels",[73,2750],{":height":2751,":width":2752,"alt":2753,"caption":2754,"src":2755},"510","952","Channel matrix with one CH1 card for a ceiling light and push-button input, room and protection device, and an empty terminal field.","The card documents CH1 with its ceiling light, push-button input, room and protection device; the empty terminal field remains visible as an open planning value.","\u002Fhelp\u002Fworkflows\u002Fen-domotica-channels.png",[27,2757,2759],{"id":2758},"how-do-i-create-a-cabinet-door-channel-sheet","How do I create a cabinet-door channel sheet?",[11,2761,2762,2763,2765],{},"Place suitable modules in the cabinet and add their channels. The channel matrix in ",[35,2764,1861],{}," links each channel to its loads and control points. Use understandable channel names and add notes where needed. Multiple loads and control points are retained in full; their logical association does not replace a protection path or a documented cable route.",[11,2767,955,2768,2771],{},[35,2769,2770],{},"Channel plan"," uses the same data and ordering. It lists board, module, channel, load, room, protection, terminal, control point and note. Select the board in the export area and sort by module, protection device, room or terminal. The A4 landscape PDF is the cabinet-door sheet; CSV supports further editing. Blank fields indicate missing planning information, not confirmation that an item is unnecessary.",[11,2773,2774],{},[23,2775],{"id":187},[27,2777,2779],{"id":2778},"how-are-lines-and-terminals-included","How are lines and terminals included?",[11,2781,2782,2783,2786],{},"Under ",[35,2784,2785],{},"Lines",", assign modules and control points to planned bus lines and document their power supplies and, where applicable, couplers. Known bus currents and unknown contributions are shown separately. The topology diagram represents these logical relationships; its connectors are not measured bus cable routes.",[11,2788,222,2789,2792],{},[35,2790,2791],{},"Terminal plan",", select a board and maintain strips, terminal numbers, types, destinations and manual bridges. Prefilling requires an explicit action. Existing terminals remain the source for both matrix and export; PDF rows do not write numbering back into the project. This is not an individual conductor wiring diagram.",[11,2794,2795],{},[23,2796],{"id":205},[73,2798],{":height":2799,":width":2752,"alt":2800,"caption":2801,"src":2802},"141","Domotica export options for board, sorting, version and draft or final status.","These controls define the Domotica export scope and status; they do not confirm complete document data or a passed check.","\u002Fhelp\u002Fworkflows\u002Fen-domotica-export.png",[27,2804,2806],{"id":2805},"what-is-included-in-the-domotica-handover-dossier","What is included in the Domotica handover dossier?",[11,2808,2809,2810,2812,2813,2816],{},"Open the export area and its ",[35,2811,1861],{}," section. Select board, sorting, version and status. Each document card offers a preview and PDF; channel and terminal plans also offer CSV, and topology offers SVG. ",[35,2814,2815],{},"Download Domotica dossier"," combines all six document types after a cover page.",[638,2818,2819,2828],{},[641,2820,2821],{},[644,2822,2823,2825],{},[647,2824,649],{},[647,2826,2827],{},"Content and limitation",[657,2829,2830,2837,2844,2852,2860,2868],{},[644,2831,2832,2834],{},[662,2833,2770],{},[662,2835,2836],{},"All channel assignments for the selected boards, A4 landscape",[644,2838,2839,2841],{},[662,2840,2791],{},[662,2842,2843],{},"Documented terminals, destinations and bridges, A4 landscape",[644,2845,2846,2849],{},[662,2847,2848],{},"Functions by room",[662,2850,2851],{},"Keys and assigned loads in plain language; planned functions, not verified programming",[644,2853,2854,2857],{},[662,2855,2856],{},"Topology diagram",[662,2858,2859],{},"Logical lines of the whole project, also as a complete SVG; large PDF diagrams use overlapping pages",[644,2861,2862,2865],{},[662,2863,2864],{},"Domotica quantities",[662,2866,2867],{},"Counts of modules, supplies, control points and existing signal cable segments; no prices or estimated metres",[644,2869,2870,2873],{},[662,2871,2872],{},"Conformity report with Domotica",[662,2874,2875],{},"Existing self-check findings and check limitations; a missing check run is explicitly identified",[11,2877,2878],{},"Board selection limits channel, terminal and function plans. Topology, quantities and the conformity report always cover the entire project. Functions are grouped by the control point’s room; their loads may be elsewhere.",[11,2880,2881],{},[23,2882],{"id":2883},"readiness",[27,2885,2887],{"id":2886},"when-can-i-select-final","When can I select FINAL?",[11,2889,2890,2893,2894,2897,2898,2901],{},[35,2891,2892],{},"DRAFT"," remains available when planning data exists and appears as a watermark on every PDF page and in SVG. CSV starts with a status and metadata row. ",[35,2895,2896],{},"FINAL"," requires the existing export readiness conditions to be met. The interface lists open items and offers ",[35,2899,2900],{},"Address the next open item",". Later planning changes can block final export again.",[11,2903,2904],{},"The Domotica self-check distinguishes findings, missing inputs and checks that were explicitly not performed. Unknown loads or channel ratings do not constitute a passed check. Even a final document is not an official certificate of conformity.",[27,2906,2908],{"id":2907},"what-do-version-date-and-hash-mean","What do version, date and hash mean?",[11,2910,2911,2914],{},[35,2912,2913],{},"Version"," is a freely chosen document label, initially A. PDF metadata contains project, board scope, version, creation time and a SHA-256 data hash; the dossier also displays these on its cover. Version, time, status and hash appear on every PDF page. Data and language are captured at the start. Changing planning data or export options invalidates an open preview.",[11,2916,2917],{},"The hash identifies the export inputs and options. It is not a signature, a hash of the finished PDF or confirmation of archival storage. Keep the actual document issued for handover.",[11,2919,2920],{},[23,2921],{"id":2922},"limits",[27,2924,2926],{"id":2925},"what-remains-outside-this-documentation","What remains outside this documentation?",[11,2928,2929],{},"PlanElec does not assign KNX group or physical addresses, program devices or replace ETS. Logical lines, key assignments, bus budgets and terminal plans do not prove actual programming, bus diagnostics, insulation or manufacturer compatibility. The quantities list does not order products. The self-check report states its limited scope; professional assessment of the real installation remains necessary.",[27,2931,2933],{"id":2932},"related-guides","Related guides",[43,2935,2936,2940,2944,2949],{},[46,2937,2938],{},[23,2939,2450],{"href":2414},[46,2941,2942],{},[23,2943,2272],{"href":2242},[46,2945,2946],{},[23,2947,2948],{"href":235},"Export documents",[46,2950,2951],{},[23,2952,2954],{"href":2953},"\u002Fen\u002Fhelp\u002Fwhat-the-self-check-verifies","What the AREI self-check verifies",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":2956},[2957,2958,2959,2960,2961,2962,2963,2964,2965,2966],{"id":2610,"depth":291,"text":2611},{"id":2685,"depth":291,"text":2686},{"id":2709,"depth":291,"text":2710},{"id":2758,"depth":291,"text":2759},{"id":2778,"depth":291,"text":2779},{"id":2805,"depth":291,"text":2806},{"id":2886,"depth":291,"text":2887},{"id":2907,"depth":291,"text":2908},{"id":2925,"depth":291,"text":2926},{"id":2932,"depth":291,"text":2933},"Assign two lights and two push buttons, document the power supply and bus line, and export an initial material list with an illustrated example.","knx-planning-documentation",{},8,"\u002Fhelp\u002Fknx-planning-documentation.en","2026-09-12",{"title":2594,"description":2967},"plan-and-document-knx","help\u002Fknx-planning-documentation.en",[2977,2978,2979,2980,319,205,2981],"KNX","home automation","push button","actuator","Belgium","1QxJ8XRbmdQoMlJ92KRRkgEHw7EgcAMPx0zYV-IH84k",{"id":2984,"title":2985,"body":2986,"category":301,"description":3488,"extension":303,"guideId":3489,"image":305,"locale":306,"meta":3490,"navigation":308,"order":3491,"path":3492,"publishedAt":320,"readTime":610,"seo":3493,"seoTitle":305,"slug":3494,"stem":3495,"tags":3496,"updatedAt":3498,"__hash__":3499},"help\u002Fhelp\u002Finstallation-topology.en.md","Plan an installation and form distribution boards",{"type":8,"value":2987,"toc":3474},[2988,2993,2996,3000,3024,3027,3030,3034,3086,3091,3095,3116,3119,3125,3129,3135,3154,3159,3166,3170,3173,3209,3224,3229,3233,3236,3239,3244,3249,3253,3256,3302,3307,3312,3316,3333,3340,3347,3352,3355,3359,3397,3400,3404,3408,3411,3414,3419,3424,3428,3433,3438,3444,3451,3460,3464,3467],[11,2989,222,2990,2992],{},[35,2991,281],{},", you plan which protective device supplies each circuit and its consumers. You use devices already placed in the floor plan. An enclosure and fixed module positions are not required yet. You can then form distribution boards, detail their cabinet layouts and review the resulting single-line diagram.",[11,2994,2995],{},"This guide follows one fictional home in the same project file. Its screenshots show real views of that example in the application. The sequence provides a starting point; existing projects and other valid planning approaches remain supported. A planning view or an exported draft does not establish electrical safety.",[27,2997,2999],{"id":2998},"quick-start-from-distribution-board-to-topology","Quick start: from distribution board to topology",[105,3001,3002,3005,3014,3021],{},[46,3003,3004],{},"Place loads and a distribution board on the floor plan.",[46,3006,3007,3008,3011,3012,94],{},"Select the board and ",[35,3009,3010],{},"Complete installation automatically",". The same action is available in ",[35,3013,281],{},[46,3015,3016,3017,3020],{},"Review the target board, new circuits, protection devices and required space. ",[35,3018,3019],{},"Apply proposal"," adds the plan and opens the board’s topology.",[46,3022,3023],{},"Open the cabinet view to inspect the prepared layout.",[11,3025,3026],{},"All unassigned loads without an assignment to another board are included. Existing circuits, cable data and module positions are preserved. An unconfigured cabinet receives an enclosure proposal; insufficient space in an existing enclosure is reported. Devices that require manual planning and missing feeder data remain open. One undo step reverses the operation. If the project changes, review the refreshed proposal before applying it. The preview lists every planned assignment by room with circuit, protection device and RCD. An empty circuit whose name matches the load is reused instead of adding another protection device.",[11,3028,3029],{},"The following sections explain manual editing and installation review.",[27,3031,3033],{"id":3032},"what-is-each-view-for","What is each view for?",[638,3035,3036,3046],{},[641,3037,3038],{},[644,3039,3040,3043],{},[647,3041,3042],{},"View",[647,3044,3045],{},"What you plan here",[657,3047,3048,3056,3063,3071,3079],{},[644,3049,3050,3053],{},[662,3051,3052],{},"Floor plan \u002F situation plan",[662,3054,3055],{},"Device positions and physical cable routes",[644,3057,3058,3060],{},[662,3059,281],{},[662,3061,3062],{},"Supply, protection paths, circuits and board boundaries",[644,3064,3065,3068],{},[662,3066,3067],{},"Cabinet",[662,3069,3070],{},"Concrete devices, enclosure, rows and module positions",[644,3072,3073,3076],{},[662,3074,3075],{},"Single-line diagram",[662,3077,3078],{},"Document representation of the same electrical installation",[644,3080,3081,3083],{},[662,3082,225],{},[662,3084,3085],{},"Documents from the saved project version with a visible review status",[11,3087,3088],{},[23,3089],{"id":3090},"assignment",[27,3092,3094],{"id":3093},"assign-an-existing-floor-plan-device","Assign an existing floor-plan device",[105,3096,3097,3102,3107,3113],{},[46,3098,3099,3100,94],{},"Place devices in the floor plan or open an existing project. See ",[23,3101,2243],{"href":2242},[46,3103,2178,3104,3106],{},[35,3105,281],{},", search for the device and select it in the tree or graphical view.",[46,3108,3109,3110,3112],{},"Click ",[35,3111,2507],{},", choose the existing target circuit and confirm.",[46,3114,3115],{},"Check the displayed protection path. The floor-plan link takes you to the associated symbol.",[11,3117,3118],{},"This assigns the same device. Do not create another consumer just to see it in the diagram. In the example, the existing living-room socket receives its circuit assignment.",[73,3120],{":height":3121,":width":76,"alt":3122,"caption":3123,"src":3124},"900","The same living-room socket in the floor plan after its electrical assignment.","The floor-plan symbol stays in place; its electrical assignment has been completed.","\u002Fhelp\u002Finstallation-topology\u002Fen-01-floorplan-assignment.png",[27,3126,3128],{"id":3127},"move-loads-in-the-circuit-list","Move loads in the circuit list",[11,3130,955,3131,3134],{},[35,3132,3133],{},"Circuits"," view lists every final circuit by board and RCD, with its loads, the sum of the recorded power and the phase. Loads without a circuit are shown at the top.",[105,3136,3137,3145,3148],{},[46,3138,2178,3139,3141,3142,3144],{},[35,3140,281],{}," and choose the ",[35,3143,3133],{}," view.",[46,3146,3147],{},"Drag a load onto the target circuit. Its cables move with it.",[46,3149,3150,3153],{},[35,3151,3152],{},"Undo"," reverts the step completely.",[11,3155,3156,3157,94],{},"Only items connected directly to the circuit breaker can be moved; a junction box takes its loads with it. The room filter shows only circuits that supply the selected room. Without a mouse, select the load and use ",[35,3158,2507],{},[73,3160],{":height":3161,":width":3162,"alt":3163,"caption":3164,"src":3165},"810","1370","Circuit list of the example house with the main board and the upper-floor sub-board.","Each circuit is listed under its RCD with designation, rated current, phase and loads.","\u002Fhelp\u002Finstallation-topology\u002Fen-10-circuit-list.png",[27,3167,3169],{"id":3168},"resolve-open-tasks","Resolve open tasks",[11,3171,3172],{},"With nothing selected, the side panel lists open tasks – one line per problem, not per device.",[638,3174,3175,3185],{},[641,3176,3177],{},[644,3178,3179,3182],{},[647,3180,3181],{},"Task",[647,3183,3184],{},"Solution in the side panel",[657,3186,3187,3198],{},[644,3188,3189,3192],{},[662,3190,3191],{},"Loads without a circuit",[662,3193,3194,3197],{},[35,3195,3196],{},"Assign automatically"," opens the automatic planning proposal",[644,3199,3200,3203],{},[662,3201,3202],{},"Board open: electrically connected but not assigned to a board",[662,3204,3205,3208],{},[35,3206,3207],{},"Form board"," opens the preview for the whole chain from its top device",[11,3210,3211,3212,3215,3216,3219,3220,3223],{},"Below are actions for the whole installation. ",[35,3213,3214],{},"Balance phases"," spreads single-phase circuits more evenly across L1–L3 on a three-phase supply without moving module positions. ",[35,3217,3218],{},"Add missing cables"," creates only missing cables; existing cables and their data stay unchanged. ",[35,3221,3222],{},"Calculate cable routes"," fills in missing routes on the floor plan and leaves manually drawn routes unchanged.",[11,3225,3226],{},[23,3227],{"id":3228},"supply-path",[27,3230,3232],{"id":3231},"read-the-complete-supply-and-protection-path","Read the complete supply and protection path",[11,3234,3235],{},"Return to the installation. The grid connection, meter, protective devices, circuits and consumers remain reachable together. Select a consumer to see its path back to the supply. Device references and circuit labels help you compare the floor plan and diagram.",[11,3237,3238],{},"Use search, expand\u002Fcollapse and the tree view for larger projects. A collapsed branch still exists. Control relationships, switching functions and bus assignments are additional relationships; they must not be treated as arbitrary supply connections.",[73,3240],{":height":3161,":width":3162,"alt":3241,"caption":3242,"src":3243},"Installation overview of the example home from supply chain to consumers.","The overview uses existing devices in the project.","\u002Fhelp\u002Finstallation-topology\u002Fen-02-installation-overview.png",[11,3245,3246],{},[23,3247],{"id":3248},"draft",[27,3250,3252],{"id":3251},"continue-without-a-chosen-cabinet","Continue without a chosen cabinet",[11,3254,3255],{},"An undecided board is a saveable draft state. Save and reload the project: the open assignment remains open instead of being silently attached to a main board.",[638,3257,3258,3268],{},[641,3259,3260],{},[644,3261,3262,3265],{},[647,3263,3264],{},"State",[647,3266,3267],{},"Next step",[657,3269,3270,3278,3286,3294],{},[644,3271,3272,3275],{},[662,3273,3274],{},"Not electrically assigned",[662,3276,3277],{},"Choose the supply or circuit",[644,3279,3280,3283],{},[662,3281,3282],{},"Electrically connected, board open",[662,3284,3285],{},"Plan a suitable physical group",[644,3287,3288,3291],{},[662,3289,3290],{},"Board chosen, layout open",[662,3292,3293],{},"Check the feeder and detail enclosure and modules",[644,3295,3296,3299],{},[662,3297,3298],{},"Modules placed",[662,3300,3301],{},"Review layout, electrical information and documents",[73,3303],{":height":3161,":width":3162,"alt":3304,"caption":3305,"src":3306},"An electrically planned installation section with its physical board still open.","An electrical connection does not mean that cabinet planning is complete.","\u002Fhelp\u002Finstallation-topology\u002Fen-03-draft-without-board.png",[11,3308,3309],{},[23,3310],{"id":3311},"distribution-board",[27,3313,3315],{"id":3314},"form-a-distribution-board-from-a-selection","Form a distribution board from a selection",[105,3317,3318,3321,3327,3330],{},[46,3319,3320],{},"Select related protective devices using individual tree checkboxes or multiple selection in the graphical view.",[46,3322,3109,3323,3326],{},[35,3324,3325],{},"Create a board from selection"," and give it a clear name.",[46,3328,3329],{},"Read the preview: supply entry, modules, consumers outside the cabinet, existing board boundaries and affected placements.",[46,3331,3332],{},"Confirm only a suitable selection. If the selection conflicts, the application explains why; adjust it before continuing.",[73,3334],{":height":3335,":width":3336,"alt":3337,"caption":3338,"src":3339},"618","512","Upper-floor distribution board preview showing entry point, modules and effects.","The selection rectangle alone does not create a saved board boundary.","\u002Fhelp\u002Finstallation-topology\u002Fen-04-board-preview.png",[11,3341,3342,3343,3346],{},"After confirmation, the protective devices belong to the new physical board. Its supplied sockets and lights remain ",[35,3344,3345],{},"outside"," the frame. Electrically downstream boards are not enclosures physically nested inside each other.",[73,3348],{":height":3161,":width":3162,"alt":3349,"caption":3350,"src":3351},"Confirmed distribution board with protective devices inside and consumers outside.","Physical board membership and the area supplied by that board have different meanings.","\u002Fhelp\u002Finstallation-topology\u002Fen-05-board-created.png",[11,3353,3354],{},"Next, check the feeder: select the actual upstream protective device and enter cable information such as conductor count, cross-section and length. Confirm that connection explicitly. Grouping invents neither a protective device nor a feeder cable. Radial planning requires one unambiguous upstream supply path; local sources such as PV are handled separately.",[27,3356,3358],{"id":3357},"what-do-removal-and-deletion-change","What do removal and deletion change?",[638,3360,3361,3371],{},[641,3362,3363],{},[644,3364,3365,3368],{},[647,3366,3367],{},"Action",[647,3369,3370],{},"Effect",[657,3372,3373,3381,3389],{},[644,3374,3375,3378],{},[662,3376,3377],{},"Dissolve board grouping",[662,3379,3380],{},"Remove the physical group; retain electrical devices for planning",[644,3382,3383,3386],{},[662,3384,3385],{},"Remove module placement",[662,3387,3388],{},"Remove the row position; retain the electrical device",[644,3390,3391,3394],{},[662,3392,3393],{},"Delete an electrical device",[662,3395,3396],{},"Change the electrical object and its affected connections",[11,3398,3399],{},"Read each preview or confirmation, then review the affected views. Related electrical changes can be followed with undo\u002Fredo.",[11,3401,3402],{},[23,3403],{"id":152},[27,3405,3407],{"id":3406},"detail-modules-and-enclosure","Detail modules and enclosure",[11,3409,3410],{},"Open the cabinet from the selected distribution board. Existing devices are carried over and unplaced modules remain findable. Choose concrete modules, check their width in module units (TE) and plan the rows.",[11,3412,3413],{},"Enclosure planning shows the module requirement and uses your entered reserve and terminal\u002Faccessory allowance. Check mounting type, wiring space, heat dissipation and manufacturer conditions. With generic modules or missing information, the space requirement remains an estimate. A proposed enclosure is not approval for construction.",[73,3415],{":height":3121,":width":76,"alt":3416,"caption":3417,"src":3418},"Cabinet editor with the selected distribution board and its enclosure planning.","Electrical assignment and row position are separately editable. Rearranging the same cabinet does not change the protection path.","\u002Fhelp\u002Finstallation-topology\u002Fen-06-cabinet-planning.png",[11,3420,3421],{},[23,3422],{"id":3423},"schema-export",[27,3425,3427],{"id":3426},"review-the-single-line-diagram-and-export-documents","Review the single-line diagram and export documents",[11,3429,2178,3430,3432],{},[35,3431,3075],{},". The same consumers, protective devices and boards appear in the document view. Check board-specific sheets and cross-references. The diagram is rendered from the project model; it is not a screenshot of the installation tree.",[73,3434],{":height":3121,":width":76,"alt":3435,"caption":3436,"src":3437},"Single-line diagram derived from the shared project model.","Moving or zooming the topology view does not change PDF coordinates.","\u002Fhelp\u002Finstallation-topology\u002Fen-07-derived-schema.png",[11,3439,3440,3441,3443],{},"Switch to ",[35,3442,225],{},", check the saved version and choose the required documents. Open assignments, cable information and reviews remain visible. A download offered as a draft remains a draft. Producing documents does not replace professional review or the official inspection.",[73,3445],{":height":3446,":width":3447,"alt":3448,"caption":3449,"src":3450},"1273","1800","Actual exported document from the saved example project.","The document uses the same devices. Its visible status describes its intended use.","\u002Fhelp\u002Finstallation-topology\u002Fen-08-export-result.png",[11,3452,3453,3454,2152,3457,94],{},"Read more: ",[23,3455,3456],{"href":235},"export documents",[23,3458,3459],{"href":2953},"what the self-check verifies",[27,3461,3463],{"id":3462},"work-on-a-tablet-phone-or-with-the-keyboard","Work on a tablet, phone or with the keyboard",[11,3465,3466],{},"On narrow screens, the tree view takes priority. Use checkboxes and named actions for assignment and board grouping. Arrow keys move through the tree, Enter opens the selected item and Space selects an item for multiple selection.",[73,3468],{":height":3469,":width":3470,"alt":3471,"caption":3472,"src":3473},"844","390","Mobile tree view with the same devices and accessible planning actions.","The graphical view and the tree edit the same project.","\u002Fhelp\u002Finstallation-topology\u002Fen-09-mobile-tree.png",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":3475},[3476,3477,3478,3479,3480,3481,3482,3483,3484,3485,3486,3487],{"id":2998,"depth":291,"text":2999},{"id":3032,"depth":291,"text":3033},{"id":3093,"depth":291,"text":3094},{"id":3127,"depth":291,"text":3128},{"id":3168,"depth":291,"text":3169},{"id":3231,"depth":291,"text":3232},{"id":3251,"depth":291,"text":3252},{"id":3314,"depth":291,"text":3315},{"id":3357,"depth":291,"text":3358},{"id":3406,"depth":291,"text":3407},{"id":3426,"depth":291,"text":3427},{"id":3462,"depth":291,"text":3463},"Assign existing floor-plan devices, check protection paths and develop an electrical plan into distribution boards, cabinet layouts and a single-line diagram.","installation-topology",{},9,"\u002Fhelp\u002Finstallation-topology.en",{"title":2985,"description":3488},"plan-installation-and-distribution-boards","help\u002Finstallation-topology.en",[281,2381,3497,3067,3075],"Distribution board","2026-10-07","OzZWdmjzAVp-F-NHGksCg3AcKq7KcpC_4xatCnj57VI",{"id":3501,"title":3502,"body":3503,"category":301,"description":3664,"extension":303,"guideId":3665,"image":305,"locale":306,"meta":3666,"navigation":308,"order":3667,"path":3668,"publishedAt":3669,"readTime":3670,"seo":3671,"seoTitle":305,"slug":3665,"stem":3672,"tags":3673,"updatedAt":3677,"__hash__":3678},"help\u002Fhelp\u002Fstudio-aktivitaet-assistent.en.md","How do I use activity and the assistant in the studio?",{"type":8,"value":3504,"toc":3657},[3505,3511,3515,3526,3536,3539,3543,3546,3590,3596,3600,3623,3629,3633,3640,3647,3651],[11,3506,3507,3510],{},[35,3508,3509],{},"Activity & assistant"," brings your conversations and tasks with the PlanElec assistant together with confirmed project changes. The assistant is available to every signed-in user: it carries out instructions directly in the project, checks every change with the AREI self-check and keeps it ready as a single undo step. Confirmed team changes appear once project history is enabled for your account.",[27,3512,3514],{"id":3513},"how-do-i-open-the-panel","How do I open the panel?",[11,3516,3517,3518,3521,3522,3525],{},"Open a project in the studio. Use the switch at the bottom of the side mode bar (rail), the bot button on the right of the header, or ",[35,3519,3520],{},"⌘J"," on a Mac \u002F ",[35,3523,3524],{},"Ctrl+J",". The panel opens beside the workspace; on narrow screens it appears as a sheet.",[11,3527,2732,3528,3531,3532,3535],{},[35,3529,3530],{},"⌘K \u002F Ctrl+K"," to open command search. Then ",[35,3533,3534],{},"Send to assistant: “…”"," appears when your search has no matches or contains at least four words. Selecting it opens the panel and immediately sends the search text as a task.",[11,3537,3538],{},"Opening project history from the project menu or history button shows team activity in the studio. Outside the studio, it opens the separate history sheet.",[27,3540,3542],{"id":3541},"what-do-the-filters-show","What do the filters show?",[11,3544,3545],{},"The timeline groups entries by day, with the newest day first. Within a day, entries run from earliest to latest. The header also shows how many members are online.",[638,3547,3548,3558],{},[641,3549,3550],{},[644,3551,3552,3555],{},[647,3553,3554],{},"Filter",[647,3556,3557],{},"Content",[657,3559,3560,3570,3580],{},[644,3561,3562,3567],{},[662,3563,3564],{},[35,3565,3566],{},"All",[662,3568,3569],{},"Loaded project changes, assistant messages and actions.",[644,3571,3572,3577],{},[662,3573,3574],{},[35,3575,3576],{},"Team",[662,3578,3579],{},"All loaded project changes, including assistant changes requested by other team members.",[644,3581,3582,3587],{},[662,3583,3584],{},[35,3585,3586],{},"Assistant",[662,3588,3589],{},"Assistant conversations and actions, plus saved changes marked as originating from the assistant.",[11,3591,3592,3593,3595],{},"The filter bar appears when both history and assistant access are available. With access to just one area, its content appears directly. You can load older project changes. Where a target is available, ",[35,3594,3042],{}," opens its current state, not a historical project copy.",[27,3597,3599],{"id":3598},"how-do-i-give-and-review-a-task","How do I give and review a task?",[105,3601,3602,3605,3611,3614],{},[46,3603,3604],{},"Type your question or describe the change you want in the input field.",[46,3606,2055,3607,3610],{},[35,3608,3609],{},"Send message"," or press Enter. Shift+Enter adds a new line.",[46,3612,3613],{},"Review the response and action cards, including the tool, status and person who requested each action.",[46,3615,3616,3617,90,3620,94],{},"If an action requires confirmation, review it and choose ",[35,3618,3619],{},"Confirm and run",[35,3621,3622],{},"Reject and cancel run",[11,3624,3625,3626,3628],{},"Sending another message is disabled while a task is running. ",[35,3627,2169],{}," stops the running task; it does not automatically reverse changes already made.",[27,3630,3632],{"id":3631},"how-can-i-recognise-an-assistant-change","How can I recognise an assistant change?",[11,3634,3635,3636,3639],{},"Each agent action appears with the person who requested it in the activity panel. Saved assistant changes have a bot tile and ",[35,3637,3638],{},"Assistant · on behalf of …"," in project history. The name identifies the member who gave the task, including when you review another member's changes. The marker remains visible with history access even without your own chat access.",[11,3641,3642,3643,3646],{},"Outside the studio, the history sheet shows a small bot icon next to the actor. Hover over it or focus it with the keyboard to read ",[35,3644,3645],{},"Assistant on behalf of …",". Conversations and read-only actions are not saved project changes.",[27,3648,3650],{"id":3649},"can-i-undo-an-agent-action","Can I undo an agent action?",[11,3652,3653,3654,3656],{},"Supported, completed project changes offer ",[35,3655,3152],{}," on their action card. It is enabled only for the latest eligible change with a valid undo entry and matching project context. Answers, read-only actions and unsupported actions do not offer this option. A history entry alone is not a restore button. After undoing a change, check the action status and the project.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":3658},[3659,3660,3661,3662,3663],{"id":3513,"depth":291,"text":3514},{"id":3541,"depth":291,"text":3542},{"id":3598,"depth":291,"text":3599},{"id":3631,"depth":291,"text":3632},{"id":3649,"depth":291,"text":3650},"Follow project changes and assistant tasks in the studio, check who requested each action, and give the PlanElec assistant instructions in your own words.","studio-activity-assistant",{},10,"\u002Fhelp\u002Fstudio-aktivitaet-assistent.en","2026-09-15","4 min",{"title":3502,"description":3664},"help\u002Fstudio-aktivitaet-assistent.en",[3674,3675,3586,3676],"Studio","Project history","AI","2026-10-03","0g5ObX_sXduxVyuTSTSzA4uiB6EtggV_7e-OviJ6jHQ",[3680,4537,5117,5633,6229,6748,7244,8206,8831,8956,9092,10308,11049,12534,13644,14208,14826,15285,15889,16341,16795,17301,17855,18355,18948,19400,19963,20448,20653,21028,21233,21739,22546,23063,23323,23793,24038,24875,25147,25550,25813,26634,27960,28692,28991,29407,29627,30008,30589,30886,31122,31408,31806,32096,32430,32888,33747,34568],{"id":3681,"title":3682,"articleId":3683,"body":3684,"category":4526,"date":4527,"description":4528,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":4530,"navigation":308,"path":4531,"publishDate":4527,"readTime":312,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":4533,"seoTitle":305,"slug":4534,"stem":4535,"tags":305,"__hash__":4536},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fbest-single-line-diagram-software-2026.en.md","Best Single-Line Diagram Software 2026: 5 Tools Compared","best-single-line-diagram-software",{"type":8,"value":3685,"toc":4507},[3686,3692,3695,3699,4005,4008,4012,4023,4026,4031,4066,4071,4085,4091,4095,4098,4104,4108,4122,4126,4146,4151,4155,4160,4163,4167,4184,4188,4202,4207,4211,4216,4219,4223,4237,4241,4254,4262,4266,4271,4278,4282,4293,4297,4314,4319,4323,4327,4333,4337,4343,4347,4353,4357,4363,4367,4370,4415,4419,4422,4426,4472,4475,4479,4492,4496],[11,3687,3688,3691],{},[35,3689,3690],{},"For Belgian residential and smaller commercial projects, PlanElec is the strongest choice when floor plan, circuits, distribution board, single-line diagram and situation plan should come together in one browser project – with an AI assistant, plan recognition and an AREI\u002FRGIE self-check."," Established desktop diagram software suits pure NL\u002FFR workflows on your own computer, AutoCAD Electrical suits engineering firms and large projects, and Eplan suits industrial panel building. Excel or paper is only enough for very small installations.",[11,3693,3694],{},"We reviewed this comparison on 29 August 2026 against public vendor information and updated the PlanElec, platform and AI information on 3 October 2026. We compare workflows, not compliance or inspection success, and state prices where the vendor publishes them.",[27,3696,3698],{"id":3697},"the-comprehensive-comparison-table","The Comprehensive Comparison Table",[638,3700,3701,3723],{},[641,3702,3703],{},[644,3704,3705,3708,3711,3714,3717,3720],{},[647,3706,3707],{},"Criterion",[647,3709,3710],{},"PlanElec",[647,3712,3713],{},"Classic desktop software (NL\u002FFR)",[647,3715,3716],{},"AutoCAD Electrical",[647,3718,3719],{},"Eplan",[647,3721,3722],{},"Excel\u002FPaper",[657,3724,3725,3747,3769,3790,3811,3829,3847,3865,3886,3908,3925,3945,3963,3984],{},[644,3726,3727,3732,3735,3738,3741,3744],{},[662,3728,3729],{},[35,3730,3731],{},"Price status",[662,3733,3734],{},"Early Access EUR 0",[662,3736,3737],{},"public: EUR 45\u002Fmonth or EUR 360\u002Fyear excl. VAT",[662,3739,3740],{},"check vendor",[662,3742,3743],{},"request quotation",[662,3745,3746],{},"own time",[644,3748,3749,3754,3757,3760,3763,3766],{},[662,3750,3751],{},[35,3752,3753],{},"Target audience",[662,3755,3756],{},"Electrical contractors + sole traders",[662,3758,3759],{},"Electricians",[662,3761,3762],{},"Engineering firms",[662,3764,3765],{},"Industry",[662,3767,3768],{},"Everyone",[644,3770,3771,3776,3779,3782,3785,3787],{},[662,3772,3773],{},[35,3774,3775],{},"AREI assistance",[662,3777,3778],{},"Guided self-check",[662,3780,3781],{},"Manual",[662,3783,3784],{},"⚠️ Configurable",[662,3786,3784],{},[662,3788,3789],{},"❌",[644,3791,3792,3797,3800,3803,3806,3808],{},[662,3793,3794],{},[35,3795,3796],{},"AI assistant in project",[662,3798,3799],{},"✅ PlanElec assistant",[662,3801,3802],{},"not described",[662,3804,3805],{},"not assessed here",[662,3807,3805],{},[662,3809,3810],{},"–",[644,3812,3813,3818,3821,3823,3825,3827],{},[662,3814,3815],{},[35,3816,3817],{},"Plan\u002Fscan recognition",[662,3819,3820],{},"✅ PDF, scan, image",[662,3822,3802],{},[662,3824,3805],{},[662,3826,3805],{},[662,3828,3810],{},[644,3830,3831,3836,3839,3841,3843,3845],{},[662,3832,3833],{},[35,3834,3835],{},"Board from photos",[662,3837,3838],{},"✅ DIN modules as a proposal",[662,3840,3802],{},[662,3842,3805],{},[662,3844,3805],{},[662,3846,3810],{},[644,3848,3849,3854,3857,3859,3861,3863],{},[662,3850,3851],{},[35,3852,3853],{},"Check of every AI change",[662,3855,3856],{},"✅ AREI self-check, one-step undo",[662,3858,3810],{},[662,3860,3805],{},[662,3862,3805],{},[662,3864,3810],{},[644,3866,3867,3872,3875,3878,3881,3883],{},[662,3868,3869],{},[35,3870,3871],{},"Languages",[662,3873,3874],{},"DE, NL, FR, EN",[662,3876,3877],{},"NL, FR",[662,3879,3880],{},"Multi",[662,3882,3880],{},[662,3884,3885],{},"-",[644,3887,3888,3893,3896,3899,3902,3905],{},[662,3889,3890],{},[35,3891,3892],{},"Situation plan",[662,3894,3895],{},"✅",[662,3897,3898],{},"✅ per vendor",[662,3900,3901],{},"technically drawable",[662,3903,3904],{},"project-specific",[662,3906,3907],{},"manual",[644,3909,3910,3915,3917,3919,3921,3923],{},[662,3911,3912],{},[35,3913,3914],{},"Board editor",[662,3916,3895],{},[662,3918,3789],{},[662,3920,3895],{},[662,3922,3895],{},[662,3924,3789],{},[644,3926,3927,3932,3934,3937,3940,3942],{},[662,3928,3929],{},[35,3930,3931],{},"Cloud\u002FBrowser",[662,3933,3895],{},[662,3935,3936],{},"❌ Desktop",[662,3938,3939],{},"⚠️ Cloud option",[662,3941,3789],{},[662,3943,3944],{},"⚠️",[644,3946,3947,3952,3955,3957,3959,3961],{},[662,3948,3949],{},[35,3950,3951],{},"Mobile",[662,3953,3954],{},"✅ browser, including tablet",[662,3956,3789],{},[662,3958,3789],{},[662,3960,3789],{},[662,3962,3944],{},[644,3964,3965,3970,3973,3976,3979,3982],{},[662,3966,3967],{},[35,3968,3969],{},"Learning curve",[662,3971,3972],{},"Low",[662,3974,3975],{},"Medium",[662,3977,3978],{},"High",[662,3980,3981],{},"Very high",[662,3983,3885],{},[644,3985,3986,3991,3994,3997,4000,4002],{},[662,3987,3988],{},[35,3989,3990],{},"Belgian scope",[662,3992,3993],{},"V06 text; self-check of the documented rules",[662,3995,3996],{},"vendor markets current AREI support",[662,3998,3999],{},"not assessed here as AREI check",[662,4001,3999],{},[662,4003,4004],{},"none",[11,4006,4007],{},"\"Not described\" means the vendor's pages did not mention the feature on the review date. That does not prove the feature is missing.",[27,4009,4011],{"id":4010},"_1-planelec-for-belgian-electrical-contractors-and-sole-traders","1. PlanElec — For Belgian Electrical Contractors and Sole Traders",[11,4013,4014,4017,4018,4022],{},[35,4015,4016],{},"Price:"," Free during Early Access, including the AI features within a personal AI allowance. The planned plans, from EUR 15 per property or EUR 29\u002Fmonth excluding VAT, are on the ",[23,4019,4021],{"href":4020},"\u002Fen\u002Fpricing","pricing page","; the start date will be announced in advance.",[11,4024,4025],{},"PlanElec is a web application for the Belgian market. You plan the floor plan, electrical topology and distribution board in one project, then export the single-line diagram and situation plan. AI features speed up data capture: the PlanElec assistant carries out requests in your own words across the whole project, floor plan recognition reads plans from a PDF, scan or image, and cabinet photos become a proposed board layout. The built-in self-check shows you findings within the supported rule scope; the official conformity inspection is carried out by the accredited inspection body.",[11,4027,4028],{},[35,4029,4030],{},"Strengths:",[43,4032,4033,4036,4039,4042,4045,4048,4051,4054,4057,4060,4063],{},[46,4034,4035],{},"One project model for the floor plan, topology, and distribution board",[46,4037,4038],{},"PlanElec assistant across the whole project: after every change the AREI self-check checks the project, every change can be undone in one step, and risky actions need confirmation",[46,4040,4041],{},"Technical answers from the assistant with verified sources; language model in the EU region, and the AI provider does not store your requests or use them for training",[46,4043,4044],{},"Floor plan recognition from PDFs or scans, including Trikker PDFs: walls, rooms, doors\u002Fwindows, supported device symbols and scale",[46,4046,4047],{},"Cabinet photos become a reviewable proposal of DIN modules",[46,4049,4050],{},"Integrated situation plan editor with floor plan drawing",[46,4052,4053],{},"Board editor for visual distribution board planning",[46,4055,4056],{},"Central PDF output for the single-line diagram and situation plan",[46,4058,4059],{},"Four languages (German, Dutch, French, English)",[46,4061,4062],{},"Cloud-based: works on any device, no installation needed",[46,4064,4065],{},"Guided AREI self-check with a transparent rules baseline",[11,4067,4068],{},[35,4069,4070],{},"Weaknesses:",[43,4072,4073,4076,4079,4082],{},[46,4074,4075],{},"Young vendor: material list and KNX documentation in pilot",[46,4077,4078],{},"Designed for residential and smaller commercial projects, not for very large commercial installations",[46,4080,4081],{},"The self-check covers the documented rules, not every rule in the V06 text",[46,4083,4084],{},"Internet connection required",[11,4086,4087,4090],{},[35,4088,4089],{},"Ideal for:"," Belgian electrical contractors and sole traders who want to plan and document residential projects in the browser, including existing projects with PDF plans or cabinet photos.",[27,4092,4094],{"id":4093},"_2-classic-desktop-diagram-software-established-among-electricians","2. Classic Desktop Diagram Software — Established Among Electricians",[11,4096,4097],{},"Besides PlanElec, there is established desktop diagram software that has been in use among Belgian electricians for years. These programs are geared toward pure NL\u002FFR workflows and are installed locally on the machine.",[11,4099,4100,4103],{},[35,4101,4102],{},"Public price on 29 August 2026:"," EUR 45 monthly or EUR 360 yearly excluding VAT; demo limits apply.",[11,4105,4106],{},[35,4107,4030],{},[43,4109,4110,4113,4116,4119],{},[46,4111,4112],{},"Established and well-known in the industry",[46,4114,4115],{},"Extensive symbol library according to AREI",[46,4117,4118],{},"Optimized for professional electricians",[46,4120,4121],{},"Good support in NL\u002FFR",[11,4123,4124],{},[35,4125,4070],{},[43,4127,4128,4131,4134,4137,4140,4143],{},[46,4129,4130],{},"Subscription model (€360\u002Fyear)",[46,4132,4133],{},"Installed application with a licence per computer; Windows, plus a macOS beta since 30 September 2026, web version announced",[46,4135,4136],{},"Desktop only — no cloud, no mobile",[46,4138,4139],{},"Situation plan is included; project scope differs from PlanElec",[46,4141,4142],{},"Vendor conformity claims are not an independent inspection",[46,4144,4145],{},"No German, no English",[11,4147,4148,4150],{},[35,4149,4089],{}," Professional electricians with regular projects.",[27,4152,4154],{"id":4153},"_3-autocad-electrical-for-large-projects-and-engineering-firms","3. AutoCAD Electrical — For Large Projects and Engineering Firms",[11,4156,4157,4159],{},[35,4158,4016],{}," check the current Autodesk offer; no unverified annual amount is used here.",[11,4161,4162],{},"AutoCAD Electrical is the electrical extension of Autodesk's well-known CAD program. It is a professional tool for engineers and large design firms that goes far beyond single-line diagrams.",[11,4164,4165],{},[35,4166,4030],{},[43,4168,4169,4172,4175,4178,4181],{},[46,4170,4171],{},"Extremely powerful for all types of electrical plans",[46,4173,4174],{},"Large symbol libraries (including IEC 60617)",[46,4176,4177],{},"Industry standard in many engineering firms",[46,4179,4180],{},"Automatic numbering and cross-references",[46,4182,4183],{},"Cloud options available",[11,4185,4186],{},[35,4187,4070],{},[43,4189,4190,4193,4196,4199],{},[46,4191,4192],{},"Broad industrial feature scope and corresponding learning investment",[46,4194,4195],{},"Steep learning curve — weeks to months of training",[46,4197,4198],{},"Not tailored to the Belgian AREI\u002FRGIE, no AREI validation",[46,4200,4201],{},"Overkill for residential construction",[11,4203,4204,4206],{},[35,4205,4089],{}," Engineering firms, large commercial\u002Findustrial projects, professionals with CAD experience.",[27,4208,4210],{"id":4209},"_4-eplan-industry-standard-for-switchgear-construction","4. Eplan — Industry Standard for Switchgear Construction",[11,4212,4213,4215],{},[35,4214,4016],{}," licence and quotation dependent; no unverified flat amount is stated.",[11,4217,4218],{},"Eplan is the industry standard for planning switchgear installations and automation technology. The software is used worldwide in industry and offers comprehensive features for switchgear construction.",[11,4220,4221],{},[35,4222,4030],{},[43,4224,4225,4228,4231,4234],{},[46,4226,4227],{},"Most comprehensive software for switchgear planning",[46,4229,4230],{},"3D switchgear cabinet planning",[46,4232,4233],{},"Bill of materials generation and ERP integration",[46,4235,4236],{},"Global industry standard",[11,4238,4239],{},[35,4240,4070],{},[43,4242,4243,4246,4249,4252],{},[46,4244,4245],{},"Licensing and implementation need project-specific confirmation",[46,4247,4248],{},"Very long training period",[46,4250,4251],{},"Entirely oriented toward industry — not for residential construction",[46,4253,4198],{},[11,4255,4256,4258,4259],{},[35,4257,4089],{}," Industrial switchgear planning, mechanical engineering, automation companies. ",[35,4260,4261],{},"Not for residential construction.",[27,4263,4265],{"id":4264},"_5-excelpaper-the-free-option","5. Excel\u002FPaper — The \"Free\" Option",[11,4267,4268,4270],{},[35,4269,4016],{}," \"Free\"",[11,4272,4273,4274,94],{},"Still widespread among private individuals: hand-drawn on paper or put together in Excel. We describe the problems in detail in our ",[23,4275,4277],{"href":4276},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fplanelec-vs-excel-paper","comprehensive comparison",[11,4279,4280],{},[35,4281,4030],{},[43,4283,4284,4287,4290],{},[46,4285,4286],{},"No costs (at first glance)",[46,4288,4289],{},"No software installation needed",[46,4291,4292],{},"Everyone has paper or Excel",[11,4294,4295],{},[35,4296,4070],{},[43,4298,4299,4302,4305,4308,4311],{},[46,4300,4301],{},"No built-in Belgian symbol library and no automated check",[46,4303,4304],{},"No automatic layout",[46,4306,4307],{},"You draw or explain the correct symbols yourself, and you alone check whether the content matches the installation",[46,4309,4310],{},"Difficult to modify",[46,4312,4313],{},"No check signal before the inspection",[11,4315,4316,4318],{},[35,4317,4089],{}," At most, very simple installations (1-2 circuits).",[27,4320,4322],{"id":4321},"recommendation-by-target-audience","Recommendation by Target Audience",[385,4324,4326],{"id":4325},"homeowners-diyers","Homeowners \u002F DIYers",[11,4328,4329,4332],{},[35,4330,4331],{},"Recommendation with clear roles: PlanElec"," — You plan and document your installation in PlanElec. Before the work and the inspection, you have a qualified electrician review the design and documents; the inspection itself is carried out by the accredited inspection body.",[385,4334,4336],{"id":4335},"professional-electricians-belgium","Professional Electricians (Belgium)",[11,4338,4339,4342],{},[35,4340,4341],{},"Recommendation: PlanElec or classic desktop diagram software"," — PlanElec is the stronger choice when the floor plan, topology, distribution board, and central PDFs should come together in one browser-based project and existing PDF plans or cabinet photos provide the starting point. The assistant takes on routine requests; each of its changes is checked and reversible. For pure NL\u002FFR workflows in a familiar desktop environment, established diagram software remains a solid choice. The self-check shows you findings within the supported rule scope; responsibility for the design stays with you.",[385,4344,4346],{"id":4345},"engineering-firms-large-projects","Engineering Firms \u002F Large Projects",[11,4348,4349,4352],{},[35,4350,4351],{},"Recommendation: AutoCAD Electrical"," — For large commercial or industrial projects, AutoCAD Electrical is the right choice. Cost and learning curve are acceptable for professionals.",[385,4354,4356],{"id":4355},"industry-switchgear-construction","Industry \u002F Switchgear Construction",[11,4358,4359,4362],{},[35,4360,4361],{},"Recommendation: Eplan"," — For industrial applications, Eplan is the obvious choice. For residential construction, it is clearly overkill.",[27,4364,4366],{"id":4365},"planelec-in-early-access","PlanElec in Early Access",[11,4368,4369],{},"During Early Access, you use PlanElec for free and test the workflow on a project of your own:",[43,4371,4372,4375,4383,4389,4392,4398,4404,4407,4409,4412],{},[46,4373,4374],{},"Early Access without active billing",[46,4376,4377,4378,4382],{},"PlanElec assistant with an AREI self-check after every change (",[23,4379,4381],{"href":4380},"\u002Fen\u002Fhelp\u002Fstudio-activity-assistant","Activity and the assistant in the studio",")",[46,4384,4385,4386,4382],{},"Floor plan recognition from a PDF, scan or image (",[23,4387,1987],{"href":4388},"\u002Fen\u002Fhelp\u002Fimport-and-calibrate-a-floor-plan",[46,4390,4391],{},"DIN modules from cabinet photos",[46,4393,4394,4395,4382],{},"Automatic planning from room equipment to board layout (",[23,4396,4397],{"href":142},"Automatic planning",[46,4399,4400,4401,4382],{},"Guided AREI self-check with a stated rules baseline (",[23,4402,4403],{"href":2953},"What the self-check verifies",[46,4405,4406],{},"Integrated situation plan",[46,4408,3914],{},[46,4410,4411],{},"Four languages",[46,4413,4414],{},"Browser-based operation without installation",[27,4416,4418],{"id":4417},"conclusion","Conclusion",[11,4420,4421],{},"For Belgian residential projects, PlanElec brings the floor plan, circuits, distribution board and documents together in one project, with AI that reads in plans and photos and carries out requests, and a self-check that reviews every assistant change. No tool decides the inspection outcome: complete, accurate documents matching the installation are decisive.",[27,4423,4425],{"id":4424},"sources-and-review-date","Sources and review date",[43,4427,4428,4448,4455,4462,4469],{},[46,4429,4430,2152,4436,4441,4442,4447],{},[23,4431,4435],{"href":4432,"rel":4433},"https:\u002F\u002Fwww.trikker.be\u002Fen",[4434],"nofollow","Trikker features",[23,4437,4440],{"href":4438,"rel":4439},"https:\u002F\u002Fwww.trikker.be\u002Fpricing",[4434],"public pricing",", reviewed 29 August 2026; platform and AI information checked on the homepage and in the ",[23,4443,4446],{"href":4444,"rel":4445},"https:\u002F\u002Fwww.trikker.be\u002Ffr\u002Fblog\u002Factualites-2\u002Ftrikker-2-0-en-beta-une-nouvelle-base-desormais-aussi-sur-macos-14",[4434],"Trikker 2.0 announcement"," on 3 October 2026.",[46,4449,4450,94],{},[23,4451,4454],{"href":4452,"rel":4453},"https:\u002F\u002Fwww.autodesk.com\u002Fuk\u002Fproducts\u002Fautocad\u002Fincluded-toolsets\u002Fautocad-electrical",[4434],"Autodesk AutoCAD 2026 Electrical Toolset",[46,4456,4457,94],{},[23,4458,4461],{"href":4459,"rel":4460},"https:\u002F\u002Fwww.eplan.com\u002Fcontent\u002Fdam\u002Feplan\u002Fcorporate\u002Fperformance-descriptions\u002F2026\u002Fen\u002Fperformance-description-eplan-electric-p8-basic.pdf",[4434],"Eplan Electric P8 2026 official description",[46,4463,4464,94],{},[23,4465,4468],{"href":4466,"rel":4467},"https:\u002F\u002Feconomie.fgov.be\u002Ffr\u002Fpublications\u002Freglement-general-sur-les",[4434],"FPS Economy AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 V06",[46,4470,4471],{},"AI features of AutoCAD Electrical and Eplan are not assessed in this comparison.",[4473,4474],"hr",{},[27,4476,4478],{"id":4477},"related-articles","Related Articles",[43,4480,4481,4486],{},[46,4482,4483],{},[23,4484,4485],{"href":4276},"PlanElec vs. Excel\u002FPaper",[46,4487,4488],{},[23,4489,4491],{"href":4490},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Ftrikker-alternative","Trikker alternative PlanElec: features and prices compared",[27,4493,4495],{"id":4494},"choose-the-right-tool-now","Choose the Right Tool Now",[11,4497,4498,4499,4501,4502],{},"Plan your project with ",[35,4500,3710],{},": draw the floor plan or have it recognised from a PDF, give the assistant requests and export the single-line diagram and situation plan directly in the browser. The AREI self-check shows you in advance what is still open within the supported rule scope; the official inspection is carried out by the accredited inspection body. ",[23,4503,4506],{"href":4504,"rel":4505},"https:\u002F\u002Fplanelec.be",[4434],"Get started now →",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":4508},[4509,4510,4511,4512,4513,4514,4515,4521,4522,4523,4524,4525],{"id":3697,"depth":291,"text":3698},{"id":4010,"depth":291,"text":4011},{"id":4093,"depth":291,"text":4094},{"id":4153,"depth":291,"text":4154},{"id":4209,"depth":291,"text":4210},{"id":4264,"depth":291,"text":4265},{"id":4321,"depth":291,"text":4322,"children":4516},[4517,4518,4519,4520],{"id":4325,"depth":599,"text":4326},{"id":4335,"depth":599,"text":4336},{"id":4345,"depth":599,"text":4346},{"id":4355,"depth":599,"text":4356},{"id":4365,"depth":291,"text":4366},{"id":4417,"depth":291,"text":4418},{"id":4424,"depth":291,"text":4425},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":4478},{"id":4494,"depth":291,"text":4495},"comparison","2099-12-31","For Belgian residential and smaller commercial projects, PlanElec is the strongest choice when floor plan, circuits, distribution board, single-line diagram and situation plan should come together in one browser project – with an AI assistant, plan recognition and an AREI\u002FRGIE self-check. Established desktop diagram software suits pure NL\u002FFR workflows on your own computer, AutoCAD Electrical suits engineering firms and large projects, and Eplan suits industrial panel building. Excel or paper is only enough for very small installations.","2026-10-05",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fbest-single-line-diagram-software-2026.en",12,{"title":3682,"description":4528},"best-single-line-diagram-software-2026","blog\u002Fbest-single-line-diagram-software-2026.en","GfAboq8BYlUV5hoAlpB9uTDq4bFDTwRAjvu3XNi0glo",{"id":4538,"title":4539,"articleId":4540,"body":4541,"category":5101,"date":4529,"description":5102,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":5103,"navigation":308,"path":5104,"publishDate":4529,"readTime":610,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":5105,"seoTitle":5106,"slug":5107,"stem":5108,"tags":5109,"__hash__":5116},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fled-strip-power-supply.en.md","LED Strip Calculation: Which Power Supply, How Many Feed Points, Which Cable Size?","led-strip-power-supply",{"type":8,"value":4542,"toc":5081},[4543,4554,4558,4561,4575,4578,4703,4706,4710,4717,4720,4724,4727,4789,4795,4799,4806,4813,4817,4820,4834,4837,4909,4920,4924,4927,4947,4951,4954,4960,4966,4976,4980,4986,4989,4992,4996,5000,5003,5007,5010,5014,5017,5021,5024,5028,5031,5035,5038,5042,5052,5055,5073],[11,4544,4545,4548,4549,4553],{},[35,4546,4547],{},"An LED strip draws its watts per metre times its length, its current is that power divided by the voltage, and you size the power supply with about 20% reserve. Five metres of 14.4 W\u002Fm strip at 24 V need 72 W and 3 A, so a 100 W power supply fits."," Two lengths then decide the quality: how far the strip may run from one feed point, and how long the cable from the power supply to the strip is. You calculate both in a minute with the ",[23,4550,4552],{"href":4551},"\u002Fen\u002Ftools\u002Fled-strip-calculator","free LED strip calculator",", then plan the installation in PlanElec all the way to the single-line diagram.",[27,4555,4557],{"id":4556},"how-do-you-calculate-the-power-and-current-of-an-led-strip","How do you calculate the power and current of an LED strip?",[11,4559,4560],{},"Two formulas are enough:",[43,4562,4563,4569],{},[46,4564,4565,4566],{},"power: ",[842,4567,4568],{},"P = W\u002Fm × length",[46,4570,4571,4572],{},"current: ",[842,4573,4574],{},"I = P \u002F U",[11,4576,4577],{},"Power per metre is in the datasheet and applies at full brightness. For multi-channel strips (CCT, RGB, RGBW) it is the value with all channels at full load. Plan with that value, even if you rarely run all colours at once. Use the length you actually install: a strip can only be cut at its cut marks, typically every 50 or 100 mm. With a 50 mm cut unit, 2.37 m becomes 2.35 m.",[638,4579,4580,4599],{},[641,4581,4582],{},[644,4583,4584,4587,4590,4593,4596],{},[647,4585,4586],{},"Strip 24 V, 14.4 W\u002Fm",[647,4588,4589],{},"Power",[647,4591,4592],{},"Current",[647,4594,4595],{},"Required with 20% reserve",[647,4597,4598],{},"Power supply",[657,4600,4601,4618,4635,4652,4669,4686],{},[644,4602,4603,4606,4609,4612,4615],{},[662,4604,4605],{},"2 m",[662,4607,4608],{},"28.8 W",[662,4610,4611],{},"1.2 A",[662,4613,4614],{},"34.6 W",[662,4616,4617],{},"36 W",[644,4619,4620,4623,4626,4629,4632],{},[662,4621,4622],{},"3 m",[662,4624,4625],{},"43.2 W",[662,4627,4628],{},"1.8 A",[662,4630,4631],{},"51.8 W",[662,4633,4634],{},"60 W",[644,4636,4637,4640,4643,4646,4649],{},[662,4638,4639],{},"5 m",[662,4641,4642],{},"72 W",[662,4644,4645],{},"3.0 A",[662,4647,4648],{},"86.4 W",[662,4650,4651],{},"100 W",[644,4653,4654,4657,4660,4663,4666],{},[662,4655,4656],{},"8 m",[662,4658,4659],{},"115.2 W",[662,4661,4662],{},"4.8 A",[662,4664,4665],{},"138.2 W",[662,4667,4668],{},"150 W",[644,4670,4671,4674,4677,4680,4683],{},[662,4672,4673],{},"10 m",[662,4675,4676],{},"144 W",[662,4678,4679],{},"6.0 A",[662,4681,4682],{},"172.8 W",[662,4684,4685],{},"185 W",[644,4687,4688,4691,4694,4697,4700],{},[662,4689,4690],{},"15 m",[662,4692,4693],{},"216 W",[662,4695,4696],{},"9.0 A",[662,4698,4699],{},"259.2 W",[662,4701,4702],{},"320 W",[11,4704,4705],{},"The power-supply column shows the next common commercial rating. Your power supply's datasheet sets the actual range.",[27,4707,4709],{"id":4708},"how-large-must-the-power-supply-be","How large must the power supply be?",[11,4711,4712,4713,4716],{},"Calculate ",[842,4714,4715],{},"power supply ≥ P × 1.2",". The 20% reserve keeps the power supply cool and long-lived and covers strip and supply tolerances. If the supply sits in a tight suspended ceiling, inside furniture or at high ambient temperature, the datasheet derating applies on top: many units deliver less than their rated power there.",[11,4718,4719],{},"The same formula answers the reverse question of how much strip an existing supply can carry. A 60 W supply delivers 50 W with reserve: just over 5 m of a 9.6 W\u002Fm strip or almost 3.5 m of a 14.4 W\u002Fm strip. If the largest supply is not enough, split the installation into sections, each with its own power supply.",[27,4721,4723],{"id":4722},"_12-v-24-v-or-48-v","12 V, 24 V or 48 V?",[11,4725,4726],{},"At the same power, doubling the voltage halves the current, and the voltage drop in the cable falls in the same ratio. For 60 W over a 5 m feed cable of 1.5 mm² copper:",[638,4728,4729,4745],{},[641,4730,4731],{},[644,4732,4733,4736,4739,4742],{},[647,4734,4735],{},"Voltage",[647,4737,4738],{},"Current at 60 W",[647,4740,4741],{},"Feed-cable voltage drop",[647,4743,4744],{},"in %",[657,4746,4747,4761,4775],{},[644,4748,4749,4752,4755,4758],{},[662,4750,4751],{},"12 V",[662,4753,4754],{},"5.0 A",[662,4756,4757],{},"0.58 V",[662,4759,4760],{},"4.9%",[644,4762,4763,4766,4769,4772],{},[662,4764,4765],{},"24 V",[662,4767,4768],{},"2.5 A",[662,4770,4771],{},"0.29 V",[662,4773,4774],{},"1.2%",[644,4776,4777,4780,4783,4786],{},[662,4778,4779],{},"48 V",[662,4781,4782],{},"1.25 A",[662,4784,4785],{},"0.15 V",[662,4787,4788],{},"0.3%",[11,4790,4791,4794],{},[35,4792,4793],{},"24 V is the standard for homes:"," widely available, longer runs per feed point than 12 V and, in bathrooms, within the SELV limits (see below). 12 V still makes sense for short furniture and niche strips or existing 12 V components. 48 V plays to its strengths on long lines and profile systems. 5 V is for digital pixel strips and very short pieces.",[27,4796,4798],{"id":4797},"when-does-an-led-strip-need-several-feed-points","When does an LED strip need several feed points?",[11,4800,4801,4802,4805],{},"Voltage also drops along the strip itself. Fed too far from one end, the far end becomes visibly dimmer, and RGB and RGBW strips shift in colour. Manufacturers therefore state a ",[35,4803,4804],{},"maximum length per feed point",". It is in the datasheet and decreases as the power per metre rises.",[11,4807,4808,4809,4812],{},"The calculation: ",[842,4810,4811],{},"feed points = length ÷ maximum length per feed point",", rounded up. A 12 m strip with a 5 m manufacturer length needs three feed points; each then carries a third of the current. Every feed point gets its own cable from the power supply, run in parallel. For a light cove around a room this means a central power supply and feed points at the corners, rather than one long band fed from one side.",[27,4814,4816],{"id":4815},"which-cross-section-for-the-cable-from-power-supply-to-strip","Which cross-section for the cable from power supply to strip?",[11,4818,4819],{},"Extra-low voltage means high currents at a low voltage, so every metre of cable counts. The formula is the familiar single-phase one without a power factor:",[11,4821,4822,4825,4826,4829,4830,4833],{},[842,4823,4824],{},"ΔU = 2 × ρ × L × I \u002F S",", with ",[842,4827,4828],{},"ρ"," = 0.0175 Ω·mm²\u002Fm for copper and ",[842,4831,4832],{},"L"," the one-way length.",[11,4835,4836],{},"For a 24 V strip drawing 3 A:",[638,4838,4839,4855],{},[641,4840,4841],{},[644,4842,4843,4846,4849,4852],{},[647,4844,4845],{},"Feed cable",[647,4847,4848],{},"0.75 mm²",[647,4850,4851],{},"1.5 mm²",[647,4853,4854],{},"2.5 mm²",[657,4856,4857,4870,4882,4895],{},[644,4858,4859,4861,4864,4867],{},[662,4860,4639],{},[662,4862,4863],{},"0.70 V · 2.9%",[662,4865,4866],{},"0.35 V · 1.5%",[662,4868,4869],{},"0.21 V · 0.9%",[644,4871,4872,4874,4877,4879],{},[662,4873,4673],{},[662,4875,4876],{},"1.40 V · 5.8%",[662,4878,4863],{},[662,4880,4881],{},"0.42 V · 1.8%",[644,4883,4884,4886,4889,4892],{},[662,4885,4690],{},[662,4887,4888],{},"2.10 V · 8.8%",[662,4890,4891],{},"1.05 V · 4.4%",[662,4893,4894],{},"0.63 V · 2.6%",[644,4896,4897,4900,4903,4906],{},[662,4898,4899],{},"max. at 3%",[662,4901,4902],{},"5.1 m",[662,4904,4905],{},"10.3 m",[662,4907,4908],{},"17.1 m",[11,4910,4911,4912,4915,4916,94],{},"We design for ",[35,4913,4914],{},"at most 3% voltage drop"," on the feed cable so the strip lights evenly. The AREI\u002FRGIE sets no fixed percentage for extra-low-voltage feed cables; we adopt the 3% customary for lighting circuits as the design limit. Check the current-carrying capacity of thin cables separately against the manufacturer's data; the calculator therefore only proposes cross-sections from 0.75 mm². The basics of voltage drop at 230 V are in ",[23,4917,4919],{"href":4918},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fvoltage-drop-cable-sizing","Voltage drop calculation",[27,4921,4923],{"id":4922},"what-changes-with-rgb-rgbw-and-tunable-white","What changes with RGB, RGBW and tunable white?",[11,4925,4926],{},"Multi-channel strips split their power across channels: two for CCT (tunable white), three for RGB, four for RGBW, five for RGB+CCT. An RGBW strip of 19.2 W\u002Fm over 4 m draws 76.8 W and 3.2 A, i.e. 0.8 A per channel. That leads to three design points:",[43,4928,4929,4935,4941],{},[46,4930,4931,4934],{},[35,4932,4933],{},"Controller:"," it must supply the current per channel. 0.8 A is easy; 15 m of the same strip at 3 A per channel is beyond some controllers.",[46,4936,4937,4940],{},[35,4938,4939],{},"Number of cores:"," the common positive plus one conductor per channel. Mono needs 2 cores, CCT 3, RGB 4, RGBW 5, RGB+CCT 6.",[46,4942,4943,4946],{},[35,4944,4945],{},"Voltage drop:"," the common positive conductor carries the current of all channels, each channel conductor only its share. The effective current is therefore lower than for a single-channel strip of the same power. In the example with 5 m and 0.75 mm², that gives 1.9% instead of 3.1%. The calculator accounts for this automatically.",[27,4948,4950],{"id":4949},"what-does-the-areirgie-require-for-led-strips","What does the AREI\u002FRGIE require for LED strips?",[11,4952,4953],{},"The AREI (RGIE in French) is the Belgian wiring regulation, Book 1 of the general regulation on electrical installations.",[11,4955,4956,4959],{},[35,4957,4958],{},"Voltage and type of current belong on the single-line diagram."," Subsection 3.1.2.1 a requires them for every domestic installation. A strip behind a power supply is therefore documented as \"24 V ⎓\", not only with the 230 V circuit in front of it. Table 2.23 has its own symbol for this, the AC↔DC rectifier; a safety transformer with AC output gets the transformer symbol.",[11,4961,4962,4965],{},[35,4963,4964],{},"SELV needs an approved source and proper separation."," Subsection 4.2.5.3 a defines the approved sources: an LED power supply with a SELV output qualifies, \"low voltage\" on its own does not. Under 4.2.5.3 c you run SELV conductors 10 mm away from other circuits, with additional insulation, or in a cable that is fully insulated for the highest voltage present. This matters mostly in boxes shared by push button, controller and 230 V wiring.",[11,4967,4968,4971,4972,94],{},[35,4969,4970],{},"In bathrooms, zone and voltage count."," Table 7.2 under subsection 7.1.4.2 a allows at most 12 V AC or 30 V ripple-free DC in zones 0 and 1, and up to 25 V AC or 60 V DC in zone 2. A 24 V DC strip in a shower niche is therefore permitted if it is suitable for that zone. The SELV source, i.e. the power supply, sits outside zones 0 and 1 according to subsection 7.1.5.2. Which cables go into which zone is covered in ",[23,4973,4975],{"href":4974},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fbathroom-cables-arei-zones","Which cables can I use in the bathroom?",[27,4977,4979],{"id":4978},"calculate-online","Calculate online",[11,4981,955,4982,4985],{},[23,4983,4984],{"href":4551},"LED strip calculator"," shows every value from this article at a glance: power, total and per-channel current, required feed points, power-supply size, recommended feed-cable cross-section and the cross-section comparison with voltage drop, end voltage and maximum length. It covers 5, 12, 24 and 48 V, single-colour, CCT, RGB, RGBW and RGB+CCT strips, starts from typical strip types and takes your own datasheet values.",[11,4987,4988],{},"Every result can be shared as a link or printed, which makes it easy to agree with clients and suppliers. AI assistants in the browser use the calculator directly via WebMCP and return the same shareable link.",[11,4990,4991],{},"The roles are clear: the calculator delivers the design from your datasheet values. The manufacturer's datasheet confirms length per feed point, derating, heat dissipation in the profile and the cable's current-carrying capacity.",[27,4993,4995],{"id":4994},"frequently-asked-questions","Frequently asked questions",[385,4997,4999],{"id":4998},"can-i-feed-the-strip-in-the-middle","Can I feed the strip in the middle?",[11,5001,5002],{},"Yes. A centre feed halves the length in each direction and counts as two feed points over half the strip length each. For long lines it is often neater than two cables to both ends.",[385,5004,5006],{"id":5005},"does-every-led-strip-need-an-aluminium-profile","Does every LED strip need an aluminium profile?",[11,5008,5009],{},"From medium power upwards, yes: the profile dissipates heat and, together with the diffuser, shapes the light. The manufacturer sets how much power per metre is allowed without a profile.",[385,5011,5013],{"id":5012},"how-many-metres-fit-on-a-100-w-power-supply","How many metres fit on a 100 W power supply?",[11,5015,5016],{},"With 20% reserve, just over 83 W is available: about 5.8 m at 14.4 W\u002Fm, 8.7 m at 9.6 W\u002Fm or 4.3 m at 19.2 W\u002Fm (RGBW).",[385,5018,5020],{"id":5019},"can-i-connect-two-power-supplies-to-one-strip","Can I connect two power supplies to one strip?",[11,5022,5023],{},"Plan separate sections, each with its own power supply, instead. Only the manufacturer decides whether supplies may run in parallel or on a continuous strip.",[385,5025,5027],{"id":5026},"does-the-power-supply-go-in-the-distribution-board-or-next-to-the-strip","Does the power supply go in the distribution board or next to the strip?",[11,5029,5030],{},"Both work. On the DIN rail in the board it stays accessible and cool, but needs long extra-low-voltage cables, so the cross-section table above decides. Placed near the strip, the feed cable stays short, but the supply must be accessible and suitable for its location.",[385,5032,5034],{"id":5033},"which-cable-goes-between-controller-and-rgbw-strip","Which cable goes between controller and RGBW strip?",[11,5036,5037],{},"A five-core cable (common positive plus four channels), sized for the channel current and the length. RGB+CCT needs six cores.",[27,5039,5041],{"id":5040},"plan-led-lighting-in-planelec","Plan LED lighting in PlanElec",[11,5043,222,5044,5047,5048,5051],{},[23,5045,3710],{"href":5046},"\u002Fen"," you place luminaires, power supply, switches and push buttons directly on the floor plan, assign them to circuits and generate the single-line diagram, situation plan and material list. The self-check monitors, among other things, the number of light points per circuit and the voltage drop. Controls with Shelly or KNX actuators and push buttons are planned in the same project. ",[23,5049,5050],{"href":270},"Sign up for free"," and start your first lighting plan.",[27,5053,5054],{"id":4477},"Related articles",[43,5056,5057,5062,5067],{},[46,5058,5059],{},[23,5060,5061],{"href":4918},"Voltage drop calculation: how long can your cable be?",[46,5063,5064],{},[23,5065,5066],{"href":4974},"Which cables can I use in the bathroom? (AREI zones)",[46,5068,5069],{},[23,5070,5072],{"href":5071},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fsmart-home-domotica-arei","Smart home and AREI: what you need to know about home automation",[11,5074,5075,5076,5080],{},"Official basis: ",[23,5077,5079],{"href":4466,"rel":5078},[4434],"FPS Economy, AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 V06",", in particular subsection 3.1.2.1, table 2.23, subsection 4.2.5.3 and subsections 7.1.4.2 and 7.1.5.2.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":5082},[5083,5084,5085,5086,5087,5088,5089,5090,5091,5099,5100],{"id":4556,"depth":291,"text":4557},{"id":4708,"depth":291,"text":4709},{"id":4722,"depth":291,"text":4723},{"id":4797,"depth":291,"text":4798},{"id":4815,"depth":291,"text":4816},{"id":4922,"depth":291,"text":4923},{"id":4949,"depth":291,"text":4950},{"id":4978,"depth":291,"text":4979},{"id":4994,"depth":291,"text":4995,"children":5092},[5093,5094,5095,5096,5097,5098],{"id":4998,"depth":599,"text":4999},{"id":5005,"depth":599,"text":5006},{"id":5012,"depth":599,"text":5013},{"id":5019,"depth":599,"text":5020},{"id":5026,"depth":599,"text":5027},{"id":5033,"depth":599,"text":5034},{"id":5040,"depth":291,"text":5041},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":5054},"guide","Calculate power, current, power-supply size, feed points and feed cable for 12, 24 and 48 V LED strips. Formulas, tables, the RGBW case, AREI\u002FRGIE rules for SELV and bathrooms, and a free calculator.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fled-strip-power-supply.en",{"title":4539,"description":5102},"LED Strip Calculation: Power Supply, Feeds, Cable Size","led-strip-power-supply-calculation","blog\u002Fled-strip-power-supply.en",[5110,5111,5112,5113,5114,5115],"led-strip","power-supply","lighting","voltage-drop","selv","calculator","7M8Y1DGfkY2NQrbxv2BI7e_kChpOK95VEj0wgtqsXFI",{"id":5118,"title":5119,"articleId":5120,"body":5121,"category":5101,"date":3677,"description":5620,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":5621,"navigation":308,"path":5622,"publishDate":3677,"readTime":610,"refreshInterval":599,"seo":5623,"seoTitle":5624,"slug":5625,"stem":5626,"tags":5627,"__hash__":5632},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fai-assistant-electrical-planning.en.md","AI assistant for electrical planning: what does the PlanElec assistant do in your project?","planelec-ai-assistant",{"type":8,"value":5122,"toc":5601},[5123,5129,5132,5136,5139,5142,5145,5149,5152,5299,5304,5308,5311,5348,5357,5363,5368,5372,5378,5446,5451,5462,5466,5476,5479,5483,5492,5501,5505,5512,5515,5519,5525,5528,5532,5535,5538,5542,5546,5549,5553,5561,5565,5572,5576,5579,5583,5586,5590],[11,5124,5125,5128],{},[35,5126,5127],{},"The PlanElec assistant is the AI assistant in the PlanElec studio: you describe in your own words what should happen in the project, and it applies the change across the whole project model – floor plan, devices, circuits, cables, distribution board, KNX, PV strings and lighting control."," Clear, reversible changes run straight away; risky actions wait for your confirmation. After every change the server checks the entire project with the same AREI\u002FRGIE self-check used by the report, and you undo any change in one step. It answers technical questions with verified sources from the AREI text and the PlanElec help centre. During Early Access the assistant is free for every signed-in account.",[11,5130,5131],{},"PlanElec is built for electrical planning in Belgium, so the rules referred to here are the Belgian AREI (in French: RGIE).",[27,5133,5135],{"id":5134},"what-is-the-planelec-assistant","What is the PlanElec assistant?",[11,5137,5138],{},"The PlanElec assistant is a language model that works through PlanElec's own planning commands. It does not draw freely on your plan; it works with the same commands as the interface: more than 100 planning commands covering the floor plan and situation plan, rooms, devices, circuits, switch chains, cables, distribution boards, automation and KNX, PV strings and lighting control. It also creates projects and floors and navigates the interface for you.",[11,5140,5141],{},"Before it changes anything, the assistant reads the project: overview, structure, current check findings and the device catalogue. It plans with exactly the state you have in front of you – not a copy or a guess.",[11,5143,5144],{},"The assistant acts with your project permissions. Someone who may view a project but not edit it cannot change it through the assistant either.",[27,5146,5148],{"id":5147},"what-can-the-assistant-do-in-a-project","What can the assistant do in a project?",[11,5150,5151],{},"The assistant covers the planning workflow from an empty project to a populated distribution board. The table shows typical instructions per area. The wording is illustrative – write the way you would brief a colleague.",[638,5153,5154,5167],{},[641,5155,5156],{},[644,5157,5158,5161,5164],{},[647,5159,5160],{},"Area",[647,5162,5163],{},"Example instruction",[647,5165,5166],{},"What happens",[657,5168,5169,5180,5191,5202,5213,5223,5234,5245,5255,5266,5277,5288],{},[644,5170,5171,5174,5177],{},[662,5172,5173],{},"Project and floors",[662,5175,5176],{},"\"Create a new project and add a first floor.\"",[662,5178,5179],{},"Project and floor are created; the assistant can take you straight there.",[644,5181,5182,5185,5188],{},[662,5183,5184],{},"Floor plan and rooms",[662,5186,5187],{},"\"Split the living room into a lounge and a dining area and name both rooms.\"",[662,5189,5190],{},"Room geometry and names are updated in the floor plan.",[644,5192,5193,5196,5199],{},[662,5194,5195],{},"Devices",[662,5197,5198],{},"\"Place three socket outlets in the kitchen.\"",[662,5200,5201],{},"The outlets appear on the floor plan, ready for a circuit and the single-line diagram.",[644,5203,5204,5207,5210],{},[662,5205,5206],{},"Standard equipment",[662,5208,5209],{},"\"Create a standard installation for this project.\"",[662,5211,5212],{},"Rooms receive a proposed basic set of devices that you then adjust.",[644,5214,5215,5217,5220],{},[662,5216,3133],{},[662,5218,5219],{},"\"Add a dedicated cooker circuit with protection to the kitchen.\"",[662,5221,5222],{},"Circuit and protective device are created in the topology and appear in the single-line diagram.",[644,5224,5225,5228,5231],{},[662,5226,5227],{},"Switch chains and lighting",[662,5229,5230],{},"\"Control the hallway spots from the two switches by the doors.\"",[662,5232,5233],{},"The switch chain between switches and light points is built.",[644,5235,5236,5239,5242],{},[662,5237,5238],{},"Cables",[662,5240,5241],{},"\"Create a cable route for every cable that does not have one yet.\"",[662,5243,5244],{},"Missing routes follow the walls; existing routes stay as they are.",[644,5246,5247,5249,5252],{},[662,5248,3497],{},[662,5250,5251],{},"\"Lay out the circuits in the distribution board and balance the phases.\"",[662,5253,5254],{},"Modules are placed on DIN rails and loads are spread across the phases.",[644,5256,5257,5260,5263],{},[662,5258,5259],{},"KNX and automation",[662,5261,5262],{},"\"Assign the living-room lights to free channels on the KNX switching actuator.\"",[662,5264,5265],{},"The KNX actuator channel assignment is set and documented in the single-line diagram.",[644,5267,5268,5271,5274],{},[662,5269,5270],{},"PV",[662,5272,5273],{},"\"Propose the PV strings for the inverter.\"",[662,5275,5276],{},"Strings are assigned to MPPT inputs; missing data remains visible.",[644,5278,5279,5282,5285],{},[662,5280,5281],{},"Check findings",[662,5283,5284],{},"\"Explain the current validation findings in this project.\"",[662,5286,5287],{},"The assistant reads the self-check findings and explains cause and affected items.",[644,5289,5290,5293,5296],{},[662,5291,5292],{},"Technical question",[662,5294,5295],{},"\"Which AREI rule applies to residual-current protection? Show me the source.\"",[662,5297,5298],{},"An answer backed by verified sources from the AREI text and the PlanElec help centre.",[11,5300,5301,5302,94],{},"Many of these instructions use PlanElec's deterministic automation behind the scenes – room equipment, circuit assignment, cable routing or board layout. The assistant translates your instruction into the right commands and parameters. How the automation itself works is covered in the guide ",[23,5303,324],{"href":142},[27,5305,5307],{"id":5306},"how-do-you-open-the-assistant-and-give-it-an-instruction","How do you open the assistant and give it an instruction?",[11,5309,5310],{},"Open a project in the studio. There are three ways in:",[105,5312,5313,5323,5331],{},[46,5314,955,5315,5318,5319,5322],{},[35,5316,5317],{},"bot button in the header"," (tooltip ",[35,5320,5321],{},"Open PlanElec assistant",").",[46,5324,5325,5327,5328,5330],{},[35,5326,3520],{}," on a Mac or ",[35,5329,3524],{}," on Windows and Linux.",[46,5332,955,5333,5336,5337,90,5340,5343,5344,5347],{},[35,5334,5335],{},"command search"," with ",[35,5338,5339],{},"⌘K",[35,5341,5342],{},"Ctrl+K",": type your instruction and choose ",[35,5345,5346],{},"Send to assistant: \"…\"",". Your search text goes straight to the assistant as an instruction.",[11,5349,5350,5351,5353,5354,5356],{},"The input field shows the example \"For example: Place three socket outlets in the kitchen …\". Describe the result you want and send it with ",[35,5352,3609],{}," or Enter; Shift+Enter adds a new line. While it works, the assistant shows its status (\"Working\", \"Running an action\"). ",[35,5355,2169],{}," stops a running instruction; changes already applied stay in place and can be undone one by one.",[11,5358,5359,5360,94],{},"A good instruction names the place and the result: \"Add a splash-proof socket outlet next to the washbasin in the bathroom\" is more precise than \"Finish the bathroom\". If something is missing, the assistant asks, or the action card reports ",[35,5361,5362],{},"More information or evidence is required",[11,5364,5365,5366,94],{},"The activity column, its filters and the history are explained in the guide ",[23,5367,3502],{"href":4380},[27,5369,5371],{"id":5370},"how-does-planelec-check-every-change-the-assistant-makes","How does PlanElec check every change the assistant makes?",[11,5373,5374,5377],{},[35,5375,5376],{},"After every change the server checks the entire project with the same AREI\u002FRGIE self-check that the report uses."," An action only counts as complete once that check has run. The action card shows the result right away:",[638,5379,5380,5390],{},[641,5381,5382],{},[644,5383,5384,5387],{},[647,5385,5386],{},"Shown on the action card",[647,5388,5389],{},"Meaning",[657,5391,5392,5402,5412,5426,5436],{},[644,5393,5394,5399],{},[662,5395,5396],{},[35,5397,5398],{},"Applied and checked",[662,5400,5401],{},"The change is saved and the self-check has run afterwards.",[644,5403,5404,5409],{},[662,5405,5406],{},[35,5407,5408],{},"Validation: … resolved, … new, … remaining",[662,5410,5411],{},"How this change shifted the check findings.",[644,5413,5414,5423],{},[662,5415,5416,5419,5420],{},[35,5417,5418],{},"Target reached"," \u002F ",[35,5421,5422],{},"Target not reached yet",[662,5424,5425],{},"Whether the outcome you asked for is actually present in the project.",[644,5427,5428,5433],{},[662,5429,5430],{},[35,5431,5432],{},"Affected items: …",[662,5434,5435],{},"How many items the change touched.",[644,5437,5438,5443],{},[662,5439,5440],{},[35,5441,5442],{},"Confirmation required",[662,5444,5445],{},"The action is waiting for your approval (see next section).",[11,5447,5448,5449,94],{},"The assistant reports new findings in the conversation. You see straight away whether an extra circuit affects, say, a protective device or a cable cross-section, rather than discovering it in the final report. Which rules the self-check covers is listed in ",[23,5450,944],{"href":2953},[11,5452,5453,2459,5456,5458,5459,94],{},[35,5454,5455],{},"Every change the assistant makes is exactly one undo step.",[35,5457,3152],{}," on the action card reverses it completely; with several instructions, one at a time, starting with the most recent. The card then shows ",[35,5460,5461],{},"Undone",[27,5463,5465],{"id":5464},"which-actions-do-you-have-to-confirm-explicitly","Which actions do you have to confirm explicitly?",[11,5467,5468,5469,5471,5472,90,5474,94],{},"Clear, reversible changes – placing a socket outlet, renaming a room, creating a cable route – run immediately. Actions with wider impact are put to you for approval: the action card shows ",[35,5470,5442],{}," together with the planned parameters. You choose ",[35,5473,3619],{},[35,5475,3622],{},[11,5477,5478],{},"A confirmation applies to exactly that action with exactly those values. If the instruction changes, a new approval is needed. The assistant cannot delete projects – that decision stays with you.",[27,5480,5482],{"id":5481},"how-does-your-team-see-what-the-assistant-changed","How does your team see what the assistant changed?",[11,5484,5485,5486,5488,5489,5491],{},"Every action appears in the ",[35,5487,3509],{}," column as an action card with tool, status and the person who gave the instruction. In the project history, saved changes made by the assistant carry a bot tile and the note ",[35,5490,3638],{}," with the name of the member who gave the instruction.",[11,5493,5494,5495,5497,5498,5500],{},"That keeps it clear across the team who asked for which change, even when you are looking at a colleague's history. The ",[35,5496,3586],{}," filter collects the assistant's conversations and actions; the ",[35,5499,3576],{}," filter shows every project change, including instructions your colleagues gave the assistant.",[27,5502,5504],{"id":5503},"how-does-the-assistant-answer-questions-about-the-arei-and-planelec","How does the assistant answer questions about the AREI and PlanElec?",[11,5506,5507,5508,5511],{},"The assistant answers technical questions with sources. It searches the PlanElec help centre, the full AREI\u002FRGIE text (Book 1) and the PlanElec blog, and lists the references under ",[35,5509,5510],{},"Verified sources",". The server matches each reference against the actual texts; quotations that do not appear there are discarded.",[11,5513,5514],{},"That makes every answer checkable: you see which article or help section a statement comes from and can read it yourself. Good questions to start with are \"Which AREI rule applies to residual-current protection? Show me the source.\" or \"Why does the self-check flag a finding on the bathroom circuit?\".",[27,5516,5518],{"id":5517},"where-is-your-data-processed","Where is your data processed?",[11,5520,5521,5524],{},[35,5522,5523],{},"The language model runs in the EU region. The AI provider does not store your requests and does not train on them."," PlanElec routes requests only to providers with zero data retention; data collection by the provider is switched off. The AI service providers involved are listed as sub-processors in PlanElec's data processing agreement.",[11,5526,5527],{},"PlanElec itself stores your project and the assistant's conversations and actions so that you and your team can trace instructions and changes later.",[27,5529,5531],{"id":5530},"what-does-the-assistant-do-and-who-is-responsible-for-design-and-inspection","What does the assistant do – and who is responsible for design and inspection?",[11,5533,5534],{},"The assistant does the work inside the planning model: placing devices, building circuits, routing cables, populating the board and explaining findings with sources. Professional responsibility for the design stays with you as the electrical contractor or designer; the official inspection (keuring) is carried out by an accredited inspection body.",[11,5536,5537],{},"The self-check assesses the supported rules on the basis of the project data you have entered. Measurements, on-site conditions and manufacturer evidence are checked by you on site and by the inspection body during the keuring. A project without findings therefore means: no errors in the supported rules that can be checked from the data – and a well-prepared basis for your own review and the inspection.",[27,5539,5541],{"id":5540},"frequently-asked-questions-about-the-planelec-assistant","Frequently asked questions about the PlanElec assistant",[385,5543,5545],{"id":5544},"does-the-assistant-work-in-dutch-and-french","Does the assistant work in Dutch and French?",[11,5547,5548],{},"Yes. You write in Dutch, French, German or English, and the assistant replies in your language. The interface, action cards and status messages are available in all four languages as well.",[385,5550,5552],{"id":5551},"can-the-assistant-delete-my-project","Can the assistant delete my project?",[11,5554,5555,5556,5558,5559,94],{},"No. Deleting projects is not one of the assistant's commands. Risky changes inside a project only run after ",[35,5557,3619],{},", and every applied change can be reversed with ",[35,5560,3152],{},[385,5562,5564],{"id":5563},"what-does-the-assistant-cost","What does the assistant cost?",[11,5566,5567,5568,5571],{},"During Early Access the PlanElec assistant is free, like the rest of PlanElec. You need a PlanElec account and a project in the studio. AI features draw on your account's ",[35,5569,5570],{},"AI allowance","; the share still available is shown in the user menu.",[385,5573,5575],{"id":5574},"who-can-use-the-assistant","Who can use the assistant?",[11,5577,5578],{},"Every signed-in account, in the studio. No separate activation or special plan is required. Changing a project requires edit rights for that project.",[385,5580,5582],{"id":5581},"does-the-assistant-replace-automatic-planning","Does the assistant replace automatic planning?",[11,5584,5585],{},"No, it uses it. Automatic planning delivers traceable, rule-based proposals; the assistant picks the right functions and parameters for your instruction and combines them with targeted individual changes.",[385,5587,5589],{"id":5588},"can-i-bring-in-a-floor-plan-from-the-architect-or-from-trikker","Can I bring in a floor plan from the architect or from Trikker?",[11,5591,5592,5593,5597,5598,94],{},"Yes, through AI recognition in the project files. How a PDF, scan or Trikker export becomes an editable floor plan, and how to capture an existing distribution board from photos, is explained in ",[23,5594,5596],{"href":5595},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Frecognise-floor-plan-cabinet-photo-ai","Turn a PDF, scan or Trikker export into a floor plan",". For a feature comparison with Trikker, see ",[23,5599,5600],{"href":4490},"Trikker alternative PlanElec",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":5602},[5603,5604,5605,5606,5607,5608,5609,5610,5611,5612],{"id":5134,"depth":291,"text":5135},{"id":5147,"depth":291,"text":5148},{"id":5306,"depth":291,"text":5307},{"id":5370,"depth":291,"text":5371},{"id":5464,"depth":291,"text":5465},{"id":5481,"depth":291,"text":5482},{"id":5503,"depth":291,"text":5504},{"id":5517,"depth":291,"text":5518},{"id":5530,"depth":291,"text":5531},{"id":5540,"depth":291,"text":5541,"children":5613},[5614,5615,5616,5617,5618,5619],{"id":5544,"depth":599,"text":5545},{"id":5551,"depth":599,"text":5552},{"id":5563,"depth":599,"text":5564},{"id":5574,"depth":599,"text":5575},{"id":5581,"depth":599,"text":5582},{"id":5588,"depth":599,"text":5589},"The PlanElec assistant carries out plain-language instructions across the whole project – from floor plan and circuits to the distribution board. Every change runs through the AREI\u002FRGIE self-check and is a single undo step.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fai-assistant-electrical-planning.en",{"title":5119,"description":5620},"AI Assistant for Electrical Planning: What It Does","ai-assistant-electrical-planning","blog\u002Fai-assistant-electrical-planning.en",[5628,3676,5629,5630,319,1979,1980,775,5631],"PlanElec assistant","AI assistant","electrical planning Belgium","data protection","qHyXW4l-2J2ZMlsWpy66Fu8Hlvc5cXxR2Oo9aXqvRxA",{"id":5634,"title":5635,"articleId":5636,"body":5637,"category":6215,"date":3677,"description":6216,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":6217,"navigation":308,"path":6218,"publishDate":3677,"readTime":610,"refreshInterval":599,"seo":6219,"seoTitle":6220,"slug":6221,"stem":6222,"tags":6223,"__hash__":6228},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Frecognise-floor-plan-cabinet-photo-ai.en.md","How do you turn a PDF, scan or Trikker export into a floor plan – and a distribution board photo into modules?","ai-floor-plan-cabinet-recognition",{"type":8,"value":5638,"toc":6195},[5639,5645,5649,5652,5713,5716,5720,5730,5744,5747,5752,5756,5796,5799,5803,5809,5852,5863,5869,5873,5880,5906,5916,5920,5935,5945,5949,5955,5986,5997,6001,6004,6074,6081,6084,6088,6118,6121,6127,6131,6137,6140,6144,6150,6156,6160,6164,6167,6171,6174,6178,6181,6185,6188,6192],[11,5640,5641,5644],{},[35,5642,5643],{},"PlanElec turns an existing plan into an editable floor plan: add a PDF, scan or Trikker PDF export to the project files and choose Recognise floor plan."," PlanElec proposes walls, rooms with their area, doors and windows, and device symbols such as socket outlets, switches and light points. You review the proposal, confirm the scale and import it into an empty floor in one click – the original page stays underneath as an underlay. An existing distribution board is captured the same way from photos: PlanElec detects the visible DIN modules, you review them and import them into an empty board.",[27,5646,5648],{"id":5647},"what-does-planelec-recognise-in-a-plan-or-photo","What does PlanElec recognise in a plan or photo?",[11,5650,5651],{},"AI recognition always produces a proposal that you review before importing it. The table shows what PlanElec recognises for each source and what you check.",[638,5653,5654,5667],{},[641,5655,5656],{},[644,5657,5658,5661,5664],{},[647,5659,5660],{},"Source",[647,5662,5663],{},"What PlanElec recognises",[647,5665,5666],{},"What you check",[657,5668,5669,5680,5691,5702],{},[644,5670,5671,5674,5677],{},[662,5672,5673],{},"Vector PDF (e.g. an architect's plan)",[662,5675,5676],{},"Automatic method: wall proposal read directly from the PDF vectors. With LLM image recognition also rooms, doors, windows and device symbols",[662,5678,5679],{},"Wall layout, scale, match with the room areas printed on the plan",[644,5681,5682,5685,5688],{},[662,5683,5684],{},"Scan or photo of a plan (PNG, JPEG, WebP, scanned PDF)",[662,5686,5687],{},"Walls, rooms, openings and symbols via AI image recognition",[662,5689,5690],{},"Walls at angles or partly hidden, scale, questions in the proposal",[644,5692,5693,5696,5699],{},[662,5694,5695],{},"Trikker plan as a PDF export",[662,5697,5698],{},"Floor plan and supported symbols: socket, double socket, splash-proof socket, switch, light point",[662,5700,5701],{},"Symbols that cannot be matched; these are flagged and not imported",[644,5703,5704,5707,5710],{},[662,5705,5706],{},"Photos of a distribution board (up to 6 per run)",[662,5708,5709],{},"Visible DIN modules with row, starting slot, width and type, plus values read from the label such as current, poles or sensitivity",[662,5711,5712],{},"Type, position and values of each module; merging views of the same module",[11,5714,5715],{},"The symbol vocabulary is tuned to Belgian plans and aligned with Trikker exports. Circuits, wiring and the single-line diagram are not derived from plans or photos – you plan those afterwards in the project, with the assistant and automatic planning.",[27,5717,5719],{"id":5718},"which-files-can-planelec-recognise-as-a-floor-plan","Which files can PlanElec recognise as a floor plan?",[11,5721,5722,5725,5726,5729],{},[35,5723,5724],{},"Recognise floor plan"," handles PDF, PNG, JPEG and WebP. Next to the action you choose the ",[35,5727,5728],{},"Recognition method",":",[43,5731,5732,5738],{},[46,5733,5734,5737],{},[35,5735,5736],{},"Automatic (PDF vectors \u002F LLM)"," – the default. If the PDF contains vector data, PlanElec reads the wall lines from it deterministically and returns a wall proposal. Scans and images are analysed with AI image recognition.",[46,5739,5740,5743],{},[35,5741,5742],{},"LLM image recognition"," – always analyses the page as an image, even for a vector PDF. In addition to walls, this method returns rooms with name and area, doors, windows and device symbols.",[11,5745,5746],{},"Recognition always works on the page currently open in the preview, so for a multi-page PDF go to the floor you need first.",[11,5748,5749,5750,94],{},"DXF files and other reference plans are brought in through the standard import as a scaled background; see ",[23,5751,1987],{"href":4388},[27,5753,5755],{"id":5754},"how-do-you-start-floor-plan-recognition","How do you start floor plan recognition?",[105,5757,5758,5764,5770,5776,5789],{},[46,5759,5760,5761,94],{},"Open the project in the studio and upload the plan under ",[35,5762,5763],{},"Project files",[46,5765,5766,5767,94],{},"Open the file; it appears in the ",[35,5768,5769],{},"Project file preview",[46,5771,5772,5773,5775],{},"For multi-page files, go to the page you need, choose the method and click ",[35,5774,5724],{},". The tooltip notes that the page will be sent to an external AI provider for analysis.",[46,5777,5778,5779,2145,5782,2152,5785,5788],{},"Progress runs through ",[35,5780,5781],{},"Preparing page",[35,5783,5784],{},"Reading plan",[35,5786,5787],{},"Checking result",". According to the hint in the interface, this usually takes about 30 seconds.",[46,5790,5791,5792,5795],{},"The proposal appears in the ",[35,5793,5794],{},"Recognition"," panel, grouped into rooms, openings, scale, names, devices and any questions.",[11,5797,5798],{},"Recognition can be started by members with the editor role or higher.",[27,5800,5802],{"id":5801},"how-does-planelec-determine-the-scale","How does PlanElec determine the scale?",[11,5804,5805,5806,5808],{},"The scale is what turns a plan page into a floor plan with correct dimensions. PlanElec determines it in one of these ways and shows the source in the ",[35,5807,2151],{}," section:",[638,5810,5811,5820],{},[641,5812,5813],{},[644,5814,5815,5818],{},[647,5816,5817],{},"Method in the interface",[647,5819,5660],{},[657,5821,5822,5832,5842],{},[644,5823,5824,5829],{},[662,5825,5826],{},[35,5827,5828],{},"From dimension lines",[662,5830,5831],{},"Dimension lines on the plan are read and compared",[644,5833,5834,5839],{},[662,5835,5836],{},[35,5837,5838],{},"From the PDF scale",[662,5840,5841],{},"The physical scale stored in the PDF",[644,5843,5844,5849],{},[662,5845,5846],{},[35,5847,5848],{},"Two points, measured by you",[662,5850,5851],{},"A known distance that you mark yourself",[11,5853,5854,5855,5858,5859,5862],{},"PlanElec also uses the ",[35,5856,5857],{},"room areas printed on the plan"," as a cross-check. Each room shows its calculated area next to \"Printed on the plan: … m²\"; if both match, it reads ",[35,5860,5861],{},"✓ plan",", otherwise the deviation in percent. Where rooms differ, the proposal points out that a wall is probably in the wrong place. If dimension lines contradict your own anchor, a question asks you to re-measure a known length.",[11,5864,5865,5868],{},[35,5866,5867],{},"Confirm scale"," releases the scale. Without a confirmed scale the import stays blocked, so no wrongly scaled floor plan ends up in the project.",[27,5870,5872],{"id":5871},"how-do-you-correct-the-proposal-before-importing-it","How do you correct the proposal before importing it?",[11,5874,5875,5876,5879],{},"In the proposal you untick rooms, openings and devices you do not want to import. For the geometry, ",[35,5877,5878],{},"Correct draft"," opens an editor on top of the original page:",[43,5881,5882,5888,5894,5900],{},[46,5883,5884,5887],{},[35,5885,5886],{},"Move corner"," – drag a corner into place, or nudge it with the arrow keys once selected.",[46,5889,5890,5893],{},[35,5891,5892],{},"Add wall"," – click the start and end of a missing wall; existing corners snap.",[46,5895,5896,5899],{},[35,5897,5898],{},"Remove wall"," – delete a superfluous wall together with its openings.",[46,5901,5902,5905],{},[35,5903,5904],{},"Measure distance"," – mark two points of a known distance and enter the length in metres.",[11,5907,5908,5909,90,5912,5915],{},"Changes in the draft are only written to the floor when you import. ",[35,5910,5911],{},"Recognise again with AI",[35,5913,5914],{},"Recognize again"," starts a new run if needed.",[27,5917,5919],{"id":5918},"how-do-you-import-the-recognised-floor-plan-into-the-project","How do you import the recognised floor plan into the project?",[11,5921,5922,5923,5926,5927,5930,5931,5934],{},"Choose an empty floor under ",[35,5924,5925],{},"Target floor"," and click ",[35,5928,5929],{},"Import",". PlanElec writes walls, rooms, openings and devices into the floor in one step and places the original page underneath as the underlay ",[35,5932,5933],{},"Recognised plan page",", so you can compare plan and result at any time.",[11,5936,5937,5938,90,5941,5944],{},"The entire import is undone in one step with ",[35,5939,5940],{},"⌘Z",[35,5942,5943],{},"Ctrl+Z",". Items that cannot be matched unambiguously to a wall or side of a room are reported as \"Not imported\", with their count; you place them by hand afterwards.",[27,5946,5948],{"id":5947},"how-do-you-bring-a-trikker-plan-into-planelec","How do you bring a Trikker plan into PlanElec?",[11,5950,5951,5954],{},[35,5952,5953],{},"The route from Trikker to PlanElec runs through the PDF export."," PlanElec takes over the floor plan and supported symbols; circuits and the single-line diagram are then planned in PlanElec.",[105,5956,5957,5960,5968,5976,5981],{},[46,5958,5959],{},"Export the plan from Trikker as a PDF.",[46,5961,5962,5963,5965,5966,94],{},"Upload the PDF to PlanElec under ",[35,5964,5763],{}," and open it in the ",[35,5967,5769],{},[46,5969,5970,5971,5926,5973,5975],{},"Choose the method ",[35,5972,5742],{},[35,5974,5724],{},". PlanElec then reads rooms, openings and symbols as well as walls, whether or not the export contains vector data.",[46,5977,222,5978,5980],{},[35,5979,5794],{},", check rooms, scale and symbols. Symbols PlanElec cannot match are marked \"Cannot be matched — not imported.\"",[46,5982,5983,5984,94],{},"Confirm the scale, choose an empty target floor and click ",[35,5985,5929],{},[11,5987,5988,5989,90,5992,5994,5995,94],{},"PlanElec does not read Trikker project files (.trik); circuits and the schematic from Trikker are not imported. With the floor plan and devices in the project, you build circuits, switch chains, cable routes and the distribution board with the ",[23,5990,5628],{"href":5991},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fai-assistant-electrical-planning",[23,5993,614],{"href":142},". A comparison of features and prices is in ",[23,5996,5600],{"href":4490},[27,5998,6000],{"id":5999},"how-do-you-capture-an-existing-distribution-board-from-photos","How do you capture an existing distribution board from photos?",[11,6002,6003],{},"For renovations, extensions or surveys of an existing installation, planning often starts at the board already on the wall. PlanElec reads the visible modules from photos and uses them to populate an empty board in the distribution board editor:",[105,6005,6006,6017,6023,6028,6068],{},[46,6007,6008,6009,6012,6013,6016],{},"In the distribution board editor, open ",[35,6010,6011],{},"Photos"," in the header. The ",[35,6014,6015],{},"Cabinet photos"," panel opens.",[46,6018,33,6019,6022],{},[35,6020,6021],{},"Upload photos"," (JPEG, PNG or WebP) or tick photos already in the project – up to six per run. Several views of the same row are explicitly supported.",[46,6024,3109,6025,94],{},[35,6026,6027],{},"Detect modules",[46,6029,2782,6030,6033,6034,2145,6037,2145,6040,2152,6043,6046,6047,2145,6050,90,6053,6056,6057,6060,6061,6064,6065,94],{},[35,6031,6032],{},"Review detected modules"," each module is listed with ",[35,6035,6036],{},"Module type",[35,6038,6039],{},"Row",[35,6041,6042],{},"Slot",[35,6044,6045],{},"Width (TE)",", plus values read from the device such as ",[35,6048,6049],{},"Current (A)",[35,6051,6052],{},"Poles",[35,6054,6055],{},"Sensitivity (mA)",". A crop at original resolution shows the matching spot on the photo. If two photos show the same module, combine the views with ",[35,6058,6059],{},"Merge"," or separate them with ",[35,6062,6063],{},"Split","; remove a false detection with ",[35,6066,6067],{},"Reject",[46,6069,6070,6071,94],{},"Import the result with ",[35,6072,6073],{},"Import reviewed modules",[11,6075,6076,6077,6080],{},"The proposal knows the common module classes: main switch, RCD, circuit breaker, RCBO, surge protector, contactors, impulse relays, timers, energy meters and KNX components. An unknown module appears as ",[35,6078,6079],{},"Unknown DIN module"," and is assigned during review.",[11,6082,6083],{},"A photo shows the front of a board, so PlanElec does not infer hidden wiring or electrical connections from it. Which module protects which circuit is something you define in the project.",[27,6085,6087],{"id":6086},"how-many-recognitions-are-available-per-day","How many recognitions are available per day?",[638,6089,6090,6100],{},[641,6091,6092],{},[644,6093,6094,6097],{},[647,6095,6096],{},"Feature",[647,6098,6099],{},"Daily limit per user",[657,6101,6102,6110],{},[644,6103,6104,6107],{},[662,6105,6106],{},"Floor plan recognition",[662,6108,6109],{},"30 recognitions",[644,6111,6112,6115],{},[662,6113,6114],{},"Distribution board detection (photos)",[662,6116,6117],{},"20 runs",[11,6119,6120],{},"When the daily limit is reached, PlanElec says so in the interface; new runs are available the next day. Uploaded project files remain fully usable in the meantime.",[11,6122,6123,6124,6126],{},"In addition, all AI features draw on your account's ",[35,6125,5570],{},"; the share still available is shown in the user menu. During Early Access PlanElec is free.",[27,6128,6130],{"id":6129},"what-happens-to-your-plans-and-photos","What happens to your plans and photos?",[11,6132,6133,6136],{},[35,6134,6135],{},"For the analysis, the plan page or the selected photos are sent to the AI service. The language model runs in the EU region; the AI provider does not store the requests and does not use them for training."," The interface flags this transfer before every run. The AI service providers involved are listed as sub-processors in PlanElec's data processing agreement.",[11,6138,6139],{},"Your original files stay in PlanElec as project files, and the plan additionally as an underlay on the floor. PlanElec also stores the recognition runs and their results with the project. For a later survey or inspection, the source document therefore stays with the project.",[27,6141,6143],{"id":6142},"what-comes-after-recognition","What comes after recognition?",[11,6145,6146,6147,6149],{},"With floor plan, rooms and devices in the project, the actual electrical design begins. Automatic planning adds room equipment, switch chains, circuit assignment, cable routes, phase balancing and board layout as editable proposals. The ",[23,6148,5628],{"href":5991}," carries out instructions such as \"Add a dedicated cooker circuit with protection to the kitchen\" directly and then checks the whole project with the AREI\u002FRGIE self-check.",[11,6151,6152,6153,6155],{},"Which rules the self-check covers is listed in ",[23,6154,944],{"href":2953},". Professional responsibility for the design stays with you; the official inspection (keuring) is carried out by an accredited inspection body.",[27,6157,6159],{"id":6158},"frequently-asked-questions-about-ai-recognition","Frequently asked questions about AI recognition",[385,6161,6163],{"id":6162},"can-i-import-a-recognised-floor-plan-into-a-floor-that-already-has-walls","Can I import a recognised floor plan into a floor that already has walls?",[11,6165,6166],{},"Imports go into an empty target floor. Create a new floor if needed and import the proposal there.",[385,6168,6170],{"id":6169},"does-planelec-also-recognise-circuits-on-a-plan","Does PlanElec also recognise circuits on a plan?",[11,6172,6173],{},"No. Recognition delivers geometry, rooms, openings and device symbols. Circuits and the single-line diagram are created in the project – with the assistant, automatic planning or by hand.",[385,6175,6177],{"id":6176},"what-happens-to-symbols-planelec-does-not-know","What happens to symbols PlanElec does not know?",[11,6179,6180],{},"They are flagged in the proposal as not matchable and are not imported. You place the right device yourself after the import.",[385,6182,6184],{"id":6183},"can-planelec-recognise-dwg-files","Can PlanElec recognise DWG files?",[11,6186,6187],{},"PlanElec does not process DWG files. Export the plan as a PDF for recognition, or as a DXF for a scaled background.",[385,6189,6191],{"id":6190},"who-can-start-recognition","Who can start recognition?",[11,6193,6194],{},"Floor plan and distribution board recognition are started by project members with edit rights.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":6196},[6197,6198,6199,6200,6201,6202,6203,6204,6205,6206,6207,6208],{"id":5647,"depth":291,"text":5648},{"id":5718,"depth":291,"text":5719},{"id":5754,"depth":291,"text":5755},{"id":5801,"depth":291,"text":5802},{"id":5871,"depth":291,"text":5872},{"id":5918,"depth":291,"text":5919},{"id":5947,"depth":291,"text":5948},{"id":5999,"depth":291,"text":6000},{"id":6086,"depth":291,"text":6087},{"id":6129,"depth":291,"text":6130},{"id":6142,"depth":291,"text":6143},{"id":6158,"depth":291,"text":6159,"children":6209},[6210,6211,6212,6213,6214],{"id":6162,"depth":599,"text":6163},{"id":6169,"depth":599,"text":6170},{"id":6176,"depth":599,"text":6177},{"id":6183,"depth":599,"text":6184},{"id":6190,"depth":599,"text":6191},"tutorial","PlanElec recognises walls, rooms, doors, windows and device symbols in a PDF, scan or Trikker export, and populates an empty distribution board from photos. You review the proposal and import it in one click.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Frecognise-floor-plan-cabinet-photo-ai.en",{"title":5635,"description":6216},"Floor Plan from PDF or Scan, Board from a Photo (AI)","recognise-floor-plan-cabinet-photo-ai","blog\u002Frecognise-floor-plan-cabinet-photo-ai.en",[6224,3676,2263,6225,318,6226,6227,5630],"floor plan recognition","Trikker","photo","existing installation","esbc69BsW0ODmgjSv43uHmRBJzhBGo66iqg72wXQpFE",{"id":6230,"title":6231,"articleId":6232,"body":6233,"category":6733,"date":6734,"description":6735,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":6736,"navigation":308,"path":6737,"publishDate":6734,"readTime":312,"refreshInterval":291,"seo":6738,"seoTitle":6739,"slug":6740,"stem":6741,"tags":6742,"__hash__":6747},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Ftrikker-2-0-mac.en.md","Trikker 2.0 for Mac: what the beta brings – and what PlanElec already does","trikker-2-0-mac-beta",{"type":8,"value":6234,"toc":6703},[6235,6241,6260,6264,6267,6338,6341,6345,6348,6352,6355,6358,6361,6364,6366,6369,6373,6376,6404,6409,6413,6416,6420,6426,6430,6441,6445,6448,6451,6454,6456,6458,6462,6473,6476,6479,6481,6483,6487,6497,6500,6503,6505,6507,6515,6519,6522,6526,6646,6651,6653,6657,6660,6664,6670,6674,6679,6683,6686,6690,6693,6697],[11,6236,6237,6240],{},[35,6238,6239],{},"Trikker 2.0 has been available as a beta since 30 September 2026 – for the first time on macOS as well."," That is good news for electricians who work on a Mac. There is no need to wait for the final release: PlanElec already runs on the Mac today, with nothing to install, right in the browser. You then open the same project on the Windows PC in the office or on a tablet on site. And Trikker's new PDF export fits right in: from a Trikker PDF, PlanElec recognises the floor plan and turns it into an editable project.",[11,6242,6243,6244,6248,6249,6254,6255,94],{},"Trikker information as of 2 October 2026, PlanElec information as of 3 October 2026. Trikker information comes from the ",[23,6245,6247],{"href":4444,"rel":6246},[4434],"beta announcement",", the ",[23,6250,6253],{"href":6251,"rel":6252},"https:\u002F\u002Fwww.trikker.be\u002F",[4434],"Trikker homepage"," and the ",[23,6256,6259],{"href":6257,"rel":6258},"https:\u002F\u002Fwww.trikker.be\u002Ffaq",[4434],"Trikker FAQ",[27,6261,6263],{"id":6262},"what-is-new-in-trikker-20","What is new in Trikker 2.0?",[11,6265,6266],{},"Trikker 2.0 is above all a new technical foundation. According to the developer, it represents more than a year of work.",[638,6268,6269,6282],{},[641,6270,6271],{},[644,6272,6273,6276,6279],{},[647,6274,6275],{},"Change",[647,6277,6278],{},"What Trikker announces",[647,6280,6281],{},"Status on 2 October 2026",[657,6283,6284,6295,6306,6316,6327],{},[644,6285,6286,6289,6292],{},[662,6287,6288],{},"macOS",[662,6290,6291],{},"Trikker runs natively on the Mac for the first time",[662,6293,6294],{},"Beta, download available",[644,6296,6297,6300,6303],{},[662,6298,6299],{},"Windows",[662,6301,6302],{},"New version with the same interface as on the Mac",[662,6304,6305],{},"Beta, alongside the current version",[644,6307,6308,6310,6313],{},[662,6309,936],{},[662,6311,6312],{},"Save plans directly as PDF",[662,6314,6315],{},"Part of the beta",[644,6317,6318,6321,6324],{},[662,6319,6320],{},"Web version (iPad\u002FAndroid)",[662,6322,6323],{},"To follow \"shortly afterwards\"",[662,6325,6326],{},"Announced, no date",[644,6328,6329,6332,6335],{},[662,6330,6331],{},"Licences",[662,6333,6334],{},"Existing licences remain valid",[662,6336,6337],{},"Still per computer, per the FAQ",[11,6339,6340],{},"Trikker itself notes that the beta may still contain bugs. The developer gives no date for the final release.",[27,6342,6344],{"id":6343},"is-trikker-now-available-for-mac","Is Trikker now available for Mac?",[11,6346,6347],{},"Yes, as a beta. Since 30 September 2026, Trikker has offered a macOS download. Before moving live client projects over, test the beta on a non-critical project first. Also keep the licence in mind: according to the FAQ, a Trikker licence works on one computer at a time. Working in parallel on a Mac in the office and a laptop on site means two licences.",[27,6349,6351],{"id":6350},"what-about-the-browser-ipad-or-android","What about the browser, iPad or Android?",[11,6353,6354],{},"Trikker has announced a web version, but without a date. Until then, the FAQ says Trikker supports Windows tablets only.",[11,6356,6357],{},"PlanElec was built for the browser from day one. You sign in and get to work – on a Mac, on Windows, on Linux or on a tablet. No download, no update installer, no licence tied to a single computer. Your projects live in your account and are up to date on every device.",[27,6359,6360],{"id":73},"::help-figure",[11,6362,6363],{},"src: \u002Fimages\u002Fblog\u002Ftrikker-2-0-mac\u002Fen-tablet.png\nalt: 'Situation plan of a detached house with colour-coded circuits in PlanElec, opened in the browser at tablet size'\ncaption: 'The same situation plan in a tablet browser – no app to install.'\nwidth: 1180\nheight: 820",[4473,6365],{},[11,6367,6368],{},"::",[27,6370,6372],{"id":6371},"bring-trikker-plans-into-planelec-as-pdfs","Bring Trikker plans into PlanElec as PDFs",[11,6374,6375],{},"PlanElec does not read .trik files, but it does read a Trikker plan exported as a PDF. This is how you get from an existing plan to an editable floor plan:",[105,6377,6378,6381,6387,6393,6399],{},[46,6379,6380],{},"Save the plan with Trikker 2.0's direct PDF export.",[46,6382,6383,6384,6386],{},"Add the PDF to the PlanElec project under ",[35,6385,5763],{},"; scans and photos as PNG, JPEG or WebP work too.",[46,6388,6389,6390,6392],{},"In the project file preview, start ",[35,6391,5724],{},". PlanElec reads vector PDFs directly from their vector data and scans or photos with AI image recognition.",[46,6394,6395,6396,6398],{},"Review the proposal: confirm the scale, compare rooms and areas and, in ",[35,6397,5878],{},", move corners or add and remove walls.",[46,6400,2732,6401,6403],{},[35,6402,5929],{}," to transfer it into an empty floor. The original page stays as an underlay; ⌘Z \u002F Ctrl+Z reverses the import completely.",[11,6405,6406,6407,94],{},"PlanElec transfers walls, rooms with their area, doors and windows, supported device symbols (socket outlet, double socket outlet, splash-proof socket outlet, switch, light point) and the scale. Symbols PlanElec cannot assign with confidence are marked and not transferred. You then plan circuits and the single-line diagram in PlanElec, with automatic planning and the PlanElec assistant. ",[23,6408,1987],{"href":4388},[27,6410,6412],{"id":6411},"what-you-can-plan-with-planelec-today","What you can plan with PlanElec today",[11,6414,6415],{},"Mac support answers the platform question. In daily work, something else matters more: whether floor plan, circuits, distribution board and documents fit together without entering anything twice. That is exactly what PlanElec is built for. All images in this article come from a fictitious example project in the current version of PlanElec.",[385,6417,6419],{"id":6418},"one-project-every-plan","One project, every plan",[11,6421,6422,6423,94],{},"You draw the floor plan or place an image, PDF or DXF underneath. Rooms can start with a suggested set of devices. Switching chains, circuits, cables, phases and cable routes are suggested automatically, and you fine-tune them. The situation plan and single-line diagram come from the same model: change a circuit and it changes everywhere. ",[23,6424,6425],{"href":142},"See how automatic planning works",[385,6427,6429],{"id":6428},"the-planelec-assistant-carries-out-requests","The PlanElec assistant carries out requests",[11,6431,6432,6433,6435,6436,6438,6439,94],{},"Open the PlanElec assistant with ⌘J \u002F Ctrl+J and write what you need, for example \"Place three socket outlets in the kitchen\". The assistant works across the whole project: floor plan, rooms, devices, circuits, cables, distribution board, PV strings and lighting control. After every change, PlanElec checks the project with the AREI\u002FRGIE self-check and flags new findings; you reverse any change with one click on ",[35,6434,3152],{},". Risky actions only run after ",[35,6437,3619],{},". Technical questions are answered with verified sources. The language model runs in the EU region; the AI provider does not store your requests or use them for training. ",[23,6440,4381],{"href":4380},[385,6442,6444],{"id":6443},"solar-pv-properly-documented","Solar PV, properly documented",[11,6446,6447],{},"In PlanElec, a PV system is more than an inverter symbol. You record strings, MPPTs, module type and count, DC protection and the DC cable run with cable type, cross-section, installation method and length. All of it appears automatically on the single-line diagram and the situation plan. If something is missing, PlanElec flags it straight away.",[27,6449,6360],{"id":6450},"help-figure-1",[11,6452,6453],{},"src: \u002Fimages\u002Fblog\u002Ftrikker-2-0-mac\u002Fen-pv.png\nalt: 'Single-line diagram in PlanElec with two PV strings on MPPT A and B and the inverter inspector open on the South roof string'\ncaption: 'Two PV strings on the single-line diagram; on the right, the \"South roof\" string with MPPT, module type and DC cable run.'\nwidth: 1680\nheight: 1003",[4473,6455],{},[11,6457,6368],{},[385,6459,6461],{"id":6460},"the-distribution-board-plans-along","The distribution board plans along",[11,6463,2599,6464,6467,6468,2145,6470,6472],{},[35,6465,6466],{},"Auto-Assign",", you place protective devices on the DIN rails automatically, or drag them into position yourself. RCD groups, spare capacity and wiring stay visible, and PlanElec shows whether every circuit has been placed. The board becomes part of the design rather than a separate drawing. For existing installations, start from photos: under ",[35,6469,6015],{},[35,6471,6027],{}," recognises visible DIN modules with row, start position, width and type. You review the proposal and import it into an empty board; you complete the wiring, which a photo cannot show, in the planning.",[27,6474,6360],{"id":6475},"help-figure-2",[11,6477,6478],{},"src: \u002Fimages\u002Fblog\u002Ftrikker-2-0-mac\u002Fen-schaltschrank.png\nalt: 'Distribution board editor in PlanElec with main switch, RCDs and circuit breakers on three DIN rails'\ncaption: 'The main board with main switch, RCD groups and circuit breakers – every circuit is placed.'\nwidth: 1680\nheight: 1003",[4473,6480],{},[11,6482,6368],{},[385,6484,6486],{"id":6485},"from-plan-to-complete-dossier","From plan to complete dossier",[11,6488,6489,6490,6493,6494,94],{},"Trikker 2.0 adds direct PDF export. PlanElec goes a step further: the single-line diagram, situation plan, distribution board and self-check report come together in ",[35,6491,6492],{},"one"," installation dossier with cover page, table of contents, page numbers, your company details and your logo. Before you generate it, PlanElec shows for each document what is still missing, so you can tell at a glance whether all information is complete. Every version is archived and gets a QR link. ",[23,6495,6496],{"href":235},"More about exports",[27,6498,6360],{"id":6499},"help-figure-3",[11,6501,6502],{},"src: \u002Fimages\u002Fblog\u002Ftrikker-2-0-mac\u002Fen-dossier.png\nalt: 'Export view in PlanElec with project data, document selection for the dossier and dossier overview with plan format and colour mode'\ncaption: 'One data source for every document: before download, the dossier shows what is still open.'\nwidth: 1680\nheight: 1003",[4473,6504],{},[11,6506,6368],{},[11,6508,6509,6510,6514],{},"To see the result, open our ",[23,6511,6513],{"href":6512},"\u002Fexamples\u002Fdossiers\u002Fplanelec-pilot-dossier-en.pdf","pilot dossier as a PDF"," – a fictitious example exported straight from the product.",[385,6516,6518],{"id":6517},"working-together-on-one-project","Working together on one project",[11,6520,6521],{},"Share projects by e-mail invitation with colleagues, designers or clients. Roles decide who edits and who only views. Live sync keeps open sessions aligned, including your own on Mac and tablet. It is free during Early Access; once the paid plans start, inviting additional people is part of Pro.",[27,6523,6525],{"id":6524},"native-app-or-browser-which-suits-you","Native app or browser – which suits you?",[638,6527,6528,6540],{},[641,6529,6530],{},[644,6531,6532,6534,6537],{},[647,6533,3707],{},[647,6535,6536],{},"Native app (Trikker 2.0 beta)",[647,6538,6539],{},"Browser (PlanElec)",[657,6541,6542,6552,6563,6574,6585,6596,6605,6615,6625,6635],{},[644,6543,6544,6546,6549],{},[662,6545,281],{},[662,6547,6548],{},"Download and install on each computer",[662,6550,6551],{},"None – a current browser is enough",[644,6553,6554,6557,6560],{},[662,6555,6556],{},"Updates",[662,6558,6559],{},"Install the new version",[662,6561,6562],{},"Automatic the next time you open it",[644,6564,6565,6568,6571],{},[662,6566,6567],{},"Multiple devices",[662,6569,6570],{},"One licence per computer in simultaneous use",[662,6572,6573],{},"One account, every device",[644,6575,6576,6579,6582],{},[662,6577,6578],{},"Tablet",[662,6580,6581],{},"Web version announced; Windows tablets today",[662,6583,6584],{},"In the browser, today",[644,6586,6587,6590,6593],{},[662,6588,6589],{},"Teamwork",[662,6591,6592],{},"Not described",[662,6594,6595],{},"Sharing with roles, live sync",[644,6597,6598,6600,6602],{},[662,6599,5629],{},[662,6601,6592],{},[662,6603,6604],{},"PlanElec assistant, every change checked and reversible",[644,6606,6607,6610,6612],{},[662,6608,6609],{},"Floor plan from PDF\u002Fscan",[662,6611,6592],{},[662,6613,6614],{},"Floor plan recognition, reviewed before import",[644,6616,6617,6620,6622],{},[662,6618,6619],{},"Board from photo",[662,6621,6592],{},[662,6623,6624],{},"DIN modules as a reviewable proposal",[644,6626,6627,6630,6633],{},[662,6628,6629],{},"Without internet",[662,6631,6632],{},"Can be used offline for a while",[662,6634,4084],{},[644,6636,6637,6640,6643],{},[662,6638,6639],{},"Existing projects",[662,6641,6642],{},"Your Trikker files",[662,6644,6645],{},"Recognise the floor plan from a Trikker PDF; no .trik import",[11,6647,6648,6649,94],{},"If you often work offline or have many ongoing Trikker dossiers, the installed application serves you well. If you switch devices between office, site and client, plan as a team, want to document PV systems properly or want AI to read in existing plans and cabinet photos, PlanElec is the better fit. The AI information on Trikker is based on its homepage and beta announcement, checked on 3 October 2026. For the detailed comparison including prices, see ",[23,6650,5600],{"href":4490},[27,6652,4995],{"id":4994},[385,6654,6656],{"id":6655},"is-trikker-20-finished","Is Trikker 2.0 finished?",[11,6658,6659],{},"No. On 2 October 2026, Trikker 2.0 is a beta; the developer gives no date for the final release.",[385,6661,6663],{"id":6662},"can-i-open-my-trikker-projects-in-planelec","Can I open my Trikker projects in PlanElec?",[11,6665,6666,6667,6669],{},"PlanElec does not read .trik files. You bring the floor plan across via PDF: export it from Trikker as a PDF, start ",[35,6668,5724],{}," in PlanElec, review and import. Circuits and the diagram are then planned in PlanElec; finish ongoing dossiers in Trikker.",[385,6671,6673],{"id":6672},"how-much-does-planelec-cost","How much does PlanElec cost?",[11,6675,6676,6677,4022],{},"Nothing during Early Access, including the assistant and recognition; the AI features come with a personal allowance, and the user menu shows its use as a percentage. The planned plans are on the ",[23,6678,4021],{"href":4020},[385,6680,6682],{"id":6681},"do-i-need-a-mac-or-windows","Do I need a Mac or Windows?",[11,6684,6685],{},"Neither. PlanElec runs in any current browser on macOS, Windows and Linux. All you need is an internet connection.",[385,6687,6689],{"id":6688},"does-planelec-replace-the-official-inspection","Does PlanElec replace the official inspection?",[11,6691,6692],{},"No – the roles are clearly split. The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check, which also checks every assistant change, shows you the gaps before hand-over; it is not a certificate of conformity. The official inspection is carried out by an accredited inspection body.",[27,6694,6696],{"id":6695},"try-it-on-your-mac-now","Try it on your Mac now",[11,6698,6699,6700,94],{},"Create a small project: have a Trikker PDF recognised or draw the floor plan, place sockets and lighting or ask the assistant to do it, check circuits and the board, export the dossier. Your own project shows whether PlanElec fits the way you work – on the device in front of you. ",[23,6701,6702],{"href":5046},"Start PlanElec for free",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":6704},[6705,6706,6707,6708,6709,6710,6715,6718,6721,6724,6725,6732],{"id":6262,"depth":291,"text":6263},{"id":6343,"depth":291,"text":6344},{"id":6350,"depth":291,"text":6351},{"id":73,"depth":291,"text":6360},{"id":6371,"depth":291,"text":6372},{"id":6411,"depth":291,"text":6412,"children":6711},[6712,6713,6714],{"id":6418,"depth":599,"text":6419},{"id":6428,"depth":599,"text":6429},{"id":6443,"depth":599,"text":6444},{"id":6450,"depth":291,"text":6360,"children":6716},[6717],{"id":6460,"depth":599,"text":6461},{"id":6475,"depth":291,"text":6360,"children":6719},[6720],{"id":6485,"depth":599,"text":6486},{"id":6499,"depth":291,"text":6360,"children":6722},[6723],{"id":6517,"depth":599,"text":6518},{"id":6524,"depth":291,"text":6525},{"id":4994,"depth":291,"text":4995,"children":6726},[6727,6728,6729,6730,6731],{"id":6655,"depth":599,"text":6656},{"id":6662,"depth":599,"text":6663},{"id":6672,"depth":599,"text":6673},{"id":6681,"depth":599,"text":6682},{"id":6688,"depth":599,"text":6689},{"id":6695,"depth":291,"text":6696},"news","2026-10-02","Trikker 2.0 has been available as a beta for macOS since 30 September 2026. What is new, how to bring Trikker PDFs across with floor plan recognition and plan in the browser – on Mac, PC and tablet.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Ftrikker-2-0-mac.en",{"title":6231,"description":6735},"Trikker 2.0 for Mac: the Beta vs. PlanElec Today","trikker-2-0-mac","blog\u002Ftrikker-2-0-mac.en",[6225,6743,6744,6288,3710,6745,6746,3075,5270],"Trikker 2.0","Trikker Mac","Trikker alternative","Electrical planning Belgium","6wMv8fiHHDEk5TR64JOp0KV9NO5ervQ9ANqtmX1lyh8",{"id":6749,"title":6750,"articleId":6751,"body":6752,"category":6733,"date":7228,"description":7229,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":7230,"navigation":308,"path":7231,"publishDate":7228,"readTime":610,"refreshInterval":2436,"seo":7232,"seoTitle":7233,"slug":6751,"stem":7234,"tags":7235,"__hash__":7243},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Frcd-sealing-abolished-2026.en.md","What changes on 1 November 2026 for the sealing of residual current devices?","rcd-sealing-abolished-2026",{"type":8,"value":6753,"toc":7215},[6754,6758,6778,6781,6785,6788,6869,6876,6880,6887,6890,6943,6947,6950,6975,6978,6982,6989,7004,7015,7019,7022,7042,7045,7049,7052,7066,7070,7073,7088,7096,7100,7103,7106,7109,7180,7183,7185,7210],[27,6755,6757],{"id":6756},"what-changes-on-1-november-2026","What changes on 1 November 2026?",[11,6759,6760,6761,6764,6765,6768,6769,6774,6775,94],{},"From ",[35,6762,6763],{},"1 November 2026",", a recognised inspection body no longer has to ",[35,6766,6767],{},"seal"," the residual current device placed at the origin of a Belgian domestic electrical installation when that installation is found compliant. The ",[23,6770,6773],{"href":6771,"rel":6772},"https:\u002F\u002Fwww.ejustice.just.fgov.be\u002Fcgi\u002Farticle.pl?language=nl&sum_date=2026-09-15&lg_txt=n&numac_search=2026006432",[4434],"Royal Decree of 13 August 2026",", published in the Belgian Official Gazette of 15 September 2026 (numac 2026006432), removes the prescription from parts 4 and 6 of Book 1 of the AREI\u002FRGIE. Book 1 therefore moves to ",[35,6776,6777],{},"version 07",[11,6779,6780],{},"The requirement to install at least one RCD of no more than 300 mA at the origin of the installation is unchanged. What disappears is only the sealing of that device by the inspector — and the corresponding statement in the inspection report.",[27,6782,6784],{"id":6783},"which-provisions-are-removed-exactly","Which provisions are removed exactly?",[11,6786,6787],{},"The decree has five articles; three of them amend Book 1.",[638,6789,6790,6802],{},[641,6791,6792],{},[644,6793,6794,6797,6800],{},[647,6795,6796],{},"Article of the RD 13\u002F08\u002F2026",[647,6798,6799],{},"Provision in Book 1",[647,6801,3370],{},[657,6803,6804,6819,6834,6848,6859],{},[644,6805,6806,6809,6816],{},[662,6807,6808],{},"Art. 1",[662,6810,6811,6812,6815],{},"Part 4, sub-section ",[35,6813,6814],{},"4.2.4.3., b.",", third paragraph",[662,6817,6818],{},"Repealed in full: both the inaccessibility of the input terminals and the seal that had to make it permanent.",[644,6820,6821,6824,6831],{},[662,6822,6823],{},"Art. 2",[662,6825,6826,6827,6830],{},"Part 6, sub-section ",[35,6828,6829],{},"6.4.6.4., b.6."," (conclusions)",[662,6832,6833],{},"Replaced: the conformity inspection report now only certifies the visa on single-line diagrams and situation plans.",[644,6835,6836,6839,6845],{},[662,6837,6838],{},"Art. 3",[662,6840,6826,6841,6844],{},[35,6842,6843],{},"6.5.7.2., b.6.",", second paragraph",[662,6846,6847],{},"Replaced: the control-visit report only states that diagrams and plans were visaed again.",[644,6849,6850,6853,6856],{},[662,6851,6852],{},"Art. 4",[662,6854,6855],{},"—",[662,6857,6858],{},"Entry into force on the first day of the second month after publication, i.e. 1 November 2026.",[644,6860,6861,6864,6866],{},[662,6862,6863],{},"Art. 5",[662,6865,6855],{},[662,6867,6868],{},"Execution by the minister responsible for Energy.",[11,6870,6871,6872,6875],{},"The deleted paragraph in 4.2.4.3., b. required adequate measures to make the input terminals of the RCD(s) inaccessible, and stated that this inaccessibility had to be made permanent by a seal applied by the person carrying out the conformity inspection. The whole paragraph goes, not just the word sealing. General protection against electric shock by ",[35,6873,6874],{},"direct contact"," (section 4.2.2., through enclosures and insulation among others) remains fully in force: a distribution board must still shield its live parts.",[27,6877,6879],{"id":6878},"is-sealing-the-only-change-in-version-07","Is sealing the only change in version 07?",[11,6881,6882,6883,6886],{},"Yes. A word-by-word comparison of the complete Dutch and French texts of versions 06 and 07 shows only the three passages above and the version marking on the title page. ",[35,6884,6885],{},"Nothing else changes in substance","; all other variations are pagination and line breaks.",[11,6888,6889],{},"Do not confuse this with two other dates:",[638,6891,6892,6905],{},[641,6893,6894],{},[644,6895,6896,6899,6902],{},[647,6897,6898],{},"Date",[647,6900,6901],{},"Decree",[647,6903,6904],{},"Scope",[657,6906,6907,6918,6932],{},[644,6908,6909,6912,6915],{},[662,6910,6911],{},"01\u002F04\u002F2026",[662,6913,6914],{},"RD of 6 October 2025",[662,6916,6917],{},"Book 1 version 06: earthed direct-current systems (TN, TT, IT) added.",[644,6919,6920,6923,6926],{},[662,6921,6922],{},"01\u002F10\u002F2026",[662,6924,6925],{},"RD of 20 July 2026",[662,6927,6928,6931],{},[35,6929,6930],{},"Book 3"," only (high-voltage overhead lines) — not domestic installations.",[644,6933,6934,6937,6940],{},[662,6935,6936],{},"01\u002F11\u002F2026",[662,6938,6939],{},"RD of 13 August 2026",[662,6941,6942],{},"Book 1 version 07: sealing of the RCD abolished.",[27,6944,6946],{"id":6945},"why-is-the-seal-being-abolished","Why is the seal being abolished?",[11,6948,6949],{},"The report to the King justifies the repeal with five practical situations that kept raising questions about the purpose and application of the measure:",[43,6951,6952,6955,6962,6965,6972],{},[46,6953,6954],{},"once a seal has been removed, only a recognised body can apply a new one, and only through a new inspection of the installation;",[46,6956,6957,6958,6961],{},"where an installation was declared ",[35,6959,6960],{},"non-compliant",", Book 1 did not require the body to seal at all;",[46,6963,6964],{},"sealing applied only to domestic installations;",[46,6966,6967,6968,6971],{},"for a significant modification or extension the sealing could be ",[35,6969,6970],{},"partial",": only the RCD affected by the work had to be sealed;",[46,6973,6974],{},"the deterrent value of a seal as a safety measure is limited.",[11,6976,6977],{},"The decision was taken in consultation with representatives of installers, recognised bodies and public grid operators. The report states explicitly that the repeal does not reduce the safety of domestic installations.",[27,6979,6981],{"id":6980},"what-did-such-a-seal-look-like-in-practice","What did such a seal look like in practice?",[11,6983,6984,6985,6988],{},"The AREI never prescribed a ",[35,6986,6987],{},"form",". The text required only a seal applied by the person responsible for the conformity inspection — no specific material, colour or marking. In practice this usually meant:",[43,6990,6991,6998,7001],{},[46,6992,6993,6994,6997],{},"a terminal cover over the ",[35,6995,6996],{},"input terminals"," of the main RCD, with two eyelets or holes;",[46,6999,7000],{},"a thin metal wire threaded through those eyelets into a closed loop;",[46,7002,7003],{},"a lead or plastic seal crimped onto the loop with sealing pliers, often carrying the mark of the recognised body.",[11,7005,7006,7007,7010,7011,7014],{},"The seal therefore sat on the ",[35,7008,7009],{},"input"," side of the device, not the output: it evidenced that everything downstream was fed through that maximum 300 mA protection, and it could not be broken without leaving a visible trace. This is entirely separate from the ",[35,7012,7013],{},"grid operator's seals"," on the service connection and the meter, including a digital meter. Those stay in place and must never be removed.",[27,7016,7018],{"id":7017},"my-main-rcd-is-not-sealed-is-that-a-violation","My main RCD is not sealed — is that a violation?",[11,7020,7021],{},"Not necessarily, and from 1 November 2026 certainly not. A missing seal on an older installation usually has one of these explanations:",[43,7023,7024,7030,7033,7039],{},[46,7025,7026,7027,7029],{},"the installation was declared ",[35,7028,6960],{}," at the inspection, in which case Book 1 required no sealing;",[46,7031,7032],{},"work was done on the board after the inspection and the seal was broken — not in itself a breach of Book 1, but the evidential value is gone;",[46,7034,7035,7036,7038],{},"during an extension only ",[35,7037,6492],{}," of several RCDs at the origin was sealed;",[46,7040,7041],{},"the device or the board construction did not allow the input terminals to be sealed.",[11,7043,7044],{},"A seal on the meter cabinet or the service cable is a different matter: it belongs to the distribution grid operator and has nothing to do with the AREI prescription. For your own installation, the last inspection report is the reference: until now it stated explicitly whether sealing had been carried out.",[27,7046,7048],{"id":7047},"can-an-existing-seal-simply-be-removed-now","Can an existing seal simply be removed now?",[11,7050,7051],{},"From 1 November 2026, Book 1 no longer requires a seal on the RCD to be applied or kept intact. Still, do not remove it yourself:",[43,7053,7054,7057,7063],{},[46,7055,7056],{},"work inside a distribution board happens close to the supply cable and belongs in professional hands;",[46,7058,7059,7060,7062],{},"grid operator seals on the meter, main fuse or connection are ",[35,7061,2329],{}," affected by this change and remain off limits;",[46,7064,7065],{},"an intact seal remains practical evidence that nothing has changed on the supply side since the last inspection.",[27,7067,7069],{"id":7068},"what-does-this-mean-for-inspection-reports-and-dossiers","What does this mean for inspection reports and dossiers?",[11,7071,7072],{},"Reports drawn up after 1 November 2026 will no longer mention sealing. What remains:",[43,7074,7075,7082,7085],{},[46,7076,7077,7078,7081],{},"confirmation that the recognised body visaed the ",[35,7079,7080],{},"single-line diagrams and situation plans",", both at the conformity inspection and at the control visit;",[46,7083,7084],{},"the latest date for the next control visit (chapter 6.5.);",[46,7086,7087],{},"the assessment of the installation against the prescriptions in force at that time.",[11,7089,7090,7091,7095],{},"Older reports mentioning a seal remain valid. An installation does not need re-inspection because a prescription disappears: an inspection assesses the installation under the applicable law, and the ",[23,7092,7094],{"href":7093},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Felectrical-inspection","control visit of an existing installation"," follows its own periodicity.",[27,7097,7099],{"id":7098},"what-does-the-change-mean-for-the-planelec-self-check","What does the change mean for the PlanElec self-check?",[11,7101,7102],{},"Nothing – and that is consistent. The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check in PlanElec works on the project model: single-line diagram, situation plan, circuits, protective devices and distribution board. Sealing is an act by the inspector on the installed system, not a property of a plan, so it was never a check rule. The main RCD of no more than 300 mA at the origin is still checked, because that obligation remains (4.2.4.3(b)).",[11,7104,7105],{},"For existing installations you record for each circuit which period it dates from: before 1 October 1981, under the old AREI, under the new AREI from 1 June 2020, or current work. The self-check applies the permitted Part 8 deviations and names them in its findings. The regulatory full text in PlanElec is Book 1 version 06 (applicable since 1 April 2026). Measurements and the on-site inspection are carried out by the approved inspection body.",[27,7107,7108],{"id":2115},"Sources",[638,7110,7111,7119],{},[641,7112,7113],{},[644,7114,7115,7117],{},[647,7116,5660],{},[647,7118,3557],{},[657,7120,7121,7132,7144,7156,7168],{},[644,7122,7123,7129],{},[662,7124,7125],{},[23,7126,7128],{"href":6771,"rel":7127},[4434],"RD 13 August 2026, Official Gazette 15 September 2026",[662,7130,7131],{},"Decree text and report to the King",[644,7133,7134,7141],{},[662,7135,7136],{},[23,7137,7140],{"href":7138,"rel":7139},"https:\u002F\u002Fwww.ejustice.just.fgov.be\u002Feli\u002Farrete\u002F2026\u002F08\u002F13\u002F2026006432\u002Fjustel",[4434],"Consolidated version in Justel",[662,7142,7143],{},"Official consolidation",[644,7145,7146,7153],{},[662,7147,7148],{},[23,7149,7152],{"href":7150,"rel":7151},"https:\u002F\u002Feconomie.fgov.be\u002Fsites\u002Fdefault\u002Ffiles\u002FFiles\u002FPublications\u002Ffiles\u002FAREI-Bijlage-Boek-1-installaties-op-laagspanning-en-op-zeer-lage-spanning-2026-v07.pdf",[4434],"Book 1 of the AREI applicable from 1 November 2026 (PDF, NL)",[662,7154,7155],{},"Version 07, full text",[644,7157,7158,7165],{},[662,7159,7160],{},[23,7161,7164],{"href":7162,"rel":7163},"https:\u002F\u002Feconomie.fgov.be\u002Fsites\u002Fdefault\u002Ffiles\u002FFiles\u002FPublications\u002Ffiles\u002FRGIE-Annexe-Livre-1-Installations-a-basse-tenstion-et-a-tres-basse-tension-2026-v07.pdf",[4434],"Livre 1 of the RGIE from 1 November 2026 (PDF, FR)",[662,7166,7167],{},"Version 07, French text",[644,7169,7170,7177],{},[662,7171,7172],{},[23,7173,7176],{"href":7174,"rel":7175},"https:\u002F\u002Feconomie.fgov.be\u002Fnl\u002Fpublicaties\u002Falgemeen-reglement-op-de",[4434],"FPS Economy — AREI\u002FRGIE overview page",[662,7178,7179],{},"All books and amending decrees",[11,7181,7182],{},"This article summarises the official texts; the wording published in the Belgian Official Gazette is binding.",[27,7184,5054],{"id":4477},[43,7186,7187,7193,7198,7204],{},[46,7188,7189],{},[23,7190,7192],{"href":7191},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Farei-regulations-2026","AREI\u002FRGIE regulations 2026: the key changes",[46,7194,7195],{},[23,7196,7197],{"href":7093},"Electrical inspection in Belgium",[46,7199,7200],{},[23,7201,7203],{"href":7202},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Finspection-checklist","Inspection checklist: what the inspector verifies",[46,7205,7206],{},[23,7207,7209],{"href":7208},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Frcd-type-a-vs-b","RCD type A or type B",[11,7211,7212],{},[23,7213,7214],{"href":5046},"Build your electrical dossier in PlanElec →",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":7216},[7217,7218,7219,7220,7221,7222,7223,7224,7225,7226,7227],{"id":6756,"depth":291,"text":6757},{"id":6783,"depth":291,"text":6784},{"id":6878,"depth":291,"text":6879},{"id":6945,"depth":291,"text":6946},{"id":6980,"depth":291,"text":6981},{"id":7017,"depth":291,"text":7018},{"id":7047,"depth":291,"text":7048},{"id":7068,"depth":291,"text":7069},{"id":7098,"depth":291,"text":7099},{"id":2115,"depth":291,"text":7108},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":5054},"2026-09-27","From 1 November 2026 the mandatory sealing of the RCD at the origin of a Belgian domestic installation disappears. What the Royal Decree of 13 August 2026 removes exactly, what stays unchanged, and what it means for inspection reports.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Frcd-sealing-abolished-2026.en",{"title":6750,"description":7229},"RCD Sealing: What Changes on 1 November 2026","blog\u002Frcd-sealing-abolished-2026.en",[1979,1980,7236,7237,7238,7239,7240,7241,7242,2981],"sealing","RCD","residual current device","electrical inspection","recognised body","Book 1 version 07","Royal Decree 13 August 2026","z1AHXDXHkEvT6wZmYjnTZU3orRxBMxj2JZtkpKNP9PE",{"id":7245,"title":7246,"articleId":7247,"body":7248,"category":5101,"date":8192,"description":8193,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":8194,"navigation":308,"path":8195,"publishDate":8192,"readTime":8196,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":8197,"seoTitle":8198,"slug":8199,"stem":8200,"tags":8201,"__hash__":8205},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fdomotica-knx-basics.en.md","Home Automation and KNX in the Electrical Installation: What Belongs on the Plan and the Single-Line Diagram?","domotica-knx-basics",{"type":8,"value":7249,"toc":8178},[7250,7254,7261,7264,7418,7422,7425,7440,7454,7458,7485,7488,7611,7615,7618,7653,7664,7667,7671,7674,7680,7686,7709,7715,7729,7733,7736,7742,7748,7758,7764,7770,7774,7777,7785,7788,7808,7811,7815,7903,7914,7917,7921,7927,8012,8015,8019,8036,8054,8067,8074,8078,8081,8099,8102,8132,8135,8139,8168,8173],[27,7251,7253],{"id":7252},"what-does-a-knx-installation-have-to-show-on-the-single-line-diagram-and-the-situation-plan","What does a KNX installation have to show on the single-line diagram and the situation plan?",[11,7255,7256,7257,7260],{},"The inspection file covers the ",[35,7258,7259],{},"electrical"," installation: the bus power supply as a fixed appliance in the board together with its overcurrent protection, the KNX actuator as a control unit, every switched load circuit with its type, cross-section, number of conductors and installation method, and every push-button as a control unit with its reference. What does not belong there: group addresses, device parameters, scenes and logic. Those live in the ETS project and are not a matter for the AREI\u002FRGIE.",[11,7262,7263],{},"That dividing line is the whole article in one sentence. The rest explains why it runs there and what sits on each side.",[638,7265,7266,7285],{},[641,7267,7268],{},[644,7269,7270,7273,7276,7279,7282],{},[647,7271,7272],{},"Element",[647,7274,7275],{},"What it is electrically",[647,7277,7278],{},"On the single-line diagram",[647,7280,7281],{},"On the situation plan",[647,7283,7284],{},"In the ETS project",[657,7286,7287,7311,7337,7360,7382,7403],{},[644,7288,7289,7292,7295,7302,7308],{},[662,7290,7291],{},"KNX bus power supply",[662,7293,7294],{},"fixed appliance, a 230 V load in the board",[662,7296,7297,7298,4382],{},"yes, with its upstream overcurrent protective device (",[7299,7300,7301],"em",{},"3.1.2.2 a",[662,7303,7304,7305,4382],{},"at the location of the distribution board (",[7299,7306,7307],{},"3.1.2.3 a",[662,7309,7310],{},"as a device on the line",[644,7312,7313,7316,7325,7331,7334],{},[662,7314,7315],{},"Bus cable between bus devices",[662,7317,7318,7319,2145,7322,4382],{},"extra-low-voltage line (",[7299,7320,7321],{},"5.2.2.2",[7299,7323,7324],{},"5.2.9.15",[662,7326,7327,7328,7330],{},"not among the mandatory data listed in ",[7299,7329,7301],{}," for the load-circuit wiring",[662,7332,7333],{},"no",[662,7335,7336],{},"line and area topology",[644,7338,7339,7342,7349,7352,7357],{},[662,7340,7341],{},"KNX actuator in the board",[662,7343,7344,7345,7348],{},"control device under ",[7299,7346,7347],{},"5.3.3.2 b"," and switching element",[662,7350,7351],{},"yes, as a fixed appliance in the load circuit",[662,7353,7354,7355,4382],{},"at the location of the board (",[7299,7356,7307],{},[662,7358,7359],{},"yes, with application and parameters",[644,7361,7362,7365,7368,7374,7379],{},[662,7363,7364],{},"Actuator channel → luminaire",[662,7366,7367],{},"230 V load circuit",[662,7369,7370,7371,4382],{},"yes: type, cross-section, number of conductors, installation method; light point numbered (",[7299,7372,7373],{},"3.1.2.1 a",[662,7375,7376,7377,4382],{},"light point with circuit letter and number (",[7299,7378,7373],{},[662,7380,7381],{},"communication object of the channel",[644,7383,7384,7387,7390,7395,7400],{},[662,7385,7386],{},"Push-button \u002F control point",[662,7388,7389],{},"control unit on the bus, with no load circuit of its own",[662,7391,7392,7393,4382],{},"yes, as a control unit with a sequential number (",[7299,7394,7373],{},[662,7396,7397,7398,4382],{},"circuit letter plus the number of the light point it controls (",[7299,7399,7373],{},[662,7401,7402],{},"group address",[644,7404,7405,7408,7411,7413,7415],{},[662,7406,7407],{},"Group addresses, parameters, scenes",[662,7409,7410],{},"not electrical equipment",[662,7412,7333],{},[662,7414,7333],{},[662,7416,7417],{},"yes — and there only",[27,7419,7421],{"id":7420},"what-does-domotica-or-building-automation-mean","What does domotica or building automation mean?",[11,7423,7424],{},"Domotica is the usual Belgian term for automating a dwelling: operating, switching, controlling and linking lighting, shutters, heating and access through one shared control layer instead of one hard-wired switch per function. \"Building automation\" means the same thing one size up, in non-domestic work.",[11,7426,7427,7428,7431,7432,7435,7436,7439],{},"The AREI\u002FRGIE knows the term — not as a regulatory category of its own with its own duties, but as a ",[35,7429,7430],{},"symbol family",". ",[7299,7433,7434],{},"Table 2.23",", part of ",[7299,7437,7438],{},"Chapter 2.13",", lists the control unit under letter J, \"Domotics\". It is \"represented by a rectangle consisting of two parts\": the lower part carries the basic symbol — the table gives a switch or a socket outlet with a switch as examples — and the upper part the type of control.",[11,7441,7442,7443,7446,7447,7450,7451,7453],{},"Two things follow. First, a home-automation control point is, in drawing terms, a ",[35,7444,7445],{},"control unit",", not a plain switch — and ",[7299,7448,7449],{},"Sub-section 3.1.2.1 point a"," expressly requires control units to be numbered alongside light points and socket outlets. Second, the regulation prescribes no KNX-specific symbol. Where ",[7299,7452,7434],{}," contains none, the same sub-section allows \"any other clearly identifiable symbol defined in the legend of the single-line diagrams and situation plans\". On a bus installation the legend is therefore not optional decoration.",[27,7455,7457],{"id":7456},"what-is-knx-and-how-does-it-differ-from-a-conventional-installation","What is KNX and how does it differ from a conventional installation?",[11,7459,7460,7461,7464,7465,7468,7469,7472,7473,7476,7477,7480,7481,7484],{},"KNX is a manufacturer-independent standard for building automation. The KNX Association lists the approvals: ISO\u002FIEC approved KNX in 2006 as the International Standard ",[35,7462,7463],{},"ISO\u002FIEC 14543-3",", CENELEC in 2003 as the European Standard ",[35,7466,7467],{},"EN 50090",", CEN in 2006 as ",[35,7470,7471],{},"EN 13321-1"," (a mere reference to EN 50090) and ",[35,7474,7475],{},"EN 13321-2"," (KNXnet\u002FIP), SAC in 2007 as the Chinese Standard ",[35,7478,7479],{},"GB\u002FT 20965",", and ANSI\u002FASHRAE in 2005 as the US Standard ",[35,7482,7483],{},"ANSI\u002FASHRAE 135",". That is exactly what separates KNX from a system bus defined by a single manufacturer: the standard belongs to no brand.",[11,7486,7487],{},"Bus devices exchange information over one shared medium — in the KNX Association's words, \"twisted pair, radio frequency, power line or IP\u002FEthernet\". The information to be transmitted is \"packed in a telegram\" and sent from a sensor to actuators. In Belgian housing the twisted pair is the norm; the other media are mainly retrofit and coupling routes.",[638,7489,7490,7503],{},[641,7491,7492],{},[644,7493,7494,7497,7500],{},[647,7495,7496],{},"Aspect",[647,7498,7499],{},"Conventional installation",[647,7501,7502],{},"KNX installation",[657,7504,7505,7516,7527,7538,7549,7560,7575,7586,7601],{},[644,7506,7507,7510,7513],{},[662,7508,7509],{},"What the control point does",[662,7511,7512],{},"interrupts the load circuit itself, 230 V is present at the switch",[662,7514,7515],{},"puts a telegram on the bus; the actuator channel in the board switches the 230 V",[644,7517,7518,7521,7524],{},[662,7519,7520],{},"Wiring to the control point",[662,7522,7523],{},"load wiring, conductor count depending on the switching arrangement",[662,7525,7526],{},"bus cable at extra-low voltage",[644,7528,7529,7532,7535],{},[662,7530,7531],{},"Additional control point",[662,7533,7534],{},"one more intermediate switch plus two strapping conductors per section",[662,7536,7537],{},"one more push-button on the existing bus, assigned in ETS",[644,7539,7540,7543,7546],{},[662,7541,7542],{},"Changing a function after handover",[662,7544,7545],{},"rewiring",[662,7547,7548],{},"reparameterising in ETS, the wiring stays",[644,7550,7551,7554,7557],{},[662,7552,7553],{},"Where the function lives",[662,7555,7556],{},"in the wiring",[662,7558,7559],{},"decentralised, in sensor and actuator, not in a central unit",[644,7561,7562,7565,7572],{},[662,7563,7564],{},"Inspection documents",[662,7566,7567,7568,2145,7570,4382],{},"single-line diagram and situation plan (",[7299,7569,7301],{},[7299,7571,7307],{},[662,7573,7574],{},"the same documents with the same mandatory content, plus the ETS project as separate documentation the regulation does not govern",[644,7576,7577,7580,7583],{},[662,7578,7579],{},"Commissioning",[662,7581,7582],{},"energise and check",[662,7584,7585],{},"additionally addressing and programming with ETS",[644,7587,7588,7591,7594],{},[662,7589,7590],{},"Fault finding",[662,7592,7593],{},"measurement in the load circuit",[662,7595,7596,7597,7600],{},"measurement in the load circuit ",[35,7598,7599],{},"and"," bus diagnostics",[644,7602,7603,7606,7608],{},[662,7604,7605],{},"Dependence on the planning tool",[662,7607,4004],{},[662,7609,7610],{},"changes require the ETS project and access to it",[27,7612,7614],{"id":7613},"what-are-the-roles-of-bus-power-supply-sensor-push-button-actuator-channel-and-load","What are the roles of bus power supply, sensor, push-button, actuator, channel and load?",[11,7616,7617],{},"One chain makes it clearest. A ceiling light in the hallway is to be operated from a push-button beside the front door.",[105,7619,7620,7629,7635,7641,7647],{},[46,7621,7622,7625,7626,7628],{},[35,7623,7624],{},"Bus power supply."," A module in the board is fed from a 230 V circuit and provides the operating voltage for all bus devices at its BUS+ and BUS− terminals. It is a fixed appliance and, like any other, needs an upstream overcurrent protective device. Without it the bus is dead and ",[35,7627,7333],{}," push-button works — including the one in the hallway.",[46,7630,7631,7634],{},[35,7632,7633],{},"Push-button as sensor."," The push-button hangs on the bus, not on the load circuit. Pressing it produces a telegram that the push-button places on the bus. It carries no load current.",[46,7636,7637,7640],{},[35,7638,7639],{},"Telegram."," The telegram is addressed to a group address, not to a cable. Every device listening to that address receives it at the same time.",[46,7642,7643,7646],{},[35,7644,7645],{},"Actuator channel."," The switch actuator in the board has several channels. Precisely the channel whose communication object is linked to that group address closes its relay.",[46,7648,7649,7652],{},[35,7650,7651],{},"Load circuit and load."," Only here does current flow: from the overcurrent protective device, through the actuator channel, along the wiring to the luminaire. This part is an entirely ordinary electrical installation, sized, protected and documented by the ordinary rules.",[11,7654,7655,7656,7659,7660,7663],{},"The actuator channel is therefore the ",[35,7657,7658],{},"control device"," within the meaning of ",[7299,7661,7662],{},"Sub-section 5.3.3.2",". Point b expressly permits, at extra-low and low voltage, contactors, control auxiliaries and \"electronic devices\" alongside switches and circuit-breakers, provided they comply with \"the relevant standards approved by the King or registered by the NBN, or with provisions ensuring at least an equivalent level of safety\". A KNX actuator is thus no exotic construction — but neither is it a free pass: the product's compliance with those standards remains a condition.",[11,7665,7666],{},"Point d of the same sub-section expressly allows one device to control several machines or appliances running simultaneously. A channel switching four spots of the same group is covered. The same point also makes clear that a control device is required even where the appliance's operation depends on a relay, a thermostat or a similar component — automation does not replace the control device, it is one.",[27,7668,7670],{"id":7669},"what-is-supplied-at-230-v-and-what-communicates-over-the-bus","What is supplied at 230 V and what communicates over the bus?",[11,7672,7673],{},"The split runs at the actuator's terminals, not along device categories.",[11,7675,7676,7679],{},[35,7677,7678],{},"Carrying 230 V:"," the supply to the bus power supply, the supply to the actuator, every switched outgoing circuit from an actuator channel to a luminaire or shutter motor, and everything already wired conventionally.",[11,7681,7682,7685],{},[35,7683,7684],{},"Running on the bus:"," push-buttons, presence and brightness sensors, room controllers, displays, and communication between actuators.",[11,7687,7688,7689,7692,7693,7696,7697,7700,7701,7704,7705,7708],{},"The bus cable is an ",[35,7690,7691],{},"extra-low-voltage line",". Its installation is governed by ",[7299,7694,7695],{},"Sub-section 5.2.2.2",": all installation methods for low-voltage wiring apply to extra-low-voltage wiring as well, \"with relaxations regarding the electrical and\u002For mechanical properties\", except under external influences BE2, BE3 or CA2. ",[7299,7698,7699],{},"Sub-section 5.2.9.15 point b"," confirms this for ELV installations and names the few provisions from ",[7299,7702,7703],{},"Section 5.2.9"," that do not apply there. Whether the particular bus power supply delivers safety extra-low voltage — bringing ",[7299,7706,7707],{},"Sub-section 5.2.2.3"," into play as well — is stated in the manufacturer's data sheet. That is a property of the product, not a property of \"KNX\".",[11,7710,7711,7712,7714],{},"Two further points of ",[7299,7713,7662],{}," sit exactly on this boundary:",[43,7716,7717,7723],{},[46,7718,7719,7722],{},[35,7720,7721],{},"Point c",": except for measuring purposes, single-pole control devices are not fitted in neutral conductors. A single-pole switching channel belongs in the line conductor, not the neutral — the command coming from software changes nothing about that.",[46,7724,7725,7728],{},[35,7726,7727],{},"Point f",": control circuits are designed and arranged so as to limit risks arising from accidental contact of one or more points of the control circuit with the body or with earth, which could cause unintended starting or prevent the shutdown of the controlled machine or appliance. The bus is a control circuit in exactly that sense.",[27,7730,7732],{"id":7731},"what-does-the-inspection-need-and-what-belongs-to-the-ets-project","What does the inspection need, and what belongs to the ETS project?",[11,7734,7735],{},"The approved inspection body checks the electrical installation against the documents the regulation prescribes. KNX does not change that list.",[11,7737,2782,7738,7741],{},[7299,7739,7740],{},"Sub-section 3.1.2.2 point a"," the single-line diagram states at least: the characteristics of the electrical wiring (type, cross-section, number of conductors), the installation methods, the type and characteristics of the residual current protective devices, the type and characteristics of the overcurrent protective devices, the switches, the connection boxes, the junction boxes, the socket outlets, the light points, the fixed machines and appliances, and the sources. Bus power supply and actuator are fixed appliances and fall under the same item as any other board module.",[11,7743,2782,7744,7747],{},[7299,7745,7746],{},"Sub-section 3.1.2.3 point a"," the situation plan indicates the location of the distribution boards, connection and junction boxes, socket outlets, light points, switches, fixed machines and appliances, and sources shown on the single-line diagram.",[11,7749,7750,7751,7753,7754,7757],{},"The referencing required by ",[7299,7752,7449],{}," is where sloppiness on a bus installation shows up fastest. On the single-line diagram each elementary circuit is identified by a capital letter; each light point, each socket outlet ",[35,7755,7756],{},"and each control unit"," receives a number \"giving the order in which these elements occur in the elementary circuit, starting from the overcurrent protective device upstream of the circuit\". On the situation plan, \"each switch and each control unit is identified by the letter of the circuit in which it is located and by the sequential number of the light point or appliance it controls\". A KNX push-button is such a control unit — the assignment \"this button operates that light point\" is therefore a fact of the inspection file, not only a fact of ETS.",[11,7759,2782,7760,7763],{},[7299,7761,7762],{},"Sub-section 3.1.2.1 point d",", diagrams, plans and documents are kept up to date and made available on site to everyone authorised to supervise, inspect, maintain, repair or alter the installation. Whoever later changes an assignment in ETS updates the plan with it.",[11,7765,7766,7769],{},[35,7767,7768],{},"ETS, by contrast, holds:"," individual addresses, group addresses, application programs, parameters, scenes, time and logic functions, the line and area topology, and the project backup. None of that appears in the regulation, and none of it replaces something the regulation requires. The converse is equally true: a tidy ETS project is not a single-line diagram.",[27,7771,7773],{"id":7772},"when-is-knx-worthwhile-and-what-extra-effort-does-it-bring","When is KNX worthwhile, and what extra effort does it bring?",[11,7775,7776],{},"This section is trade practice, not regulation — the AREI\u002FRGIE says nothing on the matter.",[11,7778,7779,7780,7784],{},"KNX pays off where the number of control points, links or later changes is high: many control points for the same light, shutter control across whole façades, linking shading, heating and presence, uses that change over the years. From three or four control points onward the wiring effort of an intermediate-switch arrangement grows quickly; the conventional alternatives — push-buttons with an impulse relay — are described in ",[23,7781,7783],{"href":7782},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fswitch-types-single-line-diagram","Two-way, intermediate or double switch"," and remain the cheaper answer for many single-family homes.",[11,7786,7787],{},"The extra effort is real and lands in three places:",[43,7789,7790,7796,7802],{},[46,7791,7792,7795],{},[35,7793,7794],{},"Design."," The bus cable route, board space for supply and actuators, spare channels, and a channel naming scheme that still reads clearly in five years.",[46,7797,7798,7801],{},[35,7799,7800],{},"Commissioning."," ETS licence, project work, addressing, programming and functional testing. That is a service in its own right with its own time budget, not a by-product of the wiring.",[46,7803,7804,7807],{},[35,7805,7806],{},"Handover and operation."," The ETS project belongs to the client and should be handed over. Without the project file and without someone holding ETS access, every later change becomes expensive.",[11,7809,7810],{},"The most common miscalculation is not the material price but the assumption that programming is finished once the wiring is.",[27,7812,7814],{"id":7813},"how-does-knx-differ-from-proprietary-systems-matter-home-assistant-and-wireless-retrofits","How does KNX differ from proprietary systems, Matter, Home Assistant and wireless retrofits?",[638,7816,7817,7832],{},[641,7818,7819],{},[644,7820,7821,7824,7827,7829],{},[647,7822,7823],{},"System",[647,7825,7826],{},"What it is",[647,7828,7553],{},[647,7830,7831],{},"What of it belongs in the electrical file",[657,7833,7834,7847,7861,7875,7889],{},[644,7835,7836,7838,7841,7844],{},[662,7837,2977],{},[662,7839,7840],{},"manufacturer-independent standard (EN 50090, EN 13321-1, ISO\u002FIEC 14543-3)",[662,7842,7843],{},"decentralised, in sensor and actuator",[662,7845,7846],{},"bus power supply, actuator and all switched load circuits",[644,7848,7849,7852,7855,7858],{},[662,7850,7851],{},"Proprietary bus of one manufacturer",[662,7853,7854],{},"one supplier's system world, often technically similar but without a manufacturer-independent standard",[662,7856,7857],{},"manufacturer-dependent",[662,7859,7860],{},"the same equipment as with KNX; the symbol must be defined in the legend",[644,7862,7863,7866,7869,7872],{},[662,7864,7865],{},"Matter",[662,7867,7868],{},"IP-based connectivity protocol of the Connectivity Standards Alliance; runs on Wi-Fi and Thread, with Bluetooth Low Energy used for commissioning",[662,7870,7871],{},"in the device and the control app",[662,7873,7874],{},"only the fixed installation behind it; the device itself is usually plug-in",[644,7876,7877,7880,7883,7886],{},[662,7878,7879],{},"Home Assistant",[662,7881,7882],{},"open-source software on a server that brings existing systems — KNX included — together",[662,7884,7885],{},"in the software",[662,7887,7888],{},"nothing of its own; the server is an ordinary load",[644,7890,7891,7894,7897,7900],{},[662,7892,7893],{},"Wireless module behind the switch",[662,7895,7896],{},"relay module in the wall box, radio-controlled",[662,7898,7899],{},"in the module and the app",[662,7901,7902],{},"appears once the fixed wiring is altered for it",[11,7904,7905,7906,7909,7910,7913],{},"For the inspection the decisive distinction is not \"smart or not\" but ",[35,7907,7908],{},"fixed or not",". A plug-in adapter changes nothing about the fixed installation. A DIN-rail module in the board and an actuator switching a lighting circuit are part of the fixed installation. The boundary for Wi-Fi modules, smart sockets and smart lamps is covered in ",[23,7911,7912],{"href":5071},"Smart home and AREI","; this article stays with the wired bus.",[11,7915,7916],{},"Matter and KNX are not mutually exclusive, incidentally. Matter standardises how IP devices and apps understand each other, KNX the fixed automation in the building; in practice they meet in a gateway, not on the same cable.",[27,7918,7920],{"id":7919},"can-planelec-replace-ets","Can PlanElec replace ETS?",[11,7922,7923,7926],{},[35,7924,7925],{},"No, and that is not its job."," PlanElec documents the electrical installation together with the planned automation functions. ETS configures, addresses and programs the KNX devices. These are two work steps with two results, and you need both.",[638,7928,7929,7940],{},[641,7930,7931],{},[644,7932,7933,7935,7937],{},[647,7934,3181],{},[647,7936,3710],{},[647,7938,7939],{},"ETS",[657,7941,7942,7952,7963,7972,7981,7990,7999],{},[644,7943,7944,7947,7950],{},[662,7945,7946],{},"Single-line diagram and situation plan with bus power supply, actuator, load circuits and push buttons",[662,7948,7949],{},"yes",[662,7951,7333],{},[644,7953,7954,7957,7960],{},[662,7955,7956],{},"Channel assignment: which channel switches which load, which button operates it",[662,7958,7959],{},"yes (planning)",[662,7961,7962],{},"yes (programming)",[644,7964,7965,7968,7970],{},[662,7966,7967],{},"Logical bus lines with supply and bus current budget",[662,7969,7959],{},[662,7971,7949],{},[644,7973,7974,7977,7979],{},[662,7975,7976],{},"Terminal plan and board-door sheet",[662,7978,7949],{},[662,7980,7333],{},[644,7982,7983,7986,7988],{},[662,7984,7985],{},"Physical addresses and group addresses",[662,7987,7333],{},[662,7989,7949],{},[644,7991,7992,7995,7997],{},[662,7993,7994],{},"Communication objects, parameters, scenes and logic",[662,7996,7333],{},[662,7998,7949],{},[644,8000,8001,8008,8010],{},[662,8002,8003,8004,8007],{},"Programming, live bus diagnostics, ",[842,8005,8006],{},".knxproj"," files",[662,8009,7333],{},[662,8011,7949],{},[11,8013,8014],{},"Whoever commissions a KNX installation needs ETS. Whoever presents it for inspection needs a single-line diagram and a situation plan. PlanElec delivers that second half and keeps it consistent with the channel planning.",[27,8016,8018],{"id":8017},"how-do-you-document-a-knx-installation-in-planelec","How do you document a KNX installation in PlanElec?",[11,8020,8021,8022,8025,8026,2152,8029,8032,8033,8035],{},"Open the project metadata and choose the KNX profile under ",[35,8023,8024],{},"Building automation",". That gives you the manufacturer-neutral board modules ",[35,8027,8028],{},"KNX power supply",[35,8030,8031],{},"KNX actuator",", and on the floor plan you place push buttons from ",[35,8034,2716],{},". You configure the bus power supply by its bus current, 320 mA or 640 mA. The actuator gets a function (switching or blind), a channel count (4, 8, 12 or 16) and a rated current per channel (6, 10 or 16 A).",[11,8037,8038,8039,8042,8043,8045,8046,8049,8050,8053],{},"In the ",[35,8040,8041],{},"Smart home"," area, you assign each channel its loads and control points; one push button can operate several channels, and several push buttons can share one channel. Under ",[35,8044,2785],{},", you assign modules and control points to the planned bus lines and choose the line's power supply. PlanElec shows known bus currents and unknown contributions separately. The single-line diagram shows the supply and the actuator once each; for every occupied channel, it shows an ",[842,8047,8048],{},"OUT"," power line to the load and a separate ",[842,8051,8052],{},"KNX IN"," line to the control point. You locate the push button on the situation plan with the push-button symbol.",[11,8055,2782,8056,8059,8060,8062,8063,8066],{},[35,8057,8058],{},"Export → Domotica",", you produce the channel plan, terminal plan, function list per room, topology diagram, home-automation bill of quantities and the self-check report, individually or bundled as a home-automation handover dossier. The ",[35,8061,3248],{}," carries a watermark and can be exported with open data. For the ",[35,8064,8065],{},"final version",", PlanElec checks that a protected bus power supply exists, that the actuators sit behind a circuit breaker or RCBO, that assigned loads have a power rating, that no consumer is assigned twice, that no channel would be overloaded and that a load marked as KNX-controlled actually has a channel. A push button without a channel assignment remains a warning and does not block.",[11,8068,8069,8070,94],{},"Lighting circuits and blind motors are supported. The illustrated step-by-step guide is in the knowledge base: ",[23,8071,8073],{"href":8072},"\u002Fen\u002Fhelp\u002Fplan-and-document-knx","Plan and document KNX",[27,8075,8077],{"id":8076},"what-does-the-areirgie-self-check-cover-for-knx","What does the AREI\u002FRGIE self-check cover for KNX?",[11,8079,8080],{},"The self-check is advisory and evaluates the supported rules from your project data. For automation installations, two checks are added:",[43,8082,8083,8093],{},[46,8084,8085,8088,8089,8092],{},[35,8086,8087],{},"Channel load:"," it compares the current sum of the documented load ratings with the channel's rated current (protection objective under ",[7299,8090,8091],{},"Sub-section 4.4.1.1","). If a rating is missing, it reports a data gap rather than a pass.",[46,8094,8095,8098],{},[35,8096,8097],{},"Known bus current:"," it compares the known device currents on a line with the supply's capacity and warns when it is exceeded. Unknown contributions stay marked as open.",[11,8100,8101],{},"The rest of the bus planning you check against the manufacturer documentation:",[43,8103,8104,8110,8116,8126],{},[46,8105,8106,8109],{},[35,8107,8108],{},"Control logic:"," whether a push button is assigned to the right channel is your planning decision; electrically, even a wrong assignment is flawless.",[46,8111,8112,8115],{},[35,8113,8114],{},"Bus cable:"," routing, run length and number of devices per line are in the manufacturer documentation.",[46,8117,8118,8121,8122,8125],{},[35,8119,8120],{},"Product conformity:"," whether actuator and supply meet the standards required by ",[7299,8123,8124],{},"Sub-section 5.3.3.2 point b"," is a property of the product, not of the drawing.",[46,8127,8128,8131],{},[35,8129,8130],{},"ETS data:"," parameterisation and cybersecurity of the installation belong to the ETS configuration.",[11,8133,8134],{},"The conformity inspection of the installed work, including its measurements, is carried out by the approved body.",[27,8136,8138],{"id":8137},"related-guidance","Related guidance",[43,8140,8141,8145,8150,8156,8162],{},[46,8142,8143],{},[23,8144,7912],{"href":5071},[46,8146,8147],{},[23,8148,8149],{"href":7782},"Two-way, intermediate or double switch on the single-line diagram",[46,8151,8152],{},[23,8153,8155],{"href":8154},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fsingle-line-diagram","Creating a single-line diagram step by step",[46,8157,8158],{},[23,8159,8161],{"href":8160},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fdraw-situation-plan-guide","Drawing a situation plan",[46,8163,8164],{},[23,8165,8167],{"href":8166},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Farei-electrical-symbols-overview","AREI electrical symbols overview",[11,8169,8170],{},[23,8171,8172],{"href":270},"Build your KNX documentation in PlanElec →",[11,8174,8175],{},[7299,8176,8177],{},"Basis: AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 V06 — Chapter 2.13 with Table 2.23 letter J, Sub-sections 3.1.2.1, 3.1.2.2, 3.1.2.3, 4.4.1.1, 5.2.2.2, 5.2.2.3, 5.2.9.15 and 5.3.3.2. Checked on 5 October 2026. KNX figures per the KNX Association's own publications (standardisation, technology). The official text, the actual installed state and the approved body's inspection remain decisive.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":8179},[8180,8181,8182,8183,8184,8185,8186,8187,8188,8189,8190,8191],{"id":7252,"depth":291,"text":7253},{"id":7420,"depth":291,"text":7421},{"id":7456,"depth":291,"text":7457},{"id":7613,"depth":291,"text":7614},{"id":7669,"depth":291,"text":7670},{"id":7731,"depth":291,"text":7732},{"id":7772,"depth":291,"text":7773},{"id":7813,"depth":291,"text":7814},{"id":7919,"depth":291,"text":7920},{"id":8017,"depth":291,"text":8018},{"id":8076,"depth":291,"text":8077},{"id":8137,"depth":291,"text":8138},"2026-09-25","A bus instead of strapping conductors: what a KNX installation shows on the single-line diagram and situation plan, what belongs in ETS and how PlanElec keeps the two apart – with the AREI\u002FRGIE reference beside each statement.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fdomotica-knx-basics.en","13 min",{"title":7246,"description":8193},"Home Automation and KNX on the Plan and Single-Line Diagram","domotica-knx-electrical-installation","blog\u002Fdomotica-knx-basics.en",[1979,1980,2977,2978,8202,319,8203,8204,2980,2981],"building automation","position plan","push-button","DBb0iXuwvmrkK5UwqV1of1ylnmTc1K88tNYMyalfEzo",{"id":8207,"title":8208,"articleId":8209,"body":8210,"category":8819,"date":8820,"description":8821,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":8822,"navigation":308,"path":8823,"publishDate":8820,"readTime":610,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":8824,"seoTitle":305,"slug":8825,"stem":8826,"tags":8827,"__hash__":8830},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fbreaking-capacity-mcb.en.md","Breaking capacity of an MCB: 3, 6 or 10 kA?","breaking-capacity-mcb",{"type":8,"value":8211,"toc":8807},[8212,8216,8227,8237,8252,8256,8263,8274,8377,8380,8386,8390,8401,8428,8434,8443,8447,8450,8476,8487,8495,8499,8510,8527,8534,8538,8548,8575,8589,8598,8602,8605,8671,8689,8695,8699,8706,8719,8722,8726,8729,8752,8761,8765,8792,8797],[27,8213,8215],{"id":8214},"what-do-3-ka-6-ka-and-10-ka-on-a-circuit-breaker-mean","What do 3 kA, 6 kA and 10 kA on a circuit breaker mean?",[11,8217,8218,8219,8222,8223,8226],{},"The kA figure is the ",[35,8220,8221],{},"breaking capacity",": the value of the current the protective device is able to interrupt at a specified voltage and under prescribed conditions of use and behaviour. That is the AREI definition, ",[7299,8224,8225],{},"section 2.6.4",". A 3 kA breaker handles a 3,000 A short circuit at its point of installation; a higher short-circuit current destroys it instead of being cleared by it.",[11,8228,8229,8230,8233,8234,8236],{},"The figure has nothing to do with the rating printed on the front. A ",[842,8231,8232],{},"C16"," rated 3 kA and a ",[842,8235,8232],{}," rated 10 kA protect the same cable against the same overload — they differ only in how much short-circuit energy they themselves survive while clearing the fault.",[11,8238,8239,8240,8243,8244,8247,8248,8251],{},"What matters is therefore not your preference but the short-circuit current to be expected ",[35,8241,8242],{},"at the point of installation",". The AREI states it literally: the breaking capacity of a short-circuit protective device is ",[35,8245,8246],{},"at least equal to the prospective short-circuit current, as determined according to good practice, at the point where the device is installed"," (",[7299,8249,8250],{},"sub-section 4.4.2.1",", item 1).",[27,8253,8255],{"id":8254},"what-breaking-capacity-does-the-arei-require-in-a-dwelling","What breaking capacity does the AREI require in a dwelling?",[11,8257,8258,8259,8262],{},"Unlike the rated current, the regulation does not stop at a principle here: for domestic installations, ",[7299,8260,8261],{},"sub-section 5.3.5.5 point e"," gives figures.",[11,8264,8265,8266,8269,8270,8273],{},"The starting point is a ceiling, not a device property. At the ",[35,8267,8268],{},"output terminals of the first overcurrent protective devices placed after the general residual current device(s)",", the prospective single-phase short-circuit current ",[35,8271,8272],{},"may not exceed 3,000 A",". Upstream of those output terminals, minimum values apply:",[638,8275,8276,8292],{},[641,8277,8278],{},[644,8279,8280,8283,8289],{},[647,8281,8282],{},"Position in the installation",[647,8284,8285,8286,4382],{},"AREI requirement (",[7299,8287,8288],{},"5.3.5.5 e",[647,8290,8291],{},"Typical device choice",[657,8293,8294,8308,8321,8334,8348,8362],{},[644,8295,8296,8299,8305],{},[662,8297,8298],{},"Overcurrent device of the distribution network operator (ahead of the meter)",[662,8300,8301,8302],{},"minimum breaking capacity ",[35,8303,8304],{},"6,000 A",[662,8306,8307],{},"DNO device, not your choice",[644,8309,8310,8313,8318],{},[662,8311,8312],{},"Fuses and pin-type circuit breakers of the installation",[662,8314,8301,8315],{},[35,8316,8317],{},"3,000 A",[662,8319,8320],{},"legacy equipment, rarely installed new today",[644,8322,8323,8326,8331],{},[662,8324,8325],{},"Overcurrent protective devices of the installation in general",[662,8327,8301,8328,8330],{},[35,8329,8317],{},", marking “3000” inside a rectangle",[662,8332,8333],{},"breaker with Icn of 3 kA or higher",[644,8335,8336,8339,8345],{},[662,8337,8338],{},"First breakers downstream of the DNO device (pin-type breakers excepted)",[662,8340,8341,8342],{},"additionally a marking for ",[35,8343,8344],{},"energy limitation class 3",[662,8346,8347],{},"breaker carrying the class 3 marking",[644,8349,8350,8353,8359],{},[662,8351,8352],{},"Residual current devices and switching devices",[662,8354,8355,8356],{},"withstand ",[35,8357,8358],{},"I²t ≥ 22.5 kA²s at a current of 3,000 A",[662,8360,8361],{},"RCD marked “3000 A, 22,5 kA2s” (In ≤ 40 A)",[644,8363,8364,8367,8374],{},[662,8365,8366],{},"Final circuit breakers downstream of the output terminals above",[662,8368,8369,8370,8373],{},"follow from ",[7299,8371,8372],{},"4.4.2.1"," item 1 the current prevailing there (≤ 3,000 A)",[662,8375,8376],{},"breaker with Icn ≥ 3 kA",[11,8378,8379],{},"Two readings fall away. First, “3 kA is always enough”: that holds only as long as the 3,000 A ceiling at those output terminals is actually respected. Second, “6 kA is mandatory”: the 6,000 A concerns the distribution network operator’s device, not your final circuit breakers. Fitting 6 kA in the board is a common and harmless margin, but it is not an AREI requirement for the outgoing ways.",[11,8381,8382,8383,8385],{},"For non-domestic installations the AREI gives no such figures. Only ",[7299,8384,8250],{}," item 1 applies, and the short-circuit current has to be established at the point of installation.",[27,8387,8389],{"id":8388},"what-is-the-difference-between-icn-icu-and-ics-and-which-value-is-on-a-domestic-breaker","What is the difference between Icn, Icu and Ics — and which value is on a domestic breaker?",[11,8391,8392,8393,8396,8397,8400],{},"These three symbols do not come from the AREI but from the product standards of the devices. The AREI refers to them explicitly, to the standards approved by the King or registered by the NBN (",[7299,8394,8395],{},"sub-section 5.3.5.5 point d"," for fuses, ",[7299,8398,8399],{},"point a"," for the calibrating components).",[43,8402,8403,8416,8422],{},[46,8404,8405,8408,8409,8412,8413,8415],{},[35,8406,8407],{},"Icn"," — rated short-circuit capacity under IEC 60898-1, the standard for circuit breakers for household use. This is the value a DIN-rail breaker in a Belgian domestic board carries. It appears as an ampere figure ",[35,8410,8411],{},"without a unit, inside a rectangle"," — the “3000” of ",[7299,8414,8288],{}," is exactly that marking.",[46,8417,8418,8421],{},[35,8419,8420],{},"Icu"," — ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity under IEC 60947-2, the standard for industrial circuit breakers. The device clears the short circuit but need not remain serviceable afterwards.",[46,8423,8424,8427],{},[35,8425,8426],{},"Ics"," — service short-circuit breaking capacity under the same standard: the current after which the device may stay in service. Ics is expressed as a percentage of Icu (for example 50 %, 75 % or 100 %).",[11,8429,8430,8431,8433],{},"The practical consequence for the drawing: when you plan a dwelling, you document ",[35,8432,8407],{},". Icu and Ics only appear once the board contains a circuit breaker to IEC 60947-2 — as the main switch of a larger installation, for instance.",[11,8435,8436,8437,8247,8440,5322],{},"The AREI does have its own term for the reinforced case: where the downstream protective device is a circuit breaker and the upstream device a fuse or a circuit breaker, that technique gives the downstream breaker a ",[35,8438,8439],{},"reinforced ultimate breaking capacity",[7299,8441,8442],{},"sub-section 4.4.1.3",[27,8444,8446],{"id":8445},"what-determines-the-short-circuit-current-at-the-point-of-installation","What determines the short-circuit current at the point of installation?",[11,8448,8449],{},"The prospective short-circuit current is not a property of your installation alone. It follows from the impedance of the entire loop, from the supplying transformer to the fault, and drops with every metre of cable:",[43,8451,8452,8458,8464,8470],{},[46,8453,8454,8457],{},[35,8455,8456],{},"Rating and short-circuit voltage of the supplying transformer"," — the larger the substation, the higher the short-circuit current on the low-voltage side.",[46,8459,8460,8463],{},[35,8461,8462],{},"Length and cross-section of the service connection"," from the distribution cable to the meter box.",[46,8465,8466,8469],{},[35,8467,8468],{},"Length and cross-section of the cables inside the installation"," — which is why the value at a final circuit breaker is always lower than at the origin.",[46,8471,8472,8475],{},[35,8473,8474],{},"Number and nature of the connections in series"," — terminals, busbars, comb busbars.",[11,8477,8478,8479,8482,8483,8486],{},"The AREI mirrors this in its documentation duties. For non-domestic installations, the characteristics of the sources (apparent power, nominal voltages, nominal currents, impedances) must be stated, together with the installation method, the number and cross-section of the conductors and the ",[35,8480,8481],{},"length of the electrical cables"," — and explicitly the maximum prospective short-circuit currents above 3,000 A at the origin of the installation and at each distribution and switchgear assembly (",[7299,8484,8485],{},"sub-section 3.1.2.2 point b","). Those are precisely the quantities that feed the calculation.",[11,8488,8489,8492,8493,8251],{},[35,8490,8491],{},"The dependable figure for your service connection comes from the distribution network operator."," It depends on the substation rating and the connection length; a rule of thumb for “the Belgian domestic connection” is no design basis. Ask for the number instead of estimating it – the AREI requires a determination “according to good practice” (",[7299,8494,8250],{},[27,8496,8498],{"id":8497},"what-if-the-breaking-capacity-at-the-point-of-installation-is-not-enough","What if the breaking capacity at the point of installation is not enough?",[11,8500,8501,8502,8505,8506,8509],{},"The AREI explicitly permits a breaker with insufficient breaking capacity — under one condition. ",[7299,8503,8504],{},"Sub-section 4.4.1.3"," states that the use of a protective device whose breaking capacity is lower than the prospective short-circuit current at the point where it is installed is permitted, but ",[35,8507,8508],{},"does not release you from installing another device upstream that has at least the necessary breaking capacity",". The upstream device then lets through no more energy than the downstream device and the protected cables can withstand without damage.",[11,8511,8512,8513,8516,8517,8520,8521,8524,8525,5322],{},"Where both devices in series are circuit breakers, the AREI calls this additional protection ",[35,8514,8515],{},"back-up protection"," — ",[7299,8518,8519],{},"filiation"," in the RGIE. And it says at once where the design data comes from: to determine the characteristics of back-up protection, the ",[35,8522,8523],{},"back-up protection tables of the protective devices"," must be requested, drawn up in accordance with the product standards for circuit breakers (",[7299,8526,8442],{},[11,8528,8529,8530,94],{},"That is the decisive point: back-up protection cannot be calculated and cannot be inferred from datasheets; it follows only from the tested combination of two specific device types from the same or an approved manufacturer. How this plays out in an installation with a sub-board per storey is covered in ",[23,8531,8533],{"href":8532},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fmulti-storey-electrical-planning","Electrical planning across several floors",[27,8535,8537],{"id":8536},"where-does-the-breaking-capacity-appear-on-the-single-line-diagram-and-why-does-the-inspection-want-to-see-it","Where does the breaking capacity appear on the single-line diagram, and why does the inspection want to see it?",[11,8539,8540,8541,8247,8544,8547],{},"The single-line diagram of a domestic installation must state ",[35,8542,8543],{},"the type and characteristics of the overcurrent protective devices",[7299,8545,8546],{},"sub-section 3.1.2.2 point a","). Breaking capacity is such a characteristic; the boxed ampere figure therefore belongs beside the rated current and the curve, at the breaker.",[11,8549,8550,8551,8554,8555,8557,8558,8560,8561,8564,8565,8247,8571,8574],{},"For ",[35,8552,8553],{},"non-domestic"," installations this is more explicit still. There ",[7299,8556,8485],{}," lists the characteristics of the protective devices individually and names “the rated current; the ",[35,8559,8221],{},"; the nature and characteristics of the interruption including the settings”. And the marking of each distribution and switchgear assembly carries there — besides identification number, supply voltage and earthing system — the ",[35,8562,8563],{},"maximum prospective short-circuit current at the assembly"," and, where applicable, ",[35,8566,8567,8568],{},"the use of the back-up protection technique under ",[7299,8569,8570],{},"4.4.1.3",[7299,8572,8573],{},"sub-section 3.1.3.3 point b","). The inspector can read the target value off the board and compare it with the breakers.",[11,8576,8577,8578,8581,8582,8247,8585,8588],{},"There is a second reason. ",[35,8579,8580],{},"Exceeding the permissible short-circuit power of the installed equipment"," is named by the AREI as an example of a ",[35,8583,8584],{},"substantial modification or extension",[7299,8586,8587],{},"section 2.11.2",") — and a substantial modification triggers a fresh conformity inspection. So when the service connection is upgraded or the substation changes, review the breakers as well – otherwise a formal problem joins the technical one.",[11,8590,8591,8592,8247,8595,8597],{},"On the device itself the marking is prescribed in any case: “3000” inside a rectangle on small circuit breakers, and on RCDs without overcurrent protection rated In ≤ 40 A the indication “3000 A, 22,5 kA2s” — together on the same face and ",[35,8593,8594],{},"visible after installation",[7299,8596,8261],{},"). With the figure on the diagram, that visual comparison on site takes seconds.",[27,8599,8601],{"id":8600},"how-does-breaking-capacity-differ-from-rated-current-and-the-bcd-curve","How does breaking capacity differ from rated current and the B\u002FC\u002FD curve?",[11,8603,8604],{},"Three separate properties, three separate rules — and a recurring confusion:",[638,8606,8607,8620],{},[641,8608,8609],{},[644,8610,8611,8614,8617],{},[647,8612,8613],{},"Property",[647,8615,8616],{},"Answers the question",[647,8618,8619],{},"Governing provision",[657,8621,8622,8641,8654],{},[644,8623,8624,8629,8632],{},[662,8625,8626],{},[35,8627,8628],{},"Rated current",[662,8630,8631],{},"At what point does the breaker trip on overload?",[662,8633,8634,5336,8637,8640],{},[7299,8635,8636],{},"sub-section 4.4.1.4",[7299,8638,8639],{},"table 4.11",": maximum per cross-section",[644,8642,8643,8648,8651],{},[662,8644,8645],{},[35,8646,8647],{},"B\u002FC\u002FD curve",[662,8649,8650],{},"How fast does it trip, at what multiple of the rated current?",[662,8652,8653],{},"product standard IEC 60898-1; the AREI prescribes no curve",[644,8655,8656,8661,8664],{},[662,8657,8658],{},[35,8659,8660],{},"Breaking capacity",[662,8662,8663],{},"Which short-circuit current does it survive while clearing?",[662,8665,8666,8668,8669],{},[7299,8667,8250],{}," item 1, supplemented for dwellings by ",[7299,8670,8288],{},[11,8672,8673,8676,8677,8680,8681,8684,8685,94],{},[7299,8674,8675],{},"Table 4.11"," limits only the ",[35,8678,8679],{},"rated current"," per conductor cross-section — 1.5 mm² at most 16 A, 2.5 mm² at most 20 A, 6 mm² at most 40 A and so on. It says nothing about breaking capacity. A ",[842,8682,8683],{},"C20"," on 2.5 mm² can be fully table-compliant and still be undersized on breaking capacity. The full cross-section ↔ rating mapping is set out in ",[23,8686,8688],{"href":8687},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fcable-cross-section-breaker","Cable cross-section and breaker rating",[11,8690,8691,8692,8694],{},"The curve, in turn, concerns operating time. The AREI only requires that the current be interrupted after a dead short circuit before the conductor temperature exceeds the permissible limit, and gives the adiabatic formula for that (",[7299,8693,8250],{},", item 2). Which letter fits follows from the load and the circuit length, not from an AREI provision.",[27,8696,8698],{"id":8697},"how-do-you-record-breaking-capacity-in-planelec","How do you record breaking capacity in PlanElec?",[11,8700,8701,8702,8705],{},"Two entries work together. The ",[35,8703,8704],{},"short-circuit current (Icc)"," at the supply is set in the project properties under the network configuration; the choices are 3, 4.5, 6 and 10 kA, with kA or A as the display unit. The value appears on the single-line diagram beneath the network connection label.",[11,8707,955,8708,8711,8712,8715,8716,8718],{},[35,8709,8710],{},"breaking capacity Icn"," is set per breaker: select the MCB on the single-line diagram, then open the “Breaking capacity Icn” field in the inspector. The options are “Not documented” plus 3, 4.5, 6, 10, 15, 20 and 25 kA. Since the update of 28 August 2026, a value that has been set appears as a boxed ampere figure at the breaker — 3 kA as ",[842,8713,8714],{},"3000",", without a unit, as ",[7299,8717,8288],{}," prescribes for the device marking — and stays identical in editor, preview and PDF. Above 25 kA no rectangle is drawn, because that is where IEC 60898-1 ends.",[11,8720,8721],{},"“Not documented” is deliberately a state of its own rather than a silent 3 kA: the diagram shows only what you actually read on the device.",[27,8723,8725],{"id":8724},"what-the-arei-self-check-verifies-for-breaking-capacity","What the AREI self-check verifies for breaking capacity",[11,8727,8728],{},"The rule “Breaking capacity versus prospective short-circuit current” works with the two inputs from the previous section:",[43,8730,8731,8742,8749],{},[46,8732,8733,8734,8737,8738,8741],{},"It compares each breaker’s Icn with the threshold ",[842,8735,8736],{},"min(supply Icc, 3 kA)"," and reports an ",[35,8739,8740],{},"error"," if the device falls below it.",[46,8743,8744,8745,8748],{},"It only assesses with an ",[35,8746,8747],{},"explicitly set Icc",". Without that value you see “Breaking capacity not assessable” – the check counts as incomplete, not as passed.",[46,8750,8751],{},"If a breaker’s Icn is missing, it reports “not documented” as an open data gap.",[11,8753,8754,8755,8757,8758,8760],{},"The roles are clearly split. Icc is an input: the value comes from the distribution network operator or a calculation according to good practice. Back-up protection under ",[7299,8756,8570],{}," is proven with the manufacturer’s combination tables. Energy-limitation class 3 and the I²t withstand of RCDs (22.5 kA²s at 3,000 A, ",[7299,8759,8288],{},") are read on the real device. The assessment of the completed installation is carried out by the approved inspection body.",[27,8762,8764],{"id":8763},"further-reading","Further reading",[43,8766,8767,8771,8777,8782,8788],{},[46,8768,8769],{},[23,8770,8688],{"href":8687},[46,8772,8773],{},[23,8774,8776],{"href":8775},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fdistribution-board-planning-guide","Distribution board planning",[46,8778,8779],{},[23,8780,8781],{"href":7208},"RCD type A versus type B",[46,8783,8784],{},[23,8785,8787],{"href":8786},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fearthing-tt-vs-tns-belgium","Earthing systems TT and TN-S in Belgium",[46,8789,8790],{},[23,8791,8533],{"href":8532},[11,8793,8794],{},[23,8795,8796],{"href":5046},"Document breaking capacity in PlanElec →",[11,8798,8799],{},[7299,8800,8801,8802,8806],{},"Regulatory basis: AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 V06 — sections 2.6.4 and 2.11.2, sub-sections 3.1.2.2, 3.1.3.3, 4.4.1.3, 4.4.1.4 with table 4.11, 4.4.2.1 and 5.3.5.5. Icn, Icu and Ics come from IEC 60898-1 and IEC 60947-2 respectively, not from the AREI. The official text published by the ",[23,8803,8805],{"href":7174,"rel":8804},[4434],"FPS Economy"," prevails.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":8808},[8809,8810,8811,8812,8813,8814,8815,8816,8817,8818],{"id":8214,"depth":291,"text":8215},{"id":8254,"depth":291,"text":8255},{"id":8388,"depth":291,"text":8389},{"id":8445,"depth":291,"text":8446},{"id":8497,"depth":291,"text":8498},{"id":8536,"depth":291,"text":8537},{"id":8600,"depth":291,"text":8601},{"id":8697,"depth":291,"text":8698},{"id":8724,"depth":291,"text":8725},{"id":8763,"depth":291,"text":8764},"faq","2026-09-21","What 3 kA, 6 kA and 10 kA mean, the minimum values the AREI sets for domestic installations, what determines the short-circuit current at the point of installation, and how the figure reaches the single-line diagram.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fbreaking-capacity-mcb.en",{"title":8208,"description":8821},"breaking-capacity-mcb-ka","blog\u002Fbreaking-capacity-mcb.en",[1979,1980,8221,8828,8829,319,318,2981],"short-circuit current","circuit breaker","FF7nT284yiIcK4RLVvCp4gOIWA9iOrOXZoBzuiPRsxc",{"id":8832,"title":8833,"articleId":3489,"body":8834,"category":8947,"date":320,"description":8948,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":8949,"navigation":308,"path":8950,"publishDate":320,"readTime":3670,"refreshInterval":305,"seo":8951,"seoTitle":305,"slug":8952,"stem":8953,"tags":8954,"__hash__":8955},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Finstallation-topology.en.md","From floor plan to installation and distribution board",{"type":8,"value":8835,"toc":8941},[8836,8850,8854,8857,8861,8864,8868,8871,8874,8877,8881,8885,8920,8924,8927,8931,8934,8937],[11,8837,8838,8839,8842,8843,8845,8846,8849],{},"A device in the floor plan shows ",[35,8840,8841],{},"where"," it is. The new ",[35,8844,281],{}," view also makes clear ",[35,8847,8848],{},"what supplies and protects"," it. The same devices then form the basis for distribution boards, cabinet layouts and the single-line diagram. You enter each consumer only once.",[27,8851,8853],{"id":8852},"plan-the-electrical-structure-before-choosing-the-cabinet","Plan the electrical structure before choosing the cabinet",[11,8855,8856],{},"Electrical structure and physical implementation answer different questions. A circuit can already be planned while its board, enclosure or row layout remains open. These drafts survive saving and reloading, with incomplete work kept visible.",[73,8858],{":height":75,":width":76,"alt":8859,"caption":8860,"src":3243},"Complete example-home installation with supply, protective devices and consumers.","Supplies, protective devices and consumers form one installation. Physical board planning can remain open.",[11,8862,8863],{},"Select a consumer to see its supply and protection path. Search and collapsible branches make the installation easier to read. The tree view also keeps planning actions accessible on narrow screens.",[27,8865,8867],{"id":8866},"an-example-using-existing-devices","An example using existing devices",[11,8869,8870],{},"In the fictional example, an existing living-room socket receives its circuit assignment. The related upper-floor protective devices are then selected. A preview shows the entry point, modules and assignment effects before the distribution board is created.",[73,8872],{":height":3335,":width":3336,"alt":8873,"caption":8873,"src":3339},"Preview for forming the upper-floor distribution board.",[11,8875,8876],{},"The confirmed frame represents the physical board and its built-in devices. Supplied sockets and lights remain outside it. A feeder is explicitly planned with its protective device and cable information; drawing a frame does not invent equipment.",[73,8878],{":height":75,":width":76,"alt":8879,"caption":8880,"src":3351},"Distribution board and external consumers in the same installation.","Selected protective devices are assigned to a physical board after review. Supplied consumers remain outside its frame.",[27,8882,8884],{"id":8883},"continue-with-the-same-project","Continue with the same project",[638,8886,8887,8897],{},[641,8888,8889],{},[644,8890,8891,8894],{},[647,8892,8893],{},"Next view",[647,8895,8896],{},"Result",[657,8898,8899,8906,8913],{},[644,8900,8901,8903],{},[662,8902,3067],{},[662,8904,8905],{},"Detail modules, rows and an enclosure using recorded space assumptions",[644,8907,8908,8910],{},[662,8909,3075],{},[662,8911,8912],{},"Review the same electrical installation on document sheets",[644,8914,8915,8917],{},[662,8916,225],{},[662,8918,8919],{},"Produce documents from the saved version with a visible status",[73,8921],{":height":3121,":width":76,"alt":8922,"caption":8923,"src":3437},"Single-line diagram derived from the example project.","The single-line diagram and exported plans come from the same saved project version.",[11,8925,8926],{},"Enclosure proposals use module requirements, your reserve and accessory allowance. Generic devices or missing installation conditions keep the result an estimate. Once you record manufacturer data and installation conditions, the proposal becomes specific. Diagram and dossier deliver the documents; the electrician signs off the design and the recognised inspection body carries out the inspection.",[27,8928,8930],{"id":8929},"what-happens-to-existing-projects","What happens to existing projects?",[11,8932,8933],{},"Existing devices and boards remain usable. The new view presents their electrical structure as one continuous installation; the Board Editor remains editable for its concrete layout. The suggested sequence is a starting point, not a gate: you can continue working in whichever view suits your task.",[11,8935,8936],{},"The illustrated guide covers assignment, open drafts, distribution boards, feeder planning, cabinets and export step by step.",[11,8938,8939,94],{},[23,8940,2985],{"href":287},{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":8942},[8943,8944,8945,8946],{"id":8852,"depth":291,"text":8853},{"id":8866,"depth":291,"text":8867},{"id":8883,"depth":291,"text":8884},{"id":8929,"depth":291,"text":8930},"product_update","The new installation tree connects existing devices, protection paths, distribution boards and documents in one planning workflow.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Finstallation-topology.en",{"title":8833,"description":8948},"from-floor-plan-to-installation-and-distribution-board","blog\u002Finstallation-topology.en",[3710,281,2381],"nAXRjHYruQAGtUGc_fmAvedRgh_2xhpkODQYw7ir-lA",{"id":8957,"title":8958,"articleId":8959,"body":8960,"category":8947,"date":2972,"description":9082,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":9083,"navigation":308,"path":9084,"publishDate":2972,"readTime":3670,"refreshInterval":305,"seo":9085,"seoTitle":9086,"slug":8959,"stem":9087,"tags":9088,"__hash__":9091},"blog\u002Fblog\u002F3d-furniture-lighting.en.md","PlanElec adds a new perspective: furniture, 3D views and lighting scenes","3d-furniture-lighting",{"type":8,"value":8961,"toc":9075},[8962,8969,8976,8980,8983,8986,8990,9001,9006,9017,9021,9024,9027,9032,9038,9042,9045,9050,9053,9058,9062,9065],[11,8963,8964,8965,8968],{},"Where will the sofa go? How does a pendant light look above the dining table? How do the floors line up? With this update, you view your PlanElec project in space and discuss it more easily with clients and your team: ",[35,8966,8967],{},"furniture, matching 2D top views and an illustrative lighting preview complete the 3D viewer."," The 3D view is available to all users.",[73,8970],{":height":8971,":width":8972,"alt":8973,"caption":8974,"src":8975},"1003","1680","Furnished living and dining room with an open kitchen in the PlanElec 3D viewer","The furnished living and dining room is visible in the 3D viewer.","\u002Fimages\u002Fblog\u002F3d-furniture-lighting\u002Fen-wohnen-3d.png",[27,8977,8979],{"id":8978},"furniture-gives-the-floor-plan-a-scale","Furniture gives the floor plan a scale",[11,8981,8982],{},"A room becomes tangible once the sofa, table and kitchen units are in place. The catalogue contains 45 models covering living, dining, bedrooms, kitchens and appliances. Every furniture model has a matching SVG top view for the 2D plan. Position, dimensions and rotation are the shared basis for both views.",[11,8984,8985],{},"That lets you see straight away whether a socket sits conveniently beside the sofa or a light suits the planned dining area. You place and rotate furniture, adjust its dimensions and hide it when needed.",[27,8987,8989],{"id":8988},"one-project-two-perspectives","One project, two perspectives",[11,8991,2732,8992,2145,8995,2152,8998,9000],{},[35,8993,8994],{},"2D",[35,8996,8997],{},"3D",[35,8999,6063],{}," to switch between floor plan, spatial view and a direct comparison. The split view is ideal for discussions: the position in the plan on the left, its spatial effect on the right. You do not need a second model for it.",[73,9002],{":height":8971,":width":8972,"alt":9003,"caption":9004,"src":9005},"The same furnished room shown as a 2D floor plan and a 3D view side by side","The split view shows the floor plan on the left and the 3D viewer on the right.","\u002Fimages\u002Fblog\u002F3d-furniture-lighting\u002Fen-grundriss-und-3d.png",[11,9007,9008,9009,9012,9013,9016],{},"Placement is freer too: hold ",[35,9010,9011],{},"Shift"," to switch off snapping temporarily. On tablets and phones, the ",[35,9014,9015],{},"Free placement"," toggle does the same job. For furniture, it also lets you set the rotation without fixed angle steps.",[27,9018,9020],{"id":9019},"try-different-lighting-moods","Try different lighting moods",[11,9022,9023],{},"Lighting planning adds pendant, spot and wall lights as drafts. You set position and height, colour temperature and relative brightness, plus beam angle and tilt. Groups let you control areas such as the dining table and living space together.",[11,9025,9026],{},"Separate everyday and evening scenes let you compare moods. Ambient brightness, enabled lights and dimming change how the room feels; optional light cones show where each light is aimed. You then export a scene as an image to share in a project discussion.",[73,9028],{":height":8971,":width":8972,"alt":9029,"caption":9030,"src":9031},"Exported evening scene with warm light, shadows and visible light cones","The evening scene shows warm light cones and the preview controls.","\u002Fimages\u002Fblog\u002F3d-furniture-lighting\u002Fen-lichtszene.png",[11,9033,9034,9037],{},[35,9035,9036],{},"The lighting preview shows mood and direction."," It does not calculate lux values; for a lighting calculation, you use dedicated photometric software. A draft light only becomes part of the electrical plan once you explicitly adopt it.",[27,9039,9041],{"id":9040},"see-floors-and-dimensions-together","See floors and dimensions together",[11,9043,9044],{},"The viewer shows the active floor, the stacked building or an exploded view of its storeys. That lets you explore the layout and furniture across several floors at once.",[73,9046],{":height":8971,":width":8972,"alt":9047,"caption":9048,"src":9049},"Two furnished storeys in the exploded 3D view","The exploded view shows both furnished storeys.","\u002Fimages\u002Fblog\u002F3d-furniture-lighting\u002Fen-geschosse.png",[11,9051,9052],{},"Optional dimensions show room measurements and height. Unconfirmed default heights stay labelled as assumptions, so you never mistake a planning value for a measured one.",[73,9054],{":height":8971,":width":8972,"alt":9055,"caption":9056,"src":9057},"3D view with room dimensions and a height labelled as an assumption","Dimension lines show the room measurements; the unconfirmed height remains marked as an assumption.","\u002Fimages\u002Fblog\u002F3d-furniture-lighting\u002Fen-abmessungen.png",[27,9059,9061],{"id":9060},"what-you-gain","What you gain",[11,9063,9064],{},"Furniture and lighting ideas live in the same project as the electrical design. You discuss sockets, switches and lights where furniture and people will actually be, rather than on an abstract line in the plan. On small screens or without WebGL, you keep working in the 2D views; the project stays the same.",[11,9066,9067,9068,9070,9071,94],{},"The captures show a prepared example project. Open your project, add furniture and switch to ",[35,9069,6063],{}," to see the floor plan and spatial view together. The full scope is on the ",[23,9072,9074],{"href":9073},"\u002Fen\u002Ffeatures","feature overview",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":9076},[9077,9078,9079,9080,9081],{"id":8978,"depth":291,"text":8979},{"id":8988,"depth":291,"text":8989},{"id":9019,"depth":291,"text":9020},{"id":9040,"depth":291,"text":9041},{"id":9060,"depth":291,"text":9061},"Furniture in your floor plan, side-by-side 2D and 3D views and an illustrative lighting preview: this update makes your project easy to see and discuss.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002F3d-furniture-lighting.en",{"title":8958,"description":9082},"PlanElec in 3D: Furniture, 3D Views and Lighting Scenes","blog\u002F3d-furniture-lighting.en",[3710,8997,9089,9090],"Furniture","Lighting","z7mOIPmBe7f_OIpYfJJZfgs0T19Ndy5SmLwgltV0UtE",{"id":9093,"title":9094,"articleId":9095,"body":9096,"category":5101,"date":10296,"description":10297,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":10298,"navigation":308,"path":10299,"publishDate":10296,"readTime":8196,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":10300,"seoTitle":10301,"slug":10302,"stem":10303,"tags":10304,"__hash__":10307},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fbill-of-materials-electrical.en.md","Bill of materials for an electrical installation: which items belong on it?","bill-of-materials-electrical",{"type":8,"value":9097,"toc":10281},[9098,9102,9105,9270,9273,9284,9288,9306,9316,9319,9323,9329,9339,9457,9472,9476,9479,9618,9621,9631,9635,9638,9769,9772,9799,9805,9809,9812,9815,9854,9860,9864,9871,9874,9904,9914,9918,9924,9927,9961,9972,9976,9979,9982,9985,10000,10009,10013,10073,10077,10091,10094,10132,10135,10146,10171,10177,10204,10208,10215,10243,10245,10271,10276],[27,9099,9101],{"id":9100},"which-items-belong-on-the-bill-of-materials-for-an-electrical-installation","Which items belong on the bill of materials for an electrical installation?",[11,9103,9104],{},"Seven groups: distribution board, protective devices, cables, boxes, switches and sockets, earthing, small material. A list is not complete because all seven headings appear on it, but because every item has a traceable origin — a count from the plan, a rule from the AREI, or an explicitly stated assumption of your own business. Without that origin the quantity cannot be checked, and by the next revision of the plan it can no longer be corrected either.",[638,9106,9107,9123],{},[641,9108,9109],{},[644,9110,9111,9114,9117,9120],{},[647,9112,9113],{},"Item group",[647,9115,9116],{},"Typical individual items",[647,9118,9119],{},"Quantity derives from",[647,9121,9122],{},"Regulatory anchor",[657,9124,9125,9143,9165,9182,9203,9222,9249],{},[644,9126,9127,9129,9132,9135],{},[662,9128,3497],{},[662,9130,9131],{},"Enclosure with back panel and door, rows and DIN rails, cover plates, busbars, end caps, feed terminals, labelling",[662,9133,9134],{},"Module count per row, separation by energy tariff",[662,9136,9137,2145,9140],{},[7299,9138,9139],{},"5.3.5.1 points a and c",[7299,9141,9142],{},"3.1.3.1",[644,9144,9145,9148,9151,9154],{},[662,9146,9147],{},"Protective devices",[662,9149,9150],{},"Main isolating switch, residual current devices 300 mA and 30 mA, circuit breakers, surge protective device where applicable",[662,9152,9153],{},"Number of final circuits and their allocation to the RCD groups",[662,9155,9156,2145,9159,2145,9162],{},[7299,9157,9158],{},"5.3.5.1 point b",[7299,9160,9161],{},"4.2.4.3 point b",[7299,9163,9164],{},"5.2.1.2",[644,9166,9167,9169,9172,9175],{},[662,9168,5238],{},[662,9170,9171],{},"Cable per type, core count and cross-section in metres; conduit, pre-wired conduit, buried cable",[662,9173,9174],{},"Cable route per circuit plus allowance",[662,9176,9177,2145,9180],{},[7299,9178,9179],{},"3.1.2.2 point a",[7299,9181,9164],{},[644,9183,9184,9187,9190,9193],{},[662,9185,9186],{},"Boxes",[662,9188,9189],{},"Junction and branch boxes, flush or hollow-wall device boxes, ceiling and wall outlet boxes, draw boxes",[662,9191,9192],{},"Number of devices plus number of branch points",[662,9194,9195,2145,9197,2145,9200],{},[7299,9196,9179],{},[7299,9198,9199],{},"5.2.6.1",[7299,9201,9202],{},"5.3.5.2 point a",[644,9204,9205,9208,9211,9214],{},[662,9206,9207],{},"Switches and sockets",[662,9209,9210],{},"Inserts, rockers and covers, frames per combination, damp-location variants with gasket",[662,9212,9213],{},"Number of control points and sockets from the situation plan",[662,9215,9216,2145,9219],{},[7299,9217,9218],{},"3.1.2.3 point a",[7299,9220,9221],{},"5.3.5.2 points a and b",[644,9223,9224,9226,9229,9232],{},[662,9225,1214],{},[662,9227,9228],{},"Earth loop, earthing conductor, earth disconnecting link, main equipotential bonding conductor, supplementary bonding conductors, terminals",[662,9230,9231],{},"Building perimeter, number of extraneous conductive parts, bathrooms",[662,9233,9234,2145,9237,2145,9240,2145,9243,2145,9246],{},[7299,9235,9236],{},"5.4.2.1",[7299,9238,9239],{},"5.4.2.2",[7299,9241,9242],{},"5.4.3.5",[7299,9244,9245],{},"5.4.4.1",[7299,9247,9248],{},"5.4.4.2",[644,9250,9251,9254,9257,9260],{},[662,9252,9253],{},"Small material",[662,9255,9256],{},"Fixings and clips, terminals, strain reliefs, box lids, labelling material, gaskets",[662,9258,9259],{},"Ratio per item — company convention",[662,9261,9262,2145,9265,2145,9268],{},[7299,9263,9264],{},"5.2.9.5",[7299,9266,9267],{},"5.2.6.2 point b",[7299,9269,9142],{},[11,9271,9272],{},"The last row is marked differently on purpose: for small material the AREI states no quantities. It states conditions from which the items follow — more on that below.",[11,9274,9275,9276,2152,9280,94],{},"This article deliberately contains no prices: a price range without a named source and date is wrong within a quarter and gets quoted onward regardless. For how to make quotations comparable, see ",[23,9277,9279],{"href":9278},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Felectrical-plan-costs","How much does an electrical plan cost?",[23,9281,9283],{"href":9282},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fcost-comparison-diy-vs-electrician","Cost comparison: drawing it yourself versus hiring an electrician",[27,9285,9287],{"id":9286},"is-a-bill-of-materials-required-by-the-arei","Is a bill of materials required by the AREI?",[11,9289,9290,9291,9294,9295,9298,9299,9302,9303,94],{},"No. The AREI knows the material list only as a ",[35,9292,9293],{},"permitted annex"," to the file: schematics, plans and documents \"may be supplemented by documents describing the various characteristics of the electrical equipment and\u002For products in more detail\" (",[7299,9296,9297],{},"sub-section 3.1.2.1 point c","). The verb is ",[7299,9300,9301],{},"may",", not ",[7299,9304,9305],{},"shall",[11,9307,9308,9309,9312,9313,5322],{},"Mandatory for a new domestic installation are the single-line diagram and the situation plan, drawn up by the person responsible for carrying out the work (",[7299,9310,9311],{},"sub-section 3.1.2.1 point a","). If you attach the material list as an annex, it shares the regime of annexes: it is kept up to date and held on site at the disposal of anyone authorised to supervise, inspect, maintain, repair or modify the installation (",[7299,9314,9315],{},"sub-section 3.1.2.1 point d",[11,9317,9318],{},"Practical consequence: the material list is a tool for costing and procurement, not an inspection document. The inspector does not flag its absence. What they do flag is material in the installation that does not belong there — and that is exactly what a clean list prevents, because it fixes the selection up front.",[27,9320,9322],{"id":9321},"which-data-must-the-plan-carry-for-the-quantities-to-be-right","Which data must the plan carry for the quantities to be right?",[11,9324,9325,9326,9328],{},"The single-line diagram supplies almost the entire item list, but not the most important quantity. ",[7299,9327,7740],{}," requires at minimum: type, cross-section and number of conductors of every cable, the installation method, type and characteristics of the residual current protective devices, type and characteristics of the overcurrent protective devices, the switches, the junction boxes, the branch boxes, the socket outlets, the lighting points, the fixed machines and appliances, and the sources.",[11,9330,9331,9332,9335,9336,9338],{},"That is a remarkably complete enumeration — and it contains ",[35,9333,9334],{},"no length",". The length of the cables is required only for non-domestic installations (",[7299,9337,8485],{},"). In housing, therefore, the decisive input for the cable quantity appears in no mandatory document at all.",[638,9340,9341,9354],{},[641,9342,9343],{},[644,9344,9345,9348,9351],{},[647,9346,9347],{},"Quantity on the list",[647,9349,9350],{},"Input value",[647,9352,9353],{},"In a mandatory document?",[657,9355,9356,9371,9385,9397,9409,9421,9436,9447],{},[644,9357,9358,9361,9364],{},[662,9359,9360],{},"Number of sockets",[662,9362,9363],{},"Socket outlets on the diagram and the situation plan",[662,9365,9366,9367,2145,9369,4382],{},"yes (",[7299,9368,7301],{},[7299,9370,7307],{},[644,9372,9373,9376,9379],{},[662,9374,9375],{},"Number of switches",[662,9377,9378],{},"Switches on the diagram, their location on the plan",[662,9380,9366,9381,2145,9383,4382],{},[7299,9382,7301],{},[7299,9384,7307],{},[644,9386,9387,9390,9393],{},[662,9388,9389],{},"Number of boxes",[662,9391,9392],{},"Junction and branch boxes on the diagram",[662,9394,9366,9395,4382],{},[7299,9396,7301],{},[644,9398,9399,9402,9405],{},[662,9400,9401],{},"Number of circuit breakers",[662,9403,9404],{},"Number of final circuits",[662,9406,9366,9407,4382],{},[7299,9408,7301],{},[644,9410,9411,9414,9417],{},[662,9412,9413],{},"Cable type and cross-section",[662,9415,9416],{},"Type, cross-section, core count per cable",[662,9418,9366,9419,4382],{},[7299,9420,7301],{},[644,9422,9423,9428,9431],{},[662,9424,9425],{},[35,9426,9427],{},"Cable length in metres",[662,9429,9430],{},"Route along walls, installation zones and storeys",[662,9432,9433],{},[35,9434,9435],{},"no — only for non-domestic installations",[644,9437,9438,9441,9444],{},[662,9439,9440],{},"Earthing material",[662,9442,9443],{},"Building perimeter, number of extraneous conductive parts",[662,9445,9446],{},"no — follows from chapter 5.4, not from the diagram",[644,9448,9449,9451,9454],{},[662,9450,9253],{},[662,9452,9453],{},"Installation method, fixing spacing, connection method",[662,9455,9456],{},"no — company convention",[11,9458,9459,9460,9463,9464,9467,9468,94],{},"The situation plan carries the ",[35,9461,9462],{},"location"," of that same equipment, not its count or its length (",[7299,9465,9466],{},"sub-section 3.1.2.3 point a","). The cable quantity only emerges once a route has been drawn; the method is set out in ",[23,9469,9471],{"href":9470},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fcable-routes-and-lengths","Cable routes and cable lengths",[27,9473,9475],{"id":9474},"how-many-protective-devices-do-i-need-and-where-does-the-number-come-from","How many protective devices do I need — and where does the number come from?",[11,9477,9478],{},"Not from experience, but from four rules that jointly fix the module count in the board. This is the part of the bill of materials that the AREI drives most directly.",[638,9480,9481,9494],{},[641,9482,9483],{},[644,9484,9485,9488,9491],{},[647,9486,9487],{},"Rule",[647,9489,9490],{},"Reference",[647,9492,9493],{},"Effect on quantity",[657,9495,9496,9508,9520,9532,9548,9564,9580,9592,9605],{},[644,9497,9498,9501,9505],{},[662,9499,9500],{},"Main board fitted with a main isolating switch; in domestic installations not below 40 A",[662,9502,9503],{},[7299,9504,9158],{},[662,9506,9507],{},"1 item, rated current not below 40 A",[644,9509,9510,9513,9517],{},[662,9511,9512],{},"At the origin of the installation at least one RCD of at most 300 mA, providing isolation",[662,9514,9515],{},[7299,9516,9161],{},[662,9518,9519],{},"at least 1 item at 300 mA",[644,9521,9522,9525,9529],{},[662,9523,9524],{},"Immediately downstream at least one high or very high sensitivity device, to which sockets, lighting, the bathroom, washing machine, tumble dryer and dishwasher are connected",[662,9526,9527],{},[7299,9528,9161],{},[662,9530,9531],{},"at least 1 item at 30 mA",[644,9533,9534,9541,9545],{},[662,9535,9536,9537,9540],{},"At most ",[35,9538,9539],{},"eight final circuits"," per such RCD",[662,9542,9543],{},[7299,9544,9161],{},[662,9546,9547],{},"from the ninth affected circuit onward, a further 30 mA device",[644,9549,9550,9556,9561],{},[662,9551,9536,9552,9555],{},[35,9553,9554],{},"eight socket outlets"," per final circuit",[662,9557,9558],{},[7299,9559,9560],{},"5.3.5.2 point b",[662,9562,9563],{},"from the ninth socket onward, another circuit with breaker and cable",[644,9565,9566,9573,9577],{},[662,9567,9568,9569,9572],{},"At least ",[35,9570,9571],{},"two separate lighting circuits"," in dwellings with more than two rooms or areas",[662,9574,9575],{},[7299,9576,9560],{},[662,9578,9579],{},"minimum 2 lighting circuits",[644,9581,9582,9585,9589],{},[662,9583,9584],{},"A separate circuit per appliance with a fixed location rated 2600 W or more, and for washing machine, dishwasher, tumble dryer, electric cooker, hob and oven",[662,9586,9587],{},[7299,9588,9164],{},[662,9590,9591],{},"1 circuit, 1 protective device and 1 cable per named appliance",[644,9593,9594,9597,9602],{},[662,9595,9596],{},"RCDs in domestic installations at least type A; at the origin of the installation a rated current of at least 40 A",[662,9598,9599],{},[7299,9600,9601],{},"5.3.5.3 point a",[662,9603,9604],{},"rules out type AC and sets a floor on the frame size",[644,9606,9607,9610,9615],{},[662,9608,9609],{},"Protective and control devices on different energy tariffs grouped on separate panels at least 10 cm apart, or in separate boards",[662,9611,9612],{},[7299,9613,9614],{},"5.3.5.1 point c",[662,9616,9617],{},"enlarges the enclosure or forces a second one",[11,9619,9620],{},"This chain explains why a bill of materials built from a room count is almost always too short: the number of sockets determines not only the socket items but, through the rule of eight, also the number of circuits, hence the number of breakers, the number of cables, and ultimately the size of the enclosure.",[11,9622,9623,9624,9628,9629,94],{},"Which appliances need their own circuit is covered in ",[23,9625,9627],{"href":9626},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fdedicated-circuits-appliances","Appliances that require a dedicated circuit","; the board layout itself in ",[23,9630,8776],{"href":8775},[27,9632,9634],{"id":9633},"which-earthing-material-is-routinely-forgotten","Which earthing material is routinely forgotten?",[11,9636,9637],{},"Most of it. Earthing appears on the single-line diagram as one symbol, but on the bill of materials as six to ten items with prescribed minimum cross-sections. Those cross-sections are figures from the regulation, not from a catalogue.",[638,9639,9640,9652],{},[641,9641,9642],{},[644,9643,9644,9647,9650],{},[647,9645,9646],{},"Item",[647,9648,9649],{},"Prescribed minimum",[647,9651,9490],{},[657,9653,9654,9667,9680,9693,9706,9719,9731,9743,9756],{},[644,9655,9656,9659,9662],{},[662,9657,9658],{},"Foundation earth loop",[662,9660,9661],{},"at least 35 mm² geometric cross-section, solid conductor or seven stranded cores, without welds",[662,9663,9664],{},[7299,9665,9666],{},"5.4.2.1 points b.1.3 and b.1.2",[644,9668,9669,9672,9675],{},[662,9670,9671],{},"Metal of the earth loop",[662,9673,9674],{},"solid conductor: bare annealed electrolytic copper or lead-coated copper; 7-strand conductor: semi-rigid copper",[662,9676,9677],{},[7299,9678,9679],{},"5.4.2.1 point b.1.4",[644,9681,9682,9685,9688],{},[662,9683,9684],{},"Fixing of the earth loop",[662,9686,9687],{},"copper only, or materials that cause no corrosion",[662,9689,9690],{},[7299,9691,9692],{},"5.4.2.1 point b.1.5",[644,9694,9695,9698,9701],{},[662,9696,9697],{},"Supplementary electrode, horizontally laid",[662,9699,9700],{},"at least 35 mm², buried at least 0.80 m deep, minimum length 15 m",[662,9702,9703],{},[7299,9704,9705],{},"5.4.2.1 point b.3",[644,9707,9708,9711,9714],{},[662,9709,9710],{},"Supplementary electrode, rod or pin",[662,9712,9713],{},"minimum length 1.50 m, of which at least 1.50 m driven below the −0.60 m level",[662,9715,9716],{},[7299,9717,9718],{},"5.4.2.1 point b.4.1",[644,9720,9721,9724,9727],{},[662,9722,9723],{},"Earthing conductor",[662,9725,9726],{},"16 mm² copper with corrosion-protective coating, otherwise 25 mm² copper, 50 mm² for aluminium or steel",[662,9728,9729],{},[7299,9730,9239],{},[644,9732,9733,9736,9739],{},[662,9734,9735],{},"Earth disconnecting link",[662,9737,9738],{},"a disconnecting device removable only with a tool",[662,9740,9741],{},[7299,9742,9242],{},[644,9744,9745,9748,9751],{},[662,9746,9747],{},"Main equipotential bonding conductor",[662,9749,9750],{},"half the cross-section of the largest protective conductor, minimum 6 mm² copper, may be capped at 25 mm²",[662,9752,9753],{},[7299,9754,9755],{},"5.4.4.1 point a",[644,9757,9758,9761,9764],{},[662,9759,9760],{},"Supplementary bonding conductors",[662,9762,9763],{},"at least 2.5 mm² if mechanically protected, 4 mm² if not",[662,9765,9766],{},[7299,9767,9768],{},"5.4.4.2 point a",[11,9770,9771],{},"Three points that go missing in estimates:",[43,9773,9774,9784,9793],{},[46,9775,9776,9779,9780,9783],{},[35,9777,9778],{},"The earth loop is site material, not electrical material."," It is required for every new building whose foundation trench bottom reaches at least 60 cm (",[7299,9781,9782],{},"5.4.2.1 point b.1.1","), and it is laid long before anyone thinks about sockets. Drawing up the electrical bill of materials after the shell is complete structurally puts this item out of view.",[46,9785,9786,8247,9789,9792],{},[35,9787,9788],{},"The ends remain accessible for inspection",[7299,9790,9791],{},"5.4.2.1 point b.1.6","). That is an execution requirement with a material consequence: pit, cover, marking.",[46,9794,9795,9798],{},[35,9796,9797],{},"Main equipotential bonding is not a single terminal",", but one conductor per extraneous conductive part — water, gas, heating — with a clamp on the pipe concerned. The quantity follows from the building services, not from the electrical plan.",[11,9800,9801,9802,94],{},"Which earthing system applies is covered in ",[23,9803,9804],{"href":8786},"Earthing TT or TN-S",[27,9806,9808],{"id":9807},"why-are-junction-boxes-and-device-boxes-so-often-missing-from-the-list","Why are junction boxes and device boxes so often missing from the list?",[11,9810,9811],{},"Because mentally they belong to the cable and in the catalogue to the accessories — whereas the AREI names them explicitly as elements in their own right.",[11,9813,9814],{},"Four rules make them unavoidable:",[43,9816,9817,9827,9836,9845],{},[46,9818,9819,9822,9823,9826],{},[35,9820,9821],{},"Connections may only be made in specific places:"," in distribution and switchgear assemblies, in junction or branch boxes, at the terminals of switches or socket outlets, or in sufficiently large ceiling boxes from which luminaires are suspended (",[7299,9824,9825],{},"sub-section 5.2.6.1","). Every branch on the plan is therefore a material item.",[46,9828,9829,8247,9832,9835],{},[35,9830,9831],{},"Connections inside conduit are prohibited",[7299,9833,9834],{},"sub-section 5.2.9.3 point f","). A route drawn without a box is a non-compliant execution.",[46,9837,9838,8247,9841,9844],{},[35,9839,9840],{},"In junction, branch and draw boxes the conductors remain accessible; tees and elbows are prohibited",[7299,9842,9843],{},"sub-section 5.2.9.3 point i.2","). This rules out the smallest possible box and feeds through to the frame size, hence the price.",[46,9846,9847,8247,9850,9853],{},[35,9848,9849],{},"Socket outlets built into walls are housed in metal boxes or in boxes of insulating material",[7299,9851,9852],{},"sub-section 5.3.5.2 point a","). The device box is therefore not optional but mandatory material — one per flush point, and a different type in a hollow wall than in masonry.",[11,9855,9856,9857,9859],{},"On top of that, junction and branch boxes are part of the mandatory content of the single-line diagram (",[7299,9858,8546],{},"). A diagram without them is incomplete — and so is a bill of materials derived from such a diagram.",[27,9861,9863],{"id":9862},"how-much-cable-allowance-should-i-include","How much cable allowance should I include?",[11,9865,9866,9867,9870],{},"On the ",[35,9868,9869],{},"size"," of an allowance the AREI says nothing — no percentage, no reserve length, no waste factor. Any figure you use is a convention of your own business and belongs in the calculation sheet as such.",[11,9872,9873],{},"What the regulation does fix are the conditions from which an allowance follows:",[43,9875,9876,9882,9888,9898],{},[46,9877,9878,9879,5322],{},"Connections at appliances must not be subjected to tensile or torsional forces (",[7299,9880,9881],{},"sub-section 5.2.6.2 point b",[46,9883,9884,9885,5322],{},"In vertical runs, tensile forces from the cable's own weight must not act on the connection terminals (",[7299,9886,9887],{},"sub-section 5.2.9.5",[46,9889,9890,9891,9894,9895,5322],{},"In conduit it must be possible ",[35,9892,9893],{},"at all times"," to draw in or remove conductors or cables (",[7299,9896,9897],{},"sub-section 5.2.9.3 point e",[46,9899,9900,9901,9903],{},"In boxes the conductors remain accessible (",[7299,9902,9843],{},"), which does not work without a loop inside the enclosure.",[11,9905,9906,9907,9909,9910,94],{},"The allowance is therefore not a safety cushion on an uncertain calculation, but a material item with a purpose. If you apply it as a flat percentage, document the percentage, its origin and the revision it applies to. Deriving the base length is covered in ",[23,9908,9471],{"href":9470},"; which accompanying material each installation method brings with it in ",[23,9911,9913],{"href":9912},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Finstallation-methods-arei","Installation methods under the AREI",[27,9915,9917],{"id":9916},"how-many-spare-ways-belong-in-the-distribution-board","How many spare ways belong in the distribution board?",[11,9919,9920,9921,9923],{},"The AREI prescribes ",[35,9922,7333],{}," spare ways. A full-text sweep of the nine parts in the Dutch, French and German versions returns no passage naming a number of free modules, a percentage or a minimum reserve. Anyone quoting a figure is quoting a company convention — which is legitimate, as long as it is said that way.",[11,9925,9926],{},"What the regulation does require instead, and what points in practice in the same direction:",[43,9928,9929,9939,9945,9950,9955],{},[46,9930,9931,9932,9935,9936,5322],{},"Circuits are arranged so that they can later be identified during supervision, inspection, maintenance, repair, ",[35,9933,9934],{},"modification or extension"," of the installation (",[7299,9937,9938],{},"sub-section 3.1.3.1",[46,9940,9941,9942,9944],{},"Control, protective and isolating devices are individually marked clearly, conspicuously and indelibly (",[7299,9943,9938],{},"). Labelling material is therefore an item, not a courtesy.",[46,9946,9947,9948,5322],{},"Circuits connected upstream of the board's main switch must be identified as such (",[7299,9949,9938],{},[46,9951,9952,9953,5322],{},"Every modification or extension is shown on the situation plan, which reflects the existing state at any moment (",[7299,9954,9311],{},[46,9956,9957,9958,5322],{},"Equipment in the board remains easily accessible, in domestic installations without special means (",[7299,9959,9960],{},"sub-section 5.3.5.1 point c",[11,9962,9963,9964,9967,9968,9971],{},"And one enclosure rule that is overlooked more often than spare ways: in domestic installations, distribution and switchgear assemblies are class I or II, ",[35,9965,9966],{},"with a back panel and a door",", made of non-combustible and non-hygroscopic material; the back panel must remain non-removable for the entire service life of the equipment (",[7299,9969,9970],{},"sub-section 5.3.5.1 point a","). Door and back panel are therefore not an equipment option.",[27,9973,9975],{"id":9974},"where-is-the-boundary-between-material-cost-and-labour-cost","Where is the boundary between material cost and labour cost?",[11,9977,9978],{},"At the question of whether the quantity follows from the plan or from the execution.",[11,9980,9981],{},"Material cost follows from piece counts and metres and can be derived from the model. Labour cost follows from routes, substrates, accessibility and sequencing — quantities that appear neither on the single-line diagram nor on the situation plan. The same socket costs the same material whether it goes into a hollow wall or into concrete; the effort differs by a wide margin.",[11,9983,9984],{},"In practice, for estimating:",[43,9986,9987,9994,9997],{},[46,9988,9989,9990,9993],{},"A bill of materials is ",[35,9991,9992],{},"not half a quotation",". It is the half that can be checked.",[46,9995,9996],{},"Items that touch both — chases, penetrations, core drilling, scaffolding — belong explicitly on the labour side, otherwise they appear nowhere.",[46,9998,9999],{},"The installation method decides both sides at once: it determines which accompanying material is needed and how labour-intensive the execution becomes.",[11,10001,10002,10003,2152,10005,10008],{},"How to show both sides separately in a quotation is explained in ",[23,10004,9279],{"href":9278},[23,10006,10007],{"href":9282},"Cost comparison: yourself or an electrician",". Prices age, the method does not.",[27,10010,10012],{"id":10011},"which-estimating-mistakes-make-the-list-unusable","Which estimating mistakes make the list unusable?",[43,10014,10015,10026,10032,10038,10044,10055,10061,10067],{},[46,10016,10017,10020,10021,2145,10023,10025],{},[35,10018,10019],{},"Counted per room instead of per circuit."," The rules of eight — sockets per circuit and final circuits per RCD (",[7299,10022,9560],{},[7299,10024,9161],{},") — generate items that appear in no room-by-room list.",[46,10027,10028,10031],{},[35,10029,10030],{},"Straight-line distance instead of cable route."," Indoors the straight line sits systematically well below the real route; it is not an estimate but a lower bound.",[46,10033,10034,10037],{},[35,10035,10036],{},"Net lengths used without an allowance."," The allowance exists for the four reasons above, not out of caution.",[46,10039,10040,10043],{},[35,10041,10042],{},"Earthing material forgotten",", because it is one symbol on the diagram and a shell-construction topic on the schedule.",[46,10045,10046,10049,10050,10052,10053,5322],{},[35,10047,10048],{},"Device boxes and branch boxes treated as accessories",", although they are mandatory diagram content (",[7299,10051,9179],{},") and compulsory in masonry (",[7299,10054,9202],{},[46,10056,10057,10060],{},[35,10058,10059],{},"Frames and covers not listed separately."," A triple combination is one frame and three inserts, not three complete devices.",[46,10062,10063,10066],{},[35,10064,10065],{},"A circuit with no drawn cable drops out silently"," and makes the total length too small without any line being missing.",[46,10068,10069,10072],{},[35,10070,10071],{},"Prices carried over from an older revision"," without noting date and source. A quantity without a price is incomplete; a price without a date is wrong.",[27,10074,10076],{"id":10075},"how-is-the-bill-of-materials-produced-in-planelec-and-what-does-it-not-say","How is the bill of materials produced in PlanElec — and what does it not say?",[11,10078,10079,10080,10082,10083,10086,10087,10090],{},"Through the ",[35,10081,225],{}," tab. The ",[35,10084,10085],{},"Material List"," appears there as a separate document; the ",[35,10088,10089],{},"Open material overview"," button shows it in detail, and the PDF and CSV come from the same derivation. The detailed material list is a pilot feature: four reproducible example dossiers demonstrate the export path, while field validation with real projects is still to come.",[11,10092,10093],{},"What the overview contains:",[43,10095,10096,10119,10129],{},[46,10097,10098,10099,2145,10102,2145,10105,2145,10108,2145,10111,2145,10114,2145,10116,94],{},"Items in seven categories: ",[35,10100,10101],{},"Consumers",[35,10103,10104],{},"Equipment and inserts",[35,10106,10107],{},"Covers and frames",[35,10109,10110],{},"Installation material",[35,10112,10113],{},"Protection devices",[35,10115,5238],{},[35,10117,10118],{},"Distribution",[46,10120,10121,10122,2152,10125,10128],{},"Two views: ",[35,10123,10124],{},"By category",[35,10126,10127],{},"By room","; items with no room allocation appear separately so they do not vanish quietly.",[46,10130,10131],{},"A header showing the number of consumers, positions, parts and the cable length.",[11,10133,10134],{},"Since the update of 16 July 2026 the overview breaks sockets, switches and selected connections down into manufacturer-neutral individual parts — inserts, covers, frames and installation boxes. Fixed appliances include a connection box, terminal and strain relief; appliance-specific accessories are not included. Enclosures and busbars follow the modelled row and module count.",[11,10136,10137,10138,10141,10142,10145],{},"Six ",[35,10139,10140],{},"base assumptions"," are shown explicitly in the overview rather than acting in the background. The one that matters most for estimating: cable lengths are ",[35,10143,10144],{},"net lengths from the model; waste and installation allowances are not included."," Equally explicit: the device box follows an unambiguously linked wall; otherwise hollow-wall boxes are assumed for rooms containing hollow walls, and flush boxes elsewhere.",[11,10147,10148,10149,10151,10152,2152,10155,10158,10159,10162,10163,10166,10167,10170],{},"You set the allowance from the section above yourself: on the material list card in the ",[35,10150,225],{}," tab, enter an ",[35,10153,10154],{},"Allowance (%)",[35,10156,10157],{},"Metres per connection"," under ",[35,10160,10161],{},"Project cable reserve","; reserves maintained per cable and manual lengths take precedence. The material list PDF and CSV then contain a ",[35,10164,10165],{},"Cable quantities"," section with totals per cable type, room and system, the reserve counted and the source of each length: calculated along the route, estimated without a route or fixed manually. A ",[35,10168,10169],{},"Check list"," names cables without an endpoint, without a determinable length or without a cable type. Your allowance thus stays a documented assumption rather than a hidden number.",[11,10172,10173,10174,10176],{},"What the list deliberately does ",[35,10175,2329],{}," do:",[43,10178,10179,10185,10191,10197],{},[46,10180,10181,10184],{},[35,10182,10183],{},"It quotes no prices and is not an order release."," All items are manufacturer-neutral and must be resolved to concrete articles and professionally verified before ordering.",[46,10186,10187,10190],{},[35,10188,10189],{},"It invents no missing quantities."," A circuit without a cable route appears at 0 m with the note \"Routing missing\" rather than being estimated. A suspiciously lean list usually contains exactly those lines.",[46,10192,10193,10196],{},[35,10194,10195],{},"It adds no earthing material"," that is not in the model. Earth loop, earthing conductor and bonding conductors are model content, not an automatic addition.",[46,10198,10199,10200,10203],{},"For PV installations, ",[35,10201,10202],{},"open DC material data are reported as notices"," — missing strings, module types or route lengths — instead of being papered over.",[27,10205,10207],{"id":10206},"what-the-arei-self-check-does-not-do-here","What the AREI self-check does not do here",[11,10209,10210,10211,10214],{},"The self-check assesses the planned ",[35,10212,10213],{},"installation",", not the completeness of a bill of materials. Specifically:",[43,10216,10217,10224,10231,10237,10240],{},[46,10218,10219,10220,10223],{},"It checks ",[35,10221,10222],{},"no quantities",". There is no rule that reports a missing, under-dimensioned or duplicated item.",[46,10225,10226,10227,10230],{},"For earthing it checks only whether main equipotential bonding and the earth electrode are ",[35,10228,10229],{},"documented"," and whether the earthing system fits — not the cross-section of the installed conductor or the metres of earth loop required.",[46,10232,10219,10233,10236],{},[35,10234,10235],{},"no prices, no availability and no article allocation."," Manufacturer-neutral items stay manufacturer-neutral.",[46,10238,10239],{},"It calculates voltage drop only when the path is complete; if a partial length is missing it reports a data gap instead of a result. For the bill of materials that means the cable quantity can be incomplete without any rule firing.",[46,10241,10242],{},"Measurement and inspection stay with the professional on site and the recognised inspection body; the official assessment is made exclusively by the recognised inspection body.",[27,10244,8764],{"id":8763},[43,10246,10247,10251,10255,10259,10263,10267],{},[46,10248,10249],{},[23,10250,9471],{"href":9470},[46,10252,10253],{},[23,10254,9913],{"href":9912},[46,10256,10257],{},[23,10258,8776],{"href":8775},[46,10260,10261],{},[23,10262,9627],{"href":9626},[46,10264,10265],{},[23,10266,9279],{"href":9278},[46,10268,10269],{},[23,10270,10007],{"href":9282},[11,10272,10273],{},[23,10274,10275],{"href":5046},"Open PlanElec and derive your bill of materials →",[11,10277,10278],{},[7299,10279,10280],{},"Regulatory basis: AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 V06 — sub-sections 3.1.2.1, 3.1.2.2, 3.1.2.3, 3.1.3.1, 4.2.4.3, 5.2.1.2 with table 5.1, 5.2.6.1, 5.2.6.2, 5.2.9.3, 5.2.9.5, 5.3.5.1, 5.3.5.2, 5.3.5.3, 5.4.2.1, 5.4.2.2, 5.4.3.5, 5.4.4.1 and 5.4.4.2. The official text, the actual condition of the installation and the inspection by a recognised body remain decisive.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":10282},[10283,10284,10285,10286,10287,10288,10289,10290,10291,10292,10293,10294,10295],{"id":9100,"depth":291,"text":9101},{"id":9286,"depth":291,"text":9287},{"id":9321,"depth":291,"text":9322},{"id":9474,"depth":291,"text":9475},{"id":9633,"depth":291,"text":9634},{"id":9807,"depth":291,"text":9808},{"id":9862,"depth":291,"text":9863},{"id":9916,"depth":291,"text":9917},{"id":9974,"depth":291,"text":9975},{"id":10011,"depth":291,"text":10012},{"id":10075,"depth":291,"text":10076},{"id":10206,"depth":291,"text":10207},{"id":8763,"depth":291,"text":8764},"2026-08-31","Seven item groups, how they derive from the single-line diagram and the situation plan, the items that are routinely forgotten — earthing material, boxes, cable allowance, spare ways — and where the AREI fixes a quantity and where it does not.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fbill-of-materials-electrical.en",{"title":9094,"description":10297},"Bill of Materials for an Electrical Installation","bill-of-materials-electrical-installation","blog\u002Fbill-of-materials-electrical.en",[1979,1980,10305,938,10306,1213,318,319,2981],"bill of materials","cost estimating","c353uNP0w-vMtx1hrA0rAXcpUN6IQ6IhsBzUe3mInhQ",{"id":10309,"title":10310,"articleId":10311,"body":10312,"category":5101,"date":10296,"description":11038,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":11039,"navigation":308,"path":11040,"publishDate":10296,"readTime":11041,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":11042,"seoTitle":11043,"slug":10311,"stem":11044,"tags":11045,"__hash__":11048},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fcable-routes-and-lengths.en.md","Cable Routes and Lengths: How Do You Determine a Cable Length on an Electrical Plan?","cable-routes-and-lengths",{"type":8,"value":10313,"toc":11025},[10314,10318,10324,10331,10433,10436,10440,10451,10468,10471,10478,10481,10485,10488,10600,10606,10618,10622,10625,10639,10643,10650,10653,10678,10682,10701,10704,10731,10734,10738,10741,10829,10836,10839,10843,10846,10851,10856,10867,10870,10874,10880,10887,10890,10893,10919,10928,10932,10935,10979,10982,10984,11012,11017],[27,10315,10317],{"id":10316},"how-do-you-determine-a-cable-length-on-an-electrical-plan","How do you determine a cable length on an electrical plan?",[11,10319,10320,10323],{},[35,10321,10322],{},"Measure the route the cable actually takes, not the straight line: horizontally along the walls within the installation zones, vertically to the device, with the detours around doors and windows and with the slack at the board and in the box."," The straight line is not a rough estimate of that route but a lower bound. In the example below, the real route is 68 % longer.",[11,10325,10326,10327,10330],{},"The length is the input to the voltage-drop calculation and therefore a criterion in choosing the conductor cross-section (",[7299,10328,10329],{},"sub-section 5.2.1.2 point b","), and it is the unit of measure of your material costing. A guessed length makes both calculations worthless without anyone noticing.",[638,10332,10333,10346],{},[641,10334,10335],{},[644,10336,10337,10340,10343],{},[647,10338,10339],{},"Part of the route",[647,10341,10342],{},"What determines it",[647,10344,10345],{},"Where the value comes from",[657,10347,10348,10359,10370,10381,10393,10407,10421],{},[644,10349,10350,10353,10356],{},[662,10351,10352],{},"Horizontal run along the walls",[662,10354,10355],{},"Floor plan and the permitted installation zone",[662,10357,10358],{},"measurable from the plan",[644,10360,10361,10364,10367],{},[662,10362,10363],{},"Vertical run between the zone band and the device",[662,10365,10366],{},"Mounting height of the device relative to the horizontal band",[662,10368,10369],{},"mounting height minus band height",[644,10371,10372,10375,10378],{},[662,10373,10374],{},"Vertical run to the next storey",[662,10376,10377],{},"Storey height and position of the riser",[662,10379,10380],{},"architectural plan, section",[644,10382,10383,10386,10391],{},[662,10384,10385],{},"Detour around doors, windows and openings",[662,10387,10388],{},[7299,10389,10390],{},"sub-section 5.2.9.10 point b",[662,10392,10358],{},[644,10394,10395,10398,10401],{},[662,10396,10397],{},"Buried run to an outbuilding",[662,10399,10400],{},"Trench route plus one descent and one ascent to burial depth",[662,10402,10403,10404],{},"minimum 0.60 m per ",[7299,10405,10406],{},"sub-section 5.2.9.2 point a",[644,10408,10409,10412,10415],{},[662,10410,10411],{},"Slack at the termination point in the board",[662,10413,10414],{},"Terminal layout, wiring, later modifiability",[662,10416,10417,10418],{},"company convention — ",[35,10419,10420],{},"not a standard",[644,10422,10423,10426,10429],{},[662,10424,10425],{},"Slack in the box, switch or appliance",[662,10427,10428],{},"Connection method and space inside the enclosure",[662,10430,10417,10431],{},[35,10432,10420],{},[11,10434,10435],{},"The last two rows are marked that way deliberately: the AREI\u002FRGIE names no value at all for allowances or slack lengths. Why you still need slack is explained further down.",[27,10437,10439],{"id":10438},"why-is-the-straight-line-systematically-too-short","Why is the straight line systematically too short?",[11,10441,10442,10443,10446,10447,10450],{},"Because a cable embedded in a wall is not allowed to run diagonally. ",[7299,10444,10445],{},"Sub-section 5.2.9.10 point b"," ties electrical lines embedded ",[35,10448,10449],{},"without conduit"," in the walls of rooms to a fixed pattern:",[43,10452,10453,10456,10459,10462,10465],{},[46,10454,10455],{},"The route consists exclusively of horizontal and vertical runs; horizontal runs in a ceiling are perpendicular to the vertical walls.",[46,10457,10458],{},"Horizontal runs lie 25 to 35 cm from the floor or from the ceiling, and likewise 25 to 35 cm above the underside of window lintels — provided the lines then stay at least 25 cm below the ceiling.",[46,10460,10461],{},"Vertical runs lie as close as possible to a corner of the room, or 10 to 20 cm from door frames and jambs.",[46,10463,10464],{},"Installation outside this zone pattern is carried out vertically above a visible electrical machine or appliance.",[46,10466,10467],{},"The covering plaster layer is not thinner than 0.4 cm.",[11,10469,10470],{},"The pattern serves a safety purpose — whoever drills later should know where nothing runs — and has a side effect on length: every diagonal becomes a staircase of one horizontal and one vertical leg, and every doorway forces a detour above or below it.",[11,10472,10473,10474,10477],{},"A worked example. A switch sits in the opposite corner of a 4.8 × 3.6 m room, so 6.0 m from the board in a straight line. Along the walls it is 4.8 m plus 3.6 m, so 8.4 m. The horizontal band runs 30 cm above the floor. Add the drop from the termination point in the board down to the band, say 0.9 m, and the climb from the band up to the switch height of 110 cm, which is 0.8 m. Total: 10.1 m — ",[35,10475,10476],{},"68 % more than the straight line",", and that is before any slack.",[11,10479,10480],{},"For a socket outlet the last step almost disappears: if the horizontal band sits 25 to 35 cm above the floor and the socket at 30 cm, the vertical drop is close to zero. So treat switches and sockets separately instead of applying one flat percentage to everything.",[27,10482,10484],{"id":10483},"what-does-the-installation-method-mean-for-the-length","What does the installation method mean for the length?",[11,10486,10487],{},"It decides whether the zone pattern applies at all, and which geometric constraints are added.",[638,10489,10490,10502],{},[641,10491,10492],{},[644,10493,10494,10497,10500],{},[647,10495,10496],{},"Installation method",[647,10498,10499],{},"Effect on the route",[647,10501,9490],{},[657,10503,10504,10517,10530,10543,10558,10571,10584],{},[644,10505,10506,10509,10512],{},[662,10507,10508],{},"Embedded without conduit, in walls",[662,10510,10511],{},"Bound to the zone pattern; plaster cover ≥ 0.4 cm",[662,10513,10514],{},[7299,10515,10516],{},"5.2.9.10 point b",[644,10518,10519,10522,10525],{},[662,10520,10521],{},"Embedded in concrete or cement",[662,10523,10524],{},"Cover ≥ 3 cm; the route follows formwork and reinforcement, not the shortest line",[662,10526,10527],{},[7299,10528,10529],{},"5.2.9.10 point a",[644,10531,10532,10535,10538],{},[662,10533,10534],{},"Embedded in conduit",[662,10536,10537],{},"The zone pattern of 5.2.9.10 b does not apply by the letter of the text; instead minimum bending radii and the duty to be able to pull in and remove conductors at any time",[662,10539,10540],{},[7299,10541,10542],{},"5.2.9.3 point e",[644,10544,10545,10548,10551],{},[662,10546,10547],{},"Surface, cable tray, cable ducting",[662,10549,10550],{},"Freer routing, but tensile forces from self-weight must not act on the terminals in vertical sections",[662,10552,10553,2145,10555],{},[7299,10554,9264],{},[7299,10556,10557],{},"5.2.9.6",[644,10559,10560,10563,10566],{},[662,10561,10562],{},"Under mouldings and skirting boards",[662,10564,10565],{},"The route follows the skirting, so in practice the room perimeter",[662,10567,10568],{},[7299,10569,10570],{},"5.2.9.4",[644,10572,10573,10576,10579],{},[662,10574,10575],{},"Buried",[662,10577,10578],{},"At least 0.60 m deep unless technically impossible ⇒ two vertical legs on top of the trench length",[662,10580,10581],{},[7299,10582,10583],{},"5.2.9.2 point a",[644,10585,10586,10589,10595],{},[662,10587,10588],{},"Extra-low voltage (ELV)",[662,10590,10591,10594],{},[7299,10592,10593],{},"Point b"," of 5.2.9.10 is expressly excluded — bell and SELV wiring is not bound to the zone pattern",[662,10596,10597],{},[7299,10598,10599],{},"5.2.9.15 point b",[11,10601,10602,10603,10605],{},"The bending radii for conduits bent on site are explicit: not less than ten times the outer diameter for metal conduits, eight times for flexible thermoplastic and five times for rigid thermoplastic conduits (",[7299,10604,9897],{},"). For a 25 mm conduit that is 12.5 to 25 cm of radius per corner. In a dwelling with a dozen changes of direction per circuit, that adds up.",[11,10607,10608,10609,10613,10614,94],{},"Which method suits which case is covered in ",[23,10610,10612],{"href":10611},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fpreflex-vs-open-wiring","Preflex versus loose wiring","; the cable types themselves in ",[23,10615,10617],{"href":10616},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fxvb-vs-vob-cable","XVB versus VOB",[27,10619,10621],{"id":10620},"do-you-count-the-one-way-distance-or-the-round-trip","Do you count the one-way distance or the round trip?",[11,10623,10624],{},"The one-way distance, from the board to the load. The return conductor is in the formula, not in the input: single-phase carries a factor of 2, three-phase a factor of √3. Entering twice the length counts the return conductor twice and oversizes the cross-section for no reason.",[11,10626,10627,10628,10631,10632,10635,10636,94],{},"The criterion itself is not a number in the AREI\u002FRGIE. ",[7299,10629,10630],{},"Section 5.2.5"," — \"Chute de tension\" in French, \"Spanningsval\" in Dutch, \"Spannungsänderung\" in German — only requires voltage drop to be limited to the values described in the rules of the trade. The widely used 3 % for lighting and 5 % for other final circuits are an interpretation following IEC\u002FNBN HD 60364-5-52. Calculation method, network arrangements and examples are in ",[23,10633,10634],{"href":4918},"Calculating voltage drop","; the cross-section to protection mapping in ",[23,10637,10638],{"href":8687},"Cable cross-section per breaker",[27,10640,10642],{"id":10641},"how-do-you-count-a-cable-split-at-a-junction-box","How do you count a cable split at a junction box?",[11,10644,10645,10646,10649],{},"Physically it is several cables; electrically it is one path. For voltage drop, what counts is the sum over the ",[35,10647,10648],{},"entire"," run from the upstream protective device to the load, not the longest individual segment. Three sections of 12 m each make 36 m, and calculating only the last leg understates the result by two thirds.",[11,10651,10652],{},"Why the split still has to exist in the model:",[43,10654,10655,10661,10666,10672],{},[46,10656,10657,10658,10660],{},"Each section can have its own cross-section and its own installation method. Both are mandatory single-line diagram content for domestic installations (",[7299,10659,8546],{},"), and both weigh differently in the calculation.",[46,10662,10663,10664,5322],{},"Connection and junction boxes are themselves mandatory diagram content and must additionally appear with their position on the situation plan (",[7299,10665,9466],{},[46,10667,10668,10669,10671],{},"Connections may only be made at defined places: in distribution and control assemblies, in connection or junction boxes, at the terminals of switches and socket outlets, or in sufficiently large ceiling boxes (",[7299,10670,9825],{},"). A joint buried in the middle of a wall is not a routing option, it is a breach.",[46,10673,10674,10675,10677],{},"For embedded conduit installations there is more: in connection, junction and draw boxes the conductors and cables remain accessible, and tees and elbows are forbidden (",[7299,10676,9843],{},"). The box is therefore also a geometric waypoint, not merely a terminating point.",[27,10679,10681],{"id":10680},"what-allowances-and-slack-are-customary-and-what-does-the-areirgie-say-about-them","What allowances and slack are customary — and what does the AREI\u002FRGIE say about them?",[11,10683,10684,10685,10688,10689,10692,10693,10696,10697,10700],{},"On the size of an allowance the AREI\u002FRGIE says ",[35,10686,10687],{},"nothing",". Neither ",[7299,10690,10691],{},"section 5.2.5",", nor ",[7299,10694,10695],{},"section 5.2.9",", nor the documentation requirements in ",[7299,10698,10699],{},"section 3.1.2"," mention a percentage, a slack length or a waste factor. Any figure you use for it is a convention of your own firm — and belongs in your calculation sheet as exactly that.",[11,10702,10703],{},"What the regulation does fix are the conditions from which slack follows:",[43,10705,10706,10711,10716,10726],{},[46,10707,10708,10709,5322],{},"Connections to appliances must not be subjected to tensile and torsional forces (",[7299,10710,9881],{},[46,10712,10713,10714,5322],{},"In vertical sections, tensile forces from the self-weight of the lines must not act on the connection terminals (",[7299,10715,9887],{},[46,10717,10718,10719,10722,10723,10725],{},"In conduits it must be possible ",[35,10720,10721],{},"at any time"," to pull in or remove conductors or cables (",[7299,10724,9897],{},"). A conduit route calculated to the millimetre makes precisely that impossible.",[46,10727,9900,10728,10730],{},[7299,10729,9843],{},") — which does not work without a loop inside the enclosure.",[11,10732,10733],{},"In practice this means: the allowance is not a safety cushion on an uncertain calculation, it is a material item with a purpose. If you apply it as a flat percentage of the total length, document the percentage, where it comes from and which design stage it belongs to. A value without provenance is no longer traceable at the next stage and quietly finds its way into quotations.",[27,10735,10737],{"id":10736},"does-the-cable-length-have-to-appear-on-the-single-line-diagram","Does the cable length have to appear on the single-line diagram?",[11,10739,10740],{},"Here the AREI\u002FRGIE distinguishes two cases, and the distinction is often overlooked.",[638,10742,10743,10758],{},[641,10744,10745],{},[644,10746,10747,10750,10753,10756],{},[647,10748,10749],{},"Document and installation type",[647,10751,10752],{},"Required data about the line",[647,10754,10755],{},"Length required?",[647,10757,9490],{},[657,10759,10760,10776,10796,10811],{},[644,10761,10762,10765,10768,10772],{},[662,10763,10764],{},"Single-line diagram, domestic installation",[662,10766,10767],{},"Type, cross-section, number of conductors, installation method",[662,10769,10770],{},[35,10771,7333],{},[662,10773,10774],{},[7299,10775,9179],{},[644,10777,10778,10781,10787,10791],{},[662,10779,10780],{},"Circuit diagram, non-domestic installation",[662,10782,10783,10784],{},"Installation method, nature, number and cross-section of conductors ",[35,10785,10786],{},"and the length of the lines",[662,10788,10789],{},[35,10790,7949],{},[662,10792,10793],{},[7299,10794,10795],{},"3.1.2.2 point b",[644,10797,10798,10801,10804,10806],{},[662,10799,10800],{},"Common parts of a residential building",[662,10802,10803],{},"May be limited to the requirements for domestic installations",[662,10805,7333],{},[662,10807,10808],{},[7299,10809,10810],{},"3.1.2.1 point e",[644,10812,10813,10816,10822,10825],{},[662,10814,10815],{},"Situation plan, domestic installation",[662,10817,955,10818,10821],{},[35,10819,10820],{},"position"," of boards, connection and junction boxes, socket outlets, light points, switches, fixed machines and appliances and sources",[662,10823,10824],{},"no — position, not length",[662,10826,10827],{},[7299,10828,9218],{},[11,10830,10831,10832,10835],{},"In housing, the length is therefore a ",[35,10833,10834],{},"design quantity, not a drawing obligation",". That is precisely what makes it dangerous: because it need not appear anywhere on the diagram, nobody checks it — while the cross-section that follows from it does appear and is checked. Without a recorded length, you cannot justify afterwards why 2.5 mm² was chosen in one place and 4 mm² in another.",[11,10837,10838],{},"For a non-domestic installation the position is unambiguous: without a length figure, the circuit diagram is incomplete.",[27,10840,10842],{"id":10841},"from-length-to-material-list-and-price","From length to material list and price",[11,10844,10845],{},"Through two separate outputs that use the same resolved length.",[11,10847,955,10848,10850],{},[35,10849,937],{}," gives one row per cable: type, number of cores, cross-section, length, From and To, the installation methods encountered along the route, and the CPR fire class; plus current, voltage drop in volts and percent, end voltage and the limit applied. If a length is missing, the row stays without a figure rather than showing an estimate.",[11,10852,955,10853,10855],{},[35,10854,938],{}," groups the same cables by specification and reports them in metres; where a price per metre exists, the line item follows from it. Two points belong explicitly with that:",[43,10857,10858,10864],{},[46,10859,10860,10861,10863],{},"The lengths shown are ",[35,10862,10144],{}," The allowance from the previous section is therefore not in there.",[46,10865,10866],{},"A circuit without a cable route does not disappear: it appears with 0 m and the note \"Routing missing\". A material list that looks suspiciously lean for a whole house usually contains exactly those rows.",[11,10868,10869],{},"The project overview draws the same distinction: it shows either a complete total length, or a subtotal marked \"≥\" together with the number of missing lengths, or no figure at all. An actual total of 0 m and an unknown length are two different states.",[27,10871,10873],{"id":10872},"how-does-planelec-route-cables-automatically-and-where-are-waypoints-still-needed","How does PlanElec route cables automatically, and where are waypoints still needed?",[11,10875,10876,10877,10879],{},"In the situation plan, under ",[35,10878,415],{},". If cables exist in the topology, you route the whole active storey at once or one selected line individually.",[11,10881,10882,10883,10886],{},"The algorithm looks for the shortest path ",[35,10884,10885],{},"along the drawn walls",", not across the room: start and end points are projected onto the nearest wall edge, then a shortest-path search runs over the wall nodes. If there is no wall path — because the floor plan is interrupted there, for instance — the route falls back to the direct line. The reported length follows the visible polyline exactly; deliberately slanted wall segments are not artificially stretched to an orthogonal measure.",[11,10888,10889],{},"To adjust, select a cable line: a click on a section inserts a waypoint and starts dragging, a double-click removes it. A dragged waypoint is stored only on release and can be undone in a single step. When a circuit is rebuilt, the cable specification, manual length and saved route are preserved.",[11,10891,10892],{},"Four points worth knowing:",[43,10894,10895,10901,10907,10913],{},[46,10896,10897,10900],{},[35,10898,10899],{},"The automatic route is two-dimensional."," It lies in the plane of the storey; height differences within one storey — the climb into the zone band, the drop to the switch — do not enter the length. That is what waypoints, or the manual length, are for.",[46,10902,10903,10906],{},[35,10904,10905],{},"Between storeys"," you explicitly pick an existing staircase, shaft or riser. PlanElec invents no vertical connection. If one is missing, or reliable heights are missing, the route stays incomplete instead of reporting an apparent length. Where the connection exists, the height difference is counted.",[46,10908,10909,10912],{},[35,10910,10911],{},"The manual length takes precedence"," over the calculated route. That is the deliberate escape hatch for measured distances — and exactly the place where an old value can quietly survive if the route changes later.",[46,10914,10915,10918],{},[35,10916,10917],{},"Routing along the walls is an assumption about the execution",", not a finding. Whether the cable runs in the zone, in conduit or on the surface is decided by the installation method you set per section — not by the router.",[11,10920,10921,10922,10925,10926,94],{},"Step-by-step operation is in the guide ",[23,10923,10924],{"href":2414},"Switch chains, circuits and cable routes",". Which switch type sits at the end of the chain is covered in ",[23,10927,7783],{"href":7782},[27,10929,10931],{"id":10930},"what-the-self-check-calculates-on-length-and-what-stays-on-site","What the self-check calculates on length, and what stays on site",[11,10933,10934],{},"The self-check evaluates the supported rules against the data entered. Specifically on length:",[43,10936,10937,10943,10949,10958,10967],{},[46,10938,10939,10942],{},[35,10940,10941],{},"Voltage drop on a complete path:"," it calculates voltage drop over the whole route from the protective device to the load. If the length of any segment is missing or the path cannot be traced continuously, it reports a data gap instead of a result. A value calculated from partial data would be systematically too favourable.",[46,10944,10945,10948],{},[35,10946,10947],{},"Explicit assumptions:"," 80 % of the rated current of the upstream protective device as the load case, power factor 0.95, copper and a resistance model without reactance or temperature correction.",[46,10950,10951,10954,10955,10957],{},[35,10952,10953],{},"Guide values 3 % and 5 %:"," they follow the IEC\u002FNBN HD 60364-5-52 interpretation; ",[7299,10956,10691],{}," refers to the rules of good practice.",[46,10959,10960,10963,10964,10966],{},[35,10961,10962],{},"Route and execution:"," whether the drawn route matches the actual installation, whether the zones of ",[7299,10965,10516],{}," are respected and whether slack was provided shows on site, not on the drawing.",[46,10968,10969,10972,10973,10975,10976,10978],{},[35,10970,10971],{},"Current-carrying capacity:"," installation method, grouping and ambient temperature under ",[7299,10974,8636],{}," belong to the design; ",[7299,10977,8675],{}," only limits the protective device per cross-section.",[11,10980,10981],{},"Measurements and the official assessment are carried out by the accredited inspection body.",[27,10983,8764],{"id":8763},[43,10985,10986,10991,10995,10999,11004,11008],{},[46,10987,10988],{},[23,10989,10990],{"href":4918},"Calculating voltage drop: how long may the cable be?",[46,10992,10993],{},[23,10994,10638],{"href":8687},[46,10996,10997],{},[23,10998,10612],{"href":10611},[46,11000,11001],{},[23,11002,11003],{"href":10616},"XVB versus VOB: which cable for what?",[46,11005,11006],{},[23,11007,7783],{"href":7782},[46,11009,11010],{},[23,11011,8161],{"href":8160},[11,11013,11014],{},[23,11015,11016],{"href":5046},"Open PlanElec and route your cables →",[11,11018,11019],{},[7299,11020,11021,11022,94],{},"Regulatory basis: AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 V06 — sub-sections 3.1.2.1, 3.1.2.2, 3.1.2.3, 4.4.1.4 with Table 4.11, 5.2.1.2, 5.2.6.1, 5.2.6.2, 5.2.9.2, 5.2.9.3, 5.2.9.4, 5.2.9.5, 5.2.9.6, 5.2.9.10 and 5.2.9.15, plus Section 5.2.5. Official text: ",[23,11023,8805],{"href":4466,"rel":11024},[4434],{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":11026},[11027,11028,11029,11030,11031,11032,11033,11034,11035,11036,11037],{"id":10316,"depth":291,"text":10317},{"id":10438,"depth":291,"text":10439},{"id":10483,"depth":291,"text":10484},{"id":10620,"depth":291,"text":10621},{"id":10641,"depth":291,"text":10642},{"id":10680,"depth":291,"text":10681},{"id":10736,"depth":291,"text":10737},{"id":10841,"depth":291,"text":10842},{"id":10872,"depth":291,"text":10873},{"id":10930,"depth":291,"text":10931},{"id":8763,"depth":291,"text":8764},"Measure the route, not the straight line: installation zones under AREI 5.2.9.10, installation method, segments at junction boxes, allowances from trade practice, and when the AREI\u002FRGIE requires the length on the diagram.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fcable-routes-and-lengths.en","12 min",{"title":10310,"description":11038},"Cable Routes and Lengths: Measuring Cables on a Plan","blog\u002Fcable-routes-and-lengths.en",[1979,1980,2588,2589,11046,11047,938,317,319,2981],"voltage drop","installation method","2CBNr_PXVzPpH2KdVVRRkWmwZG0B5JNV19jsH5VyIkM",{"id":11050,"title":11051,"articleId":11052,"body":11053,"category":5101,"date":10296,"description":12522,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":12523,"navigation":308,"path":12524,"publishDate":10296,"readTime":11041,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":12525,"seoTitle":12526,"slug":11052,"stem":12527,"tags":12528,"__hash__":12533},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Finstallation-methods-arei.en.md","Installation methods under the AREI: which entry belongs on the single-line diagram?","installation-methods-arei",{"type":8,"value":11054,"toc":12507},[11055,11059,11085,11091,11429,11435,11439,11452,11472,11476,11482,11547,11553,11569,11573,11576,11598,11611,11630,11634,11637,11708,11715,11721,11725,11735,11771,11775,11785,11794,11805,11825,11845,11875,11879,11888,11891,11898,11902,11905,12006,12029,12033,12039,12250,12255,12273,12311,12315,12318,12372,12377,12381,12469,12471,12494,12499],[27,11056,11058],{"id":11057},"which-installation-methods-does-the-arei-recognise-and-which-one-belongs-on-the-diagram","Which installation methods does the AREI recognise — and which one belongs on the diagram?",[11,11060,11061,11066,11067,11069,11070,11073,11074,11077,11078,11081,11082,11084],{},[35,11062,11063,11064,5322],{},"The single-line diagram of a dwelling states the installation method of every cable run, alongside cable type, cross-section and number of conductors (",[7299,11065,8546],{}," You choose from the seventeen methods ",[7299,11068,23],{}," to ",[7299,11071,11072],{},"q"," in ",[7299,11075,11076],{},"sub-section 5.2.2.1",": overhead lines, buried cables, surface and concealed wiring, skirtings, trunking and troughs, all the way to heating cables in ceilings and floors. Other methods are permitted under the relevant rules of the trade (",[7299,11079,11080],{},"sub-section 5.2.2.4","). For most of the listed methods, ",[7299,11083,10695],{}," adds its own binding rules.",[11,11086,11087,11088,11090],{},"The AREI states no purpose for this requirement, but the technical reason is clear: the current-carrying capacity IZ of a cable depends, among other things, on \"the installation method and the environment of the wiring\" (",[7299,11089,8636],{},"). Without the installation method you cannot judge whether a cross-section suits the circuit.",[638,11092,11093,11111],{},[641,11094,11095],{},[644,11096,11097,11103,11105,11108],{},[647,11098,11099,11100,4382],{},"Letter (",[7299,11101,11102],{},"5.2.2.1",[647,11104,10496],{},[647,11106,11107],{},"Typical residential use",[647,11109,11110],{},"Specific rules",[657,11112,11113,11132,11148,11163,11178,11194,11215,11231,11247,11266,11282,11298,11314,11333,11350,11367,11383,11399,11414],{},[644,11114,11115,11117,11120,11123],{},[662,11116,23],{},[662,11118,11119],{},"overhead lines",[662,11121,11122],{},"supply to an outbuilding",[662,11124,11125,11128,11129,4382],{},[7299,11126,11127],{},"5.2.9.1"," (refers to book 3, ",[7299,11130,11131],{},"chapter 7.1",[644,11133,11134,11137,11140,11143],{},[662,11135,11136],{},"b.1",[662,11138,11139],{},"directly buried",[662,11141,11142],{},"garden socket, carport",[662,11144,11145,11147],{},[7299,11146,10583],{},": at least 0.60 m deep, cables only",[644,11149,11150,11153,11156,11159],{},[662,11151,11152],{},"b.2",[662,11154,11155],{},"buried with mechanical protection",[662,11157,11158],{},"cable under a warning tape",[662,11160,11161],{},[7299,11162,10583],{},[644,11164,11165,11168,11171,11174],{},[662,11166,11167],{},"b.3",[662,11169,11170],{},"buried in ducts",[662,11172,11173],{},"crossing under a driveway or terrace",[662,11175,11176],{},[7299,11177,10583],{},[644,11179,11180,11183,11186,11189],{},[662,11181,11182],{},"c",[662,11184,11185],{},"contact lines for rolling or sliding contacts",[662,11187,11188],{},"not relevant in housing",[662,11190,11191],{},[7299,11192,11193],{},"5.2.1.4 point a",[644,11195,11196,11199,11202,11205],{},[662,11197,11198],{},"d",[662,11200,11201],{},"surface-mounted",[662,11203,11204],{},"visible XVB in cellar, garage, plant room",[662,11206,11207,11208,11211,11212,11214],{},"Definition ",[7299,11209,11210],{},"5.2.2.1 d",": wall clearance ≤ 0.3 × D; ",[7299,11213,9264],{},": in principle, cables only",[644,11216,11217,11220,11223,11226],{},[662,11218,11219],{},"e",[662,11221,11222],{},"in concealed conduits",[662,11224,11225],{},"new-build standard: VOB inside Preflex",[662,11227,11228],{},[7299,11229,11230],{},"5.2.9.3",[644,11232,11233,11236,11239,11242],{},[662,11234,11235],{},"f",[662,11237,11238],{},"in mouldings, skirtings and architraves",[662,11240,11241],{},"renovation, visible trunking",[662,11243,11244,11246],{},[7299,11245,10570],{},": insulated conductors or single-core cables only",[644,11248,11249,11252,11255,11258],{},[662,11250,11251],{},"g",[662,11253,11254],{},"in free air with clips, or on trays, ladders, brackets and similar supports",[662,11256,11257],{},"plant room, boiler room",[662,11259,11207,11260,11263,11264,11214],{},[7299,11261,11262],{},"5.2.2.1 g",": clearance from all walls ≥ 0.3 × D; ",[7299,11265,9264],{},[644,11267,11268,11271,11274,11277],{},[662,11269,11270],{},"h",[662,11272,11273],{},"in trunking and troughs",[662,11275,11276],{},"distribution run in a plant room",[662,11278,11279,11281],{},[7299,11280,10557],{},": in troughs, in principle, cables only",[644,11283,11284,11287,11290,11293],{},[662,11285,11286],{},"i",[662,11288,11289],{},"in cable protection (ducting)",[662,11291,11292],{},"route above the floor",[662,11294,11295],{},[7299,11296,11297],{},"5.2.9.7",[644,11299,11300,11303,11306,11309],{},[662,11301,11302],{},"j",[662,11304,11305],{},"in open, closed or sand-filled channels",[662,11307,11308],{},"floor channel, industrial use",[662,11310,11311],{},[7299,11312,11313],{},"5.2.9.8",[644,11315,11316,11319,11322,11325],{},[662,11317,11318],{},"k",[662,11320,11321],{},"in structural voids, recesses and manufactured blocks",[662,11323,11324],{},"hollow blocks, suspended ceiling",[662,11326,11327,2152,11330],{},[7299,11328,11329],{},"5.2.9.9",[7299,11331,11332],{},"4.3.3.5 point b",[644,11334,11335,11338,11341,11344],{},[662,11336,11337],{},"l",[662,11339,11340],{},"behind wall panels",[662,11342,11343],{},"drywall, timber frame",[662,11345,11346,2152,11348],{},[7299,11347,11329],{},[7299,11349,11332],{},[644,11351,11352,11355,11358,11361],{},[662,11353,11354],{},"m",[662,11356,11357],{},"directly concealed, without conduits",[662,11359,11360],{},"XVB straight into the chase",[662,11362,11363,11366],{},[7299,11364,11365],{},"5.2.9.10",": installation zones, concrete ≥ 3 cm, plaster ≥ 0.4 cm",[644,11368,11369,11372,11375,11378],{},[662,11370,11371],{},"n",[662,11373,11374],{},"in busbar trunking systems",[662,11376,11377],{},"rare in housing",[662,11379,11380],{},[7299,11381,11382],{},"5.2.9.11",[644,11384,11385,11388,11391,11394],{},[662,11386,11387],{},"o",[662,11389,11390],{},"on insulators",[662,11392,11393],{},"legacy installations",[662,11395,11396],{},[7299,11397,11398],{},"5.2.9.12",[644,11400,11401,11403,11406,11409],{},[662,11402,11],{},[662,11404,11405],{},"submerged in water",[662,11407,11408],{},"swimming-pool equipment",[662,11410,11411],{},[7299,11412,11413],{},"5.2.2.1 point p",[644,11415,11416,11418,11421,11424],{},[662,11417,11072],{},[662,11419,11420],{},"in ceilings, floors and walls for heating cables and panels",[662,11422,11423],{},"underfloor heating, heating mats",[662,11425,11426],{},[7299,11427,11428],{},"5.2.9.13",[11,11430,11431,11432,11434],{},"Other methods are permitted, but they fall under the residual clause: they must comply with \"the relevant rules of the trade\" (",[7299,11433,11080],{},"). Working outside the list therefore means leaving the territory for which the AREI itself states a rule.",[27,11436,11438],{"id":11437},"what-separates-point-e-from-point-m","What separates point e from point m?",[11,11440,11441,11442,11444,11445,11447,11448,11451],{},"This is the pair that gets confused most often, because in everyday speech both are simply \"concealed\". The difference is the conduit. Point ",[7299,11443,11219],{}," is literally \"in concealed conduits\" — the Dutch text says \"in verzonken buizen\", the French \"sous conduits encastrés\". Point ",[7299,11446,11354],{}," is expressly \"directly concealed, ",[35,11449,11450],{},"without"," conduits\".",[11,11453,11454,11455,11457,11458,11461,11462,11457,11464,11467,11468,11471],{},"That is not wordplay but the boundary between two sets of rules. Point ",[7299,11456,11219],{}," is governed by ",[7299,11459,11460],{},"sub-section 5.2.9.3"," with the conduit rules: bending radii, conductors that remain drawable and removable at all times, no connections inside the conduit. Point ",[7299,11463,11354],{},[7299,11465,11466],{},"sub-section 5.2.9.10"," with the installation zones and the minimum covers. Which material to choose in each case, and what it costs, is compared in ",[23,11469,11470],{"href":10611},"Preflex versus open wiring","; this article describes the systematics that both variants sit inside.",[27,11473,11475],{"id":11474},"why-does-the-installation-method-govern-current-carrying-capacity","Why does the installation method govern current-carrying capacity?",[11,11477,11478,11481],{},[7299,11479,11480],{},"Sub-section 4.4.1.4"," names five quantities that IZ depends on. The installation method is one of them, and it is the only one you cannot read off the cable itself.",[638,11483,11484,11497],{},[641,11485,11486],{},[644,11487,11488,11494],{},[647,11489,11490,11491],{},"Quantity per ",[7299,11492,11493],{},"4.4.1.4",[647,11495,11496],{},"What it means on the plan",[657,11498,11499,11509,11517,11525,11536],{},[644,11500,11501,11504],{},[662,11502,11503],{},"conductor cross-section",[662,11505,11506,11507,4382],{},"entry on the single-line diagram (",[7299,11508,9179],{},[644,11510,11511,11514],{},[662,11512,11513],{},"conductor insulation",[662,11515,11516],{},"cable type, for example XVB or VOB",[644,11518,11519,11522],{},[662,11520,11521],{},"construction of the wiring",[662,11523,11524],{},"single- or multi-core, armouring, screen",[644,11526,11527,11530],{},[662,11528,11529],{},"installation method and environment",[662,11531,11532,11533,11535],{},"installation method: entry on the single-line diagram (",[7299,11534,9179],{},"); environment: not prescribed",[644,11537,11538,11541],{},[662,11539,11540],{},"ambient temperature",[662,11542,11543,11544],{},"where the cable runs, see ",[7299,11545,11546],{},"5.2.3.1",[11,11548,11549,11550,11552],{},"The calculation itself is not in the AREI. The text only says that current-carrying capacity \"is calculated in accordance with the rules of the trade\" (",[7299,11551,11493],{},"), and that the competent ministers may set out further rules. In practice the tables and correction factors therefore come from the NBN HD 60364-5-52 series, not from the AREI.",[11,11554,11555,11556,11558,11559,11562,11563,11566,11567,94],{},"What the AREI does fix is frequently mistaken for that: ",[7299,11557,8639],{}," gives, for domestic installations, the ",[35,11560,11561],{},"maximum"," rated current per conductor cross-section, separately for the fuse and for the circuit breaker: at 1.5 mm² 10 A and 16 A, at 2.5 mm² 16 A and 20 A, at 4 mm² 20 A and 25 A, at 6 mm² 32 A and 40 A, at 10 mm² 50 A and 63 A. That table knows nothing about the installation method. It is a ceiling, not a clearance: the condition IZ ≥ IB from ",[7299,11564,11565],{},"sub-section 5.2.1.2 point a"," has to be met on top of it. A larger cross-section does not conflict with table 4.11; the table caps the rated current for each cross-section, not the cross-section selected for a lower rated current. The cross-section-to-protection pairing is covered in ",[23,11568,8688],{"href":8687},[27,11570,11572],{"id":11571},"what-do-grouping-ambient-temperature-and-thermal-insulation-do-to-the-capacity","What do grouping, ambient temperature and thermal insulation do to the capacity?",[11,11574,11575],{},"All three lower IZ, and in all three cases the AREI supplies the boundary condition, not the factor.",[11,11577,11578,11581,11582,11585,11586,11589,11590,11593,11594,11597],{},[35,11579,11580],{},"Grouping."," The AREI defines the threshold precisely: a cable or insulated conductor counts as ",[35,11583,11584],{},"installed separately"," when it lies at least 20 mm away from any other cable or insulated conductor (",[7299,11587,11588],{},"section 2.7.1","). Anything closer is installed \"in bunches or in a flat layer\". That distinction has a direct consequence in the AREI — but for fire propagation, not for heating: separately installed conductors and cables must have at least characteristic F1 or class Eca (",[7299,11591,11592],{},"sub-section 5.2.7.2","); in bunches or a flat layer, at least F2 or class Cca (",[7299,11595,11596],{},"sub-section 5.2.7.3","), and that applies \"regardless of the distance over which\" they are actually bunched. The thermal grouping factor itself again follows from the rules of the trade.",[11,11599,11600,2459,11603,11606,11607,11610],{},[35,11601,11602],{},"Ambient temperature.",[7299,11604,11605],{},"Sub-section 5.2.3.1"," requires wiring to suit both the lowest and the highest local ambient temperature and to be installed only within the temperature range stated by the manufacturer. ",[7299,11608,11609],{},"Section 5.2.8"," adds to this: wiring must not be exposed to harmful temperatures near heating pipes, hot-air ducts or flues, and must keep sufficient distance or be separated by a heat shield. Routing a cable alongside the heating manifold changes its thermal environment — and that environment is part of the same entry as the installation method.",[11,11612,11613,11616,11617,11619,11620,11622,11623,11626,11627,11629],{},[35,11614,11615],{},"Thermal insulation."," The AREI contains ",[35,11618,7333],{}," reduction factor of its own for cables in or under thermal insulation. \"Thermal insulation\" appears in the regulation as a precaution for temperatures below −25 °C (",[7299,11621,11546],{},") and in the chapter on heating panels, where insulating material in contact with the heating installation must be non-combustible (",[7299,11624,11625],{},"5.2.9.13 point b.5","). A cable running through an insulated pitched roof therefore falls under \"installation method and environment\" in ",[7299,11628,11493],{}," and is assessed by the rules of the trade — not by an AREI table that does not exist.",[27,11631,11633],{"id":11632},"where-does-the-entry-belong-single-line-diagram-situation-plan-or-bill-of-materials","Where does the entry belong: single-line diagram, situation plan or bill of materials?",[11,11635,11636],{},"These three documents have clearly separated mandatory content in the AREI.",[638,11638,11639,11650],{},[641,11640,11641],{},[644,11642,11643,11645,11648],{},[647,11644,649],{},[647,11646,11647],{},"Installation method required?",[647,11649,9490],{},[657,11651,11652,11666,11681,11695],{},[644,11653,11654,11657,11662],{},[662,11655,11656],{},"single-line diagram (domestic)",[662,11658,11659,11661],{},[35,11660,7949],{},", explicitly",[662,11663,11664],{},[7299,11665,9179],{},[644,11667,11668,11671,11677],{},[662,11669,11670],{},"situation plan (domestic)",[662,11672,11673,11674,11676],{},"no — it shows the ",[35,11675,10820],{}," of the components",[662,11678,11679],{},[7299,11680,9218],{},[644,11682,11683,11686,11691],{},[662,11684,11685],{},"circuit diagram (non-domestic)",[662,11687,11688,11690],{},[35,11689,7949],{},", together with length and conductor count",[662,11692,11693],{},[7299,11694,10795],{},[644,11696,11697,11699,11702],{},[662,11698,10305],{},[662,11700,11701],{},"not prescribed",[662,11703,11704,11705],{},"permitted as an annex under ",[7299,11706,11707],{},"3.1.2.1 point c",[11,11709,11710,11711,11714],{},"The bill of materials is not a mandatory document under the AREI. ",[7299,11712,11713],{},"Sub-section 3.1.2.1 point c"," merely allows diagrams and plans to be supplemented by documents \"describing in more detail the various characteristics of the electrical equipment and\u002For products\". A cable list carrying the installation method per run is exactly such an annex: useful for pricing and execution; the entry still belongs on the single-line diagram itself.",[11,11716,11717,11718,11720],{},"How diagram and situation plan divide the work is set out in ",[23,11719,9471],{"href":9470},", which also explains why the length is mandatory only on the non-domestic circuit diagram.",[27,11722,11724],{"id":11723},"when-does-the-installation-method-change-within-one-cable-run","When does the installation method change within one cable run?",[11,11726,11727,11728,11731,11732,5322],{},"A cable run rarely has a single installation method. Out of the board, through the wall, across the ceiling, into the ground and back up an outside wall — that is four. The AREI has a term for this. The ",[35,11729,11730],{},"origin of the circuit"," is either the start of the wiring \"or the point where the cross-section, nature or construction of the wiring, or its installation method, changes\" (",[7299,11733,11734],{},"section 2.6.1",[11,11736,11737,11738,11740,11741,11743,11744,11747,11748,11751,11752,11754,11755,2145,11757,11759,11760,2145,11762,2145,11764,2152,11767,11770],{},"In practice: every change of method opens a separate stretch for assessment. For sizing, the least favourable stretch generally governs: under ",[7299,11739,11565],{},", read with ",[7299,11742,8636],{},", IZ must reach at least IB; ",[7299,11745,11746],{},"sub-section 4.4.3.1"," generally places overload protection where a change reduces IZ for the protected wiring (exceptions: ",[7299,11749,11750],{},"sub-section 4.4.3.3","). A cable that runs two metres inside a bundle of conduits before continuing freely across a ceiling is therefore not sized on the free stretch. For the representation, the AREI does not prescribe choosing every method, the longest one or the least favourable one (",[7299,11753,8546],{},"). As a practical recommendation, document every method that occurs in route order because obligations attach to individual stretches: ",[7299,11756,9264],{},[7299,11758,11329],{}," read with ",[7299,11761,11332],{},[7299,11763,11365],{},[7299,11765,11766],{},"5.2.7.1 point 3",[7299,11768,11769],{},"5.2.7.3",". The inspector then compares the diagram with the visible installation.",[27,11772,11774],{"id":11773},"which-rules-apply-to-concealed-wiring","Which rules apply to concealed wiring?",[11,11776,11777,11778,11781,11782,11784],{},"For direct concealment without conduit (",[7299,11779,11780],{},"point m","), ",[7299,11783,11466],{}," is the governing provision, and it is unusually concrete.",[11,11786,11787,11788,11791,11792,5322],{},"Wiring embedded in ",[35,11789,11790],{},"concrete or cement"," is covered by a layer of at least 3 cm; conductors with basic insulation only may not be embedded there at all (",[7299,11793,8399],{},[11,11795,11796,11797,11800,11801,11804],{},"For wiring without conduit ",[35,11798,11799],{},"in the walls of rooms",", the installation-zone rules also apply according to the installation situation (",[7299,11802,11803],{},"point b","):",[43,11806,11807,11810,11813,11816,11819,11822],{},[46,11808,11809],{},"the route consists exclusively of horizontal and vertical stretches, horizontal runs in a ceiling being perpendicular to the vertical walls;",[46,11811,11812],{},"horizontal runs lie 25 to 35 cm above the floor or below the ceiling, and likewise 25 to 35 cm above the underside of window lintels, provided they then remain at least 25 cm below the ceiling;",[46,11814,11815],{},"vertical runs lie as close as possible to a corner of the room, or 10 to 20 cm from door frames and architraves;",[46,11817,11818],{},"outside these zones, only a vertical run above a visible machine or appliance is permitted;",[46,11820,11821],{},"the wiring is subjected to no mechanical stress, neither during installation nor afterwards, and is fixed to the walls without damage;",[46,11823,11824],{},"the covering plaster layer is at least 0.4 cm thick.",[11,11826,11827,11828,11830,11831,11834,11835,11838,11839,11842,11843,5322],{},"For conduits, ",[7299,11829,11460],{}," applies instead: conductors or cables must remain drawable and removable at all times (",[7299,11832,11833],{},"point e","), connections inside the conduit are forbidden (",[7299,11836,11837],{},"point f","), and in embedded conduits tees and elbows are not permitted while conductors stay accessible in junction, branch and draw boxes (",[7299,11840,11841],{},"point i.2","). Conduits made of combustible material may only be used when embedded at least 3 cm deep in non-combustible materials (",[7299,11844,11837],{},[11,11846,11847,11848,11851,11852,11854,11855,11858,11859,11861,11862,11864,11865,11868,11869,11871,11872,11874],{},"One important exception: for ",[35,11849,11850],{},"extra-low voltage installations (ELV)",", the zone pattern of ",[7299,11853,10516],{}," expressly does not apply (",[7299,11856,11857],{},"sub-section 5.2.9.15 point b","). For ELV, the first paragraph of ",[7299,11860,9264],{},", the second paragraph of ",[7299,11863,11329],{}," and the first paragraph of ",[7299,11866,11867],{},"5.2.9.12 point a"," also do not apply (",[7299,11870,10599],{},"). Bus, bell and control wiring at ELV therefore need not follow the zones; the other applicable rules of ",[7299,11873,10695],{}," still do.",[27,11876,11878],{"id":11877},"what-applies-to-buried-cables","What applies to buried cables?",[11,11880,11881,11884,11885,11887],{},[7299,11882,11883],{},"Sub-section 5.2.9.2 point a"," is one of the sharpest provisions in the chapter. In the ground and in inaccessible underground ducts, only ",[35,11886,399],{}," may be installed, independent protective conductors excepted. The minimum depth is 0.60 m measured from the ground surface, \"unless technically impossible\". Where that depth cannot be reached, protection is provided instead by a continuous or sealed duct of durable, resistant material.",[11,11889,11890],{},"The cable must additionally satisfy one of three conditions: an earthed electrical screen with armouring or a reinforced outer sheath; or a resistant outer sheath plus a continuous cover that protects against tools during excavation and overhangs on both sides; or installation in a duct or an equivalent system. Once one of these is satisfied, no additional measures are required for protection against electric shock.",[11,11892,11893,11894,11897],{},"For marking in the ground, ",[7299,11895,11896],{},"point d"," carries its own rules: markers at the ends of straight sections, at least every two hundred metres, with a surface of at least 0.01 m² and a lightning symbol in relief. Connections of low-voltage network users are exempt.",[27,11899,11901],{"id":11900},"which-cable-is-allowed-in-which-installation-method","Which cable is allowed in which installation method?",[11,11903,11904],{},"The installation method restricts the choice of cable, independently of cross-section.",[638,11906,11907,11918],{},[641,11908,11909],{},[644,11910,11911,11913,11916],{},[647,11912,10496],{},[647,11914,11915],{},"Permitted",[647,11917,9490],{},[657,11919,11920,11933,11945,11956,11968,11981,11994],{},[644,11921,11922,11925,11928],{},[662,11923,11924],{},"buried",[662,11926,11927],{},"cables only",[662,11929,11930],{},[7299,11931,11932],{},"5.2.9.2 a",[644,11934,11935,11938,11941],{},[662,11936,11937],{},"in free air and surface-mounted",[662,11939,11940],{},"in principle cables only; exceptions apply to certain independent protective, equipotential and earthed active conductors",[662,11942,11943],{},[7299,11944,9264],{},[644,11946,11947,11950,11952],{},[662,11948,11949],{},"trough",[662,11951,11940],{},[662,11953,11954],{},[7299,11955,10557],{},[644,11957,11958,11961,11964],{},[662,11959,11960],{},"trunking",[662,11962,11963],{},"insulated conductors as well; outside electrical service rooms with solid walls and a lid that opens only with a tool",[662,11965,11966],{},[7299,11967,10557],{},[644,11969,11970,11973,11976],{},[662,11971,11972],{},"mouldings, skirtings, architraves",[662,11974,11975],{},"insulated conductors or single-core cables",[662,11977,11978],{},[7299,11979,11980],{},"5.2.9.4 b",[644,11982,11983,11986,11989],{},[662,11984,11985],{},"conduits",[662,11987,11988],{},"insulated conductors or cables",[662,11990,11991],{},[7299,11992,11993],{},"5.2.9.3 b",[644,11995,11996,11999,12002],{},[662,11997,11998],{},"structural voids",[662,12000,12001],{},"no conductors with basic insulation only",[662,12003,12004],{},[7299,12005,11329],{},[11,12007,12008,12009,12011,12012,2145,12015,12018,12019,12021,12022,12024,12025,12028],{},"On top of that comes the reaction-to-fire class. In ",[35,12010,11998],{}," and in ",[35,12013,12014],{},"mouldings, skirtings or architraves made of combustible materials",[7299,12016,12017],{},"sub-section 4.3.3.5 point b"," expressly requires the characteristic or class of ",[7299,12020,11769],{}," — that is, F2 or at least Cca. A timber-stud wall is a structural void. Which cable type suits which use is covered in ",[23,12023,10617],{"href":10616},"; for wet rooms the volume rules from ",[23,12026,12027],{"href":4974},"Bathroom cables and AREI zones"," apply on top.",[27,12030,12032],{"id":12031},"how-does-planelec-record-the-installation-method-and-what-appears-in-the-export","How does PlanElec record the installation method, and what appears in the export?",[11,12034,12035,12036,5729],{},"PlanElec knows fifteen installation methods and stores the AREI reference each one sits under. The names match the visible options in ",[35,12037,12038],{},"Edit cable",[638,12040,12041,12054],{},[641,12042,12043],{},[644,12044,12045,12048,12051],{},[647,12046,12047],{},"Choice in PlanElec",[647,12049,12050],{},"Short code",[647,12052,12053],{},"Stored AREI reference",[657,12055,12056,12068,12083,12096,12109,12122,12135,12148,12161,12174,12187,12199,12211,12224,12237],{},[644,12057,12058,12061,12064],{},[662,12059,12060],{},"Surface-mounted",[662,12062,12063],{},"AP",[662,12065,12066],{},[7299,12067,11210],{},[644,12069,12070,12073,12076],{},[662,12071,12072],{},"Surface-mounted conduit",[662,12074,12075],{},"AR",[662,12077,12078,5419,12080],{},[7299,12079,11210],{},[7299,12081,12082],{},"5.2.9.3 h",[644,12084,12085,12088,12091],{},[662,12086,12087],{},"Concealed in flexible conduit",[662,12089,12090],{},"UR",[662,12092,12093],{},[7299,12094,12095],{},"5.2.2.1 e",[644,12097,12098,12101,12104],{},[662,12099,12100],{},"Concealed direct",[662,12102,12103],{},"UD",[662,12105,12106],{},[7299,12107,12108],{},"5.2.2.1 m",[644,12110,12111,12114,12117],{},[662,12112,12113],{},"Behind wall panels",[662,12115,12116],{},"HW",[662,12118,12119],{},[7299,12120,12121],{},"5.2.2.1 l",[644,12123,12124,12127,12130],{},[662,12125,12126],{},"Skirting \u002F surround",[662,12128,12129],{},"FL",[662,12131,12132],{},[7299,12133,12134],{},"5.2.2.1 f",[644,12136,12137,12140,12143],{},[662,12138,12139],{},"Underground",[662,12141,12142],{},"EV",[662,12144,12145],{},[7299,12146,12147],{},"5.2.2.1 b.1 + b.2",[644,12149,12150,12153,12156],{},[662,12151,12152],{},"Underground in cable conduit",[662,12154,12155],{},"ER",[662,12157,12158],{},[7299,12159,12160],{},"5.2.2.1 b.3",[644,12162,12163,12166,12169],{},[662,12164,12165],{},"Cable tray \u002F ladder",[662,12167,12168],{},"KW",[662,12170,12171],{},[7299,12172,12173],{},"5.2.2.1 g + h",[644,12175,12176,12179,12182],{},[662,12177,12178],{},"Building cavity",[662,12180,12181],{},"FV",[662,12183,12184],{},[7299,12185,12186],{},"5.2.2.1 k",[644,12188,12189,12192,12195],{},[662,12190,12191],{},"In conduit",[662,12193,12194],{},"IR",[662,12196,12197],{},[7299,12198,11230],{},[644,12200,12201,12204,12207],{},[662,12202,12203],{},"Bundle of conduits",[662,12205,12206],{},"RB",[662,12208,12209],{},[7299,12210,11230],{},[644,12212,12213,12216,12219],{},[662,12214,12215],{},"Overhead line",[662,12217,12218],{},"FR",[662,12220,12221],{},[7299,12222,12223],{},"5.2.2.1 a",[644,12225,12226,12229,12232],{},[662,12227,12228],{},"Cable protection",[662,12230,12231],{},"KS",[662,12233,12234],{},[7299,12235,12236],{},"5.2.2.1 i",[644,12238,12239,12242,12245],{},[662,12240,12241],{},"Open, closed or sand-filled cable channel",[662,12243,12244],{},"KK",[662,12246,12247],{},[7299,12248,12249],{},"5.2.2.1 j",[11,12251,12252,12253,94],{},"The method is attached to the segment, not to the whole cable: a route on the floor plan can carry a different method per stretch, and each stretch is drawn in its own colour with the two-letter short code. On the single-line diagram, PlanElec draws every method that occurs, in route order, by default; the first method is next to the protective device. From three methods onwards, the mark zone shows two symbols and “+n” for the remaining methods; the legend lists every method present, including those grouped under “+n”. The cable list gives the complete sequence for each cable. The per-stretch assignment remains in the cable model and in the per-stretch review. The cable list (CSV and PDF) records, for each cable, the method and length of every route segment in route order once every segment has an installation method; otherwise, it records the methods present without lengths. If a segment length is unknown, it shows “—”, never 0. It includes only the methods of that cable, not those of other cables in the same branch; the total cable length remains available in the length column. It can serve as a supplementary document under ",[7299,12254,9297],{},[11,12256,12257,12258,12261,12262,12265,12266,12269,12270,12272],{},"The symbols use the geometry from table 2.23 category C: the circle ",[35,12259,12260],{},"on"," the carrier line is reserved exclusively for the ",[35,12263,12264],{},"overhead line","; the conduit circle sits ",[35,12267,12268],{},"beside"," the carrier line. Building cavity, cable tray, cable channel and cable protection have no dedicated symbol in table 2.23, so each receives its own clearly identifiable symbol with a legend in the diagram and PDF output (",[7299,12271,9311],{},"). The cable menu, editor, preview and PDF use the same symbol source and carrier line.",[11,12274,12275,12276,12279,12280,12282,12283,12286,12287,12290,12291,12294,12295,12298,12299,12302,12303,12306,12307,12310],{},"In edit mode, click the wiring directly in the single-line diagram, even when no installation method has been documented yet; its accessible label is ",[35,12277,12278],{},"Edit cable line",". The ",[35,12281,12038],{}," menu shows the branch cables away from the protective device, in route order. When there is more than one cable or route segment, each cable is shown as ",[35,12284,12285],{},"Cable: {from} → {to}","; each segment appears as ",[35,12288,12289],{},"Route segment {number} · {length}",", or with “—” when its length is unknown. At the top, the ",[35,12292,12293],{},"Installation method for all route segments"," section applies the selected method to every segment in the branch; each individual segment can then be changed through its own installation-method option. As long as installation methods are missing or unconfirmed, the export tab shows a separate bulk-review section: ",[35,12296,12297],{},"Review cables step by step"," opens it, ",[35,12300,12301],{},"Choose an installation method"," is its selector; ",[35,12304,12305],{},"Fill empty intervals in selection"," fills empty fields only, and ",[35,12308,12309],{},"Confirm this cable’s installation methods"," confirms the entries cable by cable.",[27,12312,12314],{"id":12313},"what-the-self-check-verifies-on-installation-methods-and-what-stays-on-site","What the self-check verifies on installation methods, and what stays on site",[11,12316,12317],{},"The self-check verifies the rules that can be decided from the recorded project data. For the installation method that means, concretely:",[43,12319,12320,12329,12357,12366],{},[46,12321,12322,12325,12326,12328],{},[35,12323,12324],{},"Cross-section against protection:"," the self-check verifies that the cable cross-section matches the rated current of the protective device. That is the pairing from ",[7299,12327,8639],{},", which ignores the installation method. Current-carrying capacity under the recorded method, grouping, ambient temperature and insulation belong to the design.",[46,12330,12331,12334,12335,12337,12338,12340,12341,12343,12344,12346,12347,2152,12349,12352,12353,12356],{},[35,12332,12333],{},"Fire class in hollow walls:"," for route segments with the installation method ",[35,12336,12113],{},", and for endpoints in rooms with hollow walls, a cable without a documented cable-wide conduit must reach at least characteristic F2 or class Cca (",[7299,12339,11332],{}," → ",[7299,12342,11769],{},"). If the class is lower and no conduit is documented, PlanElec reports an error; if it is missing, a data gap. The ",[35,12345,12178],{}," selection, the exceptions under ",[7299,12348,11766],{},[7299,12350,12351],{},"5.2.7.3 point 1"," and the conduit rule in ",[7299,12354,12355],{},"5.2.7.4"," are not yet part of the check.",[46,12358,12359,12362,12363,12365],{},[35,12360,12361],{},"Site dimensions:"," the installation zones of ",[7299,12364,10516],{},", plaster or concrete cover and the depth of buried cables are not model data; the installer checks them on site.",[46,12367,12368,12371],{},[35,12369,12370],{},"Execution:"," whether the recorded method matches what was actually installed is a visual check on site. Measurements and the official assessment are carried out by the accredited inspection body.",[11,12373,12374,12375,94],{},"The full scope is listed in ",[23,12376,4403],{"href":2953},[27,12378,12380],{"id":12379},"which-mistakes-show-up-at-inspection","Which mistakes show up at inspection?",[43,12382,12383,12394,12402,12411,12421,12429,12452,12460],{},[46,12384,12385,12388,12389,2152,12391,12393],{},[35,12386,12387],{},"Insulated conductors instead of cables, surface-mounted or in a trough."," Loose VOB cores visible on a wall or lying in a trough breach ",[7299,12390,9264],{},[7299,12392,10557],{}," respectively: in principle, only cables are admitted there, subject to the exceptions stated in those provisions.",[46,12395,12396,12399,12400,94],{},[35,12397,12398],{},"Chase outside the installation zones."," Diagonal runs and routes straight across the middle of a wall are the classic finding under ",[7299,12401,10516],{},[46,12403,12404,12407,12408,5322],{},[35,12405,12406],{},"Cover too thin."," Less than 0.4 cm of plaster over the cable, or less than 3 cm of concrete for embedded wiring (",[7299,12409,12410],{},"5.2.9.10 points a and b",[46,12412,12413,12416,12417,12420],{},[35,12414,12415],{},"Connection inside the conduit."," Terminals and connectors within a conduit are forbidden (",[7299,12418,12419],{},"5.2.9.3 point f","); connections in draw and junction boxes belong on a suitable terminal block.",[46,12422,12423,12426,12427,5322],{},[35,12424,12425],{},"Conduit no longer drawable."," Tight bends or overfilled conduits breach the requirement that conductors can be drawn in and removed at any time (",[7299,12428,10542],{},[46,12430,12431,12434,12435,12437,12438,12440,12441,90,12443,8247,12445,12340,12447,12449,12450,94],{},[35,12432,12433],{},"Structural void with Eca instead of F2\u002FCca"," — common in timber construction and suspended ceilings. PlanElec currently flags this only for ",[35,12436,12113],{}," and for rooms with hollow walls, not for the ",[35,12439,12178],{}," choice. Under the AREI, a conduit relieves the requirement only if it meets the conditions of ",[7299,12442,11766],{},[7299,12444,12351],{},[7299,12446,11332],{},[7299,12448,11769],{},"); conduits must also meet ",[7299,12451,12355],{},[46,12453,12454,12457,12458,5322],{},[35,12455,12456],{},"Buried cable too shallow."," Less than 0.60 m without a continuous protective duct (",[7299,12459,10583],{},[46,12461,12462,12465,12466,12468],{},[35,12463,12464],{},"Installation method missing from the diagram."," A single-line diagram carrying type, cross-section and conductor count but no installation method is incomplete (",[7299,12467,9179],{},") — however cleanly the installation itself was executed.",[27,12470,8764],{"id":8763},[43,12472,12473,12477,12481,12486,12490],{},[46,12474,12475],{},[23,12476,8688],{"href":8687},[46,12478,12479],{},[23,12480,9471],{"href":9470},[46,12482,12483],{},[23,12484,12485],{"href":10616},"XVB versus VOB: which cable for what",[46,12487,12488],{},[23,12489,11470],{"href":10611},[46,12491,12492],{},[23,12493,8155],{"href":8154},[11,12495,12496],{},[23,12497,12498],{"href":5046},"Open PlanElec and record your installation methods →",[11,12500,12501],{},[7299,12502,12503,12504,94],{},"Regulatory basis: AREI\u002FRGIE book 1 V06 — sections 2.6.1, 2.7.1, 2.7.2, 5.2.2, 5.2.8, sub-sections 3.1.2.1, 3.1.2.2, 3.1.2.3, 4.3.3.5, 4.4.1.4 with table 4.11, 4.4.3.1, 5.2.1.2, 5.2.3.1, 5.2.7.2, 5.2.7.3 and section 5.2.9 with sub-sections 5.2.9.1 to 5.2.9.15. Official text: ",[23,12505,8805],{"href":4466,"rel":12506},[4434],{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":12508},[12509,12510,12511,12512,12513,12514,12515,12516,12517,12518,12519,12520,12521],{"id":11057,"depth":291,"text":11058},{"id":11437,"depth":291,"text":11438},{"id":11474,"depth":291,"text":11475},{"id":11571,"depth":291,"text":11572},{"id":11632,"depth":291,"text":11633},{"id":11723,"depth":291,"text":11724},{"id":11773,"depth":291,"text":11774},{"id":11877,"depth":291,"text":11878},{"id":11900,"depth":291,"text":11901},{"id":12031,"depth":291,"text":12032},{"id":12313,"depth":291,"text":12314},{"id":12379,"depth":291,"text":12380},{"id":8763,"depth":291,"text":8764},"The installation method belongs on the single-line diagram. All seventeen methods from AREI 5.2.2.1, their rules in section 5.2.9, their effect on current-carrying capacity and typical inspection findings, with the article next to every statement.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Finstallation-methods-arei.en",{"title":11051,"description":12522},"Installation Methods (AREI) on the Single-Line Diagram","blog\u002Finstallation-methods-arei.en",[1979,1980,12529,319,12530,12531,12532,2981],"installation methods","current-carrying capacity","cable installation","installation zones","jM0xvdOGv7_BRNLchDYDpSi6oFz0GxIwzx-dFzKL48Y",{"id":12535,"title":12536,"articleId":12537,"body":12538,"category":5101,"date":10296,"description":13631,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":13632,"navigation":308,"path":13633,"publishDate":10296,"readTime":13634,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":13635,"seoTitle":13636,"slug":12537,"stem":13637,"tags":13638,"__hash__":13643},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fmulti-storey-electrical-planning.en.md","Electrical planning across several floors: does every storey need its own board?","multi-storey-electrical-planning",{"type":8,"value":12539,"toc":13614},[12540,12544,12555,12566,12576,12580,12583,12720,12734,12738,12741,12750,12767,12778,12876,12908,12918,12922,12932,12935,12963,12970,12975,12979,12997,13021,13031,13037,13041,13044,13047,13123,13133,13141,13145,13152,13158,13171,13189,13214,13218,13221,13232,13248,13254,13258,13261,13276,13284,13297,13305,13318,13322,13329,13337,13341,13351,13354,13386,13396,13400,13409,13415,13434,13438,13441,13448,13461,13464,13489,13499,13503,13506,13511,13529,13534,13575,13577,13604,13609],[27,12541,12543],{"id":12542},"does-every-storey-need-its-own-board","Does every storey need its own board?",[11,12545,12546,12547,12550,12551,12554],{},"No. The AREI\u002FRGIE knows no rule along the lines of \"one board per floor\". It requires a main distribution and switching board fitted with a general load-break switch whose rated current, in domestic installations, is not less than 40 A (",[7299,12548,12549],{},"sub-section 5.3.5.1 point b","), and it requires distribution and switching boards in domestic installations to be easily accessible without special means (",[7299,12552,12553],{},"point c","). Whether a second board upstairs belongs to that picture is your decision — not the standard's.",[11,12556,12557,12558,12561,12562,12565],{},"What the standard does impose are quantity limits, and those are exactly what drive the circuit count up in a three- or four-level terraced house: no more than eight single or multiple socket outlets per final circuit, and at least two separate lighting circuits for dwelling units comprising more than two rooms and\u002For locations (",[7299,12559,12560],{},"sub-section 5.3.5.2 point b","), plus no more than eight final circuits per high-sensitivity residual current device (",[7299,12563,12564],{},"sub-section 4.2.4.3 point b","). A sub-distribution board follows from those limits and from cable runs — not from a floor boundary.",[11,12567,12568,12569,12572,12573,12575],{},"The term the AREI\u002FRGIE uses helps frame the thinking: an ",[35,12570,12571],{},"elementary circuit"," is the part of an installation between two successive overcurrent protective devices — as a main circuit or a sub-circuit — or downstream of the last such device, in which case it is a final circuit (",[7299,12574,11734],{},"). The riser feeding a sub-distribution board is therefore not a final circuit but a main circuit. Every rule aimed at final circuits — the eight sockets, the eight circuits per RCD — does not apply to it.",[27,12577,12579],{"id":12578},"when-does-a-sub-board-per-floor-make-sense-and-when-not","When does a sub-board per floor make sense — and when not?",[11,12581,12582],{},"The decision reads off four observable quantities: the number of final circuits, the longest cable run, accessibility, and the extension you already know is coming. The table below summarises what actually turns up in a Belgian dwelling; the standard column names the provision that creates the limit in the first place.",[638,12584,12585,12602],{},[641,12586,12587],{},[644,12588,12589,12592,12596,12599],{},[647,12590,12591],{},"Situation",[647,12593,12595],{"align":12594},"center","One board is enough",[647,12597,12598],{"align":12594},"Sub-board per floor justified",[647,12600,12601],{},"AREI\u002FRGIE reference",[657,12603,12604,12617,12632,12646,12661,12676,12690,12705],{},[644,12605,12606,12609,12612,12614],{},[662,12607,12608],{},"Two levels, compact terraced house, under roughly 15 final circuits",[662,12610,12611],{"align":12594},"✓",[662,12613,6855],{"align":12594},[662,12615,12616],{},"no prescription; the count follows from 5.3.5.2 b and 4.2.4.3 b",[644,12618,12619,12622,12624,12626],{},[662,12620,12621],{},"More than 16 final circuits, so more than two high-sensitivity RCDs",[662,12623,6855],{"align":12594},[662,12625,12611],{"align":12594},[662,12627,12628,12629,4382],{},"at most 8 final circuits per high-sensitivity RCD (",[7299,12630,12631],{},"4.2.4.3 b",[644,12633,12634,12637,12639,12641],{},[662,12635,12636],{},"Longest run well beyond 25–30 m from the board",[662,12638,6855],{"align":12594},[662,12640,12611],{"align":12594},[662,12642,12643,12644,4382],{},"voltage drop to be limited according to the rules of good practice (",[7299,12645,10691],{},[644,12647,12648,12651,12653,12655],{},[662,12649,12650],{},"Attic with a heat pump, charge-point provision or a home office planned",[662,12652,6855],{"align":12594},[662,12654,12611],{"align":12594},[662,12656,12657,12658,4382],{},"supply power to be determined with diversity factors (",[7299,12659,12660],{},"section 3.2.1",[644,12662,12663,12666,12668,12670],{},[662,12664,12665],{},"Board in the cellar, upper floor reachable only by ladder",[662,12667,6855],{"align":12594},[662,12669,12611],{"align":12594},[662,12671,12672,12673,4382],{},"easily accessible without special means (",[7299,12674,12675],{},"5.3.5.1 c",[644,12677,12678,12681,12683,12685],{},[662,12679,12680],{},"Separate energy tariffs or a DSO meter of its own per level",[662,12682,6855],{"align":12594},[662,12684,12611],{"align":12594},[662,12686,12687,12688,4382],{},"separate panels at least 10 cm apart, or separate boards (",[7299,12689,12675],{},[644,12691,12692,12695,12697,12699],{},[662,12693,12694],{},"A rental flat per floor, each with its own installation",[662,12696,6855],{"align":12594},[662,12698,12611],{"align":12594},[662,12700,12701,12702,4382],{},"every dwelling unit has its own domestic installation (term in ",[7299,12703,12704],{},"2.2.1.1",[644,12706,12707,12710,12712,12714],{},[662,12708,12709],{},"Renovation, one storey stays untouched for now",[662,12711,12611],{"align":12594},[662,12713,6855],{"align":12594},[662,12715,12716,12717,4382],{},"the inspection is limited to the added or modified part (",[7299,12718,12719],{},"6.4.7.3",[11,12721,12722,12723,12726,12727,12729,12730,12733],{},"Two arguments that regularly speak ",[35,12724,12725],{},"against"," a second board: every additional board is one more place that has to stay accessible, operable and maintainable without special means (",[7299,12728,12675],{},"), and it has to carry an individual identification with the supply voltage clearly and conspicuously indicated (",[7299,12731,12732],{},"sub-section 3.1.3.3 point a","). In a two-bedroom duplex that costs more than it saves in cable.",[27,12735,12737],{"id":12736},"how-do-i-size-the-riser-to-the-sub-board","How do I size the riser to the sub-board?",[11,12739,12740],{},"In three steps, only the last of which carries a number in the AREI\u002FRGIE.",[11,12742,12743,12746,12747,12749],{},[35,12744,12745],{},"First, the supply power."," When determining the supply power of an installation or of part of one, diversity and utilisation factors of the loads may be taken into account (",[7299,12748,12660],{},"). The regulation puts no figure on it — which factor is appropriate is a matter of the rules of good practice and of how the floor will actually be used.",[11,12751,12752,12755,12756,12759,12763,12764,12766],{},[35,12753,12754],{},"Second, the current-carrying capacity."," The current-carrying capacity ",[7299,12757,12758],{},"I",[12760,12761,12762],"sub",{},"Z"," of an electrical line depends on the conductor cross-section, the insulation, the make-up of the line, the installation method and the surroundings, and on the ambient temperature (",[7299,12765,8636],{},"). A riser running 6 m vertically inside a closed shaft does not have the same capacity as the same cable laid freely on a cable tray — the installation method is part of the calculation, not cosmetics.",[11,12768,12769,12772,12773,8247,12775,12777],{},[35,12770,12771],{},"Third, the rating."," For domestic installations, ",[7299,12774,8639],{},[7299,12776,8636],{},") caps the maximum rated current of the protective device per conductor cross-section:",[638,12779,12780,12793],{},[641,12781,12782],{},[644,12783,12784,12787,12790],{},[647,12785,12786],{},"Conductor cross-section",[647,12788,12789],{},"Maximum rated current of the fuse",[647,12791,12792],{},"Maximum rated current of the circuit breaker",[657,12794,12795,12805,12814,12824,12835,12846,12856,12866],{},[644,12796,12797,12799,12802],{},[662,12798,4851],{},[662,12800,12801],{},"10 A",[662,12803,12804],{},"16 A",[644,12806,12807,12809,12811],{},[662,12808,4854],{},[662,12810,12804],{},[662,12812,12813],{},"20 A",[644,12815,12816,12819,12821],{},[662,12817,12818],{},"4 mm²",[662,12820,12813],{},[662,12822,12823],{},"25 A",[644,12825,12826,12829,12832],{},[662,12827,12828],{},"6 mm²",[662,12830,12831],{},"32 A",[662,12833,12834],{},"40 A",[644,12836,12837,12840,12843],{},[662,12838,12839],{},"10 mm²",[662,12841,12842],{},"50 A",[662,12844,12845],{},"63 A",[644,12847,12848,12851,12853],{},[662,12849,12850],{},"16 mm²",[662,12852,12845],{},[662,12854,12855],{},"80 A",[644,12857,12858,12861,12863],{},[662,12859,12860],{},"25 mm²",[662,12862,12855],{},[662,12864,12865],{},"100 A",[644,12867,12868,12871,12873],{},[662,12869,12870],{},"35 mm²",[662,12872,12865],{},[662,12874,12875],{},"125 A",[11,12877,12878,12879,12882,12883,12885,12887,12888,12890,12893,12894,12896,12898,12899,12901,12903,12904,12906,94],{},"That table is a ceiling, not a recommendation. It says what rating a cross-section will tolerate — not which cross-section is right for your riser. The additional condition sits in ",[7299,12880,12881],{},"sub-section 4.4.3.2",": the rated current ",[7299,12884,12758],{},[12760,12886,11371],{}," of the overload protective device must be at least the design current ",[7299,12889,12758],{},[12760,12891,12892],{},"B"," of the circuit and lower than the current-carrying capacity ",[7299,12895,12758],{},[12760,12897,12762],{}," of the line it protects; its conventional operating current ",[7299,12900,12758],{},[12760,12902,11235],{}," does not exceed 1.45 times ",[7299,12905,12758],{},[12760,12907,12762],{},[11,12909,12910,12913,12914,12917],{},[35,12911,12912],{},"Trade practice, not regulation:"," in a Belgian dwelling the calculation for a floor riser often gives 6 mm² with a C32 breaker, or 10 mm² with a C40. You often rate the sub-board's load-break switch at 40 A; the 40 A floor of ",[7299,12915,12916],{},"5.3.5.1 b",", however, applies only to the main switch-disconnector of the main distribution board. The AREI\u002FRGIE prescribes none of these values; it only caps them.",[27,12919,12921],{"id":12920},"does-the-riser-have-to-be-protected-in-the-main-board","Does the riser have to be protected in the main board?",[11,12923,12924,12925,12928,12929,12931],{},"In principle yes, and at its origin. A short-circuit protective device is placed at the origin of every circuit made up of electrical lines with equivalent characteristics (",[7299,12926,12927],{},"sub-section 4.4.2.2 point a","). For overload the principle is the same: the device is placed, as a rule, where a change of cross-section, nature, installation method or make-up reduces the current-carrying capacity of the conductors (",[7299,12930,11746],{},") — that is, precisely where the main board's busbar continues into a 6 mm² cable.",[11,12933,12934],{},"The regulation provides three derogations that genuinely occur in installations spread over several levels:",[43,12936,12937,12946,12955],{},[46,12938,12939,12942,12943,5322],{},[35,12940,12941],{},"Upstream protection suffices."," The short-circuit protective device may be omitted at the origin of a circuit, provided it is verified that the device placed upstream can still perform its function (",[7299,12944,12945],{},"4.4.2.2 a",[46,12947,12948,12951,12952,5322],{},[35,12949,12950],{},"Three metres of latitude."," The protective device may sit on the line up to 3 m from the origin of the circuit, provided that stretch contains nothing liable to cause particular heating — connections, branches, reductions in cross-section, switchgear — and is not placed close to combustible materials (",[7299,12953,12954],{},"4.4.2.2 b",[46,12956,12957,12960,12961,5322],{},[35,12958,12959],{},"The sum of the branches."," Overload protection may be dispensed with for an electrical line supplying several branches that are individually protected against overload, provided the sum of the rated or setting currents of those branch devices is lower than the rated or setting current of the device that would protect the line in question against overload (",[7299,12962,11750],{},[11,12964,12965,12966,12969],{},"It is the third derogation that gets misread on risers. It does not allow the feeder to be left unprotected — it allows the ",[35,12967,12968],{},"overload"," protection to be omitted where the sum of the downstream ratings could never overload the line anyway. Short-circuit protection remains due. In a sub-board holding eight C16 and two C20, the ratings add up to 168 A; a 6 mm² riser does not fall under that exemption.",[11,12971,12972,12973,5322],{},"Do not forget the identification: circuits connected upstream of the main switch of the distribution and switching board must be identified as such (",[7299,12974,9938],{},[27,12976,12978],{"id":12977},"does-the-areirgie-require-selectivity-between-main-and-sub-board","Does the AREI\u002FRGIE require selectivity between main and sub-board?",[11,12980,12981,12982,12985,12986,2152,12989,12992,12993,12996],{},"For an ordinary domestic installation: ",[35,12983,12984],{},"no."," The word selectivity appears in the AREI\u002FRGIE only in the context of safety installations and critical installations. There it says that the correct operation of a circuit with safety loads, respectively of a safety circuit, may not be affected by an electrical fault in another circuit, and that \"this requires selectivity between the protective devices\" (",[7299,12987,12988],{},"sub-sections 5.5.7.1 point a",[7299,12990,12991],{},"5.5.7.2","; identical wording for critical installations in ",[7299,12994,12995],{},"chapter 5.6","). For the riser to the bedroom floor of a single-family house there is no equivalent prescription.",[11,12998,12999,13000,8247,13003,13005,13006,13008,13009,13011,13012,13015,13016,13018,13019,5322],{},"What the regulation does govern is the ",[35,13001,13002],{},"coordination of protective devices placed in series",[7299,13004,8442],{},") — and that is a different thing from selectivity. Where several protective devices are placed in series, they may be coordinated so that, in the event of a downstream short circuit, the upstream device limits the energy passing through the downstream devices to a value that those devices and the lines they protect can withstand. Where the devices in series are circuit breakers, this accompanying protection has a name of its own: ",[7299,13007,8515],{}," — the French text calls it ",[35,13010,8519],{},", the German one ",[35,13013,13014],{},"Backup-Schutz",". To determine its characteristics you have to request the manufacturers' back-up protection tables, drawn up in accordance with the product standards for circuit breakers (",[7299,13017,8570],{},"). In non-domestic installations, the individual identification of the distribution and switching board must even state that the technique is being used (",[7299,13020,8573],{},[11,13022,13023,13024,13026,13027,13030],{},"The difference in one sentence: ",[35,13025,8515],{}," lets a downstream breaker survive a short circuit it could not clear on its own, and gives it a reinforced ultimate breaking capacity. ",[35,13028,13029],{},"Selectivity"," makes sure a fault upstairs does not put the whole house in the dark. The first is a safety matter and is regulated; the second is a comfort and availability matter and, outside safety installations, a design decision.",[11,13032,13033,13036],{},[35,13034,13035],{},"Trade practice:"," grading — slower and larger upstream, faster and smaller downstream, and for RCDs additionally through sensitivity and time delay — is common and sensible in multi-storey installations. But it is an application of IEC 60364-5-53 and of manufacturer data, not an AREI\u002FRGIE obligation. Anyone defending it in an inspection report as an \"AREI requirement\" is citing a provision that does not exist.",[27,13038,13040],{"id":13039},"may-one-circuit-supply-several-floors","May one circuit supply several floors?",[11,13042,13043],{},"Yes. The AREI\u002FRGIE knows no rule limiting a final circuit to one level. A lighting circuit feeding the hall, the stairwell and the upstairs landing together is permitted — and in Belgian terraced houses it is the normal case, because the stairwell belongs geometrically to both levels.",[11,13045,13046],{},"All the quantity and assignment limits nevertheless remain fully applicable, and they count across floors:",[638,13048,13049,13061],{},[641,13050,13051],{},[644,13052,13053,13056,13059],{},[647,13054,13055],{},"Limit",[647,13057,13058],{},"Value",[647,13060,9490],{},[657,13062,13063,13076,13088,13099,13111],{},[644,13064,13065,13068,13071],{},[662,13066,13067],{},"Single or multiple socket outlets per final circuit",[662,13069,13070],{},"at most 8",[662,13072,13073],{},[7299,13074,13075],{},"5.3.5.2 b",[644,13077,13078,13081,13084],{},[662,13079,13080],{},"Separate lighting circuits for more than two rooms and\u002For locations",[662,13082,13083],{},"at least 2",[662,13085,13086],{},[7299,13087,13075],{},[644,13089,13090,13093,13095],{},[662,13091,13092],{},"Final circuits per high or very high sensitivity RCD",[662,13094,13070],{},[662,13096,13097],{},[7299,13098,12631],{},[644,13100,13101,13104,13107],{},[662,13102,13103],{},"RCD placed at the origin of the electrical installation",[662,13105,13106],{},"at most 300 mA",[662,13108,13109],{},[7299,13110,12631],{},[644,13112,13113,13116,13119],{},[662,13114,13115],{},"Fixed appliances with a common operating device in a mixed circuit",[662,13117,13118],{},"count as 1 socket",[662,13120,13121],{},[7299,13122,13075],{},[11,13124,13125,13126,13128,13129,13132],{},"The third and fourth rows work together the moment a sub-board enters the picture. Immediately downstream of the protective device placed at the origin of the electrical installation, at least one residual current device of high or very high sensitivity is placed, to which are connected at least the socket outlets not intended for fixed appliances, the lighting, the locations containing a bath and\u002For a shower, and the washing machines, tumble dryers and dishwashers — with at most eight final circuits per RCD (",[7299,13127,12631],{},"). A bathroom on the upper floor fed from the board that sits there therefore needs that assignment ",[35,13130,13131],{},"there too","; the 300 mA device at the origin of the installation does not replace it.",[11,13134,13135,13136,13138,13139,94],{},"Two practical limits follow from the principle rather than from an article: a final circuit spread over three levels becomes long, and voltage drops in electrical lines are to be limited to the values described in the rules of good practice (",[7299,13137,10691],{}," — the regulation itself quotes no percentage there). And a circuit scattered over three levels makes fault-finding awkward, because that part of the installation can no longer be isolated in one place. How to establish the corresponding lengths defensibly is covered in ",[23,13140,9471],{"href":9470},[27,13142,13144],{"id":13143},"how-do-i-take-the-riser-through-the-floor-slab","How do I take the riser through the floor slab?",[11,13146,13147,13148,13151],{},"The penetration itself is regulated. Where electrical lines pass through floors, they are protected at the level of the finished floor against mechanical damage and against liquids that may be spilled on the finished floor. Where the penetration is made with conductors run in conduits, those conduits are watertight and their upper end projects above the floor — at least as high as the skirting boards, if any, and at least 10 cm (",[7299,13149,13150],{},"sub-section 5.2.1.5","). The same provision requires special precautions against water ingress and condensation for penetrations between rooms that may differ appreciably in humidity; unsealed conduits are then inclined towards the damper room.",[11,13153,13154,13155,13157],{},"For the vertical run inside a storey, the installation zones apply: electrical lines embedded without conduit in the walls of rooms follow horizontal and vertical routes only, the vertical runs lying as close as possible to a corner of the room or between 10 and 20 cm from door frames or casings (",[7299,13156,10390],{},"). Horizontal runs lie between 25 and 35 cm from the floor or the ceiling.",[11,13159,13160,13163,13164,2145,13167,13170],{},[35,13161,13162],{},"Cable trunking"," is an installation method named as such by the AREI\u002FRGIE (",[7299,13165,13166],{},"sub-section 5.2.2.1 point h.1",[7299,13168,13169],{},"figure 5.11",") — and the right choice as soon as several lines take the same vertical route. Two points to watch:",[43,13172,13173,13179],{},[46,13174,13175,13176,5322],{},"Where electrical lines of circuits at different voltages are used in a cable tray or in cable trunking, the connections for joints, terminations or branches are made in compartments that separate the lines at different voltages (",[7299,13177,13178],{},"sub-section 5.2.9.6",[46,13180,13181,13182,13185,13186,13188],{},"Insulated conductors and cables installed in bunches or in a flat formation have at least characteristic F2, or at least class C",[12760,13183,13184],{},"ca"," — and this applies regardless of the distance over which they are actually bunched (",[7299,13187,11596],{},"). A riser shaft with six cables is exactly such a bunch.",[11,13190,13191,13194,13195,13197,13198,5336,13200,13202,13203,2152,13206,13209,13210,13213],{},[35,13192,13193],{},"What the AREI\u002FRGIE does not regulate here:"," the fire-stopping of the shaft between storeys. The AREI\u002FRGIE requires a certain reaction to fire of wiring – for example property F2 or class C",[12760,13196,13184],{}," in building cavities (",[7299,13199,12017],{},[7299,13201,11769],{},") – and fire resistance only for safety and critical installations (",[7299,13204,13205],{},"chapters 5.5",[7299,13207,13208],{},"5.6",") and for special locations such as rooms with flammable liquid dielectric (",[7299,13211,13212],{},"4.3.3.7 b","). Compartmentation of a residential building is governed by construction law – the basic fire-prevention standards and regional rules. Refer to the project's fire safety file for it, not to an AREI article.",[27,13215,13217],{"id":13216},"how-is-equipotential-bonding-run-across-several-levels","How is equipotential bonding run across several levels?",[11,13219,13220],{},"There are two equipotential bonds, and only one of them travels through the whole building.",[11,13222,13223,13225,13226,13229,13230,5322],{},[35,13224,1235],{}," is building-wide. The main protective bonding conductor has a cross-section at least equal to half that of the largest protective conductor of the installation, the earthing conductor excluded, with a minimum of 6 mm² in copper; its cross-section may be limited to 25 mm² in copper, or to the electrically equivalent cross-section in another metal (",[7299,13227,13228],{},"sub-section 5.4.4.1 point a","). This conductor carries green-and-yellow insulation and follows the prescriptions applicable to protective conductors (",[7299,13231,11803],{},[11,13233,13234,13237,13238,8247,13241,13244,13245,5322],{},[35,13235,13236],{},"Supplementary equipotential bonding",", by contrast, is expressly local. In a location containing a bath and\u002For a shower, it locally connects all exposed conductive parts of the electrical equipment and all simultaneously accessible extraneous conductive parts ",[35,13239,13240],{},"situated in that location",[7299,13242,13243],{},"sub-section 7.1.4.4","). A bathroom on the upper floor therefore gets its own supplementary bonding; it is not brought up from the ground floor. The cross-sections: at least half that of the protective conductor connected to an exposed conductive part, and in no case less than 2.5 mm² for mechanically protected conductors, 4 mm² for those that are not (",[7299,13246,13247],{},"sub-section 5.4.4.2 point a",[11,13249,13250,13251,94],{},"The practical consequence for the riser: the protective conductor goes up in the same cable; extraneous conductive parts — water and heating pipes, metal structures — are bonded where they enter the building, via the main equipotential bonding, and not a second time per floor. Which earthing arrangement sits behind all of this is covered in ",[23,13252,13253],{"href":8786},"Earthing: TT or TN-S",[27,13255,13257],{"id":13256},"how-must-the-floors-appear-on-the-situation-plan-and-the-single-line-diagram","How must the floors appear on the situation plan and the single-line diagram?",[11,13259,13260],{},"The AREI\u002FRGIE separates the two documents cleanly, and that separation decides where a storey becomes visible at all.",[11,13262,955,13263,13265,13266,13268,13269,13271,13272,13275],{},[35,13264,317],{}," indicates the ",[35,13267,10820],{}," of the distribution and switching boards, the connection boxes and junction boxes, the socket outlets, the lighting points, the switches, the fixed machines and appliances, and the sources mentioned on the single-line diagram (",[7299,13270,9466],{},"). The plural in \"distribution and switching boards\" is the decisive detail: a sub-board on the upper floor must be ",[35,13273,13274],{},"located"," on the situation plan. A diagram alone is not enough.",[11,13277,955,13278,13280,13281,13283],{},[35,13279,319],{}," carries the characteristics of the electrical lines — type, cross-section, number of conductors —, the installation methods, the type and characteristics of the residual current and overcurrent protective devices, the switches, the connection and junction boxes, the socket outlets, the lighting points, the fixed machines and appliances, and the sources (",[7299,13282,8546],{},"). For a riser that means, concretely: type, cross-section, number of conductors and installation method are mandatory entries, not an extra.",[11,13285,13286,13287,13289,13290,13293,13294,13296],{},"As for identification: on the single-line diagram every elementary circuit is identified by a capital letter; every lighting point, socket outlet and control unit by a number giving the order in which they are met within the elementary circuit, starting from the overcurrent protective device upstream. On the situation plan those same elements carry the letter of their circuit and the sequence number assigned on the diagram (",[7299,13288,9311],{},", figures 3.1 and 3.2). This identification is floor-independent — a circuit ",[842,13291,13292],{},"C"," running over two levels is called ",[842,13295,13292],{}," on both levels.",[11,13298,13299,13300,13302,13303,5322],{},"Every distribution and switching board additionally carries a clear, conspicuous and indelible individual identification, with the supply voltage clearly and conspicuously indicated (",[7299,13301,12732],{},"), and the control, protection and isolation devices of circuits carry individual identifications, unless any possibility of confusion is ruled out (",[7299,13304,9938],{},[11,13306,13307,13310,13311,13315,13316,94],{},[35,13308,13309],{},"What the AREI\u002FRGIE does not prescribe:"," that a separate sheet exists per floor, or that a separate diagram is drawn per board. Both are drawing practice — a very well-established practice, because a situation plan with two levels superimposed becomes unreadable. How the two documents delimit each other is covered in ",[23,13312,13314],{"href":13313},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fsingle-line-diagram-vs-situation-plan","Single-line diagram vs. situation plan","; the make-up of a situation plan is treated in ",[23,13317,8161],{"href":8160},[27,13319,13321],{"id":13320},"does-every-floor-need-a-smoke-detector","Does every floor need a smoke detector?",[11,13323,13324,13325,13328],{},"That is ",[35,13326,13327],{},"not an AREI question."," The AREI\u002FRGIE does not require smoke detectors for domestic installations. The obligation comes from regional housing law: Flanders, Wallonia and Brussels each regulate independently how many detectors go where, and the requirements differ both in the number per level and in their scope for existing dwellings.",[11,13330,13331,13332,13336],{},"For multi-storey planning only the consequence matters: the detector evidence does not belong in the AREI inspection report but in the regional conformity, and where the detectors run on 230 V, their circuit appears on the single-line diagram like any other. The regional rules in detail are in ",[23,13333,13335],{"href":13334},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fsmoke-detector-mandatory-belgium","Smoke detector obligations in Belgium"," — there and not here, so that only one maintained version exists.",[27,13338,13340],{"id":13339},"what-applies-if-i-convert-a-floor-later-on","What applies if I convert a floor later on?",[11,13342,13343,13344,13347,13348,13350],{},"A converted attic is almost always a ",[35,13345,13346],{},"significant extension",". The AREI\u002FRGIE defines it as a modification or extension of an electrical installation that has an additional impact — not yet covered by a conformity inspection — on the safety of persons or property, and it expressly cites \"the addition of a circuit in a domestic installation\" as an example (",[7299,13349,8587],{},", definitions). A new sub-board with six circuits meets that several times over.",[11,13352,13353],{},"Three consequences follow:",[43,13355,13356,13366,13378],{},[46,13357,13358,13361,13362,13365],{},[35,13359,13360],{},"Inspection before commissioning."," Any significant modification or extension undergoes a conformity inspection before that modification or extension is put into use; this inspection is limited to the added or modified parts of the installation (",[7299,13363,13364],{},"sub-section 6.4.7.3","). The old ground-floor installation is therefore not inspected automatically. Modifications or extensions that have an impact on an unmodified part must nevertheless be mentioned in the conformity inspection report.",[46,13367,13368,13371,13372,13374,13375,13377],{},[35,13369,13370],{},"300 mA for the whole installation."," In the case of a significant modification or extension in an old domestic electrical installation, the ",[35,13373,10648],{}," electrical installation is protected by at least one residual current device with a rated residual operating current of at most 300 mA (",[7299,13376,12564],{},"). That is the prescription which regularly makes an attic conversion more expensive than budgeted.",[46,13379,13380,13383,13384,5322],{},[35,13381,13382],{},"The situation plan travels with it."," Any modification or extension made to a domestic electrical installation is shown on the situation plan, which gives the existing situation of the installation's components at all times. Any older part whose on-site execution began before 1 October 1981 and which appears on the single-line diagram is marked \"older part\" (",[7299,13385,9311],{},[11,13387,13388,13389,13391,13392,94],{},"For modifications that cannot be qualified as significant, no new single-line diagram is required; a brief description of the modification, stating the name, capacity and address of those responsible for carrying out the work, dated and signed by them, is sufficient (",[7299,13390,7373],{},"). The situation plan must nevertheless be kept current. The full sequence for a new build is set out in the ",[23,13393,13395],{"href":13394},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fnew-build-single-line-diagram-checklist","New-build single-line diagram checklist",[27,13397,13399],{"id":13398},"single-family-house-or-apartment-building-does-that-change-the-answer","Single-family house or apartment building — does that change the answer?",[11,13401,13402,13403,13405,13406,13408],{},"Yes, and on a point that is often overlooked. As long as all the storeys belong to ",[35,13404,6492],{}," dwelling unit, the whole thing is a single domestic installation: one single-line diagram, one situation plan, one inspection, and the quantity limits of ",[7299,13407,13075],{}," apply to that one unit.",[11,13410,13411,13412,13414],{},"The moment a dwelling unit of its own appears per floor, several domestic installations appear — each with its own main distribution and switching board with a general load-break switch of at least 40 A (",[7299,13413,12916],{},"), its own diagram, its own situation plan and its own inspection. The eight sockets per final circuit then count per dwelling unit, not per building.",[11,13416,13417,13418,13421,13422,13425,13426,13429,13430,13433],{},"For the ",[35,13419,13420],{},"common parts"," — stairwell lighting, bell installation, outdoor lighting, meter room — there is an explicit relaxation: by way of derogation from the prescriptions for non-domestic installations, it is permitted to limit oneself, for the diagrams, plans and documents of the common parts of a residential complex, to the prescriptions applicable to a domestic installation (",[7299,13423,13424],{},"sub-section 3.1.2.1 point e","). The same goes for the identification of the corresponding distribution and switching boards (",[7299,13427,13428],{},"sub-section 3.1.3.3 point c","). In practice: for the stairwell board a single-line diagram in the familiar domestic format is enough — you do not have to document prospective short-circuit currents, impedances or utilisation categories, as ",[7299,13431,13432],{},"3.1.2.2 b"," would otherwise require.",[27,13435,13437],{"id":13436},"how-do-i-align-the-floors-in-planelec","How do I align the floors in PlanElec?",[11,13439,13440],{},"In PlanElec, floors are not separate drawings but levels of one shared building model. You create them, order them, and copy the outer contour or the building structure from one level to the next; a shared building origin keeps the plans superimposable, and a reference overlay shows the neighbouring floor at an adjustable opacity.",[11,13442,13443,13444,13447],{},"The alignment itself runs on ",[35,13445,13446],{},"point pairs",": you place the same distinctive point first in the current plan and then in the displayed reference plan. From two point pairs onwards, offset and rotation are derived automatically. PlanElec then reports the mean and the largest deviation in centimetres, as well as the residual deviation per point pair; the arrow keys move by 1 cm, with Shift by 10 cm. The scale stays fixed — the alignment is rigid and never distorts a floor to pull points together.",[11,13449,13450,13451,2145,13454,2152,13457,13460],{},"The vertical connection is an element in its own right, available as ",[35,13452,13453],{},"staircase",[35,13455,13456],{},"shaft",[35,13458,13459],{},"riser zone",". A staircase is drawn on one floor and appears on the neighbouring floor as the same editable element, mirrored — solid up to the cut line, dashed beyond it. Changes made to the projected twin are written back to the source floor. A point pair can be taken straight from a staircase or a shaft.",[11,13462,13463],{},"For the electrical side, more depends on this than it first appears:",[43,13465,13466,13472,13477,13483],{},[46,13467,13468,13471],{},[35,13469,13470],{},"Switch chains"," are project-wide. While drawing, you continue a chain via the floor selector; the display states how many members are on this floor and how many in total, across how many floors.",[46,13473,13474,13476],{},[35,13475,513],{}," works across floors: loads on several floors can be assigned together to an existing circuit breaker, and the selection survives a floor change.",[46,13478,13479,13482],{},[35,13480,13481],{},"Physical cable routes"," do run across floors, but in two kinds of leg: floor legs are drawn and edited locally on their own level, while the vertical leg is chosen through a connector instead of being drawn. The vertical length is derived from the storey heights and the horizontal offset as long as it has not been measured — and it feeds into the cable length and therefore into the voltage drop calculation. Storey heights are marked as an assumption or as a confirmed value; the default is 2.50 m clear height and 0.30 m slab thickness.",[46,13484,13485,13488],{},[35,13486,13487],{},"Sub-distribution boards"," are created as boards of their own, with a supply line from the upstream board. PlanElec creates the feeder circuit breaker in the supplying board, hangs the sub-board's main switch beneath it, and proposes a rating and cross-section based on the expected load and a diversity factor of 0.7. A board is assigned to a floor by the act of placing its symbol in that floor's plan.",[11,13490,13491,13492,13494,13495,13498],{},"On ",[35,13493,205],{},", each floor gets its own page of the situation plan with its own title block; floors without drawn walls are skipped. The single-line diagram is built as ",[35,13496,13497],{},"one sheet per board",", main board first, and a single board may occupy several A4 pages. Between the sheets, PlanElec places cross-references in both directions: on the main board's sheet, the outgoing way to the sub-board carries that sub-board's sheet number, and on the sub-board's sheet, the incoming supply carries the sheet number of the supplying board.",[27,13500,13502],{"id":13501},"what-the-self-check-covers-across-storeys-and-what-you-settle-yourself","What the self-check covers across storeys – and what you settle yourself",[11,13504,13505],{},"The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check evaluates the supported rules from the data recorded in the project. For multi-storey installations that means:",[11,13507,13508],{},[35,13509,13510],{},"What it checks:",[43,13512,13513,13516,13519,13526],{},[46,13514,13515],{},"That a supply line between two boards has a protective device of its own in the upstream board, points to an existing target board, and is consistently assigned on both sides. If one of these is missing, it is an error, not a remark.",[46,13517,13518],{},"The voltage drop using the actual cable length, including the vertical legs of routes that cross floors. If the length is missing, the result is not an error but a non-blocking notice that the entry is absent.",[46,13520,13521,13522,13525],{},"Grading between upstream and downstream residual current devices — explicitly as a ",[35,13523,13524],{},"practice recommendation under IEC 60364-5-53",", not as an AREI rule, and therefore as a warning you can override.",[46,13527,13528],{},"Smoke detector coverage per floor — likewise a non-blocking warning and explicitly a pointer to regional law, not to the AREI. Where bedrooms or hallways are recorded as a room type, PlanElec reports room by room; only where no such room type is recognisable on a floor is the per-floor rule used as a fallback.",[11,13530,13531],{},[35,13532,13533],{},"What you settle yourself:",[43,13535,13536,13542,13551,13557,13563,13569],{},[46,13537,955,13538,13541],{},[35,13539,13540],{},"cross-section of the riser",". The line between two boards is maintained as a circuit with a protective device, but not as a cable segment of its own with a cross-section. The cross-section shown when the board is created is a preview of the calculation, not a stored value — it therefore appears neither in the cross-section check nor in the voltage drop calculation.",[46,13543,955,13544,13547,13548,13550],{},[35,13545,13546],{},"ampere grading"," between the feeder protection and the sub-board's main switch. That is a deliberate choice: the coordination of protective devices placed in series runs, per ",[7299,13549,8570],{},", on let-through energy and breaking capacity, and therefore on the manufacturer's back-up protection tables, not on the rated current.",[46,13552,13553,13556],{},[35,13554,13555],{},"Short-circuit selectivity between circuit breakers."," No rule addresses it — and under the AREI\u002FRGIE there is no obligation either, outside safety and critical installations.",[46,13558,955,13559,13562],{},[35,13560,13561],{},"riser zone as a concept."," It is a type of vertical connector in the plan, serving the cable routing; no check rule evaluates it.",[46,13564,13565,13568],{},[35,13566,13567],{},"Fire-stopping, compartmentation and shaft closure."," That is governed by construction law, not by the AREI\u002FRGIE or the self-check.",[46,13570,13571,13574],{},[35,13572,13573],{},"Measurement and inspection."," The electrician takes measurements on site; the official assessment is made by the recognised inspection body.",[27,13576,8764],{"id":8763},[43,13578,13579,13584,13588,13592,13596,13600],{},[46,13580,13581],{},[23,13582,13583],{"href":8775},"Planning a distribution board: layout and modules",[46,13585,13586],{},[23,13587,8161],{"href":8160},[46,13589,13590],{},[23,13591,9471],{"href":9470},[46,13593,13594],{},[23,13595,13253],{"href":8786},[46,13597,13598],{},[23,13599,13395],{"href":13394},[46,13601,13602],{},[23,13603,13335],{"href":13334},[11,13605,13606],{},[23,13607,13608],{"href":5046},"Open PlanElec and create your floors →",[11,13610,13611],{},[7299,13612,13613],{},"Regulatory basis: AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 V06 — sub-section 2.2.1.1, sections 2.6.1 and 2.11.2, sub-sections 3.1.2.1, 3.1.2.2, 3.1.2.3, 3.1.3.1, 3.1.3.3, section 3.2.1, sub-sections 4.2.4.3, 4.3.3.5 and 4.3.3.7, chapter 4.4 (sub-sections 4.4.1.3, 4.4.1.4 with table 4.11, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.3.1, 4.4.3.2, 4.4.3.3), sub-sections 5.2.1.5, 5.2.2.1, 5.2.7.3, 5.2.9.6, 5.2.9.10, section 5.2.5, sub-sections 5.3.5.1, 5.3.5.2, 5.4.4.1, 5.4.4.2, 5.5.7.1, 5.5.7.2, 6.4.7.3 and 7.1.4.4. The official text, the actual state of the installation and the inspection by an approved body remain authoritative.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":13615},[13616,13617,13618,13619,13620,13621,13622,13623,13624,13625,13626,13627,13628,13629,13630],{"id":12542,"depth":291,"text":12543},{"id":12578,"depth":291,"text":12579},{"id":12736,"depth":291,"text":12737},{"id":12920,"depth":291,"text":12921},{"id":12977,"depth":291,"text":12978},{"id":13039,"depth":291,"text":13040},{"id":13143,"depth":291,"text":13144},{"id":13216,"depth":291,"text":13217},{"id":13256,"depth":291,"text":13257},{"id":13320,"depth":291,"text":13321},{"id":13339,"depth":291,"text":13340},{"id":13398,"depth":291,"text":13399},{"id":13436,"depth":291,"text":13437},{"id":13501,"depth":291,"text":13502},{"id":8763,"depth":291,"text":8764},"When a sub-distribution board per floor earns its place, how to size and protect the riser, what the AREI\u002FRGIE actually says about selectivity, and how storeys appear on the situation plan and the single-line diagram — with the article reference beside every statement.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fmulti-storey-electrical-planning.en","14 min",{"title":12536,"description":13631},"Several Floors: Does Every Storey Need Its Own Board?","blog\u002Fmulti-storey-electrical-planning.en",[1979,1980,13639,13640,13641,319,8203,13642,2981],"floors","sub-distribution board","riser","multi-storey","00bPUBXxNp7bXBP8_lHguEKHxLmLnt7iBK0Oa20r_gA",{"id":13645,"title":13646,"articleId":13647,"body":13648,"category":5101,"date":10296,"description":14196,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":14197,"navigation":308,"path":14198,"publishDate":10296,"readTime":14199,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":14200,"seoTitle":14201,"slug":13647,"stem":14202,"tags":14203,"__hash__":14207},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fswitch-types-single-line-diagram.en.md","Two-Way, Intermediate or Double Switch: Which One Belongs on the Single-Line Diagram?","switch-types-single-line-diagram",{"type":8,"value":13649,"toc":14182},[13650,13654,13671,13679,13798,13808,13812,13823,13826,13834,13838,13841,13844,13869,13872,13876,13882,13891,13913,13919,13923,13926,13929,13940,13943,13947,13954,13961,13964,13968,13971,13982,13996,14009,14013,14020,14058,14064,14068,14071,14078,14084,14088,14094,14104,14110,14113,14119,14123,14126,14151,14153,14172,14177],[27,13651,13653],{"id":13652},"which-arrangement-matches-how-many-control-points","Which arrangement matches how many control points?",[11,13655,13656,13657,2145,13660,13663,13664,2145,13667,13670],{},"The number of places from which you want to operate the same light point decides the arrangement. One place is a plain switch. Two places call for two two-way switches (",[7299,13658,13659],{},"wisselschakelaar",[7299,13661,13662],{},"va-et-vient","). Three or more places still use two two-way switches at the ends, with one intermediate switch (",[7299,13665,13666],{},"kruisschakelaar",[7299,13668,13669],{},"permutateur",") added per extra control point. The double switch falls outside that series: it operates two groups separately from a single place.",[11,13672,13673,13675,13676,13678],{},[7299,13674,7434],{}," of the AREI\u002FRGIE, part of ",[7299,13677,7438],{},", gives each of these functions its own symbol. The same table applies to the single-line diagram and to the situation plan of a domestic installation.",[638,13680,13681,13699],{},[641,13682,13683],{},[644,13684,13685,13688,13691,13694,13696],{},[647,13686,13687],{},"Control points",[647,13689,13690],{},"Arrangement",[647,13692,13693],{},"Description in Table 2.23, section E",[647,13695,5195],{},[647,13697,13698],{},"Link between the points",[657,13700,13701,13717,13733,13749,13766,13781],{},[644,13702,13703,13706,13709,13712,13715],{},[662,13704,13705],{},"1",[662,13707,13708],{},"simple switching",[662,13710,13711],{},"\"Switch — general symbol\"",[662,13713,13714],{},"1 switch",[662,13716,4004],{},[644,13718,13719,13722,13725,13728,13731],{},[662,13720,13721],{},"1, but two separate lighting groups",[662,13723,13724],{},"double switching",[662,13726,13727],{},"\"Single-pole changeover switch (double lighting: to close or open two circuits separately from a single place)\"",[662,13729,13730],{},"1 double switch with two channels",[662,13732,4004],{},[644,13734,13735,13738,13740,13743,13746],{},[662,13736,13737],{},"2",[662,13739,2585],{},[662,13741,13742],{},"\"Single-pole two-way switch (two directions: to close or open one circuit from two different places)\"",[662,13744,13745],{},"2 two-way switches",[662,13747,13748],{},"2 strapping conductors",[644,13750,13751,13754,13757,13760,13763],{},[662,13752,13753],{},"3",[662,13755,13756],{},"intermediate switching",[662,13758,13759],{},"\"Intermediate switch … combined with two two-way switches at both ends\"",[662,13761,13762],{},"2 two-way switches + 1 intermediate switch",[662,13764,13765],{},"2 strapping conductors per section",[644,13767,13768,13771,13773,13776,13779],{},[662,13769,13770],{},"n ≥ 3",[662,13772,13756],{},[662,13774,13775],{},"same",[662,13777,13778],{},"2 two-way switches + (n − 2) intermediate switches",[662,13780,13765],{},[644,13782,13783,13786,13789,13792,13795],{},[662,13784,13785],{},"unlimited",[662,13787,13788],{},"push-button control",[662,13790,13791],{},"\"Push-button\" together with \"Impulse relay\"",[662,13793,13794],{},"1 push-button per place + 1 impulse relay in the board",[662,13796,13797],{},"1 shared control line, push-buttons in parallel",[11,13799,13800,13801,13804,13805,13807],{},"The AREI does not prescribe those conductor counts itself — they follow from the wiring principle. What it does require is that the single-line diagram state the type, cross-section and ",[35,13802,13803],{},"number of conductors"," of every electrical line, as well as the switches themselves (",[7299,13806,7740],{},"). A two-way arrangement drawn as an ordinary lighting circuit therefore omits mandatory data.",[27,13809,13811],{"id":13810},"what-is-the-difference-between-a-two-way-switch-and-a-double-switch","What is the difference between a two-way switch and a double switch?",[11,13813,13814,13815,13818,13819,13822],{},"Both look \"double\" on the shelf, yet they do the opposite. A two-way switch diverts one circuit to either of two outputs: paired with a second two-way switch it operates ",[35,13816,13817],{},"the same"," light point from two places. The double switch — Table 2.23's \"single-pole changeover switch, double lighting\" — operates ",[35,13820,13821],{},"two different"," circuits separately from a single place.",[11,13824,13825],{},"Practical consequence: a double switch never replaces a two-way arrangement, and vice versa. Fitting a double switch in a hallway that needs two control points gives you two rockers, each turning on its own lamp, not one lamp operated from both ends.",[11,13827,13828,13829,13831,13832,5322],{},"Mind the terminology as well. The Dutch AREI text calls the double switch \"eenpolige omschakelaar (dubbele aansteking)\" and the French RGIE text \"commutateur unipolaire (double allumage)\"; the intermediate switch appears as \"kruisschakelaar\" and \"commutateur intermédiaire pour va-et-vient\", while site language says ",[7299,13830,13669],{},". If you use different names, carry the Table 2.23 description into your legend — the regulation accepts any clearly identifiable symbol provided it is defined in the legend of the diagrams and plans (",[7299,13833,7449],{},[27,13835,13837],{"id":13836},"how-many-conductors-does-a-two-way-arrangement-need","How many conductors does a two-way arrangement need?",[11,13839,13840],{},"Two strapping conductors run between the two two-way switches. Add to that the line conductor feeding the first switch, the switched conductor from the second switch to the light point, the neutral up to the luminaire, and the protective conductor where one is required. An intermediate switch does not change the principle: it is inserted into the straps, with two conductors on each side.",[11,13842,13843],{},"Two AREI rules govern the choice of those conductors:",[43,13845,13846,13859],{},[46,13847,13848,13851,13852,8247,13855,13858],{},[35,13849,13850],{},"Cross-section."," For electrical lines that are not an integral part of an appliance, a cross-section below 2.5 mm² is prohibited in principle. ",[7299,13853,13854],{},"Table 5.1",[7299,13856,13857],{},"Sub-section 5.2.1.2",") expressly allows 1.5 mm² for \"electrical lines belonging to circuits without socket outlets\" — precisely a pure lighting circuit with its switches.",[46,13860,13861,13864,13865,13868],{},[35,13862,13863],{},"Colour."," The green-and-yellow combination is reserved for protective conductors, protective-bonding conductors and earthed active conductors (PEN, PEM, PEL); using green and\u002For yellow for the insulation of other active conductors is prohibited (",[7299,13866,13867],{},"Sub-section 5.1.6.2","). Blue is reserved for the neutral in circuits that have one. Where a circuit has no neutral, the blue-marked core of a multi-core cable may serve another purpose — but never as a protective or bonding conductor. A strap may therefore be blue in a cable without a neutral, never green-and-yellow.",[11,13870,13871],{},"For cable types, Table 2.23 supplies its own worked examples: an XVB cable Cca with a stated number of conductors of a stated cross-section, or individual H07V-U conductors Eca in a conduit in a wall. Put the type and installation method actually used into the diagram; both are mandatory content of the single-line diagram.",[27,13873,13875],{"id":13874},"which-symbol-goes-on-the-single-line-diagram-and-which-on-the-situation-plan","Which symbol goes on the single-line diagram, and which on the situation plan?",[11,13877,13878,13879,94],{},"The symbol is the same — Table 2.23 covers both documents. The difference lies in the question each document answers, and above all in the ",[35,13880,13881],{},"reference",[11,13883,13884,13885,13887,13888,13890],{},"The single-line diagram must show the switches, alongside junction and branch boxes, socket outlets, light points, fixed machines and appliances, the protective devices and the line data (",[7299,13886,7740],{},"). Each elementary circuit is identified by a capital letter; each light point, socket outlet and control unit receives a sequence number in the order in which it is met in the circuit, starting from the upstream overcurrent protective device (",[7299,13889,7449],{},", Figure 3.1).",[11,13892,13893,13894,13896,13897,13899,13900,8247,13903,13905,13906,13909,13910,13912],{},"The situation plan must give the ",[35,13895,9462],{}," of those same switches (",[7299,13898,7746],{},"). And that is where the most frequently missed rule sits: each switch and each control unit is identified by the letter of the circuit it belongs to ",[35,13901,13902],{},"and by the sequence number of the light point or appliance it controls",[7299,13904,7449],{},", Figure 3.2). Two two-way switches jointly operating light point ",[842,13907,13908],{},"B3"," therefore both carry the reference ",[842,13911,13908],{},", not two consecutive numbers of their own.",[11,13914,13915,13916,94],{},"That is exactly why the switch chain is not a cosmetic detail: without a recorded relationship between switch and light point, this reference cannot be assigned correctly. How the two documents interlock is set out in ",[23,13917,13918],{"href":13313},"single-line diagram versus situation plan",[27,13920,13922],{"id":13921},"when-are-push-buttons-with-an-impulse-relay-better-than-an-intermediate-arrangement","When are push-buttons with an impulse relay better than an intermediate arrangement?",[11,13924,13925],{},"From three or four control points onward, an intermediate arrangement's wiring grows quickly: every extra place needs two straps out and back. Push-buttons wired in parallel on one shared control line, together driving an impulse relay, scale better. Table 2.23 section E carries both symbols: the \"push-button\" and the \"impulse relay\" (télérupteur).",[11,13927,13928],{},"Two things to keep in mind:",[43,13930,13931,13934],{},[46,13932,13933],{},"The impulse relay sits in the distribution and switchgear assembly, so that is where it belongs on the single-line diagram, with its upstream protective device. It is not a property of the push-button in the hallway.",[46,13935,13936,13937,13939],{},"The regulation explicitly accepts \"control auxiliaries\" and \"electronic devices\" as control devices, alongside switches and circuit breakers (",[7299,13938,8124],{},"). An impulse relay is therefore a regular solution, provided it complies with the relevant standards.",[11,13941,13942],{},"A related variant is the staircase timer or time switch; Table 2.23 provides a symbol for those too. The choice between impulse relay and timer is functional, not normative: the first holds until the next pulse, the second drops out after a set time.",[27,13944,13946],{"id":13945},"may-a-switch-be-single-pole-and-may-it-sit-in-the-neutral","May a switch be single-pole — and may it sit in the neutral?",[11,13948,13949,13950,13953],{},"Single-pole is permitted. ",[7299,13951,13952],{},"Sub-section 5.3.3.2 point c"," states explicitly that, where no danger can result, not all active conductors need to be broken. A classic single-pole lighting switch breaking the line conductor falls within that.",[11,13955,13956,13957,13960],{},"The same provision immediately draws a limit: ",[35,13958,13959],{},"except for taking measurements, a single-pole control device is not placed in the neutral conductor."," A single-pole switch mistakenly wired into the neutral leaves the appliance live while it appears to be off. That is a classic inspection finding, and it cannot be derived from a drawing — it must be established on site with the circuit de-energised.",[11,13962,13963],{},"Double-pole switching remains possible and is sometimes wanted, for instance for a permanently connected appliance that must be fully separable from the supply. Table 2.23 lists both the \"double-pole switch\" and the \"double-pole two-way switch\" for that. Pole count is therefore a property of its own, separate from the switching function — not a different arrangement.",[27,13965,13967],{"id":13966},"how-many-light-points-may-one-switch-chain-feed","How many light points may one switch chain feed?",[11,13969,13970],{},"Two AREI rules are commonly conflated here.",[11,13972,13973,13974,13977,13978,13981],{},"The limit of eight applies to ",[35,13975,13976],{},"socket outlets",": the number of single or multiple socket outlets is limited to eight per final circuit (",[7299,13979,13980],{},"Sub-section 5.3.5.2 point b","). A pure lighting circuit is not subject to it.",[11,13983,13984,13985,13987,13988,13992,13993,13995],{},"As soon as socket outlets, luminaires and other fixed appliances share the ",[35,13986,13775],{}," final circuit, the rules for socket circuits apply — and then the text matters: \"a single fixed appliance or a set of fixed appliances controlled by a common control device ",[13989,13990,13991],"span",{},"is"," treated as one socket outlet\" (",[7299,13994,13980],{},"). Four spotlights hanging off one switch chain therefore count as a single unit in such a mixed circuit, not as four.",[11,13997,13998,13999,8247,14002,14004,14005,94],{},"In addition, for dwelling units comprising more than two rooms and\u002For spaces, the circuits feeding the luminaires must be ",[35,14000,14001],{},"at least two separate circuits",[7299,14003,13980],{},"). A single lighting circuit for a whole home is thus not a design choice but a shortcoming. The counting method in mixed circuits is worked through in ",[23,14006,14008],{"href":14007},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fsockets-per-circuit","sockets per circuit",[27,14010,14012],{"id":14011},"where-may-the-switch-go-in-a-bathroom","Where may the switch go in a bathroom?",[11,14014,14015,14016,14019],{},"For rooms containing a bath and\u002For shower, ",[7299,14017,14018],{},"Sub-section 7.1.5.2"," sets out volume by volume what is allowed. For control devices — an ordinary lighting switch among them — this gives:",[638,14021,14022,14032],{},[641,14023,14024],{},[644,14025,14026,14029],{},[647,14027,14028],{},"Volume",[647,14030,14031],{},"Control device permitted?",[657,14033,14034,14042,14050],{},[644,14035,14036,14039],{},[662,14037,14038],{},"volume 0",[662,14040,14041],{},"Not permitted, except as part of the fixed appliances allowed there and supplied by SELV with the source outside volumes 0 and 1 (point b)",[644,14043,14044,14047],{},[662,14045,14046],{},"volume 1",[662,14048,14049],{},"Only control devices supplied by SELV, with the source outside volumes 0 and 1 (point c, 4)",[644,14051,14052,14055],{},[662,14053,14054],{},"volume 2",[662,14056,14057],{},"Control devices supplied at low voltage are permitted (point d, 5), alongside the SELV variant (point d, 4)",[11,14059,14060,14061,94],{},"A 230 V two-way switch therefore belongs outside volumes 0 and 1. A ceiling pull-cord switch is a common solution and has its own symbol in Table 2.23 (\"single-pole pull-cord switch\"), but it does not escape the volume rules: what counts is the volume the equipment itself occupies. The volumes and the associated wiring rules are covered in ",[23,14062,14063],{"href":4974},"bathroom cables and AREI zones",[27,14065,14067],{"id":14066},"when-does-home-automation-replace-an-intermediate-arrangement","When does home automation replace an intermediate arrangement?",[11,14069,14070],{},"Once the same light point has to be operated from many places and in several scenes, a bus-based solution becomes more workable than an ever-growing intermediate arrangement. The regulation gives it its own section in Table 2.23: section J, \"Home automation\". The control unit is drawn there as a rectangle in two parts — the base symbol at the bottom (a switch, or a socket outlet with switch, for example) and the unit's control type at the top.",[11,14072,14073,14074,14077],{},"What home automation does not remove: every current-using appliance or electrical machine is operated through a control device, and that device is required even when operation depends on a relay, a thermostat or any similar organ (",[7299,14075,14076],{},"Sub-section 5.3.3.2 point d","). The actuator in the board does not replace the required control device — it is one. What changes is the drawing: you document a control unit together with its control type instead of three intermediate switches in series.",[11,14079,14080,14081,94],{},"Selection criteria and the usual pitfalls of mixed installations are covered in ",[23,14082,14083],{"href":5071},"smart home and AREI",[27,14085,14087],{"id":14086},"how-does-the-switch-chain-come-about-in-planelec-and-what-changes-on-the-diagram","How does the switch chain come about in PlanElec, and what changes on the diagram?",[11,14089,14090,14091,14093],{},"In the floor plan, the ",[35,14092,2480],{}," tool links a switch to the luminaires it operates. PlanElec can propose a chain for the unassigned switches and luminaires of a room; a valid chain contains at least one switch and one luminaire, and a device cannot belong to two chains at once. Across storeys the chain stays coherent project-wide; each floor shows only its local segments and the continuation markers.",[11,14095,955,14096,14099,14100,14103],{},[35,14097,14098],{},"switching function"," is derived from the chain: one switch gives on\u002Foff, two switches become two-way switches at both ends, and from three onward the first and last stay two-way while the ones in between become intermediate switches. ",[35,14101,14102],{},"Pole count"," is chosen separately — the two properties are only combined at drawing time. From three control points the double-pole variant is not rendered, because the RGIE symbol set holds no double-pole intermediate switch; that combination is then drawn as single-pole.",[11,14105,14106,14107,14109],{},"Push-buttons, dimmers and the double switch are deliberately ",[35,14108,2329],{}," derived automatically. The double switch stays available as a manual choice precisely because it describes two separate circuits at one control point: you assign each luminaire deliberately to channel A or B.",[11,14111,14112],{},"The link between a switch and its light points is stored durably and updates the single-line diagram as soon as the devices are assigned to a circuit. Luminaires not yet placed remain in the same switching group and join the chain automatically when placed. Automatic lighting only fills in missing light points, using a transparent planning density of one point per started 8 m², and per 6 m² in kitchens and bathrooms; this is not an AREI\u002FRGIE minimum.",[11,14114,14115,14116,94],{},"Step-by-step operation is described in the guide ",[23,14117,14118],{"href":2414},"switch chains, circuits and cable routes",[27,14120,14122],{"id":14121},"what-the-arei-self-check-checks-and-what-is-checked-on-site","What the AREI self-check checks and what is checked on site",[11,14124,14125],{},"The self-check is advisory and evaluates the supported rules from the data entered. For switches, that means:",[43,14127,14128,14135,14138,14141,14148],{},[46,14129,14130,14131,14134],{},"It checks the ",[35,14132,14133],{},"plausibility"," of every control group: a group contains at least one switch and at least one switched load. It flags groups without a switch, without a load or with only one element.",[46,14136,14137],{},"Whether the chosen arrangement matches the intended operation is your decision. Two two-way switches in two different rooms form a technically valid chain and a rarely sensible one.",[46,14139,14140],{},"Whether a single-pole switch really interrupts the line conductor rather than the neutral, you establish on site with the circuit de-energised; no drawing shows it.",[46,14142,14143,14144,14147],{},"An ",[35,14145,14146],{},"impulse relay",", a DIN-rail dimmer, a staircase timer or a twilight switch is not drawn in today's single-line diagram. Before export, PlanElec explicitly flags them as \"distribution-board modules that cannot be shown\", which you review or remove.",[46,14149,14150],{},"Measurements and the official assessment at the inspection are carried out by the approved inspection body.",[27,14152,8138],{"id":8137},[43,14154,14155,14160,14164,14168],{},[46,14156,14157],{},[23,14158,14159],{"href":8166},"AREI electrical symbols for both documents",[46,14161,14162],{},[23,14163,8155],{"href":8154},[46,14165,14166],{},[23,14167,8161],{"href":8160},[46,14169,14170],{},[23,14171,7912],{"href":5071},[11,14173,14174],{},[23,14175,14176],{"href":5046},"Open PlanElec and record your switch chains →",[11,14178,14179],{},[7299,14180,14181],{},"Basis: AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 V06 — Chapter 2.13 with Table 2.23, Sub-sections 3.1.2.1, 3.1.2.2, 3.1.2.3, 5.1.6.2, 5.2.1.2 with Table 5.1, 5.3.3.2, 5.3.5.2 and 7.1.5.2. Editorial review: PlanElec team, 5 October 2026.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":14183},[14184,14185,14186,14187,14188,14189,14190,14191,14192,14193,14194,14195],{"id":13652,"depth":291,"text":13653},{"id":13810,"depth":291,"text":13811},{"id":13836,"depth":291,"text":13837},{"id":13874,"depth":291,"text":13875},{"id":13921,"depth":291,"text":13922},{"id":13945,"depth":291,"text":13946},{"id":13966,"depth":291,"text":13967},{"id":14011,"depth":291,"text":14012},{"id":14066,"depth":291,"text":14067},{"id":14086,"depth":291,"text":14087},{"id":14121,"depth":291,"text":14122},{"id":8137,"depth":291,"text":8138},"The number of control points decides the wiring arrangement. Symbols from Table 2.23, conductors per variant, referencing on the situation plan and the boundary with home automation — with the AREI\u002FRGIE article beside each statement.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fswitch-types-single-line-diagram.en","11 min",{"title":13646,"description":14196},"Two-Way, Intermediate or Double Switch on the Diagram","blog\u002Fswitch-types-single-line-diagram.en",[1979,1980,14204,14205,14206,319,317,5112,2981],"two-way switch","intermediate switch","double switch","vpeBlzuN0sJVcVgHps49pY8MIx8iCF3rGfY_TFUz7m8",{"id":14209,"title":14210,"articleId":14211,"body":14212,"category":5101,"date":14815,"description":14816,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":14817,"navigation":308,"path":14818,"publishDate":14815,"readTime":610,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":14819,"seoTitle":14820,"slug":14821,"stem":14822,"tags":14823,"__hash__":14825},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Farei-electrical-symbols.en.md","AREI Electrical Symbols: Overview for Single-Line Diagram and Situation Plan","arei-electrical-symbols",{"type":8,"value":14213,"toc":14799},[14214,14218,14228,14231,14235,14238,14253,14256,14260,14263,14379,14382,14386,14389,14396,14553,14559,14563,14566,14577,14580,14584,14587,14601,14604,14608,14611,14617,14621,14624,14641,14644,14648,14671,14675,14678,14681,14684,14688,14691,14694,14720,14738,14742,14745,14748,14755,14759,14762,14765,14767,14789,14794],[27,14215,14217],{"id":14216},"short-answer-table-223-is-the-basis-the-legend-defines-your-own-signs","Short answer: Table 2.23 is the basis, the legend defines your own signs",[11,14219,14220,14223,14224,14227],{},[35,14221,14222],{},"For a domestic installation's single-line diagram and situation plan, you use the graphical symbols in AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1, Chapter 2.13, Table 2.23."," The table expressly calls itself a ",[35,14225,14226],{},"non-exhaustive list",". If it has no suitable symbol, you use another unambiguous sign and define it in the legend of the diagram and plan (Subsection 3.1.2.1 a).",[11,14229,14230],{},"The legend is therefore a clearly regulated tool: every sign stays unambiguous throughout the records, and the mandatory technical characteristics appear on the diagram as well. This guide covers domestic installations under Book 1 V06; for non-domestic installations and special circuit diagrams, Book 1 requires further details (3.1.2.2 b).",[27,14232,14234],{"id":14233},"three-layers-of-information","Three layers of information",[11,14236,14237],{},"Subsection 3.1.2.1 a connects Chapter 2.13 with domestic diagrams and plans and allows the legend route when Table 2.23 has no entry. In practical terms, the documents carry three distinct layers:",[105,14239,14240,14247,14250],{},[46,14241,14242,14243,14246],{},"the ",[35,14244,14245],{},"base symbol"," identifies the equipment family;",[46,14248,14249],{},"labels and ratings describe its electrical properties on the diagram (3.1.2.2 a);",[46,14251,14252],{},"a circuit letter and sequence number connect the electrical topology to the physical location on the plan (3.1.2.3 a).",[11,14254,14255],{},"An RCD symbol without its type and ratings is incomplete. A line from a breaker to a socket says nothing yet about cable type, cross-section, conductor count or installation method. A point on the situation plan that does not share the single-line reference cannot be reliably reconciled with the circuit.",[27,14257,14259],{"id":14258},"the-principal-table-223-groups","The principal Table 2.23 groups",[11,14261,14262],{},"The overview below describes meaning, not the exact geometry of each official mark.",[638,14264,14265,14278],{},[641,14266,14267],{},[644,14268,14269,14272,14275],{},[647,14270,14271],{},"Group",[647,14273,14274],{},"Examples",[647,14276,14277],{},"Purpose in the records",[657,14279,14280,14291,14302,14313,14324,14335,14346,14357,14368],{},[644,14281,14282,14285,14288],{},[662,14283,14284],{},"A. General marks",[662,14286,14287],{},"DC, AC, single-phase and three-phase AC",[662,14289,14290],{},"identify the nature of the supply",[644,14292,14293,14296,14299],{},[662,14294,14295],{},"B. Assemblies and boxes",[662,14297,14298],{},"distribution board, general box, connection\u002Fjunction box, service box, earthing switch",[662,14300,14301],{},"show structural nodes",[644,14303,14304,14307,14310],{},[662,14305,14306],{},"C. Wiring systems",[662,14308,14309],{},"underground, overhead, surface, concealed, in conduit, conductor count",[662,14311,14312],{},"describe construction and installation method",[644,14314,14315,14318,14321],{},[662,14316,14317],{},"D. Protective devices",[662,14319,14320],{},"fuse, circuit breaker with release letters M, O and Δ, RCD, earth electrode",[662,14322,14323],{},"show overcurrent and fault protection",[644,14325,14326,14329,14332],{},[662,14327,14328],{},"E. Switches and controls",[662,14330,14331],{},"two-way, intermediate, push-button, dimmer, remote-control switch, thermostat, detector",[662,14333,14334],{},"link controls to loads",[644,14336,14337,14340,14343],{},[662,14338,14339],{},"F. Socket outlets",[662,14341,14342],{},"single, multiple, splash-proof, earthed, child-protected, switched, data",[662,14344,14345],{},"distinguish connection-point functions",[644,14347,14348,14351,14354],{},[662,14349,14350],{},"G. Current-using equipment",[662,14352,14353],{},"lighting, heating, appliance, motor, EV charging point, kWh meter",[662,14355,14356],{},"identify fixed or located loads",[644,14358,14359,14362,14365],{},[662,14360,14361],{},"H. Sources and converters",[662,14363,14364],{},"transformer, photovoltaic cell, rectifier\u002Finverter, DC\u002FDC converter",[662,14366,14367],{},"record generation and conversion",[644,14369,14370,14373,14376],{},[662,14371,14372],{},"J. Home automation",[662,14374,14375],{},"base mark combined with local, wireless, programmed or sensor control",[662,14377,14378],{},"combine electrical function and control method",[11,14380,14381],{},"The groups are a toolkit, not a mandatory list: you use the signs your installation actually contains. Whether equipment is correctly selected and sized is shown by the design; the symbol represents it. You state the characteristics of sources either on the single-line diagram or keep them available in the installation file (note to Table 2.23).",[27,14383,14385],{"id":14384},"twelve-existing-catalogue-symbols-side-by-side","Twelve existing catalogue symbols side by side",[11,14387,14388],{},"The plate below shows twelve existing symbols from the PlanElec catalogue in black and white. It is a catalogue view, not a screenshot of a specific project. Read them from left to right, then row by row from top to bottom; that order matches the numbered table directly below. The raster plate enlarges the unchanged geometry from the source files. The name, position number and technical data provide the unambiguous meaning, not the shape by itself.",[73,14390],{":height":14391,":width":14392,"alt":14393,"caption":14394,"src":14395},"600","660","Black-and-white plate of twelve existing PlanElec catalogue symbols for protection devices, switches, connection points, cables and PV.","The twelve symbols follow the same order as the table: from left to right, row by row.","\u002Fblog\u002Fsymbols\u002Fcatalog-12.png",[638,14397,14398,14411],{},[641,14399,14400],{},[644,14401,14402,14405,14408],{},[647,14403,14404],{},"No. and name",[647,14406,14407],{},"Meaning in the document",[647,14409,14410],{},"Common confusion",[657,14412,14413,14424,14439,14450,14461,14472,14483,14494,14505,14516,14531,14542],{},[644,14414,14415,14418,14421],{},[662,14416,14417],{},"1. Circuit breaker",[662,14419,14420],{},"Circuit breaker for overcurrent protection; rated current, curve, pole count and breaking capacity come from the technical data.",[662,14422,14423],{},"Its basic geometry is the same as the residual-current device; do not swap the name and residual-current characteristics.",[644,14425,14426,14429,14432],{},[662,14427,14428],{},"2. Residual-current device",[662,14430,14431],{},"Residual-current device; type, rated residual current, rated current and pole count complete the sign.",[662,14433,14434,14435,14438],{},"Its basic geometry is the same as the circuit breaker; ",[842,14436,14437],{},"30 mA"," alone does not define a particular RCD type.",[644,14440,14441,14444,14447],{},[662,14442,14443],{},"3. Main load-break switch",[662,14445,14446],{},"Load-break switch in the documented supply path.",[662,14448,14449],{},"Do not treat it as the downstream circuit breaker. Required in the main board, at least 40 A in domestic installations (5.3.5.1 b). The isolating function of the RCD at the supply point (4.2.4.3 b) is a separate requirement; the diagram shows unambiguously which device performs the main switch function.",[644,14451,14452,14455,14458],{},[662,14453,14454],{},"4. Socket outlet",[662,14456,14457],{},"Ordinary socket outlet on the single-line diagram and situation plan.",[662,14459,14460],{},"Do not read it as a switched, wet-area or data outlet.",[644,14462,14463,14466,14469],{},[662,14464,14465],{},"5. Wet-area socket outlet",[662,14467,14468],{},"Wet-area socket outlet with its own catalogue geometry.",[662,14470,14471],{},"The qualifier does not replace the real environmental or equipment data.",[644,14473,14474,14477,14480],{},[662,14475,14476],{},"6. Socket outlet with two-pole switch",[662,14478,14479],{},"Socket outlet with a two-pole switch.",[662,14481,14482],{},"An ordinary socket and a separately documented switch carry a different meaning.",[644,14484,14485,14488,14491],{},[662,14486,14487],{},"7. Lighting outlet",[662,14489,14490],{},"Lighting outlet or lighting point.",[662,14492,14493],{},"Do not confuse it with a wall luminaire or the switch controlling that point.",[644,14495,14496,14499,14502],{},[662,14497,14498],{},"8. Switch",[662,14500,14501],{},"General switch symbol for a control device.",[662,14503,14504],{},"Which lighting point it controls is stated by the reference, not by the sign.",[644,14506,14507,14510,14513],{},[662,14508,14509],{},"9. Connection or junction box",[662,14511,14512],{},"Connection or junction box as a topology node.",[662,14514,14515],{},"Do not treat it as a distribution board or a consumer.",[644,14517,14518,14521,14524],{},[662,14519,14520],{},"10. Three-conductor cable",[662,14522,14523],{},"Base symbol for a three-conductor cable; type, cross-section and installation method are added to the cable segment.",[662,14525,14526,14527,14530],{},"Three conductors are not a complete cable sizing and are not the same statement as a freely chosen ",[842,14528,14529],{},"3×"," notation.",[644,14532,14533,14536,14539],{},[662,14534,14535],{},"11. Solar panel \u002F PV module",[662,14537,14538],{},"Solar panel or PV module as a source in the documented PV path.",[662,14540,14541],{},"Do not confuse it with the inverter; string, protection and connection point must remain separately traceable.",[644,14543,14544,14547,14550],{},[662,14545,14546],{},"12. Inverter",[662,14548,14549],{},"Inverter between the sides recorded in the project.",[662,14551,14552],{},"The symbol stands for the function; manufacturer and technical limits are documented separately.",[11,14554,14555,14556,14558],{},"The help guide ",[23,14557,2272],{"href":2242}," explains how to place and connect a symbol on the plan before reusing it in the same project model. Catalogue symbols then appear in the diagram and plan; you confirm on site which devices are actually installed.",[27,14560,14562],{"id":14561},"a-wiring-symbol-is-more-than-a-line","A wiring symbol is more than a line",[11,14564,14565],{},"The single-line diagram records at least wiring-system type, cross-section, number of conductors and installation method (3.1.2.2 a). Table 2.23 supplies base marks and worked examples for surface or concealed wiring, conduit, underground and overhead routes, such as a five-core 4 mm² XVB-Cca cable in embedded conduit or four insulated 1.5 mm² H07V-U conductors in one conduit.",[11,14567,14568,14569,14572,14573,14576],{},"Notation should reflect the installed system. ",[842,14570,14571],{},"3G2.5",", for example, communicates three conductors including a green-yellow protective conductor, each 2.5 mm². A notation using ",[842,14574,14575],{},"×"," does not necessarily make the same PE statement. Concealed wiring must not be drawn as surface wiring, or vice versa, merely to simplify the page.",[11,14578,14579],{},"Cable sizing for current-carrying capacity, installation method, grouping, temperature, voltage drop, fault-loop conditions and protective-device selection is done separately; the symbol documents its result.",[27,14581,14583],{"id":14582},"protective-device-symbols-need-ratings","Protective-device symbols need ratings",[11,14585,14586],{},"Table 2.23 distinguishes fuses, automatic circuit breakers and residual-current devices. Capital letters next to a breaker identify its releases: M for the overcurrent release, O for the undervoltage release, Δ for residual-current sensitivity. The accompanying properties make the drawing useful:",[43,14588,14589,14592,14595,14598],{},[46,14590,14591],{},"rated current and characteristic for an overcurrent device (example in the table: 20 A, curve C);",[46,14593,14594],{},"RCD waveform type, rated residual operating current and rated current (example: 300 mA, type A, 40 A);",[46,14596,14597],{},"identified functions where a device has multiple releases;",[46,14599,14600],{},"the earthing connection that actually exists.",[11,14602,14603],{},"“30 mA” does not say whether an RCD is Type A, F or B, or whether it is instantaneous or selective. “20 A” without a characteristic and corresponding conductor data is not a complete circuit description. Copy values from the installed equipment and verified design, not from a sample drawing.",[27,14605,14607],{"id":14606},"one-reference-across-both-diagrams","One reference across both diagrams",[11,14609,14610],{},"Each elementary circuit receives a capital letter on the single-line diagram. Lighting points, socket outlets and control units are numbered in order starting at the upstream overcurrent device. The situation plan uses the same letter and number.",[11,14612,14613,14614,14616],{},"Therefore ",[842,14615,13908],{}," must identify the same item on both documents. A switch or control unit is referenced using its circuit and the number of the lighting point or appliance it controls. That keeps each switch's function clear, even where several switches share a room. Multiple, switched and data outlets are different things; where the distinction matters, you use the matching sign.",[27,14618,14620],{"id":14619},"when-the-table-has-no-exact-symbol","When the table has no exact symbol",[11,14622,14623],{},"The legend rule supports new functions and specialist equipment. A defensible process is:",[105,14625,14626,14629,14632,14635,14638],{},[46,14627,14628],{},"first test whether a general Table 2.23 mark plus a technical label is clear;",[46,14630,14631],{},"otherwise choose a simple mark that cannot be confused with an existing one;",[46,14633,14634],{},"define the mark, abbreviation and precise meaning in the legend;",[46,14636,14637],{},"use it consistently on every relevant page;",[46,14639,14640],{},"keep the electrical properties on the diagram or in the installation dossier.",[11,14642,14643],{},"A manufacturer's logo does not explain electrical function or connection. A personal sign without a legend does not meet 3.1.2.1 a, even if its author remembers the meaning.",[27,14645,14647],{"id":14646},"common-documentation-errors","Common documentation errors",[43,14649,14650,14653,14656,14659,14662,14665,14668],{},[46,14651,14652],{},"importing a DIN, IEC or software mark without checking its meaning in this drawing;",[46,14654,14655],{},"using one socket mark for ordinary, multiple, switched and data outlets;",[46,14657,14658],{},"omitting cable type, cross-section, conductor count or installation method;",[46,14660,14661],{},"labelling an RCD only “30 mA”, without type and rated current;",[46,14663,14664],{},"using different references on the single-line and position diagrams;",[46,14666,14667],{},"reducing a PV installation to a panel icon without source, inverter and relevant characteristics;",[46,14669,14670],{},"stylising the drawing until the official base mark or defined legend is no longer recognisable.",[27,14672,14674],{"id":14673},"inspect-the-final-pdf-not-only-the-editor","Inspect the final PDF, not only the editor",[11,14676,14677],{},"A correct symbol can become unusable through scaling or pagination. Review the export at ordinary reading size: does a page edge cut off a legend or rating, do lines cross identifiers, can ordinary and switched sockets still be distinguished, and is every label clearly attached to the intended device?",[11,14679,14680],{},"Do not make meaning depend on colour alone. Inspection records may be printed or copied in black and white. Shape, text and circuit reference must carry the information. Put the legend on affected pages or reference it unambiguously as part of the same document set, and keep abbreviations consistent.",[11,14682,14683],{},"Finally compare identifiers and counts across the two diagrams. This catches duplicate references, missing loads and accidentally copied marks early; the technical check follows.",[27,14685,14687],{"id":14686},"a-repeatable-workflow-from-survey-to-legend","A repeatable workflow from survey to legend",[11,14689,14690],{},"Do not begin with drawing. First make an equipment register in which every real point has a room, circuit, sequence number, function and the characteristics that will have to accompany its mark. Only then choose the closest base symbol from Table 2.23. That way the real function decides the symbol, not the other way round. A fixed fan, a socket outlet and a connection box may share one circuit, but they remain different items.",[11,14692,14693],{},"Review every entry in four passes:",[105,14695,14696,14702,14708,14714],{},[46,14697,14698,14701],{},[35,14699,14700],{},"Base mark:"," does the family match, such as protective device, socket, luminaire, source or fixed machine?",[46,14703,14704,14707],{},[35,14705,14706],{},"Characteristics:"," are poles, rated current, residual-current sensitivity, wiring type, conductor count and cross-section present where needed to understand the circuit?",[46,14709,14710,14713],{},[35,14711,14712],{},"Reference:"," does the point on the situation plan use exactly the circuit letter and number assigned on the single-line diagram?",[46,14715,14716,14719],{},[35,14717,14718],{},"Legend:"," is every project-specific combination defined once and easy to find on every affected sheet?",[11,14721,14722,14723,14726,14727,11069,14730,14733,14734,14737],{},"Consider circuit ",[842,14724,14725],{},"K",": it starts downstream of an identified RCD and a 20 A protective device, continues through a recorded 3G2.5 cable and supplies three fixed connections. The protective device carries its ratings, the cable carries its wiring data, and the connections are referenced ",[842,14728,14729],{},"K1",[842,14731,14732],{},"K3",". One generic icon labelled “kitchen” does not replace that information. If ",[842,14735,14736],{},"K2"," later becomes a different appliance, the reference stays; you update the symbol, functional label and characteristics on both diagrams.",[27,14739,14741],{"id":14740},"handling-boundary-cases-without-hiding-information","Handling boundary cases without hiding information",[11,14743,14744],{},"For combined equipment, decide which electrical functions must remain visible for inspection and maintenance. A multi-socket assembly may be grouped if its quantity and switching remain unambiguous. A smart actuator with several outputs needs a base mark, a project legend code and a reference to its technical sheet; for home automation, Table 2.23 provides the two-part control-unit symbol of base mark and control type. A legend explains a sign missing from the table; it never hides a conductor path, protective function or energy source.",[11,14746,14747],{},"Version project-specific marks like any other installation data. When a definition changes, record the date and affected references, then inspect every sheet. Do not leave an obsolete legend beside the current PDFs in the handover folder. If the representation is uncertain, settle it with the responsible electrical professional and, where appropriate, the approved inspection body before work is executed.",[11,14749,955,14750,14754],{},[23,14751,14753],{"href":4466,"rel":14752},[4434],"official AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 publication"," remains the primary source. Check the edition applicable to the document date there. Manufacturer icon libraries and symbols borrowed from another country's standard do not replace Table 2.23 or the Belgian diagram rules.",[27,14756,14758],{"id":14757},"what-planelecs-symbol-catalogue-does","What PlanElec's symbol catalogue does",[11,14760,14761],{},"PlanElec provides a symbol catalogue for the Belgian planning context in the editor and uses every recorded component in the single-line diagram and situation plan. You export both documents as PDF, and the advisory AREI\u002FRGIE self-check shows you errors in the supported rules that can be decided from project data.",[11,14763,14764],{},"The roles are clear: the catalogue keeps the representation consistent, you check the actual device, ratings, references and location before export, and the official assessment is made by the approved inspection body at the inspection.",[27,14766,8138],{"id":8137},[43,14768,14769,14774,14779,14784],{},[46,14770,14771],{},[23,14772,14773],{"href":13313},"Single-line diagram vs. situation plan: difference and coordination",[46,14775,14776],{},[23,14777,14778],{"href":8154},"Create a single-line diagram step by step",[46,14780,14781],{},[23,14782,14783],{"href":7782},"Two-way and intermediate switching in the single-line diagram",[46,14785,14786],{},[23,14787,14788],{"href":8687},"Cable cross-section and protective device",[11,14790,14791],{},[23,14792,14793],{"href":5046},"Open PlanElec to record symbols and export both diagrams →",[11,14795,14796],{},[7299,14797,14798],{},"Basis: AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 V06, Chapter 2.13 (Table 2.23) and subsections 3.1.2.1 to 3.1.2.3. Editorial review: PlanElec team, 5 October 2026.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":14800},[14801,14802,14803,14804,14805,14806,14807,14808,14809,14810,14811,14812,14813,14814],{"id":14216,"depth":291,"text":14217},{"id":14233,"depth":291,"text":14234},{"id":14258,"depth":291,"text":14259},{"id":14384,"depth":291,"text":14385},{"id":14561,"depth":291,"text":14562},{"id":14582,"depth":291,"text":14583},{"id":14606,"depth":291,"text":14607},{"id":14619,"depth":291,"text":14620},{"id":14646,"depth":291,"text":14647},{"id":14673,"depth":291,"text":14674},{"id":14686,"depth":291,"text":14687},{"id":14740,"depth":291,"text":14741},{"id":14757,"depth":291,"text":14758},{"id":8137,"depth":291,"text":8138},"2026-08-29","Which symbols AREI\u002FRGIE Table 2.23 provides for Belgian domestic installations, when you introduce your own sign through the legend, and which data belongs next to every symbol on diagram and plan.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Farei-electrical-symbols.en",{"title":14210,"description":14816},"AREI Electrical Symbols for Single-Line and Situation Plans","arei-electrical-symbols-overview","blog\u002Farei-electrical-symbols.en",[1979,1980,2442,7434,319,8203,14824,2981],"legend","T_opzVm7FYnkMI3OgYPhVIBJcatSlzPXLYcTalA7d0g",{"id":14827,"title":14828,"articleId":14829,"body":14830,"category":6215,"date":14815,"description":15273,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":15274,"navigation":308,"path":15275,"publishDate":14815,"readTime":15276,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":15277,"seoTitle":15278,"slug":14829,"stem":15279,"tags":15280,"__hash__":15284},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fheat-pump-single-line-diagram.en.md","Heat Pump on a Single-Line Diagram: Showing the Circuit and Equipment Correctly","heat-pump-single-line-diagram",{"type":8,"value":14831,"toc":15252},[14832,14842,14845,14849,14852,14878,14881,14885,14888,14891,14900,14903,14909,14921,14925,14928,14954,14961,14965,14968,14971,14988,14995,14999,15006,15026,15033,15037,15047,15064,15070,15074,15078,15081,15085,15088,15092,15095,15099,15102,15106,15109,15129,15132,15136,15139,15142,15162,15165,15169,15172,15175,15178,15182,15185,15188,15208,15211,15214,15217,15221,15224,15230,15234,15240,15244],[11,14833,14834,14837,14838,14841],{},[35,14835,14836],{},"On the single-line diagram, you draw a heat pump the way it is actually connected: every outgoing way with its circuit reference, overcurrent protection, residual current device (RCD), cable and electrical rating – separately for the outdoor unit, indoor unit and backup heater whenever they are supplied separately."," A single box saying “8 kW” is not enough. Depending on the system, the installation includes an outdoor unit, indoor module, electric backup heater, circulation pumps, controls or a domestic hot-water cylinder, supplied together or through several circuits. The diagram shows the ",[35,14839,14840],{},"installed electrical structure",", not the simplified hydraulic sketch from the brochure.",[11,14843,14844],{},"AREI Book 1 V06 (the Belgian wiring regulations) sets no brand-specific heat-pump symbol and no universal RCD type. The general rules for circuits, protection, cables and documentation apply together with the electrical data of the exact device. Keeping those two apart cleanly avoids the typical mistakes.",[27,14846,14848],{"id":14847},"collect-the-electrical-data-first","Collect the electrical data first",[11,14850,14851],{},"Start with rating plates, datasheets and the distribution board, not with drawing. For every electrically supplied unit, record:",[43,14853,14854,14857,14860,14863,14866,14869,14872,14875],{},[46,14855,14856],{},"exact equipment designation and function;",[46,14858,14859],{},"single- or three-phase supply and rated voltage;",[46,14861,14862],{},"rated current or the protection the manufacturer requires;",[46,14864,14865],{},"inverter or variable-frequency technology, where present;",[46,14867,14868],{},"required residual-current protection and possible DC fault components;",[46,14870,14871],{},"cable type, number of conductors, cross-section and route;",[46,14873,14874],{},"local isolator or maintenance switch, if actually installed;",[46,14876,14877],{},"separate supply for an electric backup heater, crankcase heater, circulation pump or controls.",[11,14879,14880],{},"A datasheet saying “thermal output 8 kW” answers none of these questions. Thermal output, electrical input power and connection rating are different quantities. On the single-line diagram, the electrical execution is what counts.",[27,14882,14884],{"id":14883},"one-device-or-several-circuits","One device or several circuits?",[11,14886,14887],{},"A compact monobloc unit often has a single supply to the outdoor unit. A split system frequently supplies the outdoor and indoor units separately. An integrated backup heater runs through the same connection or needs its own, more heavily loaded circuit. Some controls are fed from the indoor unit; others have their own protection.",[11,14889,14890],{},"So do not draw this generic chain by default:",[14892,14893,14898],"pre",{"className":14894,"code":14896,"language":14897,"meta":290},[14895],"language-text","Board → circuit breaker → heat pump\n","text",[842,14899,14896],{"__ignoreMap":290},[11,14901,14902],{},"A real installation may look like this:",[14892,14904,14907],{"className":14905,"code":14906,"language":14897,"meta":290},[14895],"Main board\n├─ circuit HP1 → protective device → cable → outdoor unit\u002Finverter\n├─ circuit HP2 → protective device → cable → indoor unit\u002Fcontrols\n└─ circuit HP3 → protective device → cable → electric backup heater\n",[842,14908,14906],{"__ignoreMap":290},[11,14910,14911,2145,14914,2152,14917,14920],{},[842,14912,14913],{},"HP1",[842,14915,14916],{},"HP2",[842,14918,14919],{},"HP3"," are just a readable example. In the project, you follow the existing circuit logic: AREI 3.1.2.1 a identifies elementary circuits by a capital letter, and the situation plan repeats the letter and sequence number from the single-line diagram.",[27,14922,14924],{"id":14923},"what-belongs-on-each-outgoing-way","What belongs on each outgoing way?",[11,14926,14927],{},"The outgoing way is traceable from the board to the load. Document at least:",[105,14929,14930,14933,14936,14939,14942,14945,14948,14951],{},[46,14931,14932],{},"circuit reference;",[46,14934,14935],{},"type, number of poles and rated current of the overcurrent protection;",[46,14937,14938],{},"upstream RCD with rated residual current and type;",[46,14940,14941],{},"cable or conductor type, number of conductors and cross-section;",[46,14943,14944],{},"phase assignment for a polyphase supply;",[46,14946,14947],{},"an unambiguous equipment name, such as “heat pump outdoor unit”;",[46,14949,14950],{},"relevant electrical power or rated current;",[46,14952,14953],{},"local isolator, contactor or load-management component, if part of the fixed installation.",[11,14955,14956,14957,14960],{},"For household installations, AREI Table 4.11 (Subsection 4.4.1.4) caps the rated current of the circuit breaker per cross-section, for example 20 A for 2.5 mm² and 25 A for 4 mm². Still, the ",[23,14958,14959],{"href":8687},"relationship between cable cross-section and breaker"," does not follow from appliance power alone: route length, installation method, grouping, ambient temperature, voltage drop, prospective fault current and manufacturer limits are part of the design.",[27,14962,14964],{"id":14963},"rcd-no-universal-type-for-every-heat-pump","RCD: no universal type for every heat pump",[11,14966,14967],{},"The regulatory classification is clear: a heat pump is a fixed appliance. AREI 4.2.4.3 b requires the high- or very-high-sensitivity group (30 mA) only for certain circuits – sockets not intended for fixed appliances, lighting, bathrooms and showers, and washing machines, tumble dryers and dishwashers. Fixed appliances such as electric heating installations may be connected directly downstream of the RCD at the origin of the installation (no more than 300 mA). If the earth electrode resistance exceeds 30 ohms, at least one RCD of no more than 100 mA per circuit or group of circuits supplements that protection.",[11,14969,14970],{},"The required type is set by the device. A heat pump with a power-electronic compressor can produce fault currents with waveforms that differ from a purely resistive load. That does not mean every heat pump needs Type B, nor that Type A is always sufficient. Check:",[43,14972,14973,14976,14979,14982,14985],{},[46,14974,14975],{},"the binding installation manual of the exact model;",[46,14977,14978],{},"whether the device has integrated DC fault-current detection;",[46,14980,14981],{},"the protective measure planned for the network and earthing system;",[46,14983,14984],{},"selectivity and allocation relative to upstream RCDs;",[46,14986,14987],{},"cumulative leakage currents from other loads.",[11,14989,14990,14991,14994],{},"The guide to ",[23,14992,14993],{"href":7208},"RCD Type A versus Type B"," separates waveform capability, high immunity and time selectivity. The diagram states the protective device actually installed, not an assumption from a generic table.",[27,14996,14998],{"id":14997},"use-a-clear-symbol-and-legend","Use a clear symbol and legend",[11,15000,15001,15002,15005],{},"Table 2.23 of AREI Book 1 V06 is explicitly a ",[35,15003,15004],{},"non-exhaustive"," symbol list. Where it has no suitable symbol, 3.1.2.1 a allows any other clearly identifiable symbol defined in the legend. One possible documentation distinguishes, for example:",[43,15007,15008,15014,15020],{},[46,15009,15010,15013],{},[842,15011,15012],{},"HP-O",": heat-pump outdoor unit;",[46,15015,15016,15019],{},[842,15017,15018],{},"HP-I",": heat-pump indoor unit;",[46,15021,15022,15025],{},[842,15023,15024],{},"BH",": electric backup heater.",[11,15027,15028,15029,15032],{},"Each abbreviation stays the same throughout the dossier and never also means a hydraulic pump or heating circuit. The ",[23,15030,15031],{"href":8166},"AREI electrical-symbol overview"," explains when standard symbols are enough and when a project legend is needed.",[27,15034,15036],{"id":15035},"keep-the-single-line-diagram-and-situation-plan-in-sync","Keep the single-line diagram and situation plan in sync",[11,15038,15039,15040,15043,15044,15046],{},"The single-line diagram answers ",[35,15041,15042],{},"how"," the heat pump is connected and protected. The situation plan shows ",[35,15045,8841],{}," the fixed electrical equipment is. Depending on the project, locate:",[43,15048,15049,15052,15055,15058,15061],{},[46,15050,15051],{},"outdoor and indoor units;",[46,15053,15054],{},"maintenance switch or isolator;",[46,15056,15057],{},"sub-board or control box;",[46,15059,15060],{},"fixed backup heater;",[46,15062,15063],{},"relevant cable routes where they matter for readability or later work.",[11,15065,15066,15067,15069],{},"Every location uses the same circuit reference as the single-line diagram. A hydraulic schematic supplements the dossier but replaces neither of the two electrical plans. See ",[23,15068,13918],{"href":13313}," for the division of roles.",[27,15071,15073],{"id":15072},"common-documentation-mistakes","Common documentation mistakes",[385,15075,15077],{"id":15076},"writing-only-heat-pump-8-kw","Writing only “heat pump 8 kW”",[11,15079,15080],{},"That entry often confuses thermal and electrical power. Protection, supply and cable stay unclear.",[385,15082,15084],{"id":15083},"forgetting-the-backup-heater","Forgetting the backup heater",[11,15086,15087],{},"A backup heater changes the electrical peak load considerably and often has its own connection. If it is part of the fixed installation, it belongs on the diagram.",[385,15089,15091],{"id":15090},"replacing-manufacturer-requirements-with-a-rule-of-thumb","Replacing manufacturer requirements with a rule of thumb",[11,15093,15094],{},"A generic RCD or breaker suggestion replaces neither the specific datasheet nor a complete protection design.",[385,15096,15098],{"id":15097},"presenting-the-design-as-as-built","Presenting the design as as-built",[11,15100,15101],{},"Cable route, phases or equipment variant can change during installation. Before completion, you compare the diagram, board labels and the installation on site.",[27,15103,15105],{"id":15104},"final-documentation-check","Final documentation check",[11,15107,15108],{},"Before handover, check:",[43,15110,15111,15114,15117,15120,15123,15126],{},[46,15112,15113],{},"Do the rating plate and equipment name match the diagram?",[46,15115,15116],{},"Are outdoor, indoor and auxiliary components complete?",[46,15118,15119],{},"Do poles, rated current and RCD data match the installed devices?",[46,15121,15122],{},"Are cable data and phases traceable?",[46,15124,15125],{},"Do circuit references agree on the single-line diagram, situation plan and board?",[46,15127,15128],{},"Are manufacturer documents and later changes in the installation dossier?",[11,15130,15131],{},"This check covers the documentation. The electrical design is done by the professional, and the required inspection by the approved inspection body.",[27,15133,15135],{"id":15134},"when-the-diagram-needs-updating-again","When the diagram needs updating again",[11,15137,15138],{},"Replacing the whole heat pump is not the only trigger. Review the plan when a backup heater is added, a higher connection rating is unlocked, a single-phase unit is replaced by a three-phase one, or an external controller is permanently connected. The same applies when an installer changes the RCD, protection or cable route.",[11,15140,15141],{},"Do not simply write the new model over the old symbol. Compare:",[43,15143,15144,15147,15150,15153,15156,15159],{},[46,15145,15146],{},"old and new electrical connection data;",[46,15148,15149],{},"the existing cable and the conductors actually available;",[46,15151,15152],{},"protective devices and manufacturer requirements;",[46,15154,15155],{},"phase allocation and effects on the board;",[46,15157,15158],{},"positions on the situation plan;",[46,15160,15161],{},"revision date and related equipment documents.",[11,15163,15164],{},"If a decommissioned circuit physically remains, the documentation makes its real state clear. A load shown as active on the diagram but disconnected on site misleads just as much as a new backup heater missing from the plan.",[27,15166,15168],{"id":15167},"worked-example-outdoor-unit-indoor-unit-and-backup-heater","Worked example: outdoor unit, indoor unit and backup heater",[11,15170,15171],{},"An installation consists of a three-phase outdoor unit, a separately supplied indoor unit and an electric backup heater. Do not draw a single block too quickly. Check on the delivered model and the actual wiring whether three outgoing ways exist or whether components are supplied internally from the outdoor unit. Only genuinely separate circuits get their own protection chain, cable data and reference.",[11,15173,15174],{},"For every existing way, you record the maximum electrical load from the binding manufacturer documentation, not the thermal heating output from the brochure. Add phases, neutral and protective conductor according to the real cable. A three-phase outdoor unit may sit alongside a single-phase control or indoor module; the shared function name “heat pump” hides that difference. Check the backup heater with particular care, as its connection rating and switching stages can clearly exceed the heat-pump figure.",[11,15176,15177],{},"On the situation plan, the outdoor unit, indoor unit, fixed isolation point and any separately supplied backup heater appear at their actual locations. Control, bus or sensor cables are not shown as power circuits. If they matter for maintenance, describe them clearly in the legend or manufacturer documentation, separate from the mains supply.",[27,15179,15181],{"id":15180},"account-for-commissioning-data-and-operating-modes","Account for commissioning data and operating modes",[11,15183,15184],{},"After commissioning, compare the drawn way with the rating plate, terminals, installer menu and test record. Load limitation, a blocking contact or energy management affect operation, but do not replace the necessary sizing and protection assessment. Document only settings that are actually applied, secured against unintended change and relevant to the design.",[11,15186,15187],{},"Also check operating cases that normal operation easily hides:",[43,15189,15190,15193,15196,15199,15202,15205],{},[46,15191,15192],{},"defrosting with simultaneous backup heating;",[46,15194,15195],{},"emergency or anti-legionella operation with the electric heater;",[46,15197,15198],{},"start-up and inverter behaviour per the manufacturer;",[46,15200,15201],{},"separate supply for a drain-pan or trace heater;",[46,15203,15204],{},"shutdown and safe isolation for maintenance;",[46,15206,15207],{},"restart after a supply interruption or load shedding.",[11,15209,15210],{},"This list does not set protection or cross-section on its own. It shows which input data the designer clarifies with the exact manual and installation conditions. Measurements and disconnection conditions are checked on site by the professional.",[11,15212,15213],{},"Also record which component can remain live when the main way is switched off. Some controls, communication power supplies or auxiliary devices have a different supply, and a maintenance sketch shows it. Mark isolation points as acting together only when wiring and the manufacturer concept confirm it. That way the documentation prevents a supposedly fully isolated system from still being fed by a second way.",[11,15215,15216],{},"Carry this separation into the board labelling. One collective name for several ways makes maintenance and comparison with the plan harder. Use short, unambiguous function names and the same references on the diagram, situation plan and equipment. After labelling, verify by switching off each way in turn that every label really covers the expected part. The result belongs to the as-built check, not to an unverified design assumption.",[27,15218,15220],{"id":15219},"interfaces-with-pv-battery-and-load-management","Interfaces with PV, battery and load management",[11,15222,15223],{},"A heat pump may respond to self-consumption control without becoming a load “behind the PV inverter” if the real AC topology is different. Draw energy paths as they are electrically connected and explain communication contacts or smart-grid signals separately. With backup power, also establish whether the heat pump is actually supplied from the backup board and which starting and power limits apply; an app setting does not prove it.",[11,15225,955,15226,15229],{},[23,15227,14753],{"href":4466,"rel":15228},[4434]," provides the general diagram and safety framework. Model-specific connection values, required external protection and connection variants come from the current instructions for the exact installed equipment.",[27,15231,15233],{"id":15232},"documenting-it-in-planelec","Documenting it in PlanElec",[11,15235,222,15236,15239],{},[23,15237,3710],{"href":15238},"\u002Fen\u002F",", you assign heat-pump components to their actual circuits, record protection and cable details, and export the single-line diagram and situation plan as PDFs. The heat pump is stored there as a permanently connected fixed appliance that may sit downstream of the main RCD. The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check flags, among other things, a Type B-curve circuit breaker supplying a high-inrush load such as a heat pump – explicitly as a practice recommendation, not an AREI requirement. Project-specific symbols still need a clear legend. The roles are clear: the self-check shows you findings within the supported rules, the manufacturer's approval comes from the equipment documentation, and the official inspection is done by the approved inspection body.",[27,15241,15243],{"id":15242},"sources-and-reviewed-version","Sources and reviewed version",[11,15245,15246,15247,15251],{},"The regulatory basis is the official ",[23,15248,15250],{"href":4466,"rel":15249},[4434],"AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 publication",", particularly Table 2.23, Part 3 on electrical plans (3.1.2.1), Subsection 4.2.4.3 b on RCDs in household installations and Table 4.11, together with the electrical installation manual for the exact heat-pump model. Reviewed against Book 1 V06 on 5 October 2026.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":15253},[15254,15255,15256,15257,15258,15259,15260,15266,15267,15268,15269,15270,15271,15272],{"id":14847,"depth":291,"text":14848},{"id":14883,"depth":291,"text":14884},{"id":14923,"depth":291,"text":14924},{"id":14963,"depth":291,"text":14964},{"id":14997,"depth":291,"text":14998},{"id":15035,"depth":291,"text":15036},{"id":15072,"depth":291,"text":15073,"children":15261},[15262,15263,15264,15265],{"id":15076,"depth":599,"text":15077},{"id":15083,"depth":599,"text":15084},{"id":15090,"depth":599,"text":15091},{"id":15097,"depth":599,"text":15098},{"id":15104,"depth":291,"text":15105},{"id":15134,"depth":291,"text":15135},{"id":15167,"depth":291,"text":15168},{"id":15180,"depth":291,"text":15181},{"id":15219,"depth":291,"text":15220},{"id":15232,"depth":291,"text":15233},{"id":15242,"depth":291,"text":15243},"Document the outdoor unit, indoor unit, backup heater, protection, cable and manufacturer data of a heat pump correctly under AREI Book 1 V06.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fheat-pump-single-line-diagram.en","10 min",{"title":14828,"description":15273},"Heat Pump on a Single-Line Diagram: Circuit and Data","blog\u002Fheat-pump-single-line-diagram.en",[15281,3075,1979,2387,15282,15283,2981],"Heat pump","Outdoor unit","Backup heater","6IPPCwJICFGmVXSsWXfd_JzMp5hl2lhYmHtkAA_8Crw",{"id":15286,"title":15287,"articleId":15288,"body":15289,"category":6215,"date":14815,"description":15877,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":15878,"navigation":308,"path":15879,"publishDate":14815,"readTime":14199,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":15880,"seoTitle":15881,"slug":15882,"stem":15883,"tags":15884,"__hash__":15888},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fnew-build-single-line-checklist.en.md","Single-Line Diagram for a New Build: The AREI Checklist up to Inspection","new-build-single-line-checklist",{"type":8,"value":15290,"toc":15857},[15291,15295,15302,15305,15309,15413,15417,15420,15437,15440,15443,15447,15450,15473,15476,15480,15483,15503,15506,15510,15513,15516,15536,15539,15543,15546,15549,15569,15576,15580,15583,15586,15606,15609,15613,15616,15619,15622,15626,15633,15636,15653,15656,15660,15663,15666,15686,15689,15693,15696,15699,15701,15779,15783,15786,15789,15793,15796,15799,15803,15806,15818,15822,15825,15828,15830,15847,15852],[27,15292,15294],{"id":15293},"what-must-a-new-build-single-line-diagram-contain","What must a new-build single-line diagram contain?",[11,15296,15297,15298,15301],{},"A single-line diagram for a Belgian new build shows the installation ",[35,15299,15300],{},"as actually built",": a title block with number, version, date, address and responsible person, the voltage and type of current, every distribution board, all residual current and overcurrent devices with their characteristics, cable type, cross-section, number of conductors and installation method, switches, boxes, socket outlets, lighting points, fixed appliances and sources. The situation plan shows the same elements with the same reference at their location. The basis is AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 version 06, applicable since 1 April 2026, above all Section 3.1.2.",[11,15303,15304],{},"The single-line diagram and the situation plan are drawn up by the person responsible for carrying out the work (Subsection 3.1.2.1 a). Before the conformity inspection they match the installed state, not the first design. This checklist takes you there in ten steps. It covers the usual AC case; earthed DC systems, which version 06 now regulates, are a separate field where you do not simply carry over AC conductor roles and symbols.",[27,15306,15308],{"id":15307},"mandatory-content-at-a-glance","Mandatory content at a glance",[638,15310,15311,15322],{},[641,15312,15313],{},[644,15314,15315,15317,15320],{},[647,15316,9646],{},[647,15318,15319],{},"Required by",[647,15321,649],{},[657,15323,15324,15335,15345,15354,15363,15373,15383,15392,15402],{},[644,15325,15326,15329,15332],{},[662,15327,15328],{},"Number, version and version date",[662,15330,15331],{},"Section 3.1.2",[662,15333,15334],{},"single-line diagram and situation plan",[644,15336,15337,15340,15343],{},[662,15338,15339],{},"Name, capacity and VAT number of the responsible person",[662,15341,15342],{},"Subsection 3.1.2.1 a",[662,15344,15334],{},[644,15346,15347,15350,15352],{},[662,15348,15349],{},"Address of the installation",[662,15351,15342],{},[662,15353,15334],{},[644,15355,15356,15359,15361],{},[662,15357,15358],{},"Voltage and type of current",[662,15360,15342],{},[662,15362,319],{},[644,15364,15365,15368,15370],{},[662,15366,15367],{},"Capital letter per elementary circuit, sequence number per point",[662,15369,15342],{},[662,15371,15372],{},"single-line diagram, reference on the plan",[644,15374,15375,15378,15381],{},[662,15376,15377],{},"Cable type, cross-section, number of conductors and installation method",[662,15379,15380],{},"Subsection 3.1.2.2 a",[662,15382,319],{},[644,15384,15385,15388,15390],{},[662,15386,15387],{},"Type and characteristics of residual current and overcurrent devices",[662,15389,15380],{},[662,15391,319],{},[644,15393,15394,15397,15400],{},[662,15395,15396],{},"Switches, junction and branch boxes, socket outlets, lighting points, fixed appliances, sources",[662,15398,15399],{},"Subsections 3.1.2.2 a and 3.1.2.3 a",[662,15401,15334],{},[644,15403,15404,15407,15410],{},[662,15405,15406],{},"Symbols from Table 2.23 or an unambiguous legend",[662,15408,15409],{},"Chapter 2.13, Subsection 3.1.2.1 a",[662,15411,15412],{},"both documents",[27,15414,15416],{"id":15415},"_1-set-the-title-block-and-responsibility","1. Set the title block and responsibility",[11,15418,15419],{},"Give the document set a clear identity before you draw the first circuit:",[43,15421,15422,15425,15428,15431,15434],{},[46,15423,15424],{},"document number, version and the date of that version;",[46,15426,15427],{},"address of the installation;",[46,15429,15430],{},"name and capacity of the person responsible for the work, VAT number where applicable;",[46,15432,15433],{},"fields for dates and signatures;",[46,15435,15436],{},"voltage and type of current on the single-line diagram.",[11,15438,15439],{},"The single-line diagram and the situation plan carry the same version. A file name is not enough, because printouts and merged PDFs lose it. Nor is the export date the date on which the installation was surveyed.",[11,15441,15442],{},"The signature and visa of the approved body are only added during inspection, once the installation is found compliant (Subsection 3.1.2.1 a). A working version therefore carries no anticipated approval and no “AREI-compliant” statement.",[27,15444,15446],{"id":15445},"_2-establish-the-supply","2. Establish the supply",[11,15448,15449],{},"The diagram starts from the real supply, not from a template. Record:",[43,15451,15452,15455,15458,15461,15464,15467,15470],{},[46,15453,15454],{},"single-phase or three-phase supply;",[46,15456,15457],{},"nominal voltage and type of current;",[46,15459,15460],{},"neutral and protective conductor;",[46,15462,15463],{},"connection and meter arrangement;",[46,15465,15466],{},"rating of the supply protection and the main switch-disconnector;",[46,15468,15469],{},"earthing system and earthing concept, as far as design and protection need them;",[46,15471,15472],{},"additional sources such as a PV inverter or transformer.",[11,15474,15475],{},"No socket outlet tells you whether a supply is a 3×400 V network with neutral or a 3×230 V network. A wrong assumption carries through to the number of poles, the neutral, the wiring of the RCDs and the loads. Compare the connection contract, the board layout and a measurement; when in doubt, the grid operator confirms the supply data.",[27,15477,15479],{"id":15478},"_3-capture-every-board-as-part-of-the-protection-chain","3. Capture every board as part of the protection chain",[11,15481,15482],{},"Record the main board and sub-boards with their feeds and interconnections. The path from the origin to every final circuit is fully traceable. Depending on the installation, this includes:",[43,15484,15485,15488,15491,15494,15497,15500],{},[46,15486,15487],{},"main switch and upstream protection;",[46,15489,15490],{},"RCDs with type, rated residual current, rated current and relevant characteristic;",[46,15492,15493],{},"fuses or circuit breakers with rating and curve;",[46,15495,15496],{},"busbars, links and sub-boards that explain the structure;",[46,15498,15499],{},"spare breakers shown as spares, without an invented cable or load;",[46,15501,15502],{},"a unique name for every board and outgoing way.",[11,15504,15505],{},"A 300 mA device followed by a 30 mA device does not prove selectivity on its own. Waveform type, increased immunity and time delay are separate properties. Short-circuit conditions, disconnection times and coordination according to the manufacturer belong to the technical design.",[27,15507,15509],{"id":15508},"_4-give-every-final-circuit-a-stable-reference","4. Give every final circuit a stable reference",[11,15511,15512],{},"Each elementary circuit gets a capital letter. You number lighting points, socket outlets and control devices in the order in which they occur in the circuit, starting from the upstream overcurrent device (Subsection 3.1.2.1 a). The same reference appears on the board label.",[11,15514,15515],{},"For every outgoing way the survey answers:",[43,15517,15518,15521,15524,15527,15530,15533],{},[46,15519,15520],{},"Which use and which loads belong to it?",[46,15522,15523],{},"Is it a lighting, socket, mixed or dedicated appliance circuit?",[46,15525,15526],{},"Which fixed appliances are connected?",[46,15528,15529],{},"Are there junction or branch boxes?",[46,15531,15532],{},"Which RCD protects the circuit?",[46,15534,15535],{},"Do the diagram, board label and situation plan agree?",[11,15537,15538],{},"“Kitchen” is not a usable name when lighting, worktop sockets, dishwasher and hob each have their own circuit. Names help orientation; only the electrical reference is unambiguous.",[27,15540,15542],{"id":15541},"_5-state-all-cable-data","5. State all cable data",[11,15544,15545],{},"Subsection 3.1.2.2 a requires type, cross-section, number of conductors and installation method. Record them per cable section. After a branch or junction box, the cable or installation method can change; a single cable label at the start of the circuit hides that.",[11,15547,15548],{},"The design behind the diagram goes further. Check separately:",[43,15550,15551,15554,15557,15560,15563,15566],{},[46,15552,15553],{},"design current, protective-device rating and current-carrying capacity;",[46,15555,15556],{},"installation method, grouping, ambient temperature and thermal insulation;",[46,15558,15559],{},"cable length and voltage drop;",[46,15561,15562],{},"short-circuit and fault-loop conditions;",[46,15564,15565],{},"minimum cross-sections and specific circuit rules;",[46,15567,15568],{},"the stated protective conductor against the cable actually installed.",[11,15570,15571,15572,15575],{},"Table 4.11 gives, for domestic installations, the highest fuse or circuit-breaker rating per cross-section, for example a 20 A circuit breaker for 2.5 mm². It is a ceiling, not a complete cable calculation. A neat label such as ",[842,15573,15574],{},"XVB 3G2,5"," is worthless if a different cable was installed on site.",[27,15577,15579],{"id":15578},"_6-record-loads-boxes-and-controls","6. Record loads, boxes and controls",[11,15581,15582],{},"The single-line diagram contains switches, junction and branch boxes, socket outlets, lighting points and fixed machines and appliances (Subsection 3.1.2.2 a). Use the symbols from Table 2.23. Where a sign is missing, define an unambiguous symbol in the legend.",[11,15584,15585],{},"Make visible what matters technically:",[43,15587,15588,15591,15594,15597,15600,15603],{},[46,15589,15590],{},"single or multiple socket outlet;",[46,15592,15593],{},"socket with earth contact, switched or special socket;",[46,15595,15596],{},"lighting point and actual switching function;",[46,15598,15599],{},"push button, relay, motion detector or home-automation control;",[46,15601,15602],{},"permanently connected appliance or ordinary socket load;",[46,15604,15605],{},"junction box or branch box.",[11,15607,15608],{},"A generic appliance symbol with clear text is better than an invented pictogram. Function, reference and connection are what count.",[27,15610,15612],{"id":15611},"_7-draw-sources-and-special-parts","7. Draw sources and special parts",[11,15614,15615],{},"PV installation, inverter, battery, generator and transformer belong in the electrical structure of the single-line diagram; the situation plan shows where they are. For a domestic low-voltage PV installation, the installation file additionally contains operating and maintenance instructions, safety instructions and the technical references and characteristics of the installed equipment such as make, model and power (Section 9.1.2).",[11,15617,15618],{},"A PV arrow next to the main board describes neither the connection point nor the protection chain. Draw which source can feed in, where it connects and which components lie in between. Whether a battery can export to the grid is something you take from the manufacturer documentation rather than guess.",[11,15620,15621],{},"Where safety or critical installations exist, a list and a plan of those installations are added; their sources, circuits and loads are clearly identified on the single-line diagram (Subsection 3.1.2.1 a).",[27,15623,15625],{"id":15624},"_8-keep-the-situation-plan-in-sync","8. Keep the situation plan in sync",[11,15627,15628,15629,15632],{},"Every board, box, socket outlet, luminaire, control, fixed appliance and source on the single-line diagram appears at its location on the situation plan (Subsection 3.1.2.3 a). The reference ",[842,15630,15631],{},"C3"," means the same element in both documents. Switches carry the letter of their circuit and the number of the point they control.",[11,15634,15635],{},"Check in both directions:",[105,15637,15638,15641,15644,15647,15650],{},[46,15639,15640],{},"find every diagram element on the situation plan;",[46,15642,15643],{},"find every plan symbol on the single-line diagram;",[46,15645,15646],{},"compare letter and number;",[46,15648,15649],{},"confirm floor, room and board assignment;",[46,15651,15652],{},"include concealed boxes and outdoor elements.",[11,15654,15655],{},"You do not draw unknown cable routes. The situation plan locates the required components; additional cable or earthing plans are only produced from reliable data.",[27,15657,15659],{"id":15658},"_9-freeze-the-installed-state-before-the-conformity-inspection","9. Freeze the installed state before the conformity inspection",[11,15661,15662],{},"Before it is put into use, the new installation undergoes the conformity inspection (Chapter 6.4). The approved body measures the earth resistance and the insulation level and certifies in its report that the RCDs match the earth resistance, that the overcurrent devices match the circuit sections they protect and that the installation was built according to the single-line diagram and situation plan. It also checks the continuity of bonding and protective conductors (Subsection 6.4.6.4).",[11,15664,15665],{},"Shortly before the appointment, look for real deviations, not typos:",[43,15667,15668,15671,15674,15677,15680,15683],{},[46,15669,15670],{},"Was a different circuit breaker or RCD installed?",[46,15672,15673],{},"Did a cable cross-section or type change?",[46,15675,15676],{},"Was a socket outlet, luminaire or box added?",[46,15678,15679],{},"Was a circuit moved to a different RCD?",[46,15681,15682],{},"Do board labels and references match?",[46,15684,15685],{},"Do all pages belong to the same version?",[11,15687,15688],{},"Correct the installation and the documents together. A technical fault gets fixed, not airbrushed out of the drawing.",[27,15690,15692],{"id":15691},"_10-organise-the-file-and-future-changes","10. Organise the file and future changes",[11,15694,15695],{},"The file of a domestic installation contains the single-line diagram, the situation plan, the conformity inspection reports, any evidence about the equipment and, later, the documents for alterations. The owner keeps the file in two copies and hands it over to a new owner (Section 9.1.2).",[11,15697,15698],{},"After the inspection you keep the diagram up to date. Substantial alterations or extensions require updated diagrams and plans; for a non-substantial one, a short dated and signed description is enough, and the situation plan always shows the current state (Subsection 3.1.2.1 a). Keep the inspected version and every later version traceable.",[27,15700,2551],{"id":2550},[43,15702,15705,15713,15719,15725,15731,15737,15743,15749,15755,15761,15767,15773],{"className":15703},[15704],"contains-task-list",[46,15706,15709,15712],{"className":15707},[15708],"task-list-item",[7009,15710],{"disabled":308,"type":15711},"checkbox"," document number, version, date, address and responsible person complete",[46,15714,15716,15718],{"className":15715},[15708],[7009,15717],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," voltage, type of current and real supply configuration stated",[46,15720,15722,15724],{"className":15721},[15708],[7009,15723],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," all boards and sources included",[46,15726,15728,15730],{"className":15727},[15708],[7009,15729],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," residual current and overcurrent protection with characteristics recorded",[46,15732,15734,15736],{"className":15733},[15708],[7009,15735],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," every final circuit uniquely referenced",[46,15738,15740,15742],{"className":15739},[15708],[7009,15741],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," cable type, cross-section, number of conductors and installation method complete",[46,15744,15746,15748],{"className":15745},[15708],[7009,15747],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," socket outlets, lighting points, boxes, switches and fixed appliances present",[46,15750,15752,15754],{"className":15751},[15708],[7009,15753],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," symbols from Table 2.23 or unambiguously defined in the legend",[46,15756,15758,15760],{"className":15757},[15708],[7009,15759],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," references match the board and the situation plan",[46,15762,15764,15766],{"className":15763},[15708],[7009,15765],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," site changes reflected in both documents",[46,15768,15770,15772],{"className":15769},[15708],[7009,15771],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," additional documents for PV, safety or special installations added",[46,15774,15776,15778],{"className":15775},[15708],[7009,15777],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," design calculations and measurements completed outside the diagram",[27,15780,15782],{"id":15781},"align-design-site-and-commissioning","Align design, site and commissioning",[11,15784,15785],{},"A new build almost always changes between tender and commissioning. Keep an open deviation list: planned reference, executed change, who decided, affected plans and missing evidence. Typical cases are a relocated board, an extra outdoor socket, a different heat pump rating or a PV inverter added late. Only when every line is closed or explicitly marked as not executed does the design diagram become an as-built diagram.",[11,15787,15788],{},"Then walk through the installation with labels and measurement records. Do not switch circuits based on assumed room names. Compare the marking in the board with the reference on the diagram and the point on the situation plan. If conductors, protective devices or settings change during commissioning, the documentation follows; an early PDF export is not a final version.",[27,15790,15792],{"id":15791},"example-a-new-final-circuit-for-the-tumble-dryer","Example: a new final circuit for the tumble dryer",[11,15794,15795],{},"For a permanently connected tumble dryer, “utility room” is not enough. The file shows which board and which protective devices the circuit comes from, which reference it carries, which cable with how many conductors and which cross-section is installed and which appliance sits at the end. Washing machine, tumble dryer and dishwasher each get a dedicated circuit (Subsection 5.2.1.2) and are protected by an RCD of high or very high sensitivity (Subsection 4.2.4.3 b). The same reference appears at the real connection point on the situation plan. Appliance manual, ratings and settings are kept as technical documentation.",[11,15797,15798],{},"Then check the interfaces: is the protective-conductor path traceable? Does the connection method match the drawing? Did a dedicated supply become a shared run on site? Is a branch box missing from the diagram? These questions stop formally complete pages from preserving an outdated design state.",[27,15800,15802],{"id":15801},"hand-over-a-controlled-document-set","Hand over a controlled document set",[11,15804,15805],{},"Identify the final issue clearly with project, address, revision and export date. File the single-line diagram, situation plan, inspection report and technical documents in an ordered dossier. Mark working copies and superseded revisions separately as history. The owner then knows which files are current and that later changes have to be documented again.",[11,15807,955,15808,15813,15814,94],{},[23,15809,15812],{"href":15810,"rel":15811},"https:\u002F\u002Feconomie.fgov.be\u002Ffr\u002Fthemes\u002Fenergie\u002Fsources-et-vecteurs-denergie\u002Felectricite\u002Fsecurite-et-controle-des\u002Fcontrole-des-installations",[4434],"official FPS Economy page on domestic electrical inspections"," lists the minimum plans to present and summarises their content. The detailed requirements are in ",[23,15815,15817],{"href":4466,"rel":15816},[4434],"AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1, version 06",[27,15819,15821],{"id":15820},"preparing-with-planelec","Preparing with PlanElec",[11,15823,15824],{},"PlanElec keeps the floor plan, electrical topology and board data in one project. The single-line diagram and situation plan come from the same model, carry the same references and leave as PDFs or as a compiled installation dossier with cover sheet and document index. The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check tests the supported rules against your project data and shows open points before the inspector finds them.",[11,15826,15827],{},"The roles are clearly split: PlanElec structures and checks the documentation. Supply verification, cable design, site survey and measurements remain the work of the professionals on site, and the approved body carries out the official conformity inspection.",[27,15829,8138],{"id":8137},[43,15831,15832,15837,15842],{},[46,15833,15834],{},[23,15835,15836],{"href":13313},"Coordinate the single-line and situation plans",[46,15838,15839],{},[23,15840,15841],{"href":8166},"Understand AREI electrical symbols",[46,15843,15844],{},[23,15845,15846],{"href":7093},"Prepare for electrical inspection",[11,15848,15849],{},[23,15850,15851],{"href":5046},"Start a new-build project in PlanElec →",[11,15853,15854],{},[7299,15855,15856],{},"Basis: AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 V06, particularly Chapter 2.13, Section 3.1.2, Table 4.11, Subsection 4.2.4.3, Subsection 5.2.1.2, Chapter 6.4 and Section 9.1.2. The official text and the installed system remain decisive.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":15858},[15859,15860,15861,15862,15863,15864,15865,15866,15867,15868,15869,15870,15871,15872,15873,15874,15875,15876],{"id":15293,"depth":291,"text":15294},{"id":15307,"depth":291,"text":15308},{"id":15415,"depth":291,"text":15416},{"id":15445,"depth":291,"text":15446},{"id":15478,"depth":291,"text":15479},{"id":15508,"depth":291,"text":15509},{"id":15541,"depth":291,"text":15542},{"id":15578,"depth":291,"text":15579},{"id":15611,"depth":291,"text":15612},{"id":15624,"depth":291,"text":15625},{"id":15658,"depth":291,"text":15659},{"id":15691,"depth":291,"text":15692},{"id":2550,"depth":291,"text":2551},{"id":15781,"depth":291,"text":15782},{"id":15791,"depth":291,"text":15792},{"id":15801,"depth":291,"text":15802},{"id":15820,"depth":291,"text":15821},{"id":8137,"depth":291,"text":8138},"What a new-build single-line diagram must contain: title block, supply, protective devices, cables, loads, sources and the match with the situation plan under AREI Book 1 V06.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fnew-build-single-line-checklist.en",{"title":15287,"description":15877},"New Build Single-Line Diagram: AREI Checklist","new-build-single-line-diagram-checklist","blog\u002Fnew-build-single-line-checklist.en",[1979,1980,15885,319,15886,8203,15887,2981],"new build","checklist","conformity inspection","4420yysc3fGllWJUtRuqrZ9YfzMhnXlPbKBPkQIcdeY",{"id":15890,"title":15891,"articleId":15892,"body":15893,"category":6215,"date":14815,"description":16328,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":16329,"navigation":308,"path":16330,"publishDate":14815,"readTime":14199,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":16331,"seoTitle":16332,"slug":16333,"stem":16334,"tags":16335,"__hash__":16340},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fpv-ev-charger-single-line-diagram.en.md","Combining Solar PV and an EV Charger on a Single-Line Diagram","pv-ev-charger-single-line-diagram",{"type":8,"value":15894,"toc":16311},[15895,15901,15904,15908,15916,15977,15988,15992,15995,16015,16018,16022,16025,16031,16034,16038,16041,16064,16070,16074,16077,16080,16103,16109,16113,16116,16133,16136,16140,16143,16149,16152,16169,16172,16176,16179,16182,16186,16189,16192,16212,16216,16219,16222,16226,16229,16232,16235,16239,16242,16245,16262,16265,16269,16272,16275,16278,16282,16287,16291,16308],[11,15896,15897,15900],{},[35,15898,15899],{},"On a single-line diagram, solar PV and an EV charger are two separate branches of the same distribution board."," The inverter feeds in on its AC side; a normal charger draws energy through its own final circuit. An energy manager measures and controls both, but never puts them in series. That is how you draw them: two outgoing ways, clear power-flow directions, protection in the right place and load management shown as control.",[11,15902,15903],{},"A strong combined diagram shows sources, possible current directions, protection boundaries and measuring points. Anything only the design calculation, the manufacturer or the network operator can confirm, you document as evidence first and enter afterwards.",[27,15905,15907],{"id":15906},"continue-the-example-add-ev1-to-db1","Continue the example: add EV1 to DB1",[11,15909,15910,15911,15915],{},"In the shared fictional job from the ",[23,15912,15914],{"href":15913},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fpv-system-diagram","PV guide",", S1 and S2 remain connected to DB1 through INV1. EV1 is a new unidirectional charging point at the parking space. Trace its branch to the actual connection in DB1; EV1 is not in series with INV1. The names explain the case without prescribing mandatory references.",[638,15917,15918,15931],{},[641,15919,15920],{},[644,15921,15922,15925,15928],{},[647,15923,15924],{},"Job addition",[647,15926,15927],{},"Evidence to check",[647,15929,15930],{},"Effect on the documents",[657,15932,15933,15944,15955,15966],{},[644,15934,15935,15938,15941],{},[662,15936,15937],{},"EV1 and supply cable",[662,15939,15940],{},"Manual, survey and sizing",[662,15942,15943],{},"Dedicated branch, cable and location",[644,15945,15946,15949,15952],{},[662,15947,15948],{},"Associated protection",[662,15950,15951],{},"Design and proof of integrated\u002Fexternal devices",[662,15953,15954],{},"Actual functions without double counting",[644,15956,15957,15960,15963],{},[662,15958,15959],{},"Metering or load control",[662,15961,15962],{},"Measuring point, phases and manufacturer setup",[662,15964,15965],{},"Control kept separate from power paths",[644,15967,15968,15971,15974],{},[662,15969,15970],{},"DB1 with PV and charger",[662,15972,15973],{},"Revised current and protection assessment",[662,15975,15976],{},"Shared board revision updated",[11,15978,955,15979,15983,15984,15987],{},[23,15980,15982],{"href":15981},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fsolar-pv-situation-plan","PV situation plan"," locates the same references. Use the ",[23,15985,15986],{"href":287},"installation planning guide"," to review the entered electrical connections in the model. You prove conductor and equipment current capacity with sizing and datasheets, not with a value shown by load management.",[27,15989,15991],{"id":15990},"inventory-three-related-systems","Inventory three related systems",[11,15993,15994],{},"Separate these levels first:",[105,15996,15997,16003,16009],{},[46,15998,15999,16002],{},[35,16000,16001],{},"Grid and main distribution:"," connection, meter, main protection, earthing and relevant boards.",[46,16004,16005,16008],{},[35,16006,16007],{},"PV generation:"," modules or strings, DC components, inverter, AC protection and point of connection.",[46,16010,16011,16014],{},[35,16012,16013],{},"Charging load:"," dedicated circuit, overcurrent protection, residual current device (RCD), cable, connection point and any load control.",[11,16016,16017],{},"If the manufacturer specifies a different approved system concept, such as a bidirectional charger or an integrated hybrid unit, you draw exactly that topology. Model, firmware and system documentation then go into the dossier.",[27,16019,16021],{"id":16020},"a-typical-common-ac-topology","A typical common AC topology",[11,16023,16024],{},"A conventional installation looks like this in simplified form:",[14892,16026,16029],{"className":16027,"code":16028,"language":14897,"meta":290},[14895],"Distribution grid ↔ meter ↔ main board\n                             ├─ PV AC branch ↔ AC protection ↔ inverter ↔ PV DC side\n                             └─ charging branch → protection → cable → charger → vehicle\n                                              └─ metering\u002Fload control, if installed\n",[842,16030,16028],{"__ignoreMap":290},[11,16032,16033],{},"The two-way arrow shows a possible energy direction; the protection details still sit at the device. A unidirectional wallbox is a load branch, and it stays one even when its software offers “solar surplus charging”. Do not draw it as a generator.",[27,16035,16037],{"id":16036},"document-the-pv-branch-completely","Document the PV branch completely",[11,16039,16040],{},"For household low-voltage PV installations up to 10 kVA, Chapter 7.112 of AREI Book 1 V06 adds specific measures to the general rules: marking of DC conductors and live AC conductors, warning signs (“Do not disconnect under load”, “Electrical installation always live”) and earthing of the module frames unless the manufacturer forbids it (Section 7.112.2). Make the installed chain traceable:",[43,16042,16043,16046,16049,16052,16055,16058,16061],{},[46,16044,16045],{},"PV generator and relevant string or module arrangement;",[46,16047,16048],{},"DC cables, polarity and cross-section;",[46,16050,16051],{},"DC isolation and protection when installed or integrated;",[46,16053,16054],{},"exact inverter model and maximum AC output;",[46,16056,16057],{},"AC cable, overcurrent protection, RCD and other designed protection;",[46,16059,16060],{},"precise connection point in the board;",[46,16062,16063],{},"associated warnings and identification.",[11,16065,955,16066,16069],{},[23,16067,16068],{"href":15913},"PV system diagram guide"," covers this branch in more detail. Enter the manufacturer's actual data rather than a generic “PV protection” box.",[27,16071,16073],{"id":16072},"keep-the-charger-on-its-dedicated-circuit","Keep the charger on its dedicated circuit",[11,16075,16076],{},"AREI 7.22.3 requires a dedicated circuit for every connection point of a charging station, and connecting a charging station to the fixed installation through a plug and socket is prohibited. Where protection relies on automatic disconnection, 7.22.4.1 b requires each dedicated AC circuit to be protected individually by an RCD of no more than 30 mA. Protection must also keep working during insulation faults with a disturbing DC component: either through an RCD built for that purpose or through an RCD coordinated with a residual direct current detection device that takes the charger out of service. Under 7.22.4.2, each dedicated circuit also has its own overcurrent protection. These devices may sit in the board, in the charger or in a combination of both.",[11,16078,16079],{},"Show at least:",[43,16081,16082,16085,16088,16091,16094,16097,16100],{},[46,16083,16084],{},"circuit reference and phases;",[46,16086,16087],{},"overcurrent device, number of poles and rated current;",[46,16089,16090],{},"RCD type, rated residual current and any coordinated DC detection;",[46,16092,16093],{},"cable type, number of conductors and cross-section;",[46,16095,16096],{},"charger and number of connection points;",[46,16098,16099],{},"rated power or maximum charging current;",[46,16101,16102],{},"fixed control, metering or switching components.",[11,16104,16105,16106,16108],{},"If the charger is installed outdoors, 7.22.5.1 requires at least IP44 for the equipment. The acceptable combination follows from AREI, product standards and the exact manual together. ",[23,16107,14993],{"href":7208}," gives you the background; approval of the specific charger comes from its documentation.",[27,16110,16112],{"id":16111},"put-energy-management-in-the-right-place","Put energy management in the right place",[11,16114,16115],{},"Solar surplus charging or import limitation needs measurement and control. A system can include an energy meter, current transformers, controller, data link and controllable charger. Place the electrically relevant fixed parts where they are actually connected:",[43,16117,16118,16121,16124,16127,16130],{},[46,16119,16120],{},"measuring point at the supply or relevant board;",[46,16122,16123],{},"current transformers with correct phase and direction;",[46,16125,16126],{},"controller supply;",[46,16128,16129],{},"contactor or control contact if it performs electrical switching or enabling;",[46,16131,16132],{},"data link only as far as needed to explain the function.",[11,16134,16135],{},"A dashed line separates communication from power conductors; define it in the legend. “100% solar” does not belong on the diagram: production, building load, vehicle demand and control strategy change constantly.",[27,16137,16139],{"id":16138},"phases-and-power-balance","Phases and power balance",[11,16141,16142],{},"Draw the real phase allocation of inverter and charger. A single-phase inverter and a three-phase charger do not become one branch because a meter nets their energy. A software current limit controls operation; cable sizing and overcurrent protection are still proven separately.",[11,16144,955,16145,16148],{},[23,16146,16147],{"href":8687},"cable cross-section and breaker relationship"," is therefore established fully and separately for the PV and charging branches.",[11,16150,16151],{},"The design review checks, among other things:",[43,16153,16154,16157,16160,16163,16166],{},[46,16155,16156],{},"supply capacity and permissible phase loading;",[46,16158,16159],{},"simultaneous generation and demand;",[46,16161,16162],{},"busbar and upstream device loading for every possible current direction;",[46,16164,16165],{},"short-circuit, selectivity and voltage-drop conditions;",[46,16167,16168],{},"measuring ranges and manufacturer limits of the control system.",[11,16170,16171],{},"The diagram records the chosen result; it is not the calculation itself.",[27,16173,16175],{"id":16174},"treat-bidirectional-charging-separately","Treat bidirectional charging separately",[11,16177,16178],{},"If the charger can export energy from the vehicle to the installation or grid, it is no longer only a load. AREI 7.22.5.4 then requires compliance with the rules for distributed generation units – protection against electric shock, overcurrent protection and safety disconnection – and the warning “Caution: possible feedback of electrical energy into the installation” on the charger and on the boards that supply it. Synergrid states that bidirectional, or technically bidirectional-capable, charging infrastructure falls under C10\u002F11 and C10\u002F26 approval; purely unidirectional chargers do not.",[11,16180,16181],{},"Show directions, isolation and protection functions exactly according to the approved system concept. A normal wallbox diagram does not fit Vehicle-to-Home or Vehicle-to-Grid.",[27,16183,16185],{"id":16184},"situation-plan-and-dossier","Situation plan and dossier",[11,16187,16188],{},"Locate modules, inverter, relevant isolators, boards, fixed metering, charger and associated parking space. Repeat the circuit references from the single-line diagram. Datasheets, declarations, settings and later changes belong in the installation dossier.",[11,16190,16191],{},"Your final review confirms:",[43,16193,16194,16197,16200,16203,16206,16209],{},[46,16195,16196],{},"the diagram, board labels and as-built installation agree;",[46,16198,16199],{},"both branches can be traced to their common point;",[46,16201,16202],{},"every energy-flow arrow points the right way;",[46,16204,16205],{},"protection sits on the correct side without fictitious duplicates;",[46,16207,16208],{},"load management is shown as control, never as protection;",[46,16210,16211],{},"the charging function is clearly identified as unidirectional or bidirectional.",[27,16213,16215],{"id":16214},"carry-later-changes-through-the-whole-system","Carry later changes through the whole system",[11,16217,16218],{},"Combined systems often change after first handover: a different inverter, more panels, a second charging connector, a home battery or a new metering method. Update more than the device name; follow every affected branch back to the common board.",[11,16220,16221],{},"Record the added source or point, new AC values and possible directions, revised protection, sensor position and phases, cables, board ways and labels. A software limit always travels with the device version and stored settings. A battery or bidirectional vehicle is not an invisible app feature: as soon as energy from another source can reach the fixed installation, source, isolation, protection and warnings are in the technical documentation. Archive the old drawing and identify the current revision unambiguously.",[27,16223,16225],{"id":16224},"worked-case-adding-a-second-charging-point-to-existing-pv","Worked case: adding a second charging point to existing PV",[11,16227,16228],{},"A building already has a PV inverter and a unidirectional wallbox; now a second connection point is added. Do not just copy the first symbol. Establish whether this is another device, one station with two connection points or a different manufacturer architecture, and where overcurrent protection and RCD actually sit. AREI 7.22.4.2 allows shared overcurrent protection for several connection points that are not used simultaneously, provided each point keeps the required protection – for example when the rated current of the shared device does not exceed the lowest rated current of the connection points. That exception covers overcurrent protection only; it does not cover shared RCDs or cables.",[11,16230,16231],{},"Then update supply capacity, phase allocation and load management. The points may share the available power dynamically, but the drawing still identifies each one, its real electrical subdivision and its maximum permitted load. Current sensors match the measured conductors and direction. You prove the as-built wiring with the survey and device documentation, not with a software screen showing two parking bays.",[11,16233,16234],{},"Review the PV branch as well. If only demand changes, modules and inverter stay the same, but the common board and possible current directions may need reassessment. Adding a hybrid inverter or battery at the same time introduces another source or operating mode with its own protection, isolation and documentation logic.",[27,16236,16238],{"id":16237},"build-an-evidence-chain-for-commissioning","Build an evidence chain for commissioning",[11,16240,16241],{},"Link every important boundary on the diagram to evidence: rating plate or datasheet for power values, manufacturer architecture for integrated protection, test records for the completed installation and a configuration export for relevant limits. Mark assumptions as open. An RCD type or DC detection is shown as installed only once device and installation confirm it.",[11,16243,16244],{},"During the final review, walk through several energy states:",[105,16246,16247,16250,16253,16256,16259],{},[46,16248,16249],{},"charging at night without PV generation;",[46,16251,16252],{},"PV generation with low building demand;",[46,16254,16255],{},"PV and vehicle against a dynamic import limit;",[46,16257,16258],{},"loss of load-management metering or communication;",[46,16260,16261],{},"for bidirectional equipment, energy returning from the vehicle.",[11,16263,16264],{},"For each state, path, limit, protection and fail-safe behaviour follow from the design and manufacturer concept. The single-line diagram does not show every software decision, but it shows every electrically relevant component and every possible source direction.",[27,16266,16268],{"id":16267},"keep-grid-and-product-approvals-distinct","Keep grid and product approvals distinct",[11,16270,16271],{},"AREI documentation, Synergrid type approval and the distribution system operator's procedure answer different questions. A well-designed protection concept does not prove C10\u002F26 listing; a listed product does not prove correct installation in this building. Synergrid currently states that purely unidirectional chargers do not need C10\u002F26 approval because of C10\u002F11 ed.2.4; other technical or grid conditions may still apply.",[11,16273,16274],{},"Keep model, firmware, uni- or bidirectional capability, network-operator correspondence and actual commissioning settings with the drawing revision. That shows which technical state an approval or inspection relied on.",[11,16276,16277],{},"Label the PV and charging ways in the board with the same references as the drawing. Where reverse power flow is possible, the required warning signs go on the locations actually affected; a note in the app is not enough. Before handover, compare every label, circuit reference, device type and energy direction with the final diagram.",[27,16279,16281],{"id":16280},"building-the-documents-in-planelec","Building the documents in PlanElec",[11,16283,222,16284,16286],{},[23,16285,3710],{"href":15238},", you record the PV and charging branches in one project model: strings per MPPT, inverter, AC isolation point and source protection on one side, the wallbox on its own circuit on the other. The single-line diagram and situation plan come from the same data and export as PDFs. The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check flags, among other things, a wallbox without its own circuit, without a 30 mA RCD or without suitable protection against DC fault currents, and it shows unassigned strings. The roles are clear: the self-check shows you findings within the supported rules; protection coordination and grid permission are settled through your design and the network operator, and the official inspection is carried out by an approved inspection body.",[27,16288,16290],{"id":16289},"official-sources","Official sources",[43,16292,16293,16300],{},[46,16294,16295,16299],{},[23,16296,16298],{"href":4466,"rel":16297},[4434],"AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 from the FPS Economy",": Chapters 7.22 and 7.112 and Parts 3 and 9, reviewed at V06.",[46,16301,16302,16307],{},[23,16303,16306],{"href":16304,"rel":16305},"https:\u002F\u002Fwww.synergrid.be\u002Ffr\u002Fhomologation\u002Felectricite\u002Funites-de-production-decentralisee",[4434],"Synergrid: decentralised generation unit approval",": C10\u002F11 ed.2.4, C10\u002F26 and the distinction for bidirectional charging.",[11,16309,16310],{},"Technical review: 5 October 2026. Check current connection conditions with the network operator and manufacturer versions before execution.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":16312},[16313,16314,16315,16316,16317,16318,16319,16320,16321,16322,16323,16324,16325,16326,16327],{"id":15906,"depth":291,"text":15907},{"id":15990,"depth":291,"text":15991},{"id":16020,"depth":291,"text":16021},{"id":16036,"depth":291,"text":16037},{"id":16072,"depth":291,"text":16073},{"id":16111,"depth":291,"text":16112},{"id":16138,"depth":291,"text":16139},{"id":16174,"depth":291,"text":16175},{"id":16184,"depth":291,"text":16185},{"id":16214,"depth":291,"text":16215},{"id":16224,"depth":291,"text":16225},{"id":16237,"depth":291,"text":16238},{"id":16267,"depth":291,"text":16268},{"id":16280,"depth":291,"text":16281},{"id":16289,"depth":291,"text":16290},"Draw the PV inverter, EV charger, dedicated circuits, protection, energy metering and possible reverse power flow correctly on one shared single-line diagram.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fpv-ev-charger-single-line-diagram.en",{"title":15891,"description":16328},"Solar PV and EV Charger on One Single-Line Diagram","solar-pv-ev-charger-single-line-diagram","blog\u002Fpv-ev-charger-single-line-diagram.en",[16336,16337,3075,1979,16338,16339,2981],"Solar PV","EV charger","Load management","Reverse power flow","Dgsq4njAWm-mV0M98V_XcDV6N4RZ6aFaQcLFFlbroRA",{"id":16342,"title":16343,"articleId":16344,"body":16345,"category":6215,"date":14815,"description":16783,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":16784,"navigation":308,"path":16785,"publishDate":14815,"readTime":15276,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":16786,"seoTitle":16787,"slug":16788,"stem":16789,"tags":16790,"__hash__":16794},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fpv-situation-plan.en.md","Drawing Solar PV on a Situation Plan: Modules, Inverter and Cable Routes","pv-situation-plan",{"type":8,"value":16346,"toc":16760},[16347,16353,16356,16360,16367,16431,16437,16441,16444,16467,16470,16474,16477,16494,16501,16505,16508,16525,16528,16532,16535,16538,16544,16547,16551,16554,16571,16576,16580,16583,16585,16599,16604,16608,16612,16615,16619,16622,16626,16629,16633,16636,16640,16643,16663,16666,16670,16690,16694,16697,16700,16704,16707,16710,16713,16717,16720,16723,16727,16730,16733,16736,16742,16746,16751,16753],[11,16348,16349,16352],{},[35,16350,16351],{},"On the situation plan you draw where the fixed parts of the PV system actually are: module fields, inverter, fixed isolators, the board with the PV way and the cable routes in between."," AREI 3.1.2.3 a requires the situation plan to show the location of the sources – explicitly solar panel, inverter and battery – that appear on the single-line diagram. The single-line diagram explains the electrical chain; the situation plan makes it findable on site. For maintenance, alteration or inspection, a reader needs to see which roof face holds the modules, where the inverter is mounted and how the installation reaches the board.",[11,16354,16355],{},"The situation plan is neither a roof-structure design nor a duplicate DC schematic. It complements the single-line diagram without repeating all of its electrical detail.",[27,16357,16359],{"id":16358},"shared-example-job-db1-inv1-s1-and-s2","Shared example job: DB1, INV1, S1 and S2",[11,16361,16362,16363,16366],{},"The fictional job in the ",[23,16364,16365],{"href":15913},"PV documentation guide"," uses DB1 for the main board, INV1 in the technical room and S1\u002FS2 for the strings on the east and west roofs. These are editorial references, not an exported example project. For your job, use the actual designations.",[638,16368,16369,16381],{},[641,16370,16371],{},[644,16372,16373,16375,16378],{},[647,16374,9490],{},[647,16376,16377],{},"Find on the situation plan",[647,16379,16380],{},"Compare with the single-line diagram",[657,16382,16383,16394,16405,16416],{},[644,16384,16385,16388,16391],{},[662,16386,16387],{},"S1 \u002F S2",[662,16389,16390],{},"Roof slope and documented building entry",[662,16392,16393],{},"Confirmed string and MPPT1 \u002F MPPT2 input",[644,16395,16396,16399,16402],{},[662,16397,16398],{},"INV1",[662,16400,16401],{},"Actual mounting location in the technical room",[662,16403,16404],{},"Model reference and DC\u002FAC connections",[644,16406,16407,16410,16413],{},[662,16408,16409],{},"DB1",[662,16411,16412],{},"Main board at an unambiguous location",[662,16414,16415],{},"PV branch connection point",[644,16417,16418,16421,16424],{},[662,16419,16420],{},"EV1, later extension",[662,16422,16423],{},"Charging point at the parking space",[662,16425,16426,16427],{},"Separate branch in the ",[23,16428,16430],{"href":16429},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fsolar-pv-ev-charger-single-line-diagram","combined guide",[11,16432,16433,16434,16436],{},"An unsurveyed cable segment goes on the work list as an open item instead of getting a falsely precise route. Before handover, the contractor matches these references on the installation and both drawings. The ",[23,16435,15986],{"href":287}," explains assignment and the derived diagram; the on-site spatial survey comes from the professional.",[27,16438,16440],{"id":16439},"start-from-an-as-built-survey","Start from an as-built survey",[11,16442,16443],{},"Work from a recognisable plan with storeys, rooms, access points and important external areas. For a roof array, a roof plan or an extra elevation helps. Verify on site:",[43,16445,16446,16449,16452,16455,16458,16461,16464],{},[46,16447,16448],{},"actual module fields and orientation;",[46,16450,16451],{},"central inverters or microinverters;",[46,16453,16454],{},"fixed DC and AC isolation points where installed;",[46,16456,16457],{},"main or sub-distribution board receiving the PV connection;",[46,16459,16460],{},"fixed penetrations and important cable routes;",[46,16462,16463],{},"meter cabinet where needed to explain the connection;",[46,16465,16466],{},"battery, backup switching or another source included in the system.",[11,16468,16469],{},"Do not copy the quotation drawing without checking it. Module layout, inverter location and cable route frequently change during installation.",[27,16471,16473],{"id":16472},"what-to-show-on-the-roof","What to show on the roof",[11,16475,16476],{},"Make the module field unambiguous. Depending on scale, show:",[43,16478,16479,16482,16485,16488,16491],{},[46,16480,16481],{},"individual modules or clearly bounded module groups;",[46,16483,16484],{},"the relevant roof pitch, outbuilding, façade or ground area;",[46,16486,16487],{},"string references where they connect the plan to the single-line diagram;",[46,16489,16490],{},"fixed DC combiner or switching boxes;",[46,16492,16493],{},"useful roof edges, access points or fire compartments where they explain electrical location.",[11,16495,16496,16497,16500],{},"Every connector beneath every module does not belong on the situation plan. String arrangement, polarity, conductor data and the protection chain sit on the ",[23,16498,16499],{"href":15913},"PV single-line diagram",". You use identical string and equipment identifiers on both documents.",[27,16502,16504],{"id":16503},"locate-the-inverter-precisely","Locate the inverter precisely",[11,16506,16507],{},"Mark the actual mounting position and distinguish where relevant:",[43,16509,16510,16513,16516,16519,16522],{},[46,16511,16512],{},"central string inverter;",[46,16514,16515],{},"multiple inverters;",[46,16517,16518],{},"microinverters at the modules;",[46,16520,16521],{},"hybrid inverter and separate battery;",[46,16523,16524],{},"associated fixed isolation or switching devices.",[11,16526,16527],{},"A label saying only “garage” is often too vague in a large space. Put the symbol at the correct wall or technical zone. For outdoor equipment, identify the façade clearly.",[27,16529,16531],{"id":16530},"draw-useful-cable-routes","Draw useful cable routes",[11,16533,16534],{},"A serviceable plan shows how the fixed route runs from module field to inverter and onward to the board. Above all, include building penetrations, risers, ducts and changes of level that will later be concealed.",[11,16536,16537],{},"You distinguish DC and AC routes by line style or text, not colour alone, so that a black-and-white print stays readable:",[14892,16539,16542],{"className":16540,"code":16541,"language":14897,"meta":290},[14895],"PV-DC  ─ ─ ─  DC route from the module field\nPV-AC  ─────  AC route to the distribution board\nDATA   ·····  fixed metering or communication route\n",[842,16543,16541],{"__ignoreMap":290},[11,16545,16546],{},"Define each line in the legend. It does not state cable type or installation method; those data stay with the circuit on the single-line diagram.",[27,16548,16550],{"id":16549},"symbols-and-project-legend","Symbols and project legend",[11,16552,16553],{},"Table 2.23 of AREI Book 1 V06 is explicitly a non-exhaustive symbol list. Where it has no suitable symbol, 3.1.2.1 a allows any other clearly identifiable symbol defined in the legend of the single-line diagrams and situation plans. Ensure:",[43,16555,16556,16559,16562,16565,16568],{},[46,16557,16558],{},"sufficient size in the final PDF;",[46,16560,16561],{},"different form or text for inverter and battery;",[46,16563,16564],{},"stable references across pages;",[46,16566,16567],{},"meaning that does not rely only on colour;",[46,16569,16570],{},"clear distinction between electrical equipment and building objects.",[11,16572,955,16573,16575],{},[23,16574,15031],{"href":8166}," explains the legend rule in more detail.",[27,16577,16579],{"id":16578},"share-references-with-the-single-line-diagram","Share references with the single-line diagram",[11,16581,16582],{},"AREI 3.1.2.1 a sets one referencing logic for both plans: on the situation plan, items carry the letter of their circuit and the sequence number from the single-line diagram. The inverter AC branch therefore carries the same identifier on the situation plan and the single-line diagram. String and equipment references used on both also agree.",[11,16584,15635],{},[105,16586,16587,16590,16593,16596],{},[46,16588,16589],{},"Every fixed PV item on the situation plan can be found on the single-line diagram or in its legend.",[46,16591,16592],{},"Every spatially relevant PV component on the single-line diagram has a discoverable position.",[46,16594,16595],{},"Board and storey names match.",[46,16597,16598],{},"Address, date and document revision are the same.",[11,16600,232,16601,16603],{},[23,16602,13918],{"href":13313}," for their separate roles.",[27,16605,16607],{"id":16606},"special-configurations","Special configurations",[385,16609,16611],{"id":16610},"microinverters","Microinverters",[11,16613,16614],{},"For many identical units, a grouped symbol with quantity, type and related modules is clearer than overlapping marks. The electrical parallel connection stays visible on the single-line diagram.",[385,16616,16618],{"id":16617},"home-battery","Home battery",[11,16620,16621],{},"Locate the battery, inverter, fixed isolation and any backup board. A battery is not a PV module and gets its own symbol. Location constraints come from design and manufacturer information; the plan records the installed position.",[385,16623,16625],{"id":16624},"outbuilding-or-ground-array","Outbuilding or ground array",[11,16627,16628],{},"Show the route between buildings, the entry point and the sub-boards involved. An arrow marked “to house” without a precise destination makes every later job harder.",[385,16630,16632],{"id":16631},"existing-installation","Existing installation",[11,16634,16635],{},"AREI 8.2.2 point 7 allows existing household PV installations up to 10 kVA that fall under that existing-installation regime to rely on a written description, possibly supplemented by photographs, instead of a situation plan under 3.1.2.3 a. The derogation does not apply to new construction or significant alterations; there, you draw an up-to-date situation plan. Whether a particular existing installation qualifies is for the professional to establish.",[27,16637,16639],{"id":16638},"dossier-and-photographs","Dossier and photographs",[11,16641,16642],{},"Photographs help document concealed routes, roofs and equipment labels; the structured electrical plans remain the basis. Retain:",[43,16644,16645,16648,16651,16654,16657,16660],{},[46,16646,16647],{},"final situation plan and single-line diagram;",[46,16649,16650],{},"module and inverter data;",[46,16652,16653],{},"available string and measurement records;",[46,16655,16656],{},"manuals and equipment declarations;",[46,16658,16659],{},"reports from the approved inspection body;",[46,16661,16662],{},"later changes under a new revision.",[11,16664,16665],{},"The owner keeps the dossier available and has it updated after alterations. For PV up to 10 kVA, 7.112.2 explicitly requires the items listed in Section 9.1.2 to be available for consultation by anyone concerned.",[27,16667,16669],{"id":16668},"pre-export-check","Pre-export check",[43,16671,16672,16675,16678,16681,16684,16687],{},[46,16673,16674],{},"Are module fields, inverters and fixed auxiliary devices at their actual locations?",[46,16676,16677],{},"Are DC and AC routes distinguishable and explained in the legend?",[46,16679,16680],{},"Do circuit, string and board references match the single-line diagram?",[46,16682,16683],{},"Are symbols and labels legible at the intended print size?",[46,16685,16686],{},"Does the plan show as-built conditions rather than the original offer?",[46,16688,16689],{},"Do both plans carry the same address, date and revision?",[27,16691,16693],{"id":16692},"organising-a-multi-sheet-plan","Organising a multi-sheet plan",[11,16695,16696],{},"If the roof, technical room and boards cannot fit legibly on one sheet, use named views. An overview connects the building, roof areas and distribution boards, while detail sheets enlarge arrays and equipment zones. Number every sheet and use explicit continuation notes such as “PV-DC continues on sheet LP02”.",[11,16698,16699],{},"Keep enough orientation on each view: storey, room, north arrow or recognisable façade. One equipment identifier appears at several positions only if several devices really exist. A reference table links symbol, equipment ID, circuit and sheet. A large installation stays traceable without shrinking labels or drawing long ambiguous lines across the page.",[27,16701,16703],{"id":16702},"worked-case-two-roof-faces-and-one-inverter-in-a-plant-room","Worked case: two roof faces and one inverter in a plant room",[11,16705,16706],{},"A house has modules on east- and west-facing roofs, two DC strings and one inverter in the plant room. Show two identified array areas rather than one icon at the centre of the roof. State which string reference belongs to each face and where its DC conductors enter the building. A shared route to the plant room is drawn only where the installed cables really share it.",[11,16708,16709],{},"Give the inverter a stable equipment reference and its actual wall position. If DC isolation, surge protection or other fixed equipment is external, locate it too and link its identifier to the single-line diagram. Integrated functions stay with the equipment record; you do not invent separate boxes. The AC route ends at the correct board and circuit; a line aimed merely at the nearest room adds no traceability.",[11,16711,16712],{},"Check the orientation of each roof detail. Roof face, eaves, ridge, north direction and recognisable building edges let a person find the array and entry point on site. The situation plan is not a mounting drawing showing every hook, but it shows every difference that matters for electrical assignment, safe work and later fault finding.",[27,16714,16716],{"id":16715},"survey-concealed-or-inaccessible-routes-honestly","Survey concealed or inaccessible routes honestly",[11,16718,16719],{},"Where an existing installation hides a route, you do not draw a geometrically precise one either. Mark the section as concealed or derived from retained documentation and keep the source of that information. Photographs of entries, labels, penetrations and the plant room narrow the uncertainty. A dashed line has that meaning only when the legend defines it.",[11,16721,16722],{},"Separate three evidence states: observed on site, supported by reliable technical records and still unresolved. Open items belong on the work list, not as confident lines on the final drawing. Before inspection, the responsible professional decides whether more surveying or access is required.",[27,16724,16726],{"id":16725},"carry-roof-alterations-through-the-documents","Carry roof alterations through the documents",[11,16728,16729],{},"After replacing modules, extending an array or changing an inverter, you review more than the roof outline. Update array and string identifiers, cable route, entry point, equipment location, DC and AC references and supporting technical records. Even where modules are replaced within an existing string, record the actual installed quantity and rating – exactly the data that 7.112.4 also lists for the inspection report. If strings are rearranged, the single-line diagram and situation plan carry the same new state.",[11,16731,16732],{},"Archive the superseded edition separately with its date. That makes clear whether a photograph or inspection report concerns the old or the current arrangement. An inverter cloud portal provides production data; the spatial survey and plan revision remain your job.",[11,16734,16735],{},"Check the final edition at the intended print size. A new array does not cover existing references, and a new cable route does not look like a building edge. Move detail frames deliberately, update the sheet index and check every continuation note. An extended roof installation then stays understandable on site without zooming or access to the editing file.",[11,16737,955,16738,16741],{},[23,16739,15812],{"href":15810,"rel":16740},[4434]," explicitly includes energy sources on both diagrams and PV technical documentation in the dossier. The required detail follows the installation and the current official Book 1 V06, not a generic roof template.",[27,16743,16745],{"id":16744},"creating-the-plan-in-planelec","Creating the plan in PlanElec",[11,16747,2599,16748,16750],{},[23,16749,3710],{"href":15238},", you place PV components on the situation plan, record their electrical structure on the single-line diagram and export both as PDFs. A module symbol stands for a complete string and is assigned to exactly one string of the linked inverter; the self-check reports missing, duplicate and invalid string links. Both plans use the same project data, so references do not drift apart. The roles are clear: the AREI\u002FRGIE self-check shows you findings within the supported rules, the comparison with the installation happens on site, and the official inspection is done by the approved inspection body.",[27,16752,15243],{"id":15242},[11,16754,16755,16756,16759],{},"The basis is the official ",[23,16757,15250],{"href":4466,"rel":16758},[4434],": Table 2.23, Part 3 (3.1.2.1 and 3.1.2.3), Chapter 7.112, the narrow existing-installation derogation in Part 8 (8.2.2 point 7) and the dossier requirements in Part 9. Reviewed against V06 on 5 October 2026.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":16761},[16762,16763,16764,16765,16766,16767,16768,16769,16775,16776,16777,16778,16779,16780,16781,16782],{"id":16358,"depth":291,"text":16359},{"id":16439,"depth":291,"text":16440},{"id":16472,"depth":291,"text":16473},{"id":16503,"depth":291,"text":16504},{"id":16530,"depth":291,"text":16531},{"id":16549,"depth":291,"text":16550},{"id":16578,"depth":291,"text":16579},{"id":16606,"depth":291,"text":16607,"children":16770},[16771,16772,16773,16774],{"id":16610,"depth":599,"text":16611},{"id":16617,"depth":599,"text":16618},{"id":16624,"depth":599,"text":16625},{"id":16631,"depth":599,"text":16632},{"id":16638,"depth":291,"text":16639},{"id":16668,"depth":291,"text":16669},{"id":16692,"depth":291,"text":16693},{"id":16702,"depth":291,"text":16703},{"id":16715,"depth":291,"text":16716},{"id":16725,"depth":291,"text":16726},{"id":16744,"depth":291,"text":16745},{"id":15242,"depth":291,"text":15243},"Locate PV modules, inverter, fixed isolators, distribution boards and cable routes on the situation plan, using the same references as the single-line diagram.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fpv-situation-plan.en",{"title":16343,"description":16783},"Solar PV on a Situation Plan: Modules, Inverter, Routes","solar-pv-situation-plan","blog\u002Fpv-situation-plan.en",[16336,3892,16791,16792,1979,16793,2981],"PV modules","Inverter","Cable route","MvrIwskFqUrhZpwwvsmKzebtq3tGF5HnVgfKVGvkXRs",{"id":16796,"title":16797,"articleId":16798,"body":16799,"category":5101,"date":14815,"description":17291,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":17292,"navigation":308,"path":17293,"publishDate":14815,"readTime":610,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":17294,"seoTitle":17295,"slug":17296,"stem":17297,"tags":17298,"__hash__":17300},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fsingle-line-vs-situation-plan.en.md","Single-Line Diagram vs. Situation Plan: Difference and Coordination","single-line-vs-situation-plan",{"type":8,"value":16800,"toc":17275},[16801,16805,16811,16814,16818,16906,16910,16913,16916,16920,16923,16949,16952,16955,16959,16962,16978,16981,16984,16988,17011,17021,17025,17028,17051,17054,17058,17061,17064,17067,17071,17140,17144,17147,17150,17153,17156,17160,17163,17187,17190,17207,17211,17222,17225,17231,17235,17238,17241,17243,17265,17270],[27,16802,16804],{"id":16803},"the-difference-in-one-sentence","The difference in one sentence",[11,16806,16807,16810],{},[35,16808,16809],{},"The single-line diagram shows how supply, protective devices, cables and loads are connected electrically; the situation plan, called a position plan in the regulation, shows where that equipment is located in the building."," The same circuit letter and sequence number link the electrical path to the real room.",[11,16812,16813],{},"For a new domestic installation and for substantial modifications or extensions, you need both documents (AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 V06, Subsection 3.1.2.1 a). They do not replace each other: a floor plan does not specify RCDs, breakers or conductor data, and an electrical tree does not locate the socket beside a particular door.",[27,16815,16817],{"id":16816},"both-documents-at-a-glance","Both documents at a glance",[638,16819,16820,16831],{},[641,16821,16822],{},[644,16823,16824,16827,16829],{},[647,16825,16826],{},"Question",[647,16828,3075],{},[647,16830,3892],{},[657,16832,16833,16844,16854,16864,16874,16884,16895],{},[644,16834,16835,16838,16841],{},[662,16836,16837],{},"What does it show?",[662,16839,16840],{},"electrical structure from the supply point to the consumer",[662,16842,16843],{},"location of equipment on the floor plan",[644,16845,16846,16849,16851],{},[662,16847,16848],{},"AREI\u002FRGIE content",[662,16850,15380],{},[662,16852,16853],{},"Subsection 3.1.2.3 a",[644,16855,16856,16858,16861],{},[662,16857,2151],{},[662,16859,16860],{},"not to scale",[662,16862,16863],{},"a plan within the meaning of Chapter 2.12: to scale, with no prescribed ratio",[644,16865,16866,16868,16871],{},[662,16867,9147],{},[662,16869,16870],{},"type and characteristics of residual-current and overcurrent devices",[662,16872,16873],{},"location of the board",[644,16875,16876,16878,16881],{},[662,16877,5238],{},[662,16879,16880],{},"type, cross-section, number of conductors and installation method",[662,16882,16883],{},"location of junction and branch boxes",[644,16885,16886,16889,16892],{},[662,16887,16888],{},"Referencing",[662,16890,16891],{},"letter per circuit, number per point",[662,16893,16894],{},"the same combination at the real location",[644,16896,16897,16900,16903],{},[662,16898,16899],{},"Non-substantial change",[662,16901,16902],{},"a dated and signed short description is enough",[662,16904,16905],{},"the change is always drawn in",[27,16907,16909],{"id":16908},"a-shared-identity-and-revision","A shared identity and revision",[11,16911,16912],{},"Section 3.1.2 requires an unambiguous number, revision and revision date on all diagrams, plans and records. Domestic diagrams and plans also state the name, capacity and, where applicable, VAT number of the person responsible for the work, plus the installation address (3.1.2.1 a). Voltage and type of current appear on the single-line diagram.",[11,16914,16915],{},"When the approved body establishes conformity at the inspection, it dates and signs the diagram and plan together with the responsible person; with the inspection report, they become part of the installation file. A PDF you export before the inspection is therefore your well-prepared draft; it becomes approved through the approved body's endorsement.",[27,16917,16919],{"id":16918},"what-the-single-line-diagram-contains","What the single-line diagram contains",[11,16921,16922],{},"Subsection 3.1.2.2 a lists at least:",[43,16924,16925,16928,16931,16934,16937,16940,16943,16946],{},[46,16926,16927],{},"cable type, cross-section and number of conductors;",[46,16929,16930],{},"installation method of the cables;",[46,16932,16933],{},"type and characteristics of residual-current devices;",[46,16935,16936],{},"type and characteristics of overcurrent devices;",[46,16938,16939],{},"switches, junction boxes and branch boxes;",[46,16941,16942],{},"socket outlets and lighting points;",[46,16944,16945],{},"fixed machines and appliances;",[46,16947,16948],{},"sources such as transformer, solar cell, inverter or battery.",[11,16950,16951],{},"It answers structural questions: which RCD is upstream of circuit C, which breaker protects the cable, how many conductors of which cross-section run to the branch box, and which loads follow? Whether the box sits left or right of the door is not shown.",[11,16953,16954],{},"Each elementary circuit receives a capital letter. Lighting points, socket outlets and control units are numbered in order from the upstream overcurrent device. That sequence is an electrical reference, not a walking route through the rooms.",[27,16956,16958],{"id":16957},"what-the-situation-plan-contains","What the situation plan contains",[11,16960,16961],{},"Subsection 3.1.2.3 a requires the location of the items shown on the single-line diagram:",[43,16963,16964,16967,16970,16973,16975],{},[46,16965,16966],{},"distribution and switchgear boards;",[46,16968,16969],{},"junction and branch boxes;",[46,16971,16972],{},"socket outlets, lighting points and switches;",[46,16974,16945],{},[46,16976,16977],{},"sources such as solar cell, inverter, battery or transformer.",[11,16979,16980],{},"The basis is a legible floor plan that distinguishes storeys and rooms. Chapter 2.12 defines a plan as a to-scale representation of where the parts of the installation are; AREI\u002FRGIE does not prescribe a specific ratio such as 1:50. What counts is an unambiguous position: if a socket sits on one wall or worktop, you draw it there and not somewhere in the middle of the room. Concealed junction boxes matter in particular, because later work must be able to find them.",[11,16982,16983],{},"The situation plan is not a complete cable-route plan. Subsection 3.1.2.3 a calls for the locations of the listed items; you do not invent unknown routes. For the location of underground cables, Book 1 sets its own duties (Section 9.1.5).",[27,16985,16987],{"id":16986},"the-shared-reference-is-the-bridge","The shared reference is the bridge",[11,16989,16990,16991,16993,16994,11069,16997,17000,17001,17003,17004,17006,17007,17010],{},"Suppose circuit ",[842,16992,12892],{}," supplies three socket outlets and one lighting point. The single-line diagram identifies them ",[842,16995,16996],{},"B1",[842,16998,16999],{},"B4"," in electrical sequence. The situation plan places each reference at its real location. A switch controlling ",[842,17002,16999],{}," carries the letter ",[842,17005,12892],{}," and the number ",[842,17008,17009],{},"4"," of the controlled point (3.1.2.1 a).",[11,17012,17013,17014,17016,17017,17020],{},"Inspector and electrician can then move from the protective device to the load and from the room back to the board. If ",[842,17015,13908],{}," is missing from the floor plan, its location is unknown. If the plan shows a further socket ",[842,17018,17019],{},"B5"," that does not exist on the single-line diagram, the two documents describe different installation states.",[27,17022,17024],{"id":17023},"build-both-from-one-survey","Build both from one survey",[11,17026,17027],{},"Drawing the diagram first and the floor plan weeks later from memory creates contradictions. Produce both from the same survey:",[105,17029,17030,17033,17036,17039,17042,17045,17048],{},[46,17031,17032],{},"record storeys, rooms, boards and sources;",[46,17034,17035],{},"record the protective chain and final circuits in the board;",[46,17037,17038],{},"assign every socket, appliance and box to the correct circuit;",[46,17040,17041],{},"create each reference once and reuse it in both views;",[46,17043,17044],{},"add cable and equipment properties to the electrical path;",[46,17046,17047],{},"verify positions on site;",[46,17049,17050],{},"export both documents with the same revision and status date.",[11,17052,17053],{},"A board label helps with assignment but does not prove it. In an existing installation, you identify circuits competently and with the supply isolated. A guessed concealed connection does not belong on the plans as an established fact.",[27,17055,17057],{"id":17056},"alterations-and-document-history","Alterations and document history",[11,17059,17060],{},"For a non-substantial alteration, a short description with the name, capacity and address of the responsible person, dated and signed, is enough instead of a new single-line diagram. You update the situation plan with every alteration or extension so that it always shows the existing layout. A substantial modification or extension, for example adding a circuit to a domestic installation (an example given in Chapter 2.11), requires new or updated diagrams and plans.",[11,17062,17063],{},"Parts whose on-site installation began before 1 October 1981 and which appear on the single-line diagram are marked as an \"older part\". The label places the existing work; it is neither proof of conformity nor an exemption. The derogations for old installations are assessed separately.",[11,17065,17066],{},"Manage both documents as a pair. A situation plan at revision 4 beside a single-line diagram at revision 2 leaves unclear what belongs together. Keep earlier endorsed revisions in the file rather than erasing the history.",[27,17068,17070],{"id":17069},"typical-inconsistencies","Typical inconsistencies",[638,17072,17073,17083],{},[641,17074,17075],{},[644,17076,17077,17080],{},[647,17078,17079],{},"Difference",[647,17081,17082],{},"Consequence",[657,17084,17085,17100,17108,17116,17124,17132],{},[644,17086,17087,17097],{},[662,17088,17089,17090,17093,17094],{},"single-line has ",[842,17091,17092],{},"C1–C6",", situation plan only ",[842,17095,17096],{},"C1–C5",[662,17098,17099],{},"one item cannot be located or is not electrically recorded",[644,17101,17102,17105],{},[662,17103,17104],{},"different circuit letter at the same point",[662,17106,17107],{},"location and protective device cannot be tied together reliably",[644,17109,17110,17113],{},[662,17111,17112],{},"PV inverter appears only on the floor plan",[662,17114,17115],{},"source and protective chain are missing from the diagram",[644,17117,17118,17121],{},[662,17119,17120],{},"branch box appears only on the single-line",[662,17122,17123],{},"its real location is unknown during maintenance",[644,17125,17126,17129],{},[662,17127,17128],{},"cross-section on the floor plan but not on the electrical path",[662,17130,17131],{},"the value is not tied to any specific cable",[644,17133,17134,17137],{},[662,17135,17136],{},"different address or revision",[662,17138,17139],{},"the documents may describe different installation states",[27,17141,17143],{"id":17142},"how-the-inspection-uses-both","How the inspection uses both",[11,17145,17146],{},"In the conformity inspection report for a domestic installation, the approved body certifies among other things that the installation was carried out in accordance with the single-line diagrams and situation plans (Subsection 6.4.6.4). The plans therefore have to be right, not merely present. The single-line diagram makes protection and wiring assignments traceable; the situation plan leads to the identified points on site. Visual inspection, tests and measurements complement the document check.",[11,17148,17149],{},"A mutually consistent pair can still contain a technical fault, such as an undersized cross-section. Conversely, technically sound work is poorly documented when the plans contradict each other. Keep three stages separate: the records are complete, the design has been competently checked, and the installed system has been officially inspected. Each stage has its own evidence.",[11,17151,17152],{},"After the inspection, the owner receives the endorsed plans and report for the file; the approved body keeps a copy for five years (3.1.2.1 a). The owner still keeps their own file current and makes it available for later work (9.1.2).",[11,17154,17155],{},"Treat the approved body's copy as a safety net, not version control. A later alteration kept only on a loose sheet makes the set inconsistent again. Attach each change to the correct revision of both documents.",[27,17157,17159],{"id":17158},"a-practical-reconciliation-before-release","A practical reconciliation before release",[11,17161,17162],{},"Do not just compare two pages side by side; work circuit by circuit. First write down the list of circuit letters. Then follow each circuit from its protective device to the last item and ask both documents the same questions: which points exist, which reference do they carry, where are they located, and what fixed function do they have? Record a mismatch as an open task instead of hiding it under a vague room label.",[11,17164,17165,17166,17169,17170,17173,17174,17177,17178,17180,17181,17183,17184,17186],{},"For circuit ",[842,17167,17168],{},"H",", the list might contain ceiling light ",[842,17171,17172],{},"H1",", wall light ",[842,17175,17176],{},"H2"," and their switches. The single-line diagram shows how these points sit electrically behind protection and cable; the situation plan shows ",[842,17179,17172],{}," in the hall and ",[842,17182,17176],{}," outdoors. If ",[842,17185,17176],{}," is missing from one sheet, the other is not automatically correct: survey and installed work decide, then you correct both documents.",[11,17188,17189],{},"Also run cross-circuit checks:",[43,17191,17192,17195,17198,17201,17204],{},[46,17193,17194],{},"Every board and fixed source on the single-line diagram has a findable location.",[46,17196,17197],{},"Every relevant junction and branch box uses the same identifier throughout.",[46,17199,17200],{},"Fixed machines are not represented only by room text on the floor plan.",[46,17202,17203],{},"Continuation references between sheets end at the intended circuit, not at a similarly named group.",[46,17205,17206],{},"Header, address, page numbering, date and revision visibly form one set.",[27,17208,17210],{"id":17209},"example-recording-a-small-extension","Example: recording a small extension",[11,17212,17213,17214,17217,17218,17221],{},"When a socket is added in a study, first establish which circuit it is actually connected to. If it is the next point on circuit ",[842,17215,17216],{},"D",", it becomes, for example, ",[842,17219,17220],{},"D6","; you add that code at its electrical position on the single-line diagram and at its physical position on the situation plan. You do not infer cable and protection from the neighbouring socket; you verify them at the real connection. Advance the date and revision of both sheets together.",[11,17223,17224],{},"Whether work is substantial or not is a professional judgement. The short description is not a catch-all for years of small changes kept outside the plans. As soon as assignment or current state is no longer clear, you consolidate the documents into a new revision.",[11,17226,955,17227,17230],{},[23,17228,15812],{"href":15810,"rel":17229},[4434]," summarises the content and relationship of the two documents. The current Book 1 remains decisive; the examples there are guidance and do not replace a survey of your installation.",[27,17232,17234],{"id":17233},"what-planelec-handles","What PlanElec handles",[11,17236,17237],{},"PlanElec brings floor-plan positions and electrical topology together in one project. Every device exists once: as soon as you assign it to a circuit, single-line diagram and situation plan carry the same reference. You export both as PDF from the same saved project state, and the advisory AREI\u002FRGIE self-check shows you errors in the supported rules that can be decided from your data.",[11,17239,17240],{},"The roles are clear: PlanElec keeps plan and diagram consistent; the on-site survey, measured values and confirmation of concealed cables come from the professional. The endorsement of the plans and the official inspection report come from the approved body.",[27,17242,8138],{"id":8137},[43,17244,17245,17251,17256,17260],{},[46,17246,17247],{},[23,17248,17250],{"href":17249},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fwhat-is-a-situation-plan","What is a situation plan?",[46,17252,17253],{},[23,17254,17255],{"href":8166},"AREI symbols for both diagrams",[46,17257,17258],{},[23,17259,13395],{"href":13394},[46,17261,17262],{},[23,17263,17264],{"href":8160},"Draw a situation plan step by step",[11,17266,17267],{},[23,17268,17269],{"href":5046},"Open PlanElec to prepare and export both diagrams →",[11,17271,17272],{},[7299,17273,17274],{},"Basis: AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 V06, Chapter 2.12, Section 3.1.2, Subsection 6.4.6.4 and Section 9.1.2. Editorial review: PlanElec team, 5 October 2026.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":17276},[17277,17278,17279,17280,17281,17282,17283,17284,17285,17286,17287,17288,17289,17290],{"id":16803,"depth":291,"text":16804},{"id":16816,"depth":291,"text":16817},{"id":16908,"depth":291,"text":16909},{"id":16918,"depth":291,"text":16919},{"id":16957,"depth":291,"text":16958},{"id":16986,"depth":291,"text":16987},{"id":17023,"depth":291,"text":17024},{"id":17056,"depth":291,"text":17057},{"id":17069,"depth":291,"text":17070},{"id":17142,"depth":291,"text":17143},{"id":17158,"depth":291,"text":17159},{"id":17209,"depth":291,"text":17210},{"id":17233,"depth":291,"text":17234},{"id":8137,"depth":291,"text":8138},"A single-line diagram shows the electrical structure; a situation plan shows where equipment sits. Shared circuit references turn the two Belgian AREI\u002FRGIE records into one checkable dossier.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fsingle-line-vs-situation-plan.en",{"title":16797,"description":17291},"Single-Line Diagram vs. Situation Plan: the Difference","single-line-diagram-vs-situation-plan","blog\u002Fsingle-line-vs-situation-plan.en",[1979,1980,319,8203,317,2586,17299,2981],"electrical dossier","BRF-ltYZ02ngykNApN-kNHaXL_Jxw8ZSUyfMl35PdiY",{"id":17302,"title":17303,"articleId":17304,"body":17305,"category":5101,"date":17837,"description":17838,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":17839,"navigation":308,"path":17840,"publishDate":17837,"readTime":1974,"refreshInterval":2436,"seo":17841,"seoTitle":17842,"slug":17843,"stem":17844,"tags":17845,"__hash__":17854},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fsynergrid-c10-26-list.en.md","Synergrid C10\u002F26 list: is my inverter on the list – and what if it is not?","synergrid-c10-26-list",{"type":8,"value":17306,"toc":17819},[17307,17322,17326,17333,17343,17347,17401,17408,17412,17419,17525,17529,17536,17540,17594,17598,17606,17610,17653,17657,17663,17689,17692,17696,17705,17709,17712,17720,17723,17726,17733,17737,17740,17743,17746,17750,17753,17756,17759,17761,17770,17776,17782,17788,17790,17805,17807],[11,17308,17309,17312,17313,17316,17317,17321],{},[35,17310,17311],{},"Short answer:"," the Synergrid C10\u002F26 list is the Belgian register of inverters, hybrid inverters and battery systems homologated under the technical prescription C10\u002F11. As a rule, the grid operators (Fluvius, ORES, RESA, Sibelga) accept only listed devices at registration – in the listed ",[35,17314,17315],{},"firmware version",". If a device is not listed, it needs an individual proof of conformity against C10\u002F11; whether that is sufficient is for the responsible grid operator to decide. To find out whether your device is on it, use the free ",[23,17318,17320],{"href":17319},"\u002Fen\u002Ftools\u002Fsynergrid-c10-26-inverter-check","Synergrid C10\u002F26 check by PlanElec",", which works from a dated copy of the official list.",[27,17323,17325],{"id":17324},"what-is-the-synergrid-c1026-list","What is the Synergrid C10\u002F26 list?",[11,17327,17328,17329,17332],{},"Synergrid is the federation of Belgian electricity and gas grid operators. The prescription ",[35,17330,17331],{},"C10\u002F11"," defines the technical requirements that decentralised generation units (PV inverters, home batteries, CHP, wind) must meet on the low-voltage grid: protection functions during grid disturbances, frequency and voltage behaviour, power control.",[11,17334,955,17335,17338,17339,17342],{},[35,17336,17337],{},"C10\u002F26 list"," is its practical result: manufacturers have their devices tested against C10\u002F11, and approved device types are published with reference number, firmware version and technical data. Synergrid keeps the list up to date as an Excel file; the current edition refers to ",[35,17340,17341],{},"C10\u002F11 edition 2.4 (15\u002F10\u002F2025)",". It covers several thousand active devices; the check shows the exact count and the date of the imported data right above the results table.",[27,17344,17346],{"id":17345},"why-the-list-matters-for-registration-and-inspection","Why the list matters for registration and inspection",[638,17348,17349,17359],{},[641,17350,17351],{},[644,17352,17353,17356],{},[647,17354,17355],{},"Step",[647,17357,17358],{},"Role of the C10\u002F26 list",[657,17360,17361,17371,17381,17391],{},[644,17362,17363,17368],{},[662,17364,17365],{},[35,17366,17367],{},"Registration with the grid operator",[662,17369,17370],{},"Fluvius, ORES, RESA and Sibelga ask for the inverter type and expect a listed device",[644,17372,17373,17378],{},[662,17374,17375],{},[35,17376,17377],{},"Conformity inspection",[662,17379,17380],{},"The approved inspection body inspects the installation against the AREI; for PV up to 10 kVA, its report records number, type, serial number and maximum AC power of the inverters (7.112.4)",[644,17382,17383,17388],{},[662,17384,17385],{},[35,17386,17387],{},"Injection approval",[662,17389,17390],{},"Without recognised evidence for the device, the grid operator generally does not release feed-in",[644,17392,17393,17398],{},[662,17394,17395],{},[35,17396,17397],{},"Firmware update or replacement",[662,17399,17400],{},"A new firmware version or a replacement device again needs a matching list entry",[11,17402,17403,17404,17407],{},"For residential PV systems up to 10 kVA, AREI Chapter 7.112 also applies to the electrical installation itself – both must be right. The guide ",[23,17405,17406],{"href":15913},"PV system in the single-line diagram"," shows what the diagram looks like.",[27,17409,17411],{"id":17410},"how-to-read-a-list-entry","How to read a list entry",[11,17413,17414,17415,17418],{},"Each row describes ",[35,17416,17417],{},"one combination of model and firmware",". The key columns:",[638,17420,17421,17430],{},[641,17422,17423],{},[644,17424,17425,17428],{},[647,17426,17427],{},"Column",[647,17429,5389],{},[657,17431,17432,17445,17455,17465,17475,17485,17495,17505,17515],{},[644,17433,17434,17442],{},[662,17435,17436,17438,17439,4382],{},[35,17437,9490],{}," (e.g. ",[842,17440,17441],{},"GLV052-09-0003",[662,17443,17444],{},"Synergrid homologation number of the device – complements brand and model in the registration (not always unique per model)",[644,17446,17447,17452],{},[662,17448,17449],{},[35,17450,17451],{},"Brand \u002F series \u002F model",[662,17453,17454],{},"Manufacturer designation, exactly as on the rating plate",[644,17456,17457,17462],{},[662,17458,17459],{},[35,17460,17461],{},"Firmware",[662,17463,17464],{},"Tested software version; the homologation applies to this version only",[644,17466,17467,17472],{},[662,17468,17469],{},[35,17470,17471],{},"Pac,r (W)",[662,17473,17474],{},"Rated active power at the AC output",[644,17476,17477,17482],{},[662,17478,17479],{},[35,17480,17481],{},"Smax (VA)",[662,17483,17484],{},"Maximum apparent power – decisive for the power class; grid operators typically cap single-phase generation units at around 5 kVA (check the exact threshold with your grid operator)",[644,17486,17487,17492],{},[662,17488,17489],{},[35,17490,17491],{},"Phases",[662,17493,17494],{},"Single-phase or three-phase",[644,17496,17497,17502],{},[662,17498,17499],{},[35,17500,17501],{},"Application",[662,17503,17504],{},"Solar, storage, CHP, wind, backup",[644,17506,17507,17512],{},[662,17508,17509],{},[35,17510,17511],{},"Restrictions",[662,17513,17514],{},"Conditions under which the device is admitted (see below)",[644,17516,17517,17522],{},[662,17518,17519],{},[35,17520,17521],{},"Homologated since",[662,17523,17524],{},"Date of final (or provisional) homologation",[385,17526,17528],{"id":17527},"why-the-firmware-version-counts","Why the firmware version counts",[11,17530,17531,17532,17535],{},"The protection functions under C10\u002F11 are software. A device running a firmware other than the listed one counts as ",[35,17533,17534],{},"not homologated"," at registration – even if the model itself is on the list. Read the firmware on the device or in the manufacturer's app and compare it with the list entry.",[385,17537,17539],{"id":17538},"interpreting-restrictions-correctly","Interpreting restrictions correctly",[638,17541,17542,17552],{},[641,17543,17544],{},[644,17545,17546,17549],{},[647,17547,17548],{},"Restriction on the list",[647,17550,17551],{},"What it means",[657,17553,17554,17564,17574,17584],{},[644,17555,17556,17561],{},[662,17557,17558],{},[35,17559,17560],{},"Only within a module \u003C 800 W",[662,17562,17563],{},"Admitted solely as part of a plug-in generation unit (balcony solar, plug-in battery)",[644,17565,17566,17571],{},[662,17567,17568],{},[35,17569,17570],{},"Small generating installations only",[662,17572,17573],{},"Not for larger installations with extended requirements",[644,17575,17576,17581],{},[662,17577,17578],{},[35,17579,17580],{},"High-voltage connection only",[662,17582,17583],{},"Not for domestic connections on the low-voltage grid",[644,17585,17586,17591],{},[662,17587,17588],{},[35,17589,17590],{},"Backup power system only",[662,17592,17593],{},"Homologated for backup supply only, not for feeding into the grid – the unit supplies an isolated part of the installation during an outage",[27,17595,17597],{"id":17596},"plug-in-solar-and-plug-in-batteries-the-same-list","Plug-in solar and plug-in batteries: the same list",[11,17599,17600,17601,17605],{},"Micro-inverters and plug-in batteries up to 800 W – Marstek, Zendure, Anker Solix, HomeWizard or Hoymiles, for instance – also need an entry on the C10\u002F26 list, usually with the restriction \"only in module \u003C 800 W\". A device sold in Germany or the Netherlands is not automatically admitted in Belgium: the Belgian grid protection settings under C10\u002F11 differ, and the manufacturer must have the Belgian variant homologated separately. So check before buying whether your exact model is listed. Even a listed plug-in device is registered with the grid operator, and the electrical installation itself remains subject to the AREI. If you are specifically after a battery, use the ",[23,17602,17604],{"href":17603},"\u002Fen\u002Ftools\u002Fhome-battery-synergrid-check","Synergrid C10\u002F26 check for home batteries",": the same list, focused on batteries and hybrid inverters.",[27,17607,17609],{"id":17608},"common-mistakes-in-practice","Common mistakes in practice",[105,17611,17612,17625,17631,17637,17643],{},[46,17613,17614,17617,17618,2152,17621,17624],{},[35,17615,17616],{},"Model checked without its suffix"," – ",[842,17619,17620],{},"SUN2000-8KTL-M0",[842,17622,17623],{},"SUN2000-8KTL-M1"," are different entries.",[46,17626,17627,17630],{},[35,17628,17629],{},"Firmware not compared"," – the device is listed but installed with an older version.",[46,17632,17633,17636],{},[35,17634,17635],{},"Expired homologation overlooked"," – Synergrid withdraws entries; the device then appears under \"expired\".",[46,17638,17639,17642],{},[35,17640,17641],{},"Imported from abroad"," – same name, different country variant without Belgian homologation.",[46,17644,17645,17648,17649,94],{},[35,17646,17647],{},"Battery forgotten"," – the battery inverter needs a list entry too, not only the PV inverter. See ",[23,17650,17652],{"href":17651},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fhome-battery-arei","Home battery and AREI",[27,17654,17656],{"id":17655},"check-a-device-right-in-your-browser","Check a device right in your browser",[11,17658,955,17659,17662],{},[23,17660,17661],{"href":17319},"Synergrid C10\u002F26 check"," loads a dated copy of the official list and makes it searchable:",[105,17664,17665,17671,17677,17683],{},[46,17666,17667,17670],{},[35,17668,17669],{},"Type the brand"," – suggestions show how many models are listed per brand.",[46,17672,17673,17676],{},[35,17674,17675],{},"Refine the model"," – keep typing until the exact model appears; expired entries are flagged.",[46,17678,17679,17682],{},[35,17680,17681],{},"Read the result"," – the table shows firmware, Smax, Pac, phases, application, restrictions and the Synergrid reference; you sort and filter by phases, segment and status.",[46,17684,17685,17688],{},[35,17686,17687],{},"No match?"," – the check suggests technically comparable homologated devices of the same power class.",[11,17690,17691],{},"Filters and sorting live in the URL. Send the link straight to a customer or colleague and they see exactly the same selection.",[27,17693,17695],{"id":17694},"what-the-check-does-and-what-the-official-list-does","What the check does – and what the official list does",[11,17697,17698,17699,17704],{},"The check is your fast way into the list; the authoritative statement remains the current ",[23,17700,17703],{"href":17701,"rel":17702},"https:\u002F\u002Fwww.synergrid.be\u002Fnl\u002Fhomologatie\u002Felektriciteit\u002Fdecentrale-productie-eenheden",[4434],"official list on synergrid.be",". In case of discrepancy the official list prevails. The electrical installation itself – protection, RCD, cable size, isolator – is outside the check; for that, PlanElec has the AREI\u002FRGIE self-check on the single-line diagram.",[27,17706,17708],{"id":17707},"a-defensible-device-check-step-by-step","A defensible device check, step by step",[11,17710,17711],{},"Start from the label on the device that will actually be installed, not from a webshop title. Record manufacturer, complete model suffix, product reference, rated apparent power and firmware. Hybrid families often contain several power variants, regional variants or firmware branches. A search result that matches only the brand or the first part of the name is not enough.",[11,17713,17714,17715,17719],{},"Open the current ",[23,17716,17718],{"href":16304,"rel":17717},[4434],"Synergrid homologation page"," and the official list linked there. Match the row field by field. Read restrictions and notes, including permitted modes, external protection, export limitation, storage use or combinations with other components. For plug-and-play equipment, use Synergrid's dedicated Plug & Play information and the exact list entry; a normal decentralised-production entry does not automatically cover every plug-in configuration.",[11,17721,17722],{},"Save evidence with the project: the row or official reference, list date, firmware seen on site and the date you checked. Recheck before commissioning and notification, because the intended device, firmware or official data can change between quotation and installation. If the row is absent, you clarify the Belgian homologation with the manufacturer or importer and ask the relevant network operator which evidence it accepts. PlanElec's search is your reading aid; the attestation comes from the official source.",[11,17724,17725],{},"Keep three decisions separate. C10\u002F26 type homologation addresses the network-interface characteristics of the product. The approved inspection body assesses the electrical installation against the AREI\u002FRGIE. The distribution network operator handles notification and connection conditions. A positive result in one area does not automatically grant the other two.",[11,17727,17728,17729,17732],{},"On the single-line diagram, document the exact inverter and the associated protection, isolation and cable data. Keep the situation plan, manufacturer declarations, commissioning information and inspection report in the installation dossier. See ",[23,17730,17731],{"href":15913},"PV system documentation"," for the complete workflow. This review was performed on 5 October 2026; for a purchase or commissioning decision, always use the live official list.",[385,17734,17736],{"id":17735},"similar-rows-are-not-interchangeable","Similar rows are not interchangeable",[11,17738,17739],{},"Compare electrical variant, firmware range, Smax and notes as well as model text. A screenshot is not lasting evidence: keep the official file name or reference and the check date as well. A system combining inverter, battery and external network protection may need several related entries or proofs. Check every grid-connected function and the permitted combination.",[11,17741,17742],{},"After a firmware update, you reassess the existing documentation. The device working does not prove that this exact software version is covered by the published entry. Likewise, CE marking is not C10\u002F26 homologation: it is a different manufacturer responsibility and replaces neither the list entry nor the installation inspection.",[11,17744,17745],{},"For zero-export configurations, also document the components and settings required by the manufacturer and the network operator. An export limit does not automatically change the classification as a grid-connected unit. Have edge cases clarified in writing before ordering.",[385,17747,17749],{"id":17748},"evidence-at-project-handover","Evidence at project handover",[11,17751,17752],{},"Hand over a short check note, not just a link: who compared which official list against which rating plate and which firmware, and when? Which restriction was read, and which component satisfies it? The next person on the project can then recheck in a targeted way before commissioning.",[11,17754,17755],{},"With a replacement device, the check starts again. Similar power or the same brand does not replace the exact reference. An earlier successful registration does not prove that a model installed later is covered either. Update the single-line diagram, equipment documents and registration data together, and have the electrical change assessed according to its actual scope.",[11,17757,17758],{},"A dated delivery note supports the identification when model variants look alike. If delivery note, rating plate and official row do not match, you resolve the contradiction before registration instead of bridging it with an assumption.",[27,17760,4995],{"id":4994},[11,17762,17763,17766,17767,17769],{},[35,17764,17765],{},"Do I have to put the Synergrid reference in the registration?","\nGrid operators primarily ask for brand, model and firmware version. The GLV reference is a useful addition but not always unique per model: Synergrid sometimes assigns the same reference to several models. So state the reference ",[35,17768,7599],{}," the model designation.",[11,17771,17772,17775],{},[35,17773,17774],{},"My device is listed, but the entry is \"expired\" – what now?","\nThe homologation has been withdrawn or has lapsed. For new installations the device is no longer admitted; existing installations are generally unaffected. When in doubt, ask the grid operator.",[11,17777,17778,17781],{},[35,17779,17780],{},"Does the list also apply in Wallonia and Brussels?","\nYes. C10\u002F11 and C10\u002F26 are Synergrid prescriptions and apply nationwide to all distribution grid operators.",[11,17783,17784,17787],{},[35,17785,17786],{},"How often does the list change?","\nSynergrid publishes new editions regularly. The check shows the date of the imported data, so you always know which state your result is based on.",[27,17789,5054],{"id":4477},[43,17791,17792,17797,17801],{},[46,17793,17794],{},[23,17795,17796],{"href":15913},"Documenting a PV system in the single-line diagram",[46,17798,17799],{},[23,17800,17652],{"href":17651},[46,17802,17803],{},[23,17804,7197],{"href":7093},[4473,17806],{},[11,17808,17809],{},[7299,17810,17811,17812,17814,17815],{},"Plan your PV system with ",[35,17813,3710],{}," in the single-line diagram – inverter, strings, protective devices and situation plan in one project. ",[23,17816,17818],{"href":17817},"\u002F","Get started →",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":17820},[17821,17822,17823,17827,17828,17829,17830,17831,17835,17836],{"id":17324,"depth":291,"text":17325},{"id":17345,"depth":291,"text":17346},{"id":17410,"depth":291,"text":17411,"children":17824},[17825,17826],{"id":17527,"depth":599,"text":17528},{"id":17538,"depth":599,"text":17539},{"id":17596,"depth":291,"text":17597},{"id":17608,"depth":291,"text":17609},{"id":17655,"depth":291,"text":17656},{"id":17694,"depth":291,"text":17695},{"id":17707,"depth":291,"text":17708,"children":17832},[17833,17834],{"id":17735,"depth":599,"text":17736},{"id":17748,"depth":599,"text":17749},{"id":4994,"depth":291,"text":4995},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":5054},"2026-08-26","What the Synergrid C10\u002F26 list is, why grid operators require it, how to read reference, firmware, Smax and restrictions correctly – and how to check a device right in your browser.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fsynergrid-c10-26-list.en",{"title":17303,"description":17838},"Synergrid C10\u002F26 List: Is My Inverter on It?","synergrid-c10-26-list-inverter","blog\u002Fsynergrid-c10-26-list.en",[17846,17847,17848,17849,17850,17851,17852,17853],"synergrid","c10\u002F26","inverter","solar","pv","home battery","plug-in solar","grid operator registration","uO_YFfZeTlp2UH-CeZ4Wt5ExvR9yWV-V3TyKOFIt1Og",{"id":17856,"title":4491,"articleId":17857,"body":17858,"category":4526,"date":18346,"description":18347,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":18348,"navigation":308,"path":18349,"publishDate":18346,"readTime":15276,"refreshInterval":599,"seo":18350,"seoTitle":305,"slug":18351,"stem":18352,"tags":18353,"__hash__":18354},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Ftrikker-alternative.en.md","planelec-vs-trikker",{"type":8,"value":17859,"toc":18323},[17860,17866,17872,17876,18012,18038,18051,18055,18058,18062,18065,18068,18093,18098,18102,18105,18128,18131,18136,18140,18158,18162,18165,18171,18175,18178,18183,18187,18190,18196,18200,18203,18209,18213,18216,18222,18235,18239,18242,18246,18252,18258,18261,18265,18269,18275,18279,18285,18289,18292,18296,18299,18303,18309,18313],[11,17861,17862,17865],{},[35,17863,17864],{},"PlanElec is a browser-based Trikker alternative for electrical planning in Belgium."," Floor plans, devices, circuits and distribution boards form one project that produces the single-line diagram and situation plan. The PlanElec assistant carries out requests in that project and has every change checked by the AREI\u002FRGIE self-check. Floor plan recognition turns a Trikker PDF or a scan into an editable floor plan, and cabinet photos become a proposed board layout. Automatic planning suggestions, structured PV documentation and versioned PDF exports complete the workflow. PlanElec is free during Early Access; the material list and KNX documentation are available as pilots with a clearly defined scope.",[11,17867,17868,17871],{},[35,17869,17870],{},"Written and checked by the PlanElec team, 10 September 2026; platform and AI information updated on 3 October 2026, editorial revision on 5 October 2026."," A comparison from PlanElec's perspective: Trikker information comes from the manufacturer's sources linked below, PlanElec information from the documented product scope and public examples.",[27,17873,17875],{"id":17874},"planelec-and-trikker-at-a-glance","PlanElec and Trikker at a glance",[638,17877,17878,17888],{},[641,17879,17880],{},[644,17881,17882,17884,17886],{},[647,17883,3707],{},[647,17885,3710],{},[647,17887,6225],{},[657,17889,17890,17901,17912,17922,17933,17943,17953,17962,17971,17980,17991,18002],{},[644,17891,17892,17895,17898],{},[662,17893,17894],{},"Platform",[662,17896,17897],{},"Browser on Windows, macOS and Linux; tablet use through the browser",[662,17899,17900],{},"Windows; macOS beta of Trikker 2.0 since 30 Sep 2026; web version announced",[644,17902,17903,17906,17909],{},[662,17904,17905],{},"Price",[662,17907,17908],{},"Early Access: €0; then from €15 per property or €29\u002Fmonth excluding VAT, start not yet scheduled",[662,17910,17911],{},"€45\u002Fmonth or €360\u002Fyear excluding VAT; €54.45 or €435.60 including VAT",[644,17913,17914,17916,17919],{},[662,17915,5195],{},[662,17917,17918],{},"Project access with your own account on multiple devices",[662,17920,17921],{},"Licence per computer",[644,17923,17924,17927,17930],{},[662,17925,17926],{},"Single-line diagram and situation plan",[662,17928,17929],{},"Derived from a shared project model",[662,17931,17932],{},"Linked symbols and circuit references",[644,17934,17935,17937,17940],{},[662,17936,2017],{},[662,17938,17939],{},"Drawing, image, PDF and DXF backgrounds; floors and calibration",[662,17941,17942],{},"Drawing and CAD backgrounds, including DWG\u002FDXF",[644,17944,17945,17947,17950],{},[662,17946,5629],{},[662,17948,17949],{},"PlanElec assistant across the whole project, requests in your own words",[662,17951,17952],{},"Not described in the manufacturer's information",[644,17954,17955,17957,17960],{},[662,17956,3817],{},[662,17958,17959],{},"Walls, rooms, doors\u002Fwindows, supported device symbols and scale from PDF, scan or image",[662,17961,17952],{},[644,17963,17964,17966,17969],{},[662,17965,3835],{},[662,17967,17968],{},"Visible DIN modules as a reviewable layout proposal",[662,17970,17952],{},[644,17972,17973,17975,17978],{},[662,17974,3853],{},[662,17976,17977],{},"AREI\u002FRGIE self-check after every assistant action, one-step undo",[662,17979,3810],{},[644,17981,17982,17985,17988],{},[662,17983,17984],{},"Material list",[662,17986,17987],{},"Detailed manufacturer-neutral BOM in pilot",[662,17989,17990],{},"Material list derived from the diagram",[644,17992,17993,17996,17999],{},[662,17994,17995],{},"Focus",[662,17997,17998],{},"Floor plan, AI-assisted capture, planning suggestions, topology, board and documents",[662,18000,18001],{},"Drawing diagrams and situation plans",[644,18003,18004,18007,18009],{},[662,18005,18006],{},"Offline",[662,18008,4084],{},[662,18010,18011],{},"Temporarily offline; activation and repeated licence checks require internet",[11,18013,18014,18015,2145,18019,2145,18022,18026,18027,18030,18031,18034,18035,94],{},"Sources: ",[23,18016,18018],{"href":4438,"rel":18017},[4434],"Trikker pricing and licence conditions",[23,18020,6259],{"href":6257,"rel":18021},[4434],[23,18023,18025],{"href":6251,"rel":18024},[4434],"Trikker product overview",". Prices checked on ",[35,18028,18029],{},"10 September 2026",", platforms on ",[35,18032,18033],{},"2 October 2026",", AI features on the Trikker homepage and in the Trikker 2.0 announcement on ",[35,18036,18037],{},"3 October 2026",[11,18039,18040,18041,18045,18046,18050],{},"Since 30 September 2026, Trikker 2.0 has been available as a beta for Windows and macOS (",[23,18042,18044],{"href":4444,"rel":18043},[4434],"announcement","). A web version for iPad and Android has been announced without a date; the FAQ still states one licence per computer. Our article ",[23,18047,18049],{"href":18048},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Ftrikker-2-0-mac","Trikker 2.0 for Mac"," explains what the beta brings. Missing manufacturer information about a feature does not establish that Trikker cannot support it.",[27,18052,18054],{"id":18053},"where-planelec-covers-more-of-the-workflow","Where PlanElec covers more of the workflow",[11,18056,18057],{},"The key difference is continuity across planning tasks. A new circuit is more than a symbol: protection, devices, cable data, location and documents need to agree. PlanElec keeps that information in the project model and derives views and documents from it. The AI features work on exactly that model.",[385,18059,18061],{"id":18060},"the-planelec-assistant-works-across-the-whole-project","The PlanElec assistant works across the whole project",[11,18063,18064],{},"You describe the task in your own words, for example \"Place three socket outlets in the kitchen\", and the PlanElec assistant carries it out in the project. It is not limited to the diagram: with more than 100 planning commands it works across the entire project model, from floor plan and situation plan to rooms, devices, circuits, switching chains, cables, distribution board, automation\u002FKNX, PV strings and lighting control. Open it with the bot button in the header or with ⌘J \u002F Ctrl+J; it answers in your language and is available to every signed-in user in the studio.",[11,18066,18067],{},"Three rules keep its work traceable:",[43,18069,18070,18076,18085],{},[46,18071,18072,18075],{},[35,18073,18074],{},"Checked:"," after every change, PlanElec checks the whole project with the same AREI\u002FRGIE self-check the report uses and flags new findings.",[46,18077,18078,18081,18082,18084],{},[35,18079,18080],{},"Reversible:"," every change is exactly one step, which you reverse with ",[35,18083,3152],{}," on the action card.",[46,18086,18087,18090,18091,94],{},[35,18088,18089],{},"Confirmed:"," clear, reversible requests run directly. Risky actions only start after ",[35,18092,3619],{},[11,18094,18095,18096,94],{},"Every action appears as an action card and in the project history with the person who requested it, so a team can see who asked for what. Technical questions are answered with verified sources from the PlanElec help and the full AREI\u002FRGIE text. The language model runs in the EU region; the AI provider does not store your requests or use them for training. ",[23,18097,4381],{"href":4380},[385,18099,18101],{"id":18100},"recognise-a-floor-plan-from-a-trikker-pdf-or-scan","Recognise a floor plan from a Trikker PDF or scan",[11,18103,18104],{},"Your existing Trikker plans are a good starting point. PlanElec does not read .trik files, but it reads any plan you export as a PDF:",[105,18106,18107,18110,18115,18119,18123],{},[46,18108,18109],{},"Export the plan from Trikker as a PDF; Trikker 2.0 offers direct PDF export for this.",[46,18111,6383,18112,18114],{},[35,18113,5763],{},". PDF, PNG, JPEG and WebP are supported.",[46,18116,6389,18117,6392],{},[35,18118,5724],{},[46,18120,6395,18121,6398],{},[35,18122,5878],{},[46,18124,2732,18125,18127],{},[35,18126,5929],{}," to transfer it into an empty floor. The original page stays as an underlay; ⌘Z \u002F Ctrl+Z reverses the entire import.",[11,18129,18130],{},"PlanElec transfers walls, rooms with their area, doors and windows, supported device symbols (socket outlet, double socket outlet, splash-proof socket outlet, switch, light point) and the scale. The scale comes from dimension lines or the PDF scale, or you measure two points yourself; without a confirmed scale, the import stays locked. Room areas printed on the plan are used as a cross-check, and deviations are flagged. Symbols PlanElec cannot assign with confidence are marked and not transferred. The symbol vocabulary is tuned to Belgian plans and Trikker exports.",[11,18132,18133,18134,94],{},"You then plan circuits, switching chains and the single-line diagram in PlanElec, with automatic planning and the assistant. ",[23,18135,1987],{"href":4388},[385,18137,18139],{"id":18138},"fill-a-distribution-board-from-photos","Fill a distribution board from photos",[11,18141,18142,18143,18145,18146,18148,18149,18151,18152,18154,18155,18157],{},"With existing installations, capture often starts in front of the open board. In the board editor, open ",[35,18144,6015],{},", add your pictures with ",[35,18147,6021],{}," and start ",[35,18150,6027],{},". PlanElec recognises visible DIN modules with row, start position, width and type; you merge or split several views of the same module. Under ",[35,18153,6032],{},", you check the proposal and transfer it into an empty board with ",[35,18156,6073],{},". A photo does not show wiring or electrical connections, so you define them in the planning.",[385,18159,18161],{"id":18160},"automatic-planning-from-room-to-distribution-board","Automatic planning from room to distribution board",[11,18163,18164],{},"You start rooms with suggested standard equipment, adjust sockets and lighting points and distribute spotlights in a grid. PlanElec supports switching chains, automatic circuit assignment, cable suggestions, phase allocation and cable routes along walls. All results remain editable; you adjust every suggestion to your professional judgement.",[11,18166,18167,18168,94],{},"The distribution board is part of that workflow. Protection devices and circuits can be placed automatically or manually on DIN rails. The electrical topology provides the basis for the single-line diagram. When rooms and devices change repeatedly during a renovation, you keep working with the same project data. ",[23,18169,18170],{"href":142},"Explore automatic planning",[385,18172,18174],{"id":18173},"multiple-floors-and-views-side-by-side","Multiple floors and views side by side",[11,18176,18177],{},"PlanElec handles image, PDF and DXF backgrounds, multiple PDF pages and crops for individual floors. During import, you confirm units, scale and alignment; unclear dimensions are calibrated with two points. On the recognised or drawn floor plan, you then build the electrical design.",[11,18179,18180,18181,94],{},"The split workspace lets you check the situation plan and single-line diagram together; on narrow screens, you switch between views. The 3D view is available to all users; on small screens or without WebGL, you keep working in the 2D views. ",[23,18182,1987],{"href":4388},[385,18184,18186],{"id":18185},"photovoltaics-as-a-structured-installation","Photovoltaics as a structured installation",[11,18188,18189],{},"For PV, PlanElec goes beyond a single inverter symbol: strings are assigned to MPPTs, with modules, DC protection, cable sections and frame PE documented. The same PV data feeds the single-line diagram, situation plan and pilot material list. Missing string assignments or manufacturer information remain visible.",[11,18191,18192,18193,18195],{},"The public Synergrid C10\u002F26 check verifies a specific inverter model; it assesses the device, not the entire installation. The ",[23,18194,9074],{"href":9073}," explains the product scope.",[385,18197,18199],{"id":18198},"lighting-controls-and-knx-documentation","Lighting controls and KNX documentation",[11,18201,18202],{},"Direct switching, junction boxes, switched returns and supported relay\u002FShelly channels are documented with an explicit cable preview. The control group describes the function, the cable preview the physical wiring; device configuration and terminal wiring design are separate steps.",[11,18204,18205,18206,94],{},"The KNX pilot covers power supplies, switching and shutter actuators, push-buttons and channel assignment on the single-line diagram. Missing supply, incomplete load assignment and overload block the final export. ETS programming and group addresses stay in ETS; complete bus-line planning is outside the scope. ",[23,18207,18208],{"href":8072},"KNX scope and limitations",[385,18210,18212],{"id":18211},"from-individual-plans-to-a-traceable-pdf-dossier","From individual plans to a traceable PDF dossier",[11,18214,18215],{},"Single-line diagrams, situation plans, the distribution-board PDF and an orienting self-check report are centrally available as PDFs. You combine selected documents with a cover, contents, page numbering, installer details and company logo. Material, circuit and cable lists are available as a pilot: manufacturer-neutral, without prices and not an approved purchasing list.",[11,18217,18218,18219,94],{},"Versioned exports receive private archive storage and a revocable QR access link. That lets you prove the origin and integrity of every document; the QR link is not an electronic signature or proof of a passed inspection – that decision belongs to the accredited inspection body. ",[23,18220,18221],{"href":235},"Understand document exports",[11,18223,18224,18227,18228,18231,18232,94],{},[35,18225,18226],{},"See the result before registering:"," our ",[23,18229,18230],{"href":6512},"English pilot dossier PDF"," shows plans, lists and a report straight from the application. The example project is fictional and not intended for submission. NL, FR and DE examples are available on the ",[23,18233,18234],{"href":9073},"features page",[385,18236,18238],{"id":18237},"collaboration-in-a-team-and-across-devices","Collaboration in a team and across devices",[11,18240,18241],{},"Organisations bundle company projects and members. You share projects and organisations by e-mail invitation; roles decide who manages, edits or reads. Live synchronisation keeps open sessions aligned, including your own sessions on several devices, shows who else is present and catches up on confirmed changes after a disconnection. This is free during Early Access; once paid plans start, inviting further people is part of Pro. The work itself requires an internet connection.",[27,18243,18245],{"id":18244},"which-tool-fits-your-next-project","Which tool fits your next project?",[11,18247,18248,18251],{},[35,18249,18250],{},"PlanElec is particularly relevant if you"," work in the browser, use several devices, create documents in Dutch, French, German or English and want to edit floor plans, electrical planning and exports together. Existing PDF plans and cabinet photos become your starting point, and the assistant takes on routine requests. For a new renovation or PV project, try the full workflow through to PDF.",[11,18253,18254,18257],{},[35,18255,18256],{},"Trikker remains a sensible choice if you"," continue editing existing Trikker files, use DWG backgrounds directly or rely on an established Windows drawing workflow. Limited internet access may also determine your choice.",[11,18259,18260],{},"Trikker also links diagrams and situation plans through symbols; a fair comparison does not present them as disconnected drawings. PlanElec's advantage is the continuous connection to room planning, AI-assisted capture, planning suggestions, electrical topology, distribution boards and documents. A sample project of your own shows best how well that fits your business.",[27,18262,18264],{"id":18263},"frequently-asked-questions-about-the-trikker-alternative","Frequently asked questions about the Trikker alternative",[385,18266,18268],{"id":18267},"is-planelec-free","Is PlanElec free?",[11,18270,18271,18272,18274],{},"Yes. During Early Access, PlanElec costs €0, including the assistant and recognition features. The AI features come with a personal AI allowance; the user menu shows how much of it you have used as a percentage. The ",[23,18273,4021],{"href":4020}," lists the planned Free, Single property and Pro plans; the start date will be announced in advance. You download your PDF exports and keep them independently of the application.",[385,18276,18278],{"id":18277},"can-i-import-trikker-files","Can I import Trikker files?",[11,18280,18281,18282,18284],{},"PlanElec does not read .trik files. You can still bring the floor plan across: export the plan from Trikker as a PDF, add it to PlanElec under Project files and start ",[35,18283,5724],{},". Walls, rooms, doors and windows, supported device symbols and scale arrive as an editable floor plan. Circuits and the diagram are then planned in PlanElec, with the assistant and automatic planning. Finish ongoing dossiers in Trikker.",[385,18286,18288],{"id":18287},"which-ai-features-does-planelec-offer","Which AI features does PlanElec offer?",[11,18290,18291],{},"Three: the PlanElec assistant, which carries out requests across the whole project and answers technical questions with sources; floor plan recognition from a PDF, scan or image; and recognition of DIN modules in cabinet photos. You review every proposal before importing it; every assistant change runs through the self-check, and you undo it in one step.",[385,18293,18295],{"id":18294},"is-planelec-suitable-for-mac-and-ipad","Is PlanElec suitable for Mac and iPad?",[11,18297,18298],{},"Yes. PlanElec runs in the browser without installation, on a Mac as well as on a tablet. Since version 2.0, Trikker offers a Mac beta; a web and iPad version has been announced there. For extensive drawings, a large screen with a mouse or trackpad works best. PlanElec requires an internet connection.",[385,18300,18302],{"id":18301},"does-the-areirgie-self-check-replace-the-official-inspection","Does the AREI\u002FRGIE self-check replace the official inspection?",[11,18304,18305,18306,94],{},"No – each has its own role. The self-check assesses the supported rules that can be checked from your data and highlights missing information and coverage gaps; the same applies to the check after every assistant action. It is not a certificate of conformity. Design, site conditions and measurements are your responsibility; the official inspection is carried out by the accredited inspection body. ",[23,18307,18308],{"href":2953},"Supported checks and limitations",[27,18310,18312],{"id":18311},"evaluate-planelec-through-a-complete-workflow","Evaluate PlanElec through a complete workflow",[11,18314,18315,18316,18319,18320,94],{},"First view the ",[23,18317,18318],{"href":6512},"pilot dossier",", then try a small project of your own: have a Trikker PDF recognised or draw the floor plan, plan devices and circuits, give the assistant a request, check the board and diagram, read the self-check and export a PDF. That tests the actual work for which you need a Trikker alternative. ",[23,18321,18322],{"href":5046},"Start using PlanElec for free",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":18324},[18325,18326,18337,18338,18345],{"id":17874,"depth":291,"text":17875},{"id":18053,"depth":291,"text":18054,"children":18327},[18328,18329,18330,18331,18332,18333,18334,18335,18336],{"id":18060,"depth":599,"text":18061},{"id":18100,"depth":599,"text":18101},{"id":18138,"depth":599,"text":18139},{"id":18160,"depth":599,"text":18161},{"id":18173,"depth":599,"text":18174},{"id":18185,"depth":599,"text":18186},{"id":18198,"depth":599,"text":18199},{"id":18211,"depth":599,"text":18212},{"id":18237,"depth":599,"text":18238},{"id":18244,"depth":291,"text":18245},{"id":18263,"depth":291,"text":18264,"children":18339},[18340,18341,18342,18343,18344],{"id":18267,"depth":599,"text":18268},{"id":18277,"depth":599,"text":18278},{"id":18287,"depth":599,"text":18288},{"id":18294,"depth":599,"text":18295},{"id":18301,"depth":599,"text":18302},{"id":18311,"depth":291,"text":18312},"2026-08-22","PlanElec vs Trikker for Belgium: AI assistant, floor plan recognition from Trikker PDFs, single-line diagrams, situation plans, PV, KNX and PDF dossiers compared.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Ftrikker-alternative.en",{"title":4491,"description":18347},"trikker-alternative","blog\u002Ftrikker-alternative.en",[6225,3710,6745,319,317,5630,1979,1980,5270,2977],"ZsJzxPa-LaXAeNDmvYvYyB_OiFy3ffkzxeVU01jrEnE",{"id":18356,"title":18357,"articleId":18358,"body":18359,"category":5101,"date":18938,"description":18939,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":18940,"navigation":308,"path":18941,"publishDate":18938,"readTime":312,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":18942,"seoTitle":305,"slug":18358,"stem":18943,"tags":18944,"__hash__":18947},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fvoltage-drop-cable-sizing.en.md","Voltage Drop Calculation: How Long Can Your Cable Be?","voltage-drop-cable-sizing",{"type":8,"value":18360,"toc":18912},[18361,18367,18371,18374,18377,18381,18391,18397,18401,18410,18430,18442,18449,18453,18456,18600,18603,18607,18610,18689,18692,18699,18703,18707,18710,18715,18725,18729,18732,18737,18746,18750,18757,18764,18768,18771,18775,18807,18809,18813,18816,18820,18823,18827,18830,18834,18841,18845,18848,18851,18854,18857,18861,18864,18868,18871,18875,18882,18884,18906],[11,18362,18363,18366],{},[35,18364,18365],{},"How long a cable can be is decided by voltage drop: a 2.5 mm² copper cable carrying 16 A at 230 V reaches the usual 5% at about 54 m, and a 1.5 mm² lighting circuit at 10 A reaches the 3% lighting value at about 31 m."," Beyond that, you need a larger cross-section, a shorter route or a sub-distribution board closer to the load. The circuit breaker does not answer this question: it protects the cable against overload but says nothing about the voltage that reaches the appliance. So always check both: does the cable suit the protective device, and does voltage drop stay within the target? The stricter requirement sets the cross-section.",[27,18368,18370],{"id":18369},"when-does-voltage-drop-matter","When does voltage drop matter?",[11,18372,18373],{},"Typical cases are long runs to a garage, garden room or outbuilding, outdoor lighting, feeders to sub-distribution boards, heat pumps and EV charging points. Besides distance, current, single- or three-phase supply, conductor material, cross-section, nominal voltage and power factor all count.",[11,18375,18376],{},"Always calculate the complete electrical route from the board. If it consists of several segments, such as the feeder to a sub-board plus the final circuit, their voltage drops add up. Calculating only the last section to the appliance understates the result.",[27,18378,18380],{"id":18379},"what-the-areirgie-requires","What the AREI\u002FRGIE requires",[11,18382,18383,18384,2152,18387,18390],{},"Section 5.2.5 of AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 (\"Voltage drop\") requires voltage drop to be limited to the values described in the rules of good practice. It sets no percentage. The familiar ",[35,18385,18386],{},"3% for lighting",[35,18388,18389],{},"5% for other final circuits"," come from the IEC\u002FNBN HD 60364-5-52 series and are the usual way those rules of good practice are applied.",[11,18392,18393,18394,94],{},"Subsection 5.2.1.2 b additionally requires voltage drop under normal operating conditions to be compatible with safe operation of the supplied equipment. The second check, cross-section against protection, is governed by Table 4.11 in subsection 4.4.1.4 for domestic installations. It limits the protective device per cross-section but does not prove current-carrying capacity for every installation method. The complete table with the fuse and circuit-breaker columns is in ",[23,18395,18396],{"href":8687},"cable cross-section by circuit breaker",[27,18398,18400],{"id":18399},"the-formula","The formula",[11,18402,18403,18405,18406,18409],{},[842,18404,4832],{}," is the ",[35,18407,18408],{},"one-way cable length",", not there and back:",[43,18411,18412,18418,18424],{},[46,18413,18414,18415],{},"single-phase: ",[842,18416,18417],{},"ΔU = 2 × ρ × L × I × cos φ \u002F S",[46,18419,18420,18421],{},"three-phase: ",[842,18422,18423],{},"ΔU = √3 × ρ × L × I × cos φ \u002F S",[46,18425,18426,18427],{},"percentage: ",[842,18428,18429],{},"ΔU% = ΔU \u002F Un × 100",[11,18431,18432,18434,18435,18437,18438,18441],{},[842,18433,4828],{}," is resistivity, ",[842,18436,12758],{}," current and ",[842,18439,18440],{},"S"," the cross-section in mm². PlanElec calculates with 0.0175 Ω·mm²\u002Fm for copper and 0.029 Ω·mm²\u002Fm for aluminium, a default power factor of 0.95 and the nominal voltage of the circuit: 230 V for single-phase final circuits, and for three-phase circuits the voltage between line conductors (230 V or 400 V). The resistance model leaves out reactance and temperature correction, which makes it a sound preliminary design for homes and small commercial installations.",[11,18443,18444,18445,18448],{},"Rearranged for length, it gives the longest permitted one-way run for a chosen limit: ",[842,18446,18447],{},"L_max = ΔU_max × S \u002F (2 × ρ × I × cos φ)"," for single-phase circuits.",[27,18450,18452],{"id":18451},"maximum-cable-length-per-cross-section","Maximum cable length per cross-section",[11,18454,18455],{},"The table below uses copper, power factor 0.95 and the full rated current of the breaker as the load. If the actual load is lower, the run can be proportionally longer.",[638,18457,18458,18474],{},[641,18459,18460],{},[644,18461,18462,18464,18467,18469,18471],{},[647,18463,2387],{},[647,18465,18466],{},"Cross-section",[647,18468,4592],{},[647,18470,13055],{},[647,18472,18473],{},"Max. one-way length",[657,18475,18476,18491,18504,18517,18532,18545,18559,18573,18587],{},[644,18477,18478,18481,18483,18485,18488],{},[662,18479,18480],{},"Lighting, 230 V",[662,18482,4851],{},[662,18484,12801],{},[662,18486,18487],{},"3%",[662,18489,18490],{},"approx. 31 m",[644,18492,18493,18495,18497,18499,18501],{},[662,18494,18480],{},[662,18496,4851],{},[662,18498,12804],{},[662,18500,18487],{},[662,18502,18503],{},"approx. 19 m",[644,18505,18506,18508,18510,18512,18514],{},[662,18507,18480],{},[662,18509,4854],{},[662,18511,12804],{},[662,18513,18487],{},[662,18515,18516],{},"approx. 32 m",[644,18518,18519,18522,18524,18526,18529],{},[662,18520,18521],{},"Sockets\u002Fappliances, 230 V",[662,18523,4854],{},[662,18525,12804],{},[662,18527,18528],{},"5%",[662,18530,18531],{},"approx. 54 m",[644,18533,18534,18536,18538,18540,18542],{},[662,18535,18521],{},[662,18537,4854],{},[662,18539,12813],{},[662,18541,18528],{},[662,18543,18544],{},"approx. 43 m",[644,18546,18547,18550,18552,18554,18556],{},[662,18548,18549],{},"Appliance circuit, 230 V",[662,18551,12818],{},[662,18553,12823],{},[662,18555,18528],{},[662,18557,18558],{},"approx. 55 m",[644,18560,18561,18564,18566,18568,18570],{},[662,18562,18563],{},"Hob\u002FEV charger, 230 V",[662,18565,12828],{},[662,18567,12831],{},[662,18569,18528],{},[662,18571,18572],{},"approx. 65 m",[644,18574,18575,18578,18580,18582,18584],{},[662,18576,18577],{},"Three-phase 3N~400\u002F230 V",[662,18579,4854],{},[662,18581,12804],{},[662,18583,18528],{},[662,18585,18586],{},"approx. 108 m",[644,18588,18589,18591,18593,18595,18597],{},[662,18590,18577],{},[662,18592,12828],{},[662,18594,12831],{},[662,18596,18528],{},[662,18598,18599],{},"approx. 130 m",[11,18601,18602],{},"The values apply to a single segment from the board. If the final circuit is fed from a sub-board, subtract the feeder's voltage drop first.",[27,18604,18606],{"id":18605},"which-voltage-applies-to-your-circuit","Which voltage applies to your circuit?",[11,18608,18609],{},"The most common mistake is confusing the network type with the circuit. The 400 V of a three-phase connection exists only between two line conductors. An ordinary socket or lighting circuit is connected between a line conductor and neutral even in such a home, and therefore sees 230 V.",[638,18611,18612,18627],{},[641,18613,18614],{},[644,18615,18616,18619,18621,18624],{},[647,18617,18618],{},"Supply network",[647,18620,2387],{},[647,18622,18623],{},"Nominal voltage",[647,18625,18626],{},"Factor",[657,18628,18629,18642,18654,18666,18678],{},[644,18630,18631,18634,18637,18640],{},[662,18632,18633],{},"1×230 V",[662,18635,18636],{},"single-phase",[662,18638,18639],{},"230 V",[662,18641,13737],{},[644,18643,18644,18647,18650,18652],{},[662,18645,18646],{},"3×230 V without N",[662,18648,18649],{},"single-phase, L–L",[662,18651,18639],{},[662,18653,13737],{},[644,18655,18656,18658,18661,18663],{},[662,18657,18646],{},[662,18659,18660],{},"three-phase",[662,18662,18639],{},[662,18664,18665],{},"√3",[644,18667,18668,18671,18674,18676],{},[662,18669,18670],{},"3N~400\u002F230 V",[662,18672,18673],{},"single-phase, L–N",[662,18675,18639],{},[662,18677,13737],{},[644,18679,18680,18682,18684,18687],{},[662,18681,18670],{},[662,18683,18660],{},[662,18685,18686],{},"400 V",[662,18688,18665],{},[11,18690,18691],{},"Because the factor and the reference voltage change together, the difference is large: the same 16 A over 30 m with 2.5 mm² gives 2.78% single-phase, but 1.38% as a three-phase circuit at 400 V. Calculating a single-phase circuit as three-phase produces a result roughly twice as favourable and leads to an undersized cable.",[11,18693,18694,18695,94],{},"In a network without a neutral, a single-phase circuit runs between two line conductors. The voltage there is also 230 V, and because both conductors carry the full current, factor 2 applies. To identify your network type, see ",[23,18696,18698],{"href":18697},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fsingle-phase-vs-three-phase","Single-phase or three-phase in Belgium",[27,18700,18702],{"id":18701},"two-worked-examples","Two worked examples",[385,18704,18706],{"id":18705},"lighting-in-a-garden-room","Lighting in a garden room",[11,18708,18709],{},"A 45 m copper run supplies a lighting-only load of 8 A at 230 V. With 1.5 mm² and power factor 0.95:",[11,18711,18712],{},[842,18713,18714],{},"ΔU = 2 × 0.0175 × 45 × 8 × 0.95 \u002F 1.5 = 7.98 V",[11,18716,13324,18717,18720,18721,18724],{},[35,18718,18719],{},"3.47%",", above the 3% for lighting. With 2.5 mm², the loss falls to ",[35,18722,18723],{},"4.79 V or 2.08%",". For this criterion, 2.5 mm² is the first standard size that fits.",[385,18726,18728],{"id":18727},"garage-socket-circuit","Garage socket circuit",[11,18730,18731],{},"A 30 m copper run carries 16 A at 230 V. With 2.5 mm²:",[11,18733,18734],{},[842,18735,18736],{},"ΔU = 2 × 0.0175 × 30 × 16 × 0.95 \u002F 2.5 = 6.38 V",[11,18738,13324,18739,18742,18743,94],{},[35,18740,18741],{},"2.78%",". Other final circuits use the 5% value, so 2.5 mm² passes the voltage-drop criterion. Whether the cable carries enough current in its actual installation method is a separate check, covered in ",[23,18744,18745],{"href":9912},"Installation methods under AREI",[27,18747,18749],{"id":18748},"calculate-online-for-free","Calculate online for free",[11,18751,955,18752,18756],{},[23,18753,18755],{"href":18754},"\u002Fen\u002Ftools\u002Fcable-sizing-calculator-belgium","voltage-drop and cable-sizing calculator"," checks a selected cross-section or finds a preliminary size, free and without sign-up. It covers the three Belgian network types (1×230 V, 3×230 V and 3N~400\u002F230 V), distinguishes single-phase from three-phase circuits, and takes loads in A, W, kW or kVA for copper or aluminium. The result compares standard sizes and reports voltage drop and protection separately.",[11,18758,18759,18760,18763],{},"The calculation runs directly in the browser, so sliders and result respond instantly; the same calculation core is also available through the PlanElec API. The calculator is built for ",[35,18761,18762],{},"preliminary design",". Installation method, grouping, ambient temperature, insulation type, reactance, short-circuit withstand, disconnection conditions, terminals and manufacturer data belong to the professional design that follows.",[27,18765,18767],{"id":18766},"what-to-do-if-voltage-drop-is-too-high","What to do if voltage drop is too high",[11,18769,18770],{},"The most direct lever is a larger cross-section. Often a shorter route or a sub-board close to the loads is the better solution. Aluminium pays off on long feeders but needs suitable terminations and its own design checks. For an EV charger or heat pump, a three-phase supply sharply reduces current per phase at the same total power. Load management also keeps the service connection and protective device within their permitted range.",[27,18772,18774],{"id":18773},"common-mistakes","Common mistakes",[43,18776,18777,18783,18789,18795,18801],{},[46,18778,18779,18782],{},[35,18780,18781],{},"Applying 3% everywhere."," 3% applies to lighting, 5% to other final circuits.",[46,18784,18785,18788],{},[35,18786,18787],{},"Checking only the breaker table."," It does not contain length or actual load.",[46,18790,18791,18794],{},[35,18792,18793],{},"Entering the return distance too."," Enter the one-way length; factor 2 is already in the single-phase formula.",[46,18796,18797,18800],{},[35,18798,18799],{},"Forgetting upstream segments."," The voltage drops of all segments add up.",[46,18802,18803,18806],{},[35,18804,18805],{},"Treating voltage drop as the whole design."," Installation method and short-circuit behaviour are separate checks.",[27,18808,4995],{"id":4994},[385,18810,18812],{"id":18811},"do-i-enter-the-cable-length-one-way-or-there-and-back","Do I enter the cable length one way or there and back?",[11,18814,18815],{},"One way: the distance from the board to the load. In a single-phase circuit, factor 2 covers the return conductor; three-phase uses √3.",[385,18817,18819],{"id":18818},"can-a-lighting-circuit-use-15-mm","Can a lighting circuit use 1.5 mm²?",[11,18821,18822],{},"Yes. Table 5.1 under subsection 5.2.1.2 permits 1.5 mm² for circuits without socket outlets, protected under Table 4.11 by at most a 16 A circuit breaker or a 10 A fuse. A long run can still require 2.5 mm² or more because of voltage drop.",[385,18824,18826],{"id":18825},"is-a-larger-cross-section-always-better","Is a larger cross-section always better?",[11,18828,18829],{},"It reduces losses but costs more, takes up space and must fit the terminals. Choose the first size that passes every relevant check.",[385,18831,18833],{"id":18832},"what-else-does-the-inspection-need","What else does the inspection need?",[11,18835,18836,18837,18840],{},"The calculator delivers a traceable voltage-drop calculation. An ",[23,18838,18839],{"href":7093},"electrical inspection dossier"," also contains the single-line diagram, the situation plan and on-site measurements; the assessment is made by the accredited inspection body.",[27,18842,18844],{"id":18843},"from-a-preliminary-result-to-a-verifiable-design-record","From a preliminary result to a verifiable design record",[11,18846,18847],{},"A good calculation sheet records more than the final percentage. Note the board and circuit, every cable segment, the one-way route length, conductor material, phase connection, nominal voltage, design current and the source of that current: nameplate, manufacturer design sheet or explicit planning scenario. An assumed power factor stays visibly marked as an assumption.",[11,18849,18850],{},"Next, record the acceptance criterion and its source. Because section 5.2.5 refers to the rules of good practice, a project value may come from the applicable standard, a specification, a network operator requirement or equipment limits. The 3% and 5% in this article are the usual starting point; a sensitive load can require a narrower voltage range at its terminals.",[11,18852,18853],{},"Then keep the checks separate. Voltage drop answers one question. The conductor must also carry the current in its actual installation method, be coordinated with overload and short-circuit protection, meet disconnection conditions and thermal withstand, and fit the terminals and cable routes mechanically. Several individually acceptable segments can still add up to too much drop. The main feeder, sub-board feeder and final circuit therefore belong in one balance.",[11,18855,18856],{},"After installation, compare the documented route and conductor with the work on site. Measurements reveal supply conditions or contact resistances that a resistance-only model does not predict. When the route, material or phase assignment changes, update the single-line diagram and cable list. Such a record convinces the electrician and the inspector far more than a screenshot with a green tick.",[385,18858,18860],{"id":18859},"tracking-changes","Tracking changes",[11,18862,18863],{},"Keep inputs and results for each design version. If the cable length changes with the real route, the supply changes from single- to three-phase or the load changes to another appliance, recalculate and note the source. Compare percentage, end voltage and the cumulative segments. A larger conductor improves voltage drop but does not answer any open question on protection, terminals or installation.",[385,18865,18867],{"id":18866},"stating-the-result-correctly","Stating the result correctly",[11,18869,18870],{},"Do not write \"cable is compliant\", but for example: \"For the documented load, length, nominal voltage and stated project criterion, the resistance model gives this voltage drop.\" Add the points that are still open. A designer can then repeat the calculation, change inputs and attach the remaining sizing evidence. Mark a scenario calculation for a load that is not yet known as such, and replace it once the actual appliance is chosen. Also note whether the length comes from the plan, a measurement or a conservative assumption.",[27,18872,18874],{"id":18873},"checking-voltage-drop-in-your-project","Checking voltage drop in your project",[11,18876,222,18877,18879,18880,94],{},[23,18878,3710],{"href":5046},", you draw cable routes on the floor plan and their length flows into the circuit. The self-check uses it to calculate voltage drop for every final circuit against the 3% and 5% guide values and flags exceedances alongside the cross-section-versus-protection check. The rule coverage is listed in ",[23,18881,4403],{"href":2953},[27,18883,5054],{"id":4477},[43,18885,18886,18891,18895,18901],{},[46,18887,18888],{},[23,18889,18890],{"href":8687},"Cable cross-section by circuit breaker",[46,18892,18893],{},[23,18894,18698],{"href":18697},[46,18896,18897],{},[23,18898,18900],{"href":18899},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fev-charger-arei","Installing an EV charger under AREI\u002FRGIE",[46,18902,18903],{},[23,18904,18905],{"href":9626},"Dedicated circuits for appliances",[11,18907,5075,18908,18911],{},[23,18909,5079],{"href":4466,"rel":18910},[4434],", in particular section 3.2.2 (types of systems), subsections 4.4.1.4 and 5.2.1.2 and section 5.2.5.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":18913},[18914,18915,18916,18917,18918,18919,18923,18924,18925,18926,18932,18936,18937],{"id":18369,"depth":291,"text":18370},{"id":18379,"depth":291,"text":18380},{"id":18399,"depth":291,"text":18400},{"id":18451,"depth":291,"text":18452},{"id":18605,"depth":291,"text":18606},{"id":18701,"depth":291,"text":18702,"children":18920},[18921,18922],{"id":18705,"depth":599,"text":18706},{"id":18727,"depth":599,"text":18728},{"id":18748,"depth":291,"text":18749},{"id":18766,"depth":291,"text":18767},{"id":18773,"depth":291,"text":18774},{"id":4994,"depth":291,"text":4995,"children":18927},[18928,18929,18930,18931],{"id":18811,"depth":599,"text":18812},{"id":18818,"depth":599,"text":18819},{"id":18825,"depth":599,"text":18826},{"id":18832,"depth":599,"text":18833},{"id":18843,"depth":291,"text":18844,"children":18933},[18934,18935],{"id":18859,"depth":599,"text":18860},{"id":18866,"depth":599,"text":18867},{"id":18873,"depth":291,"text":18874},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":5054},"2026-08-02","Calculate the voltage drop of your cable and see at which length a larger cross-section is needed. Formula, length table and free calculator for Belgium.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fvoltage-drop-cable-sizing.en",{"title":18357,"description":18939},"blog\u002Fvoltage-drop-cable-sizing.en",[5113,18945,5115,18946],"cable-cross-section","arei","f3Z-H6aJjp90kBBP6BCpkUHoeUVL-xrnHmbXzojxpOM",{"id":18949,"title":18950,"articleId":18951,"body":18952,"category":5101,"date":19386,"description":19387,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":19388,"navigation":308,"path":19389,"publishDate":19386,"readTime":11041,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":19390,"seoTitle":19391,"slug":18951,"stem":19392,"tags":19393,"__hash__":19399},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fsingle-phase-vs-three-phase.en.md","Single-phase or three-phase? Belgian networks and building connections","single-phase-vs-three-phase",{"type":8,"value":18953,"toc":19368},[18954,18958,18964,18975,18979,19047,19051,19054,19058,19061,19098,19101,19104,19108,19138,19147,19151,19158,19161,19165,19168,19172,19175,19179,19182,19185,19189,19192,19206,19209,19213,19216,19219,19223,19261,19265,19271,19277,19283,19287,19290,19293,19295,19339,19341,19363],[27,18955,18957],{"id":18956},"short-answer-look-at-the-network-and-the-connection-separately","Short answer: look at the network and the connection separately",[11,18959,18960,18963],{},[35,18961,18962],{},"In Belgium you decide between single-phase and three-phase in two steps."," First you identify the low-voltage network in your street: 230 V without a neutral (3×230 V) or 400\u002F230 V with a neutral (3N~400\u002F230 V). Then you choose the building connection: single-phase or three-phase. Single-phase is enough for many homes; an 11 or 22 kW EV charger or a three-phase large appliance needs a suitable three-phase connection. The grid operator confirms what is available at your address.",[11,18965,18966,18967,18970,18971,18974],{},"“Single-phase = 1×230 V” therefore describes the connection, not the street network. A single-phase 230 V connection is supplied either ",[35,18968,18969],{},"phase–neutral"," from a 400\u002F230 V network or ",[35,18972,18973],{},"phase–phase"," from a 3×230 V network. ORES states explicitly that a single-phase connection does not always include a neutral conductor.",[27,18976,18978],{"id":18977},"the-four-combinations","The four combinations",[638,18980,18981,18997],{},[641,18982,18983],{},[644,18984,18985,18988,18991,18994],{},[647,18986,18987],{},"Street network",[647,18989,18990],{},"Building connection",[647,18992,18993],{},"Conductors at the connection",[647,18995,18996],{},"Technical notation",[657,18998,18999,19012,19023,19036],{},[644,19000,19001,19004,19006,19009],{},[662,19002,19003],{},"400\u002F230 V with N",[662,19005,18636],{},[662,19007,19008],{},"L + N",[662,19010,19011],{},"1×230 V, L–N",[644,19013,19014,19016,19018,19021],{},[662,19015,19003],{},[662,19017,18660],{},[662,19019,19020],{},"L1 + L2 + L3 + N",[662,19022,18670],{},[644,19024,19025,19028,19030,19033],{},[662,19026,19027],{},"230 V without N",[662,19029,18636],{},[662,19031,19032],{},"two line conductors",[662,19034,19035],{},"1×230 V, L–L",[644,19037,19038,19040,19042,19045],{},[662,19039,19027],{},[662,19041,18660],{},[662,19043,19044],{},"three line conductors",[662,19046,18646],{},[27,19048,19050],{"id":19049},"how-common-is-3230-v","How common is 3×230 V?",[11,19052,19053],{},"The 3×230 V network is everyday reality in Belgium. Fluvius still had 18,101 km of 230 V low-voltage network at the end of 2024, mainly in urban and western areas. Sibelga states that around 80% of the Brussels territory is supplied at 230 V. That does not make every Brussels household three-phase: Sibelga gives 9.2 kVA, single-phase 230 V at 40 A, as the standard for an average household.",[27,19055,19057],{"id":19056},"power-at-the-same-current-rating","Power at the same current rating",[11,19059,19060],{},"Available power depends on voltage, number of phases and connection current. For 40 A, ORES lists:",[638,19062,19063,19073],{},[641,19064,19065],{},[644,19066,19067,19069],{},[647,19068,2724],{},[647,19070,19072],{"align":19071},"right","Apparent power at 40 A",[657,19074,19075,19083,19091],{},[644,19076,19077,19080],{},[662,19078,19079],{},"Single-phase 230 V",[662,19081,19082],{"align":19071},"9.2 kVA",[644,19084,19085,19088],{},[662,19086,19087],{},"Three-phase 3×230 V",[662,19089,19090],{"align":19071},"15.9 kVA",[644,19092,19093,19095],{},[662,19094,18577],{},[662,19096,19097],{"align":19071},"27.7 kVA",[11,19099,19100],{},"The calculation: single-phase apparent power is voltage times current (230 V × 40 A ≈ 9.2 kVA). For a balanced three-phase load you multiply line-to-line voltage, current and √3 (230 V × 40 A × 1.73 ≈ 15.9 kVA; 400 V × 40 A × 1.73 ≈ 27.7 kVA). These figures give the technical order of magnitude. Your contracted capacity is set by the connection breaker and the grid operator; the real power an appliance can use also depends on its power factor.",[11,19102,19103],{},"With an unbalanced distribution, each line conductor counts on its own. A large total capacity does not help if many single-phase loads sit on the same phase.",[27,19105,19107],{"id":19106},"what-this-means-for-ev-chargers-heat-pumps-and-pv","What this means for EV chargers, heat pumps and PV",[43,19109,19110,19119,19129],{},[46,19111,19112,19115,19116,94],{},[35,19113,19114],{},"EV charger:"," 3.7 or 7.4 kW often works single-phase. 11 or 22 kW normally needs a suitable three-phase connection. Not every charger runs on 3×230 V; Sibelga points out limitations for 11\u002F22 kW charging. Design and obligations are covered in ",[23,19117,19118],{"href":18899},"EV chargers and the AREI",[46,19120,19121,19124,19125,94],{},[35,19122,19123],{},"Heat pump and hob:"," the nameplate decides. An appliance designed for 3N~400 V does not simply run on 3×230 V without a neutral. How to show the heat pump in the diagram is explained in ",[23,19126,19128],{"href":19127},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fheat-pump-single-line-diagram","heat pump single-line diagram",[46,19130,19131,19134,19135,94],{},[35,19132,19133],{},"PV:"," the permitted inverter power and phase distribution are set by the grid operator for the specific connection; there is no single Belgian limit. More in ",[23,19136,19137],{"href":15913},"documenting a PV system",[11,19139,19140,19141,2152,19144,94],{},"Before buying a large appliance, always check both: ",[35,19142,19143],{},"single- or three-phase",[35,19145,19146],{},"230 V without N or 400\u002F230 V with N",[27,19148,19150],{"id":19149},"protection-and-rcds-on-a-3230-v-network","Protection and RCDs on a 3×230 V network",[11,19152,19153,19154,19157],{},"On a 3×230 V network, both active conductors of a 230 V circuit are line conductors. Book 1 of the AREI\u002FRGIE, Belgium's general regulations for electrical installations, requires in subsection 4.4.4.2 overcurrent detection on ",[35,19155,19156],{},"both active conductors"," in single-phase and two-phase circuits of domestic installations. Exception: a residual current device at the same level also contains overcurrent detection on one line conductor and disconnects both active conductors. In practice you therefore plan circuit breakers with two protected poles on 3×230 V. For three-phase circuits without a distributed neutral, subsection 4.4.4.3 sets out when one line conductor may remain without its own overcurrent detection.",[11,19159,19160],{},"An RCD does not need a neutral as a “reference”. It compares the currents in all active conductors passing through it. On 3×230 V it therefore measures and switches all line conductors involved together and protects just as effectively as on 3N~400\u002F230 V.",[27,19162,19164],{"id":19163},"distributing-the-phases-sensibly","Distributing the phases sensibly",[11,19166,19167],{},"With a three-phase connection, spread the single-phase loads as evenly as possible across the phases. The AREI sets no percentage for this. A warning threshold such as 30% is a design aid, not an AREI requirement. With a single-phase connection there is nothing to distribute. Document the assignment in the board and check it after every change.",[27,19169,19171],{"id":19170},"how-to-identify-your-connection","How to identify your connection",[11,19173,19174],{},"Look at the meter, the connection breaker and the incoming conductors without opening any parts sealed by the grid operator. ORES shows example photos of single-phase 230 V, 3×230 V and 3×400 V + N. Counting visible wires easily misleads, because the protective conductor, internal wiring or an older installation add to the count. Binding confirmation comes from the grid operator or an electrician.",[27,19176,19178],{"id":19177},"from-load-list-to-connection-decision","From load list to connection decision",[11,19180,19181],{},"Draw up a load list before you apply for more capacity. Separate continuous loads, short simultaneous peaks and controllable loads. Hob, heat pump, instantaneous water heater, EV charger and inverter have different profiles. The sum of all nameplates is therefore not automatically the capacity you need; dropping large loads without calculation is just as wrong. Load management limits peaks when it matches the appliance, meter and grid-operator procedure.",[11,19183,19184],{},"Record four data points per appliance: permitted supply voltage, need for a neutral, number of phases and maximum current per phase. Add inrush current, power factor and manufacturer conditions where they matter. “Three-phase” alone is not enough: a motor or charger for 3N~400 V may need a neutral or a different internal connection than a load for 3×230 V. Protection, cross-section, disconnection conditions and phase rotation are the electrician's call.",[27,19186,19188],{"id":19187},"upgrading-or-converting-with-the-grid-operator","Upgrading or converting with the grid operator",[11,19190,19191],{},"Costs and lead times are set by the competent grid operator; there is no Belgian flat rate. They depend on the requested capacity, the street infrastructure, the meter position and the required changes to the internal installation. Prepare your request like this:",[105,19193,19194,19197,19200,19203],{},[46,19195,19196],{},"Have the EAN or connection reference, current rating and desired capacity ready.",[46,19198,19199],{},"Add appliance data and the planned commissioning date.",[46,19201,19202],{},"Ask explicitly about the available voltage, number of phases and neutral at the address.",[46,19204,19205],{},"Agree with the electrician what changes at the meter position, supply cable, main board, RCDs and phase distribution.",[11,19207,19208],{},"Only then can you compare the grid offer and internal works sensibly. After a significant change you update the single-line diagram and situation plan; whether a new inspection is required depends on the scope and nature of the change.",[27,19210,19212],{"id":19211},"the-supply-in-the-single-line-diagram","The supply in the single-line diagram",[11,19214,19215],{},"At the supply point, record voltage, type of current and connection configuration. Show the main protection and all active conductors unambiguously. On a 3×230 V network you do not draw a neutral; on 3N~400\u002F230 V it appears where it is actually distributed. After a conversion you check board occupancy, protective devices, conductors and final circuits and bring the drawings up to the as-built state. Keep the previous version and create a new, dated one.",[11,19217,19218],{},"In PlanElec you document the street network (with or without neutral) and the building connection (single- or three-phase) as separate settings; the valid phase assignments for your circuits follow from them. The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check warns about single-pole circuit breakers in homes (4.4.4.2), about phase imbalance above 30% as a practice recommendation and about implausible combinations of a 3×230 V connection with the stored earthing system. The grid operator confirms the available network and capacity; the inspection is carried out by the recognised inspection body.",[27,19220,19222],{"id":19221},"common-decision-errors","Common decision errors",[43,19224,19225,19231,19237,19243,19249,19255],{},[46,19226,19227,19230],{},[35,19228,19229],{},"Reading only the meter:"," the display does not fully explain the network and conductor configuration.",[46,19232,19233,19236],{},[35,19234,19235],{},"Treating 3×230 V and 3N~400\u002F230 V as equal:"," both are three-phase but give the appliance different voltages and conductors.",[46,19238,19239,19242],{},[35,19240,19241],{},"Treating kVA as kW:"," power factor and appliance determine the real power.",[46,19244,19245,19248],{},[35,19246,19247],{},"Taking charging power as connection capacity:"," the other simultaneous loads and load management are then missing.",[46,19250,19251,19254],{},[35,19252,19253],{},"Leaving the drawings after a conversion:"," supply, protection chain and phase assignment no longer match reality.",[46,19256,19257,19260],{},[35,19258,19259],{},"Opening sealed parts:"," you identify the connection from visible information, the grid operator or a professional.",[27,19262,19264],{"id":19263},"three-typical-starting-points","Three typical starting points",[11,19266,19267,19270],{},[35,19268,19269],{},"Existing 1×230 V:"," first check the actual rating and whether a neutral is present. An EV charger with limited single-phase power and load management is often feasible; vehicle, charger, household load and grid operator decide. A high kW figure in a brochure proves no available capacity.",[11,19272,19273,19276],{},[35,19274,19275],{},"Existing 3×230 V:"," spread single-phase loads across the phase pairs and explicitly check each three-phase appliance for operation without a neutral. An appliance that internally needs 230 V to neutral does not fit just because its data sheet says “three-phase”.",[11,19278,19279,19282],{},[35,19280,19281],{},"Existing 3N~400\u002F230 V:"," single-phase loads connect between line and neutral, three-phase appliances as specified by the manufacturer. A high calculated connection capacity does not lift the current limit per phase or the requirements for protection and cross-section.",[27,19284,19286],{"id":19285},"measurement-and-commissioning","Measurement and commissioning",[11,19288,19289],{},"You do not derive the final assignment from documents alone. A professional measures the actual voltage configuration, without opening grid-operator areas without authorisation, and checks phase rotation, neutral and protective conductor. After changes, the prescribed checks and measurements of the affected parts follow.",[11,19291,19292],{},"For controllable large loads, also watch their behaviour in operation. Load management must switch to a safe, documented state on loss of communication or incorrect readings. The configured limit matches the connection protection and accounts for peaks, not just averages. Changed settings are documented like any other design-relevant change.",[27,19294,7108],{"id":2115},[43,19296,19297,19304,19311,19318,19325,19332],{},[46,19298,19299],{},[23,19300,19303],{"href":19301,"rel":19302},"https:\u002F\u002Fwww.ores.be\u002Fparticulier\u002Freconnaitre-informations-techniques\u002F",[4434],"ORES: Identifying technical connection information",[46,19305,19306],{},[23,19307,19310],{"href":19308,"rel":19309},"https:\u002F\u002Fwww.sibelga.be\u002Fen\u002Fconnections-meters\u002Fmy-connection\u002Felectrical-power",[4434],"Sibelga: Electrical capacity and connection types",[46,19312,19313],{},[23,19314,19317],{"href":19315,"rel":19316},"https:\u002F\u002Fwww.sibelga.be\u002Fen\u002Fconnections-meters\u002Felectric-charging\u002Fcharging-at-home",[4434],"Sibelga: Charging at home",[46,19319,19320],{},[23,19321,19324],{"href":19322,"rel":19323},"https:\u002F\u002Fover.fluvius.be\u002Fsites\u002Ffluvius\u002Ffiles\u002F2025-06\u002Finvesteringsplan-2026-2035-versie-publieke-consultatie.pdf",[4434],"Fluvius: Investment plan 2026–2035",[46,19326,19327],{},[23,19328,19331],{"href":19329,"rel":19330},"https:\u002F\u002Fdownload.schneider-electric.com\u002Ffiles?p_File_Id=905251744&p_File_Name=ECT114.pdf&p_Reference=ECT114&p_enDocType=Cahier+Technique",[4434],"Schneider Electric: RCD operating principle, including three-phase circuits without neutral",[46,19333,19334,19338],{},[23,19335,19337],{"href":4466,"rel":19336},[4434],"FPS Economy: RGIE\u002FAREI Book 1, version 06, current official publication",", subsections 4.4.4.2 and 4.4.4.3",[27,19340,5054],{"id":4477},[43,19342,19343,19348,19353,19358],{},[46,19344,19345],{},[23,19346,19347],{"href":4918},"Calculate voltage drop and choose a cable size",[46,19349,19350],{},[23,19351,19352],{"href":18899},"Installing an EV charger in Belgium",[46,19354,19355],{},[23,19356,19357],{"href":15913},"Registering and documenting a PV system",[46,19359,19360],{},[23,19361,19362],{"href":8786},"Earthing TT or TN-S in Belgium",[11,19364,19365],{},[23,19366,19367],{"href":17817},"Document the network and building connection separately in PlanElec →",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":19369},[19370,19371,19372,19373,19374,19375,19376,19377,19378,19379,19380,19381,19382,19383,19384,19385],{"id":18956,"depth":291,"text":18957},{"id":18977,"depth":291,"text":18978},{"id":19049,"depth":291,"text":19050},{"id":19056,"depth":291,"text":19057},{"id":19106,"depth":291,"text":19107},{"id":19149,"depth":291,"text":19150},{"id":19163,"depth":291,"text":19164},{"id":19170,"depth":291,"text":19171},{"id":19177,"depth":291,"text":19178},{"id":19187,"depth":291,"text":19188},{"id":19211,"depth":291,"text":19212},{"id":19221,"depth":291,"text":19222},{"id":19263,"depth":291,"text":19264},{"id":19285,"depth":291,"text":19286},{"id":2115,"depth":291,"text":7108},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":5054},"2026-07-27","1×230 V, 3×230 V or 3N~400\u002F230 V: understand the Belgian street network, neutral conductor and connection phase count, and plan protection, EV charger and heat pump accordingly.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fsingle-phase-vs-three-phase.en",{"title":18950,"description":19387},"Single-Phase or Three-Phase? Connections in Belgium","blog\u002Fsingle-phase-vs-three-phase.en",[1979,1980,18636,18660,2981,19394,19395,19396,16337,19397,19398,319],"Fluvius","ORES","Sibelga","heat pump","solar panels","_gyZt0id2XzgQwJijrrQlTkdb6ek_wQ2ojPbKDVTn6A",{"id":19401,"title":19402,"articleId":19403,"body":19404,"category":5101,"date":311,"description":19951,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":19952,"navigation":308,"path":19953,"publishDate":311,"readTime":11041,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":19954,"seoTitle":305,"slug":19403,"stem":19955,"tags":19956,"__hash__":19962},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Frenovation-electrical-plans.en.md","Renovation and AREI: When Do You Need New Electrical Plans?","renovation-electrical-plans",{"type":8,"value":19405,"toc":19925},[19406,19410,19421,19424,19428,19528,19532,19564,19567,19571,19574,19580,19583,19587,19594,19601,19604,19608,19611,19631,19635,19638,19658,19661,19665,19669,19672,19675,19679,19682,19685,19689,19692,19695,19699,19702,19706,19710,19713,19717,19720,19724,19727,19731,19754,19757,19761,19767,19770,19774,19777,19805,19808,19812,19815,19848,19851,19878,19882,19893,19895,19920],[27,19407,19409],{"id":19408},"when-does-a-renovation-lead-to-new-plans-and-an-inspection","When does a renovation lead to new plans and an inspection?",[11,19411,19412,19413,19416,19417,19420],{},"The electrical scope decides, not the word “renovation”. A ",[35,19414,19415],{},"substantial alteration or extension"," needs an updated single-line diagram and situation plan and undergoes a conformity inspection before it is put into use. That inspection is limited to the added or modified parts; an unchanged part is only included for the characteristics the alteration affects (AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 V06, Subsection 6.4.7.3). A ",[35,19418,19419],{},"non-substantial alteration"," does not need a new single-line diagram: a short dated and signed description is enough, and the situation plan still shows the change (Subsection 3.1.2.1 a).",[11,19422,19423],{},"The AREI contains no list that automatically classifies every moved socket as “substantial” or “non-substantial”. Agree the classification with your electrician before work starts and, when in doubt, with the inspection body.",[27,19425,19427],{"id":19426},"which-work-triggers-what","Which work triggers what?",[638,19429,19430,19444],{},[641,19431,19432],{},[644,19433,19434,19436,19439,19442],{},[647,19435,12591],{},[647,19437,19438],{},"Documents",[647,19440,19441],{},"Inspection",[647,19443,9490],{},[657,19445,19446,19460,19473,19486,19500,19514],{},[644,19447,19448,19451,19454,19457],{},[662,19449,19450],{},"Substantial alteration or extension",[662,19452,19453],{},"draw up or update the single-line diagram and situation plan",[662,19455,19456],{},"conformity inspection of modified and added parts before use",[662,19458,19459],{},"3.1.2.1 a, 6.4.7.3",[644,19461,19462,19465,19468,19471],{},[662,19463,19464],{},"The alteration affects an unchanged part",[662,19466,19467],{},"document the effect",[662,19469,19470],{},"the unchanged part is inspected for the modified characteristics and mentioned in the report",[662,19472,12719],{},[644,19474,19475,19478,19481,19484],{},[662,19476,19477],{},"Non-substantial alteration",[662,19479,19480],{},"dated, signed short description; situation plan shows the current state",[662,19482,19483],{},"no conformity inspection before use required",[662,19485,7373],{},[644,19487,19488,19491,19494,19497],{},[662,19489,19490],{},"Substantial alteration of an old installation (begun before 1 October 1981)",[662,19492,19493],{},"as above; older parts marked “older part” on the diagram",[662,19495,19496],{},"whole installation behind at least one RCD of at most 300 mA at the origin",[662,19498,19499],{},"3.1.2.1 a, 4.2.4.3 b",[644,19501,19502,19505,19508,19511],{},[662,19503,19504],{},"Complete renewal of the installation",[662,19506,19507],{},"full set of plans, as for a new installation",[662,19509,19510],{},"conformity inspection before use",[662,19512,19513],{},"Chapter 6.4",[644,19515,19516,19519,19522,19525],{},[662,19517,19518],{},"Like-for-like replacement of a device",[662,19520,19521],{},"record type and characteristics of the replacement",[662,19523,19524],{},"classified by the electrician as soon as location, cable, protection or function changes",[662,19526,19527],{},"no specific rule",[27,19529,19531],{"id":19530},"a-practical-decision-path","A practical decision path",[105,19533,19534,19540,19546,19552,19558],{},[46,19535,19536,19539],{},[35,19537,19538],{},"Is the work purely non-electrical?"," Painting or new flooring does not change the electrical installation.",[46,19541,19542,19545],{},[35,19543,19544],{},"Is only one device replaced like for like?"," Document the replacement and check that characteristics and protection concept stay the same.",[46,19547,19548,19551],{},[35,19549,19550],{},"Are new cables, circuits, sources or a new board added?"," Treat the project as a possible substantial alteration or extension until the electrician has classified it.",[46,19553,19554,19557],{},[35,19555,19556],{},"Do voltage, supply type, earthing or the protection chain change?"," Then the effect reaches beyond the new component.",[46,19559,19560,19563],{},[35,19561,19562],{},"Which existing sections are affected?"," Delimit them by circuit, board and real cable route.",[11,19565,19566],{},"A new sub-board, an extra circuit for an EV charger or heat pump, a board replacement or a change of supply therefore goes to your electrician early. A cover plate, luminaire or switch replaced like for like, without changing the electrical characteristics, is closer to maintenance.",[27,19568,19570],{"id":19569},"is-there-a-contamination-rule","Is there a “contamination rule”?",[11,19572,19573],{},"No. The popular term claims that any small change makes the whole house subject to inspection under current rules. Book 1 does not say that. The inspection of a substantial alteration covers the modified and added parts; an unchanged part is only inspected for the characteristics that the alteration shifts (Subsection 6.4.7.3).",[11,19575,19576,19577,19579],{},"There is, however, one rule that reaches the whole installation, and it concerns old installations: when an old domestic installation as referred to in Part 8 undergoes a substantial alteration or extension, at least one RCD of at most 300 mA at the origin protects the ",[35,19578,10648],{}," installation (Subsection 4.2.4.3 b). Plan this RCD into any larger renovation of a house with an old installation.",[11,19581,19582],{},"Delimit the work clearly: record which circuits, cable sections, protective devices and rooms are touched. Mark the existing installation, the new part and shared protection or supply points. This documentation makes the inspection scope understandable; what the approved body inspects, it decides itself.",[27,19584,19586],{"id":19585},"what-part-8-really-does","What Part 8 really does",[11,19588,19589,19590,19593],{},"Part 8 contains specific derogations for ",[35,19591,19592],{},"existing parts",", depending on when they were installed. Section 8.2.1 covers old domestic installations whose construction began before 1 October 1981; Section 8.2.2 covers installations inspected under the former AREI. Every derogation has a precise scope and often conditions. New or substantially altered parts are designed to current requirements.",[11,19595,19596,19597,19600],{},"Important for the documents: for existing parts of old installations, Section 8.2.1 No. 7 allows a ",[35,19598,19599],{},"simplified"," single-line diagram with address, nominal voltage, cross-section of the main board’s supply cable, type and cross-section of the outgoing ways and the residual current and other protective devices with their characteristics, and a simplified situation plan with sockets, switches, lighting points and fixed appliances.",[11,19602,19603],{},"For each existing section, record the installation period, existing inspection reports, cable and protection data and later changes. A house from the 1960s often contains components from several decades. The year the building was constructed therefore does not prove which derogation applies to a given circuit.",[27,19605,19607],{"id":19606},"house-with-existing-plans","House with existing plans",[11,19609,19610],{},"If a current single-line diagram and situation plan exist:",[105,19612,19613,19619,19625],{},[46,19614,19615,19618],{},[35,19616,19617],{},"Update the plans:"," draw new circuits and changed positions.",[46,19620,19621,19624],{},[35,19622,19623],{},"Distinguish old and new:"," make modified and unchanged parts recognisable.",[46,19626,19627,19630],{},[35,19628,19629],{},"Raise the version:"," adjust number, version and version date, then present the updated plans to the approved body.",[27,19632,19634],{"id":19633},"house-without-plans","House without plans",[11,19636,19637],{},"Many older houses have no documents at all. Then:",[105,19639,19640,19646,19652],{},[46,19641,19642,19645],{},[35,19643,19644],{},"New and substantially altered parts"," get a complete single-line diagram and situation plan (Subsection 3.1.2.1 a).",[46,19647,19648,19651],{},[35,19649,19650],{},"Existing parts from before 1981"," that appear on the diagram are marked “older part”; for them, the simplified set under Section 8.2.1 No. 7 is sufficient.",[46,19653,19654,19657],{},[35,19655,19656],{},"The installation file"," under Section 9.1.2 contains the diagrams and plans of the installation. If they are missing at the inspection visit on sale, the approved body records this as an infringement; its brief description and rough sketch do not replace a single-line diagram (Subsection 8.4.2.2 d).",[11,19659,19660],{},"If you are renovating anyway, survey the existing installation at the same time. That survey belongs in the quotation as a separate item.",[27,19662,19664],{"id":19663},"documentation-during-a-renovation","Documentation during a renovation",[385,19666,19668],{"id":19667},"survey-without-dangerous-assumptions","Survey without dangerous assumptions",[11,19670,19671],{},"Start with existing inspection reports, plans, invoices and labels and compare them with the real board. For the survey, a professional switches circuits off in a controlled way and records which points actually go dead; work on live parts and inside the board belongs in qualified hands. A presumed cable route stays marked as a presumption, not drawn as fact.",[11,19673,19674],{},"Make a list per circuit: reference, rooms supplied, visible cable type and cross-section, protective device, RCD, known boxes and permanently connected appliances. Keep unknown values separate from confirmed ones. Photos record labels and condition; they replace neither measurement nor diagram.",[385,19676,19678],{"id":19677},"split-the-renovation-into-work-packages","Split the renovation into work packages",[11,19680,19681],{},"Separate safety defects, adjustments needed for the new scope and desired comfort extensions. You then see what must be settled before commissioning and what can follow later. Look at shared points first: main board, earthing, supply and shared RCDs connect several rooms. A new kitchen circuit is local in space but touches the board and its protection chain electrically.",[11,19683,19684],{},"For each package, document the initial state, the planned change, the affected existing characteristics and the final state. Settle the substantial or non-substantial classification before plastering. Inspection scope, measurements and accessible test points determine the schedule and the appointment.",[385,19686,19688],{"id":19687},"produce-the-as-built-state","Produce the as-built state",[11,19690,19691],{},"Do not copy planned positions into the final version without checking. Compare sockets, switches, lighting points, boxes and fixed appliances room by room, then match each circuit with its protective device, cable data and board position. Older parts whose construction began before 1 October 1981 carry the note “older part” on the single-line diagram when they are shown.",[11,19693,19694],{},"Diagrams and plans carry number, version and version date. A short change note names the rooms or circuits worked on. Keep earlier approved versions; they show when each existing section was created. The current plans stay available on site for supervision, inspection, maintenance, repair and alteration (Subsection 3.1.2.1 d).",[385,19696,19698],{"id":19697},"handle-the-inspection-report","Handle the inspection report",[11,19700,19701],{},"Give the approved body the requested plans and documents in readable form. A finding does not disappear with a nicer drawing: a measured value, wrong execution or unsuitable equipment is fixed technically. Then the installation and the documents are brought back to the same state. Inspection report, signed plans, measurements and manufacturer documents go into the installation file.",[27,19703,19705],{"id":19704},"three-examples-of-scope","Three examples of scope",[385,19707,19709],{"id":19708},"the-bathroom-is-completely-renewed","The bathroom is completely renewed",[11,19711,19712],{},"New cables, sockets, lighting and protective measures are recorded as the new scope of work. Also document which supply and which board branch feed the bathroom. The electrician checks bathroom zones, protection, cables and bonding against the real execution. Other rooms are not inspected by default; shared or affected characteristics are part of the scope, though.",[385,19714,19716],{"id":19715},"an-existing-circuit-is-repaired","An existing circuit is repaired",[11,19718,19719],{},"Replace the faulty device like for like, record type and characteristics and have the safe restoration checked. As soon as location, cable, protection or function changes, the electrician reclassifies the work. The word “repair” does not hide a real extension.",[385,19721,19723],{"id":19722},"the-board-is-replaced","The board is replaced",[11,19725,19726],{},"A new board touches many shared protection and assignment data. Before removal, all outgoing ways are recorded unambiguously. After the work, labels, RCD groups, phases, cables and diagrams match the installed layout. Unknown old circuits are identified before connection, not carried forward under generic names.",[27,19728,19730],{"id":19729},"questions-for-the-first-meeting","Questions for the first meeting",[43,19732,19733,19736,19739,19742,19745,19748,19751],{},[46,19734,19735],{},"Which parts will be new, moved, replaced or left unchanged?",[46,19737,19738],{},"Which existing data are proven, and which must be measured or opened up?",[46,19740,19741],{},"Which shared protection or supply points are affected?",[46,19743,19744],{},"Is the work a substantial alteration or extension, and who confirms that?",[46,19746,19747],{},"Is it an old installation that needs an RCD at the origin after the work?",[46,19749,19750],{},"Which plans, descriptions, measurements and manufacturer documents are needed?",[46,19752,19753],{},"When do the inspection and the document release take place in the schedule?",[11,19755,19756],{},"In occupied homes, also plan safe intermediate states. Unfinished circuits stay clearly out of service and labelled. Temporary supplies are installed properly and documented separately. After each phase, record which parts already match the as-built plan and which are still a working state.",[27,19758,19760],{"id":19759},"planning-effort-and-cost","Planning effort and cost",[11,19762,19763,19764,94],{},"Cost depends on the survey, missing documentation, number of circuits, measurements, the scope of the works and the inspection body. Price ranges found online are no substitute for a quotation. Ask for separate items for survey, design, execution, first inspection and possible rework; how to compare such quotations is explained in ",[23,19765,19766],{"href":9278},"What does an electrical plan cost?",[11,19768,19769],{},"During early access PlanElec costs EUR 0. For the period after the paid plans start, which we will announce well in advance, the prices are published: Free stays free, single property costs EUR 15 per property and Pro EUR 29 per month, excluding VAT.",[27,19771,19773],{"id":19772},"what-planelec-contributes-to-renovations","What PlanElec contributes to renovations",[11,19775,19776],{},"PlanElec links floor plan, topology, board, single-line diagram and situation plan in one project. With it you can:",[43,19778,19779,19785,19792,19799],{},[46,19780,19781,19782,19784],{},"survey and document the ",[35,19783,6227],{},";",[46,19786,19787,19788,19791],{},"add ",[35,19789,19790],{},"new circuits"," and test them with the indicative AREI\u002FRGIE self-check against the supported rules;",[46,19793,19794,19795,19798],{},"keep ",[35,19796,19797],{},"old and new"," traceable in the same model;",[46,19800,19801,19802,19804],{},"export the single-line diagram and situation plan as ",[35,19803,2263],{}," with consistent references.",[11,19806,19807],{},"The material list and the working dossier are available as pilot features with stated limits. The roles are clear: PlanElec provides the structured documentation, the electrician designs and installs, and the approved body gives the official assessment.",[27,19809,19811],{"id":19810},"checklist-for-renovators","Checklist for renovators",[11,19813,19814],{},"Before you start:",[43,19816,19818,19824,19830,19836,19842],{"className":19817},[15704],[46,19819,19821,19823],{"className":19820},[15708],[7009,19822],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Is the work a substantial alteration or extension?",[46,19825,19827,19829],{"className":19826},[15708],[7009,19828],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Existing electrical plans and inspection reports located?",[46,19831,19833,19835],{"className":19832},[15708],[7009,19834],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Old installation? Then plan the RCD at the origin.",[46,19837,19839,19841],{"className":19838},[15708],[7009,19840],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Budget for survey, documentation and inspection planned?",[46,19843,19845,19847],{"className":19844},[15708],[7009,19846],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Electrician involved early?",[11,19849,19850],{},"After the renovation:",[43,19852,19854,19860,19866,19872],{"className":19853},[15704],[46,19855,19857,19859],{"className":19856},[15708],[7009,19858],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Single-line diagram and situation plan match the installed state?",[46,19861,19863,19865],{"className":19862},[15708],[7009,19864],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," All new circuits on the single-line diagram?",[46,19867,19869,19871],{"className":19868},[15708],[7009,19870],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Inspection body booked?",[46,19873,19875,19877],{"className":19874},[15708],[7009,19876],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Report and any findings handled with the electrician?",[27,19879,19881],{"id":19880},"official-source","Official source",[43,19883,19884,19890],{},[46,19885,19886],{},[23,19887,19889],{"href":4466,"rel":19888},[4434],"FPS Economy: RGIE\u002FAREI Book 1, Version 06",[46,19891,19892],{},"Especially relevant: Section 3.1.2, Subsection 4.2.4.3 b, Subsection 6.4.7.3, Sections 8.2.1 and 8.4.2 and Section 9.1.2.",[27,19894,5054],{"id":4477},[43,19896,19897,19903,19908,19914],{},[46,19898,19899],{},[23,19900,19902],{"href":19901},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fold-arei-part-8","Old wiring in Belgium: AREI Part 8 explained",[46,19904,19905],{},[23,19906,19907],{"href":9278},"What does an electrical plan cost? Cost factors 2026",[46,19909,19910],{},[23,19911,19913],{"href":19912},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fwhat-inspector-checks","What does the inspector check during the inspection?",[46,19915,19916],{},[23,19917,19919],{"href":19918},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fproperty-sale-electrical-dossier","Electrical dossier for property sales",[11,19921,19922],{},[23,19923,19924],{"href":17817},"Document the renovation state in PlanElec →",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":19926},[19927,19928,19929,19930,19931,19932,19933,19934,19940,19945,19946,19947,19948,19949,19950],{"id":19408,"depth":291,"text":19409},{"id":19426,"depth":291,"text":19427},{"id":19530,"depth":291,"text":19531},{"id":19569,"depth":291,"text":19570},{"id":19585,"depth":291,"text":19586},{"id":19606,"depth":291,"text":19607},{"id":19633,"depth":291,"text":19634},{"id":19663,"depth":291,"text":19664,"children":19935},[19936,19937,19938,19939],{"id":19667,"depth":599,"text":19668},{"id":19677,"depth":599,"text":19678},{"id":19687,"depth":599,"text":19688},{"id":19697,"depth":599,"text":19698},{"id":19704,"depth":291,"text":19705,"children":19941},[19942,19943,19944],{"id":19708,"depth":599,"text":19709},{"id":19715,"depth":599,"text":19716},{"id":19722,"depth":599,"text":19723},{"id":19729,"depth":291,"text":19730},{"id":19759,"depth":291,"text":19760},{"id":19772,"depth":291,"text":19773},{"id":19810,"depth":291,"text":19811},{"id":19880,"depth":291,"text":19881},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":5054},"Which renovation triggers new plans and a conformity inspection: substantial and non-substantial alterations, modified and unchanged parts, old installations under Part 8 and the file obligation.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Frenovation-electrical-plans.en",{"title":19402,"description":19951},"blog\u002Frenovation-electrical-plans.en",[1979,1980,19957,19958,19959,19960,6227,19961,6227,319,317,2981,7239],"renovation","remodelling","electrical plans","re-inspection","Part 8","vV9vc25oEzVf0DGfZwJR7S0uri6N5QlvY6EHNQMXg3c",{"id":19964,"title":19965,"articleId":19966,"body":19967,"category":5101,"date":311,"description":20438,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":20439,"navigation":308,"path":20440,"publishDate":311,"readTime":610,"refreshInterval":2436,"seo":20441,"seoTitle":20442,"slug":20443,"stem":20444,"tags":20445,"__hash__":20447},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fwhat-can-you-do-with-planelec.en.md","What Can You Do with PlanElec? From Floor Plan to Installation Dossier","planelec-capabilities-overview",{"type":8,"value":19968,"toc":20421},[19969,19975,19979,20066,20069,20073,20076,20080,20083,20092,20095,20099,20102,20119,20125,20129,20132,20155,20161,20165,20168,20171,20174,20178,20181,20188,20192,20257,20260,20266,20270,20273,20277,20280,20290,20296,20300,20320,20324,20330,20378,20381,20385,20388,20391,20394,20398,20401,20404,20407],[11,19970,19971,19974],{},[35,19972,19973],{},"With PlanElec, you plan a Belgian electrical installation in a single project: from floor plan through devices, cables, circuits and distribution board to single-line diagram, situation plan, AREI\u002FRGIE self-check and PDF dossier."," You model the spatial and electrical structure once and derive plans, lists and check findings from it. The PlanElec assistant carries out instructions in your own words, and recognition turns PDFs, scans and board photos into editable proposals. PlanElec is built first for electrical contractors and planners, and it is open to committed homeowners as well.",[27,19976,19978],{"id":19977},"the-workflow-at-a-glance","The workflow at a glance",[638,19980,19981,19992],{},[641,19982,19983],{},[644,19984,19985,19987,19990],{},[647,19986,17355],{},[647,19988,19989],{},"What you do in PlanElec",[647,19991,8896],{},[657,19993,19994,20005,20015,20025,20035,20045,20056],{},[644,19995,19996,19999,20002],{},[662,19997,19998],{},"Project",[662,20000,20001],{},"Create the building, floors and metadata",[662,20003,20004],{},"Shared basis for plans and title blocks",[644,20006,20007,20009,20012],{},[662,20008,2017],{},[662,20010,20011],{},"Draw walls and rooms, calibrate a reference image or recognise a plan",[662,20013,20014],{},"Spatial model",[644,20016,20017,20019,20022],{},[662,20018,5195],{},[662,20020,20021],{},"Place sockets, switches, lights, fixed connections and boards",[662,20023,20024],{},"Situation plan and consumer base",[644,20026,20027,20029,20032],{},[662,20028,2381],{},[662,20030,20031],{},"Connect circuits, protection devices, cables and branches",[662,20033,20034],{},"Electrical model",[644,20036,20037,20039,20042],{},[662,20038,3497],{},[662,20040,20041],{},"Arrange modules on DIN rails and check protection chains",[662,20043,20044],{},"Editable board layout",[644,20046,20047,20050,20053],{},[662,20048,20049],{},"Diagram and check",[662,20051,20052],{},"Review the single-line diagram and run the AREI\u002FRGIE self-check",[662,20054,20055],{},"Findings and a documentable diagram",[644,20057,20058,20060,20063],{},[662,20059,225],{},[662,20061,20062],{},"Produce individual PDFs or a selectable installation dossier",[662,20064,20065],{},"Project documents for review and coordination",[11,20067,20068],{},"At every step you can call on the PlanElec assistant: it works across the whole project model and has every change checked by the self-check.",[27,20070,20072],{"id":20071},"one-project-model-instead-of-separate-drawings","One project model instead of separate drawings",[11,20074,20075],{},"In traditional workflows the same information lives in several files: the floor plan, the diagram, the board sketch and a spreadsheet. PlanElec stores rooms, devices, electrical connections, circuits, cables and protection devices in one linked model. Move a device and its position changes on the situation plan. Change its electrical connection and the topology and single-line diagram follow. You still review every result, but you no longer maintain unrelated drawings.",[27,20077,20079],{"id":20078},"build-the-floor-plan-and-situation-plan","Build the floor plan and situation plan",[11,20081,20082],{},"In the floor-plan editor, you draw exterior and interior walls as a polygon, rectangle or individual wall segments. Closed areas become rooms that you name and classify. Doors, windows, stairs, dimensions, bathroom zones and multiple floors are part of it. An existing plan can be imported as an image, PDF or DXF underlay, rotated and calibrated against a known distance.",[11,20084,20085,20087,20088,20091],{},[35,20086,5724],{}," is faster: from a PDF, scan or photo (including a Trikker PDF export), PlanElec proposes walls, rooms with their area, doors, windows and supported device symbols. PlanElec reads the scale from dimension lines or the PDF scale, or you measure two points yourself. You correct the draft and import it into an empty floor; without a confirmed scale, the import stays locked. The article ",[23,20089,20090],{"href":5595},"Recognise floor plans and boards with AI"," has the details.",[11,20093,20094],{},"Then you place electrical symbols on walls or freely in the room: sockets and switches, lights and spotlights, fixed connections and special equipment such as a heat pump or EV charger, junction and branch boxes, and boards. The situation plan uses exactly those positions. A 3D view is available to all users; on small screens or without WebGL, you keep working in the 2D views.",[27,20096,20098],{"id":20097},"plan-with-the-planelec-assistant","Plan with the PlanElec assistant",[11,20100,20101],{},"You describe a task in your own words, in Dutch, French, German or English, and the assistant carries it out. It works with more than 100 planning commands across the whole project model: floor plan, rooms, devices, circuits, switch chains, cables, distribution board, automation\u002FKNX, PV strings and lighting control.",[43,20103,20104,20109,20114],{},[46,20105,20106,20108],{},[35,20107,18074],{}," after every change, PlanElec checks the project with the AREI\u002FRGIE self-check.",[46,20110,20111,20113],{},[35,20112,18080],{}," every change is a single undo step and appears in the project history with the person who requested it.",[46,20115,20116,20118],{},[35,20117,18089],{}," clear, reversible instructions run directly; risky actions wait for your confirmation. It never deletes projects.",[11,20120,20121,20122,94],{},"The assistant answers technical questions with verified sources from the PlanElec help and the full AREI\u002FRGIE text. The language model runs in the EU region; the AI provider does not store your requests or train on them. Read more in ",[23,20123,20124],{"href":5991},"AI assistant for electrical planning",[27,20126,20128],{"id":20127},"prepare-repetitive-planning-automatically","Prepare repetitive planning automatically",[11,20130,20131],{},"PlanElec takes routine work off your hands. Every automatic step delivers a proposal that you review on its own:",[43,20133,20134,20137,20140,20143,20146,20149,20152],{},[46,20135,20136],{},"proposals for sockets, lighting, standard equipment and spotlight grids;",[46,20138,20139],{},"automatic chaining of unassigned switches and lights in a room;",[46,20141,20142],{},"cable segments from the topology and routes along the walls;",[46,20144,20145],{},"automatic grouping and assignment of consumers to circuits;",[46,20147,20148],{},"separate handling of supported special appliances; an EV charger gets its own protection chain;",[46,20150,20151],{},"load distribution across several boards and phase balancing across L1, L2 and L3;",[46,20153,20154],{},"automatic placement of protection devices on DIN rails with 20 percent spare space.",[11,20156,20157,20158,20160],{},"Automatic assignment places standard circuits behind 30 mA residual current devices and connects no more than eight final circuits to each of them. That follows the limit in AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1, subsection 4.2.4.3.b, for residual current devices with high or very high sensitivity. Every proposal can be moved and reassigned; you add or override cable routes and lengths by hand. The guide ",[23,20159,4397],{"href":142}," shows the workflow in detail.",[27,20162,20164],{"id":20163},"plan-the-board-and-single-line-diagram-together","Plan the board and single-line diagram together",[11,20166,20167],{},"In the distribution board editor, you arrange the main switch, residual current devices (RCDs), circuit breakers and supported accessories on a real module grid. Protection devices are placed automatically, and you move or connect them by hand afterwards. With several phases, PlanElec shows the modelled loads and warns about a clear imbalance. Enclosure proposals take recorded module widths, spare space and accessories into account; with open data, they remain an estimate, not a thermal approval.",[11,20169,20170],{},"For existing installations, you upload photos of the board: PlanElec detects visible DIN modules with row, start position, width and type. You review the proposal and import it into an empty board. Hidden wiring is not visible in a photo; you define the electrical connections in the planning.",[11,20172,20173],{},"PlanElec derives the single-line diagram from the electrical topology. Consumer branches, protection devices, branches and cable data stay linked to the project model. When you change an assignment, the diagram is rebuilt from the current state. Missing or incorrect links stay visible instead of disappearing into a drawing.",[27,20175,20177],{"id":20176},"document-pv-knx-and-home-automation","Document PV, KNX and home automation",[11,20179,20180],{},"For photovoltaics, you assign strings to the inverter's MPPTs and document modules, DC protection, cable sections and frame PE. The same data feeds the single-line diagram, situation plan and material list. Missing string assignments or manufacturer data stay visible.",[11,20182,20183,20184,94],{},"KNX documentation is available in a pilot scope: KNX power supply, switching and blind actuators, channel assignment and push buttons appear in the single-line diagram, and a missing supply, missing protection or overload blocks the final export. ETS configuration and group addresses stay in ETS. With an active automation profile, you also export channel and terminal plans, room functions, topology and quantities individually or as a home-automation handover dossier. More in ",[23,20185,20187],{"href":20186},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fdomotica-knx-electrical-installation","Home automation and KNX in the electrical installation",[27,20189,20191],{"id":20190},"which-documents-can-you-export","Which documents can you export?",[638,20193,20194,20204],{},[641,20195,20196],{},[644,20197,20198,20201],{},[647,20199,20200],{},"Output",[647,20202,20203],{},"Status today",[657,20205,20206,20213,20219,20226,20233,20241,20249],{},[644,20207,20208,20211],{},[662,20209,20210],{},"Single-line diagram as a multi-page PDF",[662,20212,667],{},[644,20214,20215,20217],{},[662,20216,675],{},[662,20218,667],{},[644,20220,20221,20224],{},[662,20222,20223],{},"Advisory AREI\u002FRGIE self-check report",[662,20225,667],{},[644,20227,20228,20230],{},[662,20229,707],{},[662,20231,20232],{},"Available as soon as board data exists",[644,20234,20235,20238],{},[662,20236,20237],{},"Selectable installation dossier",[662,20239,20240],{},"Available with cover, index, page numbering and versioned archiving",[644,20242,20243,20246],{},[662,20244,20245],{},"Circuit, cable and detailed material lists",[662,20247,20248],{},"Pilot: manufacturer-neutral, no prices, default assumptions visible",[644,20250,20251,20254],{},[662,20252,20253],{},"Home-automation documents",[662,20255,20256],{},"With an active automation profile; watermarked draft, final once readiness is met",[11,20258,20259],{},"All professional documents carry your approved installer details and, optionally, your logo. You archive the dossier in versions on the server: every page carries the same dossier UUID, a 40 mm QR sticker leads to the archived version, and a SHA-256 check proves the file's origin and integrity. This archiving confirms the file, not the AREI\u002FRGIE compliance of the installation.",[11,20261,20262,20263,20265],{},"The material list breaks modelled assemblies down into quantities and shows them by category or room. Cable quantities are net lengths without an automatic waste factor. Known, partial and missing data are marked \"Known\", \"Partial\" and \"Missing\". Use the list as a basis for review and quotation; it is not an approval to order. ",[23,20264,236],{"href":235}," describes the status of each document and the download steps.",[27,20267,20269],{"id":20268},"what-does-planelec-check-against-the-areirgie","What does PlanElec check against the AREI\u002FRGIE?",[11,20271,20272],{},"The software-based self-check verifies a documented subset of the rules that can be decided from the recorded project data. It shows findings for supported areas and explicitly flags known coverage gaps and incomplete checks. A clean run means that, within the supported rules, PlanElec finds no error in your data. The report is your self-check, not a certificate of conformity; the official assessment is made by a recognized inspection body.",[385,20274,20276],{"id":20275},"how-large-is-that-coverage-exactly","How large is that coverage exactly?",[11,20278,20279],{},"An installer asked us directly: does PlanElec cover all of Book 1, including every exception, or the most common cases? The answer: the most common cases, clearly delimited.",[11,20281,955,20282,20285,20286,20289],{},[35,20283,20284],{},"integrated rule text"," is complete: Book 1, version 06, Parts 1 to 9, applicable since 1 April 2026. The ",[35,20287,20288],{},"automatic check logic"," focuses on protective measures, earthing, cable sizing and completeness of the file in a domestic AC installation. Of the fourteen chapters on special installations in Part 7, it touches three in part: rooms containing a bath or shower (7.1), supply of electric road vehicles (7.22) and domestic photovoltaic installations (7.112). Not included are the DC side with the L+, L-, M, PEM and PEL conductors and the transitional exceptions in articles 59 and 69 of the amending Royal Decree of 6 October 2025.",[11,20291,20292,20295],{},[23,20293,20294],{"href":2953},"The full list of what the self-check does and does not verify"," is in the knowledge base.",[27,20297,20299],{"id":20298},"who-is-planelec-for","Who is PlanElec for?",[43,20301,20302,20308,20314],{},[46,20303,20304,20307],{},[35,20305,20306],{},"Electrical contractors"," get one continuous path from survey to plans, lists and dossier.",[46,20309,20310,20313],{},[35,20311,20312],{},"Planners"," model spatial and electrical relationships together and adjust alternatives traceably.",[46,20315,20316,20319],{},[35,20317,20318],{},"Committed homeowners"," prepare an existing installation or a design in a structured way and agree the result with a qualified electrician before the work starts.",[27,20321,20323],{"id":20322},"what-does-planelec-cost","What does PlanElec cost?",[11,20325,20326,20327,20329],{},"During Early Access, you use PlanElec for 0 EUR, including the AI features within your personal AI allowance. There are no fees and no invoices. The future pricing model is on the ",[23,20328,4021],{"href":4020},", all prices excluding 21% VAT:",[638,20331,20332,20343],{},[641,20333,20334],{},[644,20335,20336,20339,20341],{},[647,20337,20338],{},"Plan",[647,20340,17905],{},[647,20342,6904],{},[657,20344,20345,20356,20367],{},[644,20346,20347,20350,20353],{},[662,20348,20349],{},"Free",[662,20351,20352],{},"EUR 0, permanently",[662,20354,20355],{},"Full planning without project or circuit limits; exports with masked areas",[644,20357,20358,20361,20364],{},[662,20359,20360],{},"Single property",[662,20362,20363],{},"EUR 15 per property, one-off",[662,20365,20366],{},"All documents without masking for one confirmed property address",[644,20368,20369,20372,20375],{},[662,20370,20371],{},"Pro",[662,20373,20374],{},"EUR 29 per month or EUR 290 per year",[662,20376,20377],{},"All projects and documents without masking, three editor seats",[11,20379,20380],{},"We will announce the start date of the paid plans in advance. If you register before then, you use PlanElec free of charge for the first full calendar month after the start.",[27,20382,20384],{"id":20383},"a-practical-approval-workflow","A practical approval workflow",[11,20386,20387],{},"Treat every automatic step as a proposal with a named reviewer. Fix the building geometry and rooms first, then place only equipment that is really planned. Check switch chains and junction boxes before assigning circuits, because topology errors propagate into cable segments and the single-line diagram. Replace default values with real conductor and protection data.",[11,20389,20390],{},"At the board, check phases, upstream protection, RCD groups, spare modules and the electrical paths between devices. The grid arranges the modules; measured fault conditions, prospective short-circuit current, installation method and manufacturer limits are yours to assess as the professional.",[11,20392,20393],{},"Before export, run the self-check and read both findings and coverage notices. Green means the supported checks find no problem in your data. Then reconcile the situation plan and single-line diagram with the installed work and add measurements and manufacturer documents. The official inspection is carried out by a recognized inspection body.",[27,20395,20397],{"id":20396},"team-handover-and-a-clean-revision","Team handover and a clean revision",[11,20399,20400],{},"Decide per project who approves the floor plan, topology, board and comparison with the as-built state. Hand over open fields as open instead of filling them with plausible-sounding assumptions. The next person can then see whether a cable length was measured, calculated from the floor plan or overridden manually. The same discipline applies to appliance power, phase assignment and protection components.",[11,20402,20403],{},"An example: a dishwasher circuit is added in a kitchen. The change starts with the appliance on the floor plan, followed by the electrical connection, circuit, protection device, cable data and board position. The situation plan and single-line diagram are regenerated from the same state; you check that the new identifier matches in both documents. Instead of quietly replacing the old dossier, you archive a new version and note which circuits were added and what needs confirming on site.",[11,20405,20406],{},"In multi-board projects, you model the relationships between source and sub-distribution boards explicitly. Check which board actually supplies a circuit and whether the documents show the same hierarchy. Name unsupported parts of the installation in the handover so that nobody mistakes them for automatically checked.",[11,20408,20409,20410,20412,20413,20417,20418,94],{},"This overview was checked on 5 October 2026 against the ",[23,20411,9074],{"href":9073},", the pricing page and the reachable editor and export workflow. If in doubt, the status shown in the product applies. Continue in the ",[23,20414,20416],{"href":20415},"\u002Fen\u002Fhelp","help center"," or with your ",[23,20419,20420],{"href":270},"free registration",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":20422},[20423,20424,20425,20426,20427,20428,20429,20430,20431,20434,20435,20436,20437],{"id":19977,"depth":291,"text":19978},{"id":20071,"depth":291,"text":20072},{"id":20078,"depth":291,"text":20079},{"id":20097,"depth":291,"text":20098},{"id":20127,"depth":291,"text":20128},{"id":20163,"depth":291,"text":20164},{"id":20176,"depth":291,"text":20177},{"id":20190,"depth":291,"text":20191},{"id":20268,"depth":291,"text":20269,"children":20432},[20433],{"id":20275,"depth":599,"text":20276},{"id":20298,"depth":291,"text":20299},{"id":20322,"depth":291,"text":20323},{"id":20383,"depth":291,"text":20384},{"id":20396,"depth":291,"text":20397},"Floor plan, AI assistant, automatic circuit and board planning, single-line diagram, situation plan, self-check and PDF dossier: the feature overview with status and limits.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fwhat-can-you-do-with-planelec.en",{"title":19965,"description":20438},"What Can You Do with PlanElec? Plan to Dossier","what-can-you-do-with-planelec","blog\u002Fwhat-can-you-do-with-planelec.en",[3710,20446,317,319,318,614,936,1979,1980],"electrical planning","vyFVs-rccR9_qE_dAoPiQAjim7nmVTiRf4PCE7OmVSo",{"id":20449,"title":20450,"articleId":20451,"body":20452,"category":8819,"date":20636,"description":20637,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":20638,"navigation":308,"path":20639,"publishDate":20636,"readTime":3670,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":20640,"seoTitle":20641,"slug":20451,"stem":20642,"tags":20643,"__hash__":20652},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fdedicated-circuits-appliances.en.md","Dedicated Circuit Required: Which Appliances Need Their Own Breaker?","dedicated-circuits-appliances",{"type":8,"value":20453,"toc":20628},[20454,20458,20468,20532,20538,20542,20562,20566,20569,20572,20576,20582,20586,20591,20593,20615,20623],[27,20455,20457],{"id":20456},"which-appliances-need-their-own-circuit","Which appliances need their own circuit?",[11,20459,20460,20463,20464,20467],{},[35,20461,20462],{},"In a dwelling, two groups of appliances get their own circuit:"," every appliance with a fixed location rated at ",[35,20465,20466],{},"2600 W"," or more – even a mobile one – and, regardless of power, the washing machine, dishwasher, tumble dryer, electric cooker, electric hob and electric oven. Fixed electric heating is supplied by one or more separate circuits. That is the rule in Book 1 of the AREI\u002FRGIE, Belgium's general regulations for electrical installations, subsection 5.2.1.2.",[638,20469,20470,20481],{},[641,20471,20472],{},[644,20473,20474,20477,20479],{},[647,20475,20476],{},"Appliance",[647,20478,9487],{},[647,20480,9490],{},[657,20482,20483,20493,20502,20512,20522],{},[644,20484,20485,20488,20491],{},[662,20486,20487],{},"Washing machine, dishwasher, tumble dryer",[662,20489,20490],{},"always a dedicated circuit",[662,20492,9164],{},[644,20494,20495,20498,20500],{},[662,20496,20497],{},"Electric cooker, hob, oven",[662,20499,20490],{},[662,20501,9164],{},[644,20503,20504,20507,20510],{},[662,20505,20506],{},"Fixed electric heating",[662,20508,20509],{},"one or more separate circuits",[662,20511,9164],{},[644,20513,20514,20517,20520],{},[662,20515,20516],{},"Water heater, heat pump, sauna and others",[662,20518,20519],{},"own circuit from 2600 W at a fixed location",[662,20521,9164],{},[644,20523,20524,20526,20529],{},[662,20525,16337],{},[662,20527,20528],{},"one separate circuit per connection point",[662,20530,20531],{},"7.22.3",[11,20533,20534,20535,94],{},"The rule sets the structure: one appliance, one circuit. You then choose breaker and cross-section for the appliance, based on its nameplate, the supply system, installation method, grouping, cable length, voltage drop and the manufacturer's instructions. The maximum per cross-section is in table 4.11 of subsection 4.4.1.4; the method is explained in ",[23,20536,20537],{"href":8687},"cable cross-section and breaker",[27,20539,20541],{"id":20540},"what-a-dedicated-circuit-gives-you","What a dedicated circuit gives you",[105,20543,20544,20550,20556],{},[46,20545,20546,20549],{},[35,20547,20548],{},"No overload from neighbours:"," a powerful appliance often runs close to its rated current for long periods. On its own circuit it shares that load with nothing else.",[46,20551,20552,20555],{},[35,20553,20554],{},"Availability:"," if the breaker trips, only this appliance goes off, not half the kitchen.",[46,20557,20558,20561],{},[35,20559,20560],{},"Matched wiring:"," cross-section and protection fit exactly one appliance instead of a mix.",[27,20563,20565],{"id":20564},"apply-the-rule-appliance-by-appliance","Apply the rule appliance by appliance",[11,20567,20568],{},"Start with the nameplate and the installation manual. Record the rated power, single- or three-phase connection, the permitted connection method and any protection requirements from the manufacturer. A combined cooker is often connected differently from a separate hob and oven; a heat pump may need separate feeds for the outdoor unit, indoor unit and backup heater. Plan those cases one by one.",[11,20570,20571],{},"On the single-line diagram, each appliance circuit gets its own reference with protective device, cable data and end appliance. The situation plan shows the same reference at the appliance location. If the appliance is later replaced by a more powerful one, you recheck the design.",[27,20573,20575],{"id":20574},"laundry-and-utility-room","Laundry and utility room",[11,20577,20578,20579,94],{},"The washing machine and tumble dryer each get their own circuit, and so does a water heater of 2600 W or more. Also plan an ordinary socket circuit for the iron and small appliances, so they are not plugged into the appliance sockets. How many sockets such a circuit may carry is covered in ",[23,20580,20581],{"href":14007},"how many sockets per circuit?",[27,20583,20585],{"id":20584},"how-planelec-checks-appliance-circuits","How PlanElec checks appliance circuits",[11,20587,20588,20589,94],{},"For large appliances from the device catalogue – including cooker, oven, washing machine, tumble dryer, dishwasher and EV charger – the AREI\u002FRGIE self-check flags an error as soon as the appliance shares its circuit with other loads. If no circuit breaker is assigned yet, it shows the missing input. You read the 2600 W threshold for other appliances from the nameplate. The inspection of the installation is carried out by the recognised inspection body. The rules covered are listed in ",[23,20590,3459],{"href":2953},[27,20592,5054],{"id":4477},[43,20594,20595,20600,20606,20611],{},[46,20596,20597],{},[23,20598,20599],{"href":8687},"Which cable cross-section for which circuit breaker?",[46,20601,20602],{},[23,20603,20605],{"href":20604},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002F30ma-rcd-per-socket","Do I need a 30 mA RCD for every socket?",[46,20607,20608],{},[23,20609,20610],{"href":14007},"How many sockets per circuit?",[46,20612,20613],{},[23,20614,7197],{"href":7093},[11,20616,20617,20618,20622],{},"Official source: ",[23,20619,20621],{"href":4466,"rel":20620},[4434],"AREI Book 1, version 06",", subsections 4.4.1.4 and 5.2.1.2 and section 7.22.3.",[11,20624,20625],{},[23,20626,20627],{"href":17817},"Plan your appliance circuits in PlanElec and check them yourself →",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":20629},[20630,20631,20632,20633,20634,20635],{"id":20456,"depth":291,"text":20457},{"id":20540,"depth":291,"text":20541},{"id":20564,"depth":291,"text":20565},{"id":20574,"depth":291,"text":20575},{"id":20584,"depth":291,"text":20585},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":5054},"2026-07-13","Washing machine, cooker, tumble dryer and anything rated 2600 W or more: the AREI requires a dedicated circuit. The complete list with references.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fdedicated-circuits-appliances.en",{"title":20450,"description":20637},"Dedicated Circuits: Which Appliances Need Their Own Breaker?","blog\u002Fdedicated-circuits-appliances.en",[1979,1980,20644,20645,20646,20647,20648,20649,20650,8829,20651,2981,7239],"dedicated circuit","individual circuit","washing machine","dryer","cooker","dishwasher","boiler","cable cross-section","lxtSX99aE3duYfSjJD9pOy-d-c2LpBgRI91T8fJZdKo",{"id":20654,"title":20655,"articleId":20656,"body":20657,"category":5101,"date":21015,"description":21016,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":21017,"navigation":308,"path":21018,"publishDate":21019,"readTime":11041,"refreshInterval":2436,"seo":21020,"seoTitle":21021,"slug":20656,"stem":21022,"tags":21023,"__hash__":21027},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fgetting-started-guide.en.md","Getting Started with PlanElec: From Floor Plan to First Export","getting-started-guide",{"type":8,"value":20658,"toc":20992},[20659,20665,20669,20675,20678,20682,20687,20699,20702,20706,20709,20712,20720,20724,20727,20730,20733,20737,20740,20746,20750,20759,20762,20766,20769,20775,20779,20784,20790,20794,20797,20801,20804,20808,20811,20815,20818,20822,20825,20828,20832,20886,20890,20893,20896,20900,20903,20906,20910,20913,20917,20920,20923,20927,20953,20957,20979],[11,20660,20661,20664],{},[35,20662,20663],{},"Your first PlanElec project runs through eight steps: create the project, draw or recognise the floor plan, place devices, connect consumers, check cable routes, fill the distribution board, review the single-line diagram and self-check, and export the documents."," Everything happens in one shared project model. The key principle to start with: a symbol on the floor plan fixes where a device sits. Only its electrical assignment makes it part of the single-line diagram.",[27,20666,20668],{"id":20667},"_1-create-the-project-building-and-floors","1. Create the project, building and floors",[11,20670,20671,20672,20674],{},"After signing in, open the project overview and choose ",[35,20673,37],{},". You start with the guided workflow, a template or an empty project. For your first project, take the guided workflow: it derives the next step from the actual project state, and you can pause it at any time without losing project data.",[11,20676,20677],{},"Then create the building and its floors. Open the project metadata and enter the project name, installation address and installer. PlanElec reuses these details in title blocks, the self-check report and the dossier.",[27,20679,20681],{"id":20680},"_2-build-the-floor-plan-and-rooms","2. Build the floor plan and rooms",[11,20683,8038,20684,20686],{},[35,20685,2017],{}," area, draw exterior and interior walls as a polygon or rectangle. If you already have a plan, import it as a reference image and calibrate it against a known distance.",[11,20688,20689,20690,18148,20692,20694,20695,20698],{},"Recognition is faster: put a PDF, scan or photo (PDF, PNG, JPEG or WebP) in ",[35,20691,5763],{},[35,20693,5724],{}," from the preview. PlanElec proposes walls, rooms with their area, doors, windows and supported device symbols. You confirm the scale, correct the draft and import it into an empty floor. The article ",[23,20696,20697],{"href":5595},"Recognise a floor plan from a PDF or photo"," walks through the details.",[11,20700,20701],{},"As soon as walls enclose an area, PlanElec detects a room. Name and categorise every room, for example Kitchen, Utility room or Bedroom 1. Clean rooms pay off later: in equipment proposals, when grouping consumers, in the material view by room and during the technical review. Work one floor at a time and check the geometry before you place many devices; major changes are easier while the plan is still empty.",[27,20703,20705],{"id":20704},"_3-place-the-electrical-devices","3. Place the electrical devices",[11,20707,20708],{},"Open the device palette and place sockets, switches, lights, fixed connections, junction boxes and the distribution board in their planned positions. Wall-mounted devices snap to the wall; lights sit freely in the room.",[11,20710,20711],{},"For suitable rooms, PlanElec proposes sockets, lighting, a standard fit-out or a spotlight grid. You decide what stays, based on doors, windows, built-in units, use and wet zones. The proposals are an editable starting point; the design decisions are yours.",[11,20713,20714,20715,20717,20718,94],{},"You can also tell the ",[35,20716,5628],{}," in your own words what you need, for example \"Place three sockets in the kitchen\". Open it with the bot button in the header or with ⌘J \u002F Ctrl+J. Every change the assistant makes is a single undo step, and PlanElec then checks the project with the AREI\u002FRGIE self-check. Read more in ",[23,20719,20124],{"href":5991},[27,20721,20723],{"id":20722},"_4-connect-switches-consumers-and-topology","4. Connect switches, consumers and topology",[11,20725,20726],{},"Link switches to the lights they actually control. For unassigned switches and lights in a room, PlanElec proposes a switch chain. The list of unconnected components then shows what is still missing.",[11,20728,20729],{},"Next, assign consumers to the right board and circuit. Automatic assignment groups ordinary lighting and socket points and handles supported special appliances such as a cooker, washing machine or EV charger separately. With several boards, multi-board assignment spreads the loads; in three-phase installations, phase balancing distributes them across L1, L2 and L3 and warns about a clear imbalance. Check protection devices, phase and cable data in the preview, and only then apply it.",[11,20731,20732],{},"Connect junction and branch boxes as real topology nodes whenever a cable needs to be split into separate segments. Proximity is not enough: PlanElec does not insert a box into an electrical path automatically.",[27,20734,20736],{"id":20735},"_5-check-the-cable-routes","5. Check the cable routes",[11,20738,20739],{},"For connected devices, PlanElec calculates a cable route along the walls. Check start, end and path, and add manual waypoints where needed. A manually entered length takes precedence over the calculated one.",[11,20741,20742,20743,20745],{},"Cable type, cross-section, installation method and length must match the real installation. The calculated net lengths feed the cable list and material overview; you add offcuts and site reserve yourself. The guide ",[23,20744,4397],{"href":142}," explains device, cable, circuit and board automation together.",[27,20747,20749],{"id":20748},"_6-fill-the-distribution-board","6. Fill the distribution board",[11,20751,20752,20753,20755,20756,20758],{},"Open the ",[35,20754,3497],{}," area, choose the enclosure, rows and pole configuration, and start ",[35,20757,6466],{},". PlanElec arranges the main switch, residual current devices (RCDs) and circuit breakers in the intended order on the DIN rails and keeps 20 percent of rail space free by default.",[11,20760,20761],{},"Then check module widths, protection groups and the connections from main switch to RCD and on to the circuit breakers. Add missing connections with the connector tool and move modules by hand where needed. In multi-phase installations, also check the phase overview. Facing an existing board? PlanElec detects the visible DIN modules in cabinet photos and, once you have reviewed them, imports them into an empty board.",[27,20763,20765],{"id":20764},"_7-review-the-single-line-diagram-and-self-check","7. Review the single-line diagram and self-check",[11,20767,20768],{},"PlanElec derives the single-line diagram from the electrical topology. Check that consumer branches, protection devices, cable data and branches appear in full. If an assignment is wrong, correct the relationship in the shared project model, not just in the drawing, and review the diagram again.",[11,20770,20771,20772,20774],{},"The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check reports findings in the rule areas PlanElec can evaluate from your project data. It is advisory: a clean run means the supported rules find no error in your data. Which rules those are is listed in ",[23,20773,4403],{"href":2953},". The inspection of the installed work is carried out by the recognized inspection body.",[27,20776,20778],{"id":20777},"_8-export-the-documents","8. Export the documents",[11,20780,8038,20781,20783],{},[35,20782,225],{}," area, you produce the single-line diagram, the situation plan and the advisory self-check report as PDFs. As soon as board data exists, the distribution board PDF is available too. The selectable installation dossier bundles the documents with a cover page, index and continuous page numbering. Circuit, material and cable lists are available as a pilot: manufacturer-neutral, without prices and with visible default assumptions.",[11,20785,20786,20787,20789],{},"Before passing anything on, check metadata, legibility, page order and open findings. ",[23,20788,236],{"href":235}," describes the status of each document.",[27,20791,20793],{"id":20792},"making-your-first-run-dependable","Making your first run dependable",[11,20795,20796],{},"Keep your first project small and real: one floor with a board, two socket circuits, lighting and one fixed appliance. That makes it clear early on which information is spatial, electrical or documentary. A socket symbol on the floor plan answers where it is. Its circuit, protective device and cable answer how it is supplied. The export brings both views together; measurements you have not entered do not appear in it either.",[385,20798,20800],{"id":20799},"take-inventory-before-you-place-anything","Take inventory before you place anything",[11,20802,20803],{},"Record the connection type and voltage, existing boards, rooms, floors and every visible electrical point. Sealed parts stay closed, and you do not infer the earthing system from the conductor count alone. For an existing installation, photos of the labels and a careful survey by a qualified person help more than assumptions. Mark unknown data as open rather than entering a plausible-looking cable type or protection rating.",[385,20805,20807],{"id":20806},"review-devices-and-circuits-separately","Review devices and circuits separately",[11,20809,20810],{},"Place the board and the real devices first. Link switches to the lights they really control, then assign consumers to circuits. With every automatic proposal, check whether the proposed group is technically sound. PlanElec provides guided editing and proposals; approving the electrical design is your call as the professional. Cable length, installation method, grouping, ambient conditions, voltage drop, short-circuit current and manufacturer conditions are part of your review wherever the project does not capture them.",[385,20812,20814],{"id":20813},"keep-three-views-aligned","Keep three views aligned",[11,20816,20817],{},"Use the same circuit identifiers in the board, the single-line diagram and the situation plan. After moving a device, splitting a circuit or changing a protection device, check all three views. A good interim test: can a second person start from a situation-plan symbol, follow its identifier to the right circuit and get back to the board? If so, the project is ready to be documented.",[385,20819,20821],{"id":20820},"use-the-export-as-a-review-stage","Use the export as a review stage",[11,20823,20824],{},"Generate previews first. Check page breaks, clipped labels, legend, installation address, responsible person, plan revision and date. Then reopen the PDFs and compare them with the current project. Single-line diagram, situation plan, board PDF and dossier run in the normal workflow. The material list is a pilot with visible coverage limits; it supports planning and is not an approval to order.",[11,20826,20827],{},"The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check is advisory. A result without errors means the supported rules that can be decided from your data report no error. Measurements, manufacturer data, site conditions and unmodelled provisions are checked on site. Have the design, installed work and documents reviewed by a qualified electrician before commissioning; the official inspection is then carried out by the recognized inspection body.",[27,20829,20831],{"id":20830},"when-something-does-not-add-up","When something does not add up",[638,20833,20834,20844],{},[641,20835,20836],{},[644,20837,20838,20841],{},[647,20839,20840],{},"Symptom",[647,20842,20843],{},"What to check",[657,20845,20846,20854,20862,20870,20878],{},[644,20847,20848,20851],{},[662,20849,20850],{},"Device missing from the diagram",[662,20852,20853],{},"its electrical assignment, not just its position",[644,20855,20856,20859],{},[662,20857,20858],{},"Circuit missing from the plan",[662,20860,20861],{},"unplaced or incorrectly referenced devices",[644,20863,20864,20867],{},[662,20865,20866],{},"Protection rating looks implausible",[662,20868,20869],{},"resolve conductor data and design first, then change it",[644,20871,20872,20875],{},[662,20873,20874],{},"Export shows stale data",[662,20876,20877],{},"project metadata, current revision and last saved state",[644,20879,20880,20883],{},[662,20881,20882],{},"Self-check is incomplete",[662,20884,20885],{},"fill in open data; incomplete never means passed",[27,20887,20889],{"id":20888},"saving-alternatives-and-collaboration","Saving, alternatives and collaboration",[11,20891,20892],{},"Give the project and floors stable, clear names. Before trying a major automatic proposal or restructuring, check the saved state and create a comparison export where useful. A design alternative is not yet an installed system: mark clearly which option is planned, rejected or carried out on site.",[11,20894,20895],{},"When several people work on the project, agree who owns the floor plan, electrical assignment, board and final review. Nobody quietly renames shared circuit identifiers. A short change note with date, affected area and responsible person prevents a new spatial revision from being exported with an old electrical one.",[27,20897,20899],{"id":20898},"example-plan-one-room-end-to-end","Example: plan one room end to end",[11,20901,20902],{},"Use a kitchen as an exercise. Draw and name the room, then place general sockets, lighting and the fixed appliances actually planned. Link switches to their lights and keep high-load appliances separate where your design calls for it. Do not derive cable or breaker values from an appliance name: enter confirmed data and leave unknown lengths open.",[11,20904,20905],{},"Then check the situation-plan references, every consumer's path in the single-line diagram and the board layout. Consider whether additional sources or outdoor areas affect the scope. Export both plans and trace three devices in both directions. Once that chain works, move on to the next room.",[27,20907,20909],{"id":20908},"data-protection-and-project-data","Data protection and project data",[11,20911,20912],{},"Do not use real customer data in practice projects. A real dossier needs the name, installation address and responsible parties; share them only within the authorised project circle. Before sending, check that a preview contains no internal notes, old alternatives or incomplete data. The recipient needs the approved document version, not your entire working state.",[27,20914,20916],{"id":20915},"when-your-first-project-is-finished","When your first project is finished",[11,20918,20919],{},"A project is finished when the spatial points match the building, electrical assignments are traceable, board and drawings use the same identifiers, open data stays visible and a qualified person has reviewed the relevant decisions. The PDF is the result of that work, not its proof. The inspection that follows assesses the installed work.",[11,20921,20922],{},"Finally, archive the approved PDFs and note the matching project revision. If a device is moved or a circuit added later, start from that state. That keeps the difference between the earlier inspection, the new design and the later as-built state visible.",[27,20924,20926],{"id":20925},"checklist-before-the-first-download","Checklist before the first download",[43,20928,20929,20932,20935,20938,20941,20944,20947,20950],{},[46,20930,20931],{},"Building, floors and rooms are fully created and named.",[46,20933,20934],{},"All electrical devices are in the right position.",[46,20936,20937],{},"Consumers are linked to topology, circuit and board.",[46,20939,20940],{},"Cable routes and lengths are checked.",[46,20942,20943],{},"Protection chain and board layout are plausible.",[46,20945,20946],{},"Single-line diagram and situation plan are visually reviewed.",[46,20948,20949],{},"Project metadata is complete for the intended document revision.",[46,20951,20952],{},"Self-check findings and coverage gaps are understood and assessed.",[27,20954,20956],{"id":20955},"further-reading-and-official-source","Further reading and official source",[43,20958,20959,20963,20968,20973],{},[46,20960,20961],{},[23,20962,14778],{"href":8154},[46,20964,20965],{},[23,20966,20967],{"href":8160},"Draw a situation plan",[46,20969,20970],{},[23,20971,20972],{"href":8775},"Plan a distribution board",[46,20974,20975],{},[23,20976,20978],{"href":4466,"rel":20977},[4434],"FPS Economy: official RGIE\u002FAREI books, Book 1 V06",[11,20980,20981,20982,20984,20985,20987,20988,20991],{},"PlanElec takes you from floor plan to dossier. The installation work is the qualified electrician's responsibility; the official assessment is made by a recognized inspection body. You will find more guides in the ",[23,20983,20416],{"href":20415}," and the full scope in the ",[23,20986,9074],{"href":9073},". During Early Access, ",[23,20989,20990],{"href":270},"registration"," is free.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":20993},[20994,20995,20996,20997,20998,20999,21000,21001,21002,21008,21009,21010,21011,21012,21013,21014],{"id":20667,"depth":291,"text":20668},{"id":20680,"depth":291,"text":20681},{"id":20704,"depth":291,"text":20705},{"id":20722,"depth":291,"text":20723},{"id":20735,"depth":291,"text":20736},{"id":20748,"depth":291,"text":20749},{"id":20764,"depth":291,"text":20765},{"id":20777,"depth":291,"text":20778},{"id":20792,"depth":291,"text":20793,"children":21003},[21004,21005,21006,21007],{"id":20799,"depth":599,"text":20800},{"id":20806,"depth":599,"text":20807},{"id":20813,"depth":599,"text":20814},{"id":20820,"depth":599,"text":20821},{"id":20830,"depth":291,"text":20831},{"id":20888,"depth":291,"text":20889},{"id":20898,"depth":291,"text":20899},{"id":20908,"depth":291,"text":20909},{"id":20915,"depth":291,"text":20916},{"id":20925,"depth":291,"text":20926},{"id":20955,"depth":291,"text":20956},"2026-07-07","PlanElec step by step: create the project and floors, draw or recognise the floor plan, connect devices, fill the distribution board and export PDFs.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fgetting-started-guide.en","2026-07-14",{"title":20655,"description":21016},"Getting Started with PlanElec: Floor Plan to Export","blog\u002Fgetting-started-guide.en",[304,21024,21025,123,3311,21026,205],"onboarding","floor-plan","single-line-diagram","9QBgK2fhvrPnZzRk3sYtf1dxWdh0YWzEXcspm9PPVRI",{"id":21029,"title":21030,"articleId":21031,"body":21032,"category":8819,"date":21219,"description":21220,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":21221,"navigation":308,"path":21222,"publishDate":21219,"readTime":3670,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":21223,"seoTitle":305,"slug":21031,"stem":21224,"tags":21225,"__hash__":21232},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fsurge-protection-spd-mandatory.en.md","Is Surge Protection (SPD) Mandatory Under AREI?","surge-protection-spd-mandatory",{"type":8,"value":21033,"toc":21210},[21034,21038,21044,21047,21051,21058,21114,21117,21121,21124,21130,21133,21137,21140,21144,21147,21161,21169,21173,21185,21187,21202],[27,21035,21037],{"id":21036},"short-answer-a-protection-goal-yes-a-mandatory-spd-type-no","Short answer: a protection goal yes, a mandatory SPD type no",[11,21039,21040,21043],{},[35,21041,21042],{},"AREI requires persons and property to be protected, according to good practice, against the harmful effects of overvoltages"," – for example from atmospheric phenomena or switching surges (AREI Book 1, section 4.5.1). Book 1 does not prescribe a specific device such as \"Type 2 SPD in the main board\" for homes. Whether to fit a surge protective device (SPD), and which one, is decided with the project's risk assessment and the manufacturer's data.",[11,21045,21046],{},"Chapter 4.5 explicitly regulates only two things: surge protective devices are designed and installed so that their operation poses no danger to persons and property (4.5.1). And in IT systems, an overvoltage limiter is connected where necessary at the origin of the installation between the earth electrode and the neutral or a line conductor (4.5.3).",[27,21048,21050],{"id":21049},"what-an-spd-does","What an SPD does",[11,21052,21053,21054,21057],{},"An SPD diverts short ",[35,21055,21056],{},"voltage spikes"," to earth before they reach equipment. Such spikes come from nearby lightning strikes, switching operations on the grid or other disturbances, and mainly hit sensitive electronics: computers, televisions, heat pumps and inverters.",[638,21059,21060,21073],{},[641,21061,21062],{},[644,21063,21064,21067,21070],{},[647,21065,21066],{},"SPD type",[647,21068,21069],{},"Protects against",[647,21071,21072],{},"Usual location",[657,21074,21075,21088,21101],{},[644,21076,21077,21082,21085],{},[662,21078,21079],{},[35,21080,21081],{},"Type 1",[662,21083,21084],{},"Partial lightning currents",[662,21086,21087],{},"At the origin, typically with an external lightning protection system",[644,21089,21090,21095,21098],{},[662,21091,21092],{},[35,21093,21094],{},"Type 2",[662,21096,21097],{},"Indirect overvoltages",[662,21099,21100],{},"In the main board – the usual choice in homes",[644,21102,21103,21108,21111],{},[662,21104,21105],{},[35,21106,21107],{},"Type 3",[662,21109,21110],{},"Residual overvoltages",[662,21112,21113],{},"Close to the equipment, as fine protection behind a Type 2",[11,21115,21116],{},"These types come from product standards, not from AREI.",[27,21118,21120],{"id":21119},"where-the-spd-sits-in-the-board","Where the SPD sits in the board",[11,21122,21123],{},"A Type 2 sits in the distribution board. Two arrangements are common:",[14892,21125,21128],{"className":21126,"code":21127,"language":14897},[14895],"Grid → main switch → main RCD (300 mA) → Type 2 SPD → group RCDs → circuit breakers\nGrid → main switch → Type 2 SPD with its own back-up fuse → main RCD (300 mA) → …\n",[842,21129,21127],{"__ignoreMap":290},[11,21131,21132],{},"Which arrangement fits depends on the manufacturer's instructions, the earthing system and the installation concept. Back-up protection, connecting-lead lengths and coordination with other SPDs follow the datasheet; \"typically 20 A\" is not an AREI rule. In the single-line diagram you document the SPD actually installed with its type, connection method and protection data.",[27,21134,21136],{"id":21135},"does-this-apply-to-existing-installations","Does this apply to existing installations?",[11,21138,21139],{},"AREI has no general retrofit obligation along the lines of \"every home gets a Type 2\". Section 4.5.1 sets a protection goal. For an existing installation the electrician assesses lightning protection, supply, cable routing, sensitive loads and the manufacturer's concept – and documents the decision. For renovations, the modified part follows the rules applicable at the time of the work.",[27,21141,21143],{"id":21142},"spd-and-photovoltaics","SPD and photovoltaics",[11,21145,21146],{},"For PV, assess the AC and DC sides separately:",[43,21148,21149,21155],{},[46,21150,21151,21154],{},[35,21152,21153],{},"AC side:"," surge protection in the distribution board as described above.",[46,21156,21157,21160],{},[35,21158,21159],{},"DC side:"," Chapter 7.112 does not explicitly require a DC SPD for domestic PV installations. A DC SPD at the inverter is still common practice, especially with long DC runs across the roof; good practice and the manufacturer's data decide.",[15,21162,21163],{},[11,21164,21165,21168],{},[35,21166,21167],{},"Tip:"," Many inverters already include a DC SPD. A look at the datasheet can save you an extra device.",[27,21170,21172],{"id":21171},"documenting-the-spd-in-planelec","Documenting the SPD in PlanElec",[11,21174,222,21175,21177,21178,21181,21182,21184],{},[23,21176,3710],{"href":5046}," you place the SPD as a protective device in its own right in the single-line diagram and in the board; its data appear in the PDF. The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check assesses whether surge protection is present and reports the result as ",[35,21179,21180],{},"information"," – in line with the regulation, since there is no general SPD obligation. The full scope is in ",[23,21183,4403],{"href":2953},". Sizing, discharge capacity and coordination are set according to the risk assessment and datasheet; costs come from a current project quotation.",[27,21186,5054],{"id":4477},[43,21188,21189,21194,21198],{},[46,21190,21191],{},[23,21192,21193],{"href":20604},"A 30 mA RCD for every socket?",[46,21195,21196],{},[23,21197,7203],{"href":7202},[46,21199,21200],{},[23,21201,17406],{"href":15913},[11,21203,21204],{},[7299,21205,21206,21207,8806],{},"Legal basis: AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1, version 06, Chapter 4.5 (sections 4.5.1 and 4.5.3) and Chapter 7.112. The official text published by the ",[23,21208,8805],{"href":7174,"rel":21209},[4434],{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":21211},[21212,21213,21214,21215,21216,21217,21218],{"id":21036,"depth":291,"text":21037},{"id":21049,"depth":291,"text":21050},{"id":21119,"depth":291,"text":21120},{"id":21135,"depth":291,"text":21136},{"id":21142,"depth":291,"text":21143},{"id":21171,"depth":291,"text":21172},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":5054},"2026-07-06","AREI requires protection against overvoltages (section 4.5.1) but prescribes no specific SPD type. What that means for your distribution board, existing installations and PV.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fsurge-protection-spd-mandatory.en",{"title":21030,"description":21220},"blog\u002Fsurge-protection-spd-mandatory.en",[1979,1980,21226,21227,21228,21229,21094,21230,318,2981,7239,21231],"surge protection","SPD","Surge Protection Device","lightning protection","new installation","keuring","y9Sx2wf_MbMScWbIZJbaVkLu7LfmTMniq1Jax3uE8hI",{"id":21234,"title":21235,"articleId":21236,"body":21237,"category":5101,"date":21727,"description":21728,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":21729,"navigation":308,"path":21730,"publishDate":21727,"readTime":15276,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":21731,"seoTitle":21732,"slug":21236,"stem":21733,"tags":21734,"__hash__":21738},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fproperty-sale-electrical-dossier.en.md","Electrical Dossier for a Property Sale in 2026: Rules and Records","property-sale-electrical-dossier",{"type":8,"value":21238,"toc":21709},[21239,21243,21262,21265,21270,21274,21281,21289,21347,21350,21354,21357,21360,21364,21371,21436,21439,21442,21446,21449,21452,21472,21475,21479,21490,21493,21496,21500,21503,21506,21510,21513,21517,21571,21574,21578,21581,21584,21588,21591,21595,21598,21601,21605,21650,21654,21657,21660,21674,21678,21681,21683,21699,21704],[27,21240,21242],{"id":21241},"what-applies-electrically-when-you-sell","What applies electrically when you sell",[11,21244,21245,21246,21249,21250,21253,21254,21257,21258,21261],{},"When you sell a flat or house in Belgium, you hand the buyer the ",[35,21247,21248],{},"installation file"," with the single-line diagram, situation plan and inspection reports (AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1, section 9.1.2). If the installation dates wholly or partly from before ",[35,21251,21252],{},"1 October 1981"," and that old part has never been inspected, you also have a ",[35,21255,21256],{},"control visit"," carried out by an approved inspection body before the sale (section 8.4.2). The date and handover of the report are recorded in the deed of sale. If the report is negative, the buyer has ",[35,21259,21260],{},"18 months from the deed of sale"," to have the infringements corrected and the installation inspected again – by a body of their choice.",[11,21263,21264],{},"So two questions belong apart: does the sale trigger a special inspection duty? And which documents belong in the file regardless? This guide answers both under AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1, version 06, applicable since 1 April 2026. It covers the electrical side; regional and notarial duties are for your notary.",[11,21266,21267],{},[35,21268,21269],{},"Editing and review: PlanElec team, 5 October 2026.",[27,21271,21273],{"id":21272},"when-does-the-sale-inspection-apply","When does the sale inspection apply?",[11,21275,21276,21277,21280],{},"Section 8.4.2 applies to the sale of a dwelling with an ",[35,21278,21279],{},"old domestic installation",", meaning one whose construction began before 1 October 1981, in two cases (8.4.2.1):",[43,21282,21283,21286],{},[46,21284,21285],{},"The installation has not been significantly modified or extended since 1 October 1981.",[46,21287,21288],{},"It has been significantly modified or extended, but the pre-1981 part has never had a control visit.",[638,21290,21291,21302],{},[641,21292,21293],{},[644,21294,21295,21297,21300],{},[647,21296,12591],{},[647,21298,21299],{},"What applies",[647,21301,9490],{},[657,21303,21304,21315,21326,21336],{},[644,21305,21306,21309,21312],{},[662,21307,21308],{},"Old installation from before 1981, old part never inspected",[662,21310,21311],{},"The seller arranges a control visit; date and handover of the report in the deed",[662,21313,21314],{},"8.4.2.2 a",[644,21316,21317,21320,21323],{},[662,21318,21319],{},"The buyer demolishes or completely renews the installation",[662,21321,21322],{},"Statement in the deed instead of a visit; buyer informs the Directorate-General for Energy; new installation under chapter 6.4",[662,21324,21325],{},"8.4.2.2 a and b",[644,21327,21328,21331,21334],{},[662,21329,21330],{},"Court-ordered sale where no inspection is possible",[662,21332,21333],{},"Statement in the deed or auction record that no visit took place",[662,21335,21314],{},[644,21337,21338,21341,21344],{},[662,21339,21340],{},"Installation with a conformity inspection (under the former or current AREI)",[662,21342,21343],{},"No visit under 8.4.2; hand over the file and respect the periodic deadline from the last report",[662,21345,21346],{},"9.1.2, 6.5.2, 8.1.2",[11,21348,21349],{},"Convents, hospitals, prisons, care homes, boarding schools, hotels and educational institutions, among others, do not count as dwellings. In co-ownership, the duty only covers the private parts; garages, parking spaces or storage rooms supplied through the co-owners' meter are excluded. Dwellings being expropriated are exempt too (8.4.2.1).",[27,21351,21353],{"id":21352},"missing-plans-do-not-stop-the-inspection","Missing plans do not stop the inspection",[11,21355,21356],{},"If neither a single-line diagram nor a situation plan is available at the sale visit, the inspection body still carries out the inspection. The inspector draws up a short description of the boards with address, nominal voltage, supply cable cross-section, outgoing circuits, RCDs and protective devices, plus a rough sketch showing sockets, switches, light points and fixed appliances. These documents only record what was inspected; they do not replace the plans. The missing plans are recorded in the report as an infringement (8.4.2.2 d).",[11,21358,21359],{},"Up-to-date plans are therefore your best preparation: they make circuits, protective devices and connection points unambiguous and spare the buyer an infringement that rests purely on missing documents.",[27,21361,21363],{"id":21362},"what-belongs-in-the-installation-file","What belongs in the installation file?",[11,21365,21366,21367,21370],{},"The owner of a domestic installation holds the file ",[35,21368,21369],{},"in duplicate"," and hands it to the new owner on sale; a tenant receives a copy (section 9.1.2). The file contains:",[638,21372,21373,21382],{},[641,21374,21375],{},[644,21376,21377,21380],{},[647,21378,21379],{},"No.",[647,21381,649],{},[657,21383,21384,21391,21398,21405,21412,21420,21428],{},[644,21385,21386,21388],{},[662,21387,13705],{},[662,21389,21390],{},"Single-line diagram(s) of the installation",[644,21392,21393,21395],{},[662,21394,13737],{},[662,21396,21397],{},"Situation plan(s)",[644,21399,21400,21402],{},[662,21401,13753],{},[662,21403,21404],{},"Conformity inspection report(s) (chapter 6.4)",[644,21406,21407,21409],{},[662,21408,17009],{},[662,21410,21411],{},"Where applicable, control visit report(s) (chapter 6.5)",[644,21413,21414,21417],{},[662,21415,21416],{},"5",[662,21418,21419],{},"Where applicable, evidence that equipment offers the required safety guarantees",[644,21421,21422,21425],{},[662,21423,21424],{},"6",[662,21426,21427],{},"For significant modifications or extensions, the same documents as under 1, 2, 3 and 5",[644,21429,21430,21433],{},[662,21431,21432],{},"7",[662,21434,21435],{},"Short descriptions of all non-significant modifications or extensions",[11,21437,21438],{},"For a domestic PV system under chapter 7.112, the file also includes the operating instructions (operation and maintenance), safety instructions and the technical references of the equipment such as make, model and power.",[11,21440,21441],{},"Only the approved inspection body issues the inspection report. Invoices, data sheets and as-built documents from your electrician supplement the file, but an installer's declaration does not take the place of the report.",[27,21443,21445],{"id":21444},"what-do-the-single-line-diagram-and-situation-plan-show","What do the single-line diagram and situation plan show?",[11,21447,21448],{},"The single-line diagram shows the electrical structure: boards, protective devices, circuits, conductor data and labels (3.1.2.2). The situation plan shows where the equipment sits in the building (3.1.2.3). Both show the current state; old building plans or a diagram from before a renovation are not enough if the installation has since been built differently. For old installations from before 1981, part 8 allows simplified plans with a defined minimum content (8.2.1 no. 7).",[11,21450,21451],{},"Before the inspection, a structured comparison pays off:",[105,21453,21454,21457,21460,21463,21466,21469],{},[46,21455,21456],{},"name every board and outgoing circuit unambiguously;",[46,21458,21459],{},"record ratings and types of RCDs and overcurrent protection;",[46,21461,21462],{},"have conductor type and cross-section checked rather than estimated;",[46,21464,21465],{},"locate sockets, light points, switches and hard-wired appliances;",[46,21467,21468],{},"record earthing, the disconnecting link and equipotential bonding;",[46,21470,21471],{},"compare the plans with the labels and the real installation.",[11,21473,21474],{},"Do not enter hidden cable routes as established fact. Uncertainties are clarified by an electrician before the inspection.",[27,21476,21478],{"id":21477},"what-happens-with-a-negative-sale-report","What happens with a negative sale report?",[11,21480,21481,21482,21485,21486,21489],{},"A negative report does not block the sale. The seller records in the deed that the buyer must notify the body that issued the report in writing of their identity and the date of the deed. The buyer then has a new control visit carried out within ",[35,21483,21484],{},"18 months from the day of the deed of sale",". The buyer ",[35,21487,21488],{},"chooses the approved body freely","; a different body informs the first one (8.4.2.2 a). If infringements remain at the new visit, the rules for non-conforming old installations apply (8.4.2.3, 9.1.4).",[11,21491,21492],{},"The 18 months only apply to this sale case. After a negative periodic control visit, the same body returns within one year (6.5.7.2 b.7), and for a new installation the affected part stays out of service until it has been inspected again (9.1.3.1). So check in the report which type of inspection and which deadline are meant.",[11,21494,21495],{},"A deadline is no permission to keep a visibly dangerous situation in place: have immediate hazards fixed straight away or take the affected part out of service.",[27,21497,21499],{"id":21498},"how-long-is-an-inspection-report-valid","How long is an inspection report valid?",[11,21501,21502],{},"For domestic installations, a control visit is due at the latest every 25 years after the conformity inspection (6.5.2); the exact date is stated in the report. That does not mean a blanket \"valid for 25 years for any sale\". Significant modifications, a stronger connection or an earlier negative report create their own inspection triggers, and the report has to match today's installation.",[11,21504,21505],{},"So check report type, date, result, address, scope of the installation and later changes. An old positive document is not enough if it describes a different installation.",[27,21507,21509],{"id":21508},"planning-costs-and-timing-realistically","Planning costs and timing realistically",[11,21511,21512],{},"The AREI sets no prices for plans, inspection or repairs, and no waiting times. Effort and timing depend on the installation, provider, region and the work identified. Get concrete quotes and coordinate the schedule with the notary, inspection body and electrician. The best preparation starts with three questions: what is in the file? When will the deed be signed? Which inspection trigger applies?",[27,21514,21516],{"id":21515},"roles-of-seller-buyer-notary-and-inspection-body","Roles of seller, buyer, notary and inspection body",[638,21518,21519,21529],{},[641,21520,21521],{},[644,21522,21523,21526],{},[647,21524,21525],{},"Party",[647,21527,21528],{},"Role in the sale",[657,21530,21531,21539,21547,21555,21563],{},[644,21532,21533,21536],{},[662,21534,21535],{},"Seller",[662,21537,21538],{},"Arranges the visit in the case of 8.4.2, hands over the report and the file",[644,21540,21541,21544],{},[662,21542,21543],{},"Approved inspection body",[662,21545,21546],{},"Inspects, issues the report and describes infringements",[644,21548,21549,21552],{},[662,21550,21551],{},"Notary",[662,21553,21554],{},"Includes the prescribed statements in the deed of sale",[644,21556,21557,21560],{},[662,21558,21559],{},"Buyer",[662,21561,21562],{},"Notifies the body of identity and deed date, has infringements corrected and re-inspected",[644,21564,21565,21568],{},[662,21566,21567],{},"Electrician",[662,21569,21570],{},"Surveys the installation, corrects defects and updates the plans",[11,21572,21573],{},"Keep these roles separate in communication too. If it is unclear who produced a document or which scope it covers, clarify that before handover.",[27,21575,21577],{"id":21576},"changes-between-inspection-and-deed-of-sale","Changes between inspection and deed of sale",[11,21579,21580],{},"An inspection is a snapshot. If circuits are added afterwards, the connection is upgraded, an EV charger or PV system is installed or protective devices are replaced, the report no longer fully reflects the state at handover. An updated diagram alone does not prove the change was inspected. Record the date, scope and person responsible for the work and ask the inspection body whether a new inspection is needed.",[11,21582,21583],{},"For a PV system, the additional information from 9.1.2 belongs in the file, not just a symbol on the single-line diagram. If the installed inverter does not match the plans or manufacturer documents are missing, close the gap with evidence, not an assumption.",[27,21585,21587],{"id":21586},"reading-the-report-correctly","Reading the report correctly",[11,21589,21590],{},"Do not read only the conclusion. Check the installation's identification, connection data, inspected scope, measured values, infringements, remarks, applicable derogations and the date of the re-inspection. A remark is not an infringement; conversely, a negative conclusion does not turn positive because some measurements look fine. If the report and the installation contradict each other, the inspection body is your contact.",[27,21592,21594],{"id":21593},"distinguishing-existing-parts-partial-and-complete-renovation","Distinguishing existing parts, partial and complete renovation",[11,21596,21597],{},"Part 8 contains derogations for certain old parts of an installation – not grandfather rights for the whole building. If only one room or board is changed, delimit the change clearly: the modified part follows current rules, unchanged parts keep their existing-installation rules. The exemption from the sale visit for complete renewal only applies if seller and buyer record it in the deed; the new installation then follows the conformity inspection of chapter 6.4.",[11,21599,21600],{},"Keep old and new plan versions with their dates rather than overwriting the earlier state, and mark which report belongs to which version. The buyer then sees which parts were inspected and which work followed. Photos and invoices supplement the history; they do not replace plans and report.",[27,21602,21604],{"id":21603},"handover-checklist","Handover checklist",[43,21606,21608,21614,21620,21626,21632,21638,21644],{"className":21607},[15704],[46,21609,21611,21613],{"className":21610},[15708],[7009,21612],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Inspection trigger and any exemption clarified with notary and inspection body",[46,21615,21617,21619],{"className":21616},[15708],[7009,21618],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Existing reports complete and linked to the address",[46,21621,21623,21625],{"className":21622},[15708],[7009,21624],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Single-line diagram and situation plan match the actual state",[46,21627,21629,21631],{"className":21628},[15708],[7009,21630],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Changes, PV system and technical documents added",[46,21633,21635,21637],{"className":21634},[15708],[7009,21636],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Boards and circuits legibly labelled",[46,21639,21641,21643],{"className":21640},[15708],[7009,21642],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Infringements, deadlines and responsibilities from the report understood",[46,21645,21647,21649],{"className":21646},[15708],[7009,21648],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Installation file handed to the buyer, second copy kept",[27,21651,21653],{"id":21652},"checking-the-file-before-ordering-and-handover","Checking the file before ordering and handover",[11,21655,21656],{},"Before the inspection, lay out all documents and sort them by address, meter or EAN code, board and date. Check that the most recent plan really describes the dwelling being sold. A report for common parts, an old house number or a plan from before a renovation does not silently count as current evidence. Note contradictions and clarify with the notary and inspection body which documents are relevant to the sale.",[11,21658,21659],{},"After the inspection, transfer each finding with location, plan reference, responsible party and deadline into a task list. An electrician carries out and documents the corrections; only updated plans and, where needed, the re-inspection close the matter.",[11,21661,955,21662,21667,21668,21673],{},[23,21663,21666],{"href":21664,"rel":21665},"https:\u002F\u002Feconomie.fgov.be\u002Ffr\u002Fthemes\u002Fenergie\u002Fsources-et-vecteurs-denergie\u002Felectricite\u002Fsecurite-et-controle-des\u002Flivre-1-du-reglement-general",[4434],"FPS Economy FAQ for notaries and the property sector"," explains the sale visit, file contents and roles; the ",[23,21669,21672],{"href":21670,"rel":21671},"https:\u002F\u002Feconomie.fgov.be\u002Ffr\u002Fthemes\u002Fenergie\u002Fsources-et-vecteurs-denergie\u002Felectricite\u002Fsecurite-et-controle-des\u002Fcontrole-des-installations\u002Ftypes-de-controle-des",[4434],"FPS Economy overview of inspection types"," narrows down the trigger.",[27,21675,21677],{"id":21676},"what-planelec-contributes","What PlanElec contributes",[11,21679,21680],{},"With PlanElec you record the installation in the editor, export the single-line diagram and situation plan as PDFs and run the AREI\u002FRGIE self-check. The installation dossier combines the documents with a cover page, document index and continuous page numbering – a clean basis for the installation file. The roles are clear: PlanElec delivers consistent plans and shows findings in the supported rules; measurements and the official report come from the approved inspection body.",[27,21682,8764],{"id":8763},[43,21684,21685,21690,21695],{},[46,21686,21687],{},[23,21688,21689],{"href":7093},"Preparing for an electrical inspection in Belgium",[46,21691,21692],{},[23,21693,21694],{"href":7202},"What does the inspector check?",[46,21696,21697],{},[23,21698,8155],{"href":8154},[11,21700,21701],{},[23,21702,21703],{"href":5046},"Open PlanElec for single-line diagram, situation plan and self-check →",[11,21705,21706],{},[7299,21707,21708],{},"Regulatory basis: AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 V06, in particular part 8 section 8.4.2 and chapter 9.1. The official text, the specific inspection report and the assessment by the notary and approved inspection body are decisive.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":21710},[21711,21712,21713,21714,21715,21716,21717,21718,21719,21720,21721,21722,21723,21724,21725,21726],{"id":21241,"depth":291,"text":21242},{"id":21272,"depth":291,"text":21273},{"id":21352,"depth":291,"text":21353},{"id":21362,"depth":291,"text":21363},{"id":21444,"depth":291,"text":21445},{"id":21477,"depth":291,"text":21478},{"id":21498,"depth":291,"text":21499},{"id":21508,"depth":291,"text":21509},{"id":21515,"depth":291,"text":21516},{"id":21576,"depth":291,"text":21577},{"id":21586,"depth":291,"text":21587},{"id":21593,"depth":291,"text":21594},{"id":21603,"depth":291,"text":21604},{"id":21652,"depth":291,"text":21653},{"id":21676,"depth":291,"text":21677},{"id":8763,"depth":291,"text":8764},"2026-06-29","Which electrical inspection is mandatory when you sell in Belgium, what goes into the installation file and when the 18-month deadline applies – per AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 V06, with references.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fproperty-sale-electrical-dossier.en",{"title":21235,"description":21728},"Electrical Dossier for a Property Sale in 2026","blog\u002Fproperty-sale-electrical-dossier.en",[1979,1980,21735,17299,21736,319,8203,21737,2981,7239],"property sale","inspection report","notary","hf_9-zH5hA9m2IIoiE2SHR5fJjwJJc58CliJArYA3ag",{"id":21740,"title":21741,"articleId":21742,"body":21743,"category":5101,"date":22532,"description":22533,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":22534,"navigation":308,"path":22535,"publishDate":22532,"readTime":610,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":22536,"seoTitle":22537,"slug":21742,"stem":22538,"tags":22539,"__hash__":22545},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Ftop-10-arei-violations.en.md","10 Important AREI Inspection Points: Identify, Avoid and Correct Them","top-10-arei-violations",{"type":8,"value":21744,"toc":22469},[21745,21748,21752,21897,21899,21903,21909,21913,21916,21920,21923,21927,21941,21945,21948,21950,21954,21959,21962,21965,21968,21971,21974,21985,21988,21991,21993,21997,22002,22005,22008,22011,22014,22017,22031,22034,22037,22039,22043,22048,22051,22054,22057,22060,22063,22074,22077,22080,22082,22086,22091,22094,22097,22100,22103,22106,22123,22126,22129,22131,22135,22140,22143,22146,22149,22152,22155,22158,22215,22226,22229,22232,22235,22237,22241,22246,22249,22252,22255,22258,22261,22272,22275,22278,22280,22284,22289,22292,22295,22298,22301,22304,22315,22318,22321,22323,22327,22332,22335,22338,22341,22344,22347,22361,22364,22367,22369,22373,22378,22381,22384,22387,22390,22393,22404,22407,22410,22412,22416,22419,22431,22433,22438,22461],[11,21746,21747],{},"These ten points decide the outcome of a Belgian domestic inspection particularly often: RCD protection, plans, earthing, main switch, bathroom, cross-section and protection, number of circuits per RCD, labelling, mechanical cable protection and surge protection. For each one you get the rule from AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 version 06, the reason behind it and the right correction. The order is a professional checklist, not a statistic – no reliable official frequency ranking exists. Your actual inspection report remains decisive.",[11,21749,21750],{},[35,21751,21269],{},[638,21753,21754,21769],{},[641,21755,21756],{},[644,21757,21758,21760,21763,21766],{},[647,21759,21379],{},[647,21761,21762],{},"Inspection point",[647,21764,21765],{},"Core rule",[647,21767,21768],{},"Book 1 reference",[657,21770,21771,21783,21795,21807,21819,21831,21843,21856,21869,21883],{},[644,21772,21773,21775,21777,21780],{},[662,21774,13705],{},[662,21776,7237],{},[662,21778,21779],{},"300 mA at the origin; at most 30 mA for the prescribed circuits",[662,21781,21782],{},"4.2.4.3b, 5.3.5.3 a",[644,21784,21785,21787,21789,21792],{},[662,21786,13737],{},[662,21788,17926],{},[662,21790,21791],{},"Up to date, in the installation file, matching the installation",[662,21793,21794],{},"3.1.2, 9.1.2",[644,21796,21797,21799,21801,21804],{},[662,21798,13753],{},[662,21800,1214],{},[662,21802,21803],{},"Below 100 Ω; above 30 Ω a stricter RCD layout",[662,21805,21806],{},"4.2.3.2, 4.2.4.3b",[644,21808,21809,21811,21814,21817],{},[662,21810,17009],{},[662,21812,21813],{},"Main switch-disconnector",[662,21815,21816],{},"At least 40 A in domestic installations",[662,21818,12916],{},[644,21820,21821,21823,21826,21829],{},[662,21822,21416],{},[662,21824,21825],{},"Bathroom and shower",[662,21827,21828],{},"Zones 0, 1 and 2 with defined equipment",[662,21830,11131],{},[644,21832,21833,21835,21838,21841],{},[662,21834,21424],{},[662,21836,21837],{},"Cross-section and protection",[662,21839,21840],{},"Maximum rating per cross-section according to table 4.11",[662,21842,11493],{},[644,21844,21845,21847,21850,21853],{},[662,21846,21432],{},[662,21848,21849],{},"Circuits per RCD",[662,21851,21852],{},"At most eight final circuits per 30 mA RCD",[662,21854,21855],{},"4.2.4.3b",[644,21857,21858,21861,21864,21867],{},[662,21859,21860],{},"8",[662,21862,21863],{},"Labelling",[662,21865,21866],{},"Every circuit clearly identified",[662,21868,9142],{},[644,21870,21871,21874,21877,21880],{},[662,21872,21873],{},"9",[662,21875,21876],{},"Mechanical cable protection",[662,21878,21879],{},"Cables suited to the installation method and stresses",[662,21881,21882],{},"5.2.1.5, 5.2.2",[644,21884,21885,21888,21891,21894],{},[662,21886,21887],{},"10",[662,21889,21890],{},"Surge protection",[662,21892,21893],{},"Protection objective according to good practice",[662,21895,21896],{},"4.5.1",[4473,21898],{},[27,21900,21902],{"id":21901},"_1-missing-or-wrong-rcd","1. Missing or wrong RCD",[11,21904,21905,21908],{},[35,21906,21907],{},"AREI reference:"," Art. 4.2.4.3b (RCD at the origin and high-sensitivity group RCDs) \u002F Art. 5.3.5.3 a (type)",[385,21910,21912],{"id":21911},"what-the-inspector-checks","What the inspector checks",[11,21914,21915],{},"At the origin of every domestic installation there is at least one RCD of at most 300 mA. Immediately after it comes at least one high- or very-high-sensitivity RCD (at most 30 mA) for sockets, lighting, rooms with a bath or shower, and the washing machine, tumble dryer and dishwasher. RCDs in domestic installations are at least type A; the one at the origin has a rated current of at least 40 A.",[385,21917,21919],{"id":21918},"why-it-matters","Why it matters",[11,21921,21922],{},"The RCD detects residual currents, for example when current flows through a body to earth, and disconnects the circuit. If it is missing or wrongly assigned, an insulation fault remains life-threatening.",[385,21924,21926],{"id":21925},"how-to-fix-it","How to fix it",[43,21928,21929,21932,21935,21938],{},[46,21930,21931],{},"Add missing RCDs and assign the prescribed circuits correctly.",[46,21933,21934],{},"At most eight final circuits per high-sensitivity RCD (Art. 4.2.4.3b).",[46,21936,21937],{},"Derive the type from the fault current spectrum, manufacturer documents and the special chapter. For charging points, chapter 7.22 requires a dedicated RCD of at most 30 mA per AC circuit plus protection against faults with a DC component; for inverters, the documentation of the specific variant applies.",[46,21939,21940],{},"Whether a time-delayed or selective RCD is needed follows from the coordination in the project, not from a blanket rule.",[385,21942,21944],{"id":21943},"effort","Effort",[11,21946,21947],{},"Device, number of poles, space in the board, wiring and measurements determine the quote.",[4473,21949],{},[27,21951,21953],{"id":21952},"_2-missing-or-outdated-electrical-plans","2. Missing or outdated electrical plans",[11,21955,21956,21958],{},[35,21957,21907],{}," section 3.1.2 (diagrams and plans), Art. 9.1.2 no. 1 (single-line diagram) and no. 2 (situation plan)",[385,21960,21912],{"id":21961},"what-the-inspector-checks-1",[11,21963,21964],{},"The file of a domestic installation includes a single-line diagram and a situation plan that show the installation as built. In a conformity inspection, the report expressly certifies that the installation was carried out according to those plans (6.4.6.4, b.4). Often the plans are missing entirely or show the state before later changes.",[385,21966,21919],{"id":21967},"why-it-matters-1",[11,21969,21970],{},"Without up-to-date plans, neither the inspector nor an electrician can assess the installation safely, and in an emergency nobody knows which device supplies which area.",[385,21972,21926],{"id":21973},"how-to-fix-it-1",[43,21975,21976,21979,21982],{},[46,21977,21978],{},"Create the single-line diagram and situation plan, or update them to the actual state.",[46,21980,21981],{},"Document all circuits, fuses, RCDs and loads.",[46,21983,21984],{},"Briefly describe later non-significant changes and add them to the file (9.1.2 no. 7).",[385,21986,21944],{"id":21987},"effort-1",[11,21989,21990],{},"Starting data and the circuit tracing required determine the effort. The on-site survey is the electrician's job; software structures the result.",[4473,21992],{},[27,21994,21996],{"id":21995},"_3-faulty-earthing","3. Faulty earthing",[11,21998,21999,22001],{},[35,22000,21907],{}," Art. 4.2.3.2 (earthing installations), Art. 4.2.4.3b (earth value and RCD layout)",[385,22003,21912],{"id":22004},"what-the-inspector-checks-2",[11,22006,22007],{},"Earthing is part of the protection concept. In a domestic installation the earth electrode resistance is below 100 Ω (4.2.3.2). A value above 30 Ω does not automatically mean faulty earthing: under Art. 4.2.4.3b it triggers a stricter RCD layout. There is a deficiency when the earthing is missing or damaged, the value reaches 100 Ω, or the RCD layout that belongs to the measured value is missing. Loose connections and corroded earthing conductors are assessed as well.",[385,22009,21919],{"id":22010},"why-it-matters-2",[11,22012,22013],{},"Without effective earthing, metal enclosures can become live in a fault without the protective device disconnecting reliably.",[385,22015,21926],{"id":22016},"how-to-fix-it-2",[43,22018,22019,22022,22025,22028],{},[46,22020,22021],{},"Have the earth resistance measured professionally.",[46,22023,22024],{},"Above 30 Ω, apply the layout of Art. 4.2.4.3b: at least two high- or very-high-sensitivity RCDs, each with at most 16 single or multiple socket outlets, and for the remaining circuits at least one RCD of at most 100 mA per circuit or group.",[46,22026,22027],{},"Decide with the electrician whether to improve the earth electrode, adapt the protection layout, or both.",[46,22029,22030],{},"Check all earth connections and inspect earthing conductors for corrosion.",[385,22032,21944],{"id":22033},"effort-2",[11,22035,22036],{},"Measured value, existing situation, soil and the work required determine the solution.",[4473,22038],{},[27,22040,22042],{"id":22041},"_4-missing-main-switch","4. Missing main switch",[11,22044,22045,22047],{},[35,22046,21907],{}," Art. 5.3.5.1 b (main switch-disconnector)",[385,22049,21912],{"id":22050},"what-the-inspector-checks-3",[11,22052,22053],{},"Every main distribution board has a main switch-disconnector that disconnects all line conductors and, where applicable, the neutral at the same time. In domestic installations its rated current suits the installation and is at least 40 A. A grid operator's overcurrent device may perform this function if it is designed for isolation.",[385,22055,21919],{"id":22056},"why-it-matters-3",[11,22058,22059],{},"In a fire, water damage or an accident, the entire installation must be de-energised with a single action.",[385,22061,21926],{"id":22062},"how-to-fix-it-3",[43,22064,22065,22068,22071],{},[46,22066,22067],{},"Install an all-pole main switch-disconnector of at least 40 A, four-pole for a three-phase installation with neutral.",[46,22069,22070],{},"Position the board so the switch is easily accessible without special tools (5.3.5.1 c).",[46,22072,22073],{},"Existing installations: under part 8, existing main switches from 25 A may stay in service in the cases listed there (8.2.1 no. 4, 8.2.2 no. 4).",[385,22075,21944],{"id":22076},"effort-3",[11,22078,22079],{},"Rating, number of poles, space and board rework are assessed per project.",[4473,22081],{},[27,22083,22085],{"id":22084},"_5-bathroom-zones-not-respected","5. Bathroom zones not respected",[11,22087,22088,22090],{},[35,22089,21907],{}," chapter 7.1 (rooms containing a bath and\u002For shower)",[385,22092,21912],{"id":22093},"what-the-inspector-checks-4",[11,22095,22096],{},"Chapter 7.1 divides the bathroom into zones. Zone 0 is the inside of the bath or of a shower tray at least 10 cm deep; with a shallower tray or no tray, it extends up to 10 cm above the floor within 1.20 m of the fixed water outlet. For a shower, zone 1 extends up to 1.20 m around the centre of the fixed water outlet and up to a height of 2.25 m; for a bath, its outer edge forms the boundary. Zone 2 only exists for a bath: a further 0.60 m around zone 1. Typical infringements are low-voltage sockets in zone 0 or 1, junction boxes in zone 0 and distribution boards in zones 0, 1 or 2.",[385,22098,21919],{"id":22099},"why-it-matters-4",[11,22101,22102],{},"Water strongly reduces the body's resistance. The zones keep equipment as far from the bath and shower as its level of protection requires.",[385,22104,21926],{"id":22105},"how-to-fix-it-4",[43,22107,22108,22111,22114,22117,22120],{},[46,22109,22110],{},"In zone 1, only SELV sockets and SELV controls with the source outside zones 0 and 1, plus suitable permanently connected appliances (7.1.5.2 c).",[46,22112,22113],{},"In zone 2, low-voltage sockets only with a very-high-sensitivity RCD or individually via an isolating transformer of at most 100 W (7.1.5.2 d).",[46,22115,22116],{},"In zones 1 and 2, at least protection against splashing water (external influence AD4, table 7.3); for low-voltage sockets in zone 2, the table's footnote allows IPXX.",[46,22118,22119],{},"All bathroom circuits behind an RCD of at most 30 mA (Art. 4.2.4.3b).",[46,22121,22122],{},"Existing bathrooms whose installation started before 1 March 2025 may, under conditions, keep the former zone layout (6.5.8.1 no. 3).",[385,22124,21944],{"id":22125},"effort-4",[11,22127,22128],{},"Position, cable route, finishes and equipment determine the scope.",[4473,22130],{},[27,22132,22134],{"id":22133},"_6-cable-cross-section-too-small-for-the-fuse","6. Cable cross-section too small for the fuse",[11,22136,22137,22139],{},[35,22138,21907],{}," Art. 4.4.1.4 with table 4.11 (rating by cross-section) \u002F Art. 5.2.1.2 (selection of wiring)",[385,22141,21912],{"id":22142},"what-the-inspector-checks-5",[11,22144,22145],{},"The protective device must match the conductor cross-section. A classic error: a 20 A circuit breaker on a 1.5 mm² cable that may only be protected at 16 A. Socket circuits also need at least 2.5 mm² (5.2.1.2).",[385,22147,21919],{"id":22148},"why-it-matters-5",[11,22150,22151],{},"If a cable carries more current than it can handle, it heats up and can start a fire. The protective device must therefore never exceed the rating permitted for the cross-section.",[385,22153,21926],{"id":22154},"how-to-fix-it-5",[11,22156,22157],{},"Maximum ratings for domestic installations according to table 4.11:",[638,22159,22160,22173],{},[641,22161,22162],{},[644,22163,22164,22167,22170],{},[647,22165,22166],{},"Copper cross-section",[647,22168,22169],{},"Max. fuse",[647,22171,22172],{},"Max. circuit breaker",[657,22174,22175,22183,22191,22199,22207],{},[644,22176,22177,22179,22181],{},[662,22178,4851],{},[662,22180,12801],{},[662,22182,12804],{},[644,22184,22185,22187,22189],{},[662,22186,4854],{},[662,22188,12804],{},[662,22190,12813],{},[644,22192,22193,22195,22197],{},[662,22194,12818],{},[662,22196,12813],{},[662,22198,12823],{},[644,22200,22201,22203,22205],{},[662,22202,12828],{},[662,22204,12831],{},[662,22206,12834],{},[644,22208,22209,22211,22213],{},[662,22210,12839],{},[662,22212,12842],{},[662,22214,12845],{},[43,22216,22217,22223],{},[46,22218,22219,22220],{},"Reduce the protective device to the permitted rating ",[35,22221,22222],{},"or",[46,22224,22225],{},"replace the cable with a larger cross-section.",[11,22227,22228],{},"The table gives maximum values. Installation method, grouping and ambient temperature can require a larger cross-section (4.4.1.4).",[385,22230,21944],{"id":22231},"effort-5",[11,22233,22234],{},"Reducing the protection and replacing the cable are technically different solutions with very different effort.",[4473,22236],{},[27,22238,22240],{"id":22239},"_7-too-many-circuits-per-rcd","7. Too many circuits per RCD",[11,22242,22243,22245],{},[35,22244,21907],{}," Art. 4.2.4.3b (at most eight final circuits per high-sensitivity RCD); Art. 5.3.5.2 b (at most eight sockets per final circuit)",[385,22247,21912],{"id":22248},"what-the-inspector-checks-6",[11,22250,22251],{},"A high- or very-high-sensitivity RCD supplies at most eight final circuits. In older installations everything often hangs on a single device. Part 8 allows more circuits in existing old installations (8.2.1 no. 16, 8.2.2 no. 10); for new and significantly modified parts, the limit applies.",[385,22253,21919],{"id":22254},"why-it-matters-6",[11,22256,22257],{},"Many circuits on one RCD add up leakage currents and increase the risk of nuisance tripping. In a fault, a large part of the home also loses power at once.",[385,22259,21926],{"id":22260},"how-to-fix-it-6",[43,22262,22263,22266,22269],{},[46,22264,22265],{},"Add more 30 mA RCDs.",[46,22267,22268],{},"Split circuits sensibly, for example by floor or function.",[46,22270,22271],{},"At most eight single or multiple socket outlets per final circuit.",[385,22273,21944],{"id":22274},"effort-6",[11,22276,22277],{},"Board space, split, sizing and measurements belong in the quote.",[4473,22279],{},[27,22281,22283],{"id":22282},"_8-missing-circuit-labelling","8. Missing circuit labelling",[11,22285,22286,22288],{},[35,22287,21907],{}," Art. 3.1.3.1 (identification of circuits)",[385,22290,21912],{"id":22291},"what-the-inspector-checks-7",[11,22293,22294],{},"All protective devices in the board are clearly labelled, and the label shows which room or appliance each circuit supplies.",[385,22296,21919],{"id":22297},"why-it-matters-7",[11,22299,22300],{},"Without labels, nobody quickly switches off the right circuit in an emergency, and maintenance becomes guesswork.",[385,22302,21926],{"id":22303},"how-to-fix-it-7",[43,22305,22306,22309,22312],{},[46,22307,22308],{},"Fit all protective devices with durable, legible labels.",[46,22310,22311],{},"Name them by room and function, for example \"Kitchen sockets\", \"Bathroom lighting\".",[46,22313,22314],{},"Align labels with the single-line diagram: the same reference in the board, on the diagram and on the situation plan.",[385,22316,21944],{"id":22317},"effort-7",[11,22319,22320],{},"Labelling itself is quick; safely identifying unknown circuits is electrician's work.",[4473,22322],{},[27,22324,22326],{"id":22325},"_9-cables-without-adequate-protection","9. Cables without adequate protection",[11,22328,22329,22331],{},[35,22330,21907],{}," Art. 5.2.2 (installation methods) \u002F Art. 5.2.1.5 (mechanical strength, penetrations)",[385,22333,21912],{"id":22334},"what-the-inspector-checks-8",[11,22336,22337],{},"Every cable must be suitable for its installation method (5.2.2) and laid so that it keeps its mechanical strength. If it is particularly exposed to mechanical damage, it is armoured or specially protected (5.2.1.5). Typical infringements: cable types unsuitable for surface or open installation, cables hanging loose in the basement, or unprotected floor penetrations.",[385,22339,21919],{"id":22340},"why-it-matters-8",[11,22342,22343],{},"Insulation damaged by nails, screws or rodents leads to short circuits and fires.",[385,22345,21926],{"id":22346},"how-to-fix-it-8",[43,22348,22349,22352,22355,22358],{},[46,22350,22351],{},"Check cable type and installation method against the methods permitted in 5.2.2; put unsuitable cables in conduit or trunking, or replace them.",[46,22353,22354],{},"Protect exposed cables mechanically.",[46,22356,22357],{},"Protect floor penetrations at finished floor level; conduits there protrude at least 10 cm above the floor (5.2.1.5).",[46,22359,22360],{},"Design penetrations between rooms with very different humidity to prevent condensation.",[385,22362,21944],{"id":22363},"effort-8",[11,22365,22366],{},"Cable, environment, protection method and building work determine the execution.",[4473,22368],{},[27,22370,22372],{"id":22371},"_10-surge-protection-not-assessed","10. Surge protection not assessed",[11,22374,22375,22377],{},[35,22376,21907],{}," Art. 4.5.1 (principle of surge protection)",[385,22379,21912],{"id":22380},"what-the-inspector-checks-9",[11,22382,22383],{},"Art. 4.5.1 requires people and property to be protected, according to good practice, against the harmful effects of overvoltages, for example from atmospheric phenomena or switching. The text does not prescribe a specific type of surge protective device. What matters is that the electrician assesses the risk and documents the chosen solution.",[385,22385,21919],{"id":22386},"why-it-matters-9",[11,22388,22389],{},"Overvoltages from lightning or grid disturbances destroy sensitive electronics. A surge protective device (SPD) diverts them to earth.",[385,22391,21926],{"id":22392},"how-to-fix-it-9",[43,22394,22395,22398,22401],{},[46,22396,22397],{},"Assess the risk: lightning protection system, supply, cable lengths, PV and charging point.",[46,22399,22400],{},"Set type, location and upstream protection according to the risk assessment and manufacturer data; with external lightning protection, a type 1 lightning current arrester comes into play.",[46,22402,22403],{},"Document the SPD on the single-line diagram and check its status indicator regularly.",[385,22405,21944],{"id":22406},"effort-9",[11,22408,22409],{},"Selection, coordination, connection and board rework are project-specific.",[4473,22411],{},[27,22413,22415],{"id":22414},"conclusion-two-passes-before-the-inspection","Conclusion: two passes before the inspection",[11,22417,22418],{},"Go through the ten points in two passes: first documents and references, then the actual condition, measured values and protective functions together with your electrician. A corrected drawing does not prove that a physical defect has been fixed; conversely, every completed correction belongs back on the diagram and situation plan. Mark every open point with its source and owner, and keep the dated version with the inspection report, measurement records and manufacturer documents.",[11,22420,22421,22422,6254,22426,22430],{},"PlanElec's AREI\u002FRGIE self-check reports findings on the supported rules, such as RCD assignment and circuit protection, before the inspection body arrives. The physical condition and measured values are assessed on site by the approved inspection body. Sources are ",[23,22423,22425],{"href":4466,"rel":22424},[4434],"AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 V06",[23,22427,22429],{"href":15810,"rel":22428},[4434],"official page on installation inspections","; they establish obligations, not a frequency ranking.",[4473,22432],{},[11,22434,22435],{},[35,22436,22437],{},"Related articles:",[43,22439,22440,22446,22451,22456],{},[46,22441,22442],{},[23,22443,22445],{"href":22444},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Finspection-failed-what-now","Electrical Inspection Failed – What Now?",[46,22447,22448],{},[23,22449,22450],{"href":20604},"A 30 mA RCD for Every Socket?",[46,22452,22453],{},[23,22454,22455],{"href":8687},"Cable Cross-Section per Circuit Breaker",[46,22457,22458],{},[23,22459,22460],{"href":4974},"Which Cables Can I Use in the Bathroom?",[11,22462,22463,2459,22466],{},[35,22464,22465],{},"Plan with PlanElec and use the self-check to prepare for the technical and official inspection.",[23,22467,17818],{"href":4504,"rel":22468},[4434],{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":22470},[22471,22477,22483,22489,22495,22501,22507,22513,22519,22525,22531],{"id":21901,"depth":291,"text":21902,"children":22472},[22473,22474,22475,22476],{"id":21911,"depth":599,"text":21912},{"id":21918,"depth":599,"text":21919},{"id":21925,"depth":599,"text":21926},{"id":21943,"depth":599,"text":21944},{"id":21952,"depth":291,"text":21953,"children":22478},[22479,22480,22481,22482],{"id":21961,"depth":599,"text":21912},{"id":21967,"depth":599,"text":21919},{"id":21973,"depth":599,"text":21926},{"id":21987,"depth":599,"text":21944},{"id":21995,"depth":291,"text":21996,"children":22484},[22485,22486,22487,22488],{"id":22004,"depth":599,"text":21912},{"id":22010,"depth":599,"text":21919},{"id":22016,"depth":599,"text":21926},{"id":22033,"depth":599,"text":21944},{"id":22041,"depth":291,"text":22042,"children":22490},[22491,22492,22493,22494],{"id":22050,"depth":599,"text":21912},{"id":22056,"depth":599,"text":21919},{"id":22062,"depth":599,"text":21926},{"id":22076,"depth":599,"text":21944},{"id":22084,"depth":291,"text":22085,"children":22496},[22497,22498,22499,22500],{"id":22093,"depth":599,"text":21912},{"id":22099,"depth":599,"text":21919},{"id":22105,"depth":599,"text":21926},{"id":22125,"depth":599,"text":21944},{"id":22133,"depth":291,"text":22134,"children":22502},[22503,22504,22505,22506],{"id":22142,"depth":599,"text":21912},{"id":22148,"depth":599,"text":21919},{"id":22154,"depth":599,"text":21926},{"id":22231,"depth":599,"text":21944},{"id":22239,"depth":291,"text":22240,"children":22508},[22509,22510,22511,22512],{"id":22248,"depth":599,"text":21912},{"id":22254,"depth":599,"text":21919},{"id":22260,"depth":599,"text":21926},{"id":22274,"depth":599,"text":21944},{"id":22282,"depth":291,"text":22283,"children":22514},[22515,22516,22517,22518],{"id":22291,"depth":599,"text":21912},{"id":22297,"depth":599,"text":21919},{"id":22303,"depth":599,"text":21926},{"id":22317,"depth":599,"text":21944},{"id":22325,"depth":291,"text":22326,"children":22520},[22521,22522,22523,22524],{"id":22334,"depth":599,"text":21912},{"id":22340,"depth":599,"text":21919},{"id":22346,"depth":599,"text":21926},{"id":22363,"depth":599,"text":21944},{"id":22371,"depth":291,"text":22372,"children":22526},[22527,22528,22529,22530],{"id":22380,"depth":599,"text":21912},{"id":22386,"depth":599,"text":21919},{"id":22392,"depth":599,"text":21926},{"id":22406,"depth":599,"text":21944},{"id":22414,"depth":291,"text":22415},"2026-06-20","Ten points where Belgian domestic installations often stumble at inspection – with limit values, AREI references and the right correction for each one.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Ftop-10-arei-violations.en",{"title":21741,"description":22533},"10 Important AREI Inspection Points and How to Fix Them","blog\u002Ftop-10-arei-violations.en",[18946,22540,22541,1981,22542,1213,22543,22544],"violations","electrical-inspection","rcd","belgium","deficiencies","1hHH7Lsr5G6Rzg75Wfku4JxK6fS6K-5WqFlbkW2562A",{"id":22547,"title":22548,"articleId":22549,"body":22550,"category":5101,"date":23054,"description":23055,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":23056,"navigation":308,"path":23057,"publishDate":23054,"readTime":312,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":23058,"seoTitle":22445,"slug":22549,"stem":23059,"tags":23060,"__hash__":23062},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Finspection-failed-what-now.en.md","Electrical Inspection Failed – What Now? Step by Step to the Re-Inspection","inspection-failed-what-now",{"type":8,"value":22551,"toc":23028},[22552,22558,22561,22567,22571,22574,22578,22581,22585,22633,22637,22640,22644,22647,22651,22654,22658,22661,22771,22775,22779,22782,22793,22797,22800,22804,22811,22825,22829,22836,22840,22843,22847,22850,22853,22870,22873,22877,22880,22883,22887,22890,22897,22901,22904,22908,22911,22923,22927,22930,22934,22957,22960,22964,22971,22995,22998,23000,23004,23020],[11,22553,22554,22557],{},[35,22555,22556],{},"After a negative inspection, you have every infringement in the report corrected, bring the single-line diagram and situation plan in line with the installation as built, and have the installation inspected again."," The deadline depends on the type of inspection: for a new installation, the affected part may only be put into use after correction and a new inspection. After a periodic control visit, the same inspection body returns within one year. After a sale inspection, the buyer has 18 months from the deed of sale and chooses the inspection body freely.",[11,22559,22560],{},"A negative report on its own does not tell you whether only documents are missing or whether there is a safety risk. The individual findings decide. This guide shows you how to read them, prioritise them, have them corrected and prove the result.",[11,22562,22563,22566],{},[35,22564,22565],{},"Editing and review: PlanElec team, 5 October 2026",", checked against AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1, version 06, applicable since 1 April 2026.",[27,22568,22570],{"id":22569},"what-is-in-the-negative-report","What is in the negative report?",[11,22572,22573],{},"The approved inspection body's report lists the infringements of Book 1, any circuits with an insufficient insulation level, and the conclusion. For a control visit to a domestic installation, it also separates infringements, remarks and applicable derogations for existing installations (subsection 6.5.7.2, b.5). A remark is not an infringement – so check carefully which heading a finding is listed under.",[385,22575,22577],{"id":22576},"reading-codes-and-priorities-correctly","Reading codes and priorities correctly",[11,22579,22580],{},"Internal codes and priority classes differ between inspection bodies and report templates. \"C1\", \"C2\" or \"C3\" therefore do not set a universal Belgian deadline; the legend of your report is what counts. If a finding is unclear, ask the inspection body in writing for the rule reference, the affected circuit and the evidence it expects. Any mention of immediate danger takes priority, whatever the code: do not switch the affected part back on yourself.",[27,22582,22584],{"id":22583},"deadlines-by-type-of-inspection","Deadlines by type of inspection",[638,22586,22587,22599],{},[641,22588,22589],{},[644,22590,22591,22594,22597],{},[647,22592,22593],{},"Type of inspection",[647,22595,22596],{},"What applies now",[647,22598,21768],{},[657,22600,22601,22612,22623],{},[644,22602,22603,22606,22609],{},[662,22604,22605],{},"Conformity inspection of a new installation or significant modification",[662,22607,22608],{},"The affected part may not be put into use; new conformity inspection after correction",[662,22610,22611],{},"9.1.3.1",[644,22613,22614,22617,22620],{},[662,22615,22616],{},"Periodic control visit",[662,22618,22619],{},"Correct without delay; new visit by the same body within one year",[662,22621,22622],{},"9.1.3.2, 6.5.7.2 b.6, b.7",[644,22624,22625,22628,22631],{},[662,22626,22627],{},"Sale inspection of an old domestic installation",[662,22629,22630],{},"The buyer has it inspected again no later than 18 months after the deed of sale; free choice of body",[662,22632,21314],{},[385,22634,22636],{"id":22635},"after-a-periodic-inspection","After a periodic inspection",[11,22638,22639],{},"The conclusion of the report states the date by which the additional visit by the same body must take place (6.5.7.2, b.6). If infringements remain at that second visit, the body sends a copy of the report to the Directorate-General for Energy (b.7). Until then, the work is carried out without delay and all appropriate measures are taken so that the infringements pose no danger while the installation stays in service.",[385,22641,22643],{"id":22642},"for-a-new-installation","For a new installation",[11,22645,22646],{},"For a new installation or a significant modification, the affected part stays out of service until the infringements are corrected and inspected again (9.1.3.1). Coordinate the grid connection with the responsible grid operator as well; it only makes the power of a new installation available once a positive report exists (6.4.6.2).",[385,22648,22650],{"id":22649},"when-selling-a-property","When selling a property",[11,22652,22653],{},"After a negative sale inspection, the buyer notifies the original inspection body in writing of their identity and the date of the deed of sale. No later than 18 months after that date, the buyer has the corrections inspected. The buyer chooses the body freely; a different body informs the first one (8.4.2.2 a). The relevant date is that of the notarial deed, not of a private purchase agreement.",[27,22655,22657],{"id":22656},"ten-inspection-areas-you-will-find-in-the-report","Ten inspection areas you will find in the report",[11,22659,22660],{},"These areas come up regularly in reports. They are not a statistical ranking, but a useful map for your findings.",[638,22662,22663,22674],{},[641,22664,22665],{},[644,22666,22667,22669,22672],{},[647,22668,21379],{},[647,22670,22671],{},"Inspection area",[647,22673,9490],{},[657,22675,22676,22686,22695,22705,22715,22724,22733,22742,22752,22761],{},[644,22677,22678,22680,22683],{},[662,22679,13705],{},[662,22681,22682],{},"RCD missing or unsuitable: 300 mA at the origin, at most 30 mA for the prescribed circuits, at least type A",[662,22684,22685],{},"4.2.4.3 b, 5.3.5.3 a",[644,22687,22688,22690,22693],{},[662,22689,13737],{},[662,22691,22692],{},"Single-line diagram or situation plan missing or not matching the installation",[662,22694,21794],{},[644,22696,22697,22699,22702],{},[662,22698,13753],{},[662,22700,22701],{},"Earth value and RCD layout do not fit together (below 100 Ω; above 30 Ω a stricter layout)",[662,22703,22704],{},"4.2.3.2, 4.2.4.3 b",[644,22706,22707,22709,22712],{},[662,22708,17009],{},[662,22710,22711],{},"Circuits in the board not clearly labelled",[662,22713,22714],{},"3.1.3",[644,22716,22717,22719,22722],{},[662,22718,21416],{},[662,22720,22721],{},"Cables not adequately protected mechanically for the installation method and stresses",[662,22723,21882],{},[644,22725,22726,22728,22731],{},[662,22727,21424],{},[662,22729,22730],{},"Bathroom zones and protection requirements not respected",[662,22732,11131],{},[644,22734,22735,22737,22740],{},[662,22736,21432],{},[662,22738,22739],{},"Main switch-disconnector missing or too small (at least 40 A in a home)",[662,22741,12916],{},[644,22743,22744,22746,22749],{},[662,22745,21860],{},[662,22747,22748],{},"Protective device and cross-section not coordinated",[662,22750,22751],{},"4.4.1.4, table 4.11",[644,22753,22754,22756,22759],{},[662,22755,21873],{},[662,22757,22758],{},"Surge protection not professionally assessed",[662,22760,21896],{},[644,22762,22763,22765,22768],{},[662,22764,21887],{},[662,22766,22767],{},"Regional smoke detector duty mixed up with AREI duties – check both legal areas separately",[662,22769,22770],{},"regional housing law, not AREI",[27,22772,22774],{"id":22773},"step-by-step-after-the-negative-inspection","Step by step after the negative inspection",[385,22776,22778],{"id":22777},"step-1-read-the-report-line-by-line","Step 1: read the report line by line",[11,22780,22781],{},"Go through each finding and note:",[43,22783,22784,22787,22790],{},[46,22785,22786],{},"Which heading is it under: infringement, remark or derogation?",[46,22788,22789],{},"Where exactly is the problem: room, board, circuit?",[46,22791,22792],{},"What exactly is being flagged, and which rule is involved?",[385,22794,22796],{"id":22795},"step-2-set-priorities","Step 2: set priorities",[11,22798,22799],{},"First come all findings that the report marks as immediate danger, a reason for disconnection or an obstacle to putting into use. Then plan the remaining infringements by dependency: cause and protection concept first, then workmanship, measurement and documentation.",[385,22801,22803],{"id":22802},"step-3-bring-in-an-electrician","Step 3: bring in an electrician",[11,22805,22806,22807,22810],{},"You can organise the report, gather documents and compare the plans with the visible installation. Work in the board, on protective devices, on the earthing or on fixed wiring belongs with a ",[35,22808,22809],{},"qualified electrician",", for example:",[43,22812,22813,22816,22819,22822],{},[46,22814,22815],{},"adding or replacing an RCD",[46,22817,22818],{},"improving the earth electrode or adapting the RCD layout to the earth value",[46,22820,22821],{},"protecting cables mechanically or re-routing them",[46,22823,22824],{},"installing the main switch-disconnector",[385,22826,22828],{"id":22827},"step-4-bring-the-plans-in-line-with-the-installation","Step 4: bring the plans in line with the installation",[11,22830,22831,22832,22835],{},"The single-line diagram and situation plan show ",[35,22833,22834],{},"the state after correction",". Do not copy assumed cross-sections or ratings; clarify unknown characteristics before exporting, or mark them explicitly as open.",[385,22837,22839],{"id":22838},"step-5-book-the-re-inspection","Step 5: book the re-inspection",[11,22841,22842],{},"Who inspects depends on the type of inspection: after a periodic visit it is the same body; after a sale inspection the buyer chooses freely. Use the report to clarify the scope before you book.",[27,22844,22846],{"id":22845},"turning-a-finding-into-a-verifiable-measure","Turning a finding into a verifiable measure",[11,22848,22849],{},"The report describes a result, not necessarily the cause. \"Insufficient insulation resistance\" can point to a damaged conductor, moisture or a connected appliance. For reference: each circuit must reach at least 500 kΩ at a 500 V test voltage (6.4.5.1). \"Plan does not match\" ranges from a missing socket to a wrong sequence of protective devices. So have the cause and extent established first, before a component is replaced.",[11,22851,22852],{},"For each finding, five questions help:",[105,22854,22855,22858,22861,22864,22867],{},[46,22856,22857],{},"Which part of the installation was actually inspected?",[46,22859,22860],{},"Which rule or protective function is involved?",[46,22862,22863],{},"Which diagnosis or measurement confirms the cause?",[46,22865,22866],{},"Which correction removes the cause, not just the symptom?",[46,22868,22869],{},"Which evidence shows the inspection body the completed correction?",[11,22871,22872],{},"Several infringements are often linked. A changed distribution affects the single-line diagram, labelling, protective devices and measured values. New earthing work is finished before plans are finalised and measurements repeated. So plan one consistent final state rather than a series of contradictory interim states.",[27,22874,22876],{"id":22875},"separating-documentation-defects-from-workmanship-defects","Separating documentation defects from workmanship defects",[11,22878,22879],{},"A missing plan is not fixed by drawing an unverified plan. Survey the installation first – opening and measuring is the electrician's job. Then link each symbol to the real circuit and check that board labels, single-line diagram and situation plan use the same reference.",[11,22881,22882],{},"Conversely, a nicer drawing does not fix a workmanship defect. If a protective device is unsuitable, the earthing insufficient or a cable mechanically at risk, the installation is corrected and, where needed, measured again; the plan then follows the state as built. That way the inspection body finds up-to-date documents and a corrected installation at the re-inspection.",[27,22884,22886],{"id":22885},"special-case-a-sale","Special case: a sale",[11,22888,22889],{},"As the buyer, keep the report, the deed of sale and the installation file together. The 18 months run from the day of the deed. The deadline is no postponement for visible hazards: have unsafe parts assessed by an electrician immediately and, if needed, taken out of service.",[11,22891,22892,22893,22896],{},"If the building is demolished or the installation completely renewed, a separate route applies: seller and buyer record it in the deed, the buyer informs the Directorate-General for Energy, and the new installation follows the conformity inspection of chapter 6.4 (8.4.2.2 a and b). The ",[23,22894,21666],{"href":21664,"rel":22895},[4434]," answers further sale questions.",[27,22898,22900],{"id":22899},"planning-costs-realistically","Planning costs realistically",[11,22902,22903],{},"Fees and repair costs depend on the type of inspection, the body, travel, the number of boards, measurement effort and the actual defect. Ask the inspection body directly for its current fee. A good repair quote lists diagnosis, materials, labour, measurements, plan updates and the re-inspection separately – so you can see whether a concealed cable repair or a board rebuild is included.",[27,22905,22907],{"id":22906},"a-solid-file-for-the-re-inspection","A solid file for the re-inspection",[11,22909,22910],{},"Keep a table with one row per finding: report text, affected circuit, measure, responsible person, completion date and evidence. Photos supplement the file; they do not replace measurements. Update the plans after the actual work and then check labels and references once more.",[11,22912,955,22913,22916,22917,22922],{},[23,22914,21672],{"href":21670,"rel":22915},[4434]," explains consequences and deadlines; the ",[23,22918,22921],{"href":22919,"rel":22920},"https:\u002F\u002Feconomie.fgov.be\u002Ffr\u002Fthemes\u002Fenergie\u002Fsources-et-vecteurs-denergie\u002Felectricite\u002Fsecurite-et-controle-des\u002Forganismes-de-controle-agrees",[4434],"list of approved inspection bodies"," is official too.",[27,22924,22926],{"id":22925},"keeping-changes-under-control-until-the-re-inspection","Keeping changes under control until the re-inspection",[11,22928,22929],{},"After the corrections, freeze a documented state: dated plans, board labels, measurement records and photos of work that will later be concealed. Check every further change before the appointment against that state and record it. Otherwise one small additional cable breaks exactly the consistency that electrician and designer have just established. Ask all occupants to avoid temporary connections and their own alterations until the inspection. If a change is unavoidable, the responsible electrician receives the report, the current plans and a clear description of the change.",[27,22931,22933],{"id":22932},"final-check-before-the-new-appointment","Final check before the new appointment",[43,22935,22936,22939,22942,22945,22948,22951,22954],{},[46,22937,22938],{},"Every finding is linked to a completed measure.",[46,22940,22941],{},"Corrections that require a measurement have been measured and documented properly.",[46,22943,22944],{},"Circuit labels match in the board and on both plans.",[46,22946,22947],{},"New or removed appliances are updated on the situation plan.",[46,22949,22950],{},"Ratings and cable data on the single-line diagram match the installation.",[46,22952,22953],{},"Inspection body and type of inspection are confirmed.",[46,22955,22956],{},"Report, plans, EAN code and manufacturer documents are ready.",[11,22958,22959],{},"Every completed repair then goes into the re-inspection with clear evidence. Allow time for questions and, if needed, a second diagnosis: a finding is only closed when cause, workmanship and evidence line up.",[27,22961,22963],{"id":22962},"how-planelec-helps","How PlanElec helps",[11,22965,22966,22967,22970],{},"PlanElec surfaces supported design errors ",[35,22968,22969],{},"before the re-inspection"," and keeps your documents consistent:",[43,22972,22973,22979,22984,22989],{},[46,22974,22975,22978],{},[35,22976,22977],{},"AREI\u002FRGIE self-check"," reports findings on RCD protection and circuit protection in the supported rules",[46,22980,22981,22983],{},[35,22982,3075],{}," shows the topology you entered in a structured way",[46,22985,22986,22988],{},[35,22987,3892],{}," uses the Belgian symbol library",[46,22990,22991,22994],{},[35,22992,22993],{},"Circuit references"," are identical in diagram and plan",[11,22996,22997],{},"The roles stay clear: PlanElec shows you whether design and documents are consistent in the supported rules; measurements and the verdict on the installation come from the approved inspection body.",[4473,22999],{},[11,23001,23002],{},[35,23003,22437],{},[43,23005,23006,23012,23016],{},[46,23007,23008],{},[23,23009,23011],{"href":23010},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Ftop-10-arei-violations","10 important AREI inspection points",[46,23013,23014],{},[23,23015,22450],{"href":20604},[46,23017,23018],{},[23,23019,22455],{"href":8687},[11,23021,23022,2459,23025],{},[35,23023,23024],{},"Bring your documents in line with the installation and go into the re-inspection with an organised file.",[23,23026,17818],{"href":4504,"rel":23027},[4434],{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":23029},[23030,23033,23038,23039,23046,23047,23048,23049,23050,23051,23052,23053],{"id":22569,"depth":291,"text":22570,"children":23031},[23032],{"id":22576,"depth":599,"text":22577},{"id":22583,"depth":291,"text":22584,"children":23034},[23035,23036,23037],{"id":22635,"depth":599,"text":22636},{"id":22642,"depth":599,"text":22643},{"id":22649,"depth":599,"text":22650},{"id":22656,"depth":291,"text":22657},{"id":22773,"depth":291,"text":22774,"children":23040},[23041,23042,23043,23044,23045],{"id":22777,"depth":599,"text":22778},{"id":22795,"depth":599,"text":22796},{"id":22802,"depth":599,"text":22803},{"id":22827,"depth":599,"text":22828},{"id":22838,"depth":599,"text":22839},{"id":22845,"depth":291,"text":22846},{"id":22875,"depth":291,"text":22876},{"id":22885,"depth":291,"text":22886},{"id":22899,"depth":291,"text":22900},{"id":22906,"depth":291,"text":22907},{"id":22925,"depth":291,"text":22926},{"id":22932,"depth":291,"text":22933},{"id":22962,"depth":291,"text":22963},"2026-06-16","Your electrical inspection came back negative? Read the report, identify the applicable AREI deadline, plan safe corrections and prepare the re-inspection.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Finspection-failed-what-now.en",{"title":22548,"description":23055},"blog\u002Finspection-failed-what-now.en",[1981,22541,23061,22544,19960,18946,22543],"failed","_mZRJiV1cOvp11r3sGotP5Km_xSpBV7IrKpqXvo_RmY",{"id":23064,"title":23065,"articleId":23066,"body":23067,"category":8819,"date":23310,"description":23311,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":23312,"navigation":308,"path":23313,"publishDate":23310,"readTime":3670,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":23314,"seoTitle":23315,"slug":23066,"stem":23316,"tags":23317,"__hash__":23322},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fsmart-home-domotica-arei.en.md","Smart Home and AREI: What You Need to Know About Home Automation","smart-home-domotica-arei",{"type":8,"value":23068,"toc":23302},[23069,23075,23079,23082,23096,23099,23103,23109,23116,23120,23217,23221,23224,23228,23235,23246,23250,23258,23271,23273,23277,23294],[11,23070,23071,23074],{},[35,23072,23073],{},"The AREI\u002FRGIE, Belgium's electrical installation regulation, does not treat smart home devices as a category of their own, but it does govern the fixed electrical installation they are built into."," Wi-Fi relays, smart plugs and DIN-rail modules are allowed as long as the installation behind them meets the rules and the modules are suitable for how they are mounted. DIN-rail modules and any change to the fixed wiring belong on the single-line diagram and the situation plan.",[27,23076,23078],{"id":23077},"what-is-allowed","What is allowed?",[11,23080,23081],{},"You can use smart home devices such as Wi-Fi relays (Shelly, Sonoff), smart plugs (TP-Link, Hue Smart Plug) or smart bulbs (Philips Hue, IKEA TRADFRI) as long as the fixed installation is right:",[43,23083,23084,23087,23090,23093],{},[46,23085,23086],{},"Cables are correctly sized and protected.",[46,23088,23089],{},"Circuit breakers and residual current devices (RCDs) are present and correctly assigned to the circuits.",[46,23091,23092],{},"The installation is earthed.",[46,23094,23095],{},"Permanently installed modules carry CE marking and are used within the purpose and installation conditions declared by the manufacturer.",[11,23097,23098],{},"A smart relay that switches a load is a control device. Electronic devices are expressly permitted for this if they meet the applicable standards or an equivalent safety level (AREI\u002FRGIE Sub-section 5.3.3.2 point b). If the module sits in a flush-mounted box, the box must be large enough to house the connections easily (Sub-section 5.2.6.1).",[27,23100,23102],{"id":23101},"din-rail-modules-in-the-distribution-board","DIN-rail modules in the distribution board",[11,23104,23105,23108],{},[35,23106,23107],{},"DIN-rail modules"," such as Shelly Pro, Shelly Pro 3EM or Sonoff DIN modules are a category of their own. They sit directly on the DIN rail in the distribution board and are therefore part of the fixed installation.",[11,23110,23111,23112,23115],{},"That is why ",[35,23113,23114],{},"DIN-rail modules appear on the single-line diagram",". Under AREI\u002FRGIE Sub-section 3.1.2.2 point a, the single-line diagram shows, among other things, residual current and overcurrent protective devices, switches and fixed machines and appliances; under Section 9.1.2, the diagram is part of the installation file the owner keeps. Draw the modules like any other board module.",[27,23117,23119],{"id":23118},"overview-smart-home-types-and-the-areirgie","Overview: smart home types and the AREI\u002FRGIE",[638,23121,23122,23138],{},[641,23123,23124],{},[644,23125,23126,23129,23132,23135],{},[647,23127,23128],{},"Smart home type",[647,23130,23131],{},"Location",[647,23133,23134],{},"Part of the fixed installation?",[647,23136,23137],{},"On the single-line diagram?",[657,23139,23140,23154,23167,23179,23191,23205],{},[644,23141,23142,23145,23148,23151],{},[662,23143,23144],{},"Wi-Fi relay (Shelly 1, Sonoff)",[662,23146,23147],{},"Flush box behind the switch",[662,23149,23150],{},"Yes, once it is permanently wired",[662,23152,23153],{},"Yes, if the fixed wiring is changed (e.g. neutral run to the switch); otherwise the diagram is unchanged",[644,23155,23156,23159,23162,23165],{},[662,23157,23158],{},"Smart plug (plug-in)",[662,23160,23161],{},"In an existing socket",[662,23163,23164],{},"No",[662,23166,23164],{},[644,23168,23169,23172,23175,23177],{},[662,23170,23171],{},"Smart bulb",[662,23173,23174],{},"In an existing lamp holder",[662,23176,23164],{},[662,23178,23164],{},[644,23180,23181,23184,23186,23189],{},[662,23182,23183],{},"DIN-rail module (Shelly Pro)",[662,23185,3497],{},[662,23187,23188],{},"Yes",[662,23190,23188],{},[644,23192,23193,23196,23199,23202],{},[662,23194,23195],{},"Smart thermostat (Nest, tado)",[662,23197,23198],{},"Wall-mounted",[662,23200,23201],{},"Yes, if permanently connected to 230 V",[662,23203,23204],{},"The supply circuit yes; battery-powered devices no",[644,23206,23207,23210,23213,23215],{},[662,23208,23209],{},"Smart door lock (battery)",[662,23211,23212],{},"Door frame",[662,23214,23164],{},[662,23216,23164],{},[27,23218,23220],{"id":23219},"control-switching-and-isolation","Control, switching and isolation",[11,23222,23223],{},"Not every smart function needs a conventional wall switch. What matters is the device's function and the rules for control, switching, isolation, emergency action and maintenance. The smart relay is the load's control device (5.3.3.2). An app or cloud connection is not an isolating device unless the product and circuit are expressly designed for that. The manufacturer's instructions and the professional design of the fixed wiring settle it.",[27,23225,23227],{"id":23226},"what-does-the-inspection-keuring-check","What does the inspection (keuring) check?",[11,23229,23230,23231,23234],{},"During the conformity inspection, the approved body checks the ",[35,23232,23233],{},"electrical installation",", not the smart home logic:",[43,23236,23237,23240,23243],{},[46,23238,23239],{},"Wiring, protective devices and earthing are checked.",[46,23241,23242],{},"DIN-rail modules must appear on the single-line diagram, relays in switch boxes whenever the fixed wiring was changed for them.",[46,23244,23245],{},"The app, scenes and automation rules are not part of the inspection.",[27,23247,23249],{"id":23248},"documenting-smart-home-components-with-planelec","Documenting smart home components with PlanElec",[11,23251,23252,23253,23255,23256,94],{},"PlanElec documents DIN-rail modules in the distribution board together with their protective devices and circuits. You plan supported relay and Shelly channels in lighting control with an explicit cable preview. With an active automation profile, you plan channels, control points and terminals in the ",[35,23254,8041],{}," area and export channel and terminal plans as a handover dossier. The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check covers the electrical side; automation logic, cybersecurity and radio availability are down to the manufacturer and integrator. For bus systems such as KNX, read ",[23,23257,20187],{"href":20186},[11,23259,23260,23261,6254,23265,23270],{},"Official sources: ",[23,23262,23264],{"href":4466,"rel":23263},[4434],"FPS Economy: AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 V06",[23,23266,23269],{"href":23267,"rel":23268},"https:\u002F\u002Fsingle-market-economy.ec.europa.eu\u002Fsingle-market\u002Fce-marking_en",[4434],"European Commission guidance on CE marking",". CE marking is the manufacturer's declaration under applicable EU law; the conformity of the Belgian installation is assessed at the inspection.",[4473,23272],{},[11,23274,23275],{},[35,23276,22437],{},[43,23278,23279,23284,23289],{},[46,23280,23281],{},[23,23282,23283],{"href":9626},"Dedicated circuits: which appliances need their own circuit?",[46,23285,23286],{},[23,23287,23288],{"href":23010},"Top 10 AREI violations",[46,23290,23291],{},[23,23292,23293],{"href":7191},"AREI regulations 2026: what has changed?",[11,23295,23296,2459,23299],{},[35,23297,23298],{},"Plan your smart home with clean electrical documentation.",[23,23300,23301],{"href":270},"Start for free",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":23303},[23304,23305,23306,23307,23308,23309],{"id":23077,"depth":291,"text":23078},{"id":23101,"depth":291,"text":23102},{"id":23118,"depth":291,"text":23119},{"id":23219,"depth":291,"text":23220},{"id":23226,"depth":291,"text":23227},{"id":23248,"depth":291,"text":23249},"2026-06-09","Does a smart home installation have to meet the AREI\u002FRGIE? The fixed electrical installation does. What is allowed, what goes on the single-line diagram and what the inspection checks.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fsmart-home-domotica-arei.en",{"title":23065,"description":23311},"Smart Home and AREI: Home Automation Essentials","blog\u002Fsmart-home-domotica-arei.en",[23318,1860,18946,23319,23320,23321,1981],"smart-home","shelly","din-rail","home-automation","lxpv4BqbiqdjUu14Xs8HwtA8Nighylz-Be16BPjqjO0",{"id":23324,"title":23325,"articleId":23326,"body":23327,"category":5101,"date":23781,"description":23782,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":23783,"navigation":308,"path":23784,"publishDate":23781,"readTime":14199,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":23785,"seoTitle":23786,"slug":23326,"stem":23787,"tags":23788,"__hash__":23792},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fhome-battery-arei.en.md","Home Battery and AREI: Correctly Integrating Battery Storage into Your Electrical Installation","home-battery-arei",{"type":8,"value":23328,"toc":23754},[23329,23335,23339,23342,23345,23349,23353,23356,23360,23363,23367,23370,23374,23377,23381,23384,23388,23391,23410,23414,23417,23433,23437,23440,23454,23458,23465,23469,23472,23486,23489,23493,23496,23500,23503,23536,23540,23543,23546,23551,23556,23559,23563,23566,23579,23605,23608,23612,23615,23618,23622,23625,23628,23632,23655,23658,23662,23665,23669,23693,23697,23723,23725,23729,23746],[11,23330,23331,23334],{},[35,23332,23333],{},"The AREI has no dedicated chapter for household home batteries – the general provisions of Book 1 apply: protection against electric shock, overcurrent protection, isolation and overvoltage protection."," The actual design follows from AC or DC coupling, the inverter, grid-parallel operation, backup, manufacturer data and the grid operator's connection procedure. This guide gives you a documented review path from protection concept through the single-line diagram to registration.",[27,23336,23338],{"id":23337},"why-a-home-battery","Why a Home Battery?",[11,23340,23341],{},"A battery stores surplus energy and delivers it later. How much grid import or cost it actually saves depends on measured load and PV profiles, usable capacity, efficiency, control strategy, tariff, ageing and operating mode. Fixed savings or a payback period can only be supported with time-series data and a dated tariff model.",[11,23343,23344],{},"The regulatory picture is clear: Chapter 7.103 covers industrial accumulator batteries and explicitly excludes batteries and chargers used in household installations (Section 7.103.1). For a home battery, the general parts of Book 1 therefore apply. Where the battery is coupled with a PV installation, Chapter 7.112 (household low-voltage photovoltaic installations ≤ 10 kVA) applies to the PV part; the battery itself does not fall under it.",[27,23346,23348],{"id":23347},"arei-requirements-for-home-batteries","AREI Requirements for Home Batteries",[385,23350,23352],{"id":23351},"ac-connection-protection-and-conductor","AC connection, protection and conductor",[11,23354,23355],{},"The battery or hybrid inverter is a source in the installation design. Circuit arrangement, overcurrent protection, conductor section, RCD type and switching rating follow from equipment ratings, earthing system, installation conditions, manufacturer instructions and applicable AREI rules. Generic combinations such as “always 20 A on 2.5 mm²” or “three-phase always needs Type B” do not survive a review. Integrated residual-current monitoring counts only as far as the exact device documentation and the rules allow.",[385,23357,23359],{"id":23358},"isolation-point","Isolation point",[11,23361,23362],{},"The project needs a traceable isolation and switching concept. Which poles are switched, what may be integrated and where an additional isolator is required depend on topology, manufacturer evidence and the applicable provisions. The diagram shows every actual isolator and its assignment; you prove its suitability with the device data.",[385,23364,23366],{"id":23365},"surge-protection-spd","Surge Protection (SPD)",[11,23368,23369],{},"AREI 4.5.1 sets the principle: persons and property are protected, according to good practice, against the harmful effects of overvoltages, for example from atmospheric phenomena or switching. It does not mandate a specific SPD type. A surge protection device at the AC connection is good practice for battery systems, and on the DC side as well – especially with outdoor cabling. Type and location follow from the risk assessment and manufacturer data.",[385,23371,23373],{"id":23372},"location-and-ventilation-for-lithium-batteries","Location and ventilation for lithium batteries",[11,23375,23376],{},"Location, temperature limits, clearances, ventilation and fire or escape-route conditions follow the actual battery technology, manufacturer instructions and the project risk assessment. There is no universal 35°C threshold, and not all products share one cell chemistry. Retain the product type, operating limits and installation manual in the dossier.",[27,23378,23380],{"id":23379},"integration-in-the-single-line-diagram","Integration in the Single-Line Diagram",[11,23382,23383],{},"The single-line diagram shows the home battery with both of its sides:",[385,23385,23387],{"id":23386},"dc-side","DC Side",[11,23389,23390],{},"The direct current side shows the path from the battery pack through the battery management system (BMS) to the inverter:",[43,23392,23393,23407],{},[46,23394,23395,12340,23398,12340,23401,12340,23404],{},[35,23396,23397],{},"Battery",[35,23399,23400],{},"BMS",[35,23402,23403],{},"DC disconnect switch",[35,23405,23406],{},"Hybrid inverter",[46,23408,23409],{},"For AC-coupled systems: battery → dedicated battery inverter → AC connection",[385,23411,23413],{"id":23412},"ac-side","AC Side",[11,23415,23416],{},"The alternating current side shows the integration into the household installation:",[43,23418,23419,23430],{},[46,23420,23421,12340,23423,12340,23426,12340,23428],{},[35,23422,23406],{},[35,23424,23425],{},"AC disconnect switch",[35,23427,2587],{},[35,23429,3497],{},[46,23431,23432],{},"Where the way sits in the board – upstream or downstream of which RCD – follows from the protection concept, earthing system and manufacturer data. There is no standard position “directly after the main switch”.",[385,23434,23436],{"id":23435},"representation-in-the-diagram","Representation in the Diagram",[11,23438,23439],{},"In the single-line diagram, the home battery appears as its own branch, similar to the PV installation. It includes:",[43,23441,23442,23445,23448,23451],{},[46,23443,23444],{},"battery symbol (per IEC 60617 or clearly defined in the legend);",[46,23446,23447],{},"inverter symbol;",[46,23449,23450],{},"disconnect switch;",[46,23452,23453],{},"associated MCB and RCD.",[27,23455,23457],{"id":23456},"backup-emergency-power-function","Backup \u002F Emergency Power Function",[11,23459,23460,23461,23464],{},"Many home batteries offer a ",[35,23462,23463],{},"backup function",": when the grid fails, the battery keeps supplying selected circuits.",[385,23466,23468],{"id":23467},"transfer-and-island-operation","Transfer and island operation",[11,23470,23471],{},"A backup function requires a documented transfer and islanding concept. Depending on the system, the inverter handles it internally or external switching equipment does; a marketing label alone proves neither safe grid separation nor permissible island operation:",[43,23473,23474,23480],{},[46,23475,23476,23479],{},[35,23477,23478],{},"Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS):"," a documented internal or external arrangement changes to island mode under its approved conditions.",[46,23481,23482,23485],{},[35,23483,23484],{},"Manual Transfer Switch:"," a changeover switch allows manual disconnection from the grid and operation in island mode.",[11,23487,23488],{},"Show the switching function and the boundary of the backed-up section on the single-line diagram. Which conductors are actually switched follows from the earthing system, neutral treatment, manufacturer evidence and grid-operator conditions. The goal is always the same: no dangerous backfeed into the isolated grid. “Always all-pole” is not a reliable standalone rule without that topology.",[385,23490,23492],{"id":23491},"warning-signs","Warning signs",[11,23494,23495],{},"Markings make the actually possible feed-in and island states understandable. Position and wording follow from the real installation concept. For the PV part of a coupled installation, Section 7.112.2 requires warning signs stating “Do not disconnect under load” and “Electrical installation always live”; that does not translate into a standard battery sticker at two fixed locations.",[27,23497,23499],{"id":23498},"registration-with-the-grid-operator","Registration with the Grid Operator",[11,23501,23502],{},"Registration and connection procedures are regional and depend on the operating mode. Before ordering and commissioning, check the current process of the operator responsible for the address, particularly for equipment operating in parallel with the grid or technically capable of doing so:",[43,23504,23505,23511,23517,23525,23530],{},[46,23506,23507,23510],{},[35,23508,23509],{},"With an existing PV installation:"," modification notification – the installation is registered as PV + battery",[46,23512,23513,23516],{},[35,23514,23515],{},"Technical data:"," capacity (kWh), inverter power (kW), AC or DC coupling",[46,23518,23519,23522,23523],{},[35,23520,23521],{},"Homologation:"," C10\u002F11 ed. 2.4 and C10\u002F26 type approval apply to grid-parallel or technically capable generation units. Check model, variant and firmware with the ",[23,23524,17604],{"href":17603},[46,23526,23527,23529],{},[35,23528,574],{}," bring the single-line diagram and situation plan up to the installed state; the competent operator confirms the submission package",[46,23531,23532,23535],{},[35,23533,23534],{},"Electrical inspection:"," the nature and scope of the alteration, together with Book 1, determine whether and which new inspection step is required",[27,23537,23539],{"id":23538},"separate-equipment-selection-from-economics","Separate equipment selection from economics",[11,23541,23542],{},"Compare dated manufacturer data and the exact Synergrid listing, not a brand ranking that quickly ages. Record at least AC active and apparent power, permitted phases, battery-voltage range, usable capacity, protection functions, firmware variant, parallel and backup behaviour, and expansion conditions.",[11,23544,23545],{},"An economic calculation needs project-specific inputs:",[11,23547,23548],{},[842,23549,23550],{},"annual effect = avoided import + valued services − extra losses − running costs",[11,23552,23553],{},[842,23554,23555],{},"scenario duration = investment \u002F cautiously estimated annual net effect",[11,23557,23558],{},"Both are scenarios, not forecasts. Calculate over several years with measured load and generation profiles, usable rather than nominal capacity, charge and discharge losses, power limits, degradation, warranty terms and a transparent tariff path. Regional incentives and network charges change over time; check them immediately before the decision.",[27,23560,23562],{"id":23561},"build-the-documentation-around-energy-paths","Build the documentation around energy paths",[11,23564,23565],{},"A useful diagram separates AC and DC as well as operating states. For every path, show source, conversion, protection, isolation and destination. In a DC-coupled system, the PV generator and battery share a hybrid inverter but each keeps its own electrical limits and manufacturer conditions. With AC coupling, a separate battery inverter feeds the AC side. The power of every source stays visible in the connection assessment.",[11,23567,23568,23569,2145,23572,90,23575,23578],{},"Mark each item as ",[35,23570,23571],{},"known",[35,23573,23574],{},"taken from manufacturer evidence",[35,23576,23577],{},"still to verify",". The most important are:",[43,23580,23581,23584,23587,23590,23593,23596,23599,23602],{},[46,23582,23583],{},"rated power and maximum current per mode;",[46,23585,23586],{},"number of phases and intended phase allocation;",[46,23588,23589],{},"cable type, conductors, cross-section and installation method per segment;",[46,23591,23592],{},"overcurrent, residual-current and surge protection with their characteristics;",[46,23594,23595],{},"isolation points on the AC and DC side;",[46,23597,23598],{},"meters, current transformers or control contacts for power limitation;",[46,23600,23601],{},"firmware or variant covered by the homologation;",[46,23603,23604],{},"identification of grid-parallel and island paths.",[11,23606,23607],{},"This structure pays off in maintenance. An inverter replacement may alter protection, connection power, homologation and notification even when battery capacity stays unchanged.",[27,23609,23611],{"id":23610},"backup-is-a-separate-design-project","Backup is a separate design project",[11,23613,23614],{},"A product advertised as “backup” does not automatically supply the whole dwelling during an outage. Transfer arrangement, safe grid separation, neutral treatment, island earthing, selected loads, starting currents and behaviour at low state of charge are designed explicitly. Terms such as backup, EPS and whole-home backup are not interchangeable legal categories.",[11,23616,23617],{},"Create a load list for the backed-up section: lighting, communication, refrigeration or heating have different priorities and starting loads. Identify the backed-up circuits on the situation plan and determine whether a separate board or selective transfer is used. The responsible professional ensures that no dangerous backfeed into an isolated distribution grid is possible.",[27,23619,23621],{"id":23620},"prepare-the-inspection-and-registration-package","Prepare the inspection and registration package",[11,23623,23624],{},"The dossier holds more than a printout: updated single-line diagram and situation plan, product data, installation and protection instructions, Synergrid evidence for the exact variant, grid-interface settings, inspection report and regional registration confirmation. Record who carried out the installation and which parameters were confirmed at commissioning.",[11,23626,23627],{},"In Flanders, Fluvius explicitly links storage registration with AREI inspection and Synergrid technical conditions. Wallonia and Brussels have their own competent operators and procedures, so you do not copy Flemish thresholds or sequencing without checking the connection location. The competent body for the connection address at the time of registration is decisive.",[27,23629,23631],{"id":23630},"common-documentation-failures","Common documentation failures",[43,23633,23634,23637,23640,23643,23646,23649,23652],{},[46,23635,23636],{},"Battery and inverter merged into one symbol without electrical ratings.",[46,23638,23639],{},"AC- and DC-coupled variants with a similar product name mixed up.",[46,23641,23642],{},"Backup shown without the grid separation.",[46,23644,23645],{},"C10\u002F26 checked by brand instead of model and variant.",[46,23647,23648],{},"A manufacturer example of breaker or RCD selection applied to a different earthing system.",[46,23650,23651],{},"The old diagram kept in the dossier after an inverter replacement.",[46,23653,23654],{},"An economic calculation based on nominal capacity, ignoring losses and ageing.",[11,23656,23657],{},"A clearly marked open point always beats a plausible but invented value.",[27,23659,23661],{"id":23660},"home-batteries-and-planelec","Home batteries and PlanElec",[11,23663,23664],{},"PlanElec connects floor plan, electrical topology, distribution board and document exports in one project; for PV, strings, inverter and source protection are fully structured. Its data model can already account for several sources in the current path. Home batteries, however, are not yet a fully released workflow with their own palette, properties, rendering and export. For the battery, that means: you document the protection and isolation concept, backed-up section and registration from the manufacturer documents, and a battery symbol on the plan is not yet a verified battery design. The roles are clear: the AREI\u002FRGIE self-check shows you findings within the supported rules, and the official inspection is carried out by the approved inspection body.",[27,23666,23668],{"id":23667},"current-primary-sources","Current primary sources",[43,23670,23671,23678,23685],{},[46,23672,23673,23677],{},[23,23674,23676],{"href":4466,"rel":23675},[4434],"FPS Economy: AREI\u002FRGIE books, Book 1 version 06",", including the DC-system changes applicable from 1 April 2026; Sections 4.5.1, 7.103.1 and 7.112.2.",[46,23679,23680,23684],{},[23,23681,23683],{"href":16304,"rel":23682},[4434],"Synergrid: homologation of decentralised generation units",", covering C10\u002F11 ed.2.4 and C10\u002F26 for grid-parallel or technically capable battery and hybrid inverters.",[46,23686,23687,23692],{},[23,23688,23691],{"href":23689,"rel":23690},"https:\u002F\u002Fwww.fluvius.be\u002Fnl\u002Fgroene-energie\u002Fthuisbatterij\u002Fopslagsysteem-aanmelden",[4434],"Fluvius: storage-system registration",", a regional primary source for Flanders; for Wallonia or Brussels, check the competent body separately.",[27,23694,23696],{"id":23695},"pre-installation-review-list","Pre-installation review list",[105,23698,23699,23702,23705,23708,23711,23714,23717,23720],{},[46,23700,23701],{},"Describe grid-parallel, zero-export and backup modes separately.",[46,23703,23704],{},"Record the exact inverter model, firmware and current Synergrid status.",[46,23706,23707],{},"Draw AC and DC coupling with every energy path, rather than only a battery icon.",[46,23709,23710],{},"Derive protection and isolation from manufacturer evidence and the applicable AREI provisions.",[46,23712,23713],{},"Keep cable and location data project-specific; do not copy them from an example.",[46,23715,23716],{},"Check effects on existing PV, metering, connection capacity and phase balance.",[46,23718,23719],{},"Confirm inspection and notification documents with the operator responsible for the address.",[46,23721,23722],{},"After commissioning, retain settings, signed diagrams, inspection report and registration confirmation.",[4473,23724],{},[11,23726,23727],{},[35,23728,22437],{},[43,23730,23731,23736,23741],{},[46,23732,23733],{},[23,23734,23735],{"href":7191},"AREI Regulations 2026: What Has Changed?",[46,23737,23738],{},[23,23739,23740],{"href":9626},"Dedicated Circuits: Which Appliances Need Their Own Circuit?",[46,23742,23743],{},[23,23744,23745],{"href":8687},"Cable Cross-Section and Breaker: The Right Combination",[11,23747,23748,2459,23751],{},[35,23749,23750],{},"Capture your installation data in a structured way in PlanElec – protection, installation and registration you coordinate with the professional and the grid operator.",[23,23752,17818],{"href":4504,"rel":23753},[4434],{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":23755},[23756,23757,23763,23768,23772,23773,23774,23775,23776,23777,23778,23779,23780],{"id":23337,"depth":291,"text":23338},{"id":23347,"depth":291,"text":23348,"children":23758},[23759,23760,23761,23762],{"id":23351,"depth":599,"text":23352},{"id":23358,"depth":599,"text":23359},{"id":23365,"depth":599,"text":23366},{"id":23372,"depth":599,"text":23373},{"id":23379,"depth":291,"text":23380,"children":23764},[23765,23766,23767],{"id":23386,"depth":599,"text":23387},{"id":23412,"depth":599,"text":23413},{"id":23435,"depth":599,"text":23436},{"id":23456,"depth":291,"text":23457,"children":23769},[23770,23771],{"id":23467,"depth":599,"text":23468},{"id":23491,"depth":599,"text":23492},{"id":23498,"depth":291,"text":23499},{"id":23538,"depth":291,"text":23539},{"id":23561,"depth":291,"text":23562},{"id":23610,"depth":291,"text":23611},{"id":23620,"depth":291,"text":23621},{"id":23630,"depth":291,"text":23631},{"id":23660,"depth":291,"text":23661},{"id":23667,"depth":291,"text":23668},{"id":23695,"depth":291,"text":23696},"2026-06-02","How do you install a home battery under the AREI? This guide covers circuit, isolation point, single-line diagram, backup operation and grid operator registration.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fhome-battery-arei.en",{"title":23325,"description":23782},"Home Battery and AREI: Integrating Battery Storage","blog\u002Fhome-battery-arei.en",[16617,23789,18946,23790,17850,21026,23791],"energy-storage","photovoltaic","backup-power","miDhy3XltFeo9I6uldJQtnRWVamvHJGPW5eGf4_keA8",{"id":23794,"title":23795,"articleId":23796,"body":23797,"category":8819,"date":24025,"description":24026,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":24027,"navigation":308,"path":24028,"publishDate":24025,"readTime":3670,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":24029,"seoTitle":24030,"slug":24031,"stem":24032,"tags":24033,"__hash__":24037},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fsmoke-detector-mandatory.en.md","Smoke Detectors Mandatory in Belgium: Flanders, Wallonia, Brussels","smoke-detector-mandatory",{"type":8,"value":23798,"toc":24013},[23799,23803,23812,23816,23866,23869,23876,23879,23886,23889,23896,23900,23906,23909,23923,23926,23930,23957,23961,23972,23974,23990],[27,23800,23802],{"id":23801},"short-answer-yes-in-all-three-regions","Short answer: yes, in all three regions",[11,23804,23805,23808,23809,94],{},[35,23806,23807],{},"Yes, smoke detectors are mandatory in Belgium – in Flanders, Wallonia and Brussels for every home, rented or owner-occupied."," The obligation sits in regional housing law, not in AREI, so start date, number and placement differ by region. Everywhere, the detector carries the CE marking and complies with ",[35,23810,23811],{},"NBN EN 14604",[27,23813,23815],{"id":23814},"the-rules-by-region","The rules by region",[638,23817,23818,23831],{},[641,23819,23820],{},[644,23821,23822,23825,23828],{},[647,23823,23824],{},"Region",[647,23826,23827],{},"Mandatory for all homes since",[647,23829,23830],{},"Minimum equipment",[657,23832,23833,23844,23855],{},[644,23834,23835,23838,23841],{},[662,23836,23837],{},"Flanders",[662,23839,23840],{},"1 January 2020",[662,23842,23843],{},"at least 1 detector per floor, including directly accessible basements and attics",[644,23845,23846,23849,23852],{},[662,23847,23848],{},"Wallonia",[662,23850,23851],{},"1 July 2006 (existing homes)",[662,23853,23854],{},"1 detector per living level, 2 if the level exceeds 80 m²",[644,23856,23857,23860,23863],{},[662,23858,23859],{},"Brussels",[662,23861,23862],{},"1 January 2025 (rented homes since 1 July 2005)",[662,23864,23865],{},"detectors along the escape route from bedroom to front door",[385,23867,23837],{"id":23868},"flanders",[11,23870,23871,23872,23875],{},"Every self-contained dwelling – house, apartment or studio – has ",[35,23873,23874],{},"at least one smoke detector on every floor",". Basements and attics count if they are directly accessible or house a technical installation. In rooming houses each room also gets a detector. A detector in every room on the shortest escape route from the bedroom to the outside is additionally recommended. For rentals, the landlord buys and installs the detectors; without them there is no certificate of conformity.",[385,23877,23848],{"id":23878},"wallonia",[11,23880,23881,23882,23885],{},"One detector is required ",[35,23883,23884],{},"on each level with at least one habitable room",", preferably in halls and corridors: entrance hall, landing or the room the stairs lead into. A level larger than 80 m² needs two; a single-level apartment needs one below 80 m² and two above. From four required detectors, they are interconnected or replaced by a centralised fire detection system. For rentals, the owner covers installation and replacement, the tenant the battery.",[385,23887,23859],{"id":23888},"brussels",[11,23890,23891,23892,23895],{},"Since 1 January 2025 the obligation covers ",[35,23893,23894],{},"all homes"," in the Brussels-Capital Region; for rented homes it has applied since 2005. Detectors go in every room on the route from the furthest bedroom to the front door. Accepted are detectors to NBN EN 14604, not of the ionisation type, with a built-in ten-year battery or mains connection. From four detectors, interconnected detectors or a central system are mandatory.",[27,23897,23899],{"id":23898},"smoke-detectors-and-arei-what-the-electrical-inspection-covers","Smoke detectors and AREI: what the electrical inspection covers",[11,23901,23902,23905],{},[35,23903,23904],{},"AREI does not regulate smoke detectors in homes."," The electrical inspection covers the electrical installation, so a missing battery-powered detector is not an AREI infringement. The dossier of a domestic installation contains the single-line diagram and situation plan (9.1.2). The situation plan shows boards, boxes, sockets, lighting points, switches, fixed appliances and sources that appear on the single-line diagram (3.1.2.3(a)).",[11,23907,23908],{},"That gives a clear distinction:",[43,23910,23911,23917],{},[46,23912,23913,23916],{},[35,23914,23915],{},"Battery detectors"," are not part of the electrical installation and need not appear on the situation plan.",[46,23918,23919,23922],{},[35,23920,23921],{},"Mains detectors (230 V)"," are fed from a circuit. As fixed appliances they appear on the single-line diagram and situation plan like any other load.",[11,23924,23925],{},"Many installers also draw battery detectors on the situation plan for information, so occupants find all safety-related devices in one place.",[27,23927,23929],{"id":23928},"maintenance-and-replacement","Maintenance and replacement",[43,23931,23932,23938,23944,23950],{},[46,23933,23934,23937],{},[35,23935,23936],{},"Monthly:"," press the test button.",[46,23939,23940,23943],{},[35,23941,23942],{},"Regularly:"," dust or vacuum the detector.",[46,23945,23946,23949],{},[35,23947,23948],{},"After 10 years:"," replace it – that is its typical service life.",[46,23951,23952,23953,23956],{},"When buying, look for ",[35,23954,23955],{},"CE marking and NBN EN 14604","; in Brussels also a built-in ten-year battery or mains connection.",[27,23958,23960],{"id":23959},"planning-smoke-detectors-in-planelec","Planning smoke detectors in PlanElec",[11,23962,222,23963,23965,23966,23969,23970,94],{},[23,23964,3710],{"href":5046}," you place smoke detectors directly on the floor plan and situation plan. The self-check gives a ",[35,23967,23968],{},"recommendation",": it flags bedrooms, hallways and staircases without a detector and – where no rooms are typed – floors without a detector. Because AREI does not require smoke detectors, this appears as a warning based on regional housing law, not as an AREI error. The scope is in ",[23,23971,4403],{"href":2953},[27,23973,5054],{"id":4477},[43,23975,23976,23981,23985],{},[46,23977,23978],{},[23,23979,23980],{"href":7191},"AREI regulations 2026",[46,23982,23983],{},[23,23984,23288],{"href":23010},[46,23986,23987],{},[23,23988,23989],{"href":22444},"Inspection failed – what now?",[11,23991,23992],{},[7299,23993,18014,23994,2145,23999,2145,24004,24009,24010,5322],{},[23,23995,23998],{"href":23996,"rel":23997},"https:\u002F\u002Fwww.vlaanderen.be\u002Fwoningkwaliteitsnormen\u002Frookmelders",[4434],"Smoke detectors in Flanders (Vlaanderen.be)",[23,24000,24003],{"href":24001,"rel":24002},"https:\u002F\u002Fwallonie.be\u002Ffr\u002Fdemarches\u002Fdisposer-de-detecteurs-incendie-dans-votre-logement",[4434],"Fire detectors in Wallonia (wallonie.be)",[23,24005,24008],{"href":24006,"rel":24007},"https:\u002F\u002Fwww.brussel.be\u002Frookmelders-verplicht-brussel",[4434],"Smoke detectors mandatory in Brussels (City of Brussels)","; AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1, version 06, subsection 3.1.2.3(a) and section 9.1.2 (",[23,24011,8805],{"href":7174,"rel":24012},[4434],{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":24014},[24015,24016,24021,24022,24023,24024],{"id":23801,"depth":291,"text":23802},{"id":23814,"depth":291,"text":23815,"children":24017},[24018,24019,24020],{"id":23868,"depth":599,"text":23837},{"id":23878,"depth":599,"text":23848},{"id":23888,"depth":599,"text":23859},{"id":23898,"depth":291,"text":23899},{"id":23928,"depth":291,"text":23929},{"id":23959,"depth":291,"text":23960},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":5054},"2026-05-28","Yes, smoke detectors are mandatory in all three regions – under regional housing law, not AREI. Number, placement and start dates for Flanders, Wallonia and Brussels.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fsmoke-detector-mandatory.en",{"title":23795,"description":24026},"Smoke Detectors Mandatory in Belgium: Rules by Region","smoke-detector-mandatory-belgium","blog\u002Fsmoke-detector-mandatory.en",[24034,24035,22543,23868,23878,23888,24036],"smoke-detector","fire-safety","safety","pUUTwJVy0eYf5q0UX498VFSfVsNXmthxcRy9qjIkvrw",{"id":24039,"title":24040,"articleId":24041,"body":24042,"category":5101,"date":24862,"description":24863,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":24864,"navigation":308,"path":24865,"publishDate":24862,"readTime":610,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":24866,"seoTitle":24867,"slug":24868,"stem":24869,"tags":24870,"__hash__":24874},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fev-charger-arei.en.md","EV Charger Installation According to AREI: The Complete Guide for Belgium","ev-charger-installation-arei",{"type":8,"value":24043,"toc":24825},[24044,24050,24054,24156,24159,24163,24167,24174,24178,24181,24185,24188,24192,24195,24199,24203,24267,24272,24283,24288,24296,24300,24365,24370,24381,24386,24397,24401,24404,24408,24412,24415,24493,24496,24500,24507,24529,24536,24540,24543,24547,24554,24557,24561,24571,24574,24578,24585,24589,24595,24598,24602,24605,24608,24611,24614,24618,24621,24624,24628,24631,24635,24676,24680,24685,24699,24702,24706,24709,24712,24716,24760,24768,24770,24773,24775,24791,24793,24795,24807,24813,24817],[11,24045,24046,24049],{},[35,24047,24048],{},"An EV charger in Belgium falls under Chapter 7.22 of AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 (the Belgian wiring regulations): every connection point gets a dedicated circuit with its own overcurrent protection and its own residual current device (RCD) of no more than 30 mA, protection must also work for fault currents with a DC component, and connection through a plug and socket is prohibited."," On top of that come project-specific cable and protection design, an updated single-line diagram and clarification with the grid operator. This guide takes you through every point. Chapter 7.22 applies to charging stations whose installation or replacement started on or after 1 November 2022 (7.22.1).",[27,24051,24053],{"id":24052},"arei-722-at-a-glance","AREI 7.22 at a glance",[638,24055,24056,24069],{},[641,24057,24058],{},[644,24059,24060,24063,24066],{},[647,24061,24062],{},"Requirement",[647,24064,24065],{},"Book 1 V06 reference",[647,24067,24068],{},"What it means for your charger",[657,24070,24071,24081,24091,24102,24112,24123,24134,24145],{},[644,24072,24073,24076,24078],{},[662,24074,24075],{},"No connection through a plug and socket",[662,24077,20531],{},[662,24079,24080],{},"Permanently connected, not via a garage socket",[644,24082,24083,24086,24088],{},[662,24084,24085],{},"Dedicated circuit per connection point",[662,24087,20531],{},[662,24089,24090],{},"Two charging points = two dedicated circuits",[644,24092,24093,24096,24099],{},[662,24094,24095],{},"RCD ≤ 30 mA per circuit",[662,24097,24098],{},"7.22.4.1 b",[662,24100,24101],{},"Individual per dedicated AC circuit, no TN-C",[644,24103,24104,24107,24109],{},[662,24105,24106],{},"Protection with a disturbing DC component",[662,24108,24098],{},[662,24110,24111],{},"Type B RCD, or Type A with suitable DC fault-current detection",[644,24113,24114,24117,24120],{},[662,24115,24116],{},"Overcurrent protection per circuit",[662,24118,24119],{},"7.22.4.2",[662,24121,24122],{},"Shared protection only for connection points not used simultaneously",[644,24124,24125,24128,24131],{},[662,24126,24127],{},"Outdoors at least IP44",[662,24129,24130],{},"7.22.5.1",[662,24132,24133],{},"Applies to the charger equipment installed outdoors",[644,24135,24136,24139,24142],{},[662,24137,24138],{},"Connection point close to the parking space",[662,24140,24141],{},"7.22.5.3",[662,24143,24144],{},"One connection point supplies one vehicle at a time",[644,24146,24147,24150,24153],{},[662,24148,24149],{},"Feedback possible",[662,24151,24152],{},"7.22.5.4",[662,24154,24155],{},"Rules for distributed generation and a warning sign on charger and board",[11,24157,24158],{},"Emergency switching under 7.22.5.2 does not apply to chargers that are part of a dwelling's electrical installation; for other chargers inside buildings it is required.",[27,24160,24162],{"id":24161},"the-basic-requirements-in-detail","The basic requirements in detail",[385,24164,24166],{"id":24165},"dedicated-circuit","Dedicated circuit",[11,24168,24169,24170,24173],{},"The charger ",[35,24171,24172],{},"gets"," a dedicated circuit per connection point (7.22.3). An existing circuit, such as the garage sockets, is not an option. The protective devices may sit in the board, in the charger or in a combination of both – what matters is that each connection point is protected separately.",[385,24175,24177],{"id":24176},"residual-current-device-rcd","Residual Current Device (RCD)",[11,24179,24180],{},"Where protection relies on automatic disconnection, a dedicated RCD of no more than 30 mA protects each dedicated AC circuit (7.22.4.1 b). Which type it has to be depends on the charger – more below.",[385,24182,24184],{"id":24183},"circuit-breaker-mcb","Circuit Breaker (MCB)",[11,24186,24187],{},"A correctly sized circuit breaker protects each dedicated circuit individually against overload and short circuit (7.22.4.2).",[385,24189,24191],{"id":24190},"surge-protection-device-spd","Surge Protection Device (SPD)",[11,24193,24194],{},"AREI 4.5.1 generally requires protection against overvoltages according to good practice. Book 1 does not prescribe a specific SPD; whether one is needed follows from the risk assessment of the whole installation. Where one is fitted, it usually sits centrally in the distribution board and protects all circuits, including the charger circuit, against overvoltages from lightning or switching.",[27,24196,24198],{"id":24197},"single-phase-vs-three-phase-which-charger","Single-Phase vs. Three-Phase: Which Charger?",[385,24200,24202],{"id":24201},"single-phase-37-kw-or-74-kw","Single-Phase – 3.7 kW or 7.4 kW",[638,24204,24205,24217],{},[641,24206,24207],{},[644,24208,24209,24211,24214],{},[647,24210,8613],{},[647,24212,24213],{},"3.7 kW (16 A)",[647,24215,24216],{},"7.4 kW (32 A)",[657,24218,24219,24228,24236,24245,24256],{},[644,24220,24221,24223,24226],{},[662,24222,2724],{},[662,24224,24225],{},"1-phase, 230V",[662,24227,24225],{},[644,24229,24230,24232,24234],{},[662,24231,4592],{},[662,24233,12804],{},[662,24235,12831],{},[644,24237,24238,24241,24243],{},[662,24239,24240],{},"Cable cross-section (example)",[662,24242,4854],{},[662,24244,12828],{},[644,24246,24247,24250,24253],{},[662,24248,24249],{},"Circuit breaker (example)",[662,24251,24252],{},"20 A Type C",[662,24254,24255],{},"32 A Type C",[644,24257,24258,24261,24264],{},[662,24259,24260],{},"Charging time (50 kWh battery, calculated)",[662,24262,24263],{},"~14 hours",[662,24265,24266],{},"~7 hours",[11,24268,24269],{},[35,24270,24271],{},"Advantages of single-phase:",[43,24273,24274,24277,24280],{},[46,24275,24276],{},"cheaper to install",[46,24278,24279],{},"simpler wiring",[46,24281,24282],{},"enough for many households charging overnight",[11,24284,24285],{},[35,24286,24287],{},"Disadvantages of single-phase:",[43,24289,24290,24293],{},[46,24291,24292],{},"limited charging power",[46,24294,24295],{},"at 7.4 kW, phase imbalance possible – clarify it with the grid operator",[385,24297,24299],{"id":24298},"three-phase-11-kw-or-22-kw","Three-Phase – 11 kW or 22 kW",[638,24301,24302,24314],{},[641,24303,24304],{},[644,24305,24306,24308,24311],{},[647,24307,8613],{},[647,24309,24310],{},"11 kW (16 A)",[647,24312,24313],{},"22 kW (32 A)",[657,24315,24316,24325,24335,24345,24355],{},[644,24317,24318,24320,24323],{},[662,24319,2724],{},[662,24321,24322],{},"3-phase, 400V",[662,24324,24322],{},[644,24326,24327,24329,24332],{},[662,24328,4592],{},[662,24330,24331],{},"3x 16 A",[662,24333,24334],{},"3x 32 A",[644,24336,24337,24339,24342],{},[662,24338,24240],{},[662,24340,24341],{},"2.5 mm² (5G2.5)",[662,24343,24344],{},"6 mm² (5G6)",[644,24346,24347,24349,24352],{},[662,24348,24249],{},[662,24350,24351],{},"20 A 3-pole Type C",[662,24353,24354],{},"32 A 3-pole Type C",[644,24356,24357,24359,24362],{},[662,24358,24260],{},[662,24360,24361],{},"~5 hours",[662,24363,24364],{},"~2.5 hours",[11,24366,24367],{},[35,24368,24369],{},"Advantages of three-phase:",[43,24371,24372,24375,24378],{},[46,24373,24374],{},"considerably faster charging, if the vehicle charges on three phases",[46,24376,24377],{},"balanced load distribution",[46,24379,24380],{},"headroom for future vehicles",[11,24382,24383],{},[35,24384,24385],{},"Disadvantages of three-phase:",[43,24387,24388,24391,24394],{},[46,24389,24390],{},"more expensive installation",[46,24392,24393],{},"three-phase connection at the board required",[46,24395,24396],{},"higher material costs (larger cross-sections, more expensive protective devices)",[385,24398,24400],{"id":24399},"selection-based-on-the-project","Selection based on the project",[11,24402,24403],{},"The right charging power follows from the project, not from a general recommendation. Available phases, connection capacity, main protection, simultaneous household load, the vehicle's on-board charger, daily energy need and possible load management are assessed together. A nominally stronger charger does not charge faster when the vehicle or connection limits the current.",[27,24405,24407],{"id":24406},"cable-and-protection-proper-sizing","Cable and Protection: Proper Sizing",[385,24409,24411],{"id":24410},"cable-cross-section-overview","Cable Cross-Section Overview",[11,24413,24414],{},"For household installations, AREI Table 4.11 (Subsection 4.4.1.4) sets the maximum rated current of the circuit breaker per conductor cross-section: 20 A for 2.5 mm², 25 A for 4 mm², 40 A for 6 mm². Within that ceiling, actual current-carrying capacity depends on installation method, grouping and ambient temperature. The table shows typical examples for short runs in standard installation conditions:",[638,24416,24417,24433],{},[641,24418,24419],{},[644,24420,24421,24423,24426,24428,24430],{},[647,24422,4589],{},[647,24424,24425],{},"Cable type",[647,24427,18466],{},[647,24429,24249],{},[647,24431,24432],{},"Max. MCB per Table 4.11",[657,24434,24435,24449,24463,24478],{},[644,24436,24437,24440,24443,24445,24447],{},[662,24438,24439],{},"3.7 kW (1P, 16A)",[662,24441,24442],{},"XVB 3G2.5",[662,24444,4854],{},[662,24446,24252],{},[662,24448,12813],{},[644,24450,24451,24454,24457,24459,24461],{},[662,24452,24453],{},"7.4 kW (1P, 32A)",[662,24455,24456],{},"XVB 3G6",[662,24458,12828],{},[662,24460,24255],{},[662,24462,12834],{},[644,24464,24465,24468,24471,24473,24476],{},[662,24466,24467],{},"11 kW (3P, 16A)",[662,24469,24470],{},"XVB 5G2.5",[662,24472,4854],{},[662,24474,24475],{},"20 A 3P Type C",[662,24477,12813],{},[644,24479,24480,24483,24486,24488,24491],{},[662,24481,24482],{},"22 kW (3P, 32A)",[662,24484,24485],{},"XVB 5G6",[662,24487,12828],{},[662,24489,24490],{},"32 A 3P Type C",[662,24492,12834],{},[11,24494,24495],{},"Trip curve C is a common choice, not an AREI requirement; the manufacturer's instructions and selectivity decide. For long runs (roughly beyond 15 m), increase the cross-section where needed to limit voltage drop: 5.2.1.2 b requires voltage variation compatible with safe operation, and 5.2.5 limits it to the values of good practice. Plan the cable route in advance and calculate the voltage drop.",[385,24497,24499],{"id":24498},"cable-type","Cable Type",[11,24501,24502,24503,24506],{},"In Belgium, ",[35,24504,24505],{},"XVB cable"," is commonly used for fixed installations:",[43,24508,24509,24514,24519,24524],{},[46,24510,24511,24513],{},[35,24512,24442],{}," for single-phase 16 A",[46,24515,24516,24518],{},[35,24517,24456],{}," for single-phase 32 A",[46,24520,24521,24523],{},[35,24522,24470],{}," for three-phase 16 A",[46,24525,24526,24528],{},[35,24527,24485],{}," for three-phase 32 A",[11,24530,24531,24532,24535],{},"In conduit (Preflex), ",[35,24533,24534],{},"VOB single cores"," (H07V-U) can be used; the conduit must then be sized accordingly.",[27,24537,24539],{"id":24538},"rcd-type-the-most-important-protection-device","RCD Type: The Most Important Protection Device",[11,24541,24542],{},"Choosing the right RCD is decisive for an EV charger – and can make a real difference in cost. AREI 7.22.4.1 b requires protection to remain effective during insulation faults with a disturbing DC component: either through an RCD built for that purpose, or through an RCD combined and coordinated with a residual direct current detection device that takes the charger out of service.",[385,24544,24546],{"id":24545},"type-a-dc-fault-detection-in-the-charger-rdc-dd","Type A + DC fault detection in the charger (RDC-DD)",[11,24548,24549,24550,24553],{},"A Type A alone does not cover DC fault currents. If the manufacturer demonstrates suitable integrated DC fault detection for the exact charger (typically 6 mA DC, known as RDC-DD), it can form the second option of 7.22.4.1 b together with an upstream ",[35,24551,24552],{},"Type A RCD (30 mA)",". Without that documented evidence, you do not assume the combination.",[11,24555,24556],{},"The chosen Type A matches the network, poles, rating and the manufacturer's conditions. We deliberately give no price range without that data.",[385,24558,24560],{"id":24559},"type-b-if-the-charger-has-no-dc-sensor","Type B (if the charger has no DC sensor)",[11,24562,24563,24564,24566,24567,24570],{},"If your charger has ",[35,24565,7333],{}," integrated DC fault detection, you need a ",[35,24568,24569],{},"Type B RCD",". It also detects smooth DC fault currents that can occur with chargers.",[11,24572,24573],{},"Check the manufacturer's declaration on DC fault detection. That declaration – not the product name – shows that the combination of charger and upstream RCD meets the requirements.",[385,24575,24577],{"id":24576},"type-a-si","Type A-SI",[11,24579,24580,24581,24584],{},"A ",[35,24582,24583],{},"Type A-SI RCD"," may be more robust against certain disturbance pulses depending on the manufacturer, but does not on its own cover the requirement for DC fault currents. The documented overall combination decides.",[27,24586,24588],{"id":24587},"surge-protection-spd-central-for-the-entire-installation","Surge Protection (SPD) – Central for the Entire Installation",[11,24590,24591,24592,24594],{},"AREI 4.5.1 generally requires protection against overvoltages according to good practice. No general SPD obligation follows from this. Where an ",[35,24593,21227],{}," is fitted, it sits in practice in the distribution board and protects all connected equipment, including the EV charger, against transient overvoltages. The AREI does not name a specific \"Type 2\" – that designation comes from the product standard IEC 61643-11.",[11,24596,24597],{},"You choose the SPD's back-up protection (fuse or circuit breaker) according to the manufacturer's instructions.",[27,24599,24601],{"id":24600},"grid-operator-and-direction-of-energy-flow","Grid operator and direction of energy flow",[11,24603,24604],{},"Notification, connection and capacity conditions are not derived generically from a rated power. Before ordering, check the current conditions of the grid operator responsible for the address. Have the EAN code, connection type, planned charging power, phases, load management and the exact technical product description ready.",[11,24606,24607],{},"Establish explicitly whether energy flows only from grid to vehicle or in both directions. Synergrid states that bidirectional or technically bidirectional chargers fall under C10\u002F11 edition 2.4 and require C10\u002F26 type approval. Strictly grid-to-vehicle chargers do not need C10\u002F26 under that rule; other notifications or grid-operator conditions may still apply. If the charger can feed back, AREI 7.22.5.4 additionally requires the rules for distributed generation units and the warning \"Caution: possible feedback of electrical energy into the installation\" on the charger and the board.",[11,24609,24610],{},"Record the answer with the exact model and manufacturer declaration. Disabling feedback in software is not enough if the device remains technically bidirectional; Synergrid explicitly covers that technical capability. After a change of firmware, operating mode or connection power, you recheck the grid question. Keep the confirmation, product data and any approval reference in the installation dossier so that electrician, grid operator and inspection body assess the same variant.",[11,24612,24613],{},"Before commissioning, also document phase assignment, configured current limit, load management and behaviour on loss of communication. These operating parameters are not electrical protection, but they determine the connection capacity actually drawn and match the planned concept.",[385,24615,24617],{"id":24616},"record-the-handover-settings-together","Record the handover settings together",[11,24619,24620],{},"Create a short commissioning sheet for the electrician, user and later inspector: exact charger model, installed firmware, single- or three-phase operation, maximum current, upstream protection, RCD concept, DC fault detection and cable type. With dynamic load management, add the measuring point, communication path, failure behaviour and the limit actually set. If any item differs from the manual, diagram or board labelling, you resolve it before use.",[11,24622,24623],{},"Also define who may change settings and how a change is recorded. A charging current raised later loads cable, protective device, connection capacity and selectivity differently from the inspected configuration. Keep the settings record with photos of the labels, the datasheet, conformity documents and inspection report. Replacing the device means more than a new enclosure: protection combination, communication interface, charging mode and possible feedback capability are reassessed for the new model. Link these records to the diagram version and grid-operator response used for commissioning, so that no relevant software or device configuration lives on outside the drawings.",[27,24625,24627],{"id":24626},"updating-the-single-line-diagram","Updating the Single-Line Diagram",[11,24629,24630],{},"After installing an EV charger, you update the single-line diagram of your electrical installation. The charger appears as its own branch:",[385,24632,24634],{"id":24633},"what-must-be-in-the-diagram","What Must Be in the Diagram?",[105,24636,24637,24642,24647,24653,24658,24664,24670],{},[46,24638,24639,24641],{},[35,24640,24166],{}," per connection point",[46,24643,24644,24646],{},[35,24645,7237],{}," with type (A or B) and rated residual current",[46,24648,24649,24652],{},[35,24650,24651],{},"Circuit breaker"," with rated current and number of poles",[46,24654,24655,24657],{},[35,24656,21227],{}," (surge protection), where present",[46,24659,24660,24663],{},[35,24661,24662],{},"EV charger symbol"," with power rating and number of connection points",[46,24665,24666,24669],{},[35,24667,24668],{},"Cable designation"," (e.g. XVB 5G2.5)",[46,24671,24672,24675],{},[35,24673,24674],{},"Phase assignment"," (three-phase: L1\u002FL2\u002FL3)",[385,24677,24679],{"id":24678},"your-ev-charger-in-planelec","Your EV charger in PlanElec",[11,24681,222,24682,24684],{},[35,24683,3710],{},", you document the charger directly in the project:",[43,24686,24687,24690,24693,24696],{},[46,24688,24689],{},"You place the EV charger symbol on the floor plan and link it to its circuit.",[46,24691,24692],{},"The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check flags a charger without its own circuit, sharing its circuit with other loads, without a 30 mA RCD, or with neither a Type B RCD nor internal DC detection; for outdoor installation it reminds you of IP44.",[46,24694,24695],{},"You enter the phase assignment directly.",[46,24697,24698],{},"The single-line diagram and situation plan export as PDFs from the same project data.",[11,24700,24701],{},"The roles are clear: the self-check shows you findings within the supported rules, cable sizing and grid questions are settled by calculation and with the grid operator, and the official inspection is done by the approved inspection body.",[27,24703,24705],{"id":24704},"compare-costs-on-a-common-technical-scope","Compare costs on a common technical scope",[11,24707,24708],{},"A useful quotation separates charger, protective devices, cable route, groundworks, board adaptation, load management, design, inspection and any grid procedure. Prices depend heavily on product, cable length and access, connection capacity and the existing board. Have suppliers price the same technical description; a fixed online price range is not a project budget.",[11,24710,24711],{},"Compare warranty conditions and the documented protection combination as well, not just the device price, and keep that comparison basis with the quotation.",[27,24713,24715],{"id":24714},"common-mistakes-to-avoid","Common Mistakes to Avoid",[105,24717,24718,24724,24730,24736,24742,24748,24754],{},[46,24719,24720,24723],{},[35,24721,24722],{},"No dedicated circuit, or connection through a socket:"," both contravene AREI 7.22.3 – the charger is permanently connected to its own circuit.",[46,24725,24726,24729],{},[35,24727,24728],{},"Wrong RCD:"," without DC fault detection in the charger, you need an RCD that handles DC fault currents – in practice Type B.",[46,24731,24732,24735],{},[35,24733,24734],{},"Surge protection not assessed:"," whether and how an SPD is used is assessed for the whole installation and coordinated per the manufacturer's instructions.",[46,24737,24738,24741],{},[35,24739,24740],{},"No updated single-line diagram:"," every change to the installation belongs in the diagram.",[46,24743,24744,24747],{},[35,24745,24746],{},"Grid conditions not checked:"," notification and connection rules depend on the operator and charging function; bidirectional or technically bidirectional equipment also enters the C10\u002F11 and C10\u002F26 scope.",[46,24749,24750,24753],{},[35,24751,24752],{},"Cable cross-section too small:"," especially for long runs, recalculate the voltage drop.",[46,24755,24756,24759],{},[35,24757,24758],{},"Outdoor charger without IP44:"," outdoors, 7.22.5.1 requires at least IP44 and protection against foreseeable mechanical stress.",[15,24761,24762],{},[11,24763,24764,24767],{},[35,24765,24766],{},"Earthing:"," a safe EV charger relies on an intact earthing chain – earth electrode, main equipotential bonding and protective conductor. In older installations without proper earthing, the earthing is brought up to standard before the charger goes in.",[27,24769,4418],{"id":4417},[11,24771,24772],{},"An EV charger in Belgium gets, per connection point, a dedicated circuit with its own overcurrent protection, an RCD of at most 30 mA with effective protection against DC fault currents, project-specific cable and protection design, and updated drawings. Careful documentation makes the installation inspectable; the assessment is made by the approved inspection body.",[27,24774,16290],{"id":16289},[43,24776,24777,24785],{},[46,24778,24779,24784],{},[23,24780,24783],{"href":24781,"rel":24782},"https:\u002F\u002Feconomie.fgov.be\u002Fsites\u002Fdefault\u002Ffiles\u002FFiles\u002FPublications\u002Ffiles\u002FRGIE-Annexe-Livre-1-Installations-a-basse-tenstion-et-a-tres-basse-tension-2026.pdf",[4434],"AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1, 2026 edition – chapter 7.22",", reviewed at V06; Table 4.11 and Sections 4.5.1, 5.2.1.2, 5.2.5.",[46,24786,24787],{},[23,24788,24790],{"href":16304,"rel":24789},[4434],"Synergrid: C10\u002F26 scope for bidirectional or technically bidirectional charging infrastructure",[4473,24792],{},[27,24794,4478],{"id":4477},[43,24796,24797,24802],{},[46,24798,24799],{},[23,24800,24801],{"href":4918},"Calculate voltage drop for a long charger supply",[46,24803,24804],{},[23,24805,24806],{"href":9282},"Cost Comparison: DIY vs. Hiring an Electrician",[43,24808,24809],{},[46,24810,24811],{},[23,24812,4485],{"href":4276},[27,24814,24816],{"id":24815},"document-your-ev-charger-in-the-single-line-diagram","Document Your EV Charger in the Single-Line Diagram",[11,24818,2599,24819,24821,24822],{},[35,24820,3710],{},", you document your EV charger in the single-line diagram and export the project as PDF. The self-check shows you open points before the inspection. ",[23,24823,4506],{"href":4504,"rel":24824},[4434],{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":24826},[24827,24828,24834,24839,24843,24848,24849,24852,24856,24857,24858,24859,24860,24861],{"id":24052,"depth":291,"text":24053},{"id":24161,"depth":291,"text":24162,"children":24829},[24830,24831,24832,24833],{"id":24165,"depth":599,"text":24166},{"id":24176,"depth":599,"text":24177},{"id":24183,"depth":599,"text":24184},{"id":24190,"depth":599,"text":24191},{"id":24197,"depth":291,"text":24198,"children":24835},[24836,24837,24838],{"id":24201,"depth":599,"text":24202},{"id":24298,"depth":599,"text":24299},{"id":24399,"depth":599,"text":24400},{"id":24406,"depth":291,"text":24407,"children":24840},[24841,24842],{"id":24410,"depth":599,"text":24411},{"id":24498,"depth":599,"text":24499},{"id":24538,"depth":291,"text":24539,"children":24844},[24845,24846,24847],{"id":24545,"depth":599,"text":24546},{"id":24559,"depth":599,"text":24560},{"id":24576,"depth":599,"text":24577},{"id":24587,"depth":291,"text":24588},{"id":24600,"depth":291,"text":24601,"children":24850},[24851],{"id":24616,"depth":599,"text":24617},{"id":24626,"depth":291,"text":24627,"children":24853},[24854,24855],{"id":24633,"depth":599,"text":24634},{"id":24678,"depth":599,"text":24679},{"id":24704,"depth":291,"text":24705},{"id":24714,"depth":291,"text":24715},{"id":4417,"depth":291,"text":4418},{"id":16289,"depth":291,"text":16290},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":4478},{"id":24815,"depth":291,"text":24816},"2026-05-25","AREI\u002FRGIE requirements for your EV charger in Belgium: dedicated circuit per connection point, RCD and DC fault-current protection, cable design, documentation and grid questions.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fev-charger-arei.en",{"title":24040,"description":24863},"EV Charger Installation in Belgium: the AREI Guide","ev-charger-arei","blog\u002Fev-charger-arei.en",[16337,24871,1979,24872,10213,24873,2981,319],"wallbox","electric vehicle","RCD protection","XV-YZIEDKIRyAEmIZp5F84pln3-j5Ws8xiKqNbpQTq0",{"id":24876,"title":24877,"articleId":24878,"body":24879,"category":4526,"date":25134,"description":25135,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":25136,"navigation":308,"path":25137,"publishDate":25134,"readTime":25138,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":25139,"seoTitle":25140,"slug":24878,"stem":25141,"tags":25142,"__hash__":25146},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fcost-comparison-diy-vs-electrician.en.md","Cost Comparison: Drawing Your Single-Line Diagram Yourself vs. Hiring an Electrician","cost-comparison-diy-vs-electrician",{"type":8,"value":24880,"toc":25119},[24881,24884,24888,24970,24976,24980,24983,24987,24992,24997,25000,25004,25007,25011,25014,25018,25025,25029,25032,25035,25039,25059,25062,25066,25089,25093,25096,25099,25103,25106,25108,25113],[11,24882,24883],{},"Drawing the diagram yourself pays off when your starting data is verified; you hire an electrician when the as-built state is unknown or design and installation work is coming. The deciding factor is not a price list but who delivers which service: survey, drawing, technical responsibility and inspection. For the Belgian inspection, only one thing counts in the end: the single-line diagram and situation plan show the actual state.",[27,24885,24887],{"id":24886},"compare-the-same-services","Compare the same services",[638,24889,24890,24902],{},[641,24891,24892],{},[644,24893,24894,24896,24899],{},[647,24895,3181],{},[647,24897,24898],{},"Yourself with PlanElec",[647,24900,24901],{},"Commission to a qualified electrician",[657,24903,24904,24915,24926,24937,24948,24959],{},[644,24905,24906,24909,24912],{},[662,24907,24908],{},"Record the as-built state",[662,24910,24911],{},"as far as data can be established safely and without intervention",[662,24913,24914],{},"professional identification and measurement",[644,24916,24917,24920,24923],{},[662,24918,24919],{},"Diagram and situation plan",[662,24921,24922],{},"structured input, both plans from one model, PDF export",[662,24924,24925],{},"depending on the quotation, drawing from supplied or surveyed data",[644,24927,24928,24931,24934],{},[662,24929,24930],{},"Technical design",[662,24932,24933],{},"remains professional work",[662,24935,24936],{},"can be commissioned explicitly",[644,24938,24939,24942,24945],{},[662,24940,24941],{},"Final technical review",[662,24943,24944],{},"organise separately",[662,24946,24947],{},"included if the quotation says so",[644,24949,24950,24953,24956],{},[662,24951,24952],{},"Official inspection",[662,24954,24955],{},"by an approved inspection body",[662,24957,24958],{},"also by an approved inspection body",[644,24960,24961,24964,24967],{},[662,24962,24963],{},"Cost basis",[662,24965,24966],{},"early access EUR 0; then from EUR 15 per property; your own time",[662,24968,24969],{},"project-specific quotation, no official unit rate",[11,24971,24972,24973,5322],{},"Complete project data makes doing it yourself straightforward; an unknown old installation needs a professional survey. The AREI states who draws up the single-line diagram: the person responsible for carrying out the work (Subsection 3.1.2.1 a of ",[23,24974,15817],{"href":4466,"rel":24975},[4434],[27,24977,24979],{"id":24978},"three-editable-scenarios","Three editable scenarios",[11,24981,24982],{},"The formulas are calculation items, not Belgian average prices. Enter your own quotation amounts and time values.",[385,24984,24986],{"id":24985},"_1-existing-installation-with-good-records","1. Existing installation with good records",[11,24988,24989],{},[842,24990,24991],{},"external = survey per quotation + drawing + technical review + inspection",[11,24993,24994],{},[842,24995,24996],{},"own = own hours × personal time value + PlanElec plan + technical review + inspection",[11,24998,24999],{},"If the floor plan, board, protective devices and circuit assignments are verified, your own work is mainly data entry and cross-checking. Unknown technical values stay marked as unknown instead of being estimated. Alternatively, a contractor reviews and draws exactly that limited data set.",[385,25001,25003],{"id":25002},"_2-existing-installation-without-reliable-assignments","2. Existing installation without reliable assignments",[11,25005,25006],{},"Here the first question is which circuit feeds which device and which cable and protection data actually exist. Opening enclosures and measuring is not DIY work. In your own model, add a professional survey as a separate item. You can then enter the confirmed data into PlanElec yourself if you want to take over the drawing.",[385,25008,25010],{"id":25009},"_3-new-or-substantially-altered-installation","3. New or substantially altered installation",[11,25012,25013],{},"For new circuits or sources, technical design comes before drawing. Manufacturer conditions, grid operator requirements and the AREI version shape the decisions. So do not compare a full-service quotation with drawing work alone; split design, installation, documentation and inspection. A substantial alteration is inspected before it is put into use (Subsection 6.4.7.3).",[27,25015,25017],{"id":25016},"which-documents-belong-in-the-comparison","Which documents belong in the comparison?",[11,25019,955,25020,25024],{},[23,25021,25023],{"href":15810,"rel":25022},[4434],"official FPS Economy guidance"," names the single-line diagram and situation plan among the minimum documents for a domestic inspection. The diagram contains cable type, cross-section, number of conductors, installation method, residual current and overcurrent protection as well as switches, boxes, socket outlets, lighting points, fixed appliances and sources (Subsection 3.1.2.2 a); the situation plan shows where those items are. Both belong to the installation file (Section 9.1.2). That is the yardstick for the comparison, not the tool that draws the lines.",[27,25026,25028],{"id":25027},"what-planelec-does-today","What PlanElec does today",[11,25030,25031],{},"PlanElec links floor plan, electrical topology and board planning. The single-line diagram and situation plan come from one model with the same references and are exported as PDFs. The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check tests the supported rules that can be decided from your project data and shows open points; it is an indicative check, not a conformity certificate. The material list and working dossier are available as pilot features with stated limits.",[11,25033,25034],{},"The prices are published: during early access PlanElec costs EUR 0. After the paid plans start, which we will announce well in advance, Free stays free (exports with masked areas), single property costs EUR 15 per property and Pro EUR 29 per month, excluding VAT. For a single house, single property is therefore the right figure for your own model. Your own time, professional work, installation work and the official inspection remain separate items.",[27,25036,25038],{"id":25037},"when-an-electrician-is-essential","When an electrician is essential",[43,25040,25041,25044,25047,25050,25053,25056],{},[46,25042,25043],{},"when the survey requires measurements or opening enclosures;",[46,25045,25046],{},"when conductor data, protection coordination or earthing is unclear;",[46,25048,25049],{},"when new circuits, PV, storage, an EV charger or backup power are planned;",[46,25051,25052],{},"when an inspection report lists technical infringements;",[46,25054,25055],{},"when manufacturer or grid operator conditions have to be assessed;",[46,25057,25058],{},"when you want to hand over responsibility for technical decisions.",[11,25060,25061],{},"Drawing yourself and installing yourself are two different things. PlanElec documents; the electrical competence comes from the qualified electrician.",[27,25063,25065],{"id":25064},"quotation-check-in-seven-questions","Quotation check in seven questions",[105,25067,25068,25071,25074,25077,25080,25083,25086],{},[46,25069,25070],{},"Who collects and verifies the starting data?",[46,25072,25073],{},"Are both plans and all boards included?",[46,25075,25076],{},"Are calculations included, or only graphical transfer?",[46,25078,25079],{},"Who checks technical plausibility?",[46,25081,25082],{},"How are changes and corrections charged?",[46,25084,25085],{},"Are VAT, travel and the inspection fee shown separately?",[46,25087,25088],{},"Which editable source format and which PDFs are handed over?",[27,25090,25092],{"id":25091},"the-decision-rule","The decision rule",[11,25094,25095],{},"Draw it yourself when the starting data is verified, the project stays manageable and a technical review is arranged for technical questions. Hire a contractor when the as-built state is unknown, design decisions are open, measurements are needed or someone has to take on technical coordination. Often a hybrid route works best: structure the existing information in PlanElec, mark unknowns clearly and have only the points that need electrical judgement reviewed.",[11,25097,25098],{},"Document the assumptions of both options. If the quotation excludes circuit tracing, record who supplies verified assignments. In your own model, value not only the plan price but also learning time, survey and corrections. After work on the installation, the diagram and situation plan show the actual state again.",[27,25100,25102],{"id":25101},"hand-over-the-result-and-the-working-state","Hand over the result and the working state",[11,25104,25105],{},"Also compare what remains usable afterwards. A solid handover contains the released PDFs, their version data, the confirmed information behind them and a list of open points. Agree whether editable project data is handed over and who updates it at the next change. Without that agreement, the next extension may need a new survey, whichever route was cheaper at first. With PlanElec, you keep the editable project in your own hands.",[27,25107,4418],{"id":4417},[11,25109,25110,25111,94],{},"Doing it yourself fits when verified data is available and you know the technical limits. Hiring an electrician is the better choice when survey, design or technical responsibility is needed. Calculate with your real quotations and documented time; in both cases the approved inspection body carries out the inspection. How the price of an electrical plan is built up is explained in ",[23,25112,9279],{"href":9278},[11,25114,25115],{},[23,25116,25118],{"href":4504,"rel":25117},[4434],"Open PlanElec in the free early access →",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":25120},[25121,25122,25127,25128,25129,25130,25131,25132,25133],{"id":24886,"depth":291,"text":24887},{"id":24978,"depth":291,"text":24979,"children":25123},[25124,25125,25126],{"id":24985,"depth":599,"text":24986},{"id":25002,"depth":599,"text":25003},{"id":25009,"depth":599,"text":25010},{"id":25016,"depth":291,"text":25017},{"id":25027,"depth":291,"text":25028},{"id":25037,"depth":291,"text":25038},{"id":25064,"depth":291,"text":25065},{"id":25091,"depth":291,"text":25092},{"id":25101,"depth":291,"text":25102},{"id":4417,"depth":291,"text":4418},"2026-05-19","Single-line diagram yourself with PlanElec or by an electrician? Three scenarios for an existing installation, an unknown old installation and a new build, a quotation check and a clear decision rule for Belgium.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fcost-comparison-diy-vs-electrician.en","6 min",{"title":24877,"description":25135},"Single-Line Diagram: DIY vs. Hiring an Electrician (Cost)","blog\u002Fcost-comparison-diy-vs-electrician.en",[25143,25144,319,25145,3710,1981,2981],"costs","electrician","DIY","oSH7YvEMyhrZzdZuU_TqGc7RhCOOqp7XWcc0gGwSajY",{"id":25148,"title":25149,"articleId":25150,"body":25151,"category":4526,"date":25539,"description":25540,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":25541,"navigation":308,"path":25542,"publishDate":25539,"readTime":25138,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":25543,"seoTitle":25544,"slug":25150,"stem":25545,"tags":25546,"__hash__":25549},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fplanelec-vs-excel-paper.en.md","PlanElec vs. Excel & Paper: Why Digital Single-Line Diagrams Are Better","planelec-vs-excel-paper",{"type":8,"value":25152,"toc":25524},[25153,25159,25163,25285,25289,25292,25342,25345,25349,25352,25356,25359,25362,25366,25370,25378,25382,25385,25454,25459,25463,25466,25470,25479,25483,25486,25488,25491,25493,25518],[11,25154,25155,25158],{},[35,25156,25157],{},"Under the AREI\u002FRGIE, you may draw a single-line diagram by hand or in Excel; digital is not mandatory. A planning tool like PlanElec still has three clear advantages: the single-line diagram and situation plan come from the same project model, every change flows through both plans automatically, and an AREI\u002FRGIE self-check finds typical design errors before the inspector does."," Paper and Excel remain workable for very small jobs. Once several circuits, floors or changes are involved, keeping the documents aligned by hand becomes the main source of errors.",[27,25160,25162],{"id":25161},"comparison-at-a-glance","Comparison at a glance",[638,25164,25165,25179],{},[641,25166,25167],{},[644,25168,25169,25171,25173,25176],{},[647,25170,3707],{},[647,25172,3710],{},[647,25174,25175],{},"Excel\u002FWord",[647,25177,25178],{},"Paper",[657,25180,25181,25195,25209,25221,25234,25248,25261,25274],{},[644,25182,25183,25186,25189,25192],{},[662,25184,25185],{},"Cost today",[662,25187,25188],{},"Early Access: EUR 0",[662,25190,25191],{},"Existing licence",[662,25193,25194],{},"Paper and time",[644,25196,25197,25200,25203,25206],{},[662,25198,25199],{},"Symbols per AREI\u002FRGIE Table 2.23",[662,25201,25202],{},"Symbol library for the Belgian context, with legend",[662,25204,25205],{},"Draw or insert yourself",[662,25207,25208],{},"Draw by hand",[644,25210,25211,25214,25217,25219],{},[662,25212,25213],{},"Building the diagram",[662,25215,25216],{},"Automatically from the electrical topology",[662,25218,3781],{},[662,25220,3781],{},[644,25222,25223,25225,25228,25231],{},[662,25224,3892],{},[662,25226,25227],{},"From the same project data, identifiers linked",[662,25229,25230],{},"Separate file",[662,25232,25233],{},"Separate sheet",[644,25235,25236,25239,25242,25245],{},[662,25237,25238],{},"Changes",[662,25240,25241],{},"Once in the model, both plans follow",[662,25243,25244],{},"Update every view separately",[662,25246,25247],{},"Redraw",[644,25249,25250,25253,25256,25259],{},[662,25251,25252],{},"Checking",[662,25254,25255],{},"AREI\u002FRGIE self-check for supported rules",[662,25257,25258],{},"None",[662,25260,25258],{},[644,25262,25263,25265,25268,25271],{},[662,25264,2263],{},[662,25266,25267],{},"Single-line diagram, situation plan and dossier with title block",[662,25269,25270],{},"Manual, page breaks by hand",[662,25272,25273],{},"Scan",[644,25275,25276,25278,25281,25283],{},[662,25277,24952],{},[662,25279,25280],{},"By a recognized inspection body",[662,25282,25280],{},[662,25284,25280],{},[27,25286,25288],{"id":25287},"what-does-the-areirgie-require-of-the-single-line-diagram-and-situation-plan","What does the AREI\u002FRGIE require of the single-line diagram and situation plan?",[11,25290,25291],{},"The AREI\u002FRGIE sets content and legibility, not the tool. The key requirements from Book 1:",[638,25293,25294,25302],{},[641,25295,25296],{},[644,25297,25298,25300],{},[647,25299,24062],{},[647,25301,9490],{},[657,25303,25304,25311,25319,25326,25334],{},[644,25305,25306,25309],{},[662,25307,25308],{},"Diagrams, plans and documents clearly state a number, revision and revision date",[662,25310,15331],{},[644,25312,25313,25316],{},[662,25314,25315],{},"The person responsible for carrying out the work draws up the single-line diagram and situation plan; their name, capacity, VAT number where applicable and the installation address appear on them",[662,25317,25318],{},"Subsection 3.1.2.1.a",[644,25320,25321,25324],{},[662,25322,25323],{},"Each circuit gets a capital letter, each lighting point, socket and control device a sequence number; the situation plan uses the same identifier",[662,25325,25318],{},[644,25327,25328,25331],{},[662,25329,25330],{},"Symbols per Table 2.23; where a symbol is missing, any unambiguous symbol defined in the legend is allowed",[662,25332,25333],{},"Chapter 2.13, subsection 3.1.2.1.a",[644,25335,25336,25339],{},[662,25337,25338],{},"The owner keeps the file with single-line diagram, situation plan and inspection report in duplicate",[662,25340,25341],{},"Section 9.1.2",[11,25343,25344],{},"A neatly drawn plan that meets these points is permitted under the AREI\u002FRGIE. What matters is that the single-line diagram and situation plan are complete, legible and consistent. That is exactly where the tools differ.",[27,25346,25348],{"id":25347},"paper-quick-to-start-hard-to-maintain","Paper: quick to start, hard to maintain",[11,25350,25351],{},"On paper you start drawing without any learning curve. The limits show at the first change: a forgotten socket shifts the circuit numbering, and you have to update the diagram and situation plan by hand. With many circuits, that quickly becomes hard to follow. Crossed-out corrections and handwriting only you can read make the plan harder for the inspector to check. Drawing the Table 2.23 symbols cleanly and consistently takes time; every deviating symbol needs a legend.",[27,25353,25355],{"id":25354},"excel-and-word-tidy-but-no-electrics-behind-it","Excel and Word: tidy, but no electrics behind it",[11,25357,25358],{},"Excel brings order to lists but knows nothing about electrical relationships. You insert symbols as images or rebuild them from shapes. You build the hierarchy of main switch, residual current devices (RCDs), circuit breakers and consumers by hand and adjust it with every change. Larger diagrams do not fit on an A4 page, and the print preview puts page breaks where they do not belong.",[11,25360,25361],{},"Above all, Excel checks nothing: no cell tells you that too many circuits hang off one RCD or that a cross-section does not match its protection.",[27,25363,25365],{"id":25364},"what-planelec-does-differently","What PlanElec does differently",[385,25367,25369],{"id":25368},"one-model-two-plans","One model, two plans",[11,25371,25372,25373,2152,25376,94],{},"In PlanElec, you place devices on the floor plan and connect them to a circuit, protection device and cable. From that topology, PlanElec builds the single-line diagram with main switch, RCDs, circuit breakers and consumers; the situation plan uses the same devices and identifiers. Add a circuit, and both plans follow. More in ",[23,25374,25375],{"href":8154},"Create a single-line diagram",[23,25377,20967],{"href":8160},[385,25379,25381],{"id":25380},"a-self-check-instead-of-gut-feeling","A self-check instead of gut feeling",[11,25383,25384],{},"The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check tests the project data against a documented subset of Book 1, version 06 (applicable since 1 April 2026). A selection:",[638,25386,25387,25395],{},[641,25388,25389],{},[644,25390,25391,25393],{},[647,25392,1006],{},[647,25394,9490],{},[657,25396,25397,25404,25411,25418,25425,25433,25440,25447],{},[644,25398,25399,25402],{},[662,25400,25401],{},"RCD of at most 300 mA at the origin of the installation",[662,25403,1028],{},[644,25405,25406,25409],{},[662,25407,25408],{},"No more than 8 final circuits per RCD up to 30 mA",[662,25410,1042],{},[644,25412,25413,25416],{},[662,25414,25415],{},"RCD up to 30 mA for socket circuits",[662,25417,1042],{},[644,25419,25420,25423],{},[662,25421,25422],{},"Main switch of at least 40 A in domestic installations",[662,25424,1120],{},[644,25426,25427,25430],{},[662,25428,25429],{},"Protection matched to the conductor cross-section",[662,25431,25432],{},"AREI 4.4.1.4, Table 4.11",[644,25434,25435,25438],{},[662,25436,25437],{},"Voltage drop from the cable length (guide values 3% \u002F 5%)",[662,25439,1312],{},[644,25441,25442,25445],{},[662,25443,25444],{},"RCD up to 30 mA for rooms with a bath or shower",[662,25446,1454],{},[644,25448,25449,25452],{},[662,25450,25451],{},"No more than 8 single or multiple sockets per final circuit",[662,25453,1781],{},[11,25455,25456,25457,94],{},"A clean run means the supported rules find no error in your data. Measurements, site conditions and unmodelled rules are yours to check as the professional; the official inspection is carried out by the recognized inspection body. The full rule list is in ",[23,25458,4403],{"href":2953},[385,25460,25462],{"id":25461},"documents-that-match","Documents that match",[11,25464,25465],{},"PlanElec exports the single-line diagram and situation plan as PDFs with a title block, together with the advisory self-check report and a selectable installation dossier with cover, index and page numbering. Your installer details and logo appear on every document. The PDFs are the state you compare with the installed work on site; you maintain number, revision and date for every new revision.",[27,25467,25469],{"id":25468},"what-does-switching-cost","What does switching cost?",[11,25471,25472,25473,25475,25476,94],{},"Paper and Excel cost no money, but they cost time with every change. PlanElec costs EUR 0 during Early Access. The future plans, from EUR 15 per property or EUR 29 per month excluding VAT, are on the ",[23,25474,4021],{"href":4020},"; we will announce the start date in advance. Professional review and the official inspection come on top, whatever the tool. How drawing it yourself compares with hiring an electrician is covered in the ",[23,25477,25478],{"href":9282},"cost comparison",[27,25480,25482],{"id":25481},"when-paper-is-enough","When paper is enough",[11,25484,25485],{},"For a small change that does not count as substantial, AREI\u002FRGIE subsection 3.1.2.1.a accepts a short description instead of a new single-line diagram. A very small plan with few circuits can also be drawn neatly by hand, provided identifiers, symbols, legend and title details are correct. Once the installation grows or changes, the shared model saves you the double alignment.",[27,25487,4418],{"id":4417},[11,25489,25490],{},"Paper and Excel are permitted, but they leave you alone with aligning diagram and situation plan and check nothing. PlanElec brings floor plan, electrical topology and distribution board together in one project, produces both plans from the same data and flags typical design errors early. Inspecting the installation remains the job of the recognized inspection body.",[27,25492,8764],{"id":8763},[43,25494,25495,25501,25506,25512],{},[46,25496,25497],{},[23,25498,25500],{"href":25499},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fbest-single-line-diagram-software-2026","Best single-line diagram software 2026",[46,25502,25503],{},[23,25504,25505],{"href":9282},"Cost comparison: DIY vs. hiring an electrician",[46,25507,25508],{},[23,25509,25511],{"href":25510},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fgetting-started-guide","Getting started with PlanElec",[46,25513,25514],{},[23,25515,25517],{"href":4466,"rel":25516},[4434],"FPS Economy: official RGIE\u002FAREI books",[11,25519,25520,25521,94],{},"With PlanElec, you plan the floor plan, topology and distribution board in one project and export the single-line diagram and situation plan as PDFs. ",[23,25522,25523],{"href":270},"Register for free",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":25525},[25526,25527,25528,25529,25530,25535,25536,25537,25538],{"id":25161,"depth":291,"text":25162},{"id":25287,"depth":291,"text":25288},{"id":25347,"depth":291,"text":25348},{"id":25354,"depth":291,"text":25355},{"id":25364,"depth":291,"text":25365,"children":25531},[25532,25533,25534],{"id":25368,"depth":599,"text":25369},{"id":25380,"depth":599,"text":25381},{"id":25461,"depth":599,"text":25462},{"id":25468,"depth":291,"text":25469},{"id":25481,"depth":291,"text":25482},{"id":4417,"depth":291,"text":4418},{"id":8763,"depth":291,"text":8764},"2026-05-05","Single-line diagram with PlanElec, Excel or on paper: what the AREI\u002FRGIE requires, where drawings and spreadsheets hit their limits and what PlanElec checks automatically.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fplanelec-vs-excel-paper.en",{"title":25149,"description":25540},"PlanElec vs. Excel & Paper for Single-Line Diagrams","blog\u002Fplanelec-vs-excel-paper.en",[3710,25547,25548,4526,319,1979,1981],"Excel","paper","1oZ5vyY_bh6caJqAWZX2apdCzr3m6Wl_GVCnNwEsmtg",{"id":25551,"title":25552,"articleId":25553,"body":25554,"category":5101,"date":25801,"description":25802,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":25803,"navigation":308,"path":25804,"publishDate":25801,"readTime":25138,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":25805,"seoTitle":25806,"slug":25807,"stem":25808,"tags":25809,"__hash__":25812},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fpv-system-documentation.en.md","PV single-line diagrams in Belgium: documentation for electrical contractors","pv-system-documentation",{"type":8,"value":25555,"toc":25792},[25556,25562,25566,25591,25594,25598,25700,25703,25707,25710,25713,25725,25729,25732,25735,25739,25745,25748,25752,25766,25769,25773,25789],[11,25557,25558,25561],{},[35,25559,25560],{},"You document a PV system on the single-line diagram as one continuous chain: strings with their MPPT assignment, the inverter with its exact model reference, DC and AC cables, the isolation and protection functions actually present and an unambiguous connection to the board."," The situation plan and dossier carry the same references. This guide organises the work from roof survey to handover. It deliberately does not prescribe a universal cable size, circuit breaker and RCD combination – that follows from the actual installation.",[27,25563,25565],{"id":25564},"example-job-add-pv-prepare-for-a-charging-point","Example job: add PV, prepare for a charging point",[11,25567,25568,25569,25572,25573,25575,25576,25578,25579,25582,25583,25586,25587,25590],{},"Our ",[35,25570,25571],{},"fictional editorial example"," is a house with main board ",[35,25574,16409],{},", two roof slopes and inverter ",[35,25577,16398],{}," in the technical room. ",[35,25580,25581],{},"S1"," is on the east slope and ",[35,25584,25585],{},"S2"," on the west. The confirmed manufacturer design assigns S1 to MPPT1 and S2 to MPPT2. A unidirectional charging point ",[35,25588,25589],{},"EV1"," is added later. These names connect the three articles; they are illustrative references, not mandatory designations or an exported PlanElec project.",[11,25592,25593],{},"Power, module counts, protective devices and cable sizes stay open until you have established them for the job. Two strings do not automatically imply two acceptable MPPT assignments: input voltage, current, parallel connections and manufacturer limits are checked separately.",[27,25595,25597],{"id":25596},"survey-matrix-for-the-contractor","Survey matrix for the contractor",[638,25599,25600,25614],{},[641,25601,25602],{},[644,25603,25604,25606,25608,25611],{},[647,25605,1109],{},[647,25607,5660],{},[647,25609,25610],{},"Destination in the dossier",[647,25612,25613],{},"Resolve before completion",[657,25615,25616,25630,25644,25658,25672,25686],{},[644,25617,25618,25621,25624,25627],{},[662,25619,25620],{},"S1\u002FS2: modules, count and assignment",[662,25622,25623],{},"Roof survey, module datasheet, string design",[662,25625,25626],{},"DC structure and spatial references",[662,25628,25629],{},"Actual configuration and MPPT limits",[644,25631,25632,25635,25638,25641],{},[662,25633,25634],{},"INV1: exact model, AC data",[662,25636,25637],{},"Nameplate, manufacturer documents",[662,25639,25640],{},"Diagram and equipment records",[662,25642,25643],{},"Variant, serial number, settings",[644,25645,25646,25649,25652,25655],{},[662,25647,25648],{},"DC and AC wiring",[662,25650,25651],{},"Measurements and execution records",[662,25653,25654],{},"Cable specifications and routes",[662,25656,25657],{},"Segments, cross-section and installation conditions",[644,25659,25660,25663,25666,25669],{},[662,25661,25662],{},"Isolation, protection and earthing",[662,25664,25665],{},"Design, instructions and survey",[662,25667,25668],{},"Actual functions on the diagram",[662,25670,25671],{},"Integrated or external, coordination",[644,25673,25674,25677,25680,25683],{},[662,25675,25676],{},"Connection to DB1",[662,25678,25679],{},"Board survey",[662,25681,25682],{},"Unambiguous injection point",[662,25684,25685],{},"Existing devices and possible currents",[644,25687,25688,25691,25694,25697],{},[662,25689,25690],{},"Document revision",[662,25692,25693],{},"Execution and inspection records",[662,25695,25696],{},"Drawing title block and handover list",[662,25698,25699],{},"Responsible person, date and open items",[11,25701,25702],{},"For household PV up to 10 kVA, AREI 7.112.4 lists exactly the data that will later appear in the inspection report: number and rated power of the modules, and number, type, serial number and maximum AC power of the inverters. Keep them properly in the matrix and they are ready on inspection day. Section 7.112.2 adds marking of DC conductors and live AC conductors, warning signs and earthing of the module frames.",[27,25704,25706],{"id":25705},"read-the-diagram-and-situation-plan-together","Read the diagram and situation plan together",[11,25708,25709],{},"Trace S1 and S2 to the confirmed INV1 inputs, then the AC connection to DB1. The situation plan carries the same references at their actual locations. A roof slope is not an electrical string: multiple strings on one slope remain individually identifiable.",[11,25711,25712],{},"In PlanElec, a PV module symbol on the situation plan represents a complete string and links to exactly one string of the associated inverter. The structured PV side shows single and parallel strings per MPPT, Y-branch or combiner, documented cable segments, entered protection and isolation functions, the AC isolation point and the frame PE to the earthing connection. Missing manufacturer limits and unassigned strings stay visible until you resolve them.",[11,25714,955,25715,25717,25718,25721,25722,25724],{},[23,25716,15982],{"href":15981}," develops the spatial survey for this job. The ",[23,25719,25720],{"href":16429},"PV and charging point guide"," continues with EV1 as a separate extension. The ",[23,25723,15986],{"href":287}," shows how you get from the electrical model to the diagram.",[27,25726,25728],{"id":25727},"record-protection-from-the-actual-design","Record protection from the actual design",[11,25730,25731],{},"An inverter name determines neither trip curve nor residual-current protection. Record the ratings, poles, function and location of the devices actually designed. An integrated function does not appear again as an invented external enclosure. You assess manufacturer requirements and applicable AREI\u002FRGIE rules together; an RCMU line in the datasheet does not do that assessment for you.",[11,25733,25734],{},"For a battery or backup function, also record the genuinely supported operating modes, isolation and supplied sections. A hybrid inverter does not yet prove backup capability. The drawing stays understandable when energy reverses direction.",[27,25736,25738],{"id":25737},"equipment-checks-and-the-grid-procedure","Equipment checks and the grid procedure",[11,25740,25741,25742,25744],{},"Use the ",[23,25743,17661],{"href":17319}," to search the exact inverter reference. Compare the result with the current official list and equipment documents. A match proves the device listing, not approval of the completed installation. No match means clarifying the reference – not picking a similarly named model.",[11,25746,25747],{},"The official Synergrid page explains C10\u002F11, C10\u002F26 and their scope. You settle the connection procedure with the distribution operator responsible for the project address. Universal notification deadlines or compensation promises from sample articles do not belong in the job.",[27,25749,25751],{"id":25750},"check-the-handover-before-export","Check the handover before export",[105,25753,25754,25757,25760,25763],{},[46,25755,25756],{},"Match S1, S2, INV1 and DB1 across both drawings and their supporting records.",[46,25758,25759],{},"Resolve open values against the executed installation instead of inventing typical values.",[46,25761,25762],{},"Associate equipment documents, measurements and inspection reports with the correct revision.",[46,25764,25765],{},"Update both drawings after any string, inverter or board change.",[11,25767,25768],{},"PlanElec produces the single-line diagram, situation plan and PDF output from the same entered data. For PV, the AREI\u002FRGIE self-check report contains an installation register with inverter identity, power, MPPTs, strings and modules – explicitly a planning register, not an inspection-body report. The roles are clear: the self-check shows you findings within the supported rules, design and measurements happen on site, and the official inspection is done by the approved inspection body.",[27,25770,25772],{"id":25771},"primary-sources","Primary sources",[43,25774,25775,25782],{},[46,25776,25777,25781],{},[23,25778,25780],{"href":4466,"rel":25779},[4434],"FPS Economy: current AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1",", the basis for project-specific assessment, in particular Chapter 7.112 (version V06).",[46,25783,25784,25788],{},[23,25785,25787],{"href":16304,"rel":25786},[4434],"Synergrid: decentralised generating units",", for equipment homologation and its relationship to the connection procedure.",[11,25790,25791],{},"Editorial review: 5 October 2026. Links lead to current official publications; check the version applicable to your job and the manufacturer instructions within the project.",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":25793},[25794,25795,25796,25797,25798,25799,25800],{"id":25564,"depth":291,"text":25565},{"id":25596,"depth":291,"text":25597},{"id":25705,"depth":291,"text":25706},{"id":25727,"depth":291,"text":25728},{"id":25737,"depth":291,"text":25738},{"id":25750,"depth":291,"text":25751},{"id":25771,"depth":291,"text":25772},"2026-04-21","Document a Belgian PV extension properly: align strings, inverter, connection point and unresolved data across the single-line diagram, situation plan and dossier.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fpv-system-documentation.en",{"title":25552,"description":25802},"PV Single-Line Diagrams in Belgium: Documentation","pv-system-diagram","blog\u002Fpv-system-documentation.en",[5270,19398,319,1979,17848,25810,25811,19394],"grid operator","battery","QsFglHwOHkGKK1x7klPEZ1PuUGAuA6Hsz9ISy7X-bAI",{"id":25814,"title":25815,"articleId":25816,"body":25817,"category":5101,"date":26622,"description":26623,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":26624,"navigation":308,"path":26625,"publishDate":26622,"readTime":15276,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":26626,"seoTitle":26627,"slug":26628,"stem":26629,"tags":26630,"__hash__":26633},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fold-building-arei-part8.en.md","Old Buildings and AREI Part 8: Special Rules for Existing Installations","old-building-arei-part8",{"type":8,"value":25818,"toc":26597},[25819,25826,25830,25832,25836,25839,25877,25880,25883,25885,25889,25896,25899,25924,25927,25929,25933,25936,26173,26176,26178,26182,26185,26252,26255,26258,26260,26264,26268,26271,26275,26278,26289,26297,26301,26369,26372,26374,26378,26381,26395,26399,26414,26416,26420,26424,26438,26442,26456,26460,26468,26472,26475,26477,26481,26484,26488,26491,26493,26497,26558,26560,26562,26584,26586],[11,25820,25821,25822,25825],{},"An older electrical installation in Belgium does not have to match today's AREI\u002FRGIE in every detail. ",[35,25823,25824],{},"Part 8 of AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1"," lists specific derogations for existing installations: for example thinner cables from 1 mm², socket and lighting circuits without a 30 mA RCD, or simplified plans. Anything part 8 does not expressly allow must comply with Book 1, and new or significantly modified parts are assessed under today's rules. This article shows you which installations part 8 covers, what it allows, what stays mandatory in every case and how to modernise sensibly.",[11,25827,25828,22566],{},[35,25829,22565],{},[4473,25831],{},[27,25833,25835],{"id":25834},"what-is-part-8","What is part 8?",[11,25837,25838],{},"Part 8 contains the \"special provisions relating to existing electrical installations\". An installation is existing when its construction on site began before the current Book 1 entered into force on 1 June 2020 and it has not undergone a conformity inspection under chapter 6.4 of the current Book (section 8.1.1). For domestic installations, part 8 distinguishes two groups, each with its own list of derogations:",[638,25840,25841,25853],{},[641,25842,25843],{},[644,25844,25845,25847,25850],{},[647,25846,14271],{},[647,25848,25849],{},"Characteristic",[647,25851,25852],{},"Derogations",[657,25854,25855,25866],{},[644,25856,25857,25860,25863],{},[662,25858,25859],{},"Old domestic installation",[662,25861,25862],{},"Construction started before 1 October 1981, with or without a visit under the former AREI",[662,25864,25865],{},"8.2.1",[644,25867,25868,25871,25874],{},[662,25869,25870],{},"Domestic installation under the former AREI",[662,25872,25873],{},"Construction from 1 October 1981, conformity inspection under the former AREI",[662,25875,25876],{},"8.2.2",[11,25878,25879],{},"For installations built from 1 June 2020 under the current Book 1, the derogations for existing parts are in subsection 6.5.8.1.",[11,25881,25882],{},"Part 8 is a closed list, not a general grandfather clause. Even under part 8, equipment may only stay in service if, when correctly installed, maintained and used, it does not endanger people's safety and is suited to the external influences (8.2.1 no. 1).",[4473,25884],{},[27,25886,25888],{"id":25887},"when-is-an-old-installation-assessed-under-todays-rules","When is an old installation assessed under today's rules?",[11,25890,25891,25892,25895],{},"As soon as you carry out a ",[35,25893,25894],{},"significant modification or extension",". A modification is significant when it has an additional impact on the safety of people or property that no conformity inspection has covered yet (definition in part 2). A new circuit in the board is typically significant; swapping a socket for an equivalent model is not. If in doubt, clarify the classification with your electrician and the inspection body before work starts.",[11,25897,25898],{},"For a significant modification:",[105,25900,25901,25907,25914,25921],{},[46,25902,955,25903,25906],{},[35,25904,25905],{},"new or modified part"," is inspected under the current Book 1 before it is put into use (6.4.7.3).",[46,25908,25909,25910,25913],{},"If the modification affects an ",[35,25911,25912],{},"unchanged part",", that part is inspected with regard to the modified characteristics (6.4.7.3).",[46,25915,25916,25917,25920],{},"For a significant modification of an old domestic installation, the ",[35,25918,25919],{},"entire installation"," must be protected by at least one RCD of at most 300 mA at the origin (4.2.4.3 b).",[46,25922,25923],{},"The remaining unchanged parts keep their part 8 derogations.",[11,25925,25926],{},"Non-significant changes to socket and lighting circuits without a 30 mA RCD remain expressly covered by the derogation (8.2.1 no. 16, 8.2.2 no. 10). They still go into the installation file as a short description (9.1.2 no. 7).",[4473,25928],{},[27,25930,25932],{"id":25931},"what-part-8-allows","What part 8 allows",[11,25934,25935],{},"The table lists the most important derogations for domestic installations. \"8.2.1\" applies to installations from before 1981, \"8.2.2\" to installations under the former AREI; several derogations in 8.2.2 also depend on the construction date.",[638,25937,25938,25953],{},[641,25939,25940],{},[644,25941,25942,25945,25948,25951],{},[647,25943,25944],{},"Topic",[647,25946,25947],{},"Current rule",[647,25949,25950],{},"Part 8 derogation",[647,25952,9490],{},[657,25954,25955,25968,25981,25995,26009,26023,26037,26050,26064,26078,26092,26106,26119,26132,26146,26159],{},[644,25956,25957,25959,25962,25965],{},[662,25958,18466],{},[662,25960,25961],{},"At least 2.5 mm², 1.5 mm² without sockets (5.2.1.2)",[662,25963,25964],{},"Cables from 1 mm² may stay; 1 mm² protected by a fuse of at most 6 A or a circuit breaker of at most 10 A",[662,25966,25967],{},"8.2.1 no. 5",[644,25969,25970,25973,25975,25978],{},[662,25971,25972],{},"Marking thin circuits",[662,25974,3810],{},[662,25976,25977],{},"Circuits below 1.5 mm²: red sign of at least 8 × 5 cm on the board door",[662,25979,25980],{},"8.2.1 no. 3",[644,25982,25983,25986,25989,25992],{},[662,25984,25985],{},"Fire behaviour of cables",[662,25987,25988],{},"Specified fire behaviour (4.3.3)",[662,25990,25991],{},"Cables without predetermined fire behaviour may stay",[662,25993,25994],{},"8.2.1 no. 5, 8.2.2 no. 5",[644,25996,25997,26000,26003,26006],{},[662,25998,25999],{},"30 mA RCD",[662,26001,26002],{},"For sockets and lighting (4.2.4.3 b)",[662,26004,26005],{},"Socket and lighting circuits without a high-sensitivity RCD; more than eight circuits per RCD",[662,26007,26008],{},"8.2.1 no. 16, 8.2.2 no. 10",[644,26010,26011,26014,26017,26020],{},[662,26012,26013],{},"RCD at the origin",[662,26015,26016],{},"At least 40 A, own isolating function",[662,26018,26019],{},"Devices below 40 A may stay; isolation via an upstream general switch",[662,26021,26022],{},"8.2.1 no. 2, 8.2.2 no. 2",[644,26024,26025,26028,26031,26034],{},[662,26026,26027],{},"Overcurrent protection",[662,26029,26030],{},"Energy limitation class 3 (5.3.5.5)",[662,26032,26033],{},"Devices without this marking may stay (8.2.2: construction before 31.12.2007)",[662,26035,26036],{},"8.2.1 no. 3, 8.2.2 no. 3",[644,26038,26039,26041,26044,26047],{},[662,26040,21813],{},[662,26042,26043],{},"At least 40 A (5.3.5.1 b)",[662,26045,26046],{},"At least 25 A (8.2.2: construction before 16.9.1991)",[662,26048,26049],{},"8.2.1 no. 4, 8.2.2 no. 4",[644,26051,26052,26055,26058,26061],{},[662,26053,26054],{},"Sockets without earth contact",[662,26056,26057],{},"Earth contact mandatory (5.3.5.2 b)",[662,26059,26060],{},"Allowed if the cable has no protective conductor and an RCD of at most 30 mA protects it",[662,26062,26063],{},"8.2.1 no. 6 b",[644,26065,26066,26069,26072,26075],{},[662,26067,26068],{},"Sockets per circuit",[662,26070,26071],{},"At most eight (5.3.5.2 b)",[662,26073,26074],{},"More than eight, if the permitted power of the cable is not exceeded",[662,26076,26077],{},"8.2.1 no. 6 b, 8.2.2 no. 6",[644,26079,26080,26083,26086,26089],{},[662,26081,26082],{},"Lighting circuits",[662,26084,26085],{},"Two separate circuits above two rooms (5.3.5.2 b)",[662,26087,26088],{},"A single lighting circuit",[662,26090,26091],{},"8.2.1 no. 14",[644,26093,26094,26097,26100,26103],{},[662,26095,26096],{},"Protective conductor",[662,26098,26099],{},"In every cable (5.2.1.3)",[662,26101,26102],{},"Cables without protective conductor may stay if they do not supply fixed class I appliances",[662,26104,26105],{},"8.2.1 no. 12",[644,26107,26108,26110,26113,26116],{},[662,26109,1235],{},[662,26111,26112],{},"Required (4.2.3.4)",[662,26114,26115],{},"May be missing",[662,26117,26118],{},"8.2.1 no. 13",[644,26120,26121,26123,26126,26129],{},[662,26122,9723],{},[662,26124,26125],{},"According to 5.4.2.2",[662,26127,26128],{},"Copper from 6 mm² may stay",[662,26130,26131],{},"8.2.1 no. 11",[644,26133,26134,26137,26140,26143],{},[662,26135,26136],{},"Conductor colours",[662,26138,26139],{},"Green-yellow only for protective conductors (5.1.6.2)",[662,26141,26142],{},"Protective conductors in another colour may stay; green-yellow live conductors are forbidden",[662,26144,26145],{},"8.2.1 no. 10",[644,26147,26148,26150,26153,26156],{},[662,26149,17926],{},[662,26151,26152],{},"Full content (3.1.2)",[662,26154,26155],{},"Simplified plans with minimum content (8.2.1); missing signature, VAT number or protective device type tolerated (8.2.2)",[662,26157,26158],{},"8.2.1 no. 7, 8.2.2 no. 7",[644,26160,26161,26164,26167,26170],{},[662,26162,26163],{},"Conformity inspection report",[662,26165,26166],{},"Belongs in the file (9.1.2)",[662,26168,26169],{},"Its absence is tolerated at the control visit",[662,26171,26172],{},"8.2.1 no. 9, 8.2.2 no. 9",[11,26174,26175],{},"For installations from before 1981, the simplified single-line diagram contains at least the address, nominal voltage, cross-section of the main board's supply cable, type and cross-section of the outgoing circuits, and the RCDs and protective devices with their characteristics; the simplified situation plan shows sockets, switches, light points and fixed appliances. The two plans do not need to match each other (8.2.1 no. 7).",[4473,26177],{},[27,26179,26181],{"id":26180},"what-remains-mandatory-even-under-part-8","What remains mandatory even under part 8",[11,26183,26184],{},"Part 8 contains no derogation for the following points. They are therefore checked in an old installation too:",[638,26186,26187,26196],{},[641,26188,26189],{},[644,26190,26191,26194],{},[647,26192,26193],{},"Duty",[647,26195,9490],{},[657,26197,26198,26204,26212,26220,26228,26236,26244],{},[644,26199,26200,26202],{},[662,26201,25401],{},[662,26203,12631],{},[644,26205,26206,26209],{},[662,26207,26208],{},"RCD of at most 30 mA for rooms with a bath or shower",[662,26210,26211],{},"4.2.4.3 b no. 3",[644,26213,26214,26217],{},[662,26215,26216],{},"RCD of at most 30 mA for washing machine, tumble dryer and dishwasher",[662,26218,26219],{},"4.2.4.3 b no. 4",[644,26221,26222,26225],{},[662,26223,26224],{},"Exposed parts of class I appliances connected to the protective conductor",[662,26226,26227],{},"4.2.4.3 a",[644,26229,26230,26233],{},[662,26231,26232],{},"Socket with earth pin only with a real connection to the earth electrode",[662,26234,26235],{},"8.2.1 no. 6",[644,26237,26238,26241],{},[662,26239,26240],{},"Single-line diagram and situation plan, at least in simplified form",[662,26242,26243],{},"8.2.1 no. 7, 8.4.2.2 d",[644,26245,26246,26249],{},[662,26247,26248],{},"Equipment that does not endanger safety in normal use",[662,26250,26251],{},"8.2.1 no. 1",[11,26253,26254],{},"On top of that come conditions that no derogation covers because they are immediately dangerous: bare or damaged cables, accessible live parts, junction boxes without covers, overheated or loose connections, bridged fuses, a protective device rated higher than the conductor permits, and low-voltage sockets in zone 0 or 1 of the bathroom.",[11,26256,26257],{},"Existing bathrooms have their own rule: rooms whose construction started before 1 March 2025 may use the former zone layout (6.5.8.1 no. 3). For installations from before 1981, part 8 also allows certain cables, underfloor heating and the absence of supplementary bonding to remain if zone 2 is extended to 1 m (8.2.1 no. 15.2).",[4473,26259],{},[27,26261,26263],{"id":26262},"control-visits-for-existing-installations","Control visits for existing installations",[385,26265,26267],{"id":26266},"which-deadline-applies","Which deadline applies?",[11,26269,26270],{},"For an installation inspected under the former AREI, the first control visit takes place within the deadline stated in the last report under the former AREI (8.1.2); after that, a domestic installation is visited at the latest every 25 years (6.5.2). For old installations without a conformity inspection, chapter 8.4 sets its own triggers: before an increase in connection capacity (8.4.1), when a dwelling is sold (8.4.2) and in other cases (8.4.3). So always check the last report and the specific trigger.",[385,26272,26274],{"id":26273},"when-selling","When selling",[11,26276,26277],{},"When selling a dwelling with an old installation that has not been significantly modified since 1 October 1981, or whose old part has not yet been visited, the seller arranges a control visit and records the report date in the deed of sale (8.4.2).",[15,26279,26280],{},[11,26281,26282,26285,26286,26288],{},[35,26283,26284],{},"18-month deadline (8.4.2.2 a):"," if the report is negative, the buyer has it checked within ",[35,26287,21484],{}," that the infringements have been corrected. The buyer chooses the approved body freely.",[11,26290,26291,26292,26296],{},"These 18 months are not interchangeable with the re-visit after a periodic control visit, which the same body carries out within one year (6.5.7.2 b.7). The ",[23,26293,26295],{"href":21664,"rel":26294},[4434],"FPS Economy FAQ on Book 1"," explains the sale procedure.",[385,26298,26300],{"id":26299},"what-the-control-visit-checks","What the control visit checks",[638,26302,26303,26312],{},[641,26304,26305],{},[644,26306,26307,26309],{},[647,26308,1006],{},[647,26310,26311],{},"Assessment",[657,26313,26314,26322,26330,26338,26346,26353,26361],{},[644,26315,26316,26319],{},[662,26317,26318],{},"Visual check of cables and connections",[662,26320,26321],{},"Damage, overheating, fixing",[644,26323,26324,26327],{},[662,26325,26326],{},"Earth resistance",[662,26328,26329],{},"Below 100 Ω (4.2.3.2); above 30 Ω a stricter RCD layout (4.2.4.3 b, with the part 8 derogations)",[644,26331,26332,26335],{},[662,26333,26334],{},"Insulation resistance",[662,26336,26337],{},"At least 500 kΩ per circuit at a 500 V test voltage (6.4.5.1, table 6.1)",[644,26339,26340,26343],{},[662,26341,26342],{},"RCDs",[662,26344,26345],{},"Presence, assignment and operation",[644,26347,26348,26350],{},[662,26349,26027],{},[662,26351,26352],{},"Protective device matched to the cross-section (4.4.1.4, table 4.11)",[644,26354,26355,26358],{},[662,26356,26357],{},"Protection against direct contact",[662,26359,26360],{},"Covers, boxes, boards",[644,26362,26363,26366],{},[662,26364,26365],{},"Documentation",[662,26367,26368],{},"Single-line diagram and situation plan present",[11,26370,26371],{},"The report expressly lists infringements, remarks and the part 8 derogations that apply to the installation (6.5.7.2 b.5). If the plans are missing at a sale visit, the inspector draws up a short description and a rough sketch so that it remains traceable what was inspected; the missing plans are still recorded as an infringement (8.4.2.2 d).",[4473,26373],{},[27,26375,26377],{"id":26376},"partial-renovation-what-the-so-called-contamination-rule-really-means","Partial renovation: what the so-called contamination rule really means",[11,26379,26380],{},"In the trade, people often speak of a \"contamination rule\": new work would force the whole installation up to today's standard. Book 1 does not know this concept. The actual rules are more precise:",[43,26382,26383,26386,26389,26392],{},[46,26384,26385],{},"New and significantly modified parts follow the current Book 1 (6.4.7.3).",[46,26387,26388],{},"Unchanged parts are inspected to the extent the modification affects their characteristics (6.4.7.3).",[46,26390,26391],{},"After a significant modification of an old domestic installation, at least one 300 mA RCD at the origin protects the whole installation (4.2.4.3 b).",[46,26393,26394],{},"All other part 8 derogations remain in place for the unchanged parts.",[385,26396,26398],{"id":26397},"in-practice","In practice",[43,26400,26401,26408,26411],{},[46,26402,26403,26404,26407],{},"Plan new circuits so that old and new parts are ",[35,26405,26406],{},"clearly separated",", for example via a dedicated sub-distribution board.",[46,26409,26410],{},"Mark on the single-line diagram what is old and what is new.",[46,26412,26413],{},"Clarify contentious boundaries with the inspection body before work starts.",[4473,26415],{},[27,26417,26419],{"id":26418},"modernising-step-by-step","Modernising step by step",[385,26421,26423],{"id":26422},"priority-1-duties-and-hazards","Priority 1: duties and hazards",[43,26425,26426,26429,26432,26435],{},[46,26427,26428],{},"Add an RCD of at most 300 mA at the origin if it is missing",[46,26430,26431],{},"30 mA RCD for the bathroom and for washing machine, tumble dryer and dishwasher",[46,26433,26434],{},"Replace damaged cables, fix loose connections, close boxes",[46,26436,26437],{},"Have the earthing measured and improved if needed",[385,26439,26441],{"id":26440},"priority-2-clearly-more-safety","Priority 2: clearly more safety",[43,26443,26444,26447,26450,26453],{},[46,26445,26446],{},"30 mA RCD for socket and lighting circuits too",[46,26448,26449],{},"Install sockets with earth contact and a protective conductor",[46,26451,26452],{},"Replace old fuses with circuit breakers",[46,26454,26455],{},"Have surge protection assessed professionally (4.5.1)",[385,26457,26459],{"id":26458},"priority-3-comfort-and-future","Priority 3: comfort and future",[43,26461,26462,26465],{},[46,26463,26464],{},"Modernise the board with spare capacity and clear labelling",[46,26466,26467],{},"Prepare for an EV charger or PV – the new circuit for it is a significant extension that requires a conformity inspection",[385,26469,26471],{"id":26470},"define-the-work-before-asking-for-prices","Define the work before asking for prices",[11,26473,26474],{},"Have the existing installation surveyed, separate duties from voluntary improvements and get a dated quote for the specific building. Cable routes, finishes, accessibility, board condition and renovation scope drive the effort far more than any online price range.",[4473,26476],{},[27,26478,26480],{"id":26479},"clarify-the-installation-history-before-relying-on-a-derogation","Clarify the installation history before relying on a derogation",[11,26482,26483],{},"The year of construction alone is not enough. Build a timeline from earlier inspection reports, board labels, invoices, permits and the visible workmanship. Determine which parts existed before 1 October 1981, what was significantly modified or extended later, and whether that work was inspected. For each derogation you rely on, record the exact reference, the affected circuit, the evidence of age and the remaining safety conditions. Without evidence, the field stays open; cable colour or appearance is not a reliable date. The inspection body decides on applicability based on the actual installation.",[385,26485,26487],{"id":26486},"survey-on-site","Survey on site",[11,26489,26490],{},"Photograph and label the board, fuses, RCDs, earth connections, visible cables and junction boxes without removing covers from live parts. Record each identified circuit first as the existing state. Unknown origin, unknown cross-section or illegible ratings stay explicitly open. The electrician then separates urgent measures, changes requiring inspection and voluntary modernisation. That way your diagram shows the existing installation as it is – not as a new build.",[4473,26492],{},[27,26494,26496],{"id":26495},"summary","Summary",[638,26498,26499,26508],{},[641,26500,26501],{},[644,26502,26503,26505],{},[647,26504,16826],{},[647,26506,26507],{},"Answer",[657,26509,26510,26518,26526,26534,26542,26550],{},[644,26511,26512,26515],{},[662,26513,26514],{},"Must my old installation comply with today's AREI?",[662,26516,26517],{},"Yes, apart from the part 8 derogations; new and significantly modified parts in full",[644,26519,26520,26523],{},[662,26521,26522],{},"Do I need a 300 mA RCD at the origin?",[662,26524,26525],{},"Yes. Part 8 only allows devices below 40 A and upstream isolation, not omitting it",[644,26527,26528,26531],{},[662,26529,26530],{},"Do I need 30 mA RCDs?",[662,26532,26533],{},"Yes for the bathroom and washing machine, tumble dryer and dishwasher; recommended for sockets and lighting",[644,26535,26536,26539],{},[662,26537,26538],{},"Are sockets without earth contact allowed?",[662,26540,26541],{},"In installations from before 1981, if the cable has no protective conductor and a 30 mA RCD protects it",[644,26543,26544,26547],{},[662,26545,26546],{},"How often is it inspected?",[662,26548,26549],{},"By the deadline in the last report, then every 25 years; for old installations depending on the trigger",[644,26551,26552,26555],{},[662,26553,26554],{},"What about a partial renovation?",[662,26556,26557],{},"New part under the current Book 1, unchanged part keeps the part 8 derogations",[4473,26559],{},[27,26561,5054],{"id":4477},[43,26563,26564,26569,26574,26579],{},[46,26565,26566],{},[23,26567,26568],{"href":7093},"Electrical Inspection in Belgium: The Complete Guide",[46,26570,26571],{},[23,26572,26573],{"href":7191},"AREI\u002FRGIE Regulations 2026: The Key Changes",[46,26575,26576],{},[23,26577,26578],{"href":10611},"Preflex vs. Open Wiring",[46,26580,26581],{},[23,26582,26583],{"href":8775},"Distribution Board Planning",[4473,26585],{},[11,26587,26588],{},[7299,26589,26590,26591,26593,26594],{},"Even in an old building, you build the single-line diagram and situation plan from one project with ",[35,26592,3710],{}," and mark old and new parts cleanly. The self-check shows you findings in the supported rules; whether a part 8 derogation applies to your installation is decided on site by the approved inspection body. ",[23,26595,26596],{"href":17817},"Start for free →",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":26598},[26599,26600,26601,26602,26603,26608,26611,26617,26620,26621],{"id":25834,"depth":291,"text":25835},{"id":25887,"depth":291,"text":25888},{"id":25931,"depth":291,"text":25932},{"id":26180,"depth":291,"text":26181},{"id":26262,"depth":291,"text":26263,"children":26604},[26605,26606,26607],{"id":26266,"depth":599,"text":26267},{"id":26273,"depth":599,"text":26274},{"id":26299,"depth":599,"text":26300},{"id":26376,"depth":291,"text":26377,"children":26609},[26610],{"id":26397,"depth":599,"text":26398},{"id":26418,"depth":291,"text":26419,"children":26612},[26613,26614,26615,26616],{"id":26422,"depth":599,"text":26423},{"id":26440,"depth":599,"text":26441},{"id":26458,"depth":599,"text":26459},{"id":26470,"depth":599,"text":26471},{"id":26479,"depth":291,"text":26480,"children":26618},[26619],{"id":26486,"depth":599,"text":26487},{"id":26495,"depth":291,"text":26496},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":5054},"2026-04-14","What applies to older electrical installations in Belgium: part 8 of the AREI\u002FRGIE with the key derogations, the duties without exception, control visits and step-by-step modernisation.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fold-building-arei-part8.en",{"title":25815,"description":26623},"Old Buildings and AREI Part 8: Rules for Existing Systems","old-building-arei-part-8","blog\u002Fold-building-arei-part8.en",[26631,1979,19961,6227,19957,1981,26632],"old building","periodic","lQotXeOziAVI3T7Z_5yvoHSp_YV4oXP8U2d8FK4dNMk",{"id":26635,"title":26636,"articleId":26637,"body":26638,"category":5101,"date":27947,"description":27948,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":27949,"navigation":308,"path":27950,"publishDate":27947,"readTime":8196,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":27951,"seoTitle":27952,"slug":27953,"stem":27954,"tags":27955,"__hash__":27959},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fdistribution-board-planning.en.md","Distribution Board Planning: Layout and Sizing According to AREI\u002FRGIE","distribution-board-planning",{"type":8,"value":26639,"toc":27913},[26640,26646,26650,26652,26662,26666,26677,26765,26768,26772,26775,26843,26846,26850,26853,26857,26860,26971,26980,26984,26991,26995,27001,27007,27011,27084,27094,27098,27105,27109,27177,27180,27183,27186,27190,27194,27200,27204,27257,27261,27267,27270,27281,27284,27288,27291,27295,27373,27377,27484,27488,27591,27595,27697,27703,27707,27811,27815,27818,27829,27832,27836,27839,27842,27845,27849,27852,27855,27858,27861,27865,27870,27874,27885,27887,27908],[11,26641,26642,26645],{},[35,26643,26644],{},"You plan a distribution board (consumer unit, fuse box) in four steps: count the circuits, set the protection chain, distribute the groups across rows and plan spare capacity."," The AREI\u002FRGIE, Belgium's general regulations for electrical installations, provides fixed anchor points: a main switch of at least 40 A, an RCD of at most 300 mA at the origin of the installation, then 30 mA RCDs for sockets, lighting, bathroom and laundry appliances – with no more than eight final circuits per device. This guide covers the structure, the rules and a complete example for a single-family home.",[27,26647,26649],{"id":26648},"fundamentals-structure-of-a-distribution-board","Fundamentals: structure of a distribution board",[385,26651,617],{"id":23320},[11,26653,26654,26655,26658,26659,94],{},"All modules in the board clip onto standardised ",[35,26656,26657],{},"DIN rails"," (35 mm top-hat rail to EN 60715). Each rail forms a ",[35,26660,26661],{},"row",[385,26663,26665],{"id":26664},"module-units-te","Module units (TE)",[11,26667,26668,26669,26672,26673,26676],{},"Module width is measured in ",[35,26670,26671],{},"TE"," (module units). One TE is ",[35,26674,26675],{},"18 mm",". Typical widths:",[638,26678,26679,26688],{},[641,26680,26681],{},[644,26682,26683,26686],{},[647,26684,26685],{},"Module",[647,26687,6045],{},[657,26689,26690,26698,26706,26714,26721,26729,26736,26743,26751,26758],{},[644,26691,26692,26695],{},[662,26693,26694],{},"Circuit breaker 1P+N",[662,26696,26697],{},"1 TE (compact) or 2 TE",[644,26699,26700,26703],{},[662,26701,26702],{},"Circuit breaker 2-pole",[662,26704,26705],{},"2 TE",[644,26707,26708,26711],{},[662,26709,26710],{},"Circuit breaker 3-pole",[662,26712,26713],{},"3 TE",[644,26715,26716,26719],{},[662,26717,26718],{},"RCD 2-pole (30\u002F300 mA)",[662,26720,26705],{},[644,26722,26723,26726],{},[662,26724,26725],{},"RCD 4-pole",[662,26727,26728],{},"4 TE",[644,26730,26731,26734],{},[662,26732,26733],{},"Main switch 2-pole",[662,26735,26705],{},[644,26737,26738,26741],{},[662,26739,26740],{},"Main switch 4-pole",[662,26742,26728],{},[644,26744,26745,26748],{},[662,26746,26747],{},"Surge protective device (SPD)",[662,26749,26750],{},"2–4 TE",[644,26752,26753,26756],{},[662,26754,26755],{},"Bell transformer",[662,26757,26705],{},[644,26759,26760,26763],{},[662,26761,26762],{},"Time switch",[662,26764,26705],{},[11,26766,26767],{},"The data sheets of the devices you actually install are what counts.",[385,26769,26771],{"id":26770},"board-sizes","Board sizes",[11,26773,26774],{},"Boards are sized by number of rows and TE per row:",[638,26776,26777,26793],{},[641,26778,26779],{},[644,26780,26781,26784,26787,26790],{},[647,26782,26783],{},"Designation",[647,26785,26786],{},"Rows",[647,26788,26789],{},"TE per row",[647,26791,26792],{},"Total TE",[657,26794,26795,26807,26819,26831],{},[644,26796,26797,26800,26802,26805],{},[662,26798,26799],{},"1-row",[662,26801,13705],{},[662,26803,26804],{},"12–18",[662,26806,26804],{},[644,26808,26809,26812,26814,26816],{},[662,26810,26811],{},"2-row",[662,26813,13737],{},[662,26815,26804],{},[662,26817,26818],{},"24–36",[644,26820,26821,26824,26826,26828],{},[662,26822,26823],{},"3-row",[662,26825,13753],{},[662,26827,26804],{},[662,26829,26830],{},"36–54",[644,26832,26833,26836,26838,26840],{},[662,26834,26835],{},"4-row",[662,26837,17009],{},[662,26839,26804],{},[662,26841,26842],{},"48–72",[11,26844,26845],{},"For the single-family home in the example below, a 4-row board with 18 TE per row (72 TE) fits and leaves plenty of room for later extensions.",[385,26847,26849],{"id":26848},"what-the-arei-requires-of-the-enclosure","What the AREI requires of the enclosure",[11,26851,26852],{},"In domestic installations the board is class I or II, with a back panel that cannot be removed for its entire service life, and a door. It is made of non-combustible, non-hygroscopic material and is easily accessible without special tools (subsection 5.3.5.1, points a and c). Protective devices for circuits on different energy tariffs sit on separate plates at least 10 cm apart or in a separate board, unless the grid operator allows otherwise.",[27,26854,26856],{"id":26855},"step-1-count-the-circuits","Step 1: count the circuits",[11,26858,26859],{},"List every circuit you need. The example home (3 bedrooms, 150 m², no PV) gives this list:",[638,26861,26862,26873],{},[641,26863,26864],{},[644,26865,26866,26868,26871],{},[647,26867,2387],{},[647,26869,26870],{},"Number in example",[647,26872,24651],{},[657,26874,26875,26884,26894,26904,26914,26924,26933,26942,26951,26961],{},[644,26876,26877,26879,26881],{},[662,26878,9090],{},[662,26880,13753],{},[662,26882,26883],{},"B10A or B16A (1.5 mm²)",[644,26885,26886,26889,26891],{},[662,26887,26888],{},"General sockets",[662,26890,21424],{},[662,26892,26893],{},"B16A or B20A (2.5 mm²)",[644,26895,26896,26899,26901],{},[662,26897,26898],{},"Oven",[662,26900,13705],{},[662,26902,26903],{},"B20A with 2.5 mm², B25A with 4 mm²",[644,26905,26906,26909,26911],{},[662,26907,26908],{},"Hob",[662,26910,13705],{},[662,26912,26913],{},"B32A with 6 mm² or three-phase per manufacturer",[644,26915,26916,26919,26921],{},[662,26917,26918],{},"Dishwasher",[662,26920,13705],{},[662,26922,26923],{},"B16A",[644,26925,26926,26929,26931],{},[662,26927,26928],{},"Washing machine",[662,26930,13705],{},[662,26932,26923],{},[644,26934,26935,26938,26940],{},[662,26936,26937],{},"Tumble dryer",[662,26939,13705],{},[662,26941,26923],{},[644,26943,26944,26947,26949],{},[662,26945,26946],{},"Fridge",[662,26948,13705],{},[662,26950,26923],{},[644,26952,26953,26956,26958],{},[662,26954,26955],{},"Water heater",[662,26957,13705],{},[662,26959,26960],{},"B16A or B20A",[644,26962,26963,26966,26968],{},[662,26964,26965],{},"EV charger (if present)",[662,26967,13705],{},[662,26969,26970],{},"per manufacturer, e.g. B32A with 6 mm² at 7.4 kW single-phase",[11,26972,26973,26974,26977,26978,94],{},"The maximum ratings per cross-section are in table 4.11 (subsection 4.4.1.4). Washing machine, tumble dryer, dishwasher, cooker, hob, oven and any appliance with a fixed location rated 2600 W or more get their own circuit (5.2.1.2). A socket circuit feeds at most ",[35,26975,26976],{},"8 sockets"," (5.3.5.2 b); pure lighting circuits have no fixed point limit. More in ",[23,26979,20581],{"href":14007},[27,26981,26983],{"id":26982},"step-2-set-the-protection-chain","Step 2: set the protection chain",[11,26985,26986,26987,26990],{},"You arrange protective devices ",[35,26988,26989],{},"hierarchically",", from the supply downwards:",[385,26992,26994],{"id":26993},"protection-hierarchy","Protection hierarchy",[14892,26996,26999],{"className":26997,"code":26998,"language":14897},[14895],"Main switch (min. 40 A)\n   └── RCD at the origin ≤ 300 mA (min. Type A, min. 40 A)\n        ├── RCD 30 mA #1 (Type A)\n        │    ├── MCB Lighting ground floor (B10A)\n        │    ├── MCB Lighting first floor (B10A)\n        │    ├── MCB Sockets living room (B16A)\n        │    └── MCB Sockets hallway (B16A)\n        ├── RCD 30 mA #2 (Type A)\n        │    ├── MCB Sockets kitchen (B16A)\n        │    ├── MCB Oven (B20A)\n        │    ├── MCB Dishwasher (B16A)\n        │    └── MCB Sockets bedrooms (B16A)\n        └── RCD 30 mA #3 (Type A)\n             ├── MCB Washing machine (B16A)\n             ├── MCB Bathroom (B16A)\n             ├── MCB Outdoor (B16A)\n             └── MCB Garage (B16A)\n",[842,27000,26998],{"__ignoreMap":290},[11,27002,27003,27004,94],{},"With a three-phase connection (3N~400\u002F230 V) you need a 4-pole main switch and RCD, plus multi-pole circuit breakers for three-phase outgoing circuits. The differences between Belgian network types are explained in ",[23,27005,27006],{"href":18697},"single-phase or three-phase?",[385,27008,27010],{"id":27009},"what-the-arei-prescribes-for-the-protection-chain","What the AREI prescribes for the protection chain",[638,27012,27013,27023],{},[641,27014,27015],{},[644,27016,27017,27019,27021],{},[647,27018,7272],{},[647,27020,24062],{},[647,27022,9490],{},[657,27024,27025,27035,27044,27055,27064,27074],{},[644,27026,27027,27030,27033],{},[662,27028,27029],{},"Main switch",[662,27031,27032],{},"breaks all line conductors and, where applicable, the neutral at once; at least 40 A",[662,27034,12916],{},[644,27036,27037,27039,27042],{},[662,27038,26013],{},[662,27040,27041],{},"rated residual operating current at most 300 mA; provides the isolating function",[662,27043,12631],{},[644,27045,27046,27049,27052],{},[662,27047,27048],{},"All RCDs",[662,27050,27051],{},"at least Type A; at the origin a rated current of at least 40 A; disconnect all active conductors including N",[662,27053,27054],{},"5.3.5.3 a and c",[644,27056,27057,27059,27062],{},[662,27058,25999],{},[662,27060,27061],{},"directly after the origin; protects at least sockets, lighting, bathroom and washing machine, tumble dryer and dishwasher; at most eight final circuits",[662,27063,12631],{},[644,27065,27066,27069,27072],{},[662,27067,27068],{},"Fixed appliances",[662,27070,27071],{},"refrigeration, cooker, heating and other circuits not listed may sit directly behind the RCD at the origin",[662,27073,12631],{},[644,27075,27076,27079,27082],{},[662,27077,27078],{},"Electric wall heating > 25 V AC",[662,27080,27081],{},"its own RCD of at most 100 mA",[662,27083,12631],{},[11,27085,27086,27087,27089,27090,94],{},"Since version 07 of Book 1 (Royal Decree of 13 August 2026), the inspection body no longer seals the RCD at the origin from ",[35,27088,6763],{},"; the 300 mA requirement itself stays. Details are in ",[23,27091,27093],{"href":27092},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Frcd-sealing-abolished-2026","RCD sealing abolished",[385,27095,27097],{"id":27096},"if-the-earth-electrode-resistance-exceeds-30-ω","If the earth electrode resistance exceeds 30 Ω",[11,27099,27100,27101,27104],{},"If the dispersion resistance of the earth electrode exceeds 30 Ω, you plan at least ",[35,27102,27103],{},"two"," RCDs of high or very high sensitivity. Each covers at most sixteen single or multiple sockets. The remaining circuits at the origin get at least one additional RCD of at most 100 mA per circuit or group of circuits (4.2.4.3 b). Reserve space for these extra devices in the first draft if the earth measurement is still pending.",[385,27106,27108],{"id":27107},"rcd-types","RCD types",[638,27110,27111,27123],{},[641,27112,27113],{},[644,27114,27115,27118,27120],{},[647,27116,27117],{},"Type",[647,27119,25849],{},[647,27121,27122],{},"Design boundary",[657,27124,27125,27138,27151,27164],{},[644,27126,27127,27132,27135],{},[662,27128,27129],{},[35,27130,27131],{},"up to 300 mA, min. Type A",[662,27133,27134],{},"Protection at the origin of the dwelling",[662,27136,27137],{},"Rating and poles must fit; Type S is only one option where time selectivity is demonstrated",[644,27139,27140,27145,27148],{},[662,27141,27142],{},[35,27143,27144],{},"up to 30 mA, Type A",[662,27146,27147],{},"High- or very-high-sensitivity protection",[662,27149,27150],{},"For the circuits listed in 4.2.4.3 b; check additional equipment conditions in the manufacturer data",[644,27152,27153,27158,27161],{},[662,27154,27155],{},[35,27156,27157],{},"Type B",[662,27159,27160],{},"Also detects smooth DC residual currents",[662,27162,27163],{},"Only where the fault-current spectrum and equipment concept require it; not automatic for every charger or inverter",[644,27165,27166,27171,27174],{},[662,27167,27168],{},[35,27169,27170],{},"Type F",[662,27172,27173],{},"Detects specified mixed-frequency currents",[662,27175,27176],{},"Use only where the load, product standard and manufacturer documentation call for this characteristic",[11,27178,27179],{},"Equipment with semiconductors can produce disturbing DC components. Subsection 5.3.5.3, point f, lists several permitted solutions, including an RCD that keeps working with such faults or a DC fault-current detector installed in coordination with the RCD.",[385,27181,13029],{"id":27182},"selectivity",[11,27184,27185],{},"You demonstrate selectivity between upstream and downstream RCDs from sensitivity, time-current characteristics, manufacturer coordination data and the complete protection concept. A time-delayed device can be part of the solution; on its own it does not guarantee selectivity.",[27,27187,27189],{"id":27188},"step-3-distribute-the-groups-across-rows","Step 3: distribute the groups across rows",[385,27191,27193],{"id":27192},"arei-rule-at-most-8-final-circuits-per-30-ma-rcd","AREI rule: at most 8 final circuits per 30 mA RCD",[11,27195,27196,27197,27199],{},"Under subsection 4.2.4.3 b you connect at most ",[35,27198,9539],{}," to an RCD of high or very high sensitivity. Four to six circuits per device leaves headroom for later extensions.",[385,27201,27203],{"id":27202},"typical-row-allocation","Typical row allocation",[638,27205,27206,27215],{},[641,27207,27208],{},[644,27209,27210,27212],{},[647,27211,6039],{},[647,27213,27214],{},"Contents",[657,27216,27217,27227,27237,27247],{},[644,27218,27219,27224],{},[662,27220,27221],{},[35,27222,27223],{},"Row 1",[662,27225,27226],{},"Main switch, RCD at the origin (300 mA), SPD, possibly bell transformer",[644,27228,27229,27234],{},[662,27230,27231],{},[35,27232,27233],{},"Row 2",[662,27235,27236],{},"RCD #1 (30 mA) with its circuits (lighting and living-area sockets)",[644,27238,27239,27244],{},[662,27240,27241],{},[35,27242,27243],{},"Row 3",[662,27245,27246],{},"RCD #2 (30 mA) with its circuits (kitchen and bedrooms)",[644,27248,27249,27254],{},[662,27250,27251],{},[35,27252,27253],{},"Row 4",[662,27255,27256],{},"RCD #3 (30 mA) with its circuits (bathroom, outdoor, garage, utility)",[27,27258,27260],{"id":27259},"step-4-plan-spare-capacity","Step 4: plan spare capacity",[11,27262,27263,27264,94],{},"Plan free positions; 20 to 30% of the TE is proven practice, not an AREI requirement. With 20 circuit breakers that means at least four to six free TE. Close empty positions with ",[35,27265,27266],{},"blanking plates",[11,27268,27269],{},"You need spare capacity for:",[43,27271,27272,27275,27278],{},[46,27273,27274],{},"future loads such as an EV charger, air conditioning or a sauna,",[46,27276,27277],{},"redistribution when an RCD carries too many circuits,",[46,27279,27280],{},"avoiding a later board replacement.",[11,27282,27283],{},"Spare capacity is more than free TE: also plan free terminals, enough trunking, accessible N and PE bars, room for measurements and a documented direction of extension.",[27,27285,27287],{"id":27286},"example-4-row-board-for-a-single-family-home","Example: 4-row board for a single-family home",[11,27289,27290],{},"A complete example for a Belgian single-family home (3 bedrooms, 150 m², single-phase, no PV):",[385,27292,27294],{"id":27293},"row-1-supply-and-protection-18-te","Row 1 — Supply and protection (18 TE)",[638,27296,27297,27310],{},[641,27298,27299],{},[644,27300,27301,27303,27305,27307],{},[647,27302,2155],{},[647,27304,26685],{},[647,27306,26671],{},[647,27308,27309],{},"Function",[657,27311,27312,27324,27337,27348,27360],{},[644,27313,27314,27317,27320,27322],{},[662,27315,27316],{},"1–2",[662,27318,27319],{},"Main switch 2P",[662,27321,13737],{},[662,27323,12834],{},[644,27325,27326,27329,27332,27334],{},[662,27327,27328],{},"3–4",[662,27330,27331],{},"RCD 2P",[662,27333,13737],{},[662,27335,27336],{},"300 mA, Type A, 40 A",[644,27338,27339,27342,27344,27346],{},[662,27340,27341],{},"5–8",[662,27343,21227],{},[662,27345,17009],{},[662,27347,21890],{},[644,27349,27350,27353,27355,27357],{},[662,27351,27352],{},"9–10",[662,27354,26755],{},[662,27356,13737],{},[662,27358,27359],{},"8 V bell",[644,27361,27362,27365,27368,27370],{},[662,27363,27364],{},"11–18",[662,27366,27367],{},"Spare",[662,27369,21860],{},[662,27371,27372],{},"Blanking plates",[385,27374,27376],{"id":27375},"row-2-group-1-lighting-and-living-area-18-te","Row 2 — Group 1: lighting and living area (18 TE)",[638,27378,27379,27391],{},[641,27380,27381],{},[644,27382,27383,27385,27387,27389],{},[647,27384,2155],{},[647,27386,26685],{},[647,27388,26671],{},[647,27390,27309],{},[657,27392,27393,27405,27417,27428,27439,27451,27462,27473],{},[644,27394,27395,27397,27400,27402],{},[662,27396,27316],{},[662,27398,27399],{},"RCD 30 mA",[662,27401,13737],{},[662,27403,27404],{},"Type A",[644,27406,27407,27409,27412,27414],{},[662,27408,13753],{},[662,27410,27411],{},"MCB B10A",[662,27413,13705],{},[662,27415,27416],{},"Lighting ground floor",[644,27418,27419,27421,27423,27425],{},[662,27420,17009],{},[662,27422,27411],{},[662,27424,13705],{},[662,27426,27427],{},"Lighting first floor",[644,27429,27430,27432,27434,27436],{},[662,27431,21416],{},[662,27433,27411],{},[662,27435,13705],{},[662,27437,27438],{},"Lighting cellar\u002Foutdoor",[644,27440,27441,27443,27446,27448],{},[662,27442,21424],{},[662,27444,27445],{},"MCB B16A",[662,27447,13705],{},[662,27449,27450],{},"Sockets living room",[644,27452,27453,27455,27457,27459],{},[662,27454,21432],{},[662,27456,27445],{},[662,27458,13705],{},[662,27460,27461],{},"Sockets dining room",[644,27463,27464,27466,27468,27470],{},[662,27465,21860],{},[662,27467,27445],{},[662,27469,13705],{},[662,27471,27472],{},"Sockets hallway",[644,27474,27475,27478,27480,27482],{},[662,27476,27477],{},"9–18",[662,27479,27367],{},[662,27481,21887],{},[662,27483,27372],{},[385,27485,27487],{"id":27486},"row-3-group-2-kitchen-and-bedrooms-18-te","Row 3 — Group 2: kitchen and bedrooms (18 TE)",[638,27489,27490,27502],{},[641,27491,27492],{},[644,27493,27494,27496,27498,27500],{},[647,27495,2155],{},[647,27497,26685],{},[647,27499,26671],{},[647,27501,27309],{},[657,27503,27504,27514,27525,27537,27548,27559,27570,27581],{},[644,27505,27506,27508,27510,27512],{},[662,27507,27316],{},[662,27509,27399],{},[662,27511,13737],{},[662,27513,27404],{},[644,27515,27516,27518,27520,27522],{},[662,27517,13753],{},[662,27519,27445],{},[662,27521,13705],{},[662,27523,27524],{},"Sockets kitchen",[644,27526,27527,27529,27532,27534],{},[662,27528,17009],{},[662,27530,27531],{},"MCB B20A",[662,27533,13705],{},[662,27535,27536],{},"Oven (own circuit)",[644,27538,27539,27541,27543,27545],{},[662,27540,21416],{},[662,27542,27445],{},[662,27544,13705],{},[662,27546,27547],{},"Dishwasher (own circuit)",[644,27549,27550,27552,27554,27556],{},[662,27551,21424],{},[662,27553,27445],{},[662,27555,13705],{},[662,27557,27558],{},"Fridge (own circuit)",[644,27560,27561,27563,27565,27567],{},[662,27562,21432],{},[662,27564,27445],{},[662,27566,13705],{},[662,27568,27569],{},"Sockets bedroom 1",[644,27571,27572,27574,27576,27578],{},[662,27573,21860],{},[662,27575,27445],{},[662,27577,13705],{},[662,27579,27580],{},"Sockets bedrooms 2+3",[644,27582,27583,27585,27587,27589],{},[662,27584,27477],{},[662,27586,27367],{},[662,27588,21887],{},[662,27590,27372],{},[385,27592,27594],{"id":27593},"row-4-group-3-bathroom-outdoor-utility-18-te","Row 4 — Group 3: bathroom, outdoor, utility (18 TE)",[638,27596,27597,27609],{},[641,27598,27599],{},[644,27600,27601,27603,27605,27607],{},[647,27602,2155],{},[647,27604,26685],{},[647,27606,26671],{},[647,27608,27309],{},[657,27610,27611,27621,27632,27643,27654,27665,27676,27687],{},[644,27612,27613,27615,27617,27619],{},[662,27614,27316],{},[662,27616,27399],{},[662,27618,13737],{},[662,27620,27404],{},[644,27622,27623,27625,27627,27629],{},[662,27624,13753],{},[662,27626,27445],{},[662,27628,13705],{},[662,27630,27631],{},"Sockets bathroom",[644,27633,27634,27636,27638,27640],{},[662,27635,17009],{},[662,27637,27445],{},[662,27639,13705],{},[662,27641,27642],{},"Washing machine (own circuit)",[644,27644,27645,27647,27649,27651],{},[662,27646,21416],{},[662,27648,27445],{},[662,27650,13705],{},[662,27652,27653],{},"Tumble dryer (own circuit)",[644,27655,27656,27658,27660,27662],{},[662,27657,21424],{},[662,27659,27531],{},[662,27661,13705],{},[662,27663,27664],{},"Water heater (own circuit)",[644,27666,27667,27669,27671,27673],{},[662,27668,21432],{},[662,27670,27445],{},[662,27672,13705],{},[662,27674,27675],{},"Outdoor sockets",[644,27677,27678,27680,27682,27684],{},[662,27679,21860],{},[662,27681,27445],{},[662,27683,13705],{},[662,27685,27686],{},"Garage",[644,27688,27689,27691,27693,27695],{},[662,27690,27477],{},[662,27692,27367],{},[662,27694,21887],{},[662,27696,27372],{},[11,27698,27699,27702],{},[35,27700,27701],{},"Total: 18 circuit breakers (compact 1P+N), 4 RCDs, SPD, main switch and bell transformer = 34 of 72 TE used, 53% spare."," Each 30 mA RCD carries six final circuits and stays below the limit of eight. The hob and a future EV charger fit in the spare positions.",[27,27704,27706],{"id":27705},"common-mistakes-in-board-planning","Common mistakes in board planning",[638,27708,27709,27721],{},[641,27710,27711],{},[644,27712,27713,27716,27718],{},[647,27714,27715],{},"Mistake",[647,27717,17082],{},[647,27719,27720],{},"Solution",[657,27722,27723,27734,27745,27756,27767,27778,27789,27800],{},[644,27724,27725,27728,27731],{},[662,27726,27727],{},"Too few rows",[662,27729,27730],{},"No space, no thermal headroom",[662,27732,27733],{},"Size from module count, wiring and enclosure data",[644,27735,27736,27739,27742],{},[662,27737,27738],{},"Omitting the SPD without analysis",[662,27740,27741],{},"Protection concept remains unproven",[662,27743,27744],{},"Check applicability and selection for the project",[644,27746,27747,27750,27753],{},[662,27748,27749],{},"More than 8 final circuits per 30 mA RCD",[662,27751,27752],{},"Breach of 4.2.4.3 b",[662,27754,27755],{},"Add another RCD",[644,27757,27758,27761,27764],{},[662,27759,27760],{},"Missing labels",[662,27762,27763],{},"Breach of 3.1.3.1",[662,27765,27766],{},"Label every protective device (circuit identifier and function)",[644,27768,27769,27772,27775],{},[662,27770,27771],{},"No RCD at the origin",[662,27773,27774],{},"Protection chain at the origin incomplete",[662,27776,27777],{},"Provide a device of at most 300 mA, at least Type A and 40 A",[644,27779,27780,27783,27786],{},[662,27781,27782],{},"Choosing EV charger protection by default",[662,27784,27785],{},"DC fault protection may be insufficient",[662,27787,27788],{},"Check chapter 7.22, integrated DC detection and manufacturer data together",[644,27790,27791,27794,27797],{},[662,27792,27793],{},"Ignoring the earth resistance",[662,27795,27796],{},"Too few RCDs above 30 Ω",[662,27798,27799],{},"Wait for the earth measurement or reserve space for extra devices",[644,27801,27802,27805,27808],{},[662,27803,27804],{},"No usable spare capacity",[662,27806,27807],{},"Extension becomes unnecessarily complex",[662,27809,27810],{},"Plan module, terminal and wiring reserve per project",[27,27812,27814],{"id":27813},"labelling-and-documentation","Labelling and documentation",[11,27816,27817],{},"Subsection 3.1.3.1 requires control, protective and isolating devices to be labelled clearly, conspicuously and indelibly. The board itself carries its own identifier and the supply voltage (3.1.3.3). Label each protective device with:",[43,27819,27820,27823,27826],{},[46,27821,27822],{},"the circuit identifier, identical to the single-line diagram and situation plan (on the single-line diagram a capital letter identifies the circuit, 3.1.2.1),",[46,27824,27825],{},"the function, for example “Lighting ground floor” or “Sockets kitchen”,",[46,27827,27828],{},"optionally the room or floor.",[11,27830,27831],{},"Use a label strip or stick the overview inside the door; most manufacturers supply writable inserts.",[27,27833,27835],{"id":27834},"from-a-layout-sketch-to-an-executable-design","From a layout sketch to an executable design",[11,27837,27838],{},"Counting modules is the spatial starting point. Before ordering, the electrician checks the connection data, earthing system, prospective short-circuit current, selectivity or back-up protection and the manufacturer approvals for combined devices. You therefore never copy rated current, breaking capacity or cross-section from an example without checking. Power dissipation in the closed enclosure, ambient temperature, ventilation and permitted terminal loading also shape the choice.",[11,27840,27841],{},"Work row by row. Record supply, main isolation, residual-current protection and surge protection as a traceable protection chain. Then arrange the final circuits, but do not mistake a visually tidy row for electrical selectivity. With PV, a battery, a generator or charging infrastructure, show clearly from which direction energy can flow and which parts may remain energised with the grid switched off. Manufacturer documents for the RCD, SPD, inverter or EV charger are binding design inputs.",[11,27843,27844],{},"Before export you align three levels: the physical occupancy of the board, the protection chain in the single-line diagram and the circuit identifiers on the situation plan show the same state. Book 1 V06 requires schemas, plans and documents to carry an unambiguous number, version and version date (section 3.1.2). For domestic installations, the name, capacity and VAT number (if applicable) of the person responsible and the installation address also appear on the single-line diagram and situation plan (3.1.2.1 a).",[27,27846,27848],{"id":27847},"board-handover-record","Board handover record",[11,27850,27851],{},"Before closing the cover, record for every outgoing circuit its identifier, purpose, number of poles, protective device, rated current, cable data and associated RCD. For controllable loads, add contactor, control circuit and manual operation. For multi-phase outgoing circuits, document the phases used; for single-phase circuits, a phase list helps you spot later imbalance. Check that each neutral is assigned to the correct RCD and that protective-conductor terminals stay accessible.",[11,27853,27854],{},"A photo complements the structured data but does not replace it. Terminal markings match the diagram and the label strip. Only record tightening torques or thermal follow-up checks when they come from manufacturer instructions or an execution record.",[11,27856,27857],{},"Also check mechanical accessibility: covers can still be fitted, conductors do not run in front of operating devices and measuring points remain reachable. Record separate N bars, links and supplies traceably. A spare position without a safe connection option is not usable spare capacity.",[11,27859,27860],{},"Keep the approved PDF together with the inspection report, measurement records and relevant data sheets in the installation file. When you extend later, do not overwrite the old file: increase the version, set a new version date and describe the change. That keeps it traceable which drawing showed the real board at which inspection.",[27,27862,27864],{"id":27863},"planning-the-board-in-planelec","Planning the board in PlanElec",[11,27866,27867,27868,94],{},"In the PlanElec Board Editor you place modules on DIN rails, automatically or by hand; enclosure suggestions take recorded module widths, spare capacity and accessories into account. For existing installations, PlanElec recognises visible DIN modules in photos and turns them into a layout proposal you review. The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check flags, among other things, an overfilled board, more than eight final circuits on a 30 mA RCD, a missing RCD at the origin, a main switch or main RCD below 40 A and socket circuits without 30 mA protection; less than 20% spare capacity appears as a tip. Measurements, manufacturer evidence and the inspection by the recognised inspection body remain separate steps. The rules covered are listed in ",[23,27869,3459],{"href":2953},[27,27871,27873],{"id":27872},"official-basis","Official basis",[43,27875,27876,27882],{},[46,27877,27878],{},[23,27879,27881],{"href":4466,"rel":27880},[4434],"FPS Economy: RGIE\u002FAREI, Book 1",[46,27883,27884],{},"Book 1 V06: sections 3.1.2 and 3.1.3 (schemas, plans, labelling), subsections 4.2.4.3, 4.4.1.4, 5.2.1.2, 5.3.5.1 to 5.3.5.3; sealing abolished by version 07 from 01.11.2026.",[27,27886,5054],{"id":4477},[43,27888,27889,27894,27898,27903],{},[46,27890,27891],{},[23,27892,27893],{"href":8154},"Creating a single-line diagram",[46,27895,27896],{},[23,27897,20605],{"href":20604},[46,27899,27900],{},[23,27901,27902],{"href":8687},"Cable cross-section and breaker: the right combination",[46,27904,27905],{},[23,27906,27907],{"href":15913},"PV system in the diagram",[11,27909,27910],{},[23,27911,27912],{"href":17817},"Plan your board in the PlanElec Board Editor and check it yourself →",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":27914},[27915,27921,27922,27929,27933,27934,27940,27941,27942,27943,27944,27945,27946],{"id":26648,"depth":291,"text":26649,"children":27916},[27917,27918,27919,27920],{"id":23320,"depth":599,"text":617},{"id":26664,"depth":599,"text":26665},{"id":26770,"depth":599,"text":26771},{"id":26848,"depth":599,"text":26849},{"id":26855,"depth":291,"text":26856},{"id":26982,"depth":291,"text":26983,"children":27923},[27924,27925,27926,27927,27928],{"id":26993,"depth":599,"text":26994},{"id":27009,"depth":599,"text":27010},{"id":27096,"depth":599,"text":27097},{"id":27107,"depth":599,"text":27108},{"id":27182,"depth":599,"text":13029},{"id":27188,"depth":291,"text":27189,"children":27930},[27931,27932],{"id":27192,"depth":599,"text":27193},{"id":27202,"depth":599,"text":27203},{"id":27259,"depth":291,"text":27260},{"id":27286,"depth":291,"text":27287,"children":27935},[27936,27937,27938,27939],{"id":27293,"depth":599,"text":27294},{"id":27375,"depth":599,"text":27376},{"id":27486,"depth":599,"text":27487},{"id":27593,"depth":599,"text":27594},{"id":27705,"depth":291,"text":27706},{"id":27813,"depth":291,"text":27814},{"id":27834,"depth":291,"text":27835},{"id":27847,"depth":291,"text":27848},{"id":27863,"depth":291,"text":27864},{"id":27872,"depth":291,"text":27873},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":5054},"2026-04-07","Plan a distribution board under the AREI\u002FRGIE: main switch, 300 mA and 30 mA RCDs, at most 8 circuits per 30 mA RCD, row allocation, spare capacity and a complete example for a single-family home.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fdistribution-board-planning.en",{"title":26636,"description":27948},"Distribution Board Planning: Layout and Sizing (AREI)","distribution-board-planning-guide","blog\u002Fdistribution-board-planning.en",[318,27956,617,7237,2587,1979,27957,27958],"consumer unit","planning","single-family home","mvki01oKIXoKbD-0e1uez4We9I3XsL2PIQtvQE5xGq0",{"id":27961,"title":27962,"articleId":27963,"body":27964,"category":5101,"date":28679,"description":28680,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":28681,"navigation":308,"path":28682,"publishDate":28679,"readTime":11041,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":28683,"seoTitle":28684,"slug":28685,"stem":28686,"tags":28687,"__hash__":28691},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fdraw-situation-plan.en.md","Draw a Situation Plan: Step-by-Step Guide According to AREI\u002FRGIE","draw-situation-plan",{"type":8,"value":27965,"toc":28653},[27966,27975,27991,27994,27996,28000,28004,28007,28029,28032,28036,28039,28142,28144,28148,28156,28163,28165,28169,28172,28176,28208,28211,28230,28232,28249,28253,28256,28260,28285,28287,28291,28294,28298,28301,28305,28309,28359,28362,28365,28376,28378,28382,28385,28411,28413,28415,28507,28509,28513,28570,28574,28577,28580,28583,28587,28590,28593,28597,28600,28603,28605,28616,28618,28620,28641,28643],[11,27967,27968,27971,27972,94],{},[35,27969,27970],{},"You draw a situation plan in five steps: prepare the floor plan to scale, choose symbols from AREI\u002FRGIE Table 2.23, place every point at its real position, mark each point with the circuit letter and number from the single-line diagram, and finish the plan with a legend and title block."," For new domestic installations and for substantial modifications or extensions, it is one of the required plans together with the single-line diagram (AREI\u002FRGIE 3.1.2.1 a). The regulation calls it a position plan; in French it is the ",[7299,27973,27974],{},"plan de position",[15,27976,27977],{},[11,27978,27979,27982,27983,27986,27987,27990],{},[35,27980,27981],{},"In short:"," the single-line diagram shows the ",[7299,27984,27985],{},"electrical structure"," (which protective device supplies which circuit, which switch controls which lighting point). The situation plan shows the ",[7299,27988,27989],{},"physical position"," of each component on the floor plan.",[11,27992,27993],{},"This guide takes you step by step to a checkable situation plan. At the inspection, the approved control body assesses the complete dossier and the installed work.",[4473,27995],{},[27,27997,27999],{"id":27998},"step-1-prepare-the-floor-plan","Step 1: Prepare the floor plan",[385,28001,28003],{"id":28002},"dimensions-and-scale","Dimensions and scale",[11,28005,28006],{},"The floor plan is the basis of your situation plan. You take it from the building plans or draw it yourself.",[43,28008,28009,28016,28022],{},[46,28010,28011,28012,28015],{},"Use a ",[35,28013,28014],{},"consistent scale"," (common: 1:50 or 1:100). AREI\u002FRGIE defines a plan as a to-scale representation of where the parts of the installation are (Chapter 2.12); it does not prescribe a particular ratio.",[46,28017,28018,28019,94],{},"Draw all ",[35,28020,28021],{},"walls, doors and windows",[46,28023,28024,28025,28028],{},"Mark the ",[35,28026,28027],{},"opening direction"," of doors (quarter circle); it determines where the switch logically goes.",[11,28030,28031],{},"In PlanElec, you import an existing plan as an image, PDF or DXF and calibrate the scale, or you let PlanElec recognise walls and rooms from a PDF or scan as an editable proposal. Without a confirmed scale, PlanElec does not adopt a recognised floor plan.",[385,28033,28035],{"id":28034},"label-the-rooms","Label the rooms",[11,28037,28038],{},"Give every room a clear name. An abbreviation helps where space is tight:",[638,28040,28041,28054],{},[641,28042,28043],{},[644,28044,28045,28048,28051],{},[647,28046,28047],{},"Code",[647,28049,28050],{},"Room",[647,28052,28053],{},"What to watch when drawing",[657,28055,28056,28067,28077,28088,28099,28110,28120,28131],{},[644,28057,28058,28061,28064],{},[662,28059,28060],{},"LR",[662,28062,28063],{},"Living room",[662,28065,28066],{},"sockets at their real wall position, lighting points, switches",[644,28068,28069,28072,28074],{},[662,28070,28071],{},"KI",[662,28073,89],{},[662,28075,28076],{},"fixed appliances such as hob, oven and dishwasher shown separately",[644,28078,28079,28082,28085],{},[662,28080,28081],{},"BR",[662,28083,28084],{},"Bedroom",[662,28086,28087],{},"sockets at their real position, lighting point and switch at the door",[644,28089,28090,28093,28096],{},[662,28091,28092],{},"BA",[662,28094,28095],{},"Bathroom",[662,28097,28098],{},"zones 0, 1 and 2 and the position of every socket relative to them",[644,28100,28101,28104,28107],{},[662,28102,28103],{},"HA",[662,28105,28106],{},"Hall",[662,28108,28109],{},"two-way or intermediate switching with every control point",[644,28111,28112,28115,28117],{},[662,28113,28114],{},"GA",[662,28116,27686],{},[662,28118,28119],{},"EV charger, outdoor sockets, board if located there",[644,28121,28122,28125,28128],{},[662,28123,28124],{},"CE",[662,28126,28127],{},"Cellar",[662,28129,28130],{},"board, meter, equipment such as heat pump or water heater",[644,28132,28133,28136,28139],{},[662,28134,28135],{},"OU",[662,28137,28138],{},"Outdoor",[662,28140,28141],{},"outdoor lights and sockets, outdoor units",[4473,28143],{},[27,28145,28147],{"id":28146},"step-2-use-areirgie-symbols","Step 2: Use AREI\u002FRGIE symbols",[11,28149,28150,28152,28153,94],{},[35,28151,7434],{}," in Chapter 2.13 is the official, non-exhaustive symbol list for the single-line diagram and situation plan. If a component has no symbol there, you use another clearly identifiable sign and define it in the legend (3.1.2.1 a). The full overview is in ",[23,28154,28155],{"href":8166},"AREI electrical symbols",[15,28157,28158],{},[11,28159,28160,28162],{},[35,28161,21167],{}," for common components, use the Table 2.23 symbols. Custom symbols must be unambiguous and appear in the legend; an unexplained symbol does not meet 3.1.2.1 a.",[4473,28164],{},[27,28166,28168],{"id":28167},"step-3-place-the-components","Step 3: Place the components",[11,28170,28171],{},"Now place the symbols on the floor plan. Subsection 3.1.2.3 a requires the location of boards, junction and branch boxes, socket outlets, lighting points, switches, fixed appliances and sources shown on the single-line diagram.",[385,28173,28175],{"id":28174},"socket-outlets","Socket outlets",[43,28177,28178,28184,28190,28196,28202],{},[46,28179,28180,28183],{},[35,28181,28182],{},"On the wall",", at the actual position.",[46,28185,28186,28189],{},[35,28187,28188],{},"Kitchen:"," record worktop sockets and fixed appliances individually; number and dedicated circuits follow from use and design.",[46,28191,28192,28195],{},[35,28193,28194],{},"Living areas:"," draw every planned or existing socket; AREI\u002FRGIE does not prescribe a minimum number per floor area.",[46,28197,28198,28201],{},[35,28199,28200],{},"Bathroom:"," low-voltage sockets are allowed from zone 2 at the earliest, and only when protected by a very-high-sensitivity residual-current device (≤ 10 mA) or individually by an isolating transformer of no more than 100 W (7.1.5.2 d); otherwise they sit outside the zones. Zone 2 exists only for a bath; it is not defined for a shower (7.1.3.2 no. 3 b).",[46,28203,28204,28207],{},[35,28205,28206],{},"Outdoors:"," choose the IP rating to suit the real external influences; as indoors, socket outlets not intended for fixed appliances sit behind the additional RCD of ≤ 30 mA (4.2.4.3 b).",[385,28209,28210],{"id":2444},"Switches",[43,28212,28213,28219,28227],{},[46,28214,28215,28218],{},[35,28216,28217],{},"Next to the door"," on the opening side, typically around 105 cm (common practice; Book 1 sets no fixed switch height).",[46,28220,28221,28224,28225,94],{},[35,28222,28223],{},"Two-way switches"," in rooms with several entrances and at the top and bottom of stairs; with three or more control points, add an intermediate switch. More in ",[23,28226,14783],{"href":7782},[46,28228,28229],{},"The reference shows the link to the light: the switch carries the letter of its circuit and the number of the lighting point it controls (3.1.2.1 a). A dashed line is an extra reading aid.",[385,28231,9090],{"id":5112},[43,28233,28234,28240,28246],{},[46,28235,28236,28239],{},[35,28237,28238],{},"Ceiling lights"," at their planned position, otherwise in the centre of the room.",[46,28241,28242,28245],{},[35,28243,28244],{},"Wall lights"," at the wall position.",[46,28247,28248],{},"Draw every planned or existing lighting point; their number follows from use and design.",[385,28250,28252],{"id":28251},"keep-smoke-detectors-separate","Keep smoke detectors separate",[11,28254,28255],{},"You can add smoke detectors as extra building information. The obligation comes from regional building and housing law and varies by region and use; check it against the current competent source. It is not part of the mandatory AREI\u002FRGIE position-plan content, so you keep it clearly separate from the circuit references on the plan.",[385,28257,28259],{"id":28258},"special-loads","Special loads",[43,28261,28262,28267,28273,28279],{},[46,28263,28264,28266],{},[35,28265,19114],{}," in the garage or on an outside wall, on its own circuit.",[46,28268,28269,28272],{},[35,28270,28271],{},"Water heater \u002F instantaneous heater:"," record position, power and connection method; you define the circuit from the appliance requirements and applicable rules.",[46,28274,28275,28278],{},[35,28276,28277],{},"Heat pump \u002F air conditioning:"," mark the outdoor and indoor unit.",[46,28280,28281,28284],{},[35,28282,28283],{},"PV system:"," draw the inverter and any battery as sources (3.1.2.3 a).",[4473,28286],{},[27,28288,28290],{"id":28289},"step-4-follow-references-between-both-plans","Step 4: Follow references between both plans",[11,28292,28293],{},"Each elementary circuit gets a capital letter, each point a sequence number counted from the protective device. On the situation plan, every point carries the same combination as on the single-line diagram. Writing only the circuit letter next to every device is not enough: the number is what makes each point unambiguous.",[385,28295,28297],{"id":28296},"fictitious-product-example-finding-the-same-consumers","Fictitious product example: finding the same consumers",[11,28299,28300],{},"The two real product views show the same demonstration project at two working stages. They explain the link; warnings from the example state are still visible in the diagram.",[73,28302],{":height":75,":width":76,"alt":28303,"caption":28304,"src":79},"Situation plan of the fictitious project showing C1, E1, F1 and G1.","On the fictitious floor plan you find E1, F1 and G1 in the building. C1 connects the switch to its associated lighting point.",[73,28306],{":height":3121,":width":76,"alt":28307,"caption":28308,"src":3437},"Derived single-line diagram of the fictitious project showing circuits C, E, F and G.","The derived diagram shows the corresponding circuits and points. Visible warnings mark a working version still under review.",[638,28310,28311,28324],{},[641,28312,28313],{},[644,28314,28315,28318,28321],{},[647,28316,28317],{},"Reference on the floor plan",[647,28319,28320],{},"Entry in the diagram",[647,28322,28323],{},"Check on site",[657,28325,28326,28337,28348],{},[644,28327,28328,28331,28334],{},[662,28329,28330],{},"E1",[662,28332,28333],{},"E, point 1: oven",[662,28335,28336],{},"appliance identity and real connection point",[644,28338,28339,28342,28345],{},[662,28340,28341],{},"F1",[662,28343,28344],{},"F, point 1: dishwasher",[662,28346,28347],{},"connection point and documented assignment",[644,28349,28350,28353,28356],{},[662,28351,28352],{},"G1",[662,28354,28355],{},"G, point 1: washing machine",[662,28357,28358],{},"appliance and position in the room",[11,28360,28361],{},"In the example, C1 appears at the switch and at the associated lighting point: both refer to the same switched lighting point. The repeated reference is intentional here, not a duplicate error. Check the switching relationship before renumbering.",[11,28363,28364],{},"If you move a device, check its position and electrical assignment separately. If it changes circuit, update the reference in both documents. After additions, a second person traces floor plan, diagram and board labels by sampling.",[43,28366,28367,28371],{},[46,28368,28369],{},[23,28370,1987],{"href":4388},[46,28372,28373],{},[23,28374,28375],{"href":287},"Plan the installation and distribution boards",[4473,28377],{},[27,28379,28381],{"id":28380},"step-5-legend-and-title-block","Step 5: Legend and title block",[11,28383,28384],{},"Complete your plan with:",[43,28386,28387,28393,28399,28405],{},[46,28388,28389,28392],{},[35,28390,28391],{},"a legend"," listing every symbol used and its meaning, especially custom signs;",[46,28394,28395,28398],{},[35,28396,28397],{},"a title block"," with the AREI\u002FRGIE required details: number, revision and revision date (3.1.2), installation address, and the name, capacity and, where applicable, VAT number of the person responsible for the work (3.1.2.1 a); plus the scale and space for signature and endorsement;",[46,28400,28401,28404],{},[35,28402,28403],{},"a north arrow"," (optional but useful);",[46,28406,28407,28410],{},[35,28408,28409],{},"storey identification"," for buildings with several levels; one sheet per storey stays most readable.",[4473,28412],{},[27,28414,18774],{"id":18773},[638,28416,28417,28428],{},[641,28418,28419],{},[644,28420,28421,28423,28425],{},[647,28422,27715],{},[647,28424,17082],{},[647,28426,28427],{},"Fix",[657,28429,28430,28441,28452,28463,28474,28485,28496],{},[644,28431,28432,28435,28438],{},[662,28433,28434],{},"treating the smoke-detector duty as an AREI rule",[662,28436,28437],{},"wrong basis for the check",[662,28439,28440],{},"check separately against the current regional source and label it",[644,28442,28443,28446,28449],{},[662,28444,28445],{},"treating an outdoor socket generically",[662,28447,28448],{},"IP rating or protection does not suit the external influences",[662,28450,28451],{},"check IP rating and RCD protection for the project",[644,28453,28454,28457,28460],{},[662,28455,28456],{},"missing labels or circuit numbers",[662,28458,28459],{},"points cannot be linked to the diagram",[662,28461,28462],{},"mark every point with letter and number",[644,28464,28465,28468,28471],{},[662,28466,28467],{},"unexplained symbols",[662,28469,28470],{},"does not meet 3.1.2.1 a",[662,28472,28473],{},"use Table 2.23; choose unambiguous custom signs and explain them in the legend",[644,28475,28476,28479,28482],{},[662,28477,28478],{},"switch on the wrong side of the door",[662,28480,28481],{},"impractical (not an AREI breach)",[662,28483,28484],{},"check the opening direction",[644,28486,28487,28490,28493],{},[662,28488,28489],{},"bathroom socket drawn in the wrong zone",[662,28491,28492],{},"plan and installation lead to a safety-relevant finding",[662,28494,28495],{},"check zones and protection against Chapter 7.1",[644,28497,28498,28501,28504],{},[662,28499,28500],{},"no legend",[662,28502,28503],{},"custom signs cannot be read",[662,28505,28506],{},"add a symbol table",[4473,28508],{},[27,28510,28512],{"id":28511},"checklist-before-the-inspection","Checklist before the inspection",[43,28514,28516,28522,28528,28534,28540,28546,28552,28558,28564],{"className":28515},[15704],[46,28517,28519,28521],{"className":28518},[15708],[7009,28520],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," All rooms labelled",[46,28523,28525,28527],{"className":28524},[15708],[7009,28526],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," All boards, boxes, sockets, switches, lighting points, fixed appliances and sources drawn",[46,28529,28531,28533],{"className":28530},[15708],[7009,28532],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Smoke detectors, if shown, checked separately and labelled",[46,28535,28537,28539],{"className":28536},[15708],[7009,28538],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Outdoor sockets recorded with project-specific IP rating and protection",[46,28541,28543,28545],{"className":28542},[15708],[7009,28544],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Circuit letter and number at every point",[46,28547,28549,28551],{"className":28548},[15708],[7009,28550],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," References match the single-line diagram",[46,28553,28555,28557],{"className":28554},[15708],[7009,28556],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Table 2.23 symbols, custom signs in the legend",[46,28559,28561,28563],{"className":28560},[15708],[7009,28562],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," Title block with number, revision, date, address and responsible person",[46,28565,28567,28569],{"className":28566},[15708],[7009,28568],{"disabled":308,"type":15711}," One sheet per storey",[27,28571,28573],{"id":28572},"site-check-does-the-plan-match-the-building","Site check: does the plan match the building?",[11,28575,28576],{},"Once drawn, walk through the building with the plan. Start at the board and follow every circuit. Check not only that a socket exists, but that multiple socket, switched socket, junction box, fixed connection and lighting point are correctly distinguished. For switches, the reference must show which lighting point or appliance they control. Devices behind built-in furniture, outdoor elements, plant rooms and outbuildings are easily missed.",[11,28578,28579],{},"Then compare with the single-line diagram. An item referenced A3 on the situation plan appears there as the same item in circuit A. Contradictory assignments and devices moved after the fact are the most common causes of contradictory documents. For several storeys or building parts, a clear sheet structure helps; number, revision and revision date appear on every issued plan.",[11,28581,28582],{},"The situation plan shows the real state, not just the original intent. Mark a change as complete only once cable route and device position have been checked on site. For a non-substantial change, a short description is enough for the single-line diagram; you still draw the change on the situation plan (3.1.2.1 a). For substantial modifications or extensions, you create or update the single-line diagram and situation plan, and the affected work is inspected before it is put into use.",[27,28584,28586],{"id":28585},"what-the-plan-does-not-decide","What the plan does not decide",[11,28588,28589],{},"A symbol proves neither mounting height, IP rating, bathroom zone, earthing quality nor disconnection time. You establish those properties with on-site checks, measurements and manufacturer documentation. Smoke-detector duties come from regional building and housing law; the plan may show detectors, but the electrical inspection and regional requirements remain separate questions.",[11,28591,28592],{},"PlanElec keeps device position and electrical assignment together in one project model. Items not yet placed, not assigned to a circuit or imported only as a reference stay visibly open. The advisory self-check shows you errors in the supported rules; the official assessment is made by the approved control body.",[385,28594,28596],{"id":28595},"prepare-readability-for-the-inspection","Prepare readability for the inspection",[11,28598,28599],{},"Export the plan once at the intended sheet size. Symbols, references and room boundaries stay distinguishable without heavy zooming. Offset overlapping references and connect them with a clear leader line. Colour helps while editing but never carries meaning on its own, because printouts are often black and white.",[11,28601,28602],{},"Keep a list of open items for inaccessible boxes, unknown switching relationships or assumed cable routes. You resolve those before the final revision or mark them visibly as unknown. A clearly marked data gap is more honest than a symbol at an estimated position. Finally, have a second person trace references between situation plan, single-line diagram and board labels by sampling.",[27,28604,19881],{"id":19880},[43,28606,28607,28613],{},[46,28608,28609],{},[23,28610,28612],{"href":4466,"rel":28611},[4434],"FPS Economy: RGIE\u002FAREI Book 1, current official publication",[46,28614,28615],{},"Decisive are Book 1 V06, Chapter 2.12 (definition of a plan), Section 3.1.2 (content and referencing), Table 2.23 (symbols) and Chapter 7.1 (rooms with a bath or shower).",[4473,28617],{},[27,28619,5054],{"id":4477},[43,28621,28622,28627,28632,28636],{},[46,28623,28624],{},[23,28625,28626],{"href":8154},"Creating a single-line diagram: step by step",[46,28628,28629],{},[23,28630,28631],{"href":13313},"Single-line diagram vs situation plan",[46,28633,28634],{},[23,28635,7197],{"href":7093},[46,28637,28638],{},[23,28639,28640],{"href":8775},"Distribution board planning: structure and sizing",[4473,28642],{},[11,28644,28645],{},[7299,28646,2599,28647,28649,28650],{},[35,28648,3710],{},", you draw your situation plan directly on the floor plan: create rooms, place devices from the symbol catalogue, assign them to circuits and export the situation plan together with the single-line diagram as PDF. ",[23,28651,28652],{"href":17817},"Start free →",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":28654},[28655,28659,28660,28667,28670,28671,28672,28673,28674,28677,28678],{"id":27998,"depth":291,"text":27999,"children":28656},[28657,28658],{"id":28002,"depth":599,"text":28003},{"id":28034,"depth":599,"text":28035},{"id":28146,"depth":291,"text":28147},{"id":28167,"depth":291,"text":28168,"children":28661},[28662,28663,28664,28665,28666],{"id":28174,"depth":599,"text":28175},{"id":2444,"depth":599,"text":28210},{"id":5112,"depth":599,"text":9090},{"id":28251,"depth":599,"text":28252},{"id":28258,"depth":599,"text":28259},{"id":28289,"depth":291,"text":28290,"children":28668},[28669],{"id":28296,"depth":599,"text":28297},{"id":28380,"depth":291,"text":28381},{"id":18773,"depth":291,"text":18774},{"id":28511,"depth":291,"text":28512},{"id":28572,"depth":291,"text":28573},{"id":28585,"depth":291,"text":28586,"children":28675},[28676],{"id":28595,"depth":599,"text":28596},{"id":19880,"depth":291,"text":19881},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":5054},"2026-03-30","How to draw a checkable situation plan under AREI\u002FRGIE: floor plan, Table 2.23 symbols, circuit references matching the single-line diagram, legend, title block and a final site check.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fdraw-situation-plan.en",{"title":27962,"description":28680},"Draw a Situation Plan: Step-by-Step Guide (AREI\u002FRGIE)","draw-situation-plan-guide","blog\u002Fdraw-situation-plan.en",[317,1979,28688,5101,28689,28690,316],"symbols","drawing","electrical plan","NcSQ7P6qTNIVyQzjb0eGsF3ZAs-CP7eFxWzs7pFM4Qw",{"id":28693,"title":28694,"articleId":28695,"body":28696,"category":8819,"date":28978,"description":28979,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":28980,"navigation":308,"path":28981,"publishDate":28978,"readTime":3670,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":28982,"seoTitle":28983,"slug":28695,"stem":28984,"tags":28985,"__hash__":28990},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fpreflex-vs-open-wiring.en.md","Preflex vs. Open Wiring: Which Cable Method for Your Project?","preflex-vs-open-wiring",{"type":8,"value":28697,"toc":28969},[28698,28704,28708,28711,28714,28718,28800,28804,28807,28845,28848,28852,28855,28859,28862,28882,28885,28889,28921,28930,28932,28951,28961],[11,28699,28700,28703],{},[35,28701,28702],{},"In new builds, Preflex with VOB wires is the Belgian standard: the conduits go onto the slab or into the walls during the shell phase, and the wires stay replaceable later. In renovations, XVB cable without conduit is usually the faster option, in a wall chase, surface-mounted or in a cavity."," The AREI\u002FRGIE permits both methods; it governs how you carry them out.",[27,28705,28707],{"id":28706},"what-is-preflex","What is Preflex?",[11,28709,28710],{},"In Belgium, Preflex is the common name for flexible corrugated plastic electrical conduit. It comes empty or with factory-pulled VOB wires. In new builds, it is laid during the shell phase on the concrete slab, in the screed or in wall chases, and then cast in or plastered over.",[11,28712,28713],{},"Open wiring here means cables without conduit, usually XVB: directly in a chase under plaster, surface-mounted, on a cable tray or in building cavities.",[27,28715,28717],{"id":28716},"preflex-and-open-wiring-compared","Preflex and open wiring compared",[638,28719,28720,28732],{},[641,28721,28722],{},[644,28723,28724,28726,28729],{},[647,28725,3707],{},[647,28727,28728],{},"Preflex with VOB wires",[647,28730,28731],{},"Open wiring with XVB",[657,28733,28734,28745,28756,28767,28778,28789],{},[644,28735,28736,28739,28742],{},[662,28737,28738],{},"Conductor type",[662,28740,28741],{},"Single-core wire (H07V-U\u002F-R) in conduit",[662,28743,28744],{},"Sheathed cable",[644,28746,28747,28750,28753],{},[662,28748,28749],{},"Typical use",[662,28751,28752],{},"New build, major renovation",[662,28754,28755],{},"Renovation, basement, plant room, extension",[644,28757,28758,28761,28764],{},[662,28759,28760],{},"Replacing wires later",[662,28762,28763],{},"yes, wires must remain pullable at all times (5.2.9.3)",[662,28765,28766],{},"only by opening up or using a new route",[644,28768,28769,28772,28775],{},[662,28770,28771],{},"Surface mounting",[662,28773,28774],{},"only the conduit, not the bare wire (5.2.9.5)",[662,28776,28777],{},"yes (5.2.9.5)",[644,28779,28780,28783,28786],{},[662,28781,28782],{},"Directly in a chase",[662,28784,28785],{},"not applicable",[662,28787,28788],{},"yes, within the installation zones (5.2.9.10)",[644,28790,28791,28794,28797],{},[662,28792,28793],{},"Material",[662,28795,28796],{},"conduit plus each wire separately",[662,28798,28799],{},"one cable with all cores",[27,28801,28803],{"id":28802},"what-the-arei-requires-for-conduits","What the AREI requires for conduits",[11,28805,28806],{},"Subsection 5.2.9.3 governs installation in electrical conduits:",[43,28808,28809,28815,28821,28827,28833,28839],{},[46,28810,28811,28814],{},[35,28812,28813],{},"Diameter:"," conduits and fittings sized so that conductors can easily be pulled in and removed after installation (letter d).",[46,28816,28817,28820],{},[35,28818,28819],{},"Bending radius:"," at least eight times the outside diameter for flexible thermoplastic conduit (letter e).",[46,28822,28823,28826],{},[35,28824,28825],{},"No joints in the conduit:"," connections belong in pull or junction boxes on a suitable terminal block (letter f).",[46,28828,28829,28832],{},[35,28830,28831],{},"Combustible conduit:"," permitted only if embedded at least 3 cm deep in non-combustible materials (letter f).",[46,28834,28835,28838],{},[35,28836,28837],{},"Heat:"," no thermoplastic conduit where the temperature can exceed 60 °C in normal operation (letter f).",[46,28840,28841,28844],{},[35,28842,28843],{},"Embedded conduit:"," no tees or elbows; conductors remain accessible in the boxes (letter i.2).",[11,28846,28847],{},"The AREI sets no fill limit as a percentage. The test is that conductors can be pulled in and removed at any time.",[27,28849,28851],{"id":28850},"what-the-arei-requires-for-open-wiring","What the AREI requires for open wiring",[11,28853,28854],{},"Wiring embedded without conduit must be cable; conductors with basic insulation only are prohibited there (5.2.9.10). In the walls of rooms, installation zones apply: horizontal runs 25 to 35 cm below the ceiling or above the floor, vertical runs as close as possible to a corner or 10 to 20 cm beside door frames, and at least 0.4 cm of plaster cover. In concrete or cement, you need at least 3 cm of cover.",[27,28856,28858],{"id":28857},"which-fire-class-do-you-need","Which fire class do you need?",[11,28860,28861],{},"What counts is the CPR class of the cable, not of the conduit:",[43,28863,28864,28870,28876],{},[46,28865,28866,28869],{},[35,28867,28868],{},"Installed singly:"," at least F1 or class Eca (5.2.7.2).",[46,28871,28872,28875],{},[35,28873,28874],{},"In bundles or flat formation:"," at least F2 or class Cca (5.2.7.3).",[46,28877,28878,28881],{},[35,28879,28880],{},"In building cavities:"," also F2 or Cca (4.3.3.5 b and 5.2.9.9). A timber-frame or plasterboard stud wall is a building cavity.",[11,28883,28884],{},"Cables and conduits embedded at least 3 cm deep in non-combustible cladding are exempt (5.2.7.1 no. 3). If the Preflex conduit sits at least 3 cm deep in concrete or screed, this exemption applies. In a cavity, by contrast, the class of cable and conduit counts (5.2.9.9 with 5.2.7.3 and 5.2.7.4).",[27,28886,28888],{"id":28887},"which-method-when","Which method when?",[43,28890,28891,28897,28903,28909,28915],{},[46,28892,28893,28896],{},[35,28894,28895],{},"New build:"," Preflex with VOB wires, cast into or plastered into floors and walls.",[46,28898,28899,28902],{},[35,28900,28901],{},"Renovation with chases:"," XVB directly in the chase, within the installation zones.",[46,28904,28905,28908],{},[35,28906,28907],{},"Basement, garage, plant room:"," XVB surface-mounted or on a cable tray.",[46,28910,28911,28914],{},[35,28912,28913],{},"Timber frame, drywall, suspended ceiling:"," cable rated at least Cca or a suitable conduit system.",[46,28916,28917,28920],{},[35,28918,28919],{},"Partial renovation:"," combine both; new circuits in Preflex, existing wiring kept after inspection.",[11,28922,28923,28924,28927,28928,94],{},"For the cable types, see ",[23,28925,28926],{"href":10616},"XVB cable or VOB wire","; for the complete system, ",[23,28929,18745],{"href":9912},[27,28931,5054],{"id":4477},[43,28933,28934,28940,28945],{},[46,28935,28936],{},[23,28937,28939],{"href":28938},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Farei-2026-changes","What Changes with the AREI 2026?",[46,28941,28942],{},[23,28943,28944],{"href":4974},"Bathroom Electrics: Zones and Cable Types",[46,28946,28947],{},[23,28948,28950],{"href":28949},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fold-building-arei-part-8","Old Buildings and AREI Part 8",[11,28952,28953],{},[7299,28954,28955,28956,28958,28959],{},"Plan your electrical installation with ",[35,28957,3710],{},", whether it is a new build with Preflex or a renovation with open wiring: you record installation method and cable type per cable and export the single-line diagram and situation plan as PDF. The self-check flags cables in hollow walls below Cca without documented conduit. ",[23,28960,26596],{"href":5046},[11,28962,28963],{},[7299,28964,28965,28966,94],{},"Regulatory basis: AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1, version 06, subsections 4.3.3.5, 5.2.7.1–5.2.7.3, 5.2.9.3, 5.2.9.5, 5.2.9.9 and 5.2.9.10. Official text: ",[23,28967,8805],{"href":4466,"rel":28968},[4434],{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":28970},[28971,28972,28973,28974,28975,28976,28977],{"id":28706,"depth":291,"text":28707},{"id":28716,"depth":291,"text":28717},{"id":28802,"depth":291,"text":28803},{"id":28850,"depth":291,"text":28851},{"id":28857,"depth":291,"text":28858},{"id":28887,"depth":291,"text":28888},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":5054},"2026-03-27","Preflex conduit or XVB installed directly? Comparison for new builds and renovations in Belgium, with the AREI\u002FRGIE rules on conduits, fire classes and installation zones.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fpreflex-vs-open-wiring.en",{"title":28694,"description":28979},"Preflex vs. Open Wiring: Which Cable Method?","blog\u002Fpreflex-vs-open-wiring.en",[28986,28987,15885,19957,1979,28988,28989],"preflex","wiring","fire safety","XVB","rJ-RQDNYHca-NIdRPADnZFHJ0gzmVlpxnAQLg_yPV5Y",{"id":28992,"title":28993,"articleId":28994,"body":28995,"category":8819,"date":29395,"description":29396,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":29397,"navigation":308,"path":29398,"publishDate":29395,"readTime":312,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":29399,"seoTitle":305,"slug":28994,"stem":29400,"tags":29401,"__hash__":29406},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Frcd-type-a-vs-b.en.md","RCD Type A or Type B? The AREI Rule in 2026","rcd-type-a-vs-b",{"type":8,"value":28996,"toc":29380},[28997,29001,29007,29010,29013,29017,29037,29040,29044,29124,29127,29131,29156,29159,29163,29166,29212,29215,29219,29239,29243,29246,29250,29253,29256,29260,29263,29267,29319,29323,29343,29347,29355,29357,29372],[27,28998,29000],{"id":28999},"short-answer-at-least-type-a-type-b-only-for-smooth-dc-fault-current","Short answer: at least Type A, Type B only for smooth DC fault current",[11,29002,29003,29006],{},[35,29004,29005],{},"Every RCD in a Belgian domestic installation must be at least Type A"," (AREI Book 1, subsection 5.3.5.3(a)). You need Type B where smooth DC fault currents can occur and no other permitted combination covers them. For EV chargers the rule is fixed: either an RCD that keeps working with a DC fault component (for example Type B), or an RCD together with a residual direct-current detecting device, for example Type A plus an RDC-DD in the charging station (7.22.4.1(b)).",[11,29008,29009],{},"For every other appliance the datasheet decides: which fault-current waveforms are possible, is DC monitoring built in, which external RCD does the manufacturer specify? \"Has an inverter\" is not on its own a reason for Type B.",[11,29011,29012],{},"This article covers domestic AC installations under Book 1, version 06, applicable since 1 April 2026. Earthed DC systems, which version 06 now regulates, are a separate topic.",[27,29014,29016],{"id":29015},"type-high-immunity-and-selectivity-are-three-different-things","Type, high immunity and selectivity are three different things",[105,29018,29019,29025,29031],{},[46,29020,29021,29024],{},[35,29022,29023],{},"AC, A, F or B"," states the fault-current waveforms for which tripping is guaranteed.",[46,29026,29027,29030],{},[35,29028,29029],{},"High immunity"," (manufacturer codes such as SI, HI or AP-R) reduces nuisance tripping under certain disturbances.",[46,29032,29033,29036],{},[35,29034,29035],{},"Selectivity or time delay"," describes timing relative to a downstream RCD. What counts is an S marking or a documented time characteristic.",[11,29038,29039],{},"A \"Type A-SI\" is therefore not automatically selective. Some A-SI devices trip instantaneously.",[27,29041,29043],{"id":29042},"all-rcd-types-at-a-glance","All RCD types at a glance",[638,29045,29046,29058],{},[641,29047,29048],{},[644,29049,29050,29052,29055],{},[647,29051,27117],{},[647,29053,29054],{},"Detects",[647,29056,29057],{},"Use in Belgian homes",[657,29059,29060,29073,29086,29099,29112],{},[644,29061,29062,29067,29070],{},[662,29063,29064],{},[35,29065,29066],{},"AC",[662,29068,29069],{},"Pure AC fault currents only",[662,29071,29072],{},"Does not meet the minimum Type A requirement",[644,29074,29075,29080,29083],{},[662,29076,29077],{},[35,29078,29079],{},"A",[662,29081,29082],{},"AC and pulsating DC fault currents",[662,29084,29085],{},"Minimum class (5.3.5.3(a)); appliance requirements still apply",[644,29087,29088,29093,29096],{},[662,29089,29090],{},[35,29091,29092],{},"A-SI",[662,29094,29095],{},"Same waveforms as Type A",[662,29097,29098],{},"Higher immunity to disturbances; not automatically selective",[644,29100,29101,29106,29109],{},[662,29102,29103],{},[35,29104,29105],{},"F",[662,29107,29108],{},"Additionally certain mixed frequencies",[662,29110,29111],{},"For certain single-phase inverter loads per the manufacturer",[644,29113,29114,29118,29121],{},[662,29115,29116],{},[35,29117,12892],{},[662,29119,29120],{},"Additionally smooth DC fault currents",[662,29122,29123],{},"When the protection concept or the manufacturer requires it",[11,29125,29126],{},"New in version 06: sensitivity classes now distinguish AC or pulsating DC from smooth DC. \"High sensitivity\" means more than 10 mA up to 30 mA for AC, and more than 20 mA up to 80 mA for smooth DC (2.6.4).",[27,29128,29130],{"id":29129},"four-ratings-on-the-device-you-must-not-confuse","Four ratings on the device you must not confuse",[43,29132,29133,29138,29144,29150],{},[46,29134,29135,29137],{},[35,29136,27117],{}," (A, F, B …): detected fault-current waveform.",[46,29139,29140,29143],{},[35,29141,29142],{},"IΔn"," (for example 30 or 300 mA): sensitivity to residual current.",[46,29145,29146,29149],{},[35,29147,29148],{},"In"," (for example 40 or 63 A): the current the RCD may carry continuously. It does not trip on overload, so a plain RCD needs coordinated overcurrent protection.",[46,29151,29152,29155],{},[35,29153,29154],{},"Short-circuit withstand"," or conditional short-circuit current: must suit the installation point (5.3.5.3(a)).",[11,29157,29158],{},"Number of poles, supply voltage and wiring matter too: all live conductors of the protected circuit pass through the core-balance transformer, and neutrals of different RCD groups are never mixed. The test button checks the internal mechanism – not the earthing resistance and not the complete protective measure. Only the measurements during inspection do that.",[27,29160,29162],{"id":29161},"when-do-you-need-type-b","When do you need Type B?",[11,29164,29165],{},"Type B comes into play when smooth DC fault currents are possible and no other combination permitted by AREI and the manufacturer covers that risk. Check the actual appliance:",[638,29167,29168,29177],{},[641,29169,29170],{},[644,29171,29172,29174],{},[647,29173,20476],{},[647,29175,29176],{},"What decides",[657,29178,29179,29189,29196,29204],{},[644,29180,29181,29183],{},[662,29182,16337],{},[662,29184,29185,29186,29188],{},"7.22.4.1(b): Type B ",[35,29187,22222],{}," RCD plus coordinated RDC-DD (in the installation, the charger or both)",[644,29190,29191,29193],{},[662,29192,15281],{},[662,29194,29195],{},"Datasheet of compressor drive, backup heater and controls; specified external RCD",[644,29197,29198,29201],{},[662,29199,29200],{},"PV inverter",[662,29202,29203],{},"Inverter topology, internal residual-current monitoring, manufacturer's requirement for the external RCD",[644,29205,29206,29209],{},[662,29207,29208],{},"Several inverters on one RCD",[662,29210,29211],{},"Assess the sum of normal leakage currents and possible DC components together",[11,29213,29214],{},"\"Transformerless\" or \"has an inverter\" does not create a general Type B obligation. Conversely, Type B or F is not simply \"better\": a wider waveform range does not replace correct sensitivity, rated current, disconnection time, overcurrent protection or proper wiring.",[27,29216,29218],{"id":29217},"when-is-type-a-enough","When is Type A enough?",[43,29220,29221,29227,29233],{},[46,29222,29223,29226],{},[35,29224,29225],{},"Socket and lighting circuits:"," the usual 30 mA Type A RCD.",[46,29228,29229,29232],{},[35,29230,29231],{},"Ordinary household appliances"," such as washing machine, dishwasher, cooker and lighting, unless the manufacturer specifies otherwise.",[46,29234,29235,29238],{},[35,29236,29237],{},"EV charger with built-in RDC-DD:"," each charging circuit gets its own RCD of no more than 30 mA (7.22.4.1(b)). If the charging station has a residual DC detecting device coordinated with the external RCD, Type A is sufficient there. The charger's datasheet documents that coordination.",[27,29240,29242],{"id":29241},"new-modified-or-existing","New, modified or existing?",[11,29244,29245],{},"\"At least Type A\" is the selection basis for new domestic installations. For an existing installation, also check when it was built, which Part 8 deviations apply and whether a renovation or extension triggers current requirements for the modified part. An existing Type AC is therefore neither acceptable without review nor automatic proof that the whole installation is unusable.",[27,29247,29249],{"id":29248},"nuisance-tripping-cause-first-device-second","Nuisance tripping: cause first, device second",[11,29251,29252],{},"If an RCD trips for no apparent reason, \"fit an A-SI\" is not a diagnosis. First check insulation faults, moisture, swapped or shared neutrals, leakage currents and wiring errors. Only then assess whether a device with documented high immunity is suitable. High immunity must not weaken protection of persons.",[11,29254,29255],{},"A combined RCD\u002Fcircuit breaker (RCBO) provides residual-current and overcurrent protection for a single final circuit. Its type must still match the load, and coordination with the upstream RCD remains necessary. Record the actual device reference in the dossier – datasheet, wiring diagram and installation instructions – not just \"30 mA Type A\".",[27,29257,29259],{"id":29258},"selectivity-300-ma-ahead-of-30-ma-is-not-enough","Selectivity: 300 mA ahead of 30 mA is not enough",[11,29261,29262],{},"Grading 300 mA ahead of 30 mA does not guarantee selectivity. Check the ratio of rated residual currents, an explicitly selective or time-delayed characteristic on the upstream device, the manufacturer-approved combination, disconnection times and normal leakage currents. High immunity does not replace time\u002Fcurrent coordination. Only with that evidence does a fault reliably trip just the group RCD.",[27,29264,29266],{"id":29265},"arei-references-at-a-glance","AREI references at a glance",[638,29268,29269,29278],{},[641,29270,29271],{},[644,29272,29273,29276],{},[647,29274,29275],{},"AREI Book 1",[647,29277,24062],{},[657,29279,29280,29288,29296,29303,29311],{},[644,29281,29282,29285],{},[662,29283,29284],{},"2.6.4",[662,29286,29287],{},"Sensitivity classes for AC\u002Fpulsating DC and for smooth DC",[644,29289,29290,29293],{},[662,29291,29292],{},"4.2.4.3(b)",[662,29294,29295],{},"No more than 300 mA at the origin; downstream, sensitive protection for the listed circuits",[644,29297,29298,29300],{},[662,29299,29292],{},[662,29301,29302],{},"Max. 8 final circuits per high- or very-high-sensitivity RCD",[644,29304,29305,29308],{},[662,29306,29307],{},"5.3.5.3(a)",[662,29309,29310],{},"In homes at least Type A; origin RCD at least 40 A; short-circuit withstand suited to the location",[644,29312,29313,29316],{},[662,29314,29315],{},"7.22.4.1(b)",[662,29317,29318],{},"EV charger: own RCD ≤ 30 mA per charging circuit; DC-proof RCD or RCD plus DC detection",[27,29320,29322],{"id":29321},"selection-in-six-steps","Selection in six steps",[105,29324,29325,29328,29331,29334,29337,29340],{},[46,29326,29327],{},"Identify the circuit and every connected appliance.",[46,29329,29330],{},"Set the AREI minimum protection and sensitivity.",[46,29332,29333],{},"Check manufacturer documents for fault waveform, DC detection and the specified external RCD.",[46,29335,29336],{},"For cascades, prove time\u002Fcurrent coordination of the actual models.",[46,29338,29339],{},"Document type, sensitivity, rated current and delay in the single-line diagram.",[46,29341,29342],{},"Have the completed installation inspected by the approved inspection body.",[27,29344,29346],{"id":29345},"record-and-check-rcd-data-in-planelec","Record and check RCD data in PlanElec",[11,29348,222,29349,29351,29352,29354],{},[23,29350,3710],{"href":5046}," you record type, sensitivity and rated current for every RCD; the data appear in the single-line diagram and the PDF. The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check flags, among other things, a main RCD below 40 A, an EV charger without its own RCD, a charger RCD that is neither Type B nor paired with an RDC-DD confirmed in the inspector, and – as a practice recommendation based on IEC 60364-5-53 – an upstream RCD without time delay. The full scope is in ",[23,29353,4403],{"href":2953},". Manufacturer coordination and measurements are verified on the real device; the inspection is carried out by the approved inspection body.",[27,29356,5054],{"id":4477},[43,29358,29359,29363,29368],{},[46,29360,29361],{},[23,29362,21193],{"href":20604},[46,29364,29365],{},[23,29366,29367],{"href":18899},"Installing an EV charger under AREI",[46,29369,29370],{},[23,29371,23980],{"href":7191},[11,29373,29374],{},[7299,29375,29376,29377,8806],{},"Legal basis: AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1, version 06, section 2.6.4 and subsections 4.2.4.3(b), 5.3.5.3(a) and 7.22.4.1(b). The official text published by the ",[23,29378,8805],{"href":7174,"rel":29379},[4434],{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":29381},[29382,29383,29384,29385,29386,29387,29388,29389,29390,29391,29392,29393,29394],{"id":28999,"depth":291,"text":29000},{"id":29015,"depth":291,"text":29016},{"id":29042,"depth":291,"text":29043},{"id":29129,"depth":291,"text":29130},{"id":29161,"depth":291,"text":29162},{"id":29217,"depth":291,"text":29218},{"id":29241,"depth":291,"text":29242},{"id":29248,"depth":291,"text":29249},{"id":29258,"depth":291,"text":29259},{"id":29265,"depth":291,"text":29266},{"id":29321,"depth":291,"text":29322},{"id":29345,"depth":291,"text":29346},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":5054},"2026-03-25","In Belgian homes every RCD is at least Type A. When you need Type B or Type A with RDC-DD – EV charger, heat pump, PV – and why A-SI does not mean selective.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Frcd-type-a-vs-b.en",{"title":28993,"description":29396},"blog\u002Frcd-type-a-vs-b.en",[22542,29402,29403,29404,18946,29405],"residual-current-device","type-a","type-b","ev-charger","vs4ofzOhuK3es1-r_cXBE_U3Zx3iFhvWAWuWrJ2Tmcg",{"id":29408,"title":29409,"articleId":29410,"body":29411,"category":8819,"date":29616,"description":29617,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":29618,"navigation":308,"path":29619,"publishDate":29616,"readTime":3670,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":29620,"seoTitle":305,"slug":29621,"stem":29622,"tags":29623,"__hash__":29626},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fmain-switch-mandatory.en.md","Is a Main Switch Mandatory? What AREI Requires","main-switch-mandatory",{"type":8,"value":29412,"toc":29606},[29413,29417,29433,29436,29440,29506,29509,29513,29527,29531,29534,29548,29552,29563,29567,29570,29574,29582,29584,29598],[27,29414,29416],{"id":29415},"short-answer-yes-at-least-40-a-in-homes","Short answer: yes, at least 40 A in homes",[11,29418,29419,29422,29423,29426,29427,29429,29430,29432],{},[35,29420,29421],{},"Yes, a main switch is mandatory in Belgium."," Under AREI Book 1, subsection 5.3.5.1(b), every main distribution and switching board is fitted with a ",[35,29424,29425],{},"main switch-disconnector"," that breaks all line conductors and, where applicable, the neutral simultaneously. Its rated current suits the installation and is at least ",[35,29428,12823],{}," in general, at least ",[35,29431,12834],{}," in domestic installations.",[11,29434,29435],{},"Unlike a plain disconnector, a switch-disconnector may be operated under load. That is exactly what makes it the main switch: one action and the whole installation is dead.",[27,29437,29439],{"id":29438},"the-requirements-at-a-glance","The requirements at a glance",[638,29441,29442,29453],{},[641,29443,29444],{},[644,29445,29446,29448,29451],{},[647,29447,24062],{},[647,29449,29450],{},"What AREI requires",[647,29452,9490],{},[657,29454,29455,29466,29476,29485,29495],{},[644,29456,29457,29460,29463],{},[662,29458,29459],{},"Present",[662,29461,29462],{},"Main switch-disconnector on the main distribution and switching board",[662,29464,29465],{},"5.3.5.1(b)",[644,29467,29468,29471,29474],{},[662,29469,29470],{},"All line conductors at once",[662,29472,29473],{},"One operation breaks all line conductors and, where applicable, the neutral",[662,29475,29465],{},[644,29477,29478,29480,29483],{},[662,29479,8628],{},[662,29481,29482],{},"suited to the installation; at least 25 A, at least 40 A in homes",[662,29484,29465],{},[644,29486,29487,29490,29493],{},[662,29488,29489],{},"Exception",[662,29491,29492],{},"The network operator's overcurrent device may perform the function if designed to provide isolation",[662,29494,29465],{},[644,29496,29497,29500,29503],{},[662,29498,29499],{},"Accessible",[662,29501,29502],{},"Board easy to operate and maintain; in homes reachable without special aids",[662,29504,29505],{},"5.3.5.1(c)",[11,29507,29508],{},"In practice \"all line conductors and, where applicable, the neutral\" means: two-pole on a single-phase supply, four-pole on 3N~400 V and three-pole on 3×230 V without neutral. AREI sets no fixed mounting height; what matters is that you can reach the board without a ladder, tools or moving furniture.",[27,29510,29512],{"id":29511},"what-the-main-switch-is-for","What the main switch is for",[105,29514,29515,29521],{},[46,29516,29517,29520],{},[35,29518,29519],{},"Emergency disconnection:"," in a fire, flood or electrical accident, any occupant switches off the whole installation with one action – no expertise needed.",[46,29522,29523,29526],{},[35,29524,29525],{},"Isolation for work:"," anyone working on the installation first separates it safely from the grid.",[27,29528,29530],{"id":29529},"typical-findings-at-inspection","Typical findings at inspection",[11,29532,29533],{},"In older installations the main switch is sometimes missing entirely, or there is only a single-pole switch that does not break the neutral. Check these points before the inspection:",[43,29535,29536,29539,29542,29545],{},[46,29537,29538],{},"Is a main switch present?",[46,29540,29541],{},"Does it break all line conductors (and the neutral where present) at once?",[46,29543,29544],{},"Is its rated current at least 40 A in a home and suited to the installation?",[46,29546,29547],{},"Is the board freely accessible – not behind furniture or in a locked room?",[27,29549,29551],{"id":29550},"main-switch-and-main-fuse-are-two-different-things","Main switch and main fuse are two different things",[11,29553,29554,29555,29558,29559,94],{},"The main switch is ",[35,29556,29557],{},"not overcurrent protection",". It isolates; it does not protect. Overcurrent protection comes from the network operator's device ahead of the meter and the circuit breakers in the board. Conversely, the network operator's device may take over the main-switch function only if it is expressly designed for isolation (5.3.5.1(b)). The breaking capacity needed downstream is explained in ",[23,29560,29562],{"href":29561},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Fbreaking-capacity-mcb-ka","Breaking capacity of circuit breakers",[27,29564,29566],{"id":29565},"main-switch-and-the-rcd-at-the-origin","Main switch and the RCD at the origin",[11,29568,29569],{},"At the origin of a domestic installation there is also at least one RCD of at most 300 mA, at least Type A and rated at least 40 A (4.2.4.3(b), 5.3.5.3(a)). It provides the isolating function under 5.3.3.1 a.3. That is a requirement on this device, not an exception to 5.3.5.1(b): as a substitute for the main switch-disconnector, the AREI expressly names only the network operator's overcurrent device. Whether a single device fulfils both roles is shown by its ratings. In any case, the single-line diagram must make clear which device performs the main switch-disconnector function.",[27,29571,29573],{"id":29572},"planning-the-main-switch-in-planelec","Planning the main switch in PlanElec",[11,29575,222,29576,29578,29579,29581],{},[23,29577,3710],{"href":5046}," you place the main switch with its number of poles and rated current in the single-line diagram and the board. The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check reports a missing main switch and a main switch below 40 A in a home as errors. The full scope is in ",[23,29580,4403],{"href":2953},". The inspection of the completed installation is carried out by the approved inspection body.",[27,29583,5054],{"id":4477},[43,29585,29586,29590,29594],{},[46,29587,29588],{},[23,29589,7203],{"href":7202},[46,29591,29592],{},[23,29593,21193],{"href":20604},[46,29595,29596],{},[23,29597,7197],{"href":7093},[11,29599,29600],{},[7299,29601,29602,29603,8806],{},"Legal basis: AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1, version 06, subsection 5.3.5.1(b) and (c), supplemented by 4.2.4.3(b), 5.3.3.1 a.3 and 5.3.5.3(a). The official text published by the ",[23,29604,8805],{"href":7174,"rel":29605},[4434],{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":29607},[29608,29609,29610,29611,29612,29613,29614,29615],{"id":29415,"depth":291,"text":29416},{"id":29438,"depth":291,"text":29439},{"id":29511,"depth":291,"text":29512},{"id":29529,"depth":291,"text":29530},{"id":29550,"depth":291,"text":29551},{"id":29565,"depth":291,"text":29566},{"id":29572,"depth":291,"text":29573},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":5054},"2026-03-23","Yes: every main distribution board needs a main switch-disconnector that breaks all line conductors at once – at least 40 A in homes (AREI 5.3.5.1(b)). All requirements at a glance.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fmain-switch-mandatory.en",{"title":29409,"description":29617},"main-switch-mandatory-arei","blog\u002Fmain-switch-mandatory.en",[29624,18946,29625,3311,1981],"main-switch","mandatory","p6fXLYVSrMcilg5_9U-DSwfmonZ2z-SzL0-L9X3rsuI",{"id":29628,"title":29629,"articleId":29630,"body":29631,"category":8819,"date":29997,"description":29998,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":29999,"navigation":308,"path":30000,"publishDate":29997,"readTime":312,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":30001,"seoTitle":305,"slug":30002,"stem":30003,"tags":30004,"__hash__":30007},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fearthing-tt-vs-tns.en.md","TT or TN-S Earthing? The Difference Under AREI (2026)","earthing-tt-vs-tns",{"type":8,"value":29632,"toc":29983},[29633,29637,29643,29646,29649,29653,29660,29730,29733,29737,29740,29745,29766,29773,29777,29783,29787,29801,29804,29808,29814,29817,29821,29874,29879,29883,29886,29889,29893,29896,29899,29902,29906,29909,29912,29939,29943,29946,29950,29958,29960,29975],[27,29634,29636],{"id":29635},"short-answer-the-fault-current-path-makes-the-difference","Short answer: the fault-current path makes the difference",[11,29638,29639,29642],{},[35,29640,29641],{},"In a TT system, fault current returns to the source through the local earth electrode and the ground; in a TN-S system it returns through the protective conductor."," That leads to different disconnection conditions: in TT the RCD does the disconnecting in practice, in TN-S the circuit breaker can also trip in time (AREI Book 1, subsection 4.2.3.4).",[11,29644,29645],{},"Which system your supply uses is established from the connection itself and the network operator's information – not from the building's age or use. AREI does not declare TT the Belgian domestic standard, nor TN-S a system for new builds or industry only.",[11,29647,29648],{},"This article covers domestic AC installations under Book 1, version 06, applicable since 1 April 2026. The new DC systems in version 06 are a separate topic.",[27,29650,29652],{"id":29651},"reading-the-letters-correctly","Reading the letters correctly",[11,29654,29655,29656,29659],{},"The first letter describes how the source relates to earth: ",[842,29657,29658],{},"T"," means one point of the source is directly earthed. The second letter describes how the exposed conductive parts of the consumer installation are connected:",[638,29661,29662,29674],{},[641,29663,29664],{},[644,29665,29666,29668,29671],{},[647,29667,7823],{},[647,29669,29670],{},"Exposed parts of the installation connected to …",[647,29672,29673],{},"Neutral and protective conductor",[657,29675,29676,29689,29708],{},[644,29677,29678,29683,29686],{},[662,29679,29680],{},[35,29681,29682],{},"TT",[662,29684,29685],{},"their own local earth electrode, independent of the source earth",[662,29687,29688],{},"separate",[644,29690,29691,29696,29699],{},[662,29692,29693],{},[35,29694,29695],{},"TN-S",[662,29697,29698],{},"the earthed point of the source via the protective conductor",[662,29700,29701,2152,29704,29707],{},[842,29702,29703],{},"N",[842,29705,29706],{},"PE"," separate throughout",[644,29709,29710,29715,29724],{},[662,29711,29712],{},[35,29713,29714],{},"TN-C-S",[662,29716,29717,29718,29721,29722],{},"the earthed point of the source via ",[842,29719,29720],{},"PEN",", later ",[842,29723,29706],{},[662,29725,29726,29727,29729],{},"combined as ",[842,29728,29720],{}," at first, then split",[11,29731,29732],{},"Whether TN-C-S is present is established from the connection and the network operator's information; it is not simply \"typical of old houses\".",[27,29734,29736],{"id":29735},"tt-system-local-earth-electrode-and-rcd","TT system: local earth electrode and RCD",[11,29738,29739],{},"In a fault to an exposed part, current flows from the line conductor through the appliance's exposed part, the protective conductor, the local earth electrode and the ground back to the earthed point of the source. The earth is part of the fault loop; fault current stays well below a short-circuit current. That is why, in TT, automatic disconnection is usually provided by the RCD. The condition is (4.2.3.4 c.2):",[11,29741,29742],{},[842,29743,29744],{},"IΔn × RE ≤ UL",[11,29746,29747,29749,29750,29753,29754,29757,29758,29761,29762,29765],{},[842,29748,29142],{}," is the RCD's rated residual operating current, ",[842,29751,29752],{},"RE"," the earthing resistance of the exposed parts and ",[842,29755,29756],{},"UL"," the conventional touch-voltage limit (2.4.1, Table 2.3). The calculation ",[842,29759,29760],{},"50 V \u002F 0.3 A ≈ 166 Ω"," does not lift the domestic limit of ",[35,29763,29764],{},"below 100 Ω"," (4.2.3.2).",[11,29767,29768,29769,29772],{},"AREI also allows disconnection by overcurrent devices in TT, provided ",[842,29770,29771],{},"Ia ≤ U0 \u002F Zs"," is actually met (4.2.3.4 c.2). \"TT only works with an RCD\" is therefore too absolute – in practice the RCD remains the tool of choice.",[27,29774,29776],{"id":29775},"tn-s-system-return-path-through-the-protective-conductor","TN-S system: return path through the protective conductor",[11,29778,29779,29780,29782],{},"In TN-S, fault current returns through ",[842,29781,29706],{}," to the earthed point of the source. The fault loop must be low enough in impedance for the protective device to disconnect within the time of the safety curve (4.2.3.4 b.2):",[11,29784,29785],{},[842,29786,29771],{},[11,29788,29789,29792,29793,29796,29797,29800],{},[842,29790,29791],{},"Ia"," is the operating current of the protective device within the permitted time, ",[842,29794,29795],{},"U0"," the voltage to earth, ",[842,29798,29799],{},"Zs"," the fault-loop impedance.",[11,29802,29803],{},"This does not mean the network operator guarantees a particular earthing resistance, nor that RCDs become unnecessary: the domestic RCD requirements of 4.2.4.3 apply whatever the system. Conversely, a 30 mA RCD does not replace checking protective-conductor continuity and disconnection conditions.",[27,29805,29807],{"id":29806},"a-local-earth-electrode-in-tn-too","A local earth electrode in TN too",[11,29809,29810,29811,29813],{},"\"The PE comes with the supply\" does not mean a home can do without its own earth electrode. In domestic installations the electrode is built according to 5.4.2.1 and its earthing resistance is ",[35,29812,29764],{}," (4.2.3.2). Earthing conductor, disconnecting link, main protective conductor and bonding are part of the installation and are made accessible, durable and testable.",[11,29815,29816],{},"Which electrode type fits depends on new build or existing building, foundations and soil. What counts is execution and the measured value, not a standard rod length.",[27,29818,29820],{"id":29819},"_30-ω-and-100-ω-two-different-thresholds","30 Ω and 100 Ω: two different thresholds",[638,29822,29823,29835],{},[641,29824,29825],{},[644,29826,29827,29830,29833],{},[647,29828,29829],{},"Earthing resistance",[647,29831,29832],{},"Consequence for the home",[647,29834,9490],{},[657,29836,29837,29849,29861],{},[644,29838,29839,29844,29847],{},[662,29840,29841],{},[842,29842,29843],{},"RE ≤ 30 Ω",[662,29845,29846],{},"The normal domestic RCD rules apply.",[662,29848,29292],{},[644,29850,29851,29856,29859],{},[662,29852,29853],{},[842,29854,29855],{},"30 Ω \u003C RE \u003C 100 Ω",[662,29857,29858],{},"At least two high- or very-high-sensitivity RCDs with no more than 16 socket outlets each, plus at least one RCD ≤ 100 mA for the remaining circuits",[662,29860,29292],{},[644,29862,29863,29868,29871],{},[662,29864,29865],{},[842,29866,29867],{},"RE ≥ 100 Ω",[662,29869,29870],{},"Requirement not met; the earthing must be improved. Extra RCDs do not fix that.",[662,29872,29873],{},"4.2.3.2",[11,29875,29876,29877,94],{},"The sixteen counts socket outlets, not final circuits. Alongside it, the limit of eight final circuits per high- or very-high-sensitivity RCD still applies. Both counting rules apply at the same time – details in ",[23,29878,21193],{"href":20604},[27,29880,29882],{"id":29881},"what-the-measurement-tells-you","What the measurement tells you",[11,29884,29885],{},"Earthing resistance is determined by measurement using a suitable method. Soil moisture, temperature, corrosion, loose connections or a damaged earthing conductor change the value; a visual check is not enough. The inspection also covers protective conductors, bonding, RCDs and other protective measures.",[11,29887,29888],{},"The approved body's report states the measured earthing resistance. After the conformity inspection, domestic installations are re-inspected at least every 25 years (6.5.2). That interval does not cover later changes: an important modification or extension needs its own conformity inspection, and if a control visit finds infringements, the body sets a date for a follow-up visit in its report (6.5.7.2 b.6).",[27,29890,29892],{"id":29891},"earthing-and-bonding-belong-together","Earthing and bonding belong together",[11,29894,29895],{},"The electrode is only part of the protective measure. The earthing conductor connects it to the disconnecting link; from there, protective conductors and main equipotential bonding run to the conductive parts. Water, gas or heating pipes do not replace an earth electrode, but are included in the bonding according to the applicable rules.",[11,29897,29898],{},"A good earthing measurement does not compensate for a broken PE to a socket, and a continuous protective conductor says nothing about earthing resistance. Resistance, continuity, insulation, RCD operation and disconnection conditions are therefore checked separately. During renovation, pay particular attention to old combined neutral\u002Fprotective arrangements: an impermissible N-PE connection downstream of the separation point distorts RCD operation and readings.",[11,29900,29901],{},"For the dossier, what counts is the measurement date, the part of the installation measured and the report – not a figure passed on by word of mouth. Do not carry an old reading over to a new electrode, an extension or changed connections without re-checking.",[27,29903,29905],{"id":29904},"what-belongs-in-the-diagram-and-dossier","What belongs in the diagram and dossier?",[11,29907,29908],{},"Section 9.1.2 requires, among other things, the single-line diagram and situation plan for homes. Show the earthing and protective components actually present correctly: earthing conductor, disconnecting link, main equipotential bonding and protective devices with their assignment.",[11,29910,29911],{},"How to survey an installation:",[105,29913,29914,29917,29927,29930,29933,29936],{},[46,29915,29916],{},"Check the supply connection and the network operator's information.",[46,29918,29919,29920,2145,29922,29924,29925,94],{},"Trace ",[842,29921,29703],{},[842,29923,29706],{}," and, where present, ",[842,29926,29720],{},[46,29928,29929],{},"Record the local electrode, disconnecting link and bonding.",[46,29931,29932],{},"Have earthing resistance and protective-conductor continuity measured.",[46,29934,29935],{},"Assess RCD and overcurrent protection including disconnection conditions.",[46,29937,29938],{},"Compare installation, board labelling, single-line diagram and situation plan.",[27,29940,29942],{"id":29941},"tt-or-tn-s-no-ranking","TT or TN-S: no ranking",[11,29944,29945],{},"Both systems are safe when design, network conditions, conductor routing and protective devices fit together. TT is not automatically better, TN-S not automatically more reliable. What matters is that fault current has a defined return path and disconnection happens in time in the specific case.",[27,29947,29949],{"id":29948},"documenting-earthing-in-planelec","Documenting earthing in PlanElec",[11,29951,222,29952,29954,29955,29957],{},[23,29953,3710],{"href":5046}," you set the earthing system (TT, TN-S, TN-C-S or IT) in the network configuration and document earth electrode, bonding and protective devices in the single-line diagram and situation plan, both exportable as PDF. The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check flags missing main equipotential bonding, a missing earth electrode in a TT or IT system and – as a plausibility check – a public 3×230 V supply stored as TN. The scope is in ",[23,29956,4403],{"href":2953},". Earthing resistance is measured on site by the electrician; the inspection is carried out by the approved inspection body.",[27,29959,8764],{"id":8763},[43,29961,29962,29966,29971],{},[46,29963,29964],{},[23,29965,21193],{"href":20604},[46,29967,29968],{},[23,29969,29970],{"href":7208},"RCD Type A or Type B?",[46,29972,29973],{},[23,29974,7203],{"href":7202},[11,29976,29977],{},[7299,29978,29979,29980,8806],{},"Legal basis: AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1, version 06, section 2.4.1, subsections 4.2.3.2, 4.2.3.4(b) and (c), 4.2.4.3(b) and 5.4.2.1, section 6.5.2, subsection 6.5.7.2 b.6 and section 9.1.2. The official text published by the ",[23,29981,8805],{"href":7174,"rel":29982},[4434],{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":29984},[29985,29986,29987,29988,29989,29990,29991,29992,29993,29994,29995,29996],{"id":29635,"depth":291,"text":29636},{"id":29651,"depth":291,"text":29652},{"id":29735,"depth":291,"text":29736},{"id":29775,"depth":291,"text":29776},{"id":29806,"depth":291,"text":29807},{"id":29819,"depth":291,"text":29820},{"id":29881,"depth":291,"text":29882},{"id":29891,"depth":291,"text":29892},{"id":29904,"depth":291,"text":29905},{"id":29941,"depth":291,"text":29942},{"id":29948,"depth":291,"text":29949},{"id":8763,"depth":291,"text":8764},"2026-03-20","TT or TN-S decides the fault-current path and the disconnection condition. Formulas, local earth electrode below 100 Ω and the 30 Ω rule for Belgian homes under AREI Book 1 V06.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fearthing-tt-vs-tns.en",{"title":29629,"description":29998},"earthing-tt-vs-tns-belgium","blog\u002Fearthing-tt-vs-tns.en",[1213,30005,30006,18946,22543],"tt-system","tn-s","s-c5QRqRKs9Kpeu7KVYZi568ZDkmk41kXe6KHpr9eaU",{"id":30009,"title":30010,"articleId":30011,"body":30012,"category":8819,"date":30578,"description":30579,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":30580,"navigation":308,"path":30581,"publishDate":30578,"readTime":1974,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":30582,"seoTitle":30583,"slug":30011,"stem":30584,"tags":30585,"__hash__":30588},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fcable-cross-section-breaker.en.md","Cable Cross-Section per Circuit Breaker: Which Cable for Which Protection?","cable-cross-section-breaker",{"type":8,"value":30013,"toc":30566},[30014,30020,30024,30027,30124,30127,30131,30134,30139,30276,30279,30283,30286,30321,30324,30328,30335,30339,30360,30363,30401,30407,30411,30419,30429,30433,30436,30439,30465,30468,30472,30530,30534,30542,30544,30558],[11,30015,30016,30019],{},[35,30017,30018],{},"In Belgian domestic installations, AREI Table 4.11 sets the largest breaker per copper cross-section: 16 A on 1.5 mm², 20 A on 2.5 mm², 25 A on 4 mm² and 40 A on 6 mm²."," Socket-outlet circuits always use at least 2.5 mm² under subsection 5.2.1.2. The protective device protects the cable, not the appliance: a breaker that is too large for the cross-section trips too late on overload, and the cable overheats.",[27,30021,30023],{"id":30022},"quick-reference-breaker-minimum-cross-section","Quick reference: breaker → minimum cross-section",[11,30025,30026],{},"This overview reads Table 4.11 the way the question comes up on site: the breaker is given, and you need the smallest permitted copper cross-section.",[638,30028,30029,30040],{},[641,30030,30031],{},[644,30032,30033,30035,30038],{},[647,30034,24651],{},[647,30036,30037],{},"Minimum copper cross-section",[647,30039,28749],{},[657,30041,30042,30051,30061,30070,30079,30088,30098,30107,30116],{},[644,30043,30044,30046,30049],{},[662,30045,12801],{},[662,30047,30048],{},"1.5 mm² (Table 4.11 lists 1 mm², but Table 5.1 does not allow 1 mm² for new fixed wiring)",[662,30050,9090],{},[644,30052,30053,30055,30058],{},[662,30054,12804],{},[662,30056,30057],{},"1.5 mm²; socket-outlet circuits at least 2.5 mm² under 5.2.1.2",[662,30059,30060],{},"Lighting, circuits without sockets",[644,30062,30063,30065,30067],{},[662,30064,12813],{},[662,30066,4854],{},[662,30068,30069],{},"Socket circuit, appliance circuit",[644,30071,30072,30074,30076],{},[662,30073,12823],{},[662,30075,12818],{},[662,30077,30078],{},"Final circuit with a higher load",[644,30080,30081,30083,30085],{},[662,30082,12831],{},[662,30084,12828],{},[662,30086,30087],{},"Hob, instantaneous water heater",[644,30089,30090,30092,30095],{},[662,30091,12834],{},[662,30093,30094],{},"6 mm² (table ceiling)",[662,30096,30097],{},"Final circuit or supply cable",[644,30099,30100,30102,30104],{},[662,30101,12845],{},[662,30103,12839],{},[662,30105,30106],{},"Supply to a sub-distribution board",[644,30108,30109,30111,30113],{},[662,30110,12855],{},[662,30112,12850],{},[662,30114,30115],{},"Supply cable, main switch",[644,30117,30118,30120,30122],{},[662,30119,12865],{},[662,30121,12860],{},[662,30123,30115],{},[11,30125,30126],{},"The table is a ceiling for the protective device, not a finished cable calculation. Installation method, grouping, ambient temperature and voltage drop can require a larger cross-section; how to check them follows below.",[27,30128,30130],{"id":30129},"the-complete-table-411","The complete Table 4.11",[11,30132,30133],{},"The AREI states the relationship the other way round: for each conductor cross-section, the largest permitted rating of the protective device, separately for fuses and circuit breakers (subsection 4.4.1.4, applicable to domestic installations).",[11,30135,30136],{},[7299,30137,30138],{},"Table 4.11 — Protective device rating by conductor cross-section (AREI 4.4.1.4)",[638,30140,30141,30154],{},[641,30142,30143],{},[644,30144,30145,30147,30149,30151],{},[647,30146,12786],{},[647,30148,22169],{"align":19071},[647,30150,22172],{"align":19071},[647,30152,30153],{},"Use in domestic installations",[657,30155,30156,30170,30182,30194,30205,30216,30226,30236,30246,30256,30266],{},[644,30157,30158,30161,30164,30167],{},[662,30159,30160],{},"0.5 mm²",[662,30162,30163],{"align":19071},"2 A",[662,30165,30166],{"align":19071},"4 A",[662,30168,30169],{},"control, monitoring, signalling and measuring circuits only",[644,30171,30172,30174,30176,30179],{},[662,30173,4848],{},[662,30175,30166],{"align":19071},[662,30177,30178],{"align":19071},"6 A",[662,30180,30181],{},"circuits integrated in distribution boards only",[644,30183,30184,30187,30189,30191],{},[662,30185,30186],{},"1 mm²",[662,30188,30178],{"align":19071},[662,30190,12801],{"align":19071},[662,30192,30193],{},"existing wiring from before 17 May 1986 only (Part 8)",[644,30195,30196,30198,30200,30202],{},[662,30197,4851],{},[662,30199,12801],{"align":19071},[662,30201,12804],{"align":19071},[662,30203,30204],{},"circuits without socket outlets",[644,30206,30207,30209,30211,30213],{},[662,30208,4854],{},[662,30210,12804],{"align":19071},[662,30212,12813],{"align":19071},[662,30214,30215],{},"generally permitted",[644,30217,30218,30220,30222,30224],{},[662,30219,12818],{},[662,30221,12813],{"align":19071},[662,30223,12823],{"align":19071},[662,30225,30215],{},[644,30227,30228,30230,30232,30234],{},[662,30229,12828],{},[662,30231,12831],{"align":19071},[662,30233,12834],{"align":19071},[662,30235,30215],{},[644,30237,30238,30240,30242,30244],{},[662,30239,12839],{},[662,30241,12842],{"align":19071},[662,30243,12845],{"align":19071},[662,30245,30215],{},[644,30247,30248,30250,30252,30254],{},[662,30249,12850],{},[662,30251,12845],{"align":19071},[662,30253,12855],{"align":19071},[662,30255,30215],{},[644,30257,30258,30260,30262,30264],{},[662,30259,12860],{},[662,30261,12855],{"align":19071},[662,30263,12865],{"align":19071},[662,30265,30215],{},[644,30267,30268,30270,30272,30274],{},[662,30269,12870],{},[662,30271,12865],{"align":19071},[662,30273,12875],{"align":19071},[662,30275,30215],{},[11,30277,30278],{},"The two columns are not interchangeable. For the same cable, the fuse limit sits one step below the breaker limit. Replacing a 16 A fuse with a 20 A breaker on 2.5 mm² raises the rated current, so the circuit needs a fresh assessment.",[27,30280,30282],{"id":30281},"table-51-the-exceptions-below-25-mm","Table 5.1: the exceptions below 2.5 mm²",[11,30284,30285],{},"Subsection 5.2.1.2 prohibits insulated conductors smaller than 2.5 mm² unless they are an integral part of a machine or appliance. Table 5.1 lists the exceptions exhaustively:",[638,30287,30288,30298],{},[641,30289,30290],{},[644,30291,30292,30295],{},[647,30293,30294],{},"Minimum",[647,30296,30297],{},"Only for",[657,30299,30300,30307,30314],{},[644,30301,30302,30304],{},[662,30303,4851],{},[662,30305,30306],{},"circuits without socket outlets; only a single socket of up to 2.5 A built into a luminaire is allowed",[644,30308,30309,30311],{},[662,30310,4848],{},[662,30312,30313],{},"circuits integrated in switchgear and controlgear assemblies that supply a single socket outlet",[644,30315,30316,30318],{},[662,30317,30160],{},[662,30319,30320],{},"control, monitoring, signalling and measuring circuits",[11,30322,30323],{},"The 1 mm² row in Table 4.11 therefore does not permit new 1 mm² wiring. Table 4.11 sets how large the protective device may be; Table 5.1 decides whether that cross-section may be installed at all.",[27,30325,30327],{"id":30326},"existing-installations-1-mm-wiring","Existing installations: 1 mm² wiring",[11,30329,30330,30331,30334],{},"For existing parts of domestic installations, section 8.2.2 (point 5, choice of wiring systems) contains a narrowly defined derogation: EMCB and EMCVB wiring of 1 mm² and CTLB and VTLB wiring of 0.75 mm² may remain in service if on-site execution began before ",[35,30332,30333],{},"17 May 1986"," and the wiring belongs to circuits without socket outlets. Their protective devices must suit the cross-section. This protects existing wiring; it is not a rule for new work. The age of the installation and the actual cable type must be demonstrable at inspection.",[27,30336,30338],{"id":30337},"what-the-table-does-not-decide","What the table does not decide",[11,30340,30341,30342,30345,30346,30349,30350,30353,30354,7431,30357,30359],{},"A complete selection links three currents: the design current of the load ",[842,30343,30344],{},"I_B",", the rated current of the protective device ",[842,30347,30348],{},"I_n"," and the current-carrying capacity of the cable ",[842,30351,30352],{},"I_Z",". As a rule, ",[842,30355,30356],{},"I_B ≤ I_n ≤ I_Z",[842,30358,30352],{}," is not a fixed value per mm²: subsection 4.4.1.4 makes it depend on cross-section, insulation, cable construction, installation method and ambient temperature.",[11,30361,30362],{},"So also check:",[43,30364,30365,30371,30377,30383,30389,30395],{},[46,30366,30367,30370],{},[35,30368,30369],{},"Cable:"," material, insulation and construction; the table values apply to copper.",[46,30372,30373,30376],{},[35,30374,30375],{},"Installation method:"," in conduit, in thermal insulation, on the wall, bundled or on a cable tray.",[46,30378,30379,30382],{},[35,30380,30381],{},"Grouping:"," the number of simultaneously loaded conductors and neighbouring circuits.",[46,30384,30385,30388],{},[35,30386,30387],{},"Environment:"," ambient temperature and heat dissipation.",[46,30390,30391,30394],{},[35,30392,30393],{},"Length and load:"," voltage drop over the actual cable length.",[46,30396,30397,30400],{},[35,30398,30399],{},"Short circuit:"," disconnection conditions, fault-loop impedance and the breaker's breaking capacity against the prospective short-circuit current.",[11,30402,30403,30404,30406],{},"A long run may need a larger cross-section because of voltage drop, and an unfavourable installation method lowers the current-carrying capacity. For non-domestic installations, Table 4.11 is not a blanket ceiling; there you determine ",[842,30405,30352],{}," according to the rules of good practice.",[27,30408,30410],{"id":30409},"voltage-drop-3-and-5-are-guide-values-not-an-arei-limit","Voltage drop: 3% and 5% are guide values, not an AREI limit",[11,30412,30413,30414,2152,30416,30418],{},"Section 5.2.5 (\"Voltage drop\") requires voltage drop to be limited to the values described in the rules of good practice. Subsection 5.2.1.2 b adds that it must be compatible with safe operation of the connected equipment. The AREI sets no percentage. In practice, designers work with ",[35,30415,18386],{},[35,30417,18389],{},": proven guide values for a first check. For long runs, motors, EV charging points or sensitive equipment, calculate with the actual conditions.",[11,30420,30421,30422,30425,30426,94],{},"The calculation needs cable length, conductor material, cross-section, current, power factor and the supply (single- or three-phase). The guide ",[23,30423,30424],{"href":4918},"Voltage drop and cable sizing"," shows how they interact. For a quick answer, use the ",[23,30427,30428],{"href":18754},"free cable sizing calculator",[27,30430,30432],{"id":30431},"replacing-an-old-fuse-with-a-circuit-breaker","Replacing an old fuse with a circuit breaker",[11,30434,30435],{},"A classic inspection finding is a protective device that is too large for the installed cross-section. Typical case: in an older installation, fuses were later replaced by breakers and nobody checked the cable behind them.",[11,30437,30438],{},"How to approach it:",[105,30440,30441,30447,30453,30459],{},[46,30442,30443,30446],{},[35,30444,30445],{},"Identify the cable:"," which cross-section and cable type are actually installed, and how?",[46,30448,30449,30452],{},[35,30450,30451],{},"Classify the existing wiring:"," does a Part 8 derogation apply, for example to 1 mm² wiring from before 17 May 1986?",[46,30454,30455,30458],{},[35,30456,30457],{},"Pick the column:"," for 1.5 mm², Table 4.11 allows at most a 10 A fuse or a 16 A breaker; for 2.5 mm², at most 16 A or 20 A.",[46,30460,30461,30464],{},[35,30462,30463],{},"Check the circuit type:"," a socket-outlet circuit needs at least 2.5 mm², regardless of the breaker.",[11,30466,30467],{},"A 20 A breaker on 1.5 mm² is never permitted. The table ceiling is not an invitation to raise the protection either.",[27,30469,30471],{"id":30470},"arei-basis-at-a-glance","AREI basis at a glance",[638,30473,30474,30483],{},[641,30475,30476],{},[644,30477,30478,30481],{},[647,30479,30480],{},"AREI reference",[647,30482,9487],{},[657,30484,30485,30496,30508,30515,30522],{},[644,30486,30487,30490],{},[662,30488,30489],{},"Subsection 4.4.1.4",[662,30491,30492,30493,30495],{},"Current-carrying capacity ",[842,30494,30352],{},"; Table 4.11 with the maximum fuse and breaker rating per cross-section",[644,30497,30498,30501],{},[662,30499,30500],{},"Subsection 5.2.1.2",[662,30502,30503,30504,30507],{},"Choice of wiring: ",[842,30505,30506],{},"I_Z ≥ I_B",", compatible voltage drop, in principle at least 2.5 mm²",[644,30509,30510,30512],{},[662,30511,13854],{},[662,30513,30514],{},"Exhaustive exceptions below 2.5 mm²: 1.5 mm², 0.75 mm² and 0.5 mm² for defined uses",[644,30516,30517,30519],{},[662,30518,10630],{},[662,30520,30521],{},"Voltage drop limited to the values described in the rules of good practice",[644,30523,30524,30527],{},[662,30525,30526],{},"Section 8.2.2, point 5",[662,30528,30529],{},"Existing before 17 May 1986: EMCB\u002FEMCVB 1 mm² and CTLB\u002FVTLB 0.75 mm² in circuits without sockets",[27,30531,30533],{"id":30532},"checking-cross-section-and-protection-in-planelec","Checking cross-section and protection in PlanElec",[11,30535,222,30536,30538,30539,30541],{},[23,30537,3710],{"href":5046},", you record the protective device, cross-section and length for every circuit directly in the single-line diagram. The self-check verifies that the cross-section matches the rated current of the protection and calculates voltage drop from the cable length against the 3% and 5% guide values. The exact rule coverage is listed in ",[23,30540,4403],{"href":2953},". Installation method, grouping and on-site measurements are assessed by the electrician; the official inspection is carried out by the accredited inspection body.",[27,30543,8764],{"id":8763},[43,30545,30546,30550,30554],{},[46,30547,30548],{},[23,30549,30424],{"href":4918},[46,30551,30552],{},[23,30553,7197],{"href":7093},[46,30555,30556],{},[23,30557,25375],{"href":8154},[11,30559,30560],{},[7299,30561,30562,30563,94],{},"Regulatory basis: AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1, version 06, applicable since 1 April 2026, in particular 4.4.1.4, 5.2.1.2, 5.2.5 and 8.2.2. Official text: ",[23,30564,8805],{"href":4466,"rel":30565},[4434],{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":30567},[30568,30569,30570,30571,30572,30573,30574,30575,30576,30577],{"id":30022,"depth":291,"text":30023},{"id":30129,"depth":291,"text":30130},{"id":30281,"depth":291,"text":30282},{"id":30326,"depth":291,"text":30327},{"id":30337,"depth":291,"text":30338},{"id":30409,"depth":291,"text":30410},{"id":30431,"depth":291,"text":30432},{"id":30470,"depth":291,"text":30471},{"id":30532,"depth":291,"text":30533},{"id":8763,"depth":291,"text":8764},"2026-03-18","Which cable cross-section for a 16, 20 or 32 A breaker in Belgium? AREI\u002FRGIE Table 4.11, minimum sizes for socket circuits and what else you need to check.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fcable-cross-section-breaker.en",{"title":30010,"description":30579},"Cable Cross-Section per Breaker: Which Cable for 16\u002F20 A?","blog\u002Fcable-cross-section-breaker.en",[18945,30586,18946,30587],"circuit-breaker","electrical-installation","3e1ElifdfFKqSFYZhm5X2C17cG_TAO44nQB867Okg5E",{"id":30590,"title":30591,"articleId":30592,"body":30593,"category":8819,"date":30874,"description":30875,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":30876,"navigation":308,"path":30877,"publishDate":30874,"readTime":30878,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":30879,"seoTitle":305,"slug":30592,"stem":30880,"tags":30881,"__hash__":30885},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fxvb-vs-vob-cable.en.md","XVB cable or VOB wire: differences and choice in Belgium","xvb-vs-vob-cable",{"type":8,"value":30594,"toc":30864},[30595,30601,30605,30612,30616,30627,30631,30721,30726,30728,30731,30749,30752,30756,30815,30822,30825,30830,30834,30837,30841],[11,30596,30597,30600],{},[35,30598,30599],{},"XVB is a sheathed cable; VOB is a single-core wire with basic insulation only."," That leads to the key rule: you can install XVB surface-mounted, on a cable tray and directly in a wall chase; under AREI\u002FRGIE, VOB belongs in electrical conduit or a closed trunking. Which product fits in the end depends on the route, the fire class and the actual data sheet, not on the price per metre.",[27,30602,30604],{"id":30603},"what-is-xvb-cable","What is XVB cable?",[11,30606,30607,30608,30611],{},"XVB has ",[35,30609,30610],{},"XLPE"," (cross-linked polyethylene) core insulation and a PVC outer sheath. A designation such as 3G2.5 means three 2.5 mm² cores, one of them a green-yellow protective conductor. Check the number of cores, the protective conductor and the cross-section on the data sheet of the chosen product. Nexans, for example, offers XVB as a CPR class Cca variant.",[27,30613,30615],{"id":30614},"what-is-vob-wire","What is VOB wire?",[11,30617,30618,30619,30622,30623,30626],{},"VOB is a PVC-insulated single conductor. ",[35,30620,30621],{},"H07V-U"," has a solid conductor and ",[35,30624,30625],{},"H07V-R"," a stranded one, so VOB does not automatically mean flexible wire. Because the wire has only basic insulation, you install it in electrical conduit such as Preflex or in a suitable closed system. For H07V-U, Nexans states CPR class Eca.",[27,30628,30630],{"id":30629},"where-can-you-install-xvb-and-where-vob","Where can you install XVB and where VOB?",[638,30632,30633,30647],{},[641,30634,30635],{},[644,30636,30637,30639,30642,30645],{},[647,30638,281],{},[647,30640,30641],{},"XVB (cable)",[647,30643,30644],{},"VOB (wire)",[647,30646,1979],{},[657,30648,30649,30661,30673,30684,30696,30708],{},[644,30650,30651,30654,30656,30659],{},[662,30652,30653],{},"In electrical conduit",[662,30655,7949],{},[662,30657,30658],{},"yes, the standard case",[662,30660,11230],{},[644,30662,30663,30666,30668,30671],{},[662,30664,30665],{},"Surface-mounted or in open air",[662,30667,7949],{},[662,30669,30670],{},"no, only cables permitted",[662,30672,9264],{},[644,30674,30675,30678,30680,30682],{},[662,30676,30677],{},"On an open cable tray",[662,30679,7949],{},[662,30681,30670],{},[662,30683,10557],{},[644,30685,30686,30689,30691,30694],{},[662,30687,30688],{},"In closed trunking",[662,30690,7949],{},[662,30692,30693],{},"yes; outside electrical service rooms solid-walled, openable only with a tool",[662,30695,10557],{},[644,30697,30698,30701,30704,30706],{},[662,30699,30700],{},"Embedded in a chase, without conduit",[662,30702,30703],{},"yes, within installation zones",[662,30705,7333],{},[662,30707,11365],{},[644,30709,30710,30713,30716,30719],{},[662,30711,30712],{},"In building cavities (ceiling, floor)",[662,30714,30715],{},"yes, with F2 or at least Cca",[662,30717,30718],{},"not as loose wire; conduits must meet 5.2.7.4",[662,30720,11329],{},[11,30722,30723,30724,94],{},"For embedding without conduit, subsection 5.2.9.10 requires horizontal runs 25 to 35 cm below the ceiling or above the floor, vertical runs as close as possible to a corner or 10 to 20 cm beside door frames, and at least 0.4 cm of plaster cover. Wiring embedded in concrete or cement needs at least 3 cm of cover. The complete system of installation methods is explained in ",[23,30725,18745],{"href":9912},[27,30727,28858],{"id":28857},[11,30729,30730],{},"Section 5.2.7 limits fire propagation through the CPR class:",[43,30732,30733,30738,30743],{},[46,30734,30735,30737],{},[35,30736,28868],{}," at least property F1 or class Eca (subsection 5.2.7.2).",[46,30739,30740,30742],{},[35,30741,28874],{}," at least F2 or class Cca (subsection 5.2.7.3).",[46,30744,30745,30748],{},[35,30746,30747],{},"In building cavities and combustible trunking or skirting:"," also F2 or Cca (subsection 4.3.3.5 b).",[11,30750,30751],{},"Exemptions include cables and conduits embedded at least 3 cm deep in non-combustible cladding (subsection 5.2.7.1 no. 3). What counts is the class of the product actually supplied, according to its declaration of performance; the name XVB or VOB alone does not fix it.",[27,30753,30755],{"id":30754},"comparing-costs-properly","Comparing costs properly",[638,30757,30758,30769],{},[641,30759,30760],{},[644,30761,30762,30764,30766],{},[647,30763,16826],{},[647,30765,28989],{},[647,30767,30768],{},"VOB",[657,30770,30771,30782,30793,30804],{},[644,30772,30773,30776,30779],{},[662,30774,30775],{},"What do you count?",[662,30777,30778],{},"Cable length with its included cores",[662,30780,30781],{},"Each wire's length plus the conduit",[644,30783,30784,30787,30790],{},[662,30785,30786],{},"Does the route suit it?",[662,30788,30789],{},"Supports, protection and surroundings",[662,30791,30792],{},"Conduit diameter, fill, continuity and accessibility",[644,30794,30795,30798,30801],{},[662,30796,30797],{},"Can existing routes be reused?",[662,30799,30800],{},"Check the route and connections",[662,30802,30803],{},"Check conduit condition and free passage",[644,30805,30806,30809,30812],{},[662,30807,30808],{},"What belongs in the price?",[662,30810,30811],{},"Cable, supports, accessories and labour",[662,30813,30814],{},"All wires, conduits, accessories and labour",[11,30816,30817,30818,30821],{},"A metre of 3G2.5 cable cannot be compared with a metre of a single 2.5 mm² wire. Compare quotes for the same route, the same number of conductors and the same work. VOB in conduit has one clear advantage: wires can be replaced or added later, because they must remain pullable at all times (5.2.9.3). The comparison ",[23,30819,30820],{"href":10611},"Preflex or open wiring"," covers this in detail.",[27,30823,21837],{"id":30824},"cross-section-and-protection",[11,30826,30827,30828,94],{},"The cable type does not replace sizing. Load, length, installation method and voltage drop determine the cross-section; Table 4.11 limits the breaker. The mapping is in ",[23,30829,18890],{"href":8687},[27,30831,30833],{"id":30832},"documenting-your-choice","Documenting your choice",[11,30835,30836],{},"Record the cable type, cross-section, number of cores, installation method and route for every segment. If the installation method changes, for example from conduit to cable tray, the plan must show it. In PlanElec you store these details per cable; the self-check flags cables installed singly below Eca and cables in hollow walls below Cca without documented conduit. The on-site inspection is carried out by the accredited inspection body.",[27,30838,30840],{"id":30839},"sources-checked-on-5-october-2026","Sources checked on 5 October 2026",[43,30842,30843,30850,30857],{},[46,30844,30845],{},[23,30846,30849],{"href":30847,"rel":30848},"https:\u002F\u002Fwww.nexans.be\u002Ffr\u002Fproducts\u002FEnergy-up-to-1kV\u002FPVC\u002FPVC-unarmoured-cables\u002FXVB-Cca-0%2C30373.html",[4434],"Nexans — XVB Cca ULTIMO",[46,30851,30852],{},[23,30853,30856],{"href":30854,"rel":30855},"https:\u002F\u002Fwww.nexans.be\u002Ffr\u002Fproducts\u002FEnergy-up-to-1kV\u002FPVC\u002FPVC-wires\u002FH07V-U-Eca29393.html",[4434],"Nexans — H07V-U \u002F H07V-R",[46,30858,30859,30863],{},[23,30860,30862],{"href":4466,"rel":30861},[4434],"FPS Economy — AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1",", subsections 4.3.3.5, 5.2.7.1–5.2.7.3, 5.2.9.3, 5.2.9.5, 5.2.9.6, 5.2.9.9 and 5.2.9.10",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":30865},[30866,30867,30868,30869,30870,30871,30872,30873],{"id":30603,"depth":291,"text":30604},{"id":30614,"depth":291,"text":30615},{"id":30629,"depth":291,"text":30630},{"id":28857,"depth":291,"text":28858},{"id":30754,"depth":291,"text":30755},{"id":30824,"depth":291,"text":21837},{"id":30832,"depth":291,"text":30833},{"id":30839,"depth":291,"text":30840},"2026-03-16","XVB or VOB? Where AREI\u002FRGIE lets you install sheathed cable and single-core wire, which fire class applies and how to compare costs properly.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fxvb-vs-vob-cable.en","5 min",{"title":30591,"description":30875},"blog\u002Fxvb-vs-vob-cable.en",[30882,30883,30884,10213,18946],"cable","xvb","vob","E7VNlTmWNB4gbnG_NRwNqAgH9X7LM_azyDnhaxk2veg",{"id":30887,"title":30888,"articleId":30889,"body":30890,"category":8819,"date":31106,"description":31107,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":31108,"navigation":308,"path":31109,"publishDate":31106,"readTime":30878,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":31110,"seoTitle":31111,"slug":30889,"stem":31112,"tags":31113,"__hash__":31121},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Finspection-checklist.en.md","What Does the Inspector Check During an Electrical Inspection?","inspection-checklist",{"type":8,"value":30891,"toc":31096},[30892,30894,30897,30975,30978,30982,30985,31044,31047,31051,31054,31058,31061,31065,31068,31072,31075,31088,31090],[27,30893,21912],{"id":21911},[11,30895,30896],{},"When inspecting a domestic installation, the inspector from the approved inspection body checks four things: the documents, the visible condition of the installation, the operation of protective devices and two measured values – insulation resistance and earth electrode resistance. That is what AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 lays down in section 6.4.1; the inspection takes place with the installation de-energised.",[638,30898,30899,30909],{},[641,30900,30901],{},[644,30902,30903,30905,30907],{},[647,30904,5160],{},[647,30906,21912],{},[647,30908,24065],{},[657,30910,30911,30921,30932,30943,30954,30964],{},[644,30912,30913,30915,30918],{},[662,30914,19438],{},[662,30916,30917],{},"Single-line diagram and situation plan present and matching the installation as built; connection data, main switch, earth electrode type",[662,30919,30920],{},"3.1.2, 6.4.6.4 b.2 to b.4",[644,30922,30923,30926,30929],{},[662,30924,30925],{},"Visual check",[662,30927,30928],{},"Selection, mounting and installation of fixed equipment, covers, labelling, accessibility",[662,30930,30931],{},"6.4.3, 6.4.6.4 b.4",[644,30933,30934,30937,30940],{},[662,30935,30936],{},"Tests",[662,30938,30939],{},"Continuity of protective conductors and equipotential bonding; operation of protective devices",[662,30941,30942],{},"6.4.4, 6.4.6.4 b.4",[644,30944,30945,30948,30951],{},[662,30946,30947],{},"Insulation measurement",[662,30949,30950],{},"At least 500 kΩ per circuit at a 500 V DC test voltage, loads switched off",[662,30952,30953],{},"6.4.5.1, table 6.1",[644,30955,30956,30958,30961],{},[662,30957,26326],{},[662,30959,30960],{},"Measurement of the earth electrode; below 100 Ω in homes, above 30 Ω a stricter RCD layout applies",[662,30962,30963],{},"6.4.5.2, 4.2.3.2, 4.2.4.3 b",[644,30965,30966,30969,30972],{},[662,30967,30968],{},"Coordination in the report",[662,30970,30971],{},"RCDs match the earth value, overcurrent protection matches the wiring, installation follows the plans",[662,30973,30974],{},"6.4.6.4 b.4",[11,30976,30977],{},"If everything is in order, the inspector endorses the single-line diagram and situation plan, and the report states the date of the next control visit (6.4.6.4 b.6).",[27,30979,30981],{"id":30980},"prepare-the-documents-for-the-inspection","Prepare the documents for the inspection",[11,30983,30984],{},"This checklist is for electrical contractors preparing a domestic installation in Belgium for inspection. Establish the trigger, the age of the installation and the scope of work first; non-domestic installations have additional dossier requirements.",[638,30986,30987,31000],{},[641,30988,30989],{},[644,30990,30991,30994,30997],{},[647,30992,30993],{},"Document \u002F task",[647,30995,30996],{},"Responsible",[647,30998,30999],{},"Check before handover",[657,31001,31002,31012,31023,31034],{},[644,31003,31004,31006,31009],{},[662,31005,17926],{},[662,31007,31008],{},"Designer \u002F installation contractor",[662,31010,31011],{},"Compare references, actual installation and matching versions",[644,31013,31014,31017,31020],{},[662,31015,31016],{},"Previous reports and alterations",[662,31018,31019],{},"Owner \u002F contractor",[662,31021,31022],{},"Collect available reports and assign open findings",[644,31024,31025,31028,31031],{},[662,31026,31027],{},"Manufacturer documentation",[662,31029,31030],{},"Installation contractor",[662,31032,31033],{},"Link documents to the installed equipment and protection concept",[644,31035,31036,31039,31041],{},[662,31037,31038],{},"Inspection report",[662,31040,21543],{},[662,31042,31043],{},"Add to the installation file after the inspection",[11,31045,31046],{},"Complete each row: available, open, named owner and version date. The matrix allocates the work; the statutory contents of the installation file are set out in section 9.1.2. Only the approved body issues the inspection report – an installer's declaration does not take its place.",[27,31048,31050],{"id":31049},"prepare-visual-checks-and-measurements-separately","Prepare visual checks and measurements separately",[11,31052,31053],{},"On site, compare labels, covers, accessibility, conductor data, protective devices and the earth connection with the documents. The protection required depends on the circuit, its use and, where relevant, the part 8 rules for existing installations; a generic table of cross-sections, RCDs or surge protection is not enough. Assess your own preliminary measurements only with the right method and the applicable requirements.",[385,31055,31057],{"id":31056},"rcd-testing-ma-is-not-a-time","RCD testing: mA is not a time",[11,31059,31060],{},"The rated residual current IΔn is a device characteristic; test current and trip time are separate quantities. Record device type, any time delay, test setting and result in the measurement log. \"30 mA\" or \"300 mA\" does not define a universal trip time – an equivalence such as \"300 mA = 300 ms\" is wrong. The test criteria depend on the device and the test method.",[27,31062,31064],{"id":31063},"organise-the-handover","Organise the handover",[11,31066,31067],{},"Every open point gets a named owner and a deadline. After every change, compare both plans with the installation again. Record the document version actually handed over and add the inspection report to it. Deadlines and follow-up depend on the inspection trigger and the findings.",[27,31069,31071],{"id":31070},"assemble-the-documents-in-planelec","Assemble the documents in PlanElec",[11,31073,31074],{},"PlanElec generates the single-line diagram, situation plan and AREI\u002FRGIE self-check report from one shared project model. The self-check report shows findings in the supported rules; the site visit, measurements and the official report are handled by the approved inspection body.",[43,31076,31077,31082],{},[46,31078,31079],{},[23,31080,31081],{"href":235},"Export guide",[46,31083,31084],{},[23,31085,31087],{"href":31086},"\u002Fhelp\u002Finstallation-topology\u002Fen-installation-example.pdf","Fictitious example dossier (PDF)",[27,31089,27873],{"id":27872},[11,31091,31092],{},[23,31093,31095],{"href":4466,"rel":31094},[4434],"FPS Economy – AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 V06, sections 3.1.2, 6.4, 6.5 and 9.1.2",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":31097},[31098,31099,31100,31103,31104,31105],{"id":21911,"depth":291,"text":21912},{"id":30980,"depth":291,"text":30981},{"id":31049,"depth":291,"text":31050,"children":31101},[31102],{"id":31056,"depth":599,"text":31057},{"id":31063,"depth":291,"text":31064},{"id":31070,"depth":291,"text":31071},{"id":27872,"depth":291,"text":27873},"2026-03-13","Documents, visual checks, tests, measurements: point by point, what the inspector checks and measures during an electrical inspection in Belgium – with limit values and AREI references.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Finspection-checklist.en",{"title":30888,"description":31107},"What Does the Inspector Check in an Electrical Inspection?","blog\u002Finspection-checklist.en",[1979,1980,1981,21231,15886,319,31114,31115,31116,317,31117,31118,7237,31119,31120,2981],"eendraadschema","Eindrahtschema","schéma unifilaire","Situationsplan","plan de situation","earth resistance","insulation resistance","baq7Cxj6Tlu0zzBCcJrXlQAUTM-yhjFmitnEcrwsfPc",{"id":31123,"title":31124,"articleId":31125,"body":31126,"category":8819,"date":31398,"description":31399,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":31400,"navigation":308,"path":31401,"publishDate":31398,"readTime":3670,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":31402,"seoTitle":305,"slug":31125,"stem":31403,"tags":31404,"__hash__":31407},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fsockets-per-circuit.en.md","How Many Sockets per Circuit? The AREI Rule","sockets-per-circuit",{"type":8,"value":31127,"toc":31388},[31128,31132,31141,31145,31203,31206,31210,31281,31290,31293,31302,31306,31338,31341,31345,31355,31359,31364,31370,31372,31383],[27,31129,31131],{"id":31130},"maximum-8-sockets-per-circuit","Maximum 8 sockets per circuit",[11,31133,31134,31137,31138,31140],{},[35,31135,31136],{},"A final circuit in a dwelling feeds at most eight single or multiple socket outlets."," That is the rule in Book 1 of the AREI\u002FRGIE, Belgium's general regulations for electrical installations, subsection 5.3.5.2, point b. A double or triple socket counts as ",[35,31139,6492],{}," point. Pure lighting circuits have no fixed cap; instead, every dwelling unit with more than two rooms or areas needs at least two separate lighting circuits.",[27,31142,31144],{"id":31143},"how-to-count","How to count",[638,31146,31147,31156],{},[641,31148,31149],{},[644,31150,31151,31153],{},[647,31152,2724],{},[647,31154,31155],{},"Counts towards the limit of eight",[657,31157,31158,31166,31173,31181,31188,31195],{},[644,31159,31160,31163],{},[662,31161,31162],{},"Single socket",[662,31164,31165],{},"1 point",[644,31167,31168,31171],{},[662,31169,31170],{},"Double or triple socket",[662,31172,31165],{},[644,31174,31175,31178],{},[662,31176,31177],{},"Light point on a pure lighting circuit",[662,31179,31180],{},"does not count",[644,31182,31183,31186],{},[662,31184,31185],{},"Fixed appliance on a mixed circuit",[662,31187,31165],{},[644,31189,31190,31193],{},[662,31191,31192],{},"Group of lights or appliances with one common control (mixed circuit)",[662,31194,31165],{},[644,31196,31197,31200],{},[662,31198,31199],{},"Appliance with a dedicated circuit (5.2.1.2)",[662,31201,31202],{},"does not belong on the socket circuit",[11,31204,31205],{},"Mixed circuits are allowed: sockets, luminaires and other fixed appliances may share a final circuit. The socket rule then applies to the whole circuit, and each fixed appliance – or each group behind one common switch – counts as one socket (5.3.5.2 b).",[27,31207,31209],{"id":31208},"cable-and-breaker-per-circuit-type","Cable and breaker per circuit type",[638,31211,31212,31228],{},[641,31213,31214],{},[644,31215,31216,31219,31222,31225],{},[647,31217,31218],{},"Circuit type",[647,31220,31221],{},"Typical cable",[647,31223,31224],{},"Max. circuit breaker (table 4.11)",[647,31226,31227],{},"Max. points",[657,31229,31230,31242,31255,31269],{},[644,31231,31232,31235,31237,31240],{},[662,31233,31234],{},"Sockets",[662,31236,24442],{},[662,31238,31239],{},"20 A (fuse: 16 A)",[662,31241,21860],{},[644,31243,31244,31246,31249,31252],{},[662,31245,9090],{},[662,31247,31248],{},"XVB 3G1.5",[662,31250,31251],{},"16 A (fuse: 10 A)",[662,31253,31254],{},"no fixed cap; at least 2 lighting circuits",[644,31256,31257,31260,31263,31266],{},[662,31258,31259],{},"Dedicated circuit 4 mm²",[662,31261,31262],{},"XVB 3G4",[662,31264,31265],{},"25 A (fuse: 20 A)",[662,31267,31268],{},"1 appliance",[644,31270,31271,31274,31276,31279],{},[662,31272,31273],{},"Dedicated circuit 6 mm²",[662,31275,24456],{},[662,31277,31278],{},"40 A (fuse: 32 A)",[662,31280,31268],{},[11,31282,31283,31284,31286,31287,31289],{},"Table 4.11 in subsection 4.4.1.4 gives the ",[35,31285,11561],{}," rated current per cross-section for domestic installations. Installation method, grouping and cable length can call for a larger cross-section; the method is in ",[23,31288,20537],{"href":8687},". Socket circuits need at least 2.5 mm²: under table 5.1, 1.5 mm² is only allowed for circuits without sockets.",[27,31291,31292],{"id":20456},"Which appliances need their own circuit",[11,31294,31295,31296,31298,31299,94],{},"Subsection 5.2.1.2 takes certain appliances off the socket circuit altogether. In domestic installations, every appliance with a fixed location rated at ",[35,31297,20466],{}," or more gets its own circuit. The washing machine, dishwasher, tumble dryer, electric cooker, hob and oven each get a dedicated circuit regardless of their power; fixed electric heating gets one or more separate circuits. Details and examples are in ",[23,31300,31301],{"href":9626},"dedicated circuits for appliances",[27,31303,31305],{"id":31304},"how-to-split-a-house-into-circuits","How to split a house into circuits",[105,31307,31308,31314,31320,31326,31332],{},[46,31309,31310,31313],{},[35,31311,31312],{},"Place sockets room by room."," Start from what each space needs, not from circuits.",[46,31315,31316,31319],{},[35,31317,31318],{},"Group them into circuits."," Combine neighbouring sockets into final circuits of eight points at most. If you want more spare capacity or availability, plan smaller circuits.",[46,31321,31322,31325],{},[35,31323,31324],{},"Separate the dedicated circuits."," Everything listed in 5.2.1.2 gets its own circuit.",[46,31327,31328,31331],{},[35,31329,31330],{},"Spread the lighting."," At least two lighting circuits, so one trip does not leave the whole home in the dark.",[46,31333,31334,31337],{},[35,31335,31336],{},"Number consistently."," Circuit and point numbers match on the single-line diagram and the situation plan.",[11,31339,31340],{},"How many circuits a house ends up with follows from these steps – not from a rule of thumb.",[27,31342,31344],{"id":31343},"existing-installations-more-than-eight-only-in-existing-parts","Existing installations: more than eight only in existing parts",[11,31346,31347,31348,31351,31352,94],{},"Part 8 lets existing domestic installations keep more than eight sockets per final circuit ",[35,31349,31350],{},"in service",", provided the power of the connected fixed appliances and appliances with a fixed location does not exceed the permissible power of the wiring (section 8.2.1, item 6, for installations started before 1 October 1981; section 8.2.2, item 6, for installations under the former AREI). The derogation covers existing parts. New or modified circuits follow 5.3.5.2. More in ",[23,31353,31354],{"href":28949},"old buildings and AREI Part 8",[27,31356,31358],{"id":31357},"how-planelec-counts","How PlanElec counts",[11,31360,31361,31362,94],{},"The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check in PlanElec counts sockets and fixed appliances per final circuit and flags more than eight as an error; pure lighting circuits are excluded. It also checks for at least two lighting circuits and for a dedicated circuit for large appliances. You see overruns while you design. The inspection of the installation is carried out by the recognised inspection body. The rules covered are listed in ",[23,31363,3459],{"href":2953},[11,31365,20617,31366,31369],{},[23,31367,20621],{"href":4466,"rel":31368},[4434],", subsections 4.4.1.4, 5.2.1.2 and 5.3.5.2 and Part 8.",[27,31371,5054],{"id":4477},[43,31373,31374,31378],{},[46,31375,31376],{},[23,31377,20605],{"href":20604},[46,31379,31380],{},[23,31381,31382],{"href":7093},"Electrical inspection in Belgium: process and documents",[11,31384,31385],{},[23,31386,31387],{"href":17817},"Plan your circuits in PlanElec and check them yourself →",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":31389},[31390,31391,31392,31393,31394,31395,31396,31397],{"id":31130,"depth":291,"text":31131},{"id":31143,"depth":291,"text":31144},{"id":31208,"depth":291,"text":31209},{"id":20456,"depth":291,"text":31292},{"id":31304,"depth":291,"text":31305},{"id":31343,"depth":291,"text":31344},{"id":31357,"depth":291,"text":31358},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":5054},"2026-03-11","At most 8 sockets per final circuit, and a multiple socket counts as one: how to count, choose cable and breaker, and plan lighting and dedicated circuits under the AREI.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fsockets-per-circuit.en",{"title":31124,"description":31399},"blog\u002Fsockets-per-circuit.en",[1979,1980,31405,2586,31406,30882,28989,319,31114,31115,31116,1981,21231,23233,2981,317],"socket","breaker","wRzH0t_alamWcMeDu5uI6MsfWPynxK27W_TtCkK_nEI",{"id":31409,"title":31410,"articleId":31411,"body":31412,"category":8819,"date":31793,"description":31794,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":31795,"navigation":308,"path":31796,"publishDate":31793,"readTime":25138,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":31797,"seoTitle":305,"slug":31411,"stem":31798,"tags":31799,"__hash__":31805},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fbathroom-cables-arei-zones.en.md","Which Cables Can I Use in the Bathroom? (AREI Zones)","bathroom-cables-arei-zones",{"type":8,"value":31413,"toc":31781},[31414,31418,31424,31428,31435,31520,31523,31527,31600,31603,31607,31633,31635,31638,31699,31702,31706,31713,31716,31731,31734,31737,31740,31744,31749,31755,31757,31776],[27,31415,31417],{"id":31416},"which-cables-are-allowed-in-the-bathroom","Which cables are allowed in the bathroom",[11,31419,31420,31423],{},[35,31421,31422],{},"In the bathroom you install wiring without metal elements: typically an XVB cable or insulated single-core wires (VOB) in conduit."," Armoured cables and steel conduit are banned in the bathroom and up to 5 cm deep in its walls. Zones 1 and 2 only carry wiring that supplies equipment in zones 0, 1 and 2; zone 0 only carries the wiring of the SELV equipment allowed there. Every bathroom circuit is protected by an RCD of high or very high sensitivity located outside the bathroom. That is how Book 1 of the AREI\u002FRGIE, Belgium's general regulations for electrical installations, regulates it in chapter 7.1.",[27,31425,31427],{"id":31426},"zones-0-1-and-2","Zones 0, 1 and 2",[11,31429,31430,31431,31434],{},"The official Dutch and French texts speak of ",[35,31432,31433],{},"volumes","; in practice most people say zones. They depend on whether you plan a bath or a shower (subsection 7.1.3.2).",[638,31436,31437,31453],{},[641,31438,31439],{},[644,31440,31441,31444,31447,31450],{},[647,31442,31443],{},"Zone",[647,31445,31446],{},"Bath",[647,31448,31449],{},"Shower",[647,31451,31452],{},"What is allowed",[657,31454,31455,31471,31487,31505],{},[644,31456,31457,31462,31465,31468],{},[662,31458,31459],{},[35,31460,31461],{},"Zone 0",[662,31463,31464],{},"inside the bath",[662,31466,31467],{},"Shower tray at least 10 cm deep: its interior up to 10 cm above its base. Otherwise: up to 10 cm above the floor within 1.20 m of each fixed water outlet",[662,31469,31470],{},"Only fixed, permanently connected equipment on SELV (source outside zones 0 and 1), at most 12 V AC; no sockets, no junction boxes",[644,31472,31473,31478,31481,31484],{},[662,31474,31475],{},[35,31476,31477],{},"Zone 1",[662,31479,31480],{},"above the bath up to 2.25 m (or up to a higher fixed water outlet), including the space under the bath",[662,31482,31483],{},"within 1.20 m of each fixed water outlet, up to 2.25 m or up to a higher outlet",[662,31485,31486],{},"SELV equipment, SELV sockets and SELV controls; low-voltage equipment only if permanently connected and intended by the manufacturer for zone 1",[644,31488,31489,31494,31497,31502],{},[662,31490,31491],{},[35,31492,31493],{},"Zone 2",[662,31495,31496],{},"0.60 m around zone 1",[662,31498,31499],{},[35,31500,31501],{},"not defined",[662,31503,31504],{},"Fixed equipment, switches, SELV sockets; 230 V sockets only behind an RCD of very high sensitivity (≤ 10 mA) or each via its own isolating transformer up to 100 W",[644,31506,31507,31512,31515,31517],{},[662,31508,31509],{},[35,31510,31511],{},"Outside the zones",[662,31513,31514],{},"rest of the room",[662,31516,31514],{},[662,31518,31519],{},"General rules of Book 1",[11,31521,31522],{},"Fixed walls can limit the zones; the figures are in subsections 7.1.3.3 and 7.1.3.4. The required water resistance follows from table 7.3: zone 0 calls for external influence AD7 (at least IPX7), zones 1 and 2 for AD4 (at least IPX4). Exception per the footnote to table 7.3: low-voltage sockets in zone 2 and outside the zones may have degree of protection IPXX. The maximum SELV voltages are in tables 7.1 and 7.2. The equipment rules per zone are in subsection 7.1.5.2, points b to d. Distribution boards are banned in zones 0, 1 and 2, as is equipment that supplies or protects other rooms.",[27,31524,31526],{"id":31525},"cable-types-by-zone","Cable types by zone",[638,31528,31529,31543],{},[641,31530,31531],{},[644,31532,31533,31536,31538,31541],{},[647,31534,31535],{},"Wiring",[647,31537,31461],{},[647,31539,31540],{},"Zones 1 and 2",[647,31542,31511],{},[657,31544,31545,31559,31573,31586],{},[644,31546,31547,31551,31554,31557],{},[662,31548,31549],{},[35,31550,24505],{},[662,31552,31553],{},"only for zone-0 equipment, embedded in fixed walls",[662,31555,31556],{},"yes, if it supplies equipment in zone 0, 1 or 2",[662,31558,7949],{},[644,31560,31561,31566,31569,31571],{},[662,31562,31563],{},[35,31564,31565],{},"VOB \u002F H07V-U in conduit",[662,31567,31568],{},"only for zone-0 equipment, in conduit in fixed walls",[662,31570,31556],{},[662,31572,7949],{},[644,31574,31575,31580,31582,31584],{},[662,31576,31577],{},[35,31578,31579],{},"Single-core wires without conduit",[662,31581,7333],{},[662,31583,7333],{},[662,31585,7333],{},[644,31587,31588,31593,31595,31597],{},[662,31589,31590],{},[35,31591,31592],{},"Armoured cable, steel conduit",[662,31594,7333],{},[662,31596,7333],{},[662,31598,31599],{},"not in the room nor up to 5 cm deep in its walls",[11,31601,31602],{},"For zones 1 and 2, subsection 7.1.5.2, point e, allows four installation methods: in conduit embedded in fixed walls (5.2.9.3), exposed or surface-mounted (5.2.9.5), in building cavities (5.2.9.9) and embedded without conduit (5.2.9.10). SELV wiring in zones 0, 1 and 2 needs protection by insulation as defined in subsection 4.2.5.4, point a, whatever the installation method.",[385,31604,31606],{"id":31605},"what-to-check-on-the-conduit","What to check on the conduit",[43,31608,31609,31615,31621,31627],{},[46,31610,31611,31614],{},[35,31612,31613],{},"Fire behaviour of the conduit:"," a conduit that contributes to flame propagation may only be used when embedded at least 3 cm deep in non-combustible material (5.2.7.4 and 5.2.9.3, point f). In stud walls and suspended ceilings you therefore need a non-flame-propagating conduit. The property of your pre-wired conduit (Preflex) is printed on the conduit and its data sheet.",[46,31616,31617,31620],{},[35,31618,31619],{},"No loose single-core wires:"," conductors with basic insulation only, such as VOB, never go into a wall or cavity without conduit (5.2.9.9 and 5.2.9.10).",[46,31622,31623,31626],{},[35,31624,31625],{},"Bundled cables:"," conductors and cables laid in bundles need at least property F2 or fire class Cca; those laid singly at least F1 or Eca (5.2.7.2 and 5.2.7.3).",[46,31628,31629,31632],{},[35,31630,31631],{},"Through-runs:"," wiring that only passes through the bathroom to another room does not belong in zones 1 and 2. Route it outside the zones.",[27,31634,21837],{"id":30824},[11,31636,31637],{},"The bathroom follows the same maxima as the rest of the home (table 4.11 in subsection 4.4.1.4):",[638,31639,31640,31651],{},[641,31641,31642],{},[644,31643,31644,31647,31649],{},[647,31645,31646],{},"Use",[647,31648,18466],{},[647,31650,22172],{},[657,31652,31653,31661,31669,31678,31689],{},[644,31654,31655,31657,31659],{},[662,31656,9090],{},[662,31658,4851],{},[662,31660,12804],{},[644,31662,31663,31665,31667],{},[662,31664,31234],{},[662,31666,4854],{},[662,31668,12813],{},[644,31670,31671,31674,31676],{},[662,31672,31673],{},"Washing machine, tumble dryer (own circuit)",[662,31675,4854],{},[662,31677,12813],{},[644,31679,31680,31683,31686],{},[662,31681,31682],{},"Electric floor or wall heating",[662,31684,31685],{},"by power",[662,31687,31688],{},"per table 4.11",[644,31690,31691,31694,31697],{},[662,31692,31693],{},"Instantaneous water heater, large boiler",[662,31695,31696],{},"by power and manufacturer data",[662,31698,31688],{},[11,31700,31701],{},"Appliances with a fixed location of 2600 W or more get their own circuit (5.2.1.2). Heating elements embedded in fixed walls are allowed outside zone 0 if covered by a metal grid connected to the supplementary equipotential bonding (7.1.4.5).",[27,31703,31705],{"id":31704},"an-rcd-for-every-bathroom-circuit","An RCD for every bathroom circuit",[11,31707,31708,31709,31712],{},"Subsection 7.1.4.3 requires one or more RCDs of high or very high sensitivity, 30 mA in practice, for ",[35,31710,31711],{},"every circuit that supplies the bathroom",". The only exceptions are final circuits on SELV, with electrical separation or forming part of a safety installation. This applies equally to lighting, sockets and permanently connected appliances.",[11,31714,31715],{},"Two details decide the design:",[43,31717,31718,31724],{},[46,31719,31720,31721,31723],{},"The RCD is installed ",[35,31722,3345],{}," the bathroom.",[46,31725,31726,31727,31730],{},"In domestic installations it sits ",[35,31728,31729],{},"downstream"," of the RCD at the origin of the installation. The main RCD alone is not enough for the bathroom.",[11,31732,31733],{},"The same 30 mA RCD may also protect circuits in other rooms.",[27,31735,13236],{"id":31736},"supplementary-equipotential-bonding",[11,31738,31739],{},"Subsection 7.1.4.4 requires supplementary equipotential bonding in the bathroom: it locally connects the exposed conductive parts of electrical equipment to the simultaneously accessible extraneous conductive parts, such as metal water and heating pipes, a metal bath or a metal waste pipe. Exempt are SELV equipment, plastic pipes, radiators fed by plastic pipes and class II equipment.",[27,31741,31743],{"id":31742},"how-planelec-helps-with-the-bathroom","How PlanElec helps with the bathroom",[11,31745,31746,31747,94],{},"In PlanElec, assign each bathroom device its zone. The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check then flags bathroom circuits without a 30 mA RCD and equipment not allowed in zone 0, 1 or 2, such as a mains socket or mains switch in zone 1. You choose cable type, conduit and installation method using the rules above. The inspection of the installation is carried out by the recognised inspection body. The rules covered are listed in ",[23,31748,3459],{"href":2953},[11,31750,20617,31751,31754],{},[23,31752,20621],{"href":4466,"rel":31753},[4434],", chapter 7.1 and subsections 4.4.1.4, 5.2.7.2 to 5.2.7.4 and 5.2.9.",[27,31756,5054],{"id":4477},[43,31758,31759,31763,31767,31772],{},[46,31760,31761],{},[23,31762,20605],{"href":20604},[46,31764,31765],{},[23,31766,18905],{"href":9626},[46,31768,31769],{},[23,31770,31771],{"href":10616},"XVB cable or VOB wire?",[46,31773,31774],{},[23,31775,7197],{"href":7093},[11,31777,31778],{},[23,31779,31780],{"href":17817},"Plan your bathroom in PlanElec and check it yourself →",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":31782},[31783,31784,31785,31788,31789,31790,31791,31792],{"id":31416,"depth":291,"text":31417},{"id":31426,"depth":291,"text":31427},{"id":31525,"depth":291,"text":31526,"children":31786},[31787],{"id":31605,"depth":599,"text":31606},{"id":30824,"depth":291,"text":21837},{"id":31704,"depth":291,"text":31705},{"id":31736,"depth":291,"text":13236},{"id":31742,"depth":291,"text":31743},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":5054},"2026-03-09","XVB or VOB in conduit, with no metal elements: which wiring is allowed in bathroom zones 0, 1 and 2, how to install it and which RCD the bathroom needs.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fbathroom-cables-arei-zones.en",{"title":31410,"description":31794},"blog\u002Fbathroom-cables-arei-zones.en",[1979,1980,31800,31801,28989,30768,31802,399,7237,31803,1981,21231,23233,2981,319,31114,31115,31116,317,31804],"bathroom","zones","Preflex","30mA","CPR","ynNLOE5zXMbDU5mXyZLaKschWKkvFZbxKt4EpCJqH_4",{"id":31807,"title":31808,"articleId":31809,"body":31810,"category":8819,"date":32087,"description":32088,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":32089,"navigation":308,"path":32090,"publishDate":32087,"readTime":3670,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":32091,"seoTitle":305,"slug":31809,"stem":32092,"tags":32093,"__hash__":32095},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fwhat-is-a-situation-plan.en.md","What Is a Situation Plan?","what-is-a-situation-plan",{"type":8,"value":31811,"toc":32080},[31812,31818,31822,31835,31841,31845,31858,31933,31936,31940,31973,31976,31980,32053,32062,32064,32075],[11,31813,31814,31817],{},[35,31815,31816],{},"A situation plan is the floor plan of your electrical installation: it shows where distribution boards, boxes, sockets, lighting points, switches, fixed appliances and sources are located in the building."," AREI\u002FRGIE calls it a position plan and requires it together with the single-line diagram for every new domestic installation and for substantial modifications or extensions (Subsection 3.1.2.1 a).",[27,31819,31821],{"id":31820},"a-floor-plan-of-your-electrical-installation","A floor plan of your electrical installation",[11,31823,31824,31825,31828,31829,31831,31832,31834],{},"A situation plan (Dutch: ",[7299,31826,31827],{},"situatieplan",", French: ",[7299,31830,27974],{},") is a simplified floor plan showing the ",[35,31833,2280],{}," of the electrical components. Each point carries the same reference as on the single-line diagram: the letter of its circuit and its sequence number.",[11,31836,31837,31838,31840],{},"The single-line diagram shows the electrical structure, meaning which protective device supplies which circuit. The situation plan shows ",[35,31839,8841],{}," each point is.",[27,31842,31844],{"id":31843},"what-does-areirgie-say","What does AREI\u002FRGIE say?",[11,31846,31847,31848,31852,31853,31857],{},"The current ",[23,31849,31851],{"href":24781,"rel":31850},[4434],"AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1"," (Version 06) governs content and referencing; the Federal Public Service Economy's ",[23,31854,31856],{"href":15810,"rel":31855},[4434],"domestic-inspection guidance"," lists both plans among the documents to present.",[638,31859,31860,31870],{},[641,31861,31862],{},[644,31863,31864,31866,31868],{},[647,31865,25944],{},[647,31867,12601],{},[647,31869,3557],{},[657,31871,31872,31883,31893,31902,31911,31922],{},[644,31873,31874,31877,31880],{},[662,31875,31876],{},"Meaning of \"plan\"",[662,31878,31879],{},"Chapter 2.12",[662,31881,31882],{},"a to-scale representation of where the parts of the installation are; no specific scale ratio is prescribed",[644,31884,31885,31888,31890],{},[662,31886,31887],{},"Obligation",[662,31889,7373],{},[662,31891,31892],{},"single-line diagram and situation plan for new domestic installations and substantial modifications or extensions",[644,31894,31895,31897,31899],{},[662,31896,3557],{},[662,31898,7307],{},[662,31900,31901],{},"location of boards, junction and branch boxes, sockets, lighting points, switches, fixed appliances and sources",[644,31903,31904,31906,31908],{},[662,31905,16888],{},[662,31907,7373],{},[662,31909,31910],{},"circuit letter plus sequence number from the single-line diagram; switches carry the number of the point they control",[644,31912,31913,31916,31919],{},[662,31914,31915],{},"Symbols",[662,31917,31918],{},"Chapter 2.13, Table 2.23",[662,31920,31921],{},"official symbol list; you define missing symbols in the legend",[644,31923,31924,31927,31930],{},[662,31925,31926],{},"Installation file",[662,31928,31929],{},"9.1.2",[662,31931,31932],{},"the owner keeps single-line diagram, situation plan and inspection reports in the installation file",[11,31934,31935],{},"When the approved body establishes conformity at the inspection, it signs the diagram and plan together with the person responsible for the work. A missing or contradictory plan appears in the inspection report; only the approved inspection body determines the official outcome.",[27,31937,31939],{"id":31938},"what-must-be-on-the-situation-plan","What must be on the situation plan?",[43,31941,31942,31945,31948,31951,31954,31957,31960,31967,31970],{},[46,31943,31944],{},"a clear, simplified floor plan of each relevant storey",[46,31946,31947],{},"distribution and switchgear boards",[46,31949,31950],{},"junction and branch boxes",[46,31952,31953],{},"every socket, lighting point and switch",[46,31955,31956],{},"fixed machines and appliances such as hob, water heater or EV charger",[46,31958,31959],{},"sources such as a PV inverter or battery",[46,31961,31962,31963,31966],{},"for each point the circuit letter and number, ",[35,31964,31965],{},"identical"," to the single-line diagram",[46,31968,31969],{},"symbols from Table 2.23 and a legend for any custom signs",[46,31971,31972],{},"number, revision and date, installation address and details of the responsible person",[11,31974,31975],{},"You always draw a change on the situation plan, even when a short description is enough for the single-line diagram (3.1.2.1 a).",[27,31977,31979],{"id":31978},"situation-plan-and-single-line-diagram-compared","Situation plan and single-line diagram compared",[638,31981,31982,31992],{},[641,31983,31984],{},[644,31985,31986,31988,31990],{},[647,31987,8613],{},[647,31989,3892],{},[647,31991,3075],{},[657,31993,31994,32005,32015,32025,32034,32044],{},[644,31995,31996,31999,32002],{},[662,31997,31998],{},"Representation",[662,32000,32001],{},"floor plan with the location of points",[662,32003,32004],{},"diagram with one line per circuit",[644,32006,32007,32010,32013],{},[662,32008,32009],{},"Shows location",[662,32011,32012],{},"yes — exactly where",[662,32014,7333],{},[644,32016,32017,32020,32022],{},[662,32018,32019],{},"Shows structure",[662,32021,7333],{},[662,32023,32024],{},"yes — from the supply point to the consumer",[644,32026,32027,32029,32031],{},[662,32028,997],{},[662,32030,16873],{},[662,32032,32033],{},"type, ratings and order",[644,32035,32036,32038,32041],{},[662,32037,5238],{},[662,32039,32040],{},"routes can be drawn",[662,32042,32043],{},"type, cross-section, number of conductors, installation method",[644,32045,32046,32048,32051],{},[662,32047,2151],{},[662,32049,32050],{},"to scale, without a prescribed ratio",[662,32052,16860],{},[11,32054,32055,32056,32059,32060,94],{},"Both documents belong together and are equally mandatory. To draw one room by room, read ",[23,32057,32058],{"href":8160},"How to draw a situation plan","; the detailed comparison is in ",[23,32061,28631],{"href":13313},[27,32063,5054],{"id":4477},[43,32065,32066,32070],{},[46,32067,32068],{},[23,32069,28626],{"href":8154},[46,32071,32072],{},[23,32073,32074],{"href":9278},"How much does an electrical plan cost in Belgium?",[11,32076,32077],{},[23,32078,32079],{"href":17817},"Draw your situation plan with PlanElec — start free →",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":32081},[32082,32083,32084,32085,32086],{"id":31820,"depth":291,"text":31821},{"id":31843,"depth":291,"text":31844},{"id":31938,"depth":291,"text":31939},{"id":31978,"depth":291,"text":31979},{"id":4477,"depth":291,"text":5054},"2026-03-06","A situation plan shows where the electrical components in your building are located. What AREI\u002FRGIE requires on it, how it links to the single-line diagram and what the inspection checks.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fwhat-is-a-situation-plan.en",{"title":31808,"description":32088},"blog\u002Fwhat-is-a-situation-plan.en",[1979,1980,317,32094,31117,31118,319,31114,31115,31116,1981,21231,316,2981],"situatieschema","-by5ZUvUtYEfTdBM8NE-VLujI7qGWvBvWnjX7g0rGLA",{"id":32097,"title":32098,"articleId":32099,"body":32100,"category":8819,"date":32420,"description":32421,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":32422,"navigation":308,"path":32423,"publishDate":32420,"readTime":1974,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":32424,"seoTitle":305,"slug":32099,"stem":32425,"tags":32426,"__hash__":32429},"blog\u002Fblog\u002F30ma-rcd-per-socket.en.md","A 30 mA RCD for Every Socket? The AREI Rule (2026)","30ma-rcd-per-socket",{"type":8,"value":32101,"toc":32408},[32102,32106,32115,32118,32121,32125,32128,32173,32180,32183,32193,32197,32243,32246,32250,32260,32264,32271,32292,32302,32306,32312,32315,32319,32326,32337,32340,32343,32357,32361,32364,32367,32371,32379,32381,32400],[27,32103,32105],{"id":32104},"short-answer-neither-per-socket-nor-per-circuit","Short answer: neither per socket nor per circuit",[11,32107,32108,32110,32111,32114],{},[35,32109,21379],{}," AREI does not require a dedicated 30 mA residual-current device (RCD) for every socket, nor a separate RCD for every socket circuit. In a new home, one high- or very-high-sensitivity RCD (30 mA maximum) protects the required final circuits together – ",[35,32112,32113],{},"up to eight final circuits per RCD"," (AREI Book 1, subsection 4.2.4.3(b)).",[11,32116,32117],{},"You count circuits downstream of the RCD, not sockets. A power strip changes nothing: it plugs into an existing socket and creates neither a new circuit nor its own protection.",[11,32119,32120],{},"This article covers domestic AC installations under Book 1, version 06, applicable since 1 April 2026. DC installations, swimming pools and other special installations have additional rules.",[27,32122,32124],{"id":32123},"what-arei-requires-for-a-new-installation","What AREI requires for a new installation",[11,32126,32127],{},"At the origin of the installation there is at least one RCD rated at no more than 300 mA. Immediately downstream follows at least one high- or very-high-sensitivity RCD, to which at least these circuits are connected (4.2.4.3(b)):",[638,32129,32130,32140],{},[641,32131,32132],{},[644,32133,32134,32137],{},[647,32135,32136],{},"Circuit or room",[647,32138,32139],{},"What it means for your design",[657,32141,32142,32150,32157,32165],{},[644,32143,32144,32147],{},[662,32145,32146],{},"Socket outlets not intended for fixed appliances",[662,32148,32149],{},"All ordinary socket circuits sit behind the 30 mA RCD.",[644,32151,32152,32154],{},[662,32153,9090],{},[662,32155,32156],{},"Lighting circuits are included in a new installation.",[644,32158,32159,32162],{},[662,32160,32161],{},"Rooms with a bath and\u002For shower",[662,32163,32164],{},"Circuits supplying these rooms get the sensitive protection.",[644,32166,32167,32170],{},[662,32168,32169],{},"Washing machine, tumble dryer, dishwasher",[662,32171,32172],{},"AREI names these appliances explicitly.",[11,32174,32175,32176,32179],{},"Each such RCD protects ",[35,32177,32178],{},"no more than eight final circuits",". Six suitable final circuits can therefore sit behind a single 30 mA RCD. Two groups of three are a design choice for better availability, not an obligation.",[11,32181,32182],{},"Fixed appliances such as a refrigerator, electric cooker or electric heating may connect, per circuit or group, to an additional RCD at the origin. That is not a back door for putting sockets or lighting behind 300 mA – and washing machines, dryers and dishwashers are explicitly on the 30 mA list. Heating by resistors embedded in walls at more than 25 V AC gets its own RCD of no more than 100 mA.",[11,32184,32185,32186,32189,32190,94],{},"In domestic installations the RCD must be ",[35,32187,32188],{},"at least Type A","; the one at the origin has a rated current of at least 40 A (5.3.5.3(a)). When Type A is not enough is explained in ",[23,32191,32192],{"href":7208},"RCD Type A or Type B",[27,32194,32196],{"id":32195},"three-eight-rules-that-get-mixed-up","Three \"eight\" rules that get mixed up",[638,32198,32199,32210],{},[641,32200,32201],{},[644,32202,32203,32205,32208],{},[647,32204,9487],{},[647,32206,32207],{},"What you count",[647,32209,9490],{},[657,32211,32212,32222,32233],{},[644,32213,32214,32217,32220],{},[662,32215,32216],{},"Max. 8 final circuits per 30 mA RCD",[662,32218,32219],{},"Circuits downstream of the RCD, not sockets",[662,32221,29292],{},[644,32223,32224,32227,32230],{},[662,32225,32226],{},"Max. 8 socket outlets per final circuit",[662,32228,32229],{},"Single or multiple socket outlets; a multiple outlet counts once",[662,32231,32232],{},"5.3.5.2(b)",[644,32234,32235,32238,32241],{},[662,32236,32237],{},"Mixed circuit (sockets, lighting, appliances)",[662,32239,32240],{},"Each fixed appliance, or group operated by one common control device, counts as one socket outlet",[662,32242,32232],{},[11,32244,32245],{},"A living room with four double sockets can therefore be a single final circuit. Conversely, eight circuits behind one RCD are already the limit, even if each feeds only one socket. Appliances that need their own circuit under 5.2.1.2 do not belong in a mixed circuit.",[27,32247,32249],{"id":32248},"cable-size-and-overcurrent-protection","Cable size and overcurrent protection",[11,32251,32252,32253,90,32256,32259],{},"Socket circuits are run in copper of at least 2.5 mm² (5.2.1.2). Table 4.11 (4.4.1.4) limits their protection to ",[35,32254,32255],{},"20 A with a circuit breaker",[35,32257,32258],{},"16 A with a fuse",". That is a ceiling: installation method, grouping, ambient temperature, length and voltage drop can require a lower rating or a larger cross-section.",[27,32261,32263],{"id":32262},"earthing-resistance-above-30-ohms","Earthing resistance above 30 ohms",[11,32265,32266,32267,32270],{},"The 30-ohm threshold does not replace the 30 mA rule – it tightens it. If the earth electrode's dispersion resistance is ",[35,32268,32269],{},"higher than 30 ohms",", 4.2.4.3(b) requires:",[43,32272,32273,32279,32285],{},[46,32274,32275,32278],{},[35,32276,32277],{},"at least two"," high- or very-high-sensitivity RCDs,",[46,32280,32281,32284],{},[35,32282,32283],{},"no more than sixteen"," single or multiple socket outlets per RCD (a fixed appliance, or a group operated by one common control device, counts as a socket outlet),",[46,32286,32287,32288,32291],{},"for fixed-appliance circuits and all other circuits outside the 30 mA list, additionally at least one RCD of no more than ",[35,32289,32290],{},"100 mA"," per circuit or group of circuits.",[11,32293,32294,32295,32298,32299,94],{},"The sixteen counts socket outlets, not circuits; the eight-circuit limit still applies. A reading of exactly 30 ohms is not \"higher than 30 ohms\". In domestic installations the dispersion resistance must also be ",[35,32296,32297],{},"below 100 ohms"," (4.2.3.2). If that is not achieved, extra RCDs will not rescue the installation – the earthing itself has to be improved. More in ",[23,32300,32301],{"href":8786},"Earthing in Belgium: TT or TN-S?",[27,32303,32305],{"id":32304},"bathroom-30-ma-is-only-part-of-the-protection","Bathroom: 30 mA is only part of the protection",[11,32307,32308,32309,32311],{},"Circuits supplying a room with a bath or shower are protected by one or more high- or very-high-sensitivity RCDs installed ",[35,32310,3345],{}," the bathroom (7.1.4.3). SELV circuits, electrical separation and safety installations are exempt. The same RCD may also protect circuits in other rooms.",[11,32313,32314],{},"Zones 0, 1 and 2, permitted equipment, degree of protection and supplementary bonding (7.1.4.4) are separate requirements. A 30 mA RCD does not make a socket in a prohibited zone acceptable. For existing bathrooms whose execution began before 1 March 2025, 6.5.8.1 point 3 provides targeted deviations – not a rule for a new bathroom.",[27,32316,32318],{"id":32317},"existing-installations-transition-for-work-started-before-1-june-2023","Existing installations: transition for work started before 1 June 2023",[11,32320,32321,32322,32325],{},"For existing parts of domestic installations whose on-site execution began on or after 1 June 2020 and ",[35,32323,32324],{},"before 1 June 2023"," and that passed a conformity inspection under chapter 6.4, 6.5.8.1 point 1 provides a deviation; for older installations, the same deviations are in Part 8 (8.2.1 no. 16, 8.2.2 no. 10). Under that provision's conditions:",[43,32327,32328,32331,32334],{},[46,32329,32330],{},"socket and lighting circuits may remain in service without today's 30 mA protection, including after non-important modifications or extensions to those circuits;",[46,32332,32333],{},"more than eight final circuits may remain behind a sensitive RCD;",[46,32335,32336],{},"where the earthing resistance exceeds 30 ohms, instead of today's layout, one RCD for all lighting and, for each other circuit or group, one RCD with no more than sixteen socket outlets may remain in service.",[11,32338,32339],{},"This is not a blanket exemption for every older house. Start date and existing part must match; the approved inspection body is informed and records the deviation in its inspection report. For an important modification or extension of an old installation under Part 8, at least one RCD at the origin protects the whole installation (4.2.4.3(b)). New installations or projects started after 1 June 2023 cannot rely on this transition.",[11,32341,32342],{},"How to approach an existing installation:",[105,32344,32345,32348,32351,32354],{},[46,32346,32347],{},"Establish when and how far the original work was carried out.",[46,32349,32350],{},"Decide whether this is an existing part, a non-important or an important modification.",[46,32352,32353],{},"Document the deviation applied.",[46,32355,32356],{},"Compare single-line diagram, situation plan and distribution board with what is actually installed.",[27,32358,32360],{"id":32359},"more-rcds-does-not-mean-never-a-power-cut","More RCDs does not mean: never a power cut",[11,32362,32363],{},"An RCD trips when it detects residual current. That is its job. Leakage currents, moisture or a faulty appliance will trip it. Several RCDs limit what goes dark – so that the fridge and the home office do not drop out together, for instance. Selectivity does not follow automatically; it depends on fault type, wiring and grading.",[11,32365,32366],{},"When surveying an installation, record not only \"30 mA\" but also type, rated current, number of poles and every final circuit actually connected. An outdated diagram easily suggests a correct count when neutrals or outgoing circuits in the board have since been rewired.",[27,32368,32370],{"id":32369},"plan-and-self-check-in-planelec","Plan and self-check in PlanElec",[11,32372,222,32373,32375,32376,32378],{},[23,32374,3710],{"href":5046}," you record circuits, RCDs and sockets in the editor and export the single-line diagram and situation plan as PDF. The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check flags, among other things, a missing main RCD of no more than 300 mA, socket circuits without a 30 mA RCD, more than eight final circuits per sensitive RCD and more than eight sockets or appliances per final circuit. The exact list of rules it checks is in ",[23,32377,4403],{"href":2953},". Measurements and the on-site inspection are done by the approved inspection body.",[27,32380,8764],{"id":8763},[43,32382,32383,32387,32392,32396],{},[46,32384,32385],{},[23,32386,32192],{"href":7208},[46,32388,32389],{},[23,32390,32391],{"href":14007},"Sockets: how many per circuit?",[46,32393,32394],{},[23,32395,25375],{"href":8154},[46,32397,32398],{},[23,32399,7197],{"href":7093},[11,32401,32402],{},[7299,32403,32404,32405,8806],{},"Legal basis: AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1, version 06, subsections 4.2.3.2, 4.2.4.3(b), 4.4.1.4 (Table 4.11), 5.2.1.2, 5.3.5.2(b), 5.3.5.3(a), 6.5.8.1, 7.1.4.3 and 7.1.4.4. The official text published by the ",[23,32406,8805],{"href":7174,"rel":32407},[4434],{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":32409},[32410,32411,32412,32413,32414,32415,32416,32417,32418,32419],{"id":32104,"depth":291,"text":32105},{"id":32123,"depth":291,"text":32124},{"id":32195,"depth":291,"text":32196},{"id":32248,"depth":291,"text":32249},{"id":32262,"depth":291,"text":32263},{"id":32304,"depth":291,"text":32305},{"id":32317,"depth":291,"text":32318},{"id":32359,"depth":291,"text":32360},{"id":32369,"depth":291,"text":32370},{"id":8763,"depth":291,"text":8764},"2026-03-04","No: AREI requires neither a 30 mA RCD per socket nor one per circuit. One 30 mA RCD protects up to eight final circuits – here is how to count, for new and existing installations.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002F30ma-rcd-per-socket.en",{"title":32098,"description":32421},"blog\u002F30ma-rcd-per-socket.en",[1979,1980,32427,7237,7238,32428,31803,31405,2586,7239,21231,23233,2981,319,317],"Book 1 V06","differential switch","jlYQkizuWeuyv29hdSffSB5UWOTpqitBC8YKmEZS13k",{"id":32431,"title":32432,"articleId":32433,"body":32434,"category":5101,"date":32878,"description":32879,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":32880,"navigation":308,"path":32881,"publishDate":305,"readTime":14199,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":32882,"seoTitle":305,"slug":32433,"stem":32883,"tags":32884,"__hash__":32887},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Felectrical-plan-costs.en.md","How Much Does an Electrical Plan Cost? Cost Factors 2026","electrical-plan-costs",{"type":8,"value":32435,"toc":32854},[32436,32440,32443,32450,32454,32466,32469,32534,32537,32541,32544,32636,32640,32643,32648,32651,32656,32659,32663,32666,32670,32673,32677,32684,32688,32693,32695,32747,32750,32754,32757,32760,32764,32787,32791,32794,32797,32799,32803,32806,32810,32813,32817,32820,32824,32830,32834,32837,32841,32844,32846,32849],[27,32437,32439],{"id":32438},"short-answer-the-price-follows-the-scope-of-work","Short answer: the price follows the scope of work",[11,32441,32442],{},"Belgium has no official flat rate for a single-line diagram and situation plan. The price comes from the specific job: is there a reliable survey, or does the installation have to be traced on site? Are only the two plans drawn, or do calculations, corrective work, a technical review and the official inspection belong to the job? A price range found online without a named sample, date, region and VAT status does not answer those questions.",[11,32444,32445,32446,32449],{},"So compare ",[35,32447,32448],{},"the same result for the same scope",", not a software price against an electrician’s invoice. PlanElec costs EUR 0 during early access; after the paid plans start, single property costs EUR 15 per property and Pro EUR 29 per month, excluding VAT. Your own time, measurements, materials, work on the installation, technical support and the inspection by an approved body are costed separately.",[27,32451,32453],{"id":32452},"which-documents-are-officially-required","Which documents are officially required?",[11,32455,32456,32457,2152,32461,32465],{},"The Belgian FPS Economy states that a domestic inspection requires at least the single-line diagram, the situation plan and, when available, the connection’s EAN code. The single-line diagram records cables, installation method, RCDs, overcurrent protection, switches, boxes, socket outlets, lighting points, fixed appliances and sources (AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 V06, Subsection 3.1.2.2 a). The situation plan shows where those items are (Subsection 3.1.2.3 a). Together with the inspection reports, they form the installation file (Section 9.1.2). The primary sources are the ",[23,32458,32460],{"href":15810,"rel":32459},[4434],"official federal domestic-inspection guidance",[23,32462,32464],{"href":4466,"rel":32463},[4434],"AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1 version 06","; this English article summarises the official national-language material.",[11,32467,32468],{},"Which documents you need depends on the occasion:",[638,32470,32471,32482],{},[641,32472,32473],{},[644,32474,32475,32478,32480],{},[647,32476,32477],{},"Occasion",[647,32479,19438],{},[647,32481,9490],{},[657,32483,32484,32495,32504,32512,32523],{},[644,32485,32486,32489,32492],{},[662,32487,32488],{},"New installation",[662,32490,32491],{},"single-line diagram, situation plan, conformity inspection before use",[662,32493,32494],{},"3.1.2.1 a, Chapter 6.4",[644,32496,32497,32499,32502],{},[662,32498,19450],{},[662,32500,32501],{},"updated plans; inspection of the modified and added parts",[662,32503,19459],{},[644,32505,32506,32508,32510],{},[662,32507,19477],{},[662,32509,19480],{},[662,32511,7373],{},[644,32513,32514,32517,32520],{},[662,32515,32516],{},"Sale of a dwelling with an old installation",[662,32518,32519],{},"inspection visit; existing file made available",[662,32521,32522],{},"Section 8.4.2",[644,32524,32525,32528,32531],{},[662,32526,32527],{},"Supply capacity increase for an old installation",[662,32529,32530],{},"inspection visit before the increase",[662,32532,32533],{},"Section 8.4.1",[11,32535,32536],{},"If the single-line diagram and situation plan are missing at the inspection visit on sale, the approved body draws up a brief description and a rough sketch. These do not replace the plans, and the absence is recorded as an infringement in the report (Subsection 8.4.2.2 d). If you are selling, plan the drawings in good time.",[27,32538,32540],{"id":32539},"define-the-scope-before-the-price","Define the scope before the price",[11,32542,32543],{},"A quotation becomes comparable once every item is described. This list stops a cheap drawing quote from growing later with necessary work.",[638,32545,32546,32556],{},[641,32547,32548],{},[644,32549,32550,32553],{},[647,32551,32552],{},"Component",[647,32554,32555],{},"What is explicitly agreed",[657,32557,32558,32566,32574,32581,32588,32596,32604,32612,32620,32628],{},[644,32559,32560,32563],{},[662,32561,32562],{},"Survey",[662,32564,32565],{},"Are rooms, loads, boxes, cable routes and boards surveyed on site, or do you supply verified data?",[644,32567,32568,32571],{},[662,32569,32570],{},"Circuit tracing",[662,32572,32573],{},"Are the assignments known, or must they be established by switching, measuring and opening suitable points?",[644,32575,32576,32578],{},[662,32577,3075],{},[662,32579,32580],{},"Are all protective devices, conductor data, installation methods, sources and fixed appliances included?",[644,32582,32583,32585],{},[662,32584,3892],{},[662,32586,32587],{},"Is there a usable floor plan, and are the references to the circuits unambiguous?",[644,32589,32590,32593],{},[662,32591,32592],{},"Calculations",[662,32594,32595],{},"Are sizing, short-circuit, selectivity or voltage-drop calculations part of the job?",[644,32597,32598,32601],{},[662,32599,32600],{},"Technical review",[662,32602,32603],{},"Does a qualified electrician check the as-built state and technical plausibility, or is it drawing only?",[644,32605,32606,32609],{},[662,32607,32608],{},"Corrective work",[662,32610,32611],{},"Is work on the board, cables or equipment included?",[644,32613,32614,32617],{},[662,32615,32616],{},"Inspection appointment",[662,32618,32619],{},"Is the approved body’s fee included or separate?",[644,32621,32622,32625],{},[662,32623,32624],{},"Revisions",[662,32626,32627],{},"How many technically justified correction rounds are included?",[644,32629,32630,32633],{},[662,32631,32632],{},"VAT and travel",[662,32634,32635],{},"Does the amount include VAT, travel and any extra appointments?",[27,32637,32639],{"id":32638},"an-editable-calculation-model-instead-of-invented-market-prices","An editable calculation model instead of invented market prices",[11,32641,32642],{},"Enter only values that come from your quotation or your own time estimate:",[11,32644,32645],{},[842,32646,32647],{},"Total scenario = survey + drawing + technical review + corrective work + inspection + travel + own time",[11,32649,32650],{},"Value your own work with a personal comparison rate:",[11,32652,32653],{},[842,32654,32655],{},"valued own time = documented hours × personal comparison rate per hour",[11,32657,32658],{},"That rate is not a Belgian market tariff. It shows that a weekend of work is not economically free. Conversely, an external flat fee is not expensive if survey, measurement, technical responsibility and revisions are included.",[385,32660,32662],{"id":32661},"scenario-a-complete-data-is-available","Scenario A: complete data is available",[11,32664,32665],{},"The board is clearly labelled, circuit assignments are checked, a scaled floor plan exists and the protective-device data is legible. The work then consists mainly of taking over data, checking plausibility and drawing. PlanElec provides the shared project model of floor plan, topology and board plus the PDF output; an electrician checks the data in a targeted way.",[385,32667,32669],{"id":32668},"scenario-b-old-installation-without-reliable-records","Scenario B: old installation without reliable records",[11,32671,32672],{},"If cross-sections, installation methods or assignments are unknown, drawing is the last step. First a competent person surveys the installation safely; opening enclosures, measuring and intervening belong in professional hands. Here the survey often costs more than producing the plans, and that is exactly the item that must appear clearly in the quotation.",[385,32674,32676],{"id":32675},"scenario-c-renovation-with-open-design-decisions","Scenario C: renovation with open design decisions",[11,32678,32679,32680,94],{},"For new circuits, PV, a home battery, an EV charger, a heat pump or board changes, the technical design is settled first; the diagram documents that decision. Ask for a quotation that separates design, manufacturer data, grid operator conditions, execution and inspection. You will then see later which item changed. Which renovation triggers new plans is explained in ",[23,32681,32683],{"href":32682},"\u002Fen\u002Fblog\u002Frenovation-electrical-plans","Renovation and AREI",[385,32685,32687],{"id":32686},"scenario-d-sale-with-a-deadline","Scenario D: sale with a deadline",[11,32689,32690,32691,94],{},"Time pressure alone does not justify an express surcharge. Ask for a written quotation with delivery date, prerequisites and correction process. Agree who books the inspection visit and which existing reports belong in the file. A hastily drawn plan that does not show the as-built state does not solve the documentation problem. More in ",[23,32692,19919],{"href":19918},[27,32694,20323],{"id":20322},[638,32696,32697,32707],{},[641,32698,32699],{},[644,32700,32701,32703,32705],{},[647,32702,20338],{},[647,32704,17905],{},[647,32706,6904],{},[657,32708,32709,32720,32729,32738],{},[644,32710,32711,32714,32717],{},[662,32712,32713],{},"Early access",[662,32715,32716],{},"EUR 0 until the paid plans start",[662,32718,32719],{},"full feature set, no invoice",[644,32721,32722,32724,32726],{},[662,32723,20349],{},[662,32725,20352],{},[662,32727,32728],{},"complete planning with no project or circuit limit; exports with masked areas over the usable figures",[644,32730,32731,32733,32735],{},[662,32732,20360],{},[662,32734,20363],{},[662,32736,32737],{},"all documents without masked areas for exactly one confirmed property address",[644,32739,32740,32742,32744],{},[662,32741,20371],{},[662,32743,20374],{},[662,32745,32746],{},"all projects and documents without masked areas, three editing seats, each extra seat EUR 10 per month",[11,32748,32749],{},"All prices exclude 21 % VAT; single property therefore costs EUR 18.15 including VAT. From two properties a month, Pro is cheaper than two single-property purchases. We will announce the start date of the paid plans well in advance. If you register before the start, you use PlanElec free of charge for the first full calendar month after the start. Registration, login and invitations never cost anything; costs only arise from an explicit booking.",[27,32751,32753],{"id":32752},"what-planelec-contributes-today","What PlanElec contributes today",[11,32755,32756],{},"PlanElec brings floor plan, electrical topology and board planning together in one project. The single-line diagram and situation plan are exported as PDFs, as is a compiled installation dossier with cover sheet and document index. The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check evaluates the supported rules that can be decided from your data and shows data gaps. The detailed, manufacturer-neutral material list is available as a pilot feature; it is not an order release.",[11,32758,32759],{},"The roles are therefore clear: PlanElec produces the plans from your project model and keeps the documents consistent. The on-site survey, technical design and installation stay with the electrician, and the approved body writes the inspection report. Whether that pays off for you depends on how complete your project data already is.",[27,32761,32763],{"id":32762},"how-to-obtain-comparable-quotations","How to obtain comparable quotations",[105,32765,32766,32769,32772,32775,32778,32781,32784],{},[46,32767,32768],{},"Describe the building, supply, number of boards and known circuits.",[46,32770,32771],{},"Mention special sources and loads such as PV, battery, EV charger or heat pump.",[46,32773,32774],{},"Share existing plans and inspection reports without guessing unknown data.",[46,32776,32777],{},"Ask for separate items for survey, drawing, technical review, execution and inspection.",[46,32779,32780],{},"Ask about VAT, travel, delivery format and correction rounds.",[46,32782,32783],{},"Compare not only the total but also responsibility and coverage.",[46,32785,32786],{},"After changes, document the as-built state and keep the documents in the installation file.",[27,32788,32790],{"id":32789},"agree-handover-and-revision-as-a-separate-service","Agree handover and revision as a separate service",[11,32792,32793],{},"A good quotation states not only “plan as PDF” but the handed-over working state. Agree which existing documents were checked, which data you supplied and which unknowns remain open. Record how many correction rounds are included, who reports changes after the site work and which file version then counts as the as-built state.",[11,32795,32796],{},"A short checklist helps at handover: do the circuit references match between board, single-line diagram and situation plan? Have new and removed devices been updated? Are assumptions marked as assumptions? Are datasheets and measurement records with the responsible party? Only this handover makes drawing, technical review and later maintenance comparable. A low quotation without agreed revisions quickly becomes more expensive at the next change.",[27,32798,4995],{"id":4994},[385,32800,32802],{"id":32801},"which-data-should-i-gather-before-asking-for-a-quotation","Which data should I gather before asking for a quotation?",[11,32804,32805],{},"Start with everything visible without intervention: address and supply type, number and location of boards, legible ratings of RCDs and circuit breakers, circuit names, floor plan, earlier diagrams and inspection reports. Record fixed loads and sources separately. Mark unknown values explicitly as unknown. An invented cross-section makes a drawing look complete and technically worthless. Photos help with preparation; they do not replace safely establishing concealed cable data.",[385,32807,32809],{"id":32808},"which-services-must-not-disappear-into-a-plan-price","Which services must not disappear into a “plan price”?",[11,32811,32812],{},"Changes to the installation, fault finding, measurement reports, sizing according to manufacturer conditions and resolving an inspection finding are separate services. Grid operator procedures for generation or storage do not run automatically either. If these steps are needed, they appear as separate items with result, responsible party and deadline. That protects both sides: you see what is delivered, and the contractor takes no responsibility for parts that were not ordered.",[385,32814,32816],{"id":32815},"how-do-i-handle-changes-after-the-first-export","How do I handle changes after the first export?",[11,32818,32819],{},"Keep a traceable baseline version, enter confirmed changes in the project and situation plan and have technical changes checked. Record not just “kitchen changed” but which circuit, protective device, cable and points the change affects. The next correction round then stays a limited update rather than a new survey.",[385,32821,32823],{"id":32822},"may-i-draw-the-diagram-myself","May I draw the diagram myself?",[11,32825,32826,32827,94],{},"The AREI states who draws up the single-line diagram: the person responsible for carrying out the work (Subsection 3.1.2.1 a). What matters is that the documents show the actual state correctly and are available during the inspection. Drawing yourself is not installing yourself: surveying live parts and installation work stay with professionals. A side-by-side comparison of both routes is in the ",[23,32828,32829],{"href":9282},"cost comparison: DIY or electrician",[385,32831,32833],{"id":32832},"does-a-planelec-pdf-mean-the-installation-is-compliant","Does a PlanElec PDF mean the installation is compliant?",[11,32835,32836],{},"No. The PDF documents your project data, and the self-check tests the supported rules on an indicative basis. Whether the inspected installation meets the regulations is established by the approved body in the prescribed procedure.",[385,32838,32840],{"id":32839},"what-is-the-main-cost-driver","What is the main cost driver?",[11,32842,32843],{},"Not floor area, but uncertainty about the as-built state and the agreed scope. Known, verified data reduces survey effort; unknown cables, several boards or technical changes increase it.",[27,32845,4418],{"id":4417},[11,32847,32848],{},"A sound price for an electrical plan is a project-specific quotation. Separate survey, drawing, technical review, work and inspection, value your own time too and compare equivalent services. PlanElec structures the documentation and costs nothing during early access; technical design, installation and inspection remain separate items.",[11,32850,32851],{},[23,32852,32853],{"href":17817},"Create a project in the free early access →",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":32855},[32856,32857,32858,32859,32865,32866,32867,32868,32869,32877],{"id":32438,"depth":291,"text":32439},{"id":32452,"depth":291,"text":32453},{"id":32539,"depth":291,"text":32540},{"id":32638,"depth":291,"text":32639,"children":32860},[32861,32862,32863,32864],{"id":32661,"depth":599,"text":32662},{"id":32668,"depth":599,"text":32669},{"id":32675,"depth":599,"text":32676},{"id":32686,"depth":599,"text":32687},{"id":20322,"depth":291,"text":20323},{"id":32752,"depth":291,"text":32753},{"id":32762,"depth":291,"text":32763},{"id":32789,"depth":291,"text":32790},{"id":4994,"depth":291,"text":4995,"children":32870},[32871,32872,32873,32874,32875,32876],{"id":32801,"depth":599,"text":32802},{"id":32808,"depth":599,"text":32809},{"id":32815,"depth":599,"text":32816},{"id":32822,"depth":599,"text":32823},{"id":32832,"depth":599,"text":32833},{"id":32839,"depth":599,"text":32840},{"id":4417,"depth":291,"text":4418},"2026-02-19","What drives the price of a Belgian electrical plan, how to compare quotations with an editable calculation model and what PlanElec costs during early access and after the paid plans start.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Felectrical-plan-costs.en",{"title":32432,"description":32879},"blog\u002Felectrical-plan-costs.en",[1979,1980,319,31114,31115,31116,317,31117,31118,32885,32886,28690,1981,21231,25144,21735,2981],"cost","price","9f-X5fIMrpxySfUpRIouM6FkpDiFAZqsjAMxANAH3oU",{"id":32889,"title":32890,"articleId":22541,"body":32891,"category":5101,"date":33736,"description":33737,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":33738,"locale":306,"meta":33739,"navigation":308,"path":33740,"publishDate":305,"readTime":8196,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":33741,"seoTitle":33742,"slug":22541,"stem":33743,"tags":33744,"__hash__":33746},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Felectrical-inspection.en.md","Electrical Inspection in Belgium: Booking, Re-inspection and AREI Requirements",{"type":8,"value":32892,"toc":33714},[32893,32897,32900,32903,32909,32913,33004,33007,33011,33017,33104,33110,33114,33117,33173,33176,33180,33209,33212,33216,33223,33241,33244,33248,33251,33327,33330,33334,33337,33357,33361,33364,33390,33393,33399,33403,33406,33423,33426,33430,33433,33437,33440,33443,33447,33450,33539,33542,33546,33549,33552,33556,33562,33568,33613,33622,33626,33629,33655,33660,33664,33667,33669,33675,33703,33709],[27,32894,32896],{"id":32895},"what-is-an-electrical-inspection","What is an electrical inspection?",[11,32898,32899],{},"The electrical inspection – the keuring – is the check of your installation by an approved inspection body. A new installation is inspected for conformity with the AREI\u002FRGIE before it is put into use (Book 1, chapter 6.4); after that come control visits, at the latest every 25 years for a domestic installation (section 6.5.2). The inspector reviews the documents, examines the installation, tests the protective devices and measures insulation resistance and earth electrode resistance. For a new installation, the grid operator only makes the power available once a positive conformity report exists (subsection 6.4.6.2).",[11,32901,32902],{},"Which inspection applies to you depends on the trigger: new build, significant extension, periodic visit, sale of a home with an old installation, or an increase in connection capacity. This guide sorts the cases, lists the requirements an inspector typically checks in a home and shows you how to prepare documents that match the installation as built.",[11,32904,32905,32908],{},[35,32906,32907],{},"Editing and review: PlanElec team, 8 October 2026."," All references point to AREI\u002FRGIE Book 1, version 06, applicable since 1 April 2026.",[27,32910,32912],{"id":32911},"when-do-you-need-an-inspection","When do you need an inspection?",[638,32914,32915,32927],{},[641,32916,32917],{},[644,32918,32919,32922,32925],{},[647,32920,32921],{},"Trigger",[647,32923,32924],{},"What is inspected",[647,32926,21768],{},[657,32928,32929,32939,32950,32961,32971,32982,32993],{},[644,32930,32931,32933,32936],{},[662,32932,32488],{},[662,32934,32935],{},"Conformity inspection before putting into use",[662,32937,32938],{},"chapter 6.4",[644,32940,32941,32944,32947],{},[662,32942,32943],{},"Significant modification or extension, for example a new circuit",[662,32945,32946],{},"Added or modified parts; affected unchanged parts with regard to the modified characteristics",[662,32948,32949],{},"subsection 6.4.7.3",[644,32951,32952,32955,32958],{},[662,32953,32954],{},"Non-significant modification, for example a socket on an existing circuit",[662,32956,32957],{},"No inspection before use; a short description goes into the installation file",[662,32959,32960],{},"section 9.1.2 no. 7",[644,32962,32963,32965,32968],{},[662,32964,22616],{},[662,32966,32967],{},"Domestic installations at the latest every 25 years, other installations every 5 years",[662,32969,32970],{},"section 6.5.2",[644,32972,32973,32976,32979],{},[662,32974,32975],{},"Sale of a dwelling with an old installation (before 1 October 1981)",[662,32977,32978],{},"Control visit arranged by the seller",[662,32980,32981],{},"section 8.4.2",[644,32983,32984,32987,32990],{},[662,32985,32986],{},"Higher connection capacity for an old domestic installation",[662,32988,32989],{},"Control visit before the grid operator increases the capacity",[662,32991,32992],{},"section 8.4.1",[644,32994,32995,32998,33001],{},[662,32996,32997],{},"Negative report",[662,32999,33000],{},"New inspection once the infringements are corrected",[662,33002,33003],{},"chapter 9.1, section 8.4.2",[11,33005,33006],{},"A modification is significant when it has an additional impact on the safety of people or property that no conformity inspection has covered yet (definition in part 2). Describe the actual work to your electrician and the inspection body instead of just ticking \"renovation\". That way the body schedules the right type of inspection and the right scope.",[27,33008,33010],{"id":33009},"booking-an-electrical-inspection-which-body","Booking an electrical inspection: which body?",[11,33012,33013,33014,94],{},"You book an electrical inspection with an approved inspection body: a body approved by the minister responsible for energy to carry out conformity inspections before use and control visits (section 6.3.1). To be approved, it must be accredited to NBN EN ISO\u002FIEC 17020 and meet the requirements for a type A inspection body (subsection 6.3.3.1 a). The competent authority may also carry out the inspection (sections 6.4.1 and 6.5.1). The current list of approved bodies is published by the ",[23,33015,8805],{"href":22919,"rel":33016},[4434],[638,33018,33019,33030],{},[641,33020,33021],{},[644,33022,33023,33025,33028],{},[647,33024,12591],{},[647,33026,33027],{},"What to know when booking",[647,33029,21768],{},[657,33031,33032,33042,33052,33062,33072,33083,33094],{},[644,33033,33034,33036,33039],{},[662,33035,32488],{},[662,33037,33038],{},"Book the inspection before first use; without a positive report the grid operator does not make power available",[662,33040,33041],{},"6.4.1, 6.4.6.2",[644,33043,33044,33047,33050],{},[662,33045,33046],{},"Significant modification or extension",[662,33048,33049],{},"Inspection before the new part is used; it is limited to the added or modified part",[662,33051,12719],{},[644,33053,33054,33056,33059],{},[662,33055,22616],{},[662,33057,33058],{},"The latest date is stated in the report of the previous inspection",[662,33060,33061],{},"6.4.6.4 b.6, 6.5.2",[644,33063,33064,33067,33070],{},[662,33065,33066],{},"Sale of a home with an old installation",[662,33068,33069],{},"The seller has the control visit carried out; the report date is recorded in the authentic deed",[662,33071,21314],{},[644,33073,33074,33077,33080],{},[662,33075,33076],{},"Connection capacity increase for an old installation",[662,33078,33079],{},"The inspection report accompanies the request for the increase",[662,33081,33082],{},"8.4.1",[644,33084,33085,33088,33091],{},[662,33086,33087],{},"Re-inspection after a negative periodic visit",[662,33089,33090],{},"The follow-up visit is carried out by the same approved body",[662,33092,33093],{},"6.5.7.2 b.6, 9.1.3.2",[644,33095,33096,33099,33102],{},[662,33097,33098],{},"Re-inspection after a sale inspection",[662,33100,33101],{},"The buyer chooses the approved body freely",[662,33103,21314],{},[11,33105,33106,33109],{},[35,33107,33108],{},"Have this information ready when booking."," The report states, among other things, the name and address of the owner, manager or operator, the installation's EAN code (if available), the address of the installation and the type of premises it supplies (subsections 6.4.6.4 b.1 and 6.5.7.2 b.1). For a conformity inspection, it also names the person responsible for carrying out the work, with VAT number where applicable, and the electricity distribution company. Practical questions to ask when booking are covered further down in this article.",[27,33111,33113],{"id":33112},"how-long-is-an-electrical-inspection-valid","How long is an electrical inspection valid?",[11,33115,33116],{},"A positive report confirms conformity at the time of the inspection; the next control visit must take place at the latest within the interval of section 6.5.2. For a domestic installation that is every 25 years, and the conformity inspection report itself states the latest date (subsection 6.4.6.4 b.6).",[638,33118,33119,33131],{},[641,33120,33121],{},[644,33122,33123,33126,33129],{},[647,33124,33125],{},"Type of installation",[647,33127,33128],{},"Control visit at least",[647,33130,9490],{},[657,33132,33133,33144,33154,33164],{},[644,33134,33135,33138,33141],{},[662,33136,33137],{},"Domestic installation",[662,33139,33140],{},"every 25 years",[662,33142,33143],{},"6.5.2",[644,33145,33146,33149,33152],{},[662,33147,33148],{},"Other installations, for example non-domestic",[662,33150,33151],{},"every 5 years",[662,33153,33143],{},[644,33155,33156,33159,33162],{},[662,33157,33158],{},"Movable, mobile or temporary installation",[662,33160,33161],{},"every year",[662,33163,33143],{},[644,33165,33166,33169,33171],{},[662,33167,33168],{},"Installation in an explosive atmosphere zone",[662,33170,33161],{},[662,33172,33143],{},[11,33174,33175],{},"Book 1 does not provide for \"extending\" an inspection. As the date in your last report approaches, you have a new control visit carried out; the periodic interval then starts again. After a control visit of an old installation, too, sections 6.5.1 and 6.5.2 apply to every later visit (section 8.4.1 and subsection 8.4.2.3).",[385,33177,33179],{"id":33178},"when-do-you-need-a-new-inspection-sooner","When do you need a new inspection sooner?",[43,33181,33182,33187,33192,33198,33203],{},[46,33183,33184,33186],{},[35,33185,33046],{},": conformity inspection of that part before use (subsection 6.4.7.3).",[46,33188,33189,33191],{},[35,33190,33066],{},": if the installation dates from before 1 October 1981 and that part has not yet had a control visit (subsection 8.4.2.1).",[46,33193,33194,33197],{},[35,33195,33196],{},"Connection capacity increase"," for an old domestic installation (section 8.4.1).",[46,33199,33200,33202],{},[35,33201,32997],{},": a re-inspection once the infringements are corrected (see below: bringing the installation into compliance and re-inspection).",[46,33204,33205,33208],{},[35,33206,33207],{},"Installation inspected under the old AREI",": the first control visit under section 6.5.2 takes place within the interval set in the last report under the old AREI (section 8.1.2).",[11,33210,33211],{},"If you sell a home whose installation has already had a conformity inspection or a control visit, it falls outside the scope of section 8.4.2. You still hand the file with diagrams, plans and reports to the new owner (section 9.1.2), and the interval from the last report continues to apply.",[27,33213,33215],{"id":33214},"the-documents-you-present","The documents you present",[11,33217,955,33218,33222],{},[23,33219,33221],{"href":15810,"rel":33220},[4434],"FPS Economy page on domestic installation inspections"," lists at least the single-line diagram, the situation plan and – if available – the EAN code of the connection.",[43,33224,33225,33230,33235],{},[46,33226,33227,33229],{},[35,33228,3075],{}," (eendraadschema \u002F schéma unifilaire): all boards, circuits, protective devices and wiring with their characteristics (subsection 3.1.2.2).",[46,33231,33232,33234],{},[35,33233,3892],{}," (situatieplan \u002F plan de position): the location of boards, boxes, sockets, light points, switches, fixed appliances and sources (subsection 3.1.2.3).",[46,33236,33237,33240],{},[35,33238,33239],{},"Manufacturer documents"," for special equipment. For a PV system, the file includes operating instructions, safety instructions and the technical data of the components (section 9.1.2).",[11,33242,33243],{},"In a conformity inspection, the report expressly certifies that the installation was built according to the single-line diagram and situation plan (subsection 6.4.6.4, b.4). A plan showing an outdated state stands out just as much as a missing drawing.",[27,33245,33247],{"id":33246},"the-requirements-an-inspector-checks-in-a-home","The requirements an inspector checks in a home",[11,33249,33250],{},"The table brings together Book 1 requirements that regularly sit at the centre of a domestic inspection. It does not replace the full text, but it shows you where to look before the appointment.",[638,33252,33253,33261],{},[641,33254,33255],{},[644,33256,33257,33259],{},[647,33258,24062],{},[647,33260,9490],{},[657,33262,33263,33269,33276,33284,33291,33299,33306,33313,33320],{},[644,33264,33265,33267],{},[662,33266,25401],{},[662,33268,12631],{},[644,33270,33271,33274],{},[662,33272,33273],{},"High- or very-high-sensitivity RCD (at most 30 mA) for sockets, lighting, bathroom\u002Fshower and washing machine, tumble dryer and dishwasher; at most eight final circuits per device",[662,33275,12631],{},[644,33277,33278,33281],{},[662,33279,33280],{},"Earth electrode resistance below 100 Ω; above 30 Ω at least two high-sensitivity RCDs with at most 16 sockets each and at most 100 mA for the remaining circuits",[662,33282,33283],{},"4.2.3.2 and 4.2.4.3 b",[644,33285,33286,33289],{},[662,33287,33288],{},"Protective device matched to the cross-section, e.g. 1.5 mm²: circuit breaker 16 A or fuse 10 A; 2.5 mm²: 20 A or 16 A",[662,33290,22751],{},[644,33292,33293,33296],{},[662,33294,33295],{},"Socket circuits at least 2.5 mm²; at most eight single or multiple socket outlets per final circuit",[662,33297,33298],{},"5.2.1.2 and 5.3.5.2 b",[644,33300,33301,33304],{},[662,33302,33303],{},"At least two separate lighting circuits when the dwelling has more than two rooms",[662,33305,13075],{},[644,33307,33308,33311],{},[662,33309,33310],{},"Dedicated circuit for washing machine, dishwasher, tumble dryer, cooker, hob, oven and every appliance with a fixed location from 2600 W",[662,33312,9164],{},[644,33314,33315,33318],{},[662,33316,33317],{},"Main switch-disconnector of at least 40 A in domestic installations",[662,33319,12916],{},[644,33321,33322,33325],{},[662,33323,33324],{},"Insulation resistance of at least 500 kΩ per circuit at a test voltage of 500 V DC",[662,33326,30953],{},[11,33328,33329],{},"The 30 Ω value is not a pass\u002Ffail line: above it, Book 1 requires a stricter RCD layout, and the earth must stay below 100 Ω in any case. A cable's current-carrying capacity also depends on installation method, insulation and ambient temperature (4.4.1.4). So have your electrician confirm the sizing and protection concept.",[385,33331,33333],{"id":33332},"typical-stumbling-blocks","Typical stumbling blocks",[11,33335,33336],{},"These points come up often in practice; no reliable ranking exists:",[43,33338,33339,33342,33345,33348,33351,33354],{},[46,33340,33341],{},"single-line diagram missing or showing an outdated state",[46,33343,33344],{},"too few or wrongly assigned high-sensitivity RCDs",[46,33346,33347],{},"an earth resistance without the matching RCD layout",[46,33349,33350],{},"cables not adequately fixed or mechanically protected",[46,33352,33353],{},"junction boxes without covers or not accessible",[46,33355,33356],{},"only one lighting circuit in a dwelling with more than two rooms",[27,33358,33360],{"id":33359},"what-happens-during-the-inspection","What happens during the inspection?",[11,33362,33363],{},"The conformity inspection is carried out with the installation de-energised and has four parts (section 6.4.1):",[105,33365,33366,33372,33378,33384],{},[46,33367,33368,33371],{},[35,33369,33370],{},"Administrative checks",": documents, installation data, comparison of single-line diagram and situation plan with the installation as built.",[46,33373,33374,33377],{},[35,33375,33376],{},"Visual checks",": equipment, wiring, covers, labelling and accessibility.",[46,33379,33380,33383],{},[35,33381,33382],{},"Checks by testing",": for example the operation of protective devices and the continuity of protective conductors and equipotential bonding.",[46,33385,33386,33389],{},[35,33387,33388],{},"Checks by measurement",": insulation resistance (6.4.5.1) and earth electrode resistance (6.4.5.2).",[11,33391,33392],{},"The report states the earth resistance and insulation level and certifies that RCDs and earth value, as well as overcurrent protection and wiring, are coordinated (6.4.6.4, b.4). If the installation conforms, the inspector endorses the single-line diagram and situation plan and states the date by which the next control visit must take place (b.6).",[11,33394,33395,33396,94],{},"Under version 06, the inspector also seals the RCD at the origin of a conforming installation. From 1 November 2026, that obligation ends with Book 1 version 07; the details are in our article ",[23,33397,33398],{"href":27092},"RCD sealing is abolished",[27,33400,33402],{"id":33401},"compare-documents-and-installation-before-the-appointment","Compare documents and installation before the appointment",[11,33404,33405],{},"Check both plans systematically against the installation as built:",[105,33407,33408,33411,33414,33417,33420],{},[46,33409,33410],{},"Do the circuit labels in the board, on the single-line diagram and on the situation plan match?",[46,33412,33413],{},"Are ratings, number of poles, cable type and cross-section recorded correctly?",[46,33415,33416],{},"Are new sockets, light points, fixed appliances and sources on the plan?",[46,33418,33419],{},"Can connection and junction boxes be found and reached?",[46,33421,33422],{},"Are the manufacturer documents for PV, charger, battery or other special equipment ready?",[11,33424,33425],{},"A neat drawing of an old state does not help you, and a technically sound installation still needs the prescribed plans. Mark open points and resolve them with your electrician before the appointment.",[27,33427,33429],{"id":33428},"prepare-for-visual-checks-and-measurements","Prepare for visual checks and measurements",[11,33431,33432],{},"Measured values are taken on the day, on your installation. Do not copy values from an old report and do not put estimated values on the plans. Make sure there is safe access to the board, the earth disconnecting link and every room; labels must be legible and covers complete. Announce special features such as PV, a battery, a backup function, a charging point or older parts of the installation in advance. Opening equipment and measuring live circuits is the electrician's job, not part of your preparation.",[27,33434,33436],{"id":33435},"questions-when-booking","Questions when booking",[11,33438,33439],{},"Tell the inspection body whether the use is domestic or non-domestic, which type of inspection you need, how many boards there are and which special sources exist. Ask whether documents are expected digitally or on paper, whether all rooms must be accessible and how an ongoing renovation is handled. Have the fee, payment method and rescheduling terms confirmed directly; another provider's published prices do not automatically apply to you.",[11,33441,33442],{},"For a sale inspection, share the construction year and earlier reports. For a significant extension, describe the existing part and the new part. For PV, storage or a charger, state the operating mode and the manufacturer documents. That lets the body plan the inspection type and duration correctly.",[27,33444,33446],{"id":33445},"what-does-an-electrical-inspection-or-re-inspection-cost","What does an electrical inspection or re-inspection cost?",[11,33448,33449],{},"Book 1 sets no fees: you agree the price of an inspection or re-inspection with the approved body. What the regulation does show is what determines the scope of the inspection – and therefore the work on site:",[638,33451,33452,33462],{},[641,33453,33454],{},[644,33455,33456,33458,33460],{},[647,33457,18626],{},[647,33459,21919],{},[647,33461,9490],{},[657,33463,33464,33474,33485,33496,33507,33518,33528],{},[644,33465,33466,33468,33471],{},[662,33467,22593],{},[662,33469,33470],{},"Conformity inspection, periodic control visit and sale inspection each have their own content and report",[662,33472,33473],{},"6.4, 6.5, 8.4.2",[644,33475,33476,33479,33482],{},[662,33477,33478],{},"Domestic or non-domestic",[662,33480,33481],{},"Different report content and a different interval",[662,33483,33484],{},"6.4.6.4, 6.4.6.5, 6.5.2",[644,33486,33487,33490,33493],{},[662,33488,33489],{},"Size of the installation",[662,33491,33492],{},"A control visit report states the number of boards and final circuits",[662,33494,33495],{},"6.5.7.2 b.3",[644,33497,33498,33501,33504],{},[662,33499,33500],{},"Domestic PV installation (≤ 10 kVA)",[662,33502,33503],{},"Additional tests: disconnection when grid voltage is absent and operation of the residual current device",[662,33505,33506],{},"7.112.3",[644,33508,33509,33512,33515],{},[662,33510,33511],{},"Missing plans during a sale inspection",[662,33513,33514],{},"The inspector draws up a summary description and sketch; the absence is recorded as an infringement",[662,33516,33517],{},"8.4.2.2 d",[644,33519,33520,33523,33526],{},[662,33521,33522],{},"Modification or extension",[662,33524,33525],{},"The inspection is limited to the added or modified part",[662,33527,12719],{},[644,33529,33530,33533,33536],{},[662,33531,33532],{},"Re-inspection",[662,33534,33535],{},"The check covers the removal of the infringements found",[662,33537,33538],{},"9.1.3.2",[11,33540,33541],{},"So ask for a price for your specific inspection type and installation, and have it confirmed whether a re-inspection is charged separately. Another body's fee or one from an old report does not automatically apply to you. If the single-line diagram and situation plan are ready, the inspector does not need to draw a makeshift sketch during a sale inspection – and you avoid an infringement at the same time.",[27,33543,33545],{"id":33544},"on-the-day","On the day",[11,33547,33548],{},"Have a contact person available who knows the installation. Do not remove fixed covers in advance unless the body asks you to; safe access matters more than improvised opening. Make sure pets, stored items or locked rooms do not block access.",[11,33550,33551],{},"Write down questions, but do not change the installation during the inspection. When you receive the report, check name and address, inspection type, scope of the installation and the documents listed. Raise technical objections in writing, referring to the specific finding. If a room or part of the installation was not accessible, read in the report how that affects the conclusion and ask whether an additional visit is needed.",[27,33553,33555],{"id":33554},"after-the-report","After the report",[11,33557,33558,33561],{},[35,33559,33560],{},"Positive report:"," it confirms the assessment at the time and within the scope of the inspection. Keep it with the single-line diagram and situation plan in the installation file, which you hold in duplicate and hand over to the new owner when you sell (section 9.1.2). Record every later modification in that file.",[11,33563,33564,33567],{},[35,33565,33566],{},"Negative report:"," deal with each infringement separately. The consequences depend on the type of inspection:",[638,33569,33570,33581],{},[641,33571,33572],{},[644,33573,33574,33576,33579],{},[647,33575,22593],{},[647,33577,33578],{},"Consequence of a negative report",[647,33580,9490],{},[657,33582,33583,33593,33603],{},[644,33584,33585,33588,33591],{},[662,33586,33587],{},"Conformity inspection before use",[662,33589,33590],{},"The affected part may not be put into use until the infringements are corrected and inspected again",[662,33592,22611],{},[644,33594,33595,33597,33600],{},[662,33596,22616],{},[662,33598,33599],{},"Correct the infringements without delay; new visit by the same body within one year",[662,33601,33602],{},"9.1.3.2, 6.5.7.2 b.6 and b.7",[644,33604,33605,33608,33611],{},[662,33606,33607],{},"Sale inspection of an old installation",[662,33609,33610],{},"The buyer has the corrections inspected within 18 months of the deed of sale and chooses the body freely",[662,33612,21314],{},[11,33614,955,33615,33618,33619,94],{},[23,33616,21672],{"href":21670,"rel":33617},[4434]," explains the procedures further. For a step-by-step approach after a negative result, read ",[23,33620,33621],{"href":22444},"Electrical inspection failed – what now?",[27,33623,33625],{"id":33624},"bringing-the-installation-into-compliance-and-re-inspection","Bringing the installation into compliance and re-inspection",[11,33627,33628],{},"Bringing your electrical installation into compliance means having every infringement in the report corrected and having the correction checked by an approved body. After a control visit, the work is carried out without delay and, as long as the installation stays in service, you take measures so the infringements pose no danger to people or property (subsection 9.1.3.2). After a conformity inspection, the affected part may only be used after correction and a new inspection (subsection 9.1.3.1).",[105,33630,33631,33637,33643,33649],{},[46,33632,33633,33636],{},[35,33634,33635],{},"Read each infringement with its reference."," The report lists the infringements (subsections 6.4.6.4 b.5 and 6.5.7.2 b.5); deal with them one at a time.",[46,33638,33639,33642],{},[35,33640,33641],{},"Have the correction carried out and confirmed"," by your electrician, per infringement and with the circuit concerned.",[46,33644,33645,33648],{},[35,33646,33647],{},"Update the documents."," If the correction changes circuits, protective devices or points, update the single-line diagram and situation plan and record the change in the installation file (section 9.1.2). During a sale inspection, missing plans are an infringement in themselves (subsection 8.4.2.2 d).",[46,33650,33651,33654],{},[35,33652,33653],{},"Book the re-inspection with the right body."," After a periodic control visit, the same approved body carries out the follow-up visit before the date stated in the report (subsection 6.5.7.2 b.6). After a sale inspection, the buyer informs the body that issued the first report of their identity and the date of the deed, and has a body of their choice check that the infringements have been removed at the end of the 18-month period (subsection 8.4.2.2 a).",[11,33656,33657,33658,94],{},"Doing nothing has consequences: if infringements remain at the second visit after a periodic inspection, the approved body sends a copy of the report to the Directorate-General for Energy (subsection 6.5.7.2 b.7 d). The full approach after a negative result is in ",[23,33659,33621],{"href":22444},[27,33661,33663],{"id":33662},"record-the-inspected-scope-after-the-visit","Record the inspected scope after the visit",[11,33665,33666],{},"Note which boards, rooms, sources and operating modes were actually part of the inspection and compare that with the description in the report. A positive report for a clearly delimited part says nothing about parts added later or not visited. Keep the plan version presented at the inspection unchanged with the report, and create a new, dated version for later work. That way you can always show which state of the installation was assessed. If you later change fixed wiring, protective devices or PV, battery or charging functions, check whether a new conformity inspection is required.",[27,33668,22963],{"id":22962},[11,33670,33671,33672,33674],{},"Documentation is often the heaviest part of the preparation. ",[35,33673,3710],{}," brings floor plan, circuits and distribution board together in one project and generates your documents from it:",[43,33676,33677,33682,33687,33692,33698],{},[46,33678,33679,33681],{},[35,33680,3075],{}," from the electrical topology you entered, as a PDF",[46,33683,33684,33686],{},[35,33685,3892],{}," based on your floor plan with a Belgian symbol library, as a PDF",[46,33688,33689,33691],{},[35,33690,22977],{}," that surfaces design errors in the supported rules before the inspection",[46,33693,33694,33697],{},[35,33695,33696],{},"Installation dossier"," with cover page, document index and continuous page numbering",[46,33699,33700,33702],{},[35,33701,4411],{},": Dutch, French, German and English",[11,33704,33705,33706,94],{},"The roles are clearly split: the self-check shows you findings from the project data you entered, your electrician confirms sizing and workmanship, and the inspection with measurements is done by the approved inspection body. The list of approved bodies is published by the ",[23,33707,8805],{"href":22919,"rel":33708},[4434],[11,33710,33711],{},[23,33712,33713],{"href":17817},"Start your electrical documentation for free →",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":33715},[33716,33717,33718,33719,33722,33723,33726,33727,33728,33729,33730,33731,33732,33733,33734,33735],{"id":32895,"depth":291,"text":32896},{"id":32911,"depth":291,"text":32912},{"id":33009,"depth":291,"text":33010},{"id":33112,"depth":291,"text":33113,"children":33720},[33721],{"id":33178,"depth":599,"text":33179},{"id":33214,"depth":291,"text":33215},{"id":33246,"depth":291,"text":33247,"children":33724},[33725],{"id":33332,"depth":599,"text":33333},{"id":33359,"depth":291,"text":33360},{"id":33401,"depth":291,"text":33402},{"id":33428,"depth":291,"text":33429},{"id":33435,"depth":291,"text":33436},{"id":33445,"depth":291,"text":33446},{"id":33544,"depth":291,"text":33545},{"id":33554,"depth":291,"text":33555},{"id":33624,"depth":291,"text":33625},{"id":33662,"depth":291,"text":33663},{"id":22962,"depth":291,"text":22963},"2026-01-08","Booking an electrical inspection with an approved body: how long it stays valid, when a re-inspection is needed, what drives the cost and what the inspector checks – with AREI references.","2026-10-08",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Felectrical-inspection.en",{"title":32890,"description":33737},"Electrical Inspection: Booking, Re-inspection and Validity","blog\u002Felectrical-inspection.en",[1979,1980,7239,21231,33745,319,31114,31115,31116,317,31117,31118,1967,7237,1213,2981],"contrôle électrique","3jjfUBuQYKlBmSasXotcHPwaMnCPEl1q6sRsKP6e3R4",{"id":33748,"title":33749,"articleId":21026,"body":33750,"category":6215,"date":34558,"description":34559,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":33738,"locale":306,"meta":34560,"navigation":308,"path":34561,"publishDate":305,"readTime":34562,"refreshInterval":4532,"seo":34563,"seoTitle":305,"slug":21026,"stem":34564,"tags":34565,"__hash__":34567},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Fsingle-line-diagram.en.md","Creating a Single-Line Diagram: Step by Step under AREI\u002FRGIE",{"type":8,"value":33751,"toc":34526},[33752,33758,33765,33769,33780,33783,33787,33841,33849,33853,33856,33938,33946,33950,33954,33979,33982,33986,33989,34040,34043,34047,34057,34071,34075,34078,34103,34107,34110,34115,34119,34195,34201,34205,34209,34213,34219,34222,34226,34229,34233,34236,34240,34243,34257,34261,34264,34268,34300,34304,34307,34310,34314,34317,34320,34324,34327,34399,34412,34416,34419,34423,34426,34430,34433,34436,34440,34443,34446,34450,34453,34457,34460,34463,34465,34475,34479,34482,34499,34501],[11,33753,33754,33757],{},[35,33755,33756],{},"You create a single-line diagram in four steps: record the consumers room by room, define protective devices and circuits, check the topology with unambiguous references, and export the diagram together with the situation plan as a PDF."," AREI\u002FRGIE sets out content and referencing in Section 3.1.2; the symbols are in Table 2.23. In PlanElec, the diagram is derived directly from your project model: you add the technical data and check the result.",[11,33759,33760,33761,33764],{},"Want to see an example first? Open the ",[23,33762,33763],{"href":6512},"fictional PDF dossier",". It shows the real export structure with sample data; for your own installation, you enter the real values.",[27,33766,33768],{"id":33767},"what-is-a-single-line-diagram","What is a single-line diagram?",[11,33770,33771,33772,31828,33774,33776,33777,33779],{},"A single-line diagram (Dutch: ",[7299,33773,31114],{},[7299,33775,31116],{},", German: ",[7299,33778,31115],{},") is a simplified electrical schematic that shows the structure of your entire installation with standardised symbols. A wiring diagram draws every conductor; the single-line diagram shows each circuit as one line and labels it with the number of conductors, cross-section and protection.",[11,33781,33782],{},"For every new domestic installation and every substantial modification or extension, the person responsible for carrying out the work prepares the single-line diagram and the situation plan, called a position plan in the regulation (AREI\u002FRGIE 3.1.2.1 a). Existing installations and non-substantial changes follow their own, narrower rules. At the inspection, the approved inspection body assesses the actual dossier and the installed work.",[27,33784,33786],{"id":33785},"what-do-you-need-the-single-line-diagram-for","What do you need the single-line diagram for?",[638,33788,33789,33799],{},[641,33790,33791],{},[644,33792,33793,33796],{},[647,33794,33795],{},"Purpose",[647,33797,33798],{},"What the diagram does",[657,33800,33801,33809,33817,33825,33833],{},[644,33802,33803,33806],{},[662,33804,33805],{},"Inspection (keuring)",[662,33807,33808],{},"required document for new installations and substantial modifications or extensions (3.1.2.1 a); when conformity is established, the responsible person and the approved body sign diagram and plan",[644,33810,33811,33814],{},[662,33812,33813],{},"Safety overview",[662,33815,33816],{},"shows every protective device and its order from the supply point to the consumer",[644,33818,33819,33822],{},[662,33820,33821],{},"Maintenance and faults",[662,33823,33824],{},"any electrician finds circuits and components by letter and number",[644,33826,33827,33830],{},[662,33828,33829],{},"Later changes",[662,33831,33832],{},"the basis for planning and documenting extensions",[644,33834,33835,33838],{},[662,33836,33837],{},"Sale of a dwelling",[662,33839,33840],{},"diagram and plan belong to the installation file you hand to the buyer (9.1.2); if they are missing at the sale inspection of an old installation (before 1981), the approved body records only a short description and a rough sketch and notes their absence as an infringement (8.4.2.2 d)",[15,33842,33843],{},[11,33844,33845,33848],{},[35,33846,33847],{},"Important:"," the documents show the current state and are available on site (3.1.2.1 d). For a non-substantial change, a dated and signed short description is enough instead of a new diagram; you still update the situation plan.",[27,33850,33852],{"id":33851},"single-line-diagram-symbols-what-areirgie-table-223-covers","Single-line diagram symbols: what AREI\u002FRGIE Table 2.23 covers",[11,33854,33855],{},"Table 2.23 in Chapter 2.13 is the official, non-exhaustive symbol list for the single-line diagram and the situation plan. If a symbol is missing, you use another unambiguous sign and define it in the legend (3.1.2.1 a). The table is organised in groups:",[638,33857,33858,33867],{},[641,33859,33860],{},[644,33861,33862,33864],{},[647,33863,14271],{},[647,33865,33866],{},"Examples from Table 2.23",[657,33868,33869,33877,33885,33893,33900,33908,33915,33923,33931],{},[644,33870,33871,33874],{},[662,33872,33873],{},"A. General",[662,33875,33876],{},"direct current, alternating current, single-phase and three-phase AC",[644,33878,33879,33882],{},[662,33880,33881],{},"B. Switchgear",[662,33883,33884],{},"distribution board, junction and branch box, service connection box, earthing switch",[644,33886,33887,33890],{},[662,33888,33889],{},"C. Wiring",[662,33891,33892],{},"number of conductors and installation method (embedded, surface, in conduit, underground), e.g. three-core XVB-Cca 2.5 mm² surface-mounted",[644,33894,33895,33897],{},[662,33896,14317],{},[662,33898,33899],{},"fuse (e.g. 16 A gG), circuit breaker with release letters M, O and Δ, residual-current device (example 300 mA, type A, 40 A), earth electrode",[644,33901,33902,33905],{},[662,33903,33904],{},"E. Switches",[662,33906,33907],{},"switch, two-way and intermediate switch, series switch, dimmer, push button, time-delay switch, remote-control switch, thermostat, motion detector",[644,33909,33910,33912],{},[662,33911,14339],{},[662,33913,33914],{},"socket outlet, multiple socket, splash-proof socket, socket with earth contact, child-protected socket, data socket",[644,33916,33917,33920],{},[662,33918,33919],{},"G. Appliances",[662,33921,33922],{},"lighting point, wall light, cooker and hob, washing machine, dryer, dishwasher, water heater, motor, EV charger, kWh meter",[644,33924,33925,33928],{},[662,33926,33927],{},"H. Sources",[662,33929,33930],{},"transformer, solar cell, inverter, DC\u002FDC converter",[644,33932,33933,33935],{},[662,33934,14372],{},[662,33936,33937],{},"control unit with base symbol and control type (push button, wireless, programmed, sensor)",[11,33939,33940,33941,33943,33944,94],{},"The table has no dedicated symbol for surge protection or equipotential bonding. You draw such components with an unambiguous sign defined in the legend. The full overview is in ",[23,33942,28155],{"href":8166},"; switch types are covered in ",[23,33945,14783],{"href":7782},[27,33947,33949],{"id":33948},"drawing-a-single-line-diagram-step-by-step-with-planelec","Drawing a single-line diagram step by step with PlanElec",[385,33951,33953],{"id":33952},"step-1-record-the-installation","Step 1: Record the installation",[105,33955,33956,33959,33962],{},[46,33957,33958],{},"Open PlanElec and create a new project.",[46,33960,33961],{},"Create the rooms of your building: living room, kitchen, bedrooms, bathroom, utility room.",[46,33963,33964,33965],{},"Place the electrical points in each room:\n",[43,33966,33967,33970,33973,33976],{},[46,33968,33969],{},"socket outlets (single, multiple, splash-proof)",[46,33971,33972],{},"lighting points and their switches",[46,33974,33975],{},"fixed appliances such as oven, hob or water heater",[46,33977,33978],{},"dedicated circuits for an EV charger, heat pump or PV system",[11,33980,33981],{},"If you already have a plan as a PDF or scan, PlanElec recognises walls, rooms and supported device symbols in it as an editable proposal. You give the PlanElec Assistant instructions in your own words, for example \"Place three sockets in the kitchen\".",[385,33983,33985],{"id":33984},"step-2-define-protective-devices","Step 2: Define protective devices",[11,33987,33988],{},"PlanElec proposes circuits and protective devices as a starting point. The minimum AREI\u002FRGIE rules for domestic installations are mainly in Subsections 5.3.5.1 b (main switch) and 4.2.4.3 b (RCD protection):",[638,33990,33991,34000],{},[641,33992,33993],{},[644,33994,33995,33997],{},[647,33996,997],{},[647,33998,33999],{},"AREI\u002FRGIE rule",[657,34001,34002,34009,34017,34025,34033],{},[644,34003,34004,34006],{},[662,34005,21813],{},[662,34007,34008],{},"in the main board; breaks all line conductors and, where applicable, the neutral simultaneously; at least 40 A",[644,34010,34011,34014],{},[662,34012,34013],{},"RCD at the supply point",[662,34015,34016],{},"at least one residual-current device of no more than 300 mA (at least Type A, at least 40 A); it additionally provides the isolating function",[644,34018,34019,34022],{},[662,34020,34021],{},"Additional RCD (≤ 30 mA)",[662,34023,34024],{},"required for socket outlets (except those for fixed appliances), lighting, rooms with a bath or shower, and washing machines, dryers and dishwashers; at most eight final circuits per device",[644,34026,34027,34030],{},[662,34028,34029],{},"Circuit breaker or fuse",[662,34031,34032],{},"matched to cross-section, installation method and load of the circuit",[644,34034,34035,34037],{},[662,34036,21890],{},[662,34038,34039],{},"where your installation requires it",[11,34041,34042],{},"Check every proposal against the equipment actually installed, its technical data and the complete sizing of the circuit. You set the type, rating and coordination of the RCDs for the actual protection chain.",[385,34044,34046],{"id":34045},"step-3-check-the-topology","Step 3: Check the topology",[11,34048,222,34049,2145,34051,34053,34054,34056],{},[35,34050,281],{},[35,34052,3010],{}," turns the placed consumers into a proposal with circuits and protective devices; ",[35,34055,3019],{}," adds it to your project.",[43,34058,34059,34062,34065,34068],{},[46,34060,34061],{},"Circuits are grouped by function: lighting, sockets, dedicated circuits.",[46,34063,34064],{},"Each circuit gets a letter, each point a sequence number (e.g. C1, D1).",[46,34066,34067],{},"The hierarchy from the supply point to the last consumer is visible.",[46,34069,34070],{},"Cable type and cross-section appear on every circuit.",[385,34072,34074],{"id":34073},"step-4-derive-and-export-the-diagram","Step 4: Derive and export the diagram",[11,34076,34077],{},"PlanElec builds the single-line diagram from the circuits, protective devices, cables and consumers you entered:",[43,34079,34080,34086,34092,34098],{},[46,34081,34082,34085],{},[35,34083,34084],{},"Readable structure"," — from the board via the circuits to the consumers",[46,34087,34088,34091],{},[35,34089,34090],{},"Symbol catalogue"," — electrical symbols for the Belgian planning context",[46,34093,34094,34097],{},[35,34095,34096],{},"Automatic labelling"," — circuit references, cable types and protection ratings",[46,34099,34100,34102],{},[35,34101,936],{}," — single-line diagram and situation plan from the same saved project state",[27,34104,34106],{"id":34105},"from-the-survey-to-one-shared-reference","From the survey to one shared reference",[11,34108,34109],{},"For an electrical contractor, the diagram starts with the survey, not with drawing. For each real point, record at least the room, function, circuit and sequence number. Add conductor data and protective-device characteristics as soon as you know them. Anything still missing stays visible in the project as an open review item until you complete or confirm it before export.",[11,34111,955,34112,34114],{},[35,34113,281],{}," view connects those entries into an electrical path. You assign an existing floor-plan device to its circuit; there is no need to create a second consumer. You then read the same project data in the single-line diagram and the situation plan.",[73,34116],{":height":75,":width":76,"alt":34117,"caption":34118,"src":3243},"Installation overview of the fictional example house with supply, protective devices, circuits and consumers.","This is where you check assignments. Open data and warnings remain visible in the example project.",[638,34120,34121,34137],{},[641,34122,34123],{},[644,34124,34125,34128,34131,34134],{},[647,34126,34127],{},"On-site survey",[647,34129,34130],{},"Electrical assignment",[647,34132,34133],{},"Diagram representation",[647,34135,34136],{},"Situation-plan check",[657,34138,34139,34153,34167,34181],{},[644,34140,34141,34144,34147,34150],{},[662,34142,34143],{},"Device and room, for example a living-room socket",[662,34145,34146],{},"assign the existing floor-plan device to the right circuit",[662,34148,34149],{},"matching catalogue symbol on the circuit branch",[662,34151,34152],{},"same circuit letter and number at the point",[644,34154,34155,34158,34161,34164],{},[662,34156,34157],{},"Circuit and upstream protective device",[662,34159,34160],{},"trace the supply path back to the board",[662,34162,34163],{},"protective device, branch and consumer in order",[662,34165,34166],{},"the point stays at its real location and refers to the same circuit",[644,34168,34169,34172,34175,34178],{},[662,34170,34171],{},"Cable type, cross-section, conductor count and installation method",[662,34173,34174],{},"check the data of the affected cable section",[662,34176,34177],{},"cable information on that section",[662,34179,34180],{},"check the spatial route separately if the section changes",[644,34182,34183,34186,34189,34192],{},[662,34184,34185],{},"Revision, date and open review items",[662,34187,34188],{},"check the saved project state before export",[662,34190,34191],{},"title block, references and visible warnings",[662,34193,34194],{},"read plan and diagram as one document state",[11,34196,955,34197,34200],{},[23,34198,34199],{"href":287},"installation guide on assignment, distribution boards and diagram"," documents the full workflow with real product views. The following images show two more perspectives of the same fictional project; the labels are sample values.",[73,34202],{":height":3121,":width":76,"alt":34203,"caption":34204,"src":3124},"Situation plan of the fictional example house with spatial device references such as C1 and D1.","In the situation plan, you check the location and reference of the existing device before switching back to the diagram.",[73,34206],{":height":3121,":width":76,"alt":34207,"caption":34208,"src":3437},"Single-line diagram derived from the fictional project model with protection path, circuit branches and symbol legend.","A later working state of the same fictional project. The visible warning belongs to the example.",[27,34210,34212],{"id":34211},"example-a-single-line-diagram-as-a-pdf","Example: a single-line diagram as a PDF",[11,34214,955,34215,34218],{},[23,34216,34217],{"href":6512},"PlanElec example dossier"," contains a single-line diagram from a fictional project, together with the situation plan and the other export documents. Use it to understand document structure, circuit references and the link to the situation plan. In your own project, every value comes from the real installation.",[27,34220,34221],{"id":24714},"Common mistakes to avoid",[385,34223,34225],{"id":34224},"_1-incomplete-circuits","1. Incomplete circuits",[11,34227,34228],{},"Every consumer must be traceable back to the supply point through an unbroken chain of protective devices. Leave no \"floating\" connections.",[385,34230,34232],{"id":34231},"_2-wrong-symbols","2. Wrong symbols",[11,34234,34235],{},"Use the symbols from Table 2.23. Typical mistakes are old DIN symbols or custom notation without a legend. The PlanElec catalogue keeps the representation consistent; the author is responsible for the technical content.",[385,34237,34239],{"id":34238},"_3-missing-information","3. Missing information",[11,34241,34242],{},"Every circuit needs:",[43,34244,34245,34248,34251,34254],{},[46,34246,34247],{},"circuit letter and point numbers",[46,34249,34250],{},"cable type, number of conductors and cross-section (e.g. XVB 3G2.5) plus installation method",[46,34252,34253],{},"rating of the protective device (e.g. 16 A or 20 A); table values are upper limits, so check the conductor sizing in full",[46,34255,34256],{},"number and type of consumers",[385,34258,34260],{"id":34259},"_4-outdated-diagram","4. Outdated diagram",[11,34262,34263],{},"After every change to the installation, you update the single-line diagram or, for a non-substantial change, attach the short description. The approved body signs diagram and plan only once it establishes that the installed work conforms (3.1.2.1 a).",[27,34265,34267],{"id":34266},"tips-for-a-clean-diagram","Tips for a clean diagram",[43,34269,34270,34276,34282,34288,34294],{},[46,34271,34272,34275],{},[35,34273,34274],{},"Keep it clear"," — no unnecessary crossings, no overlapping labels",[46,34277,34278,34281],{},[35,34279,34280],{},"Be consistent"," — the same notation style throughout",[46,34283,34284,34287],{},[35,34285,34286],{},"Include every circuit"," — doorbell and garden lighting too",[46,34289,34290,34293],{},[35,34291,34292],{},"State revision and date"," — every document carries number, revision and revision date (3.1.2)",[46,34295,34296,34299],{},[35,34297,34298],{},"Fill in the required details"," — installation address and the name, capacity and, where applicable, VAT number of the responsible person",[27,34301,34303],{"id":34302},"check-the-required-information-systematically","Check the required information systematically",[11,34305,34306],{},"Subsection 3.1.2.2 a requires at least the following on a domestic single-line diagram: cable characteristics (type, cross-section, number of conductors), installation method, type and characteristics of residual-current and overcurrent devices, switches, junction and branch boxes, socket outlets, lighting points, fixed machines and appliances, and sources such as solar cell, inverter or battery. Subsection 3.1.2.1 a adds voltage and type of current, the installation address and the details of the responsible person.",[11,34308,34309],{},"A capital letter identifies the elementary circuit. Lighting points, socket outlets and control units get a number in the order they appear in the circuit, starting from the upstream overcurrent device. The situation plan uses the same letter and number. A switch carries the letter of its circuit and the number of the lighting point or appliance it controls. That shared key makes both plans readable together.",[27,34311,34313],{"id":34312},"a-practical-circuit-walk","A practical circuit walk",[11,34315,34316],{},"Start at the supply and follow each branch to the last consumer. At every transition, ask: does the device really exist, is its function clear, is the cable fully described, and does the reference match the situation plan? Check junction and branch boxes with extra care; a flat list of symbols does not represent a real branch.",[11,34318,34319],{},"With several sources, the grid, PV inverter and any other modelled supply remain readable as separate paths. For PV, PlanElec shows strings per MPPT, DC protection and recorded cable sections in a structured way; unknown or unassigned data stays visible as a gap.",[27,34321,34323],{"id":34322},"single-line-diagram-with-solar-panels-what-must-be-on-it","Single-line diagram with solar panels: what must be on it?",[11,34325,34326],{},"Solar panels appear as a source on the single-line diagram: subsection 3.1.2.2 a explicitly lists sources such as the photovoltaic panel, inverter and battery in the minimum content, and the situation plan shows where they are (subsection 3.1.2.3 a). Symbols for the photovoltaic panel and the inverter are in group H of Table 2.23; the characteristics of the sources are either stated on the diagram or kept available in the installation file (note to group H). Domestic low-voltage PV installations up to 10 kVA must also meet the additional requirements of chapter 7.112.",[638,34328,34329,34341],{},[641,34330,34331],{},[644,34332,34333,34336,34339],{},[647,34334,34335],{},"What",[647,34337,34338],{},"Where",[647,34340,9490],{},[657,34342,34343,34352,34361,34370,34380,34389],{},[644,34344,34345,34348,34350],{},[662,34346,34347],{},"Panels, inverter and any battery as a source",[662,34349,319],{},[662,34351,7301],{},[644,34353,34354,34357,34359],{},[662,34355,34356],{},"Location of panels, inverter and battery",[662,34358,317],{},[662,34360,7307],{},[644,34362,34363,34366,34368],{},[662,34364,34365],{},"User instructions, safety instructions and technical references (brand, model, power)",[662,34367,21248],{},[662,34369,31929],{},[644,34371,34372,34375,34377],{},[662,34373,34374],{},"Marking of DC conductors and live AC conductors",[662,34376,10213],{},[662,34378,34379],{},"7.112.2",[644,34381,34382,34385,34387],{},[662,34383,34384],{},"Warning signs stating \"Do not disconnect under load\" and \"Electrical installation always live\", or equivalent",[662,34386,10213],{},[662,34388,34379],{},[644,34390,34391,34394,34396],{},[662,34392,34393],{},"Number and rated power of the panels; number, type, serial number and maximum AC power of the inverter(s)",[662,34395,21736],{},[662,34397,34398],{},"7.112.4",[11,34400,34401,34402,34405,34406,34408,34409,94],{},"How to work out strings, DC protection and the inverter in detail is covered in ",[23,34403,34404],{"href":15913},"PV single-line diagrams in Belgium",". If you combine PV with a charger, see ",[23,34407,15891],{"href":16429},"; the spatial side is in ",[23,34410,34411],{"href":15981},"Drawing Solar PV on a Situation Plan",[27,34413,34415],{"id":34414},"existing-installations-and-later-changes","Existing installations and later changes",[11,34417,34418],{},"For substantial modifications or extensions of a domestic installation, you create or update the single-line diagram and situation plan. For a non-substantial change, a short description with the name, capacity and address of the responsible person, dated and signed, is enough for the diagram; you still show the change on the situation plan (3.1.2.1 a). Parts whose installation began before 1 October 1981 are marked as an \"older part\" on the diagram. Part 8 contains narrow derogations for existing parts, not a general exemption from documentation or safety.",[27,34420,34422],{"id":34421},"electrical-correctness-before-visual-polish","Electrical correctness before visual polish",[11,34424,34425],{},"Clean lines make the diagram readable; they do not prove the sizing. Cross-section and protection depend on installation method, current-carrying capacity, grouping, temperature, voltage drop, short-circuit conditions and disconnection. The same applies to RCD type, selectivity, surge protection and manufacturer requirements. Use a custom symbol only if it is unambiguous and in the legend; Table 2.23 remains the official basis.",[27,34427,34429],{"id":34428},"example-of-a-complete-circuit-record","Example of a complete circuit record",[11,34431,34432],{},"\"Kitchen\" on its own is not a label. A usable record names circuit B, the upstream protective device, the RCD assignment, cable type, number of conductors, cross-section, installation method and the numbered consumers B1 to B6. A hard-wired hob is marked as its own appliance, separate from the general sockets. An existing branch box sits at its real position in the topology.",[11,34434,34435],{},"That makes errors traceable. If B4 is missing from the situation plan, either the plan is incomplete or the diagram has one consumer too many. If cross-section or type change after a box, you describe that section separately; one standard cable for the whole branch would be wrong.",[27,34437,34439],{"id":34438},"release-check-for-every-sheet","Release check for every sheet",[11,34441,34442],{},"Read the PDF at its real output size. Check the title block, sheet number, revision, date, address, responsible person, voltage and type of current. Then check that no lines or labels are cut off, no symbols overlap and the legend explains every custom sign. Across several sheets, continuations must stay recognisable.",[11,34444,34445],{},"Trace a sample from board to consumer and back: a lighting circuit with a switch, a fixed high-load appliance and a source such as PV. Open or unassigned data stays visible. Never delete a warning just to get a cleaner page.",[27,34447,34449],{"id":34448},"who-does-what","Who does what",[11,34451,34452],{},"The person responsible for the work prepares diagram and plan, identifies themselves on them and aligns the revision with the installed state. The electrician checks sizing, protection and the real installation. The approved inspection body carries out the inspection and signs once conformity is established. PlanElec provides the project model, the documents and the self-check for this.",[27,34454,34456],{"id":34455},"archive-and-later-changes","Archive and later changes",[11,34458,34459],{},"Keep the inspected revision with situation plan, inspection report and supporting evidence in the installation file. After an extension, you do not overwrite that history: you compare the new design with the inspected state, increase the revision and document the affected circuits. That keeps clear what was already inspected, what was planned and what was actually installed.",[11,34461,34462],{},"The short description of a non-substantial change also goes into the installation file, dated and signed, and the situation plan stays current. If several small changes make the diagram hard to read, you prepare a consolidated new revision and check it in full against the real board.",[27,34464,19881],{"id":19880},[43,34466,34467,34472],{},[46,34468,34469],{},[23,34470,19889],{"href":4466,"rel":34471},[4434],[46,34473,34474],{},"Plan content: Section 3.1.2; symbols: Chapter 2.13, Table 2.23; RCD protection: Subsections 4.2.4.3 b and 5.3.5.3 a; main switch: Subsection 5.3.5.1 b",[27,34476,34478],{"id":34477},"what-planelec-handles-for-your-single-line-diagram","What PlanElec handles for your single-line diagram",[11,34480,34481],{},"PlanElec brings floor plan, electrical topology and distribution board together in one project and derives the single-line diagram and situation plan from them.",[43,34483,34484,34487,34490,34493,34496],{},[46,34485,34486],{},"No CAD software needed, everything runs in the browser",[46,34488,34489],{},"One project model instead of copying data between plan and diagram",[46,34491,34492],{},"PlanElec Assistant for instructions in your own words; every change runs through the self-check and can be undone in one step",[46,34494,34495],{},"Advisory AREI\u002FRGIE self-check: it shows you errors in the supported rules that can be decided from project data; the official inspection is done by the approved control body",[46,34497,34498],{},"PDF export of single-line diagram and situation plan",[27,34500,2933],{"id":2932},[43,34502,34503,34507,34511,34516,34521],{},[46,34504,34505],{},[23,34506,32058],{"href":8160},[46,34508,34509],{},[23,34510,28631],{"href":13313},[46,34512,34513],{},[23,34514,34515],{"href":8775},"Planning a distribution board",[46,34517,34518],{},[23,34519,34520],{"href":7202},"Preparing documents for the electrical inspection",[46,34522,34523],{},[23,34524,34525],{"href":7093},"Booking an electrical inspection, validity and re-inspection",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":34527},[34528,34529,34530,34531,34537,34538,34539,34545,34546,34547,34548,34549,34550,34551,34552,34553,34554,34555,34556,34557],{"id":33767,"depth":291,"text":33768},{"id":33785,"depth":291,"text":33786},{"id":33851,"depth":291,"text":33852},{"id":33948,"depth":291,"text":33949,"children":34532},[34533,34534,34535,34536],{"id":33952,"depth":599,"text":33953},{"id":33984,"depth":599,"text":33985},{"id":34045,"depth":599,"text":34046},{"id":34073,"depth":599,"text":34074},{"id":34105,"depth":291,"text":34106},{"id":34211,"depth":291,"text":34212},{"id":24714,"depth":291,"text":34221,"children":34540},[34541,34542,34543,34544],{"id":34224,"depth":599,"text":34225},{"id":34231,"depth":599,"text":34232},{"id":34238,"depth":599,"text":34239},{"id":34259,"depth":599,"text":34260},{"id":34266,"depth":291,"text":34267},{"id":34302,"depth":291,"text":34303},{"id":34312,"depth":291,"text":34313},{"id":34322,"depth":291,"text":34323},{"id":34414,"depth":291,"text":34415},{"id":34421,"depth":291,"text":34422},{"id":34428,"depth":291,"text":34429},{"id":34438,"depth":291,"text":34439},{"id":34448,"depth":291,"text":34449},{"id":34455,"depth":291,"text":34456},{"id":19880,"depth":291,"text":19881},{"id":34477,"depth":291,"text":34478},{"id":2932,"depth":291,"text":2933},"2026-01-05","How to create and draw a reviewable Belgian single-line diagram: required information, Table 2.23 symbols, an example, solar PV, circuit references and PDF export with PlanElec.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Fsingle-line-diagram.en","15 min",{"title":33749,"description":34559},"blog\u002Fsingle-line-diagram.en",[1979,1980,319,31114,31115,31116,28688,34566,1981,21231,33745,7237,31405,317,32094,31117,2981],"IEC 60617","TgyEPsa-jYPcpZV4KaLiY0sCDw8rnGR98oK0DSRiaLU",{"id":34569,"title":26573,"articleId":34570,"body":34571,"category":6733,"date":34956,"description":34957,"extension":303,"lastUpdated":4529,"locale":306,"meta":34958,"navigation":308,"path":34959,"publishDate":305,"readTime":14199,"refreshInterval":2436,"seo":34960,"seoTitle":305,"slug":34570,"stem":34961,"tags":34962,"__hash__":34967},"blog\u002Fblog\u002Farei-regulations-2026.en.md","arei-regulations-2026",{"type":8,"value":34572,"toc":34936},[34573,34577,34583,34595,34599,34603,34681,34685,34741,34744,34748,34751,34755,34761,34766,34770,34773,34776,34796,34799,34803,34807,34810,34818,34822,34825,34829,34832,34836,34839,34845,34848,34865,34869,34872,34875,34879,34885,34891,34897,34901,34904,34907,34910,34914,34921,34924,34928,34931],[27,34574,34576],{"id":34575},"what-has-applied-since-1-april-2026","What has applied since 1 April 2026",[11,34578,34579,34582],{},[35,34580,34581],{},"Since 1 April 2026, Book 1 V06 of the AREI\u002FRGIE applies. The main change: earthed direct-current systems are now regulated systematically – with DC versions of the TN, TT and IT systems, new conductor designations and new RCD sensitivity classes for smooth direct current."," For the classic AC domestic installation, this version brings no blanket new obligation. On 1 November 2026, version 07 follows with another narrow change: the sealing of the RCD at the origin of the installation is abolished.",[11,34584,34585,34586,34590,34591,94],{},"The Belgian AREI – RGIE in French – consists of three books; Book 1 governs low-voltage installations in homes. The new version is based on the Royal Decree of 6 October 2025, published on 29 October 2025; an erratum of 5 November 2025 only corrected the presentation, not the content. The FPS Economy describes the scope on its ",[23,34587,34589],{"href":4466,"rel":34588},[4434],"overview page for the current RGIE",", which also hosts the binding ",[23,34592,34594],{"href":24781,"rel":34593},[4434],"2026 version of Book 1",[11,34596,34597],{},[35,34598,21269],{},[27,34600,34602],{"id":34601},"the-version-06-changes-at-a-glance","The version 06 changes at a glance",[638,34604,34605,34616],{},[641,34606,34607],{},[644,34608,34609,34611,34614],{},[647,34610,5160],{},[647,34612,34613],{},"What changed",[647,34615,21768],{},[657,34617,34618,34629,34640,34649,34660,34670],{},[644,34619,34620,34623,34626],{},[662,34621,34622],{},"Systems",[662,34624,34625],{},"Earthed DC systems TN (TN-S, TN-C, TN-C-S), TT and IT alongside the AC systems",[662,34627,34628],{},"2.2.1.2, 3.2.2.2",[644,34630,34631,34634,34637],{},[662,34632,34633],{},"Conductors",[662,34635,34636],{},"New designations L+, L−, M, plus PEM and PEL as combined protective and live conductors",[662,34638,34639],{},"part 2",[644,34641,34642,34644,34647],{},[662,34643,26342],{},[662,34645,34646],{},"Separate sensitivity classes for AC or pulsating DC and for smooth DC",[662,34648,29284],{},[644,34650,34651,34654,34657],{},[662,34652,34653],{},"Protection against electric shock",[662,34655,34656],{},"Automatic disconnection for DC TN\u002FTT\u002FIT added, insulation monitoring in IT systems clarified",[662,34658,34659],{},"4.2.3.4",[644,34661,34662,34664,34667],{},[662,34663,1214],{},[662,34665,34666],{},"New requirement for mechanical and chemical resistance and corrosion protection of the earthing installation",[662,34668,34669],{},"5.4.2.3",[644,34671,34672,34675,34678],{},[662,34673,34674],{},"Transition",[662,34676,34677],{},"For installations started earlier, certain two-phase TN circuits with a small PEN and IT systems without permanent monitoring remain permitted",[662,34679,34680],{},"4.2.3.4 e, 6.5.8.2 no. 5, 8.3.2.2 no. 7",[385,34682,34684],{"id":34683},"the-new-rcd-sensitivity-classes","The new RCD sensitivity classes",[638,34686,34687,34700],{},[641,34688,34689],{},[644,34690,34691,34694,34697],{},[647,34692,34693],{},"Sensitivity",[647,34695,34696],{},"AC \u002F pulsating DC",[647,34698,34699],{},"Smooth DC",[657,34701,34702,34712,34722,34732],{},[644,34703,34704,34706,34709],{},[662,34705,3981],{},[662,34707,34708],{},"at most 10 mA",[662,34710,34711],{},"at most 20 mA",[644,34713,34714,34716,34719],{},[662,34715,3978],{},[662,34717,34718],{},"above 10 up to 30 mA",[662,34720,34721],{},"above 20 up to 80 mA",[644,34723,34724,34726,34729],{},[662,34725,3975],{},[662,34727,34728],{},"above 30 up to 1000 mA",[662,34730,34731],{},"above 80 up to 1000 mA",[644,34733,34734,34736,34739],{},[662,34735,3972],{},[662,34737,34738],{},"above 1000 mA",[662,34740,34738],{},[11,34742,34743],{},"Where Book 1 requires a \"high-sensitivity\" RCD, for example for sockets and bathrooms (4.2.4.3 b), the 30 mA limit for AC is unchanged. What is new is the separate scale for smooth DC (2.6.4).",[385,34745,34747],{"id":34746},"transitional-rule-for-installations-started-earlier","Transitional rule for installations started earlier",[11,34749,34750],{},"The transitional rules mainly concern non-domestic installations: if work on site started before the entry into force, two-phase TN circuits with a PEN cross-section below 10 mm² copper or 16 mm² aluminium may stay in service. IT systems without permanent insulation monitoring remain permitted if signalling a first fault is not required for safety reasons, no special case requires the monitoring and the basic requirement of 4.2.3.4 d.2 is met (6.5.8.2 no. 5; for older non-domestic installations 8.3.2.2 no. 7). Projects started before the cut-off date that only get their conformity inspection afterwards can apply this derogation via 4.2.3.4 e; the inspection body records it in the report. Whether the conditions are met cannot be read from a single-line diagram – your electrician clarifies that with the inspection body.",[27,34752,34754],{"id":34753},"addendum-book-1-version-07-from-1-november-2026","Addendum: Book 1 version 07 from 1 November 2026",[11,34756,34757,34758,34760],{},"The Royal Decree of 13 August 2026 (Belgian Official Gazette of 15.09.2026) removes from parts 4 and 6 of Book 1 the duty to seal the RCD at the origin of a conforming domestic installation. Book 1 thereby becomes version 07, applicable from ",[35,34759,6763],{},". A comparison of the full texts shows that this is the only substantive change compared with version 06.",[11,34762,34763,34764],{},"Details, references and the effect on inspection reports: ",[23,34765,6750],{"href":27092},[27,34767,34769],{"id":34768},"direct-current-gets-a-systematic-place","Direct current gets a systematic place",[11,34771,34772],{},"Photovoltaics, battery storage, DC distribution and devices that can feed back bring direct current into buildings that used to know only AC. Version 06 therefore adds earthed DC systems to the familiar system types (3.2.2.2). The letters TN, TT and IT still describe how live conductors, earth and exposed conductive parts relate; the protective measure now matches the DC source, the earthing and the disconnection behaviour.",[11,34774,34775],{},"Not every house needs a DC network as a result. But as soon as a DC part goes beyond typical device-internal PV wiring or forms its own earthed distribution, you do not document it like an ordinary AC circuit. Clarify at least the following with your electrician:",[43,34777,34778,34781,34784,34787,34790,34793],{},[46,34779,34780],{},"Where does the DC part of the installation start and end?",[46,34782,34783],{},"Is the system isolated from earth or deliberately earthed, and at which point?",[46,34785,34786],{},"Which live conductors are switched and isolated?",[46,34788,34789],{},"Which protective measure responds to an insulation fault?",[46,34791,34792],{},"Which disconnection conditions apply to the chosen TN, TT or IT arrangement?",[46,34794,34795],{},"Which manufacturer data limit voltage, polarity, protective device and cable routing?",[11,34797,34798],{},"The words \"battery\" or \"PV\" do not imply a particular earthing system or a universal protection solution. A qualified electrician does the design; the approved inspection body assesses the finished installation against the regulation in force and the documents presented.",[27,34800,34802],{"id":34801},"what-is-not-new-in-2026","What is not new in 2026",[385,34804,34806],{"id":34805},"ev-chargers","EV chargers",[11,34808,34809],{},"The special chapter 7.22 on charging equipment existed before 2026. It requires a dedicated circuit per connection point (7.22.3), an individual RCD of at most 30 mA per AC circuit and protection against insulation faults with a DC component – either through an RCD built for that purpose or through an RCD coordinated with a DC fault current detection device (7.22.4.1 b). The right combination follows from the charger, the protection chain and the manufacturer's data sheet.",[11,34811,34812,34813,34817],{},"Bidirectional chargers add a grid-connection question: according to the ",[23,34814,34816],{"href":16304,"rel":34815},[4434],"Synergrid overview of decentralised generation units",", they fall under C10\u002F11 and require C10\u002F26 type approval. Purely unidirectional grid-to-vehicle chargers do not fall under C10\u002F26 for that reason alone.",[385,34819,34821],{"id":34820},"bathrooms","Bathrooms",[11,34823,34824],{},"Baths and showers remain a separate chapter (7.1). Check zones, IP requirements, permitted equipment and RCD protection there in the current text. There is no general \"new zone 3 from 2026\". IPX5 is not prescribed across the board for zone 1 either: table 7.3 sets AD4 as a minimum, to be raised according to external influences, for example where cleaning with water jets is used. Survey the geometry and fixed water outlet precisely instead of copying a simplified online graphic.",[385,34826,34828],{"id":34827},"surge-protection-pv-and-digital-documents","Surge protection, PV and digital documents",[11,34830,34831],{},"Surge protection, PV protection concepts and electronic documents are not new 2026 duties. Book 1 contains requirements and principles whose application depends on the installation, risk, equipment technology and execution date. An inspection report sent electronically is not a new substantive protection rule either.",[27,34833,34835],{"id":34834},"which-installation-falls-under-which-rule","Which installation falls under which rule?",[11,34837,34838],{},"The decisive question is: when was each part built, and what work is happening now? An existing installation continues to be assessed with its permitted derogations, while a new circuit meets current requirements. A significant modification or extension gets a conformity inspection before use, covering the change and its effects on the unchanged part (6.4.7.3).",[11,34840,955,34841,34844],{},[23,34842,33221],{"href":15810,"rel":34843},[4434]," lists the triggers: before first use, for significant modifications or extensions, for certain capacity increases, when a dwelling is sold, and periodically. Small work such as an extra socket on an existing circuit can count as a non-significant extension; the classification depends on the actual scope.",[11,34846,34847],{},"For a renovation project, keep a short change list:",[105,34849,34850,34853,34856,34859,34862],{},[46,34851,34852],{},"Record the existing installation with its date or probable construction period.",[46,34854,34855],{},"Distinguish new and unchanged parts on the plan.",[46,34857,34858],{},"Check the effect of new sources, storage or chargers on the board and protection chain.",[46,34860,34861],{},"Resolve open assumptions with the electrician and inspection body.",[46,34863,34864],{},"Update the single-line diagram and situation plan after the work.",[27,34866,34868],{"id":34867},"documentation-and-plans-what-the-inspection-requires","Documentation and plans: what the inspection requires",[11,34870,34871],{},"The FPS Economy lists at least the single-line diagram, the situation plan and – if available – the EAN code for a domestic inspection. The single-line diagram shows circuits, connections and equipment with their characteristics; the situation plan locates boards, boxes, sockets, light points, switches, fixed appliances and sources. Both belong in the installation file, together with inspection reports, descriptions of non-significant changes and technical documents, for example for PV components (9.1.2).",[11,34873,34874],{},"For a DC system, the documents go beyond a device name: clear assignment of sources and cables, nominal voltages, polarity, isolation points, protective devices, earthing concept and a reference to the relevant manufacturer document. A clean plan replaces neither calculation nor measurement, but it shows whether everyone is talking about the same installation.",[27,34876,34878],{"id":34877},"practical-check-for-projects-in-2026","Practical check for projects in 2026",[11,34880,34881,34884],{},[35,34882,34883],{},"Check the applicable version."," Use the version in force on the planned execution date – version 06 until 31 October 2026, version 07 from 1 November 2026. The FPS Economy publications are authoritative.",[11,34886,34887,34890],{},[35,34888,34889],{},"Determine the scope."," Note whether the work is a new build, significant extension, small change, sale, periodic inspection or capacity increase. For chargers, check the direction of energy flow; bidirectional technology triggers grid operator requirements that a unidirectional charger does not.",[11,34892,34893,34896],{},[35,34894,34895],{},"Collect the evidence."," Keep cable and protective device selection, manufacturer instructions, measured values and plans together. For DC components, data sheets state the permitted earthing, fault current behaviour and disconnection; if that information is missing, request it from the manufacturer.",[27,34898,34900],{"id":34899},"organising-version-control-in-the-project","Organising version control in the project",[11,34902,34903],{},"Document which version applied to which decision: execution date, book version used, chapters concerned, open technical questions and responsible reviewers. If design continues after a regulatory change, compare the affected points specifically rather than discarding earlier decisions unchecked.",[11,34905,34906],{},"For manufacturer documents, the model, firmware or variant and issue date belong in the reference. Especially for inverters, batteries and chargers, variants that look alike often differ in fault current detection, earthing conditions or grid functions.",[11,34908,34909],{},"In meeting minutes, separate three levels: the binding AREI text, the electrician's technical interpretation and the rules the software self-check verifies. That keeps it traceable whether a point is legally required, chosen as good practice or not yet evaluated automatically. Before the inspection, a responsible person signs off the documented final state, confirming that plan, equipment status and installation as built are in sync.",[27,34911,34913],{"id":34912},"what-planelec-does","What PlanElec does",[11,34915,34916,34917,34920],{},"PlanElec takes you from floor plan through the electrical topology to single-line diagram, situation plan and PDF export. The AREI\u002FRGIE self-check reports findings in the supported rules that can be decided from your project data. PlanElec keeps the full regulation text at Book 1 V06, in force since ",[35,34918,34919],{},"1 April 2026","; the PlanElec assistant answers technical questions with sources from that text.",[11,34922,34923],{},"The check logic covers a documented subset of these rules. Earthed DC TN, TT and IT systems, their conductor roles and the related protection logic are not yet fully modelled; when PlanElec detects such DC parts, the check shows them as incompletely assessed instead of counting them as passed. For those points, the design, manufacturer documents and the inspection body provide the answer. PlanElec keeps the information structured and consistent; the positive verdict on the installation comes from the approved inspection body.",[27,34925,34927],{"id":34926},"in-short","In short",[11,34929,34930],{},"The real change in 2026 is the systematic inclusion of earthed DC systems in Book 1, with new conductor designations and DC sensitivity classes for RCDs; from 1 November 2026, sealing is also abolished. For existing AC domestic installations, this creates no blanket duty to rebuild. Identify the use case first, work with the current official text and document new AC and DC parts traceably – that gives electrician and inspection body a solid basis.",[11,34932,34933],{},[23,34934,34935],{"href":17817},"Structure your electrical documentation with PlanElec →",{"title":290,"searchDepth":291,"depth":291,"links":34937},[34938,34939,34943,34944,34945,34950,34951,34952,34953,34954,34955],{"id":34575,"depth":291,"text":34576},{"id":34601,"depth":291,"text":34602,"children":34940},[34941,34942],{"id":34683,"depth":599,"text":34684},{"id":34746,"depth":599,"text":34747},{"id":34753,"depth":291,"text":34754},{"id":34768,"depth":291,"text":34769},{"id":34801,"depth":291,"text":34802,"children":34946},[34947,34948,34949],{"id":34805,"depth":599,"text":34806},{"id":34820,"depth":599,"text":34821},{"id":34827,"depth":599,"text":34828},{"id":34834,"depth":291,"text":34835},{"id":34867,"depth":291,"text":34868},{"id":34877,"depth":291,"text":34878},{"id":34899,"depth":291,"text":34900},{"id":34912,"depth":291,"text":34913},{"id":34926,"depth":291,"text":34927},"2026-01-02","What changed in the Belgian AREI\u002FRGIE on 1 April 2026, what follows on 1 November 2026, and how to assess the consequences for design, documentation and inspection.",{},"\u002Fblog\u002Farei-regulations-2026.en",{"title":26573,"description":34957},"blog\u002Farei-regulations-2026.en",[1979,1980,34963,34964,34965,1981,319,317,34966,19398,2981],"regulations 2026","electrical regulations","direct current","EV charging","WX_DFN_tWfiawQ8V_sFpHEXBb5TdIUkwJskbE7UBdcY",1791477278107]